User Manual
COPYRIGHTS
© 2019 Hypertherm Inc. All rights reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement. The software may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of those agreements. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval sys-
tem, or transmitted in any form or any means electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording for any purpose other
than the purchaser’s personal use without the written permission of Hypertherm Inc.
 
Hypertherm
22 West Main Street
Lockport, NY 14094
U.S.A.
www.hyperthermCAM.com
 
TRADEMARKS
Hypertherm and ProNest are trademarks of Hypertherm Inc. and may be registered in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft,
Windows, and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe
and Adobe Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other coun-
tries. HASP is a registered trademark of Aladdin Knowledge Systems Ltd. in the United States and/or other countries.
 
Rev-1/2/2019.
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Table of Contents

1. WELCOME AND WHAT'S NEW 1

Welcome to ProNest 1
What's new in this release 2
2. INSTALLATION AND LICENSING 13
Installing ProNest 13
Default installation folders 14
Licensing 16
3. SETTINGS 17
What are ProNest settings? 17
What is a ProNest machine? 18
How are settings saved? 19
Using the settings dialog 20
Creating a new machine 22
Editing a machine's settings 23
Saving your machine settings 24
Managing machines 25
Machine settings 27
Editing process settings 28
Add or Remove Processes 29
Select a Post Processor (CFF) 30
Reuse Existing Settings 31
Drilling process settings 32
Process Parameters settings 34
Interior/Exterior Leads settings 37
Interior Leads: Slots settings 41
Cutting Techniques settings 42
Common Line Cut settings 43
Common Line Cut - Plate Edge settings 46
Common Line Cut - Array settings 47
Common Line Cut - Safety Cuts settings 50
Chaining settings 52
Bridging settings 54
AutoTab settings 56
Dynamic Align settings 60
Properties settings 62
Default Class settings 63
Importing Parts settings 64
Importing Parts (Advanced) settings 72
Bevel settings 75
Bevel (Advanced) settings 77
Standard Plate Sizes settings 80
Torches/Heads settings 82
Tooling settings 85
Turret settings 94
Work Zones settings 98
Nesting settings 101
AutoNest settings 104
Pattern Array Strategies 107
AutoNest Strategies 109

-i-
 ProNest 2019 Manual

AutoNest Strategies - Rectangular Optimization 110

AutoNest Strategies - True Shape 112
Optimization settings 115
Cut Sequence settings 118
Cut Sequence: Interior Profile settings 123
Cut Sequence Rules settings 125
Editing a cut sequence rule 128
Collision Avoidance settings 132
Edge Pierce settings 138
Slug Destroy settings 139
Fly Cut settings 142
Skeleton Cut-Up settings 144
Skeleton Cut-Up - Skeleton Grid settings 147
Skeleton Cut-Up - Cut Sequence settings 148
Crop settings 150
Interior Remnants settings 153
Costing settings 154
Export DXF settings 158
CNC Output settings 159
CNC Output - Post Processor settings 169
CNC Output - Pre-Pierces settings 170
CNC Output - Auto Height Control settings 174
CNC Output - Step and Repeat settings 176
CNC Output - Traverse settings 177
CNC Output - Output Axis settings 178
CNC Output - Subroutines settings 180
CNC Output - Microjoint / Plate Handler settings 182
CNC Output - DXF Output settings 184
Job Storage settings 185
4. SETTINGS SPREADSHEETS 186
About spreadsheets 186
Using spreadsheets 187
General spreadsheet format 188
Record matching 190
Units conversion 193
Process Parameters spreadsheets 194
User-defined Process Parameters 197
Drill Process Parameters XLS: Format 198
About Cutting Techniques spreadsheets 199
Using Cutting Techniques spreadsheets 200
Cutting Techniques XLS: Column Headers 202
Cutting Techniques XLS: Commands 209
Cutting Techniques XLS: Walkthrough 214
About Interior and Exterior Leads spreadsheets 217
Leads XLS: Format 218
Costing spreadsheets 220
AutoTab spreadsheets 222
Bevel spreadsheets 225
Collision Avoidance spreadsheets 234
Skeleton Cut-Up spreadsheets 237
Crop spreadsheets 240
Pre-Pierces spreadsheets 242

- ii -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Slug Destroy spreadsheets 244

Fly Cut spreadsheets 246
5. PREFERENCES 248
What are preferences? 248
General preferences 250
Miscellaneous preferences 254
Regional preferences 255
Settings preferences 257
Check for Updates 258
Work Orders preferences 259
Managing Users and Permissions 261
Naming preferences 263
CAD Font preferences 265
3D CAD Files preferences 266
Warnings preferences 274
Quoting preferences 275
6. JOBS 281
What is a job? 281
Creating jobs 282
Opening jobs 283
Saving jobs 285
Job templates 286
Changing your machine 287
Changing materials in your job 288
Job information 289
History data 292
Production Manager 293
7. PART LIST 296
What is the part list? 296
The Part List task pane 297
Part properties 300
What is a PNL? 303
Importing/Exporting a PNL 304
Manually generating a PNL (PNL file format) 305
Exporting a part to DXF file 310
About the Edit Part List window 311
Adding parts to the part list 313
Leads properties 315
Nesting properties 322
Utilization and costing properties 327
Preview 329
About CAD files 331
Adding CAD files to the part list 333
CAD Import properties 335
About part token files 344
Reloading parts 345
Bill of Materials (BOM) 346
Buge text marking 349
Importing raster images 350
CAD Cleanup - Simple 356
CAD Cleanup - 2D CAD 359

- iii -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

DSTV files 361

Rules and tips for using the SOLIDWORKS interface 363
Adding SOLIDWORKS parts and assemblies 367
Importing SOLIDWORKS drill holes 369
Adding Inventor parts 376
Rules and tips for using the Inventor interface 377
What is a VSP part? 382
Adding VSP parts 383
VSP Shape Reference 384
Adding a cut-out 387
Assigning cut processes to VSP parts 388
Adding a pipe part to the part list 389
Adding library parts to the part list 390
Adding assemblies to the part list 391
About quality 392
Use quality from a CAD file 393
Assigning quality to a part 394
Setting up quality colors and names 395
Viewing quality values on a nest 397
8. PLATE LIST 399
What is the plate list? 399
About the Edit Plate List window 400
Plate properties 401
Adding custom plates to the plate list 403
Custom remnants 405
Adding inventory plates to the plate list 406
Plate reservations 407
What are Safe Zones? 408
9. ADVANCED EDIT 410
About Advanced Edit 411
Understanding part geometry 412
Working with part geometry 414
Move or recalculate part home 417
Creating output for a single part 418
Modifying the cut sequence within a single part 419
Change part scale 420
Flip leads 421
Split profile 422
Split entity 423
Close open profiles 424
Saving changes to a part 425
Entity properties 426
Profile properties 429
Start point properties 431
Tab properties 435
Loop properties 438
Bevel side view 439
Adding scribe text to a part 440
Variables in scribe text 442
About loops 446
Default loop settings 447

- iv -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Working with loops 448

Editing tabs 449
About Part Cut-Up 451
Using Part Cut-Up 453
About Edit Cut Paths mode 455
Using Edit Cut Paths 457
10. NESTING 459
What is a nest? 459
Creating a new nest 460
Deleting or clearing a nest 462
Adding parts to the nest manually 464
Removing parts from the nest 469
Moving and rotating parts 470
Nested vs. selected parts 476
Multiple torches 477
Clusters 480
Using Edge Pierce 481
Using AutoTab 482
Cut direction 483
Mirror 484
Duplicate 485
Move All Leads 486
Changing how many times a nest is cut 487
Managing nests using nest tabs 488
Exporting a nest to DXF file 490
Why do parts appear in conflict? 491
Checking nests for conflicts 492
Nest properties 493
Separations task pane 499
Nest Background Image 501
How to start automatic nesting 503
Setting up AutoNest 504
Stopping AutoNest 507
11. MODES OF OPERATION 508
What are modes of operation? 508
Select mode 509
Zoom 511
Pan mode 512
Measure mode 513
Cut Simulation mode 514
Modify Leads mode 515
12. LEADS 517
How are leads applied in ProNest? 517
Locking leads on a part 518
Importing a part with pre-drawn leads 520
When are leads moved automatically by ProNest? 521
13. ARRAYING PARTS 523
About Array 523
How to array parts 526
Dragging to create an array 529

-v-
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Pattern Array 533

CLC Array 535
Chain Array 537
Stopping an array 541
14. CUT SEQUENCE 542
About Cut Sequence mode 542
Modifying the cut sequence of a nest 544
15. CROP 546
What is a crop? 546
Cropping a nest 546
16. REPORTS 548
Standard reports 548
Using reports 550
Custom reports 552
Colorized reports 554
Batches 555
Reports options 557
Using destinations 561
Printer report destinations 563
PDF report destinations 565
CSV report destinations 567
XLS report destinations 568
HTML report destinations 569
17. OUTPUT 570
Creating NC output 570
The Output dialog 571
How does NC file naming work? 574
The Output Progress dialog 577
Single part output 578
Additional machine output 579
Undo output 583
18. COSTING 584
How are costs calculated? 584
Setting up costing in ProNest 588
How is production time calculated? 591
Part area methods used in costing 593
Viewing final costs 595
What is allocated costing? 600
Allocated area 601
Allocated costing formulas 607
How are utilization figures calculated? 608
Where are utilization figures found? 614
19. QUOTING 616
About quoting 616
Setting up quoting 617
Creating a new quote 619
Discounts 621
Markups 623
Quote customers 626

- vi -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Entering your organization's information 628

Main Quote page 629
Quote properties 631
Printing, saving, and sending quotes 634
Quote status 636
Working with line items 638
Line Item properties 640
Quote reports 643
Add secondary operations to a line item 645
Remove a secondary operation from a line item 647
Secondary operations properties 648
Secondary operations library 652
20. MATERIALS 654
About materials 654
Assigning materials to parts 655
Materials editor 656
Material properties 658
Importing ProNest materials from a spreadsheet 659
About material aliases 661
Setting up material aliases 662
Importing material aliases from a spreadsheet 666
Overview of class 669
Using the class selector 671
Viewing technology in use on a nest 674
Selecting a class for plasma 678
Plasma consumables and performance applications 681
Selecting a class for laser 687
Vaporize 688
Selecting a class for Hypertherm waterjet setups 690
21. PART LIBRARY 692
About the Part Library 692
Adding parts to the Part Library 693
Assemblies 694
22. PLATE INVENTORY 695
About the Plate Inventory 695
Viewing inventory plate information 696
Adding plates to the plate inventory 698
Creating an inventory plate from a CAD file 700
Modifying inventory plates 701
Importing a CSV file into the plate inventory 702
Exporting an inventory plate to DXF file 705
About remnants and skeletons 706
Saving remnants and skeletons 707
Nesting on inventory remnants and skeletons 710
Interior remnants 715
23. PIPE 717
What is a pipe part? 717
Pipe Shape Reference 718
Using the pipe preview 719
Adding a tee 720

- vii -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Saving and opening pipe parts 721

Assigning cut processes to pipe parts 722
Pipe settings 723
Angled Pipe 727
Ellipse in Rectangle 728
Flange 729
ID OD Ellipse 730
Offset Cone 731
Offset Pipe 733
Rectangle to Round 735
Reducing Elbow 737
Segmented Elbow 739
Straight Pipe 741
Tee into Partial Pipe 742
Trapezoid to Round 743
Y Joint 746
Conical Tee 748
Cylindrical Tee 750
Rectangular Tee 752
Boot Tee 754
Rectangle to Round Tee 756
Elliptical Tee 758
24. SKELETON CUT UP 760
About Skeleton Cut-Up 760
Modifying skeleton lines 767
25. BRIDGING 769
About Bridge mode 769
Using Bridge mode 771
Positive vs negative bridging 773
About dynamic align bridging 774
Using dynamic align bridging 777
26. CHAINING 780
About chaining 780
Using chaining 781

27. COMMON LINE CUTTING (CLC) 783

About common line cutting (CLC) 783
Pair and quad common line cutting 786
Using CLC Array 789
Dynamic align CLC 790
Breaking CLC parts 793
About advanced common line cutting 795
Working CLC clusters 796
Completing a compound CLC group 801
Plate edge CLC 803
About Edit Cut Paths mode 806
Using Edit Cut Paths 808
28. COLLISION AVOIDANCE 810
About Collision Avoidance mode 810
Modifying collision avoidance paths 812
About slug destroy 815

- viii -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding or removing slug destroy 817

29. ONECLICK 819
About OneClick 819
OneClick Options 821
30. NESTING SYSTEM OPTIMIZATION 825
Nesting System Optimization 825
Using Nesting System Optimization 827
31. BEVEL CUTTING 828
About bevel cutting 828
Bevel types 829
Applying beveled edges 831
Blind beveling 834
Gradual bevel 836
About AutoBevel 837
Naming CAD layers for AutoBevel 838
32. WORK ORDERS 840
About work orders 840
Importing work orders into ProNest 841
Mapping material names for work orders 842
Work Orders database editor 843
Adding work order parts to the part list 845
Managing work order allocations 846
33. CUSTOMERS 848
Customers editor 848
Customer properties 849
34. DRILLING 850
About drilling 850
Setting up the Drill Interface 851
Drawing basic drilled parts in CAD 853
Drawing drilled parts with Blocks 855
Tapping 858
Blind drill holes 862
Countersinking 864
About the tool library 871
Tool Library: Drill Tools 872
Compound tools 875
Missing tools 880
Creating a tool library 882
The Turret task pane 884
Modifying turret layouts for a nest 886
Viewing the drill profile sequence 889
Verifying tool assignments for holes 891
Changing tool assignments for holes 893
Pre-piercing with drill tools 897
Accounting for tooling in costing 899
Tips for getting the drill sequence you want 902
35. FLY CUT 904
About fly cutting 904
Using fly cutting 907

- ix -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

36. VIEWS 909

How to use grids 909
Using grid filters 911
Color Legend 914
Color Legend Options 918
Using variables 921
Shortcuts and key tips 923
Menu and toolbar legacy reference 927
37. CONFIGURATION ARCHIVES 934
What is a configuration archive? 934
The Configuration Archives dialog 935
Creating a new archive 936
Restoring an archive 937
Sending an archive to Technical Support 938
38. USERS AND PERMISSIONS 939
User account basics 939
Managing Users and Permissions 941
User options 943
39. CONTACT US 944
Locations 944
Technical Support 946
Sales 947
INDEX 948

-x-
 ProNest 2019 Manual

1. WELCOME AND WHAT'S NEW

Welcome to ProNest
ProNest® is Hypertherm’s flagship nesting software, reflecting our commitment to software solutions that are not only powerful, but are
also easy to learn and use. ProNest nesting software can quickly be downloaded and authorized via the Internet, and the intuitive inter-
face allows even the most inexperienced user to navigate the application with ease. Operational readiness is typically reached within a
few hours - a fraction of what it would with our competitors' software.
 
ProNest has the power to easily manage the most demanding nesting and programming applications, including plasma, laser, oxyfuel, or
waterjet.
 
 l See what's new in this release of ProNest
 l Explore ProNest settings
 l Explore ProNest preferences
 l Explore the part list
 l Read about nesting
 l Read about materials
 l Learn about class and process knowledge

-1-
 ProNest 2019 Manual

What's new in this release

ProNest 2019 includes powerful new features and enhancements that improve the quality and efficiency of your output, while greatly sim-
plifying the user interface. Click the link at the top to read what's new in this release, or select another link to view enhancements from
previous versions.

Current version:
ProNest 2019 v13.0
 
Previous versions:
ProNest 2017 v12.1
ProNest 2017 v12.0
ProNest 2015 v11.1
ProNest 2015 v11.0

ProNest 2019 v13.0

Raster to vector
ProNest can import raster image files and convert them to vector part files that can be cut on your machine.
 
The following image file formats can be imported: PNG, JPG, JPEG, BMP, and GIF.
 
New settings enable you to fine-tune the image prior to import, to get the best result. Once the image has been converted to a part, it
can be nested and output. For images that will be cut more than once, you can easily save a vector version of the part in the part library
or save it as a DXF or DWG file using 2D CAD.
 
Manual Nesting: Smart Drag
Manual nesting is now much more fluid and intuitive. With existing parts on the nest, fitting in parts along the contours of other nested
parts and the plate edges is much easier.
 
When dragging a part on the nest, the part will bump up against existing parts or plate edges and then rotate to fit. You can glide the
part along edges of neighboring parts to get the best result. This makes it easy to fit parts into empty spaces on the nest, without the
need to manually rotate the part to just to right angle.
 
Benefits include:
 l Faster and easier to create tighter nests during manual nesting
 l Achieve better plate utilization, especially when nesting around the contours of larger parts
 
This feature can be quickly turned on or off in the main window.
 
Ignore leads during nesting
You can ignore only certain leads during nesting, based on whether they’re smaller than a user-defined percentage of the part sep-
aration.
 
This is useful in cases where some leads/pierces are insignificant and should not affect the spacing between parts, but others are larger
and should not be ignored, in case they cause real conflicts with neighboring parts.
 
Lead styles

-2-
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Any lead style is available and can be selected in all areas of ProNest, including the Edit Part List, the main window, and the Leads set-
tings spreadsheet. Previously, custom lead styles had to be applied manually in Advanced Edit.
 
Fly cutting
Designed for laser cutting on thin materials, fly cutting is a method of cutting the aligned edges of different interior profiles together in a
straight line. Pierces are made without slowing down or stopping the cutting head.
 
This technique provides faster cutting with fewer slowdowns required by changes of direction. Mechanical stress on the machine is
reduced as the head is not making numerous changes in cut direction (compared with cutting interiors one by one).
 
Fly cutting straight edges
ProNest supports fly cutting for grids of various shapes, including square/rectangular, triangular, hexagonal, octagonal, and mixed.
 
Fast cutting arcs
For grids of aligned circles or slots, a similar fast cutting technique is used. Unlike with straight edges, these interiors are cut one by
one, but pierces are still made without slowing down or stopping the cutting head.
 
Skeleton Cut-Up: Integrate sequence with parts
A new setting, Integrate skeleton lines with parts, allows skeleton lines and exterior part profiles to be cut together in groups. All skeleton
lines intersecting the exterior profile will be cut first, followed by the exterior profile.
 
Selecting this setting can reduce part defects due to plate movement and lessen the chance of collisions with tipped-up parts.
 
Breadcrumbs style folder navigation
Several areas in ProNest now use a more modern breadcrumb style folder explorer, making it faster and easier to browse for folders and
files.
 
Pin lead styles
When selecting leads, commonly used lead styles can now be pinned to the top of the list, for quick access.
 
Assembly information
 l If a part belongs to a ProNest assembly, the assembly name is now displayed in the Properties pane in the main window.
 l Assembly name can now be selected when color-filling parts based on a part property.
 
Safe zones
A default safe zone scheme can now be applied for an entire machine. The default safe zones are applied to all plates, prior to nesting. For
machines that have stops or clamps to hold the plate in place, you no longer have to apply a safe zone scheme each time a new nest is
created or a plate is added to the plate list.
 l You can specify a maximum material thickness to use default safe zones, which is useful for thicker plate that may not require
clamps.
 
Design2Fab Integration
Roundtrip Design2Fab integration has been added to ProNest, enabling you to leave a ProNest job, add fittings in Design2Fab and return
to the ProNest job with the patterns added to the part list, ready for nesting and NC output.
(Introduced in ProNest 2017 version 12.1.3.)
 
History database performance improvements
For ProNest 2019, history data is stored in the main production database, instead of an external History database. History views are now
schema-bound, resulting in several benefits:
 l Faster queries that run against both production and history data, particularly on databases with lots of history data.
 l Prevention of unauthorized or accidental database changes.
 l Faster installation of ProNest database.

-3-
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
SOLIDWORKS® Interface
For some sheet metal parts, ProNest automatically creates additional bend lines which are placed parallel to and on either side of a main
bend line. Previously, these bend lines were always placed on the same layer as the main bend line during import. Now, you can have
these bend lines placed on a different layer from the main bend line, in case they should be mapped to a different process or excluded
altogether.
 
Work orders: Re-using nests
For cases where the same parts are cut repeatedly, you can now process the same nest over and over using different Work Orders for the
parts in the nest. This allows nests that have good utilization and productivity to be re-used as needed.
 
Production Manager
Improvements to the Production Manager module include:
 l A new preference allows nesting on remnants before the original nest is completed
 l Production Manager editor is now available from the Data tab in ProNest or as a shortcut in the Windows Start menu.
 l Production Manager editor has a newer look and feel.
 l Production Kiosk time data is shown in the grid view.
 
Production Kiosk
The Production Kiosk (formerly called “Kiosk App”) has a number of improvements:
 l Kiosk production data, including machine, operator, start/stop time, and elapsed time, is now available in the ProNest database.
 l Multiple machines are supported.
 l Current nests in production can be temporarily placed on hold, in case a priority job needs to be cut.
 l Multiple instances of the Production Kiosk application can be run from a single PC.
 l Plate size and inventory information is displayed for available nests.
 l Redesigned user interface for better ease of use.
 
STRUMIS
Nesting System Optimization for STRUMIS now supports the "Must nest all parts" setting. When selected, all optimization results are dis-
carded unless all parts can be nested. (Originally introduced in ProNest 2017 12.1.1).

ProNest 2017 v12.1

Dynamic Align
Create a connected column or row of rectangular parts, aligned on one side. Aligned parts can be connected with a common line or
bridge. This feature requires the Chain and Bridge Cutting or Common Line Cutting module.
Parts can be quickly bumped together manually on the nest into dynamic align columns or rows. Dynamic align parts can also be created
during automatic nesting.
Common Line Cutting
Dynamic align for common line cut parts reduces programming time needed to create CLC nests. Benefits include:
 l Manually bump parts together to create finished CLC groups, without creating working CLC clusters.
 l Unlike CLC array, dissimilar parts can be combined in dynamic align CLC rows and/or columns.
 l Dynamic align CLC parts created during automatic nesting can have sub-columns of parts (rows of smaller parts common line
cut in the same column as a larger part).
Bridge Cutting
Bridge cutting with dynamic align is a special bridging technique designed to do several things:
 l Move bridged parts very close together, to maximize material utilization. The kerf typically overlaps partially into previously cut
kerf.
 l Extend a negative bridge past the aligned part edges. This reduces blemishes left by bridge tabs.

-4-
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Complete the final cut along the alignment edge to drop all parts. The negative bridge is consumed by the kerf on the final cut.
This also ensures that parts will drop as the cutting head moves away from them, reducing the chance of collisions.
Plate processor machines (such as Peddinghaus) can complete the final cut across multiple parts on the alignment edge.
 
Negative Bridge Extensions
Negative bridges applied at the corners of parts can overlap the part edge. This reduces blemishes on part edges left by bridge tabs.
 
Common Line Cut Paths
Cut rectangular parts by column
For plate processor machines (such as Peddinghaus), a new CLC cut path approach designed especially for large grids of CLC parts cuts
straight lines spanning multiple parts in continuous passes instead of part-by-part.
Sequencing of surrounded CLC parts
In CLC groups where parts are surrounded by other parts, the cut sequence now starts with the innermost parts and moves outward.
This reduces traverse distance and production time, while ensuring the correct drop order.
 
Output for Multiple Machines
You can create NC output files for one or more additional machines at the same time you create output for the current ProNest machine.
This is useful when the current real-world machine is down or unavailable but there are other machines with similar processes that can
cut the nest.
 
Data Sync
Export data
Data Sync Manager now includes export tasks, which can be configured to send nest history data from ProNest back to the ERP system
via XLS, XLSX, CSV, or XML file. Benefits include:
 l Create and configure Export tasks
 l Customize data reported using SQL query builder
 l Schedule export
 l Send nest data about work orders, inventory consumed, and remnants/skeletons created
 l Browser-based viewer shows import and export logs by date
 l View database connection on main screen of Data Sync Manager
Import XML
Work order and plate inventory import tasks can now use XML files for source data.
 
STRUMIS
Support for StruMIS v10.1 has been added. Previously-created nests can be recalled through StruMIS to be re-nested with part list
changes or be filled with additional parts.
 
Cutting Techniques: Kerf Crossing
New cutting techniques control what happens when the cutting head crosses a previously-cut kerf width during common line cutting,
bridge cutting, and skeleton cut-up. This can be used for various applications, including disabling automatic height control at kerf cross-
ings.
 
Class Selection
For Hypertherm XPR setups the Class selector now includes a cut quality indicator, showing the predicted cut quality for each choice.
 
Cut Sequence by Part
When Cut Sequence Rules are in use, a new setting allows all cut profiles on a part to be completed before the sequence moves on to the
next part. This is useful for machines with multiple cut processes.
 
SOLIDWORKS Interface: Bevel Detection
Identify beveled edges on SOLIDWORKS® parts and automatically assign ProNest beveling to them during import. Single and multi-pass
beveling is supported.

-5-
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Inventor Interface: Bevel Detection
Identify beveled edges on Inventor® parts and automatically assign ProNest beveling to them during import. Single-pass beveling is sup-
ported.
 
Drill Machine Interface
Several new enhancements are available for drill-capable machines (originally introduced in ProNest v12.0.2).
Advanced Edit
 l Change drill tool assignment. In Advanced Edit, you can change the drill tool assigned to any hole, regardless of the hole’s size.
 l Change profile to any process. Any round interior cut or scribe profile can be converted to a drill hole. Likewise, drill profiles
can be converted to the cut, scribe or punch process. Additionally, cut profiles of any shape can be converted to scribes or
punches. Scribe profiles can be converted to cut or punch profiles.
 l More tool attributes now displayed. Additional tool information is now displayed for a selected drill hole, including tool dia-
meter, pilot tool and whether it is a compound or missing tool.
Countersinking
ProNest can bring in countersinking information from a CAD drawing, assign countersinking tools from the tool library at the required
depth and include countersink instructions in output code.
Turret
A new setting is available which automatically sorts tools in the turret from smallest to largest, so that the smallest diameter tool hits
are sequenced first, followed by the next smallest tool hits, and so on.
Reorder stations in the turret
Stations can now be reordered in the turret, to control the drill sequence when there are default tools which can’t be moved to dif-
ferent stations.
Tool matching
If there are multiple tools of the same diameter, a default tool in a station will be selected before any other tool of that diameter.
 
Assembly
From the part list, you can quickly add one or more parts to an existing assembly or create a new assembly from them.
 
Jobs and Machines
Significant speed improvements have been made for starting new jobs, opening existing jobs, changing machines, and saving settings.
Loading settings spreadsheets has been optimized, making job and settings-related operations faster than in previous versions.

ProNest 2017 v12.0

 
Manual Nesting Improvements
Several new features make manually nesting parts easier and more efficient:
 l Drag Array
With drag array, you can quickly place parts in a pattern array inside of a rectangular region on the nest. You can create different
array configurations as you drag the mouse around and see the results on the nest instantly.
 
 l Anchored Parts
When manually nesting parts, dragging, double-clicking, or pressing ENTER to add a part to the nest can be time consuming if
you have many copies of the part to nest. A new setting on the Part List pane called Anchor part to cursor will affix the currently
highlighted part to the mouse cursor, enabling you to repeatedly drop and intelligently bump the part with a single click.
 
 l Automatic Bumping
A new, more intelligent automatic bumping method is now used during manual nesting. Automatic bumping is no longer limited
to a single corner of the nest with only two bump directions in sequential order (for instance, Left then Up). ProNest now tries sev-
eral bump directions in various different orders and uses the best result based on fit and material utilization.

-6-
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Automatic nesting improvements
 l Single part automatic nesting
If you have the Automatic Nesting module, double-clicking a part in the part list or pressing ENTER will place it using automatic
nesting so that it fits snugly into an existing empty area of the nest.
 
 l Better nesting of v-shaped parts
Using a new diagonal nesting approach, large v-shaped parts (with an acute angle) are now automatically nested with greater
plate utilization.
 
Color By Part Property
In the color legend, outline colors and fill colors can now be set separately from one another. Also, parts can be color-filled according to
a particular part property. Parts with different values for that property will be filled with different colors. You can also highlight every
instance of a specific part on the nest, in order to quickly locate it.
 
Colorized Reports
Several standard reports now show fill colors in part images. These reports also have a color legend/key for your reference. This is par-
ticularly useful if you are also using the Color by a Part Property feature in ProNest.
 
Native 64-bit Support
ProNest is now available as either a 32-bit or 64-bit application. The 64-bit version of ProNest software can be run on a 64-bit CPU/Oper-
ating System and take advantage of the extra accessible memory. Previously, ProNest was only available as a 32-bit application.
 
Licensing
When multiple ProNest sessions are running on a single PC, only one network license seat is now required for that PC. Previously, a sep-
arate network license seat was required for each instance of ProNest that was open on a single PC.
 
Drill Post Integration
For combination plasma or oxyfuel machines that incorporate drilling, tapping, and other spindle operations, all drilling functionality is
now fully integrated into the main ProNest interface. The new Drill Machine Interface module is designed to be seamless, intuitive, and
easy to use, so that you can efficiently tackle jobs requiring drilling and other vertical machining directly in ProNest.
 
Compatibility with advanced features
 l Bevel and True Bevel™ are compatible with all drill-enabled setups
 l True Hole® and any other CFF based performance applications are fully supported.
 
Output
Output all nests at once using the Output dialog.
 
Turret
 l Model your machine’s automatic tool changer directly in the ProNest Settings dialog.
 l Full support for station types lets you limit tools to compatible stations.
 l A new Turret pane in the main nesting window shows you available stations and tool assignments. Simply drag and drop to re-
order tools to get the layout that you want for any nest.
 
Tool Library
A completely redesigned Tool Library editor is available right in the Settings dialog. Add all available drill and other spindle tools that
can be used by your machine.
 l Data entry is now very easy and handles inch or metric tools. Fractional tool sizes (such as 29/64”) can be entered directly and
saved to the library.
 l Compound/multi-op tools are now entered on a separate tab in the tool library.

-7-
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Any tool in a compound tool can have a depth value, which can be used to drill blind (non-through) holes.
 l Any individual tool in the tool library can now have an associated pilot drill/pre-drill tool. Whenever that individual tool is
assigned during import, the pilot tool is automatically assigned along with it.
 l Tap tools can have a pilot drill (tap pre-drill), which is automatically assigned whenever the tap tool is assigned.
 l Missing Tools can now be quickly converted to individual drill tools in the tool library.
 
Importing Parts
 l Drill tools are assigned to holes when a part is imported.
 l After import, you can inspect the tool assigned to each hole in the part from Advanced Edit.
 l If multiple tools are within tolerance for a hole, now the closest size tool is assigned.
 
Nesting
 l Reorder tools that are loaded in the turret layout from the main window for any nest.
 l Immediate feedback if parts can't be nested due to tooling constraints.
 l A new setting called Allow multiple turret layouts for a nest lets you allow/disallow nests that would require turret stations to
be reloaded.
 
Sequencing
Drill sequencing settings have moved to the main Settings dialog. After editing drill sequence settings, the results are visible imme-
diately upon exiting settings.
 
Cut simulation
Verify the drill sequence immediately at the profile level using Cut Simulation mode in the main nesting window.
 
Collision Avoidance
The Collision Avoidance module is now compatible with drill-capable machines. Collision avoidance paths are now established after
drill sequencing settings are applied, resulting in a much more direct traversals.
 
Reports
A new standard Tooling Layout report shows nest properties, an image of the nest, and details the tool to station assignments required
to complete all tooling on the nest.
 
Costing
 l Drilling process settings are now available as a separate tab in the Costing settings page
 l Use Activation Cost to set a “Cost per hit” for a tool by material based on the tool’s estimated life expectancy.
 
Pre-piercing
 l User-defined pre-pierce drill tool can be assigned nest-by-nest using the Turret pane.
 l Pre-pierced lead-ins are now trimmed so that the start of lead-in begins right at the edge of the pre-pierce hole.
 
Documentation
The ProNest Help has moved from HTML Help format (CHM) to a new, easier-to-use Help system that opens locally using your default
web browser.
 
Modules and Standard Features
 l Bridge Cutting and Chain Cutting have been combined into a single optional module. If you own either module, you will now
have access to both Chain Cutting and Bridge Cutting.

ProNest 2015 v11.1

-8-
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Quoting
With the new Quoting feature you can easily create itemized quotes for any ProNest job. Using baseline material and production costs
that are calculated by ProNest, quotes can account for secondary operations, markups and discounts to provide itemized (by part) and
total prices for a job.
 l Secondary operations (such as bending, grinding, welding, painting, shipping, etc.) can be assigned to individual parts in the job.
 l Markups can be applied to material or production costs for quotes, parts, or secondary operations, helping you track estimated
net profit for a job.
 l Discount rates can be applied by customer. You can also set up quantity discounts for any item.
 l Costing methods can be set up to match your organization’s needs.
 l Customer-facing and internal quotes are available and can be branded with your organization’s logo.
 
Improved Class Selection
After selecting a material type and thickness in ProNest, the available classes can contain a lot of information about consumables and
associated cutting parameters as well as performance applications such as True Hole®.
 
Now when you click the Class box after selecting a Material, a class selector will appear, helping you sort through these choices. Using
this selector, you can:
 l Compare cut speeds/feedrates of different class choices
 l Filter choices by technology and performance applications.
 
Default Class
In the Settings dialog you can assign a default class for any material type and thickness. With a default class set, when you select a mater-
ial type and thickness in ProNest, that class will automatically be selected as well.
 
View Technology on the Nest
A Technology panel has been added to the main screen, indicating when performance applications (such as True Hole®) or other tech-
nologies (Fine Feature, HDi, Moving Pierce, etc.) are currently in use on a nest. You can also quickly identify nested parts that have been
beveled.
 
Waterjet Pierces
Support for four new pierce types for waterjet machines is now available. For many waterjet cutting applications, a moving pierce cuts
through material more quickly than a standard pierce because the machine motion clears the cut of the abrasive and material debris.
 
Available waterjet pierce types include: Dynamic, Circle, Wiggle, and Stationary.
 
Quality Colors
Designed primarily for waterjet setups, quality is much more visible throughout ProNest.
 l Color parts according to quality values
Parts on a nest, in the part list, and in Advanced Edit can be colored according to quality values. This can be helpful when visually
verifying the quality of parts. Hovering over a quality value in the Color Legend will highlight it on the nest.
 
 l Quality Colors and Aliases
Each quality number can have a color and descriptive name (such as "Coarse", "Fine", etc.) assigned to it. You can change colors
and aliases assigned to quality numbers from the main screen or in Preferences.
 
2D CAD: Color Selection
2D CAD now displays standard index color numbers 1-7 in the drop-down Color list. For waterjet applications where color numbers are
used to indicate quality, this makes it much easier to set the color numbers for objects in your drawing.
 
Material Aliases

-9-
 ProNest 2019 Manual

ProNest materials can now use an alias - an alternate name by which the material can be identified. This can be useful if outside of
ProNest, you name and organize materials differently from the format used in the Process Parameters spreadsheets.
 
With aliases set up, material information in a part file (BOM), work order, ERP/MRP import file, or PNL can be automatically identified and
matched to the right ProNest material during import. Grade mapping is also supported.
 
Interior Cut-Up
Interior cut-up helps eliminate the chance of head-to-part collisions by slicing up interior cutouts into small fragments during cutting so
that they fall through the slats of the table.
 
Interior Cut-Up is designed primarily for laser machines at material thicknesses 0.375 in. (10 mm) and lower.
 
Display Cut Paths for Collision Avoidance
Traverse paths showing full and partial raises of the cutting head can now be viewed without having to enter Collision Avoidance mode.
 
AutoCrop Improvements
AutoCrop using the “Find the best profile crop” method will produce better crop lines that conform more closely to nested parts. The new
method also handles cases where multiple crop lines are needed to produce multiple remnants from a single nest.
 
Change Materials Prior to Output
You can now access the Change Materials dialog directly from the CNC Output dialog (on the Tools button). This is useful if you need to
make quick last-minute changes to materials, particularly class, without having to un-nest all of those parts in the job.
 
Improved SOLIDWORKS® Assembly Import
When you double-click a SOLIDWORKS assembly in the Edit Part List window, a new assembly explorer view will open in the Part Sources
pane.
 
In the assembly explorer, you can:
 l Exclude certain parts when an assembly is added
 l Preview each part in the assembly
 l Change the configuration used for any part in an assembly
 
AutoDesk® Inventor®
A new preferences page lets you set options for importing Inventor parts. Set the coordinate system name, automatically detect part thick-
ness, import sheet metal parts only, and include or exclude construction geometry using these new preferences.
 
FabTrol Pro® Support
FabTrol Pro, the successor to FabTrol MRP, is now fully supported in ProNest. The FabTrol Pro Interface module enables data exchange
between ProNest and FabTrol Pro’s Plate Manager. Remnant plates can be brought into ProNest via Inquiry file for nesting. Remnants cre-
ated in ProNest, including detailed remnant geometry, can be sent back to FabTrol for future use.
 
StruM.I.S.® Integration
ProNest's StruM.I.S Interface module provides improved job management to companies using both ProNest and StruM.I.S. StruM.I.S users
can send parts and plates to ProNest for nesting, ensuring optimal material utilization. Nesting results are immediately available in
StruM.I.S via seamless integration.
 

ProNest 2015 v11.0

 
Ribbon

- 10 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

ProNest 2015 includes a new ribbon interface, which is designed to help you quickly find the ProNest commands that you need by includ-
ing bigger, more visible controls with text labels that are organized in logical groups. Benefits include:
 l Simplified access making ProNest features easier to find.
 l Mode-sensitive ribbon that shows only relevant controls.
 l Each control in the ribbon has hint text containing a short description of the item.
 l A Quick Access toolbar at the top of the main window contains commonly used items that can be accessed with a single click.
A cross reference of ProNest 2012 menus and toolbars is available to help you get familiar with the interface.
 
Nest Tabs
In the main window, each nest now has its own tab which displays nest name and material used. Using tabs, you can:
 l Easily navigate the nests in the job.
 l Reorder nests by clicking and dragging tabs to the desired location. For instance, if you want to move a nest that is currently nest
3 of 3 so that it is nest 2 of 3, simply drag the nest tab to the desired position.
 l Insert a new nest before or after any existing nest in the job.
 l Hover over the tab of a non-active nest to show a thumbnail image of that nest.
 
DXF Export for Parts and Nests
Parts and single nests can now be exported directly to DXF file, without installing a special DXF Polyline setup or changing machines.
 
XLS Settings Spreadsheets
For situations where default settings are not able to provide the required flexibility, settings spreadsheets are now available for:
 l Skeleton Cut-Up
 l Pre-Pierces
 l Crop
 l Collision Avoidance
 
Check for Conflicts
A new control enables you to check the nests in your job for conflicts. You can repeatedly click the Check for Conflicts button to cycle
through all the conflicts that are found.
 
Job Templates
Use any existing job as a template for a new job. If you commonly use old jobs as a starting point when creating a new job, this is a useful
feature that simplifies this process.
 
Recent Jobs
In the backstage view of the new ribbon interface (on the File tab), a Recent jobs page has been added. This page contains an expanded
list of recent ProNest jobs, as well as recent folder paths for job files.
 
Plate Inventory: DXF Export
Any inventory plate can be quickly exported to a DXF file. This is especially useful for remnant plates with irregular geometry that need to
be corrected in a CAD program and re-imported back into inventory.
 
Clear Nest
You can now remove all parts from a nest while leaving the blank plate behind as an empty nest. The empty nest will remain in the main
window for future nesting.
 
CAD Import: Recent Places
A new button on the CAD tab of the Edit Part List shows recent folders that CAD files were added from. This can help you quickly find fre-
quently used folders when adding parts.
 
Machine Manager

- 11 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

For users that have several ProNest machines (setups) installed, a new Machine Manager dialog provides a central place where you can:
 l View properties and associated files for installed machines
 l Edit any machine's settings
 l Change machines
 l Copy, rename, or delete machines
 
Shortcuts
Extensive keyboard shortcuts and keytips (visible by pressing the ALT key) are now available in major areas in the application.
 
AutoNest: IntelliChoice Strategy
A new method of automatic nesting is now available, designed to make advanced level nesting decisions based on the available parts in
the part list. IntelliChoice is a flexible approach that can choose between different nesting strategies, different part sets and different
regions of the nest to achieve optimal nesting results.
 
IntelliChoice can be selected as a standard nesting strategy on the AutoNest settings page or on the AutoNest Setup dialog.
 
Preferences: Reapplying Leads
Using a new preference, you can set a default for modifying leads when changing machines. This eliminates the need to make a selection
each time you change the machine for a job. Another newly added preference lets you control whether to be prompted to reapply leads
when changing the material of a part in the part list.
 
News Feed in ProNest
News related to ProNest and Hypertherm CAD/CAM software is now available directly in ProNest. A notification button on the status bar
indicates when news is available and can be clicked to open a reading pane where you can browse articles.
 
SQL 2012 Support
Microsoft SQL Server 2012 is fully supported in ProNest 2015.
 
Installation Improvements
 l SQL Express LocalDB, a simpler and improved version of SQL Express, is now the default database engine that is installed with
ProNest. LocalDB includes a minimal set of files necessary to start the SQL Server Database Engine, while still using the T-SQL lan-
guage.
 l The size of the ProNest setup.exe file has been reduced by about 33% down to about 490 MB. This makes downloading ProNest
over the web faster.
 
Size Format for Parts and Plates
You can now change how length and width dimensions for plates and parts are displayed in ProNest. Using the new Size format pref-
erence, part and plate dimensions can be shown as either "Length × Width" or "Width × Length".
 
Modules and Standard Features
 l OneClick is now a standard feature available to all ProNest users. OneClick is a powerful production module that automates vari-
ous tasks in a ProNest job, from automatic nesting to cropping to creating output and printing reports.
 l Custom Remnants is now a standard feature. With Custom Remnants, you can enter the dimensions of an irregular plate or rem-
nant and then nest on that plate.
 l Variable Multi-Head Cutting is now a standard feature. This allows the number of torches and torch spacing to be adjusted auto-
matically based on the size of the part being nested.
 l Advanced Common Line Cutting (CLC) is now included with the basic Common Line Cutting module. Common line cutting at the
most advanced level allows any combination of parts to share common lines with one another part or with the plate edge.
 l The SmartMarine 3D Interface has been removed.

- 12 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

2. INSTALLATION AND LICENSING

System requirements

Installing ProNest
Important:  l Before installing ProNest, be sure that you have logged in as the system administrator. Otherwise, ProNest cannot
install properly.

 l Do not plug the HASP hardware key ( ) into your computer until after you have installed ProNest.

To install ProNest from a download link:

 1. Download setup.exe for ProNest. The download link would be provided by Hypertherm.
 2. Close all programs.
 3. Run the executable file.
 4. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.
 
To install ProNest from a disc:
 1. Close all programs.
 2. Insert the disc labeled ProNest into your DVD drive. If Autorun is enabled on your system, the installation starts automatically and
you can skip steps 3 and 4.
 3. From the Start menu, select Run.
 4. Type D:\setup (substitute the appropriate letter of your DVD drive for D).
 5. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.
 
To view the default installation folders for ProNest files, see Default installation folders.

- 13 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Default installation folders

File Extension Description Folder

Settings spreadsheets .xls, .xlsx AutoTab XLS C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Set-

tings\AutoTab

Bevel XLS C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Set-

tings\Bevel

Costing XLS C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Set-

tings\Costing

Cutting Techniques XLS C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Set-

tings\CuttingTechniques

Lead Styles XLS C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Set-

tings\LeadStyles

Process Parameters XLS C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Set-

tings\ProcessParameters

Collision Avoidance C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Set-

XLS tings\CollisionAvoidance

Crop XLS C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Set-

tings\Crop

Pre-Pierces XLS C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Set-

tings\PrePierces

Skeleton Cut-Up XLS C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Set-

tings\SkeletonCutUp

Interior Cut-Up XLS C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Set-

tings\InteriorCutUp

Configuration archives .pn, .pnca Configuration archive C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Con-

files figuration Archives

Sample CAD files .dxf, .dgn, .igs, Sample CAD files C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Examples
.nc1 installed with ProNest
 

Macros .mli, .mtl, .mlo, Macros C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\Macros

.mti

Plate Inventory tokens .tok Remnants, skeletons, C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Inventory

certain inventory plates

- 14 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

File Extension Description Folder

Part Library tokens .tok Library parts C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Inventory

Nest images .png Nest image files C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Nest

Images

Safe zones .sfz Safe zone schemes C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019

Machine configuration .cfg ProNest machines and C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Set-

files their settings tings\Machines

CNC decoders .cif CNC decoder files C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\CIF

Post processors .cff Post processor files C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\CFF

Reports .fr3 Standard and custom C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Reports

reports (FastReport)

- 15 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Licensing
Your copy of ProNest came with a removable HASP hardware key ( ). This security key contains your license information and must
be plugged in for ProNest to work.

Important: Be sure to keep your HASP key in a safe place. If lost or stolen, a replacement fee will be required.

Local license
If you have a local ProNest license (ProNest will be used on only one PC at a time):
 l After installing ProNest, simply plug the HASP key into your computer's USB port.
ProNest can now be run on your PC, as long as the HASP key remains plugged in.

Network license
If you have purchased a network license, you will need to designate a computer as the network license server. The network license server
will use your HASP key to manage the allocation of licenses for all ProNest clients.
 
Note that the network license server is not required to have ProNest installed on it.
 
Setting up the network license server
If the network license server will have ProNest installed on it, simply install ProNest and then plug your HASP key into the USB port of
that PC. Your network license will be ready for use.
 
If the network license server will not have ProNest installed on it, you should install and run the stand-alone License Manager utility on
that PC.
 
To install License Manager:
 1. Close all programs.
 2. Insert the DVD labeled ProNest into the DVD drive of the network license server.
 3. Browse to D:\Utilities (substitute the appropriate letter of your DVD drive for D).
 4. Double-click LicenseMgrSetup.exe.
 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
Once installation is complete, plug your HASP key into the USB port of the network license server. Your network license will be ready for
use.

- 16 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

3. SETTINGS
What are ProNest settings?
ProNest settings control almost every aspect of nesting - from importing parts to nesting to generating NC output. They can be con-
figured to automatically adjust for different processes and materials. In this way, a single settings configuration can be used for a wide
range of cutting applications.
 
Settings are represented by a ProNest machine.  To learn more about ProNest machines, see "What is a ProNest machine?" on page 18
 

- 17 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

What is a ProNest machine?

ProNest's ultimate task is to generate NC output that is tailored to a specific machine controller. ProNest achieves this by using a ProNest
machine. A ProNest machine contains all the appropriate settings for generating output that is correct for a specific machine controller.  
It also contains settings that control everything from importing parts to automatic nesting to assigning a cut sequence.

Tip: Create a ProNest machine for every different machine controller you need to generate output for. This way, each ProNest
machine has settings that match its intended controller. If you ever need to output a job for a different controller, you can
simply change machines and generate your output.

To create a new machine, see "Creating a new machine" on page 22.

To edit the settings in your current machine, see "Editing a machine's settings" on page 23.
To save your machine settings, see "Saving your machine settings" on page 24.
 
A machine's settings are loaded during the following operations:
 
New Job
Creating a new job will cause ProNest to start with a fresh copy of settings. It will reload settings from the .cfg when you create a new job.
 
Open Job
Contained in every job (.nif) is a copy of settings that existed when the job was last saved. If you open a job and select Restore settings
from Job, then the settings found in the job are recreated.
 
Change Machine
Changing the current machine will cause ProNest to discard the current machine settings and then reload all settings from the machine
that is selected.
 
Restore (from the Settings dialog)
Restoring your settings will cause ProNest to reload all settings from the .cfg.

Note: Once settings have been loaded into memory, all changes are temporary. To make them permanent, you must save your set-
tings.

- 18 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

How are settings saved?

Settings are saved in several different files. Together, these files provide all the information ProNest needs to import parts, create nests,
and generate output.
 

Name File Extension Description

Most machine settings are stored in the .cfg file (machine configuration file). The name of this
file matches exactly with the name of the machine. For example, settings for a machine called
'Demo Plasma Machine' will be stored in a file called 'Demo Plasma Machine.cfg'.  
ProNest
.cfg  
Machine
Where are machine configuration files stored? (see "Default installation folders" on page 14)
 
The location of the Machine folder can be edited in Preferences on the Settings page.

The post processor (CFF) is a low-level settings file that describes a particular real-world machine
controller. Post processors are rarely modified and cannot be modified through ProNest. Most of
the post processor contains simple code for generating CNC Output. It also defines many prop-
Post Pro- erties of the controller - like the names of available processes.
.cff
cessor  
Where are post processors stored? (see "Default installation folders" on page 14)
 
The  location of the post processor folder can be edited in Preferences on the Settings page.

ProNest settings can be configured to rely on simple spreadsheets. A settings spreadsheet allows
certain settings to vary by a variety of conditions. One .xls file, for example, might define lead set-
tings for a variety of different materials and thicknesses. There are several different settings
spreadsheet types:
 
 l AutoTab
 l Bevel
 l Collision Avoidance
 l Costing
 l Crop
Settings
.xls  l Cutting Techniques
Spreadsheets
 l Lead Styles
 l Microjoint / Plate Handler
 l Process Parameters
 l Skeleton Cut-Up
 l CNC Output - Pre-Pierces
 
Where are settings spreadsheets stored? (see "Default installation folders" on page 14)
 
The location of each of the spreadsheet folders can be edited in Preferences on the Settings
page.

 
 

- 19 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using the settings dialog

To open the Settings dialog:

 l In the Quick Access toolbar, click Settings.

-or-
 1. On the File menu, click Info.
 2. Click Machine, then click Settings.
-or-
 l Click the machine in the status bar and then click Settings.

General Layout
The settings dialog is split into two main sections: the tree-view and the settings page.
 

 
There are over 40 different settings pages available through this dialog. To keep them organized, they are presented as items in the tree-
view on the left-hand side of the dialog. To view and edit the settings for a particular page, find the item in the tree-view and click it.

- 20 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using the Tree-view

Every settings page is listed in the tree-view. Some pages in the tree-view are not always visible because they are contained underneath
other pages as sub-items. You can expand the list of sub-items by double-clicking an item.
 

 
This will expand the tree-view to show all the sub-items directly underneath the item.
 

 
Double-click the item again to hide the sub-items.

The Buttons
There are five buttons at the bottom of the settings dialog:
 

Button Action when clicked

Save Saves all settings changes to the .cfg file.  Until settings are explicitly
saved, all changes are temporary.
Save As... Saves your current settings under a different name.  This will create a
new machine and make it your current machine.
Restore Restores all settings from the .cfg file.  Use this in case you have made set-
tings changes that you wish to discard.
OK Keeps your settings changes and closes the settings dialog.
Cancel Discards your settings changes and closes the settings dialog.

Note: If the Settings dialog is opened through Machines manager (Data tab > Machines), clicking OK will permanently store set-
tings changes with the .cfg file.

- 21 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Creating a new machine

In ProNest, new machines are created from existing ones.
 
To create a new machine, simply rename your current machine.
 1. From the Settings dialog, click the Save As button.
 2. In the Save As dialog, select or type your new machine's name and click OK.
 
When you are done, you will notice that you are now using your new machine.  The old machine still exists, but is no longer current.  Edit-
ing your settings will now affect this new machine only.

- 22 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Editing a machine's settings

To edit a machine's settings, open the Settings dialog:

 l In the Quick Access toolbar, click Settings.

-or-
 1. On the File menu, click Info.
 2. Click Machine then click Settings.
-or-
 l Click the machine in the status bar and then click Settings.
Once you have opened the Settings dialog, you can make any kind of settings change you want. After you are done making changes,
click OK to accept your changes and return to the main window. Click Cancel to discard your changes and return to the main window.

Note: All changes you make to a machine's settings are temporary. They only affect your current job. When settings are modified but
not saved, an asterisk (*) will appear in front of the machine's name.
 
For example: *Demo Gas Machine
 
All temporary settings changes can be lost if you open another job, change your machine, or if you click Restore in the Set-
tings dialog.  If you want to make your settings changes available to all future jobs that use your machine, click Save in the Set-
tings dialog.  This will remove the asterisk from the machine name and will update the .cfg with all of your changes.

- 23 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Saving your machine settings

Settings are saved in two different ways:
 l With the ProNest machine (.cfg)
 l With the job (.nif)

Saving with the ProNest machine

To save your temporary settings changes:

 l In the Settings dialog, click Save. This will update the current machine's .cfg with your changes.

To save your temporary settings changes as a new machine:

 1. In the Settings dialog, click Save As.
 2. Type or select a machine name in the box and click OK. This will create a new .cfg with the name you specify. If you entered the
name of a machine that already exists, a warning message will appear before it is overwritten. Your current machine will also
change to this new machine.

Saving with the job

Every time a job is saved, the current state of your settings are also saved in the job. This has no effect on the current machine's .cfg.

- 24 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Managing machines
For users that have several ProNest machines (.cfg) installed, the Machines dialog provides a central place where you can view and edit
installed machines; change the current machine; and copy, rename, or delete machines.

In this article...
Open the Machines dialog
View machine properties and associated files
Edit a machine's settings
Change the current machine
Copy a machine
Rename a machine
Delete a machine
Pin a machine in the list

Open the Machines dialog

 l On the Data tab, click Machines.

View machine properties and associated files

 l In the list on the left, click a machine to select it.

Machine properties and associated files such as settings spreadsheets will be displayed.

Edit a machine's settings

 1. In the list on the left, select a machine.

 2. Click Settings.

 3. Use the Settings dialog to make changes.
 4. Click OK to permanently store your changes in the CFG file.

Change the current machine

 1. In the list on the left, select a machine.

 2. Click Make this the current machine.

In the list of machines, the current machine is indicated by the checkmark.

Copy a machine

 1. Right-click a machine in the list on the left.

 2. Select Copy.
A duplicate machine file (.cfg) will be created in the Machines folder defined in preferences. The duplicate machine will have the same
properties and will point to the same associated files as the original.

- 25 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Rename a machine

 1. Right-click a machine in the list on the left.

 2. Select Copy.

Delete a machine

The machine file (.cfg) will be deleted. However, the machine's associated files will not be deleted.
 1. Right-click a machine in the list on the left.
 2. Select Delete.

Pin a machine to the list

Pinning a machine will keep it at the top of the list. This can be useful for quickly finding commonly-used machines when there are many
machines installed.
 l Click the pin button for a given machine.

- 26 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Machine settings
This is the main settings page. While there are only three editable settings on this page, it serves as a description of the machine's basic
configuration. It also provides a controlled means of editing this configuration.

Processes
The most important information on this page is in the Processes section at the top. In this section, you can see the name of the post pro-
cessor (CFF file) and the processes that this machine is using.
 
The post processor is the core of any ProNest machine. This file is usually tailored to match a specific real-world machine controller and
will generally be named accordingly. While most of the contents of a post processor are specific to output, there is some information that
helps to configure the settings for any ProNest machine that makes use of it.
 
One set of information in the post processor is a list of available processes. The processes that a ProNest machine can have is limited to
the list of processes described in the post processor. The machine page shows the names of all processes listed in the post processor
organized by process class (cut, scribe, and punch). Processes that are used by the ProNest machine will appear as normal text. These pro-
cesses will also appear in the Settings dialog's tree-view (the expandable/collapsible list of settings pages on the left-hand side of the set-
tings window) as sub-items of the Machine settings page. Processes that are not used will appear disabled and will have the phrase '<not
used>' next to them.

Advanced: The settings in the Processes section are not directly editable on this page. To change the post processor or to modify
which processes are used, click Add or Remove Processes.

Machine Settings
Physical location
It is often advisable to create one ProNest machine for every physical machine you have. This setting is informational only and simply
provides an indication of where the real-world machine is located.

Machine home
This setting defines the corner of the nesting area where cutting begins. Generally, this should be equivalent to the home position of your
real world machine. The Machine home will be displayed in the nesting area as a yellow target symbol.
 
Choices: Lower Left, Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Right

Note:
When Nesting home is set to "Same as Machine Home", a blue and yellow target symbol ( ) representing both the Nesting
home and Machine home will be displayed in the nesting area.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Open Settings (this page will be displayed by default)

- 27 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Editing process settings

Each process supported by the machine will have its own settings page directly under the Machine page.
 

 
In addition to the main settings page for each process, cut and scribe processes will contain one or more settings pages. Expand each pro-
cess item by double-clicking the process name. This will expand the tree-view to show the settings pages for a particular process.

Settings Tables
Use default process parameters only
Process Parameters
These two settings are repeated on the Process Parameters settings page. For a thorough description of this setting, see "Process Para-
meters settings" on page 34.
 
Use default interior leads only
Interior Leads
These two settings are for cut processes only. They are repeated on the Interior Leads settings page. For a thorough description of this set-
ting, see "Interior/Exterior Leads settings" on page 37.
 
Use default exterior leads only
Exterior Leads
These two settings are for cut processes only. They are repeated on the Exterior Leads settings page. For a thorough description of this set-
ting, see "Interior/Exterior Leads settings" on page 37.
 
Use default AutoTab settings only
AutoTab
These two settings are for cut processes only. They are repeated on the AutoTab settings page.  For a thorough description of this setting,
see "AutoTab settings" on page 56.
 
Costing
This setting is repeated on the Costing settings page.  For a through description of this setting, see "Costing settings" on page 154.
 
Cutting Techniques
This setting is for cut processes only.  It is repeated on the Cutting Techniques settings page.  For a through description of this setting, see
"Cutting Techniques settings" on page 42.
 

- 28 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Add or Remove Processes

The Add or Remove Processes wizard provides a controlled way to change the fundamental configuration of a ProNest machine.
 
To access this wizard:
On the Machine settings page, click Add or Remove Processes.

Wizard Pages
The first page of this wizard is called "Select a Post Processor (CFF)." The purpose of this page is to allow changes to the post processor
and/or to the processes that should be used by the current ProNest machine. For more information about this page, see "Select a Post
Processor (CFF)" on page 30.
 
The second page of this wizard is called "Reuse Existing Settings." The purpose of this page is to ensure that existing process settings
aren't lost simply because changes were made on the previous page: "Select a Post Processor (CFF)." For more information about this
page, see "Reuse Existing Settings" on page 31.

Navigation Buttons
Along the bottom of the Add or Remove Processes wizard are the following buttons:
 

Button Action when clicked

Back Go to the previous wizard page.
Next Go to the next wizard page.
Finished Accept your changes and exit the wizard.
Cancel Discard your changes and exit the wizard.
Help Opens help for the current wizard page.

- 29 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Select a Post Processor (CFF)

This is the first page in the Add or Remove Processes wizard. The purpose of this page is to allow changes to the post processor and/or to
the processes that should be used by the current machine.

Post Processor
The post processor is the core of any ProNest machine. This file is usually tailored to match a specific real-world machine controller and
will generally be named accordingly. While most of the contents of a post processor are specific to output, there is some information that
helps to configure the settings for any ProNest machine that makes use of it.
 
This section contains a combo box of available post processors found on your computer.
 
To change your post processor:
 l Select the post processor name in the box.
Every process supported by the selected post processor is listed in this section. As the post processor changes, the pro-
cesses listed will update.

To add a process to the machine:

 l Select the process' associated check box.
 
To remove a process from the machine:
 l Clear the process' associated check box.

Important: Adding and removing processes from a ProNest machine is considered an advanced type of change. Changes of
this nature are usually done once while setting up a machine for the first time. This is because a ProNest machine is
intended to mirror a real-world machine and the abilities of a specific real-world machine do not change often.
Adding a new process will introduce a new set of process settings that must be edited before any meaningful out-
put can be expected. Likewise, removing a process will destroy its existing settings. Exercise caution when making
any changes to the settings on this page and be sure to visit the next page in the wizard: Reuse existing settings.

Note: You must select at least one cut process or the Next and Finished buttons will become disabled.

- 30 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Reuse Existing Settings

This is the second page in the Add or Remove Processes wizard. The purpose of this page is to ensure that existing process settings aren't
lost simply because changes were made on the previous page: Select a Post Processor (CFF).

Selected Processes
All processes that have been selected on the previous wizard page will appear in a box in this section.
 
For each process, the following options are available:
 
New process
If this is chosen when Finished is clicked, then the process will be given new default settings. These default settings should then
be edited to better suit the needs of the new process.
 
Use settings from existing '<process name>' process
If this is chosen when Finished is clicked, then the process will inherit all the settings from the existing process.
 

Example:
 
Let's say that the settings for a given ProNest machine are perfect, but you need to switch the post processor to something else. Cur-
rently, the only cut process defined is called 'Laser'. On the Machine page, you click Add or Remove Processes.  Then, on the first
page of this wizard you select the new post processor.
 
At this point, the list of processes changes and you notice that the new post processor doesn't have a 'Laser' process. Instead, it has
a cut process called 'SuperLaser'. So on the first page of the wizard, you select the 'SuperLaser' process and click Finished.
 
What happens:
When you click Finished, ProNest re-configures your machine. The old 'Laser' process is removed - along with all its settings - and a
new 'SuperLaser' process is added with default settings. This may be a valid result for some cases, but let's say that your intention
was to use your old 'Laser' settings with the new 'SuperLaser' process. How would you transfer these settings?
 
Transferring settings from one process to another:
Instead of clicking Finished on the "Select a Post Processor (CFF)" page, click Next to advance to the "Reuse Existing Settings" page.
On this page you can now see what is happening. The 'SuperLaser' process is defined as a 'New process'. Also, there is a warning
below the process box telling you that the settings for the 'Laser' process will be deleted.
 
To use the old 'Laser' settings for your new 'SuperLaser' process do the following:
 1. For 'SuperLaser', click where it says 'New process' and a down arrow will appear.
 2. Click the down arrow and select Use settings from existing 'Laser' process.
 
What happens:
Now when you click Finished, ProNest copies the 'Laser' settings into your new 'SuperLaser' process before it removes the 'Laser' pro-
cess.

- 31 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Drilling process settings

If your machine supports drilling, a Drilling process settings page will be directly under the Machine page.
 

Settings Tables
This setting specifies which settings table is used for process parameters. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains
all the XLS files found in the Process Parameters folder (defined in Preferences).

 
Tip: To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

To read more about using Process Parameters spreadsheets for drilling, see Drill Process Parameters XLS: Format.

Options

Rough cut large drill holes with [cut process]

Select this setting to use the cut process to cut out smaller holes inside of larger holes that will be drilled. Cutting a rough hole is a way
of removing material from the hole prior to drilling it with a large drill bit. The machine's primary cut process (for instance, plasma or
laser) is used to make the rough cut.

Part with drill profile shown in blue. The rough cut (in black) is an interior cut profile drawn inside of the drilled hole.

Note: For rough cuts, the cut profile is only visible in ProNest from Cut Simulation mode.

Minimum hole diameter

Drill holes smaller than this diameter will not have rough cuts applied.

Leftover material width

Linear distance between the inner cut edge and the outer drilled edge.

- 32 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Complete all rough cuts prior to drilling

Sequence all rough cuts on the nest (or zone) so that they're cut before drilling any holes on the nest (or zone).
 

Example
Suppose you have a drawing with a hole that will be drilled with a 40 mm bit.
 

 
Assume the following:
 l The hole is on a CAD layer mapped to the drill process in ProNest.
 l There is a 40 mm drill tool available
 l Rough cut large drill holes is selected
 l Minimum diameter = 28 mm
 l Leftover material width = 5 mm
 
A 30 mm diameter hole will first be cut with the machine's cut process and then the remaining material would be drilled out using the
40 mm bit.
 

How do I get here in ProNest?

 l Settings > under Machine, click the Drilling process

- 33 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Process Parameters settings

Process Parameter Settings
Use default process parameters only
If this is selected, then Process Parameters will not be active, because all process parameter settings will come from the Default Settings
section. If this is cleared, then the entire Default Settings section will be inactive, because all process parameter settings will come from
the spreadsheet specified by Process Parameters.
 
Process Parameters
This setting specifies which settings table is used for process parameters. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains
all the XLS files found in the Process Parameters spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences).

Tip:
To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

To read more about using Process Parameters spreadsheets, see "Process Parameters spreadsheets" on page 194.

Default Settings
Kerf width
This defines the width of the torch. This can be useful for parts that share a common line. With a proper kerf value, ProNest can adjust a
common line so that it doesn't infringe on either part.
 
Units: Distance
Range: -10,000.0 to 10,000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.1 in.
 
Feedrate
Feedrate to use in CNC output and costing.
 
Units: Speed
Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in./min
Recommended Value: 100.0 in./min
 

Note: For Hypertherm setups, scribe feedrates specified in ProNest and included in NC code are not used by Phoenix.

Part - part separation

The minimum separation allowed between two nested parts. Nested parts that are closer together will be shown in conflict.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.5 in.
 

- 34 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Part - plate edge separation

The minimum separation allowed between a nested part and a plate edge. Nested parts that are closer to the plate edge will be shown in
conflict.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.5 in.
 

Part - pierce separation

The minimum separation allowed between a nested part and the pierce point of another nested part. Nested parts that are closer to a
pierce point will be shown in conflict.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.5 in.
 

 
The following values are calculated and appear for information purposes only:
 
Pierce - pierce separation
value = (2 * Part - pierce separation) – Part - part separation
 
Pierce - plate edge separation
value = Part - pierce separation + Part - plate separation – Part - part separation
 
How do I get here in ProNest?

- 35 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 n Settings > double-click the cut process > click Process Parameters

- 36 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Interior/Exterior Leads settings

Each cut process has one settings page for interior leads and another for exterior leads.

Interior/Exterior Leads Settings

Adjust leads to pierce in the center of holes
When selected, interior lead-ins will be adjusted so that the pierce occurs at the center of the hole (for the purposes of this setting, a hole
can be any shape). Piercing at the center of a hole is useful for plasma applications to reduce the chance that dross will spatter onto the
cut line.

A part with interior lead-ins adjusted to pierce at the center of holes

 
Rules for center piercing 
The center piercing technique is applied only for Interior Side Lead-ins with the following properties:
 l Style = Arc
 l Angle = 180° (unless an Extension is specified, in which case Angle can be any non-zero number between -360 and 360)
 
Maximum diameter: <value>x material thickness
This setting is only active when Adjust leads to pierce in the center of holes is enabled.
 
A dependent setting called Maximum diameter: <value>x material thickness lets you set the maximum hole size on which to apply this
center-piercing technique. If a hole has a diameter greater than <value> times the material thickness, it will not have its lead-in pierce
centered.
 

Example:
Let's say that Adjust leads to pierce in the center of holes is selected and the material thickness multiplier is set to 2x. This means
that all holes with a diameter to material thickness ratio of 2:1 or smaller will have center-piercing applied.
 
If there was a hole with a diameter of 0.5 in. nested on a 0.25 in. thick plate, this hole would have a diameter to material thickness
ratio of 2:1 or 2x. Because this does not exceed the maximum diameter to thickness ratio, the hole would have its lead-in adjusted to
begin at the hole's center.

 
Use default interior/exterior leads only
If this is selected, then Interior/Exterior leads will not be active, because all lead settings will come from the Default Settings section. If
this is cleared, then the entire Default Settings section will be inactive, because all lead settings will come from the spreadsheet specified
by Interior/Exterior leads.
 

- 37 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Interior/Exterior Leads
This setting specifies which settings table is used for interior/exterior. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains all
the XLS files found in the Interior/Exterior Leads spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences).

 
Tip: To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

To read more about using Leads spreadsheets, see "About Interior and Exterior Leads spreadsheets " on page 217.

Default Settings
Default lead settings can be specified for both corner and side leads. A lead is defined by its style, size, angle, and extension. Lead-outs
also have an overtravel setting. These five aspects of a lead are defined here.
 
Style
The style of a lead defines its basic shape.  
 
Choices for Lead In: (None), Arc, Linear, Spiral, Lock-9, Lock-7, Step, Diagonal Step, T-Lock
 
Choices for Lead Out: (None), Arc, Linear
 
To change a lead style:
 1. In the Style column, click the box for the lead type you want to change.
 2. Click the down arrow and select a new style from the list.
 3. Click OK.
 
Size
For the linear style, Size specifies the length of the lead. For the arc style, Size specifies the radius of the arc. For all other lead styles, Size
controls the scale of the lead.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.5 in. for a lead-in, 0.25 in. for a lead-out
 
Angle
For linear leads, the angle of a lead-in is defined with respect to the first motion after the lead. A 0° lead-in will lead straight into the first
cut. Positive lead-in angles are defined clockwise from the 0° position, so a 90° lead-in will cause a sharp left-turn into the first cut. Lead-
out angles are defined in a similar fashion with a 0° lead-out extending straight out of the last cut. Positive lead-out angles are defined
counter-clockwise from the 0° position, so a 90° lead-out will cause a sharp left-turn out of the last cut.
 
For arc leads, angle defines the distance the lead will extend around a circle. A 90° lead would extend one quarter of the way around,
whereas a 180° lead would extend half way around - forming a semicircle.
 
Units: Degrees
Range: -360.0 to 360.0°
Recommended Value: 0.0° for corner leads, 180.0° for a side lead-in, 90.0° for a side lead-out
 

Example:
 

- 38 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The following part has two sets of leads: a pair of linear corner leads (on the exterior profile) and a pair of arc side leads (on the
interior profile).

The Angle of both corner leads is set to 0°. The side lead-in has Angle of 180°, the side lead-out has an Angle of 90°.

 
Extension
The tip of the lead-in (or lead-out) will be extended by this distance.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
 

Example:
 
The following parts have different Extension values. The arrows along the part profiles indicate cut direction.
 

Figure 1 Figure 2
   
The part displayed in Figure 1 has two exterior arc-style The part displayed in Figure 2 also has two exterior arc-style leads. The
leads. The Extension for both the lead-in and lead-out is lead-in has an Extension of 1.0 in. and the lead-out has an Extension of
0.0 in. 0.0 in. Notice that the lead-in for this part is longer than the lead-in of the
part from Figure 1.

 
Overtravel
This value applies only to the lead-out. If this value is positive (overtravel), then the torch/head will travel past the start point before cut-
ting the lead-out. If this value is negative (undertravel), then the torch/head will begin cutting the lead-out before reaching the start
point.
 

- 39 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Units: Distance
Range: -100.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
 

Example:
 
The following parts have different Over/Under travel values. The arrows along the part profiles indicate cut direction.

Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5

     
The part displayed in Figure 3 has two exter- The part displayed in Figure 4 also has two The part displayed in Figure 5 has two exter-
ior, arc-style leads with an Over/Under exterior, arc-style leads with a positive Over- ior, arc-style leads with a negative Over-
travel value of 0.0 in. The start point /Under travel value of 1.0 in. The distance /Under travel value of -1.0 in. This part
(where the lead-in intersects the part pro- between the start point and end point of exhibits undertravel. The lead-out occurs
file) and end point (where the lead-out this part is 1.0 in. The portion of part profile before the torch finishes cutting the entire
intersects the part profile) are the same. that is highlighted in yellow represents the profile. As a result, the part in Figure 5 will
overtravel, which will be cut twice by the be connected to the plate by a 1.0 in. wide
torch. strip of material after it is cut.

Quality
Assigns a default quality number to leads. Assigning quality to a lead can be used to apply specific cutting parameters to that motion.
 
Choices: Inherit, 0 - 255

Inherit
Lead will have the same quality as the adjacent entity.

0 - 255
By default, all leads of that type (corner lead-in, side lead-out, etc.) will be assigned the quality number specified.
 
The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes based on the qual-
ity number.
 
How do I get here in ProNest?
 l Settings > double-click the cut process > click Interior or Exterior Leads

- 40 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Interior Leads: Slots settings

You can control the placement of leads on different types of slots (interior, closed profiles within a part that are oblong in shape). You
can also define whether or not certain types of interior profiles should be considered slots.

Slot types
ProNest recognizes the following three types of slots:
 

Rectangle   Rounded Corner Rectangle   Obround

   

 
The circular buttons along the part profile represent allowable lead locations for each slot type. A blue button ( ) indicates that a lead loc-
ation is selected, an empty button ( ) indicates that a location is not selected. By default, all allowable lead locations will be selected.

Allowable lead locations

Lead locations on slots must be assigned in sets. You can choose to place leads at the corners, center of longest sides, center of shortest
sides, and/or center of arcs, depending on the slot type.
 
To select lead locations for a slot type:
 1. Point to the button where you want to allow leads. That set of allowable lead locations will become highlighted.
 2. Click the button. The selected lead locations will appear blue ( ).
Leads will be allowed at the selected locations for that slot type.
 
To clear lead locations for a slot type:
 l Click the selected button ( ) that you want to clear. The buttons for that set of locations will become inactive ( ).
If no lead locations are selected for a slot type, it will be labeled "Not a slot." In this case, it will be considered a normal interior profile
when leads are applied.

Maximum slot width

An interior profile whose width (shorter dimension) exceeds this threshold will not be considered a slot, even if it is rectangular, obround,
or rectangular with rounded corners.
 

Note: Using slots can give you faster performance when importing parts and generating paths for collision avoidance. It also gives
you increased control over the placement of interior leads.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click the cut process > double-click Interior Leads > click Slots

- 41 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Cutting Techniques settings

Disable auto height control for slots smaller than <value> in.
Auto height control will be disabled for slots (For purposes of this setting, a slot is defined as a very narrow part of a profile that either
cuts into or extends out from the exterior profile.) that are smaller in width than the value (referred to as Slot tolerance).  
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
 
To edit the slot tolerance:
 1. Click the value (it’s a hyperlink).
 2. Type the slot tolerance in the box.
 3. Click OK.

Cutting techniques (table)

This setting specifies which settings table is used for cutting techniques. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains all
the XLS files found in the Cutting Techniques spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences).

 
Tip: To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 l Settings > double-click the cut process > click Cutting Techniques

- 42 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Common Line Cut settings

Common line cutting is a way of reducing the number of pierces and total cut length while maximizing the number of parts being cut.
ProNest handles several different methods of common line cutting:

Important: Pre-kerfing is always used for the exterior profiles of common line cut parts. Exterior part geometry is uniformly enlarged
by one half the kerf width to account for the kerf. The shared edges of CLC parts are separated by one kerf width. The kerf
value from the Process Parameters settings (whether settings table or default settings) is used. Consequently, no kerf codes
are present in the finished CLC profile.

Pair
Two parts are common line cut together.
 
Quad
A part is common line cut with itself into a 2 x 2 grid.
 
CLC Array
A part is common line cut with itself in a grid of rows and columns such that they fill a region up to the size of the plate the parts are
being nested on or a smaller, user-defined region.
 
Dynamic Align CLC
Rectangular parts are common line cut together in rows or columns, with their edges aligned on one side. An unlimited number of dis-
similar parts can be used.
 
Advanced CLC
Two or more parts are common line cut together. An unlimited number of dissimilar parts can be used. The plate edge may also be used
as one of the common lines.

Common Line Cut Settings

Minimum shared length
The minimum length of a line that must overlap a line in another part for them to be considered "in common."  At least one such line
must exist between two parts for those parts to be eligible for becoming a common line part.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 2.0 in.
Used For: All methods of common line cut
 
Torch path style
There are two torch path styles available for common line cutting.
 
Choices: Crossing, Not Crossing
Used For: All methods of common line cut
 
Crossing
Select this choice when it is possible for the machine to cut over a previously cut kerf width: such as with laser or plasma cutting.
 
Not Crossing
Select this choice when it is not possible for the machine to cut over a previously cut kerf width: such as with oxyfuel cutting.
 
Maximum area increase

- 43 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

This setting is used only when a part is automatically common line cut with itself (like when a single nested part is selected and then Com-
mon Line Cut is clicked). The value defines the percentage by which it is allowable for the region of the finished pair CLC part to be big-
ger than the region of the original part.
 
Units: Percentage
Range: 0 to 1000%
Recommended Value: 150%
Used For: Pair
 
Maximum alignment rotation
This setting is used only when a part is automatically common line cut with itself (like when a single nested part is selected and then Com-
mon Line Cut is clicked).  The value defines the maximum angle by which to rotate one part of a selected pair to line up common line cut-
table entities.  If no entities may be lined up by rotating one of the selected pair of parts by up to this angle, no pair CLC part is created.
 
Units: Degrees
Range: 0 to 360°
Recommended Value: 45°
Used For: Pair
 
Do not try with lines that have tabs
Depending on is use, this setting has a slightly different purpose.
 
Used For: Pair, Advanced CLC, Dynamic Align CLC
 
When used for Pair:
Select this check box to disallow lines with tabs from being considered for the common line. If this check box is cleared, lines with tabs
will be considered for the common line. In this case, if a tabbed line is chosen as the common line, any tabs on that line are removed.
 
When used for Advanced CLC and Dynamic Align CLC:
Select this check box to remove all tabs from the finished CLC part. If this checkbox is cleared, then tabs will be maintained on all entities
in the finished part except for the common line(s).
 
Maintain highest quality on common lines
Sometimes, two lines that are common line cut together will have different quality values. Select this check box to maintain the highest
quality value belonging to either entity. Clear this check box to maintain the lowest quality value.
 
Used For: Pair, CLC Array, Advanced CLC, Dynamic Align CLC

Tolerance (screen pixels)

End point snap distance
When creating a pair CLC part from two parts selected on the screen, if the end points of the common line in each part are closer together
than this tolerance, those end points are lined up before creating the common line part.
 
Units: Screen pixels
Range: 0 to 100
Recommended Value: 25
Used For: Pair

Note: This tolerance is in screen pixels to allow you to control its accuracy by using an appropriate zoom level on the nest. When you

- 44 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

are zoomed far out, a distance measured on your monitor will represent a larger real-world distance on your nest than if you
were zoomed in. As a result, the tolerance is also greater when you are zoomed out.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click the cut process > click Common Line Cut

- 45 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Common Line Cut - Plate Edge settings

Plate Edge Settings
Allow common lines with the plate edge
Select this check box if you wish to be able to place parts right on the plate edge and have the plate edge count as one or more sides of
the part.  Any part sides in common with the plate edge will not be cut.
 
Extension
Profiles cut in common with the plate edge can start outside (or inside) the plate. A negative extension will shorten the start of the profile
and the pierce will occur on the plate. A zero-length extension will cause the pierce to occur on the plate edge. A positive extension will
extend the start of the profile and the pierce will occur off the plate.
 
Units: Distance
Range: -100.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
 
Cut Direction
This dictates the cut direction of profiles that are in common with the plate edge and, when no extension is specified, would start right
on the plate edge.
 
Choices: Default, Cut towards the plate edge, Cut away from the plate edge
 
Default
No modification to cut direction is made.  Whatever the torch path direction is when first created is what gets used in the part.
 
Cut towards the plate edge
Any profile that starts at the plate edge will have its cut direction modified so that it will end at the plate edge.
 
Cut away from the plate edge
Any profile that ends at the plate edge will have its cut direction modified so that it will start cutting at the plate edge.

Note: In any case where a profile both starts and ends at a plate edge, no modification to torch path direction will be made.  In these
cases, the torch path direction already satisfies any of the cut direction choices.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click the cut process > double-click Common Line Cut > click Plate Edge

- 46 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Common Line Cut - Array settings

CLC Array Settings
Torch path style
There are two torch path styles available for common line cutting.
 
Choices: Crossing, Not Crossing
Used For: All methods of common line cut
 
Crossing
Select this choice when it is possible for the machine to cut over a previously cut kerf width: such as with laser, plasma, or waterjet cut-
ting.
 
Not Crossing
Select this choice when it is not possible for the machine to cut over a previously cut kerf width: such as with oxyfuel cutting.
 
This setting is repeated from the Common Line Cut page.

Note: Most automatically generated CLC arrays will use Not Crossing as their torch path style. Certain specific cases of parts (rect-
angles, triangles, trapezoids, and parallelograms) may use either style.

Insert stop codes

Select this check box to insert a stop code at the end of each part so that is may be removed before cutting continues.

Note: This setting is active only if Torch path style is set to Not Crossing.

Kerf crossing lead-outs

Select this setting to allow lead-outs to cross a previously cut kerf.

Note: This setting is active only if Torch path style is set to Not Crossing.

Lead-out percentage
If lead-outs are allowed to cross a previously cut kerf, then this setting defines the length of that lead-out. The length is defined as a per-
centage of the kerf width.
 
Units: Percentage
Range: 0 to 100%
Recommended Value: 50%

Note: This setting is active only if Kerf crossing lead-outs is selected.

Use alternate CLC array crossing torch paths

With this checkbox cleared, the CLC array will be cut one part after the other. When selected, torch paths will be applied based on the
geometry of the CLC array and not part by part.

- 47 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: This setting is active only if Torch path style is set to Crossing.

Cut rectangular parts by column

This setting applies to grids of rectangular CLC parts with vertically-aligned edges. When selected, vertical column lines are cut in single
passes across multiple parts. This setting affects the cut paths for CLC groups created using CLC array, advanced CLC, and dynamic align
CLC.
 
This approach is designed for plate processor machines (such as Peddinghaus) so that the final cut is done across multiple parts on the
alignment edge. It can also be used for other machine types, if desired.

Note:  l This setting is active only if Torch path style is set to Crossing and Use alternate CLC array crossing torch paths is
enabled.
 l When using Dynamic align CLC, select this setting to complete the final cut across multiple parts on the alignment edge.
 l This approach involves finishing CLC parts in columns, which can result in more pierces compared to other CLC cut path
methods.

Array Size Limitations

When a CLC array is created, the end result is a grid of parts with a certain number of rows and columns. Each cell in this grid is made
from one base unit. For some parts, such as rectangles, the base unit consists of one part; for parallelograms a base unit requires two
parts, and for triangles a four part base unit is created.

Tip: To preview the base unit before creating a CLC array, use interactive CLC array.

Maximum number of units

This setting limits the overall size of CLC arrays. They will not be built with more base units than this maximum.
 
Units: Base units
Range: 0 to 10000
 
Maximum rows
Defines the maximum number of rows that a single CLC array part can have.

- 48 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Range: 0 to 10000
 
Maximum columns
Defines the maximum number of columns that a single CLC array part can have.
 
Range: 0 to 10000
 
Maximum width
Defines the maximum allowable width of the finished CLC array (excluding lead-ins and lead-outs).
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.
 
Maximum height
Defines the maximum allowable height of the finished CLC array (excluding lead-ins and lead-outs).
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.
 
Full columns only
If this check box is selected, CLC arrays will be created only with completely filled columns. Often, the array could continue in a new
column except that there aren't enough parts left to complete that column. If this check box is cleared, CLC arrays will partially fill this last
column.
 
How do I get here in ProNest?
 n Settings > double-click the cut process > double-click Common Line Cut > click Array

- 49 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Common Line Cut - Safety Cuts settings

Safety cuts are added to common line cut parts to help avoid potential tip up situations as parts are cut out. They also provide a way of
piercing a user-specified distance away from a previously cut portion of the CLC part. Safety cuts may be used with all types of common
line cutting except for parts paired with the "Old Pair" method. For more information about common line cut methods, see "Common
Line Cut settings" on page 43.
 
Use safety cuts
Select this check box to allow safety cuts to be added to common line cut parts.

Important: Safety cuts will be added only during post processing so they will only be visible during cut simulation. They may not be
selected or edited.

Note: The following settings are active only if Use safety cuts is selected.

Use values from Process Parameters (*.xls)

Select this check box to retrieve the values for Length of safety cuts, Offset for process-on, and Offset for process-off from the Pro-
cess Parameters XLS file. If this check box is cleared, then these values will come from settings on this page.

Note: If a Process Parameters XLS is specified and a material match cannot be found, the values specified on this page will be used.

General tab
Length of safety cuts
Maximum length to use for safety cuts.  Safety cuts may not cross entity boundaries, so it is possible to have shorter safety cuts created.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
 
Add safety cuts at all intersections
Select this check box to add safety cuts at intersection points within the profile being processed, as well as with subsequent profiles. If
this check box is cleared, then safety cuts will be added only at intersection points with subsequent profiles.
 

Begin of Profiles tab

Add safety cuts to the beginning of profiles
Select this setting to add safety cuts at the beginning of subsequent profiles. This has the effect of moving the initial pierce point of the
subsequent profile by a length at least equal to the length of the safety cut.
 
Offset for process-on
Specifies the distance beyond the end of the safety cut at which to pierce. A negative value will cause the pierce point to be within the
safety cut. A zero value will pierce exactly at the end of the safety cut. A positive value will cause the pierce to occur beyond the end of
the safety cut.
 
Units: Distance
Range: -100.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.

- 50 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: This setting is active only if Add safety cuts to the beginning of profiles is selected.

End of Profiles tab

Add safety cuts to the end of profiles
Select this setting to add safety cuts at the end of subsequent profiles. This has the effect of moving the final torch off of the subsequent
profile by a length at least equal to the length of the safety cut.
 
Offset for process-off
When cutting a profile, the torch may advance towards an existing safety cut. This setting specifies a distance to stop cutting before the
safety cut is reached.
 
Units: Distance
Range: -100.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.

Note: This setting is active only if Add safety cuts to the end of profiles is selected

Advanced tab
Minimum profile length
When applying safety cuts it is possible to end up with very short profiles. This setting allows you to specify how long these short profiles
have to be for them to be cut. In effect, any profiles shorter than this value will be ignored.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
How do I get here in ProNest?
 n Settings > double-click the cut process > double-click Common Line Cut > click Safety Cuts

- 51 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Chaining settings
Chaining parts together allows multiple exterior profiles to be cut with a single pierce. The torch will remain on as it moves from the lead-
out of one part to the lead-in of the next part. While this reduces the number of pierces needed to cut the parts, it does result in a longer
cut length.

Chaining Settings
Part-chain separation
The minimum separation allowed between a nested part and a nested chain. Parts closer than this distance to a chain will be shown in
conflict.
 
Units: Distance
Range:0.0 to 10000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.01 in.
 
Chain overtravel
When using non-crossing leads (leads that are applied so that the cutting head doesn't intersect previously cut kerf), there is sometimes
a small gap or notch left at the start point after the part is cut, due to the cutting beam lagging behind on the leads. This gap can cause
the part not to drop out after it is cut.
 
On chained parts that use non-crossing leads, the Chain overtravel setting can be used to apply a little bit of overtravel to the leads so
that the small gap or notch is eliminated. This value is a measure of how close the kerfed leads need to be for the part to drop. A lower
value will result in a longer overtravel length, while a higher value will result in a shorter length. Note that the overtravel length will never
exceed the kerf width.
 
Units:: Percentage
Range:: 0 to 100%
Recommended Value: 50%

Example:
 
Consider the following part:

Part with non-crossing leads   A detail of the same part as it would be cut (kerf is
shown in color). Note the small gap at the start
point, which can prevent the part from dropping out.

 
Applying Chain overtravel will move the end point enough to eliminate the notch on the chained part:

- 52 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Overtravel is applied to the non-crossing leads in   The lead-out has been moved just enough to eliminate
the chain. the gap, while still not completely crossing the lead-
in.

 
Disable auto height control
Select this check box to turn off automatic height control when cutting a chain between parts.  Automatic height control will be re-
enabled before cutting the next part in the chain.

Important: The way any chain controls auto height control is governed by this setting at the time the chain is created. If this setting is
modified, existing chains are not modified to match.

Chain Array
Chain array creates a nested array of parts chained together either vertically or horizontally. This yields a uniform array of parts, not
packed together as closely as with array or pattern array, but with only one pierce per row or column (for the exterior profiles).
 
Lead-in extension
When a chained array of parts is created, each row or column will have its lead-in extended by this value.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
 
Allow cut to cross kerf
Select this check box to allow chain arrays to be generated such that the chain coming from the lead-out of one part may cross the chain
going toward the lead-in of another part. Clear this check box if the chain should not be allowed to cross itself.
 
Chain parts in reverse order
Select this check box to allow chain arrays to be built from the end of each row or column back toward the beginning.
 
Use ‘Not-Crossing’ lead-in/lead-out
Select this check box to force chain array to modify the leads such that the kerf is not crossed within the part at the start point. Other-
wise, chain array will use the part's existing leads.
 
How do I get here in ProNest?
 l Settings > double-click the cut process > click Chaining

- 53 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Bridging settings
Bridging parts together allows multiple exterior profiles to be cut with a minimal number of pierces. When bridged parts are cut, they
remain connected by thin webs of material (bridges). Cutting parts together in this way can reduce the number of pierces needed to cut
the parts, but it does result in a longer cut length.

Bridging Settings
Bridge width
Specifies the width of the bridge between adjacent parts.

A positive value will leave a thin web of material connecting the parts. A zero value means that the torch will travel over the exact same
bridge geometry twice: once going to the next part and once returning from it. A negative value will invert the sides of the bridge, effect-
ively cutting the bridge.
 
Units: Distance
Range: -5.0 to 5.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.25in.
 
See "Positive vs negative bridging" on page 773 for more information.
 
Bridge radius
Bridges can have a radius where they enter and leave each part. This radius allows for a smoother transition from the part to the bridge. A
value of 0.0 indicates that no radius should be used.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 1.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.125 in.
 
Maximum corner angle
Since bridges will "snap" to corners, this setting helps define exactly what a corner is. For the purposes of "snapping" to corners, angled
cuts greater than this value will not be considered corners.
 
Units: Degrees
Range: 0 to 360°
Recommended Value: 135°
 
Create bridge extensions
Negative bridges applied at the corners of parts will overlap the part edge. This will be used during dynamic align for bridges and when
bridges are snapped at the corners.

- 54 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Bridge width
The overlap distance will match the Bridge width value.

Kerf percentage
The overlap distance as a percentage of the kerf value.
 
Recommended value: 75%

Note:  l This setting is only active if a negative Bridge width value is specified.
 l For oxyfuel cutting, a smaller extension distance (20% - 30% of kerf) may be needed.

End point snap distance

Maximum distance from a corner (see Maximum corner angle above) that a bridge start point can be which would cause it to snap to
that corner. Allowing the bridge to snap to a corner can create smoother transitions from the part geometry to the bridge.
 
Units: Screen pixels
Range: 0 to 100
Recommended Value: 8

Note: This tolerance is in screen pixels to allow you to control its accuracy by using an appropriate zoom level on the nest. When you
are zoomed far out, a distance measured on your monitor will represent a larger real-world distance on your nest than if you
were zoomed in. As a result, the tolerance is also greater when you are zoomed out.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 l Settings > double-click the cut process > click Bridging

- 55 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

AutoTab settings
Note: The settings on this page are used for both AutoTab and manually-applied tabs in Advanced Edit.

AutoTab Settings
Use default AutoTab settings only
If this is selected, then AutoTab will not be active, because all process parameter settings will come from the Default AutoTab Settings
section.  If this is cleared, then the entire Default AutoTab Settings section will be inactive, because all process parameter settings will
come from the spreadsheet specified by AutoTab.
 
AutoTab
This setting specifies which settings table is used for AutoTab. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS
files found in the AutoTab spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences).

Tip:
To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

To read more about using AutoTab spreadsheets, see "AutoTab spreadsheets" on page 222.
 
Snap tolerance
If the location chosen as the start point of the tab is within this distance from the start point of the chosen entity, the tab start point will
be shifted to the beginning of the entity. Similarly, if the tab would end within this distance from the end of the entity, the tab will be shif-
ted so that its end point coincides with the entity end point.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 5.0 in.
Recommended Value: 1.0 in.

Note: Giving this setting a non-zero value will help prevent tiny motions from being created. This can be beneficial on some machines
where tiny motions can be problematic.

Apply only to straight lines

Select this setting to restrict AutoTab placement to linear motions only (no arcs).

Note: This setting is overridden if the default AutoTab strategy is set to Center of Line (see below).

Default AutoTab Settings

Tab length
Length of each tab that will be added during AutoTab. This length represents the distance along the original part geometry that will
remain uncut for each tab.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.5 in.

- 56 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Minimum spacing
Defines the minimum amount of profile perimeter that should be cut between tabs. No two tabs will be placed closer than this value
along any profile perimeter. Tabs will also not be placed closer than this distance to the start or end point of the profile (the exception to
this is the At Corners strategy).
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.1 to 10000.0 in.
 
Strategy
Determines which AutoTab strategy will be employed.
 
Choices: (None), Center of Line, Number of Tabs, At Intervals, At Corners

(None)
No tabs will be added during AutoTab.

Center of Line
AutoTab will attempt to place tabs only at the center point of lines greater than a specified length.
 
Do not consider lines smaller than <value> in.
During AutoTab, lines shorter than distance will be ignored.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 5.0 in.

To edit the Minimum line size value:

 1. Click the value (it’s a hyperlink).
 2. Specify the Minimum line size and click OK.
 

Number of Tabs
AutoTab will attempt to add a user specified number of tabs to each profile. If possible, ProNest will add undertravel
(equal to the tab length) to the lead-out on the profile, forming a "tab" at the start point. This "tab" lead counts towards
the Number per profile set below.
 
Number per profile
Maximum number of tabs to add to each profile during AutoTab. Due to profile perimeter length and other factors, the
number of tabs added may be smaller than the amount specified with this setting.

- 57 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Range: 0 to 100
 

Tip: If you want only one single tab on a profile, set Strategy to Number of Tabs, and then set Number per profile to
1. This will add undertravel to the lead-out on the profile, which will be locked so that it isn't lost during autonest-
ing, collision avoidance, etc.

If you want to apply this by profile type (for instance on exterior profiles only), this can be done using the
AutoTab XLS.

At Intervals
AutoTab will attempt to add tabs at a user specified interval around the perimeter of each profile. If possible, ProNest will
add undertravel to the lead-out on the profile, forming a "tab" at the start point.
 
Distance between tabs
Minimum distance between consecutive tabs. This also represents the minimum distance from the start point to the first
tab.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.1 to 10000.0 in.

Important: This value should never be shorter than the Minimum spacing.

At Corners
AutoTab will attempt to place tabs to either side of each corner in each profile.
 
Distance from corner
Minimum distance from each corner that a tab will start or end, depending on which side of a corner it is being added to.
A  zero-value will add tabs that start or end at the corner.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.
 

Maximum corner angle

When placing tabs at corners, it is important to define exactly what a "corner" is. Cut angles that are greater than this
value will not be considered a corner for the purposes of placing tabs.
 
Units: Degrees

- 58 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Range: 0 to 180°
Recommended Value:90°
 

Tab location
This setting describes where tabs will be placed relative to each corner.
 
Choices: Shortest side of corner, Longest side of corner, Both sides of corner
 
Shortest side of corner
A tab will be added to the shorter of the two entities that form each corner.
 
Longest side of corner
A tab will be added to the longer of the two entities that form each corner.
 
Both sides of corner
A tab will be added to both entities that form each corner.
 

Immediately after start point

Select this check box to add a tab immediately after the start point of each profile. Otherwise, tabs will be added only at
true corners.
 
Immediately before end point
Select this check box to add a tab immediately before the end point of each profile. Otherwise, tabs will be added only at
true corners.
 

How do I get here in ProNest?

 l Settings > double-click the cut process > click AutoTab

- 59 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dynamic Align settings

These settings control dynamic alignment during manual and automatic nesting of rectangular parts.
Alignment style
This setting controls what happens when you click CTRL + SHIFT + arrow key to bump and align parts together. It also determines what
will happen when dynamic align groups are created during automatic nesting.
 
Choices: Common line, Bridge

Bridge Settings
Alignment edge
Select a side to align part edges in a dynamic align bridge. This is the default alignment edge used for manual nesting. It is also the
alignment edge that will be used for automatic nesting.
 
Choices: Left, Top, Right, Bottom

Part separation
Distance between parts in a dynamic align bridge.

Distance
Dynamic align bridge parts will be separated by this fixed distance.

Kerf multiplier
Dynamic align bridge parts will be separated by a percentage of the kerf width. This is expressed as a factor of the kerf width. A value
of 1.5 would be one and a half times the kerf, 2 would be double the kerf, and so on.
 
Recommended value: 1.5

Note: For oxyfuel cutting, a greater separation distance (2x - 2.75x kerf) may be needed.

Alignment edge coverage

Threshold for when a part should be eligible for dynamic align bridging. If the side of the part along the alignment edge is less than
this percentage of the part's total length or width, it won't be dynamically aligned.
 
Units: Percentage
Recommended value: 50%

Example
 
With Alignment edge set to Left and Alignment edge coverage set to 50%, consider the following part:
 

- 60 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
The portion of the part's left side that lines up with the alignment edge (b) is less than 50% of the part's total height (a). This part
will not be eligible for dynamic align bridging.
 
Shift leads to end of cut
Move the leads on dynamic align bridge parts so that the lead-out is done immediately after the final cut on the alignment edge.
 
Only combine parts of the same width during AutoNest
Dynamic align bridge rows or columns will consist of parts of the same width. There will be no sub-columns or columns with different
part widths.

Tolerance
If you want to combine parts that aren't exactly the same width, you can enter a tolerance value.

Common Line Cut Settings

Alignment edge
Select a side to align part edges in a dynamic align CLC group. This is the default alignment edge used for manual nesting. It is also the
alignment edge that will be used for automatic nesting.
 
Choices: Left, Top, Right, Bottom

How do I get here in ProNest?

 l Settings > double-click the cut process > click Dynamic Align

- 61 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Properties settings
Properties for the current machine can be viewed and edited on the Properties settings page ( ). Properties appear for informational
purposes only and show machine characteristics such as controller model, torch height control, whether the machine is True Hole®-
enabled or capable of beveling, etc.

Machine Defined properties

This section is set by Hypertherm and contains read-only machine properties.
 

User Defined properties

You can add your own user-defined properties for the current machine in this section. User-defined properties may include information
about the machine such as location or operational status.

Add user-defined properties

 1. Click New.

 2. In the row that is created, type a Name and Value.
 3. Click Save to permanently store your changes.

Delete user-defined properties

 1. Click a user-defined property in the grid.

 2. Click Delete.
 3. Click Save to permanently store your changes.
How do I get here in ProNest?
 n Settings > click Properties

- 62 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Default Class settings

You can set a default class for any material type and thickness. With a default class set, when you select a material type and thickness in
ProNest, that class will automatically be selected as well.

Note: Available classes come from the Process Parameters spreadsheet. If a Process Parameters spreadsheet is either not in use or is
in use but doesn't contain a Class column, this settings page will be inactive.

Assign default classes for materials in settings

In settings, you can easily assign default classes to all of your materials in one place.

 1. Open Settings ( ) and click Default Class.

The list of available materials comes from the Process Parameters spreadsheet.
 2. Click a material to select it.
 l Hold CTRL + click to select material rows individually.

 l Hold SHIFT + click to select a range of materials.

 3. In the Class column on the right, select a default class for the selected material. Note that if multiple materials are selected, only
classes that they have in common will be listed as available default class choices.
The next time that material is selected, the default class will automatically be selected as well.

Setting a default class elsewhere in ProNest

A default class value for a given material type and thickness can also be quickly set anywhere material is selected.
 1. After setting the material, select the class that you want to use as the default for that type and thickness.
 2. Right-click the class value and select Make [class] my default class for [material.]

Default class and unknown materials

Default class is used when ProNest encounters an unknown class when opening a job or changing machines. If a material type and thick-
ness are found but the class is unknown, the unknown class will automatically be replaced with the default class (assuming a default
class exists for that material).

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > click Default Class

- 63 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing Parts settings

Default Values for Importing Parts
When parts are added to the part list, they are assigned certain properties like quantity and priority. These properties are found in the
Properties section of the Edit Part List window. Each of the settings on this page provides a default value for the drawing properties.
Changing a property value in the Edit Part List window has no effect on the setting that provides its default value.

CAD Import tab
General
File units
This is used when importing CAD or CNC files. The file itself was saved using a particular length unit. The value of this setting should
match with the length unit that most of your files are saved with.
 
Choices: Inch (in.), Millimeter (mm)
 
Drawing scale
Used only for CAD files. A part can be scaled as it is imported into ProNest.
 
Units: Percentage (%)
Range: 0.1 to 1,000,000%
Recommended Value: 100%
 
To edit the drawing scale:
 l Type a value in the box.
 l Select the Drawing Scale box and click the down arrow.
 
When editing the drawing scale, the scale editor will appear:
 

 
In the editor, you can enter a scale directly in the Scale box.
 
You can also specify a scale by defining the ratio between a length in the drawing and the corresponding imported length.
 

Example:
 
In this example, most CAD files in our CAD folder must be scaled as they are imported into ProNest. For whatever reason, a length of
2.5 in. in each drawing should be imported as 10 in.
 

- 64 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

In the scale editor:

 1. Type 2.5 in the Drawing box.
 2. Type 10 in the Imported box.
As values are typed in each box, the value in the Scale box will update to match the ratio implied by the Drawing and Imported val-
ues. When complete, the Scale box will contain the value: 400%. Click OK and the Drawing scale field will contain 400%. Now when
CAD parts are imported, they will be scaled to 400% of their actual size in the drawing.

 
Open profile tolerance
This setting specifies the maximum distance allowed for joining line and arc entities. In other words, if Open profile tolerance is set to
0.005 in., gaps that are 0.005 in. or smaller will be closed - helping to prevent open profiles.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.001 to 1.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.005 in.
 
CAD Layers
The following settings apply only to CAD files:
Cut all layers with [Cut Process]
This setting is automatically named according to the first cut process used by this machine. For example, if the first cut process was called
"Laser", then this setting would appear as "Cut all layers with [Laser]". Select this check box if all layers found in a CAD file should be cut
by the process shown. Most applications will require that this checkbox be cleared.
 
Cut - [Cut Process]
Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to a particular cut process. Each cut process supported by the machine will have its own
setting.
 

Example 1:
 
If a machine supported both a Gas and a Plasma process, then there would be two rows here:
Cut - [Gas]
Cut - [Plasma]
 
Example 2:  
 
If your machine supported a cut process called "Gas" and you wanted to assign "0" and "CUT" CAD layers to that process, you would
enter:
 

Cut - [Gas] 0;CUT

When a CAD file is imported, all geometry on the "0" and "CUT" layers would be mapped to the machine's "Gas" process.

 
Scribe - [Scribe Process]
Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to a particular scribe process. Each scribe process supported by the machine will have its

- 65 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

own setting.
 

Example:
 
If a machine supported a single scribe process called "Scribe-G", then there would be one row here:
Scribe - [Scribe-G]

 
Punch - [Punch Process]
Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to a particular punch process. Each punch process supported by the machine will have its
own setting.
 

Example:
 
If a machine supported a single punch process called "MyPunch", then there would be one row here:
Punch - [MyPunch]

 
Turret
Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to the machine's turret process.
 
Display Only
Defines the CAD layers that should be displayed in ProNest, but should not be cut.
 
BOM
Defines the CAD layers that contain BOM information.
 
Map to CAD color numbers
Select this setting to allow importing parts by CAD color number instead of by layer name.

Example:
 
A part file defines a part in one layer: "CUT". The part is a simple rectangle with a hole in it. The exterior profile of the part has a color
number of 1, but the interior hole has a color number of 2.
 
If Map to CAD color numbers is cleared, then a cut process must be mapped to "CUT" in order to import the part properly. Importing
the part in this way will cause the same cut process to cut both the interior and exterior profiles.
 
If Map to CAD color numbers is selected, then one cut process must be mapped to "1" and another (or the same) cut process must
also be mapped to "2". Importing the part in this way can result in one process handling the exterior profile while another process
handles the interior profile.

Note:  l If you have more than one CAD layer for a single process, separate the layers with a semicolon (;) and do not include
a space (for example, 0;CUT).

- 66 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Wildcards (*) can be used for layer names. For instance, BURN* would map to all CAD layers beginning with "BURN"
(for example, BURN1, BURN2, BURN3, and so on).

Options
Leads origin
This determines where the origin of the lead-in/out of the part is, in relation to the drawing being processed. This applies to both interior
and exterior leads.
 
Choices: Lower-Left, Upper-Left, Upper-Right, Lower-Right, Left, Top, Right, Bottom
 

Upper Left Upper Right Lower Right Lower Left

Top Right Bottom Left

Punch/Scribe first
If selected, the machine will complete all punching and scribing on a nest before any cutting is done. If you are cutting with underwater
plasma, you should select this option. Normally, when processing very light metal, "Punch/Scribe first" should not be selected to avoid
problems with metal movement.
 
Reverse direction and kerf
Select this to import parts with a reversed cut direction. Interior profiles will be cut clockwise and exterior profiles will be cut counter-
clockwise. Right-handed kerf compensation is also used.
 
Delete overlapped entities
When this setting is selected, duplicate or coincident entities (lines or arcs) are automatically deleted as the part is imported.
 
Contains multiple parts
If there is more than one part on your drawing, select this setting.
 
Explode multiple parts
Select this setting if there is more than one part on your drawing and you want to separate them as they are imported.

Note: This setting is active only when Contains multiple parts is selected.

User drawn leads

Select this setting if your part was drawn with its own leads. If this setting is cleared, leads will be added to the part.

- 67 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: To import user-drawn leads, you must also have the Retain existing leads setting selected (on the Nesting tab).

Quality
Attaches a quality value to every entity.
 
Choices: (None), Use CAD Colors, 0..255
 
(None) - Quality values will not be attached to any entity in the part.
 
Use CAD Colors - Each entity's color number (from the CAD drawing) will be used as the entity's quality number.
 
0..255 - All entities will be assigned the same quality value.

Advanced: The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes
based on the quality number.

Smooth entities
Select this setting to convert curves made from line segments (approximated curves) into true arcs whenever possible.
 
Smooth tolerance
When converting a set of line segments into a curve, it is important to define how accurate the curve must be. The Smooth tolerance
value specifies a maximum distance from the approximated curve in which an arc can be formed. A large tolerance will likely cause more
smoothing to occur at the expense of a less accurate curve.
 
This tolerance value is opposite, but similar, to Arc radius tolerance found on the Importing Parts (Advanced) settings page.
 
SOLIDWORKS
Configuration name
In SOLIDWORKS, configurations allow you to create multiple variations of a part or assembly model within a single document. Con-
figurations provide a convenient way to develop and manage families of models with different dimensions, components, or other para-
meters.
 
This setting can be used to specify a default value for the Configuration Name property in the Properties: CAD Import tab of the Edit Part
List window.
 

Nesting tab
Quantity
Required
This setting defines the default quantity used when importing parts.
 
Range: 1 to 10,000
Recommended Value: 1
 
Attributes
Initial rotation
A part can be rotated (counter-clockwise) when it is added to the part list by defining an initial rotation angle. This rotation will become
the part's "natural" orientation.
 

- 68 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Units: Degrees (°)

Range: 0 to 360°
Recommended Value: 0°
 
Grain restraint
When editing your part list, you can specify a rotation restriction that will be used when importing parts.
 
Units: Degrees (°)
Range: 0 to 360°
Recommended Value: 0°
 
This setting is commonly used with parts that have grain restrictions (they must run parallel with the grain of the material). The grain
restraint angle defines a set of valid part orientations. For example, a value of 180° will limit valid part orientations to 0° and 180°. A value
of 360° will restrict rotation completely - allowing only the part's natural orientation. A value of 0° will allow any rotation.

Note: The grain restraint angle will not restrict parts that are rotated manually. If a part is rotated manually to an angle that violates
the part's rotation restriction, ProNest will display the error message Part orientation violates rotation restriction and will
show the part in conflict.

Priority
Priority is used to sort parts for automatic nesting. All things being equal, parts with a priority of 1 will nest before parts with a priority of
99.
 
Range: 1 to 99
Recommended Value: 5

Tip: A priority value of 99 is reserved for filler (A generally useful part that can be nested on any nest - as long as doing so doesn't
prevent non-filler parts from nesting. During automatic nesting, parts with a priority of 99 are used as filler parts) parts.
 
Filler parts are nested on a plate during automatic nesting only when:
 l At least one non-filler part has already been nested on the plate.
 l Automatic nesting has already tried to place all other parts with a priority less than 99 on the plate.

Prohibit filling
When selected, a part will not be allowed to have smaller parts nested inside of it. As a result, ProNest will not place parts inside the
interior profiles of the part during AutoNest. If a smaller part is manually placed inside of the part, the smaller part will appear in conflict
on the nest.
 
A part with Prohibit filling turned on has cross-hatching drawn in its interior profiles.

Mirror
A part's mirror value will affect how ProNest will nest the part during automatic nesting, CLC Quad, and CLC Array. When editing your
part list, you can specify a mirror value that will be used when importing parts.
 

- 69 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Choices: Never, Always, Either

 
Never - ProNest will never mirror the part.
Always - ProNest will always mirror the part.
Either - ProNest will decide which part orientation is best: natural or mirrored.

Important: For CLC Quad to work with certain parts (triangles, parts with only one square corner) the mirror value must be set to
Either.

Cluster
ProNest will automatically build clusters of parts that have this property selected.
 
Fit ratio
This ratio defines the cutoff for desirable clusters created automatically for parts with their Cluster property selected. The main reason to
create a cluster is because it uses less space than two of that part placed next to each other. The space used by two parts placed next to
each other is used as the 'benchmark'. An improvement is defined as follows:
 
Improvement = Space used by the cluster / Space used by two parts
 
If the improvement is better (less) than the fit ratio, then the cluster is added to the Part List as a custom part.
 
Units: Percentage
Range: 50 to 100%
Recommended Value: 90%
 
Common line cutting

ProNest will automatically build CLC clusters of parts that have this property set to anything other than (None).
 
Choices: (None), Pair, Quad, Both
 
(None) - CLC clusters will not be built for the part.
Pair - If possible, a pair CLC cluster (2 parts) will be built for the part.
Quad - If possible, a quad CLC cluster (4 parts) will be built for the part.
Both - If possible, will build a pair and a quad CLC cluster.
 
AutoNest Properties
Allow pattern array
Having this setting selected means that a part can be pattern arrayed during AutoNest.
 
Allow CLC array

Having this setting selected means that a part can be CLC arrayed during AutoNest.
 
Allow leads to move
Having this setting selected means that a part's leads can be moved during AutoNest.
 
Allow dynamic align

- 70 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

When selected, a part can be dynamically aligned during AutoNest. Eligible parts will be common line cut or bridged, depending on the
Strategy in Dynamic Align settings.
 
Import Actions
Retain all existing leads
When the part is imported, this setting will control whether or not the part's existing leads will be removed and replaced. Select this set-
ting to keep any existing leads where they are. Profiles that do not have leads will still have leads applied.

Note: If you are importing a CAD file with existing leads, you must also select the User drawn leads setting (on the CAD Import tab).

Add tabs
Select this setting to AutoTab a part as it is imported. AutoTab will be applied to the part, based on your AutoTab settings.
 
Slug destroy

Select this setting to automatically apply slug destroy to a part as it's imported. Slug destroy will be applied to the interior profiles of the
part, based on Slug Destroy settings.
 

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > click Importing Parts

- 71 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing Parts (Advanced) settings

File/Controller Associations
After installation, ProNest can import part information from several different file types. ProNest can be configured to read CNC Output
files too. To do this, you have to match a file extension with a controller information file (CIF). The CIF is used to reverse-engineer a CNC
output file into part information. Your defined file/controller associations are presented in tabular format.
 

Table of File/Controller Associations

 
There are three buttons to the right of the table: New, Edit, and Delete.

Create a new file/controller association

 1. Click New.

 2. Type the file extension. For example, to associate CNC files, type "cnc" in the box.
 3. Select the controller.
 4. Click OK.

Edit an existing file/controller association

 1. Select a file/controller association in the table.

 2. Click Edit.
 3. Edit the file extension or select a different controller.
 4. Click OK.

Delete an existing file/controller association

 1. Select a file/controller association in the table.

 2. Click Delete.
 

Importing CAD Files

Maximum controller arc radius
CNC Controllers may have limitations on the size of allowable radii. You may specify a maximum arc radius if your controller is limited to a
certain size. Any arc greater than this value will be broken into line segments.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 75000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 75000.0 in.

- 72 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

If Maximum controlled arc radius is set to 0 in., all arc motions will be processed as a set of straight line segments.

Arc radius tolerance

When the radius of an arc motion exceeds the Maximum controller arc radius it is processed as a set of line segments. Arc radius tol-
erance determines the accuracy of this approximation. A large tolerance value will result in fewer line segments as it creates a crude
approximation of the arc. A smaller tolerance value will increase the number of line segments, creating a smoother approximation.

Arc radius tolerance

 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.001 to 1.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.01 in.
 
Save part file tokens
Each time a CAD file is imported, it is processed as if the file had never been imported before. This processing takes time. To improve the
speed of importing CAD files you can select the Save part file tokens check box.
 
When Save part file tokens is selected, ProNest will create an MTC token file (.tok) as each CAD file is processed. This token file rep-
resents a "processed" version of the CAD file and will have the same name (except with a .tok extension). Next time the CAD file is impor-
ted, ProNest will search for its matching token file. If the CAD file hasn't been modified since the token file was created, ProNest will
import from the token file - saving on processing time. Otherwise, the CAD file will be processed and a new token file will be saved.

The trade-off with this speed improvement is the extra storage space needed for the token files.
In the Part Sources area of the Edit Part List window, a CAD file that has an associated token file is indicated with a File selection
includes part file tokens message in the Properties pane.

Save Advanced Edit tokens

If selected, all part changes made in Advanced Edit will be saved to the part's token file. The next time the CAD file is imported, the part's
token file will be loaded because Save part file tokens is already selected. The end result is that the part will load with all of the changes
made in Advanced Edit.

This setting is active only when Save part file tokens is selected.

Use text marker

If your cutting machine controller has a special text-marking device you may have to check this option. Contact Hypertherm to determ-
ine if you need to use this feature.
 
For more information on using this feature, see Buge text marking.

Importing CNC Files

Tab auto-recognition size
This value is used only when computer numerically controlled (CNC) files are added to ProNest's part list. CNC files are reverse-engin-
eered (decoded) from controller instructions to part geometry. During this process, ProNest uses tab auto-recognition size to determine if
gaps in a cutting profile are tabs. If a gap is smaller than this value, it will be converted to a tab. Otherwise, it will be interpreted as a break
in the profile.
 
Units: Distance

- 73 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Range: -0.01 to 5.0 in.

Recommended Value: 0.01 in.
 
Strip stop codes
When CNC files are added to the part list, they may contain stop codes. If this setting is selected, these stop codes will be removed when
output files are created.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click Importing Parts > click Importing Parts (Advanced)

- 74 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Bevel settings
Bevel Settings
Settings table
Most beveling applications require modification of process parameters such as voltage, kerf, current, and feed rate at particular locations
in the CNC code. The process parameters used for beveled profiles are stored in the bevel settings table.
 
To select a settings table:
Type or select the name of the settings table in the box.
 

You can make changes to the selected settings table by clicking the button. For more information on this and other settings tables,
see "About spreadsheets" on page 186.
 
Macro folder
Macros (special transition loops, lead-ins, and lead-outs) are often required for beveling applications. They are used to represent the
required geometry and process parameter changes for beveling a profile or for changing bevel angles within a profile.
 
All bevel macros exist in a single sub-folder within the Macros folder set in preferences.
 
To specify this folder:

 1. Click the button to open the Browse for Folder dialog. The sub-folders within the Macros folder (specified on the Settings
page in Preferences) will be shown.
 2. Select a sub-folder containing bevel macros.
 3. Click OK.
 
To browse for the macro folder:

 1. Click the button to open the Browse for Folder dialog.
 2. Browse to the folder containing bevel macros.
 3. Click OK.

Advanced: A set of standard bevel macros are installed with ProNest. Due to the specific needs of your particular beveling application
it is possible that these macros are not adequate. Please contact Hypertherm if custom macros are needed.

Top angle orientation

This setting defines how top angles are specified. Some beveling machines use positive angles to define a top angle, but some use neg-
ative angles.

Negative (-)
Top angles will be referred to as negative angles. Positive angles will be used to represent bottom bevels.

Positive (+)
Top angles will be referred to as positive angles. Negative angles will be used to represent bottom bevels.
 
This setting is primarily used for output purposes and for pulling the correct information from the bevel settings table.
 

- 75 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

AutoBevel Settings
When adding CAD parts to your part list, ProNest can automatically bevel parts that contain bevel information. This information is embed-
ded in CAD layer names.
Use AutoBevel
Select this setting if you have CAD files with bevel information contained in the CAD layer names.
 
Bevel angle - prefix
CAD layer names that begin with this prefix will be interpreted as layer names that contain AutoBevel information. By default, the prefix is
"BVL".

Note: This setting is active only if Use AutoBevel is selected.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 l Settings > click Bevel
 

- 76 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Bevel (Advanced) settings

Pass profiles are created when using multiple pass beveling. Multiple pass beveling allows more than one contour on entities in the part -
this may include using two different bevels angles on the same entity or using a bevel angle such that the beveled portion of the entity
does not account for the full material thickness.

Pass Profile Sequence

Sequence order for pass levels
When making pass profiles, up to three types may be created: Top, Bottom, and Land. This setting allows you to choose the order in
which they are cut.
 
To modify the cut order:
 1. Select the pass type that you want to move

 2. Click on the Up or Down button.

While making pass profiles

Add leads and loops
Select this check box to have loops and leads applied during pass profile creation. Their exact properties will come from the Bevel setting
table.
 
Add loops to non-beveled corners
Select this check box if you wish transition loops to be added to corners of the beveled profiles where the entities to either side are not
beveled. Otherwise, transition loops will only be added to beveled corners (A corner where at least one of the entities forming the corner
has a non-zero bevel angle) .

Note: This setting is active only if Add leads and loops is selected.

AutoLoop threshold
Threshold angle used to determine which corners in a profile are candidates for automatically adding transition loops. Corners with an
included angle less than this setting's value may have transition loops automatically added to them during pass profile creation.
 
Units: Degrees
Range: 0 to 360°
Recommended Value: 135°

Note: This setting is active only if Add leads and loops is selected.

Compensate geometry
Some beveling machines achieve the correct torch location through varying the kerf and other parameters based on the bevel angle. Oth-
ers require that the geometry of the profiles themselves be changed.
 
Select this check box if your bevel machine requires that the profile geometry itself be compensated when beveling. Clear this check box
if your bevel machine uses kerf and other process parameters to offset to the correct position when cutting the beveled profiles.
 
Pass profile strategy
When X, Y, and K cuts are defined for a profile, that profile must be broken into multiple profiles. The Pass profile strategy specifies how
the motions derived from the original profile are re-combined into profiles that will be cut.

- 77 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Pass Levels
When this strategy is used, each of the resulting profiles will be composed entirely of motions of the same type (top, bottom, or land
passes).

Mixed Levels
When this strategy is used, the resulting profiles can contain motions of all types (top, bottom, and land passes). If the original profile
was closed, the Mixed Levels strategy will also produce a closed profile that is made up of the last remaining type for each motion in
the original profile - as specified in Sequence order for pass levels.

Output
Torch height
Height of the torch above the plate. This value is used when compensating the geometry of beveled profiles.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.
 
Pre-kerf bevel profiles
Select this checkbox to pre-kerf bevel profiles. Kerf commands will be removed from output code for beveled profiles.
 
Smooth compensated profiles
When pre-kerfed, gradual bevels that consist of many small continuous (non-tangent) motions can become jagged when cut on the
machine. Selecting this setting will adjust the entities' end points so that they conform as closely as possible to an arc, without actually
changing the number of entities or their shape. This can create a smoother cutting motion by minimizing non-tangency in profiles.

Note: This setting is active only if Pre-kerf bevel profiles is selected.

Smooth tolerance
Specifies a maximum distance from the approximated curve in which an arc can be formed. A large tolerance will likely cause more
smoothing to occur at the expense of a less accurate curve.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0 to 100 in.
Recommended Value: 0.02 in.

Note: This setting is active only if Pre-kerf bevel profiles and Smooth compensated profiles are selected.

Smooth max radius

The maximum radius of the arc to attempt to smooth profiles to. If the bevel segments follow an arc with a radius greater that this value,
they will instead by smoothed to lines.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0 to 500 in.
Recommended Value: 100 in.

Note: This setting is active only if Pre-kerf bevel profiles and Smooth compensated profiles are selected.

Use macro extensions

- 78 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Bevel macros, which contain lead and loop geometry will have extensions applied. This can reduce the chance of clipping the corners
when cutting top bevels and can reduce material utilization by shrinking the part region.
 
Extension threshold
Threshold angle for corners to apply bevel macro extensions. Corners with angles greater than this value will not have extensions applied.
 
Units: Angle in degrees
Range: 0° to 180°
Recommended Value: 135°

Note: This setting is active only if Use macro extensions is selected.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click Bevel > click Bevel (Advanced)

- 79 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Standard Plate Sizes settings

Defined Plate Sizes
Every machine has its own list of standard plates sizes defined on this settings page. A machine can have any number of standard plates
sizes: there is no upper limit. However, a machine must always have at least one standard plate size.
 
All standard plate sizes are rectangular and are listed in "Length x Width" format. For example:
 
120.000 x 60.000 in.

Add a new plate size

 1. Click Add.  The "Add Standard Plate Size" dialog will appear.
 2. Fill in the values for Length and Width.
 3. Click OK.

Edit a plate size

 1. Select a plate size in the Defined Plate Sizes box.

 2. Click Edit.  The "Add Standard Plate Size" dialog will appear.
 3. Change the values for Length and/or Width.
 4. Click OK.

Delete a plate size

 1. Select a plate size in the Defined Plate Sizes box.

 2. Click Remove.

Note:  l The Remove button will be inactive when there is only one defined plate size.
 l If you delete a plate size that is marked as the default plate, one of the remaining plates will become the new default
plate.

The Default Plate

 
Each machine must have a "default plate". It is this plate that is immediately available for nesting whenever you create a new job. Also,
it is the default choice for new nests created either through the New Nest Setup dialog (manual nesting) or the AutoNest Setup dialog
(automatic nesting). In the Defined Plate Sizes box, the default plate appears with a checkmark next to it.
 
To set a plate size as the default plate:
 1. Select a plate size in the Defined Plate Sizes box.
 2. Click Set as Default Plate.

Safe Zones
Scheme

- 80 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

This is the default safe zone scheme that will be assigned to all plates. You can also create new schemes or edit existing ones in the list.
 
Safe zones define areas on the nest that ProNest will consider as "unusable". Perhaps these areas are used for clamping, or maybe they
define an area that should be left alone. Naturally, these kinds of areas shouldn't have parts nested on them. During any kind of auto-
matic nesting, ProNest will avoid all safe zones. Also, during manual nesting ProNest will show conflicts between parts and safe zones.
 

 
Sometimes, a particular group of safe zones can be used on several different plate sizes.  This group is called a safe zone scheme.  In
ProNest, you can define safe zone schemes and then use (and re-use) them on any custom or inventory plate.

Important: The safe zone scheme selected here will be automatically applied to all plates when the current machine is in use.  
Whenever ProNest creates a new nest, it will use the safe zone scheme selected here.

Apply default scheme based on plate thickness

Select this setting to specify a maximum material thickness to use the default safe zone. This is useful for thicker plate that may not
require clamps.

Maximum material thickness

Plates thicker than this size will not have the default safe zone scheme applied.

- 81 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Torches/Heads settings
Torch Settings
Number of torches
This setting defines the maximum number of torches/heads that are possible. Usually this setting will match the physical limitation of the
machine.
 
Range: 1 to 100
Recommended Value: 1

Important: The remaining torch settings are active only if Number of torches is greater than 1.

Master torch number

For multi-torch operations, this setting identifies the master torch.
 
Range: 1 to Number of torches
Recommended Value: 1
 
Torch selection
The AutoNest Setup dialog will use this value as its default for "Torch selection".
 
Choices: Fixed, "Fixed, Then One", Variable
 
When AutoNest is run, ProNest uses Torch selection to select how many torches are used.
 
Fixed - ProNest will try to nest all parts using the maximum number of torches allowed (specified by Number of torches). Unless each
part quantity divides evenly into the number of torches, a small remainder of parts will not be nested.
 
Fixed, Then One - Similar to Fixed. Whenever a part cannot be nested using the number of torches, it will try to nest the part with only
one torch.
 
Variable: ProNest will first try to nest all parts using the maximum number of torches allowed. If it cannot place the part, it will reduce the
number of torches by one and try again. This process is repeated until it has tried with only one torch.
 
Minimum torch spacing
If parts are automatically nested using multiple torches, the torch spacing will be no less than this value.  
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.

Tip: Specify a value of 0 to allow any spacing.

Torch spacing type

The AutoNest Setup dialog will use this value as its default for "Torch spacing type". The Part List task pane also uses this value to define
its own torch settings.
 
Choices: Equal, Fixed, Variable
 
When AutoNest is run, ProNest uses Torch spacing type to select the torch spacing. The spacing used by ProNest is always limited by the
Minimum torch spacing.

- 82 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Equal: The torch spacing is based on the nest width and the maximum number of torches being used. It is calculated by dividing the
nest's width (ProNest y-axis) by the Number of torches.
 
Fixed: The torch spacing is always the same value (defined by Torch spacing) - regardless of the number of torches used.
 
Variable: Torch spacing will be adjusted based on the size of the part, so that the minimum part separation between multi-torch parts is
used.
 
Torch spacing
The AutoNest Setup dialog will use this value as its default for 'Torch spacing'. The Part List task pane also uses this value to define its
own torch settings.
 
Units: Distance
Range: Minimum torch spacing to 10,000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 20.0 in.
 
Whenever Torch spacing type is set to Fixed, this value defines the torch spacing used.

Note: This setting is activated only if Torch spacing type is set to Fixed.

Orientation
Multiple torches can extend along either the y-axis (vertical torches) or along the x-axis (horizontal torches).
 
Choices: Vertical, Horizontal
Recommended Value: Vertical
 
Punch with multiple torches
Multi-torch punching will be enabled. If a multi-torch part contains punch geometry, the punching will be done with multiple torches on
the master and slave parts.
 
Scribe with multiple torches
Multi-torch scribing will be enabled. If a multi-torch part contains scribe geometry, the scribing will be done with multiple torches on the
master and slave parts.
 
Minimize torch changes
If this is selected, ProNest will minimize the number of torch spacing changes during automatic nesting. Rather than calculating a part's
spacing, ProNest will nest the part inside or near a previously nested part. Whenever possible, each new part nested will used the same
torch spacing as the previously nested part.

Note: This setting is used only when Torch selection is set to Variable.

Torch change ratio

This setting controls how often torch changes can happen. As the percentage increases, it becomes more likely that a part placed near a
previously nested part will share the same torch spacing.
 
Units: Percentage
Range: 0.0 to 100.0%

- 83 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Recommended Value: 50%

Note: This setting is activated only if Minimize torch changes is selected.

Invert torch direction for multiple torch nesting

By default, the master torch is always positioned closest to the nesting home in ProNest. When this setting is selected, the position of the
master torch in relation to the nesting home will be reversed - it will be furthest away from the nesting home.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > click Torches or Heads

- 84 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Tooling settings
Tool library
The XML file containing all available tools in the shop that might be used by the machine.
 
This file must exist in the Tooling folder specified on the Settings page in Preferences.
 
To view or edit the tools in the tool library:
 l Click the Edit Tool Library button.

Sequence Options
Tooling sequence options are used to control the order in which all tooling, as well as cutting, is completed on nests. With tooling
sequencing, ProNest generally follows this order for different processes on a nest or within a zone:
 1. Punch (most commonly centermark or point marking)
 2. Scribe
 3. Mark
 4. Cut pilot holes (using cut process)
 5. Drill
 6. Cut interiors
 7. Cut exteriors (part drops out)
There are some exceptions, such as when parts are nested inside other drilled parts. However, ProNest follows this order when possible.
 
General method
These methods control how tooling sequence is applied. Note that these take precedence over the values on the Cut Sequence settings
page. Some choices will completely override the Cut Sequence settings, while others will simply alter the Cut Sequence.
 
For the purposes of tooling sequence settings, assume a normal plate orientation where the X axis is horizontal, the Y axis is vertical,
and the origin is at the lower left corner of the nest.

The following grid and zone settings can be set for several of the methods listed below. Basically, these enable you to partition the
nest into smaller sections for sequencing.
 
Grids
You can overlay a grid onto the nest to create multiple rectangular sections. All tooling is done in a single grid section before mov-
ing on to tooled profiles in the next section.

- 85 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

X grid size (1)

The interval along the X axis for vertical grid lines.

X grid offset (2)

A buffer distance to either side of the vertical X grid lines. This is used to accommodate machines where the turret may be offset
from the cutting head.

Y grid size (3)

The interval along the Y axis for horizontal grid lines.

Tip: To get the sequence you want, try setting the X and Y grid sizes down to a very small value, such as 0.1 inches (2.5 mm).

 
Zones
X zones function similar to work zones in ProNest. This lets you divide the nest into vertical bands, where all profiles within the zone
(whether they are cut, marked, or tooled) are processed before moving on to the next zone.

X zone size (4)

Set the interval along the X axis for vertical zone lines on the nest.

 
Methods:

Use nesting sequence

- 86 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Cut Sequence settings will be used to determine the sequencing of all profiles on the nest. This is an advanced option which is not
typically used.

Left to right
Grid sections on the nest are processed moving from the left side of the plate to the right. All tooled profiles on the nest are pro-
cessed before any cutting.

Note: With this method, ProNest Cut Sequence settings are overridden and making changes to the sequence in Cut Sequence
mode is prohibited.

Bottom to top
Grid sections on the nest are processed moving from the bottom side of the plate to the top. All tooled profiles on the nest are pro-
cessed before any cutting.

Note: With this method, ProNest Cut Sequence settings are overridden and making changes to the sequence in Cut Sequence
mode is prohibited.

Top to bottom
Grid sections on the nest are processed moving from the top side of the plate to the bottom. All tooled profiles on the nest are pro-
cessed before any cutting.

- 87 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: With this method, ProNest Cut Sequence settings are overridden and making changes to the sequence in Cut Sequence
mode is prohibited.

Right to left
Grid sections on the nest are processed moving from the right side of the plate to the left. All tooled profiles on the nest are pro-
cessed before any cutting.

Note: With this method, ProNest Cut Sequence settings are overridden and making changes to the sequence in Cut Sequence
mode is prohibited.

By part, then left to right

Parts are processed one at a time; all tooling and cutting is completed on a single part before the sequence moves on to the next
part. Parts closer to the left side of the plate are processed first.

Note: With this method, ProNest Cut Sequence settings are overridden and making changes to the sequence in Cut Sequence
mode is prohibited.

By part, then bottom to top

Parts are processed one at a time; all tooling and cutting is completed on a single part before the sequence moves on to the next
part. Parts closer to the bottom side of the plate are processed first.

Note: With this method, ProNest Cut Sequence settings are overridden and making changes to the sequence in Cut Sequence
mode is prohibited.

X zone, then left to right

All grid sections in the zone are processed left to right until the parts enclosed in the zone are cut completely. The sequence then
moves on to the next zone.

Note: With this method, ProNest Cut Sequence settings are overridden and making changes to the sequence in Cut Sequence
mode is prohibited.

X zone, then bottom to top

All grid sections in the zone are processed bottom to top until the parts enclosed in the zone are cut completely. The sequence then
moves on to the next zone.

- 88 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: With this method, ProNest Cut Sequence settings are overridden and making changes to the sequence in Cut Sequence
mode is prohibited.

Left to right, then cut nest order

All grid sections are processed left to right until all tooled profiles are completed. Then, all cut profiles on the nest are cut according
to Cut Sequence settings.

Bottom to top, then cut nest order

All grid sections are processed bottom to top until all tooled profiles are completed. Then, all cut profiles on the nest are cut accord-
ing to Cut Sequence settings.

X zone, left to right, then cut nest order

In a given zone, all grid sections are processed left to right until all tooled profiles enclosed in the zone are completed. Then, all cut
profiles in that zone are cut according to Cut Sequence settings. The sequence then moves on to the next zone.

X zone, bottom to top, then cut nest order

In a given zone, all grid sections are processed bottom to top until all tooled profiles enclosed in the zone are completed. Then, all
cut profiles in that zone are cut according to Cut Sequence settings. The sequence then moves on to the next zone.

X zone, right to left, then cut nest order

In a given zone, all grid sections are processed right to left until all tooled profiles enclosed in the zone are completed. Then, all cut
profiles in that zone are cut according to Cut Sequence settings. The sequence then moves on to the next zone.

Left to right, then cut nest order (1.1 method)

This is like Left to right, then cut nest order but sorting of drill profiles is slightly different. The Tool sort option is not considered
and taps are generally sequenced better.
 
Y direction
Limits the vertical direction in which profiles are sequenced within a grid section or zone.

One way, up
Profiles will be processed from bottom edge of the plate to the top within a given grid section or zone. Once it reaches the top, the
turret or cutting head will traverse down to the bottom border to continue the sequence.

A Left to right method with One way up would process tooled holes from bottom to top in a given grid section.

One way, down

Profiles will be processed from top edge of the plate to the bottom within a given grid section or zone. Once it reaches the bottom,
the turret or cutting head will traverse up to the top border to continue the sequence.

- 89 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

A Left to right method with One way down would process tooled holes from top to bottom in a given grid section.

Alternating
Profiles will be processed in either vertical direction within a given grid section or zone. This option can shorten the total traverse dis-
tance.

A Left to right method with Alternating would process tooled holes in a serpentine pattern from one section to the next.

Tool sort option

These options affect the order in which tools are sequenced on the nest.

Turret order
The tooling sequence will follow the order in which the tools are loaded in the turret. The tool in the first station will be used first, fol-
lowed by the tool in the second station, and so on.

Sequence number then turret order

The part's cut sequence is used to determine which holes should be processed first, followed by the order in which the tool is loaded
in the turret.

Sequence number, turret order, then compound tool sequence

The part's cut sequence is used to determine which holes should be processed first, followed by the order in which the tool is loaded
in the turret, and finally the sequence from the compound tool in the tool library.

Important: If you have compound tools in the tool library, you should select the Sequence number, turret order, then com-
pound tool sequence option. This will ensure that the compound tool sequence specified in the tool library is
always honored.

Profile sort
A reference point on a profile that is used when establishing the sequence for cut profiles on the nest. The sort point is placed in rela-
tion to a bounding box around the profile.

- 90 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

1 = Minimum
2 = Mid point
3 = Maximum

Note:  l If Collision Avoidance is enabled, the tooling sequence will not be altered by collision avoidance.
 l ProNest Cut Sequence settings are only honored with the following Tooling settings:
 l Use nesting sequence
 l Left to right, then cut nest order
 l Bottom to top, then cut nest order
 l X zone, Left to right, then cut nest order
 l X zone, bottom to top, then cut nest order
 l X zone, right to left, then cut nest order
 l Left to right, then cut nest order 1.1 method

Pilot drill options

These options inform ProNest how holes (such as taps) that require pilot holes are drawn in the CAD file, to ensure that all the tool hits
are sequenced in the correct order.

Disable pilot drills

In the tool library, if a drill tool contains an associated pilot drill, the pilot drill will be completely ignored when that tool is assigned to
a hole. This option typically should not be used if you have pilot drills in the tool library.
 
This setting should be used when the CAD drawing contains two circles for a single hole: one for the pilot hole and another for the lar-
ger finish hole. This will ensure that all smaller holes are drilled prior to the larger ones.

Enable pilot drills, sequence them together

This sequencing option should be used when the CAD drawing contains one single hole that represents both the pilot and finish drill,
and you want to immediately drill out the finish hole after the pilot hole is cut.

Enable pilot drills, sequence them separately

This sequencing option should be used when the CAD drawing contains one single hole that represents both the pilot and finish drill,
and you want to complete all pilot cuts on the nest or zone prior to drilling out any larger finish holes.

Import Options
Tool recognition tolerance
When ProNest attempts to match available tools in the tool library to drill geometry in a part drawing file, this is the tolerance that is
used. Hole dimensions must be within this tolerance value in order for a tool assignment to be made.
 
This setting is an equal bilateral tolerance; it is both an upper and lower tolerance value.
 
In cases where multiple tools fall within the tolerance and qualify to be used on a hole, the tool that is closest in size to the required
hole will be used.
 

- 91 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:
 
Suppose a CAD file contains a part with a hole that is exactly 6.50 mm diameter and the Tool recognition tolerance is set to 0.50
mm. The following tools would not match:
7.5 mm diameter tool
5.5 mm diameter tool

These tools would match:

7.0 mm diameter tool
6.5 mm diameter tool
6.0 mm diameter tool

Ultimately, the 6.5 mm tool would be assigned, because it is the closest in size to the required 6.5 mm hole.
 
Use tooling on cut layers when possible
When enabled, if a profile is on a CAD layer that is assigned to the cut process, ProNest will attempt to convert that profile to a tool pro-
cess, as long as the geometry allows it.

Cut layers to ignore

Enter any CAD layers assigned to a cut process that you don't want converted to the tool process during import. Layers entered here
will be assigned to the cut process when they're imported, even though Use tooling on cut layers when possible is enabled.

Note: If the hole on the cut layer can't be matched to an existing tool in the library, it will remain on the cut process; it will not be
tooled.

Restrict part rotation based on tool

When enabled, if a part contains a profile that will be processed with a non-round tool that has rotation restrictions, the part's Grain
Restraint property will be set to match the rotation restriction of the tools used.

Note: Used only for non-spindle tools such as turret punch.

Coarse tap color

The standard color in CAD files that is used to indicate coarse tapped holes.
 
If a CAD file has a hole that should be tapped, the following must apply:
 l On the layer mapped to the Drilling process
 l Matches the diameter of tool with a Tap Coarse type in the Tool Library (tool name uses "TC" prefix)
 l Is assigned a CAD color that matches this Coarse tap color in ProNest.
 
See Tapping for more information.
 
Fine tap color
The standard color in CAD files that is used to indicate fine tapped holes.
 
If a CAD file has a hole that should be tapped, the following must apply:

- 92 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l On the layer mapped to the Drilling process

 l Matches the diameter of tool with a Tap Fine type in the Tool Library (tool name uses "TF" prefix).
 l Is assigned a CAD color that matches this Fine tap color in ProNest.
 
See Tapping for more information.
 
Countersink color
The standard color in CAD files that is used to indicate countersunk holes.
 
If a CAD file has a hole that should be countersunk, the following must apply:
 l On the layer mapped to the Drilling process
 l Matches the diameter of tool with a Countersink type in the Tool Library (tool name uses "CS" prefix).
 l Is assigned a CAD color that matches this Countersink color in ProNest.
 
See Countersinking for more information.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > click Tooling

- 93 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Turret settings
This settings page provides a way to model the tool storage unit on your machine's automatic tool changer. In ProNest, this is referred to
as the "Turret" though you may have a different style storage unit, such as a carousel or chain style magazine.

Drawing of a turret style tool storage unit with eight stations

Initial set up

If your machine's default turret configuration isn't set up yet, you can use the grid to enter the number of stations, station type, and
default tools loaded in each station.
 1. In the Number of Stations box, type in the total number of fixed stations on your tool changer/turret/carousel.
 2. In the top row, in the Station column, enter the number or letter of the first station. For instance, you might enter "1" or "101"
here.
 3. If you've entered a numerical value, you can automatically fill up all the rest of the available stations by clicking Auto assign sta-
tions. This will increment the number by one for each successive station until all stations have been filled.
Next, you can set station types. Be sure to do this if a station can only accept certain types or sizes of tools.
 4. In the first row, enter a Station Type for your the first station.
 5. If all stations have the same type, hold SHIFT key and click the last row's Station Type box.
 6. Select the type from the drop down list.

Tip: If you make a mistake and need to reset the entire grid, simply set the Number of stations back to 0 and then re-enter the correct
number again.

Once set up, this Turret configuration settings page serves as the default layout for the Turret pane on the main nesting screen.

Turret properties
Number of stations
The total number of stations on your turret/tool changer/carousel.

- 94 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Range: 1 to 1000

Station
This is normally a number or letter used to identify a station on the turret.
 
Station Type
Station type for the turret station. On certain drill machines, not all stations can accept any tool. Station type is used to tell ProNest
which tools are compatible with a given station.
 
Turret stations have a Station Type and drill tools in the tool library also have a Station Type. If a tool and turret station have matching
Station Types, the tool is eligible to be loaded in that station. ProNest will not load a tool in a station with a different Station Type.
 
New station types can be added either on the Turret settings page or the Drill Tools tab of the tool library. The list of station types is
synced between these two areas.
 
Tool
You can set a default tool that will always be loaded in a station. The tool you select will become locked in that station for every nest,
even if it isn't needed by any parts on the nest. The list of available tools comes from the tool library.
 

Locked tools in the Turret pane are indicated by a lock icon

 
Setting a locked tool can cause limitations to nesting. If a locked tool isn't needed in a job, the station will still be occupied by the tool.
This can cause either more turret reloads for a single nest or it can mean that a part can't be nested at all (if Allow multiple turret lay-
outs on a nest is turned off).
 
Though it is possible to manually clear a locked default tool in the Turret pane for any nest, this can become time consuming if done
often. It is best to specify default tools in Turret settings only if they're frequently used. Otherwise, leave this field blank.
 
Allow multiple turret layouts on a nest
This setting controls whether or not you want allow the creation of nests that would require the turret to be reloaded when cutting a
single nest.
 
When selected, a single nest can have more than one turret layout.
 
When cleared, only one turret layout is allowed for a single nest. Parts can be placed on a single nest until all available turret stations
are filled up. After that, any parts that would require an additional tool not already in a station could not be placed on that nest. These
parts will appear in conflict if you try to nest them.
 
If a single part contains more drill holes than there are compatible stations in the turret and this setting is disabled, you will not be able
to nest that part anywhere.
 
Example:
 
Suppose there is a drill machine that can hold four tools at a time in the automatic tool changer; it is a four station turret. A job has
parts that will all fit on a single nest, but contain 11 different hole sizes and will require the turret stations to be reloaded several
times before the nest is completely cut.
 

- 95 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

With Allow multiple turret layouts on a nest enabled ( ), you could create a nest, either manually or with automatic nesting, that
requires several layouts:
 
Nest 1:

Station Layout 1 Layout 2 Layout 3

1 4 mm HSS 7 mm HSS 20mm HSS
2 8 mm HSS 11 mm HSS 26 mm HSS
3 12 mm HSS 17 mm HSS 30 mm HSS
4 15 mm HSS 24 mm HSS <empty>

 
When the nest is output, a stop code would be inserted after all tool hits in layout 1 are complete, allowing the operator to reload
the turret. A second stop code would be inserted after layout 2.
 
With Allow multiple turret layouts on a nest cleared ( ), you would be allowed to place parts on a single nest until the four sta-
tions are filled up. After that, any parts that would require an additional tool not already in a station could not be placed on that
nest. A different nest for each turret layout would be needed.
 
Nest 1:

Station Layout 1
1 4 mm HSS
2 8 mm HSS
3 12 mm HSS
4 15 mm HSS

 
Nest 2:

Station Layout 2
1 7 mm HSS
2 11 mm HSS
3 17 mm HSS
4 24 mm HSS

 
Nest 3:

Station Layout 3
1 20 mm HSS
2 26 mm HSS
3 30 mm HSS
4 <empty>

- 96 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
If a part with five different drill hole sizes is added to the part list, it will be flagged with a warning that is can't be nested.

Sort tools in turret layouts from smallest to largest

By default, tools will be automatically sorted in the turret based on their diameter. The smallest tool will be loaded in the first com-
patible station, the next smallest tool will be loaded in the next station, and so on. As parts are nested, required tools will be re-ordered
in the turret as needed, so that the order is always from smallest to largest.
 
If you are using default tools (the Tool column on this Turret settings page), ProNest will automatically re-sort stations in order to main-
tain the smallest to largest.
 
Automatic sorting is used to control the sequencing of drills on the nest. In ProNest, the sequence in which holes on the nest are
drilled is partially determined by the turret order. Select this setting to sequence tool hits on a nest by size, beginning with the smallest
tool.

Note: Tools and stations can not be dragged and reordered in the turret when this option is selected.

Where is this information stored?

The default turret configuration is saved in the ProNest settings, in the machine file (.cfg).

Note: When opening a job that contains drilling, ProNest doesn't respect the Restore settings from job setting for the Turret set-
tings related to configuration (like Number of Stations, Station Name, Station Type, etc.). It always uses the turret settings
from the basis machine (.cfg) and not the job (.nif) that is being opened.

Associated warnings

Default tools have been removed from the turret

Loading a tool library that lacks the default tools specified for the turret causes this message to appear.
How do I get here in ProNest?
 l Settings > double-click the Tooling page > click Turret

- 97 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Work Zones settings

Some cutting machines cannot reach all areas of a plate without special processing. These cutting machines must divide the plate into
smaller units in which to work inside. When one work zone has been processed, the machine moves to a different work zone and pro-
cesses that until all areas of the nest have been processed.
 

 
Automatic nesting respects work zone boundaries during automatic nesting. Allowing work zones to overlap will usually yield a better
nest than having non-overlapping work zones.

Work Zone Settings

Use work zones
Select this setting to activate work zones.
 
Layout
This setting defines the type of work zones that this machine supports.
 
Choices: Horizontal repositions, Vertical repositions, Reposition in both directions
 
Horizontal repositions (along x-axis)
Select this setting to use work zones that subdivide the length of the plate into multiple work zones.
 
Vertical repositions (along y-axis) [Not available]
Select this setting to use work zones that subdivide the width of the plate into multiple work zones.
 
Reposition in both directions [Not available]
Select this setting to use work zones that  subdivide both the length and width of the plate into work zones.
 
Work zone length
Length (along the x-axis) of each work zone. This represents the size of the working area available to the controller at any given time.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.1 to 10000.0 in.
 
Work zone width
Width (along the y-axis) of each work zone.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.1 to 10000.0 in.

Note: This setting is intended to work with the Vertical reposition layout - which is not available.

Horizontal reposition distance

Represents the horizontal distance a machine needs to shift to move from one work zone to the next.
 
Units: Distance

- 98 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Range: 0.1 to 10000.0 in.

 

Examples:
 l If this setting has the same value as Work zone length, then the work zones will not overlap.
 l If this setting has a value less than Work zone length, the work zones will overlap.
 l If this setting has a value greater than Work zone length, unreachable gaps will be created between consecutive work zones.

 
Vertical reposition distance
Represents the vertical distance a machine needs to shift to move from one work zone to the next.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.1 to 10000.0 in.
 

Examples:
 l If this setting has the same value as Work zone width, then the work zones will not overlap.
 l If this setting has a value less than Work zone width, the work zones will overlap.
 l If this setting has a value greater than Work zone width, unreachable gaps will be created between consecutive work zones.

Note: This setting is intended to work with the Vertical reposition layout - which is not available.

Maximum repositions
This setting limits the number of work zones for any given nest.
 
Range: 0 to 10000

Tip: Set Maximum repositions to 0 to allow an unlimited number of repositions.

Allow forward and backward repositions

Select this setting if your cutting machine can reposition both forward and backwards along the same axis. Clear this setting if your
machine can only reposition in one direction.
 

Effect of "Allow forward and backward repositions" on the active cut sequence rule:
 
When this setting is selected, the active cut sequence rule will be completed such that:
 1. All tasks in Step 1 will be completed as the machine repositions from the first work zone to the last (repositioning in the "pos-
itive" direction).
 2. Any tasks in Step 2 would then be completed as the machine repositions from the last work zone to the first (repositioning in
the "negative" direction).
 3. Any tasks in Step 3 would then be completed in the "positive" direction - like Step 1.
 4. etc..
 
When this setting is cleared, each step in the active cut sequence rule will be completed such that:

- 99 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. All tasks in Step 1 will be completed as the machine repositions from the first work zone to the last (repositioning in the "pos-
itive" direction).
 2. When all tasks in Step 1 is complete, the machine will reposition to the first work zone.
 3. Any tasks in Step 2 would then be completed in the "positive" direction.
 4. etc...
 
For more information about cut sequence steps and tasks, see "Cut Sequence Rules settings" on page 125.

 
Allow one crop for each Work Zone
This setting is available only if you have the Work Zones module. Normally, only one crop is allowed per nest. Select this setting to allow
one crop for each work zone.
 

How do I access this page?

 l Settings > click Work Zones

- 100 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Nesting settings
General Settings
Nest resolution
This setting controls many aspects of nesting (positioning parts, conflict checking, ...) because it specifies how accurate you want
ProNest to be. There is a trade-off between accuracy and speed. Smaller nest resolutions can result in tighter nests and better conflict
checking but will cause most operations to run slower.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.01 to 1.0 in. (0.254 to 25.4 mm)
Recommended Value: 0.1 in. (2.54 mm)
 
Nesting home
This setting represents the point of origin used for automatic nesting. All nesting strategies will begin nesting from this point. This is
also the corner of the plate to which parts will be bumped during manual nesting. The location specified can be interpreted as coordin-
ate (0, 0) and will be displayed in the nesting area with a blue target symbol.
 
Choices: Lower Left, Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Right, Same as Machine Home

Note:
When Same as Machine Home is selected, a blue and yellow target ( ) symbol representing both the Nesting Home and
Machine home will be displayed in the nesting area.

Do not ignore leads

Take leads into account when determining part spacing during manual or automatic nesting. This will result in the most space between
pierce points and neighboring parts.
 
Ignore all leads
If this is selected, ProNest will ignore leads when determining part spacing during manual or automatic nesting. This allows ProNest to
create a tighter nest but will most likely require movement of the leads to new locations where they avoid neighboring profiles.
 
Ignore lead sizes smaller than n% of part separation
Leads smaller than a user-defined percentage of the part separation can be ignored during manual and automatic nesting. This is use-
ful in cases where some leads/pierces are insignificant and should not affect the spacing between parts, but others are larger and
should not be ignored, in case they cause real conflicts with neighboring parts.
 
For the purposes of this setting, lead size refers to the perpendicular distance from the part edge to the outermost point on the lead,
including any pierce separation.
 

Lead size

- 101 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
When lead size is smaller than the specified percentage of the part separation, leads will be ignored, allowing parts to be nested closer
together:

Two nested parts, spaced according to the Part Separation (1). Note that because lead size is small enough, the lead (and
pierce separation) is ignored during nesting, allowing for a tighter nest.
 
When lead size is larger than the specified percentage of the part separation, the leads will not be ignored during nesting. This may be
the case when cutting thicker material.

Because of the larger lead size, these two parts are spaced farther apart. The lead (and pierce separation) is not ignored dur-
ing nesting, so that the pierce doesn't interfere with the neighboring part.

Reverse cut direction on mirror

When a part is mirrored on the nest (either manually or by automatic nesting) one of two things can happen to the cut direction:
 1. The cut direction can remain the same. This means that clockwise cuts will remain clockwise. Clear this check box to maintain
the same cut direction during mirror operations.
 2. The cut direction will reverse. This means that clockwise cuts will change to counter-clockwise cuts. Kerf is adjusted accord-
ingly. Select this check box to reverse the cut direction during mirror operations.
Allow nesting outside the crop
If this setting is selected, parts that are nested outside the crop (in the remnant) will not be shown in conflict.
 

- 102 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Interactive (Manual) Nesting

Nudge distance
This setting defines the distance a part moves when it is nudged.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.1 to 10000 in. (5.0 to 254000 mm)
Recommended Value: 0.1 in. (2.54 mm)
 
To nudge a selected part:
 l Hold the SHIFT key and click one of the bump handles ( ).
-or-
 l Hold the SHIFT key and press one of the arrow keys.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > click Nesting

- 103 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

AutoNest settings
Pattern Array Settings
Default pattern array strategy
When ProNest is started, Pattern Array will use this strategy until a different strategy is selected. All strategies use several techniques to
calculate an optimal pattern of the selected part or group (including spacing and orientation). Once the optimal pattern is calculated,
ProNest arrays the parts using that pattern.
 
Choices: Basic, Intermediate, Advanced
 
The difference between these three choices is speed and utilization. The Basic strategy will be much faster than the Advanced strategy,
but it will not attempt nearly as many part orientations. In many cases, the Advanced strategy will find a tighter pattern than the Basic
strategy.

Advanced: Each of these strategies is defined by a group of settings. To edit these strategies, open the Pattern Array Strategies dialog
by clicking on the Edit Strategies button in the "Pattern Array Settings" section.

Treat parts with identical exteriors as the same part

During Pattern Array nesting, parts with identical exterior profiles will be treated as though they are the same part (even though their
interior profiles may differ). These parts will be arrayed together on the nest.
 
Recommended Value: On

Note: This setting applies to pattern array as well as to all true shape automatic nesting strategies (IntelliChoice and Strategies 1-
10).

AutoNest Settings
Straight edge ratio
This is used in estimating the area needed on the last plate of a nest, which tries to create a straight edge of parts for cropping. The higher
the estimated utilization, the higher the number. (i.e., Rectangles nest easily and neatly, therefore the straight edge factor would be
higher than a nest of odd shaped parts.
 
Units: Percentage (%)
Range: 50 to 100%
Recommended Value: 100%
 
Only create new nests
Select this to have automatic nesting begin on a new nest, instead of beginning on the current nest. ProNest will not fill any existing
nests before it starts to create new nests.
 
When cleared, ProNest will begin AutoNest on the current nest.

Note: This setting is available only if you have the Automatic Nesting option.

Strategy

Note: These strategies are available only if you have the Automatic Nesting option.

- 104 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

When ProNest is first started, this value will be used when AutoNest is run. The AutoNest Setup dialog will use this value as its default for
"Strategy".
 
Strategies available:

IntelliChoice
This method of automatic nesting is designed to make advanced level nesting decisions based on the available parts in
the part list. IntelliChoice is a flexible approach that can choose between different nesting strategies, different part sets
and different regions of the nest to achieve optimal nesting results.

Rectangular
Rectangular nesting is a nesting strategy where ProNest places an imaginary rectangular border around each part. The
parts are then nested in such a way that no part overlaps into the rectangular border of another part.
 
To create a nest, ProNest simply nests the parts one at a time, in the order they appear in the Part List task pane.

Rectangular Optimization
Rectangular optimization uses the same rules as Rectangular nesting for placing parts. The strategy, however, is more com-
plicated and time consuming.
 
To create a nest, this strategy tries to determine which parts fit together best. Parts that fit together into efficient units
(kits) are remembered and used several times. During this strategy, ProNest also looks ahead a few steps for each nested
part - to determine if each placement is truly optimal

Strategies 1 - 10
Strategies 1 - 10 are all very similar. They are different from Rectangular nesting in that they use the part's true shape when
determining where to place it - instead of using the part's rectangular region. This means that parts can be nested closer
together, interlocked with other parts, or be placed inside other parts.
 
Each of these strategies employs different rules when nesting parts. Some will try fewer part orientations and others will
attempt some of the arraying algorithms (pattern array, CLC array). As a strategy tries more possibilities the time needed to
create a nest increases.
 
When deciding which strategy to use, keep in mind that the lower-numbered strategies are faster but not as thorough,
whereas the higher-numbered strategies are more thorough but somewhat slower. It may be useful to experiment with sev-
eral strategies in order to find the one gives you the best results.

Advanced: Each of these strategies (except Rectangular and IntelliChoice) is defined by a group of settings. To edit these strategies,
open the AutoNest Strategies dialog by clicking on the Edit Strategies button in the "AutoNest Settings" section.

Cut each nest the maximum number of times

If this is checked, ProNest will generate a nest and then calculate how many times that nest can be cut with the parts that remain.
 
IntelliChoice should include common line cutting

When IntelliChoice is the selected strategy, this setting can be selected to try to automatically create CLC arrays during AutoNest.

Note: An individual part's Allow CLC array property must be enabled for the part to be CLC arrayed during automatic nesting.

- 105 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

IntelliChoice should dynamically align parts

When IntelliChoice is the selected strategy, rectangular parts will be dynamically aligned with bridging or common line cutting, based on
the strategy selected in Dynamic Align settings.

Note: An individual part's Allow dynamic align property must be enabled for the part to be dynamically aligned during automatic
nesting.

Moving Leads (AutoNest and Pattern Array)

Strategy
While parts are nested during automatic nesting or during pattern array, leads will be moved on each nested part to the location specified
by this setting.
 
Choices: Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Right, Lower Left, Top, Right, Bottom, Left

Note: This setting only applies to parts that have their Allow leads to move property selected.

Automatically move leads

If this is selected, ProNest will move each part’s leads to the relative location specified by the Moving Leads Strategy setting.

Note: This setting only applies to parts that have their Allow leads to move property selected.

Move interior leads

If this is checked, ProNest will move interior leads according to the same rules it uses for exterior leads.  Otherwise, interior leads are left
alone.
 

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click Nesting > click AutoNest
 

- 106 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Pattern Array Strategies

The Pattern Array Strategies dialog allows you to modify each of the three available strategies: Basic, Intermediate, and Advanced.
 
To open the Pattern Array Strategies dialog:
 1. Go to the AutoNest settings page.
 2. Click the Edit Strategies button in the Pattern Array Settings section.
 
At the top of the dialog is a combo box that displays the current pattern array strategy.
 
To edit the settings for a particular pattern array strategy:
 l In the Strategy box, select either Basic, Intermediate, or Advanced.

<Strategy> Settings

Note: The section name will change to match the current pattern array strategy. If Intermediate is selected, then the section would
read "Intermediate Settings."

Cluster building technique

This setting allows you to choose how good of a pattern you want created. The Basic technique builds a pattern in the least amount of
time. Advanced often takes longer, but usually produces a tighter pattern.
 
Choices: Basic, Intermediate, Advanced
 
Basic
A good technique for simple parts like rectangles.
 
Intermediate
This technique does everything Basic does, plus it will try to optimize the size of the pattern. It will also try to build a "three part" cluster.
 
Advanced
This technique works best for complicated parts. It does everything Intermediate does, but uses more attempts to create a tighter cluster.
 
Pattern rotation increment
This is the angle by which to rotate the part before attempting to create the pattern. With a smaller angle, more patterns are attempted,
which increases the time needed to find a good pattern.
 
Units: Degrees
Range: 0 to 90°

Tip: For circular and rectangular parts, a value of 90° usually suffices, although 45° can help depending on lead placement. For other
parts, 45° is generally a good value. Sometimes a value of 15° or even 5° can result in significantly better patterns.

Cluster resolution (% of nest resolution)

This setting represents the percentage of the nest resolution to use when creating the pattern. Smaller values will create tighter patterns,
but will take longer to create. Values over 100% represent resolutions greater than the nest resolution.
 
Units: Percentage
Range: 20 to 500%
 

- 107 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Try extra row

If this check box is selected, an attempt will be made to squeeze an extra row in the pattern. This will increase the time required to gen-
erate the pattern.
 
Try extra column
If this check box is selected, an attempt will be made to squeeze an extra column in the pattern. This will increase the time required to gen-
erate the pattern.
 
Try mixed patterns
If this check box is selected, ProNest will try to create the optimal combination of two patterns, either side by side or one above the other.
 

- 108 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

AutoNest Strategies
The AutoNest Strategies dialog allows you to edit the settings that define the behavior of each strategy.
 
To open the AutoNest Strategies dialog:
 1. Go to the AutoNest settings page.
 2. Click the Edit Strategies button in the AutoNest Settings section.
 
On the left-hand side of the AutoNest Strategies dialog is the list of available strategies. If you have purchased the Automatic Nesting
module, the Rectangular Optimization option will appear at the top of this list followed by ten strategies called "Strategy 1" through
"Strategy 10".
 
To edit the settings for a strategy:
 l Select the strategy on the left that you want to edit.
On the right, the settings for that strategy will appear.
For more information about editing Rectangular Optimization settings, see "AutoNest Strategies - Rectangular Optimization" on page
110.
For more information about editing all other strategies, see "AutoNest Strategies - True Shape" on page 112.

Renaming strategies

All of the strategies (with the exception of Rectangular Optimization) can be named to whatever you want.
 
To rename a strategy:
 1. In the list on the left-hand side, select a strategy to rename.
 2. After the strategy is selected, click on its name.
The name of the strategy will become surrounded by an edit box - indicating that you can change it.
 3. Type the new name for the strategy and press ENTER.

Tip: You can also right-click a strategy name to rename it. When you do, select Rename and then provide the new name for the
strategy.

Saving and discarding changes

All changes made to settings in the AutoNest Strategies dialog are temporary. This includes changing strategy names.
 
To accept your changes:
 l Exit the dialog by clicking OK.
 
To discard your changes:
 l Exit the dialog by clicking Cancel.

- 109 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

AutoNest Strategies - Rectangular Optimization

Rectangular optimization is best used with parts that are rectangular in shape.

General
Cutoff nest utilization
The percentage of the plate that must be used before rectangular optimization is done. The first time a configuration of parts meets or
exceeds this value, the nest is considered done. Having a high value leads to nests with high utilization, but they can take longer to pro-
duce. Having a low value finishes each nest quickly, but the nests tend to have lower utilizations.
 
Units: Percentage
Range: 0 to 100%
Recommended Value: 95%
 
Stack cutoff utilization
The percentage of the region of each individual horizontal or vertical stack of rectangularly optimized clusters that must be occupied by
parts before that stack will be chosen.
 
Units: Percentage
Range: 0 to 100%
Recommended Value: 90%
 
Cutoff time
This is the amount of time spent trying to nest multiple part combinations. Once this time limit is reached, multiple part combinations are
"deactivated" and only single part combinations (i.e. the parts in the part bin) are considered. The larger the value, the longer each nest
will take but it will result in better nests in some cases.
 
Units: Time (seconds)
Range: 0 to 60 s
Recommended Value: 2 s
 
Look ahead
Number of recursive levels in which to try rectangular optimization within the original available region. The larger this number, the more
trials are attempted and the tighter the resulting nest.
 
Range: 0 to 99
Recommended Value: 99
 
Part fit ratio
The minimum percentage of a part’s bounding rectangle that must be filled by the exterior profile of the part for the part to be con-
sidered rectangular. The higher this number, the fewer parts will qualify as rectangular, but the nests will have much higher utilizations.
Low values for this setting will cause more parts to be used for rectangular optimization, but the resulting nests will have much lower util-
izations.
 
Units: Percentage
Range: 50 to 100%
Recommended Value: 90%
 
Build vertical stacks

- 110 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

If this check box is selected when a rectangular cluster is placed, ProNest will try to rectangularly optimize in the region directly above it.
 
Build horizontal stacks
If this check box is selected when a rectangular cluster is placed, ProNest will try to rectangularly optimize in the region directly to the
side of it.

Combinations
Maximum parts per combination
The maximum number of parts that ProNest will include in each combination it builds for rectangular optimization.
 
Range: 0 to 99
Recommended Value: 6 - 10
 
Maximum combinations
This setting is the maximum number of combinations that will be created when creating candidate rectangular clusters for rectangular
optimization.
 
Range: 0 to 1000
Recommended Value: 500
 
Minimum combination utilization
This setting is the minimum percentage that a rectangular cluster must occupy of its bounding rectangle for it to be kept as a viable can-
didate for rectangular optimization.
 
Units: Percentage
Range: 0 to 100%
Recommended Value: 90%

Note: Clicking the Default button on this page will revert back to the last saved AutoNest Strategy settings.

- 111 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

AutoNest Strategies - True Shape

Nesting direction
This section contains two options: Vertical or Horizontal.
 
Vertical
Nesting will give preference to filling the plate from top to bottom before extending the nest horizontally. In general, this nesting dir-
ection will work towards completing the nest in such a way that it can be finished with a vertical crop.
 
Horizontal
Nesting will give preference to filling the plate from side to side first before extending the nest vertically. In general, this nesting direction
will work towards completing the nest in such a way that it can be finished with a horizontal crop.

Nesting approaches
Rectangular Optimization
Select this check box if rectangular optimization should be attempted during automatic nesting.
 
Pattern Array
Select this check box if pattern array should be used during automatic nesting.
 
Pattern Array strategy
The name of the pattern array strategy used during automatic nesting will appear to the right of the Pattern Array check box.
 
Choices: Basic, Intermediate, Advanced
 
To edit the strategy used:
 1. Click on the name of the strategy (its a hyperlink).
 2. Select the strategy you want from the list.

Note: This setting is active only if Pattern Array is selected.

Fill using Pattern Array

Select this check box if ProNest should attempt to fill unused regions of the plate with pattern arrays during automatic nesting.

Note: This setting is active only if Pattern Array is selected.

CLC Array
Select this check box if CLC array should be used during automatic nesting.

Note: An individual part's Allow CLC array property must be enabled for the part to be CLC arrayed during automatic nesting.

Fill using CLC Array

Select this check box if ProNest should attempt to fill unused regions of the plate with CLC arrays during automatic nesting.

Note: This setting is active only if CLC Array is selected.

- 112 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dynamic Align
Select this check box if dynamic align should be used during automatic nesting. Rectangular parts will be dynamically aligned with
bridging or common line cutting, based on the strategy selected in Dynamic Align settings.

Note: An individual part's Allow dynamic align property must be enabled for the part to be dynamically aligned during automatic
nesting.

Profile Nesting Options

Maximum part orientations to try
This slider controls the maximum number of rotations to try when placing each part. Some parts, like rectangles, don't require many ori-
entations to try and find a good fit on the nest. They can be nested well using Level 1 - with only 90° rotations. Some other parts may
need more orientations tried before a good fit can be found. As the levels increase (by moving the slider down), more orientations are
tried for each part before moving on. While this can improve the utilization on the nest, it will increase the time needed to place each
part.
 
Choices: Level 1 - 7

Note: As each level is selected, the description to the right of the slider will change.

Try orientations in groups of <value>

The number of orientations to try when placing a part during automatic nesting for each attempted rotation angle.
 
Choices: Two, Four
 
Two
Two orientations for each rotation angle will be tried (the chosen orientation and the chosen orientation + 180 degrees).
 
Four
Four orientations for each rotation angle will be tried (the chosen orientation, plus the chosen orientation rotated 90, 180, and 270
degrees).
 
Rotate to minimize part area
Select this setting if the parts should be rotated to minimize their bounding rectangles before they are nested.
 
Tight fit
Select this check box if ProNest should try to "wiggle" parts after they've been nested to get them to fit tighter. This often results in a bet-
ter nest, but it does take more time.
 
Advanced Common Line Cut
Select this check box if common line cut parts should be built as the parts are nested.

Important: This setting is independent of the CLC Array setting.

 
The following settings are in a group called Fit Evaluation (a measure of how well a newly nested part is placed) :
Part interlock
Every newly nested part interlocks with existing parts on the nest. Sometimes, the amount of interlock is zero - meaning that the new part

- 113 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

doesn't really interlock with existing parts. Select this check box to use the amount of part interlock as a measure of how good the fit is.
 
Nest interlock
Every newly nested part interlocks with the region of the nest that already contains nested parts. Sometimes, the amount of interlock is
zero - meaning that the new part doesn't really interlock with existing region of nested parts. Select this check box to use the amount of
nest interlock as a measure of how good the fit is.
 
Plate usage
Nesting a part will sometimes extend the region of already nested parts by some distance along the X axis. The region of nested parts will
"grow." Select this check box to use this distance as a measure of how good the fit is.
 

Note: Clicking the Default button on this page will revert back to the last saved AutoNest Strategy settings.

- 114 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Optimization settings
Optimized nesting tries one or more nesting strategies with one or more plate sizes to find the best plate and strategy for the parts remain-
ing in the part list at any given time. The user has full control over the sheet selection methodology and the nesting strategies to use, as
well as whether or not costing factors are included when determining the best nesting result.

Optimization Settings
Plate selection criteria
Algorithm to use when selecting plates to use for each nesting trial.
 
Choices: (None), Select One Plate Size, Select Best Plate For Each Nest
 
(None) - Plates will be nested in order. The first plate in the plate list will be optimized first, then the second plate, and so on.
 
Select One Plate Size - All nests created during optimization will be created from a single plate size.
 
Select Best Plate For Each Nest - All nesting trials will be performed on all plates in the plate list. The best result will be chosen, then nest-
ing trials with the remaining parts will be performed on the remaining plates and the best result chosen, etc.
 
Cut-off utilization
When a nesting trial produces a nested utilization equal to or greater than this value, that result is automatically chosen. If no nesting tri-
als exceed this value, then the best overall utilization is chosen.
 
Units: Percentage (%)
Range: 0 to 100%
Recommended Value: 95%
 
Nesting strategies to use
This setting displays the nesting strategies that have been chosen to use for the nesting trials during optimization.
 

 
To select strategies for optimization:
 1. Click on the down-arrow in the Nesting strategies to use box.
 2. Select each nesting strategy that should be attempted during optimization.
 3. Click OK to accept the selection.
 
Use straight crop utilization on last nest

- 115 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

During optimization (or any kind of automatic nesting), the last nest is usually different from all previously generated nests. By the time
the last nest is generated, the part list has been almost completely depleted and the remaining parts cannot fill an entire nest. When
optimization calculates the best nest it uses the nest's utilization as a major determining factor. The last nest - which is usually only par-
tially filled - will have a poor utilization.
 
If Use straight crop utilization on last nest is selected, the utilization of the last nest will not be calculated with respect to the full plate
size. Instead, an imaginary straight crop line will be used and the utilization will be calculate with respect to the used portion of the nest -
up to the crop line. Calculating the utilization in this way will allow optimization to select the "tightest" nest from the available candidates
for the last nest.
 
Must nest all priority 1 parts on first nest
If this setting is selected, all parts with a priority of 1 will be nested on the first nest. If all of the priority-1 parts don't fit on the first nest, a
message will appear indicating there is no optimize solution.
 
Must nest all parts
If this setting is selected, all optimization results will be discarded unless all parts can be nested.
 
Use filler parts when calculating utilization
Select this setting if you wish filler parts (a part with a priority of 99) to be included in utilization calculations. Otherwise, these parts are
ignored when computing a nest's utilization.
 
Include production costs
Select this setting if production costs (such as the cost of consumables) should be included when determining the best trial.

Material Costs
Include material costs
Select this setting if the cost of the material used (for the nested parts) should be included when determining the best trial.
 
 
The following settings provide a way to assign importance to trials nested on remnants vs. those nested on full plates. The smaller the per-
centage multiplier, the smaller the effective material cost will be.
 
These settings are only active if Include material costs is selected:
 
Full Plates: Use a cost factor of <value>%
When the cost of a particular full plate is calculated, it is multiplied by this cost factor.
 
To edit the cost factor:
 1. Click on the current value - its a hyperlink.
 2. Enter a cost factor in the box.
 3. Click OK.
 
Cost factors for remnants
Remnants can have three different cost factors. These cost factors can be used to adjust the material cost in favor of using remnants. Fur-
thermore, older remnants can be made to appear "cheaper" to use than younger remnants.
 
The first value defines the base cost factor for remnants:
 

- 116 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Remnants: Use a cost factor of <cost factor>%.

 
All remnants will use this first cost factor unless they qualify for one of the other two cost factors. These other cost factors are used for
remnants of at lease a certain age:
 
If older than <age period> days, use a cost factor of <age factor>%.
 
To edit any of these values:
 1. Click on the current value - its a hyperlink.
 2. Enter a new value in the box.
 3. Click OK.
How do I get here in ProNest?
 n Settings > click Optimization

- 117 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Cut Sequence settings

Cut Sequence Settings
Type
This defines the method used to create a nest's cut sequence. Within the rules for each type, the cut sequence will always start closest to
the cut sequence home. It will then gradually move away from the home.
 
Choices: Vertical, Horizontal, By Number of Torches, By Torch Spacing, By Sequence, By Heat Dissipation, One-Way Vertical, Heat
Dissipation By Number of Torches
 
Vertical
First, the nest is divided into vertical bands (see Cut Sequence Settings: Zone type). The vertical cut sequence type will create a
meandering pattern as it cuts up one vertical band and down the next.
 

 
Horizontal
First, the nest is divided into horizontal bands (see Cut Sequence Settings: Zone type). The horizontal cut sequence type will cre-
ate a meandering pattern as it cuts across one horizontal band and back the next.
 

 
By Number of Torches
This is a variation of the Vertical cut sequence type. Parts are added to the cut sequence in groups - based on their number of
torches. First, all parts with the highest number of torches are added to the cut sequence - based on the Vertical cut sequence
type. Then, all parts with the next highest number of torches are added. This process continues until all parts with one torch are
added to the cut sequence.
 
By Torch Spacing
This is a variation of the Vertical cut sequence type. Parts are added to the cut sequence in groups - based on their torch spacing.
First, all parts with the largest torch spacing are added to the cut sequence - based on the Vertical cut sequence type. Then, all
parts with the next largest torch spacing are added. This process continues until all parts with one torch are added to the cut
sequence.
 
By Sequence

- 118 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Parts are added to the cut sequence in the same order as they were nested.
 
By Heat Dissipation
Creating a cut sequence by heat dissipation will distribute the heat input across the nest to avoid overheating. This usually results
in a randomized cut sequence. Selecting this type will activate the Heat Dissipation settings.
 
One-Way Vertical
This is a variation of the Vertical cut sequence type. Instead of alternating the direction by cutting up one vertical band and down
the next, One-Way Vertical will only cut upwards through each vertical band.
 

 
Heat Dissipation By Number of Torches
This is a variation of the By Heat Dissipation cut sequence type. When multiple torches are used on a nest, normal heat dis-
sipation can cause an unacceptable number of torch changes (number and/or spacing). Heat Dissipation By Number of Torches
will perform the normal heat dissipation on all parts on the nest that use a particular number of torches and spacing. When all
those parts are cut, heat dissipation will be used on the next set of parts sharing the same torch information, and so on...
 
Selecting this type will activate the Heat Dissipation settings.
 
Cut sequence home
The Cut sequence home defines the plate corner where the cut sequence will start. Usually, this will be the same as Nesting home -
found on the Nesting settings page.
 
Choices: Same as Machine Home, Lower Left, Upper Left, Lower Right, Upper Right
 
Sort point
All cut sequence types will create a cut sequence that starts cutting parts closest to the cut sequence home and finishes with parts
farthest from the home. To think of this another way, parts are sorted by distance from the cut sequence home. For sorting purposes, the
distance is measured from the home to a point on the part - the sort point. The sort point can be either the start (pierce) point or the geo-
metric center of the part.
 
Choices: Start Point, Center Point
 
Zone type
With Type set to Vertical, Horizontal, or One-Way Vertical, this controls whether zones (bands) should be applied in fixed locations
equally across the nest or automatically adjusted based on where parts are nested.
 
Choices: Variable, Fixed

Variable
Zone width will be automatically adjusted based on the position of parts on the nest. ProNest will attempt to select zone widths that cre-
ate the best cut sequence.

- 119 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

A nest using a Vertical, Variable cut sequence

 
Fixed
The nest will be divided into bands of equal size, based on the number specified in the Zones setting.
 

A nest using a Vertical, Fixed cut sequence, with Zones set to 3.

 
Use serpentine sequencing within zones
With Type set to Vertical, Horizontal, or One-Way Vertical and the Zone type set to Variable, when this setting is selected the cut
sequence direction will alternate back and forth within a given zone, following an S-shaped or winding path. In many cases, this can yield
shorter traverse motions between cuts.
 

A Vertical, Variable cut sequence with Serpentine sequencing

 
Zones
With Type set to Vertical, Horizontal, or One-Way Vertical and the Zone type set to Fixed, the nest is divided into bands of equal size
when creating the cut sequence. The number of bands is defined by Zones. The direction of the bands depends on the cut sequence
Type. Most cut sequence types will cut all parts within a zone band before moving on to the next one.

- 120 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Range: 1 to 99
Recommended Value: 20
 

Heat Dissipation
Creating a cut sequence based on heat dissipation is very different from the other cut sequence types. Before the first part is added to the
cut sequence, a grid is generated on the nest. This grid is used to determine which part should be cut next. Each cell in the grid has a heat
value. As parts are cut, the corresponding cell's heat value will increase. To create a cut sequence, ProNestcan either randomly cut from
the coolest cells in the grid (those with the lowest heat value) or cut at a specific interval between parts.
 
Part interval
The method in which to apply the apply the heat dissipation cut sequence.
 
Choices: Random, 2 to 10

If set to a numerical value, ProNest will first establish a normal (non-heat dissipation) cut sequence and then cut every nth part in the
sequence. For instance, selecting "3" would cut the first part and then skip forward and cut every 3rd part. A higher number will generally
result in more space between parts and less change of heat distortion, but will also result in longer traverse distances. A lower number
will increase the chance of cutting in a hotter region of the plate, but will reduce traverse distance.
 
Selecting "Random" will apply the cut sequence based on the X and Y grid spacing and Minimum distance specified.
 
X grid spacing
Specifies the heat dissipation grid size along the length of the plate (ProNest's x-axis).
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 20.0 in.

Note: This setting is activated only when Part interval is set to Random.

Y grid spacing
Specifies the heat dissipation grid size along the width of the plate (ProNest's y-axis).
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 20.0 in.

Note: This setting is activated only when Part interval is set to Random.

Minimum distance
Whenever possible, the next part added to the cut sequence will be at least this distance away from the current part.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.

Note: This setting is activated only when Part interval is set to Random.

- 121 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: Heat Dissipation settings are usually inactive.  To activate them, you must set Type to one of the heat dissipation choices.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > click Cut Sequence

- 122 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Cut Sequence: Interior Profile settings

This settings page gives you control over the sequencing of interior profiles, including scribes, punches, cuts, and text marking.
 
The sequence of interior profiles is calculated when:
 l A CAD file is loaded
 l Parts are bridged or chained together
 l Parts are common line cut with one another
 l Profiles are re-ordered for collision avoidance

Important: Once the interior profiles of a part are sequenced, they are never re-sequenced unless one of the above events occurs.  
This means that changes to the Interior Profile settings will not have any immediate effect on any nests in the job.

Strategy
This defines the method used to create a part's interior cut sequence.
 
Choices: Lead to Lead, Center to Center, Vertical, Horizontal, Heat Dissipation

Lead to Lead - The next profile to be sequenced will be the one whose start point is closest to the end point of the current profile.
 
Center to Center -The next profile to be sequenced will be the one whose center point is closest to the center point of the current profile.
 
Vertical - Interior profiles will be sequenced in a generally upward (or downward) direction.
 
Horizontal - Interior profiles will be sequenced in a generally left to right (or right to left) direction.
 
Heat Dissipation - An algorithm which seeks to limit the amount of heat generated in any particular zone will be used to sequence the
profiles.
 
Find the best strategy
Selecting this option will try all strategies (except Heat Dissipation) and use the optimal result for cut sequencing.
 
Sequence all True Hole cuts first (by part)
When selected, True Hole interiors will be cut before any other cut profiles on a given part. This reduces gas purge time when compared
to alternating between cutting True Hole and non-True Hole features on a part.
 

Intensity level for this strategy

A strategy's intensity level reflects the number of computations when generating cut sequence paths. There is a trade-off between intens-
ity and speed. A lower intensity level will work faster, but will compute fewer sequence paths than a higher intensity level. By default, the
intensity level is set to Low.
 
You can use the slider to set intensity level for a selected strategy.
 
Choices: Low, Medium-Low, Medium, Medium-High, High

Heat Dissipation
Creating a cut sequence based on heat dissipation is very different from the other cut sequence strategies.  Before the first interior profile
is added to the cut sequence, a grid is generated on the part.  This grid is used to determine which interior profile should be cut next.  

- 123 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Each cell in the grid has a heat value.  As interior profiles are cut, the corresponding cell's heat value will increase.  To create a cut
sequence, ProNest will randomly cut from the coolest cells in the grid (those with the lowest heat value).

Note: The Heat Dissipation settings are active only when Strategy is set to "Heat Dissipation."

X grid spacing
Specifies the heat dissipation grid size along the length of the part ProNest's x-axis).
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 24.0 in.
 
Y grid spacing
Specifies the heat dissipation grid size along the width of the part (ProNest's y-axis).
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 12.0 in.
 
Minimum distance
Whenever possible, the next interior profile added to the cut sequence will be at least this distance away from the current interior profile.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
 

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click Cut Sequence > click Interior Profile

- 124 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Cut Sequence Rules settings

This settings page displays all the cut sequence rules that are available for the current machine.

Available Rules
The list of available rules is at the top of this page. The first rule is always called "Use settings instead of rules". By default, this is the only
rule in the list.

Use settings instead of rules

By default, this is the Active Rule (the rule used when generating a nest's cut sequence) . The active rule is marked with a checkmark ( ).
When this rule is selected, the bottom-half of the settings page displays a section called Cut Sequence Settings. This section contains all
the normal settings that help control the cut sequence when a true cut sequence rule is not in use. They are displayed here as "repeated"
settings, as each of them already exists on another settings page.
 
The following settings are displayed in the Cut Sequence Settings section:
 

From the CNC Output page: Punch/Scribe first

Order punches by process
Order scribes by process
Order cuts by process
Ignore for output

From the CNC Output - Pre-pierces page: Pre-pierce by part

From the Skeleton Cut Up - Cut Sequence page: Skeleton Cut Up - Cut sequence order

 
While you can edit these repeated setting on this page, you can also jump to the settings page that they belong to.
 
To jump to a settings page that contains a particular setting:

 l Click on the Settings button to the right of the setting in question.

 

Creating and using true cut sequence rules

True cut sequence rules are far more flexible than using the regular settings. For a full explanation of how a cut sequence rule is built and
how it works, see "Editing a cut sequence rule" on page 128.

Creating a new cut sequence rule

There are two ways to create a new rule - based on existing cut sequence settings or from scratch.
 
Creating a rule from your existing settings is the quickest way to create a new rule, as it will already contain tasks and actions. This
method will use your existing settings to create a rule, which you can then edit as needed later on.
 1. While Use settings instead of rules is selected, click Convert this to a Rule. This button is found in the section header titled: "Cut
Sequence Settings".
 2. Type a name for your rule in the box and click OK.
 
To create a new rule from scratch:

- 125 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Click Add.

This will open the New Rule dialog.
 2. Edit your rule and click OK.

Make any rule the Active Rule

 1. In the Available Rules list, select the rule you want to be active.
 2. Click Set as Active Rule.

Note: When a true cut sequence rule is selected, the bottom-half of the settings page shows a view of the rule. This view matches
exactly with the view you see when editing the rule. For a full explanation of how to read and understand a cut sequence rule,
see "Editing a cut sequence rule" on page 128.

Integrate skeleton lines with parts

Skeleton lines and exterior part profiles will be cut together in groups. All skeleton lines intersecting the exterior profile will be cut first,
followed by the exterior profile. The sequence will then move on to the next group of skeleton lines and parts. Selecting this setting
can reduce parts defects due to plate movement as well as collisions with tip-ups.

When cleared, all skeleton lines on a nest are sequenced together (according to the Skeleton Cut-Up - Cut sequence order selected).

Note:  l This setting does not affect the drop order of parts on the nest.
 l When converted to a Cut Sequence Rule, skeleton lines and exterior profiles will be added in the same task.
 l This setting is repeated on the Skeleton Cut-Up: Cut Sequence settings page.

Sequence cuts by part

All cut profiles on a part will be completed before the sequence moves on to the next part. Even if cut profiles are contained in dif-
ferent tasks in a cut sequence rule, they will still be processed part-by-part.
 
Sequence punches and scribes by part
All punch and scribe profiles on a part will be completed before the sequence moves on to the next part.

- 126 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: This setting will override the Punch/scribe first setting.

Sequence pre-pierces by part

All pre-pierces on a part will be completed before the sequence moves on to the next part.

Note: This setting will override the Pre-Pierce by part setting.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click Cut Sequence > click Cut Sequence Rules

- 127 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Editing a cut sequence rule

As you edit a cut sequence rule, you will be using the New Rule / Edit Rule dialog.
 
At the top of the dialog is a view of the rule. This view is the same as in the Cut Sequence Rules setting page, only this one is editable. At
the bottom of this dialog are two lists of actions. On the left is Unsequenced actions. On the right is a list of actions that are assigned to
the selected task in the view above.

The anatomy of a cut sequence rule

Cut sequence rules are built on actions. These actions are grouped into tasks. And finally, if you are using Work Zones, tasks are grouped
into steps. Most of the time, a machine will not support cut sequence steps.

Actions
For the purposes of cut sequencing, an action refers to a specific profile type that can be completed by a single machine process.
 

Profile type Description Completed by Process

Pre-pierce The pierces on a part are considered separate from the rest of the Any cut, punch, or drill process
profile they belong to. Because of this distinction, pre-pierces can
be sequenced independently. To make use of pre-pierces, be sure
that Use pre-pierces is selected on the CNC Output - Pre-pierces
settings page.

Punch Anything completed by a punch process (except pre-pierces). Any punch process

Scribe Anything completed by a scribe process (except Text Marker). Any scribe process

Drilling Anything completed by a drill process (except for pre-pierces). Any drill process
 
Any cutting needed by the "Cut pilot holes on large drill holes"
feature is automatically done prior to drilling.

Text Marker Refers to BUGE text marking device Any cut or scribe process

Exterior profile The main exterior of a part. When the exterior profile is cut, the Any cut process
entire part will drop (unless it is held in place by tabs,
bridges,etc...).

Interior profile Profiles of this type generally refer to holes, of various shapes, Any cut process
that exist inside the part's exterior profile.

Open profile When a profile is open, nothing will drop when it is cut. Profiles of Any cut process
this type can be sequenced independently from either interior or
exterior profiles.

Edge pierce profile When parts are edge pierced, their exterior profile is attached to Any cut process
the plate edge. These profiles qualify as edge pierce profiles.

CLC edge pierce profile When parts share common edges with the plate edge, the exterior Any cut process
profile is attached to the plate edge. These profiles qualify as CNC

- 128 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Profile type Description Completed by Process

edge pierce profiles.

Crop The cut generally made to separate a nest into a skeleton and a Any cut process
remnant.

Exterior skeleton line Exterior skeleton lines are those that touch the plate edge. Any cut process

Interior skeleton line Interior skeleton lines connect parts only. They do not touch the Any cut process
plate edge.

 
Depending on your machine's configuration, several of the profile types can be repeated - once for each process that can complete it.
For example, if a machine has a Gas and a Plasma process, then there would be two separate actions for exterior profiles:
Exterior profile (Gas)
Exterior profile (Plasma)
In the above example, you would be able to sequence exteriors cut with gas independent from exteriors cut with plasma.

Tasks
For the purposes of cut sequencing, a task refers to a collection of actions. Actions within a task are not ordered in any specific way by
the cut sequence rule. However, tasks are ordered within the cut sequence rule. This means that all the actions in the first task will be com-
pleted before moving on to the second task, and so on. Tasks are handled in order from top to bottom.
 
For machines that do not use work zones, a cut sequence rule is truly defined by its tasks. If you need an action (or set of actions) to be
cut before or after other actions, put them in a task. Then, you can sequence the task however you want. For example, to be sure that
interior profiles are cut before exteriors, create a task and assign the interior profile action to that task. Once that is done, the task can be
ordered before the task that contains the exterior profile action.

Note: If Sequence cuts by part is enabled, even if cut profiles are contained in different tasks in a cut sequence rule, they will still
be processed part-by-part. The same applies to punch or scribe profiles in different tasks when Sequence punches and
scribes by part is enabled.

Steps
Lastly, we have the steps. Steps are only needed when using work zones. Otherwise, it is sufficient to define a rule only using tasks and
actions. A step refers to a collection of tasks. Tasks within a step are processed in a specific order. Also, steps are ordered within the cut
sequence rule.

Why steps?
When work zones are used, a nest is generally split into more than one work zone. The machine can then be instructed to reposition from
work zone to work zone until everything is cut. Without steps, a machine would have to fully complete the current work zone before
repositioning to the next work zone. Sometimes it is useful to complete only certain actions in a work zone, then reposition to the next
work zone, and then complete those same actions on the new work zone. After the actions have been completed across the entire nest,
the machine can be instructed to make another pass across the nest - only this time, different actions will be processed. Steps allow a
nest with repositions to be processed in several passes. For example, the first step in a rule may cut all pre-pierces. Regardless of the
actions present in the next step, the machine would be instructed to reposition to all work zones until all pre-pierces are cut. Only then
would it move on to any actions in the next step.

- 129 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Editing the rule (Simple view: Actions and Tasks only)

When you create a new rule, be sure to give it a name.
 
To name your rule:
 l Type a name in the Name box.
 
When a new rule is started, it will be given one empty task: Task 1. At the bottom-left of the New Rule dialog, you will see a list of
unsequenced actions.
 
At the top, select Task 1. Notice that the name of the list at the bottom-right will change to "Task 1 actions". This list will always show the
actions that have been assigned to the task selected above.

Adding and removing tasks

An important aspect of editing a cut sequence rule is adding, arranging, and removing tasks.
 
To add new tasks:
 l Click Add Task.
A new empty task will be inserted after the selected task.
 
To arrange tasks:
 1. Select a task to move.
 2. Click Move Up and the task will move up one place.
OR
 2. Click Move Down and the task will move down one place.
 
To remove a task:
 1. Select a task to remove.
 2. Click Remove.

Assigning and removing actions

The most important aspect of a task is the list of actions it contains.

 
To assign actions to the selected task:
 l Double-click an unsequenced action.
OR

 l Select any number of unsequenced actions and click .

 
To assign all actions to the selected task:

 l Click .

Tip: Regardless of the selected task, you can drag any action from either of the bottom lists into the desired task in the rule view

- 130 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

at the top. Using this feature, you can select a task that contains an action you want to move. Once selected, you can then
drag an action from the list at the bottom-right into the desired task at the top.

 
To remove actions from the selected task:
 l Double-click a task action.
OR

 l Select any number of task actions and click .

 
To remove all actions from the selected task:

 l Click .
When you are done editing your rule, click OK to save your changes and close the Edit Rule dialog.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click Cut Sequence > click Cut Sequence Rules

- 131 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Collision Avoidance settings

Collision Avoidance is intended to eliminate the chance of collisions (a condition where the torch crashes into material that has moved
due to previous cutting) with existing material which can significantly reduce production time. Avoidance paths are generated by a com-
bination of:
 l moving leads
 l routing rapid traverses around potential tip-ups (a small profile that has been cut and is now resting awkwardly on the table -
causing a portion of the cut-out to rest above the rest of the plate)
 l raising the torch - with a full raise

Note: Not all cutting machines differentiate between a partial raise and a full raise.

The settings on this page allow avoidance paths to be generated automatically before NC output is created. You can also edit the avoid-
ance paths directly on the nest.

 l Disable
Turn off collision avoidance.

 l Use settings table

Collision Avoidance will be enabled and applied according to the Collision Avoidance settings table (spreadsheet). Using a spread-
sheet for collision avoidance is useful if you want to apply different collision avoidance settings for different materials in a job or
apply collision avoidance for certain materials and not others.
 
In the box, you can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Collision Avoidance spread-
sheet settings folder (defined in Preferences).

Tip:
To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

To read more, see "Collision Avoidance spreadsheets" on page 234.

 l Use general settings

Collision avoidance will be enabled and applied to all nests according to the general settings specified below.

Note: General settings are also used as a fall-back when a Collision Avoidance settings table is in use but no record can be
matched in that XLS for a given nest. In this scenario, general settings are used for that nest.

General settings
Sequence the interior profiles for an optimal path
Select this setting if generating avoidance paths should re-sequence the interior profiles of each part. Re-sequencing interior profiles may
avoid potential collision situations.

Tip: The sequencing method used by collision avoidance is specified by the sequencing settings found on the "Cut Sequence:
Interior Profile settings" on page 123 page.

Do not create avoidance paths away from exterior profiles

Don’t attempt to create avoidance paths when traversing away from an exterior profile. This setting is used for laser machines only.
 

- 132 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Plate Warping tab

These settings represents the maximum length allowable for a torch-down avoidance path for cuts and scribes. The primary factor in
determining a good value for this setting is the average amount of plate warping present and the relative importance of avoiding tip-ups
compared with the speed of cutting. Also keep in mind that an avoidance path may take much longer than a direct full raise path.
Exterior cuts
Maximum length allowable for a torch-down avoidance path for exterior cuts. 
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.001 to 10000.0 in.
 
Interior cuts
Maximum length allowable for a torch-down avoidance path for interior cuts. 
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.001 to 10000.0 in.
 
Scribes 
Maximum length allowable for a torch-down avoidance path for scribes.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.001 to 10000.0 in.
 

Tip-Ups tab
Ignore tabbed profiles
Select this setting if you want to treat tabbed profiles as if they cannot tip up and therefore do not need to be avoided.
 
Maximum profile size to avoid
This setting determines the largest profile size that collision avoidance will try to avoid. Collision avoidance will try to avoid any profiles
with a length or width smaller than this threshold value. Profiles with lengths and widths greater than this threshold value will not be
avoided.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.001 to 10000.0 in.
 
Torch diameter 
This setting represents the diameter of the torch head and is used as a safety margin around profiles when creating avoidance paths. It
should be treated as the maximum diameter of the torch head that could collide with a tip-up.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.001 to 10.0 in.
 
Maximum number to avoid
This setting determines the maximum number of profiles that should be avoided when traversing between profiles.
 
Range: 0 to 10
Recommended Value: 3

- 133 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Advanced: This setting has a major impact on the time needed to calculate avoidance paths. Smaller values will cause collision avoid-
ance to run much faster than larger values.

Avoidance ratio
This setting is used when determining which type of path is more desirable in a given situation: an avoidance path or a direct full-raise
path. A larger avoidance ratio will tend to select a direct full-raise more often than the avoidance path.
 
Units: Percentage (%)
Range: 0 to 100%
 
Full raise/lower time
This setting represents the average amount of time required to fully retract the cutting head on a full raise and then fully lower the cut-
ting head when it is turned back on.
 
Units: Time
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 s
 
Partial raise/lower time
This setting represents the average amount of time required to partially retract the torch for a partial raise and then fully lower the torch
when it is turned back on.
 
Units: Time
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 s
 

Leads Positioning tab

Automatically move exterior leads for avoidance
Select this setting if generating avoidance paths should automatically move leads on exterior profiles.  By moving leads, it is possible that
straight-line paths can be found that do not pass over potential tip-up situations.
 
Automatically move interior leads for avoidance
Select this setting if generating avoidance paths should automatically move leads on interior profiles.
 

Note: The following settings are active only when Automatically move exterior/interior leads for avoidance is selected.

Don't move leads for the last interior profile (in each part)
Select this setting to prevent leads from being moved on the last interior profile of each part. This setting is used for laser machines only
and may lead to fewer profile subroutines.
 
When moving leads, try: Corners 
Select this setting if leads should be placed on profile corners when automatically moving leads for avoidance.
 
When moving leads, try: Perimeter points (calculated)
Select this setting if leads should be placed on perimeter points (including corners) on the profile when automatically moving leads for
avoidance. As you move the slider to the right, the location of perimeter points will change and the number of points to try will increase.
 
Snap tolerance

- 134 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

When moving leads for collision avoidance, this setting is used to determine how close to a corner a selected start point has to be before
the leads are adjusted to be exactly at that corner. Making this value large makes it more likely that only corner lead locations will be
chosen. Making this value small makes it less likely that a corner lead location will be chosen when moving the leads on any particular
profile.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.
 
Trim leads if they are placed in conflict
While avoidance paths are generated, leads are moved. Sometimes they can be moved into conflict. Select this setting if ProNest should
try shortening the leads to resolve the conflict.

Holes tab
For certain parts, such as flanges, small bolt holes situated near other larger interior features are sometimes sequenced so that tip-ups
and torch crashes could occur. The settings below can be used to ensure smaller holes are always cut before nearby larger interiors, redu-
cing the chance of torch crashes.
Points to consider:
 l For the purposes of these settings, a hole can be any shape - round, elliptical, square, irregular polygon, etc.
 l Hole size is measured using diameter (for circles) or length/width (whichever is larger) of the bounding rectangle around a pro-
file.
 l If both size values are set to zero, this hole sequencing feature will be disabled.
Small hole size
Any hole that is less than or equal to this size will fall within the "Small" range and will be cut before medium size holes or other larger
interiors (as long as it is within the Proximity specified below).
 
Medium hole size
Any hole that is less than or equal to this size, but greater than the small hole size will fall within the "Medium" range and will be cut after
small holes but before other larger interiors (as long as it is within the Proximity specified below).
 
Proximity
The maximum distance that a small or medium hole can be from another larger interior. Holes within this distance will be sequenced first,
while holes that are further away will not have their sequence adjusted, regardless of their size.
 
 
View example

Example:
 
Consider the following part:

- 135 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
 
By default, the interior cut sequence may be applied so that the larger interior profile is cut before all the smaller holes surrounding
it.

This could result in a crash as the cutting head traverses between profiles 6, 7, and 8.
 
Now, let's assume that the Collision Avoidance - Holes settings are as follows:
 l Small hole size = 1.5 in.
 l Medium hole size = 2 in.
 l Proximity = 2 in.
This would produce an interior cut sequence like this:

- 136 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note that because the smaller holes surrounding the larger interior are within both the Small hole size and Proximity thresholds, they
will be cut before the larger interior in the center. (The holes at the corners are small enough to qualify to be cut first, but they're out-
side the Proximity distance.)
 
With the smaller holes sequenced first, the risk of crashing into a tip-up is significantly reduced.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > click Collision Avoidance

- 137 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Edge Pierce settings

Edge Piercing is a method of extending a part’s lead-in to the edge of the plate (including a hole in a skeleton).  This allows for faster
pierce times, especially on thick material. Edge piercing will not generate edge pierce extensions that are in conflict with other parts,
including other edge pierce extensions.

Edge Pierce Settings

Maximum length
An edge pierce acts as an extension to a part's existing lead-in. This setting defines the upper limit for the length of an edge pierce exten-
sion. Only parts that lie within this distance of a plate edge (or skeleton profile) will be considered for edge piercing.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.

Move leads (if necessary)

Select this setting if you want ProNest to try moving leads during edge piercing. Leads may move to a location from which edge piercing
is possible, based on the value of Maximum length. The leads will not be moved into conflict with any other parts or the edge of the
plate. If no favorable position is found, the leads will remain in their original location and the part will most likely not be edge pierced.

Note: The Plate Edge Threshold settings will be active only when the value of Maximum length is greater than 0.

Plate Edge Threshold

Only one of the following settings may be selected at any given time:

Extend past the plate edge

Select this setting if you need the edge pierce extensions to extend beyond the edge of the plate or into a skeleton profile.

Stop before the plate edge

Select this setting if you need the edge pierce extensions to stop short of the edge of the plate or a skeleton profile.

Distance
The distance by which the edge pierce extension will be lengthened (or shortened).
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0 to Maximum length
How do I get here in ProNest?
 l Settings > click Edge Pierce

- 138 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Slug Destroy settings

With slug destroy, you can apply cut lines within the interior profiles of parts, to prevent cutout tip-ups that result in head-to-part
crashes.

Slug Destroy Settings

Use default slug destroy settings only

If this is selected, then Slug Destroy table will not be active, because all slug destroy settings will come from the Default Slug Destroy
Settings section.  If this is cleared, then the entire Default Slug Destroy Settings section will be inactive, because all process parameter
settings will come from the spreadsheet specified by Slug Destroy Table.

Slug Destroy table

This setting specifies which settings table is used for slug destroy. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the
XLS files found in the slug destroy spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences).

Tip:
To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

See Slug Destroy spreadsheets to learn more.

Slat spacing
The physical distance between two adjacent slats on the cutting table. This should be measured from the center of one slat to the cen-
ter of the slat next to it.
 

 
All other slug destroy settings are based on this value, whether you are using Slug Destroy table (XLS) or Default slug destroy settings.
 

Default Slug Destroy Settings

Maximum profile dimension

This setting defines the upper size limit for slug destroy interiors. This is expressed a factor of the Slat spacing setting - 2x would be
double the slat spacing, 2.5x would be two and a half times the slat spacing, and so on.
 
Slat spacing is multiplied by this factor to get a distance. If either the length or width of an interior profile is greater than this distance,
slug destroy will not be applied.
 

- 139 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Recommended value: 2x (Slat spacing × 2)

Edge offset
Buffer distance between the edge of the interior profile and the cut-up lines. This is entered a percentage of the Kerf width setting (on
the Process Parameters settings page).
 
Recommended value: 50% (Kerf width × 0.5)

Note: Due to kerf offset, slug destroy cut lines are automatically shortened in areas where the kerf on the cut-up lines would cut
into the part. Likewise, a radius corner is put on the opposite end of those cuts to compensate for the Kerf Left or Kerf Right
offset distance, ensuring that cut-up lines will reach the interior profile.
 
You can see the compensated slug destroy cuts (as they would be written in output code) by entering Cut Simulation mode.

Minimum profile dimension

This is a expressed as a percentage of the Slat spacing setting.
 
Recommended value: 50% (Slat spacing × 0.5)

This setting has two purposes:

 l Represents the lower size limit for slug destroy interiors. If both the length and width of an interior profile are less than this
value, slug destroy will not be applied. (This allows cut-up lines to be applied on long skinny cutouts where one dimension is
below the minimum value.)
 l Controls the maximum width of the leftover fragments created by slug destroy cuts.

A good value for this setting will keep the size small enough so that the fragments will fall through the slats of your cutting table.

Maximum material thickness

This setting defines the upper material thickness limit for slug destroy interiors. If the material thickness is less than or equal to this
value, ProNest will attempt to apply slug destroy. Slug destroy will not be applied to any parts that exceed this thickness.
 
Recommended value: 0.375 in. (10 mm)

Example
Top view of a part resting on slats, with Maximum Profile Dimension set to 2x and Minimum Profile Dimension set to 50%.

- 140 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Slug destroy is applied as follows:
 

Slugs Result Reason

Within the Maximum Profile

Dimension, but both length and
width are less than the Minimum
Profile Dimension

Width exceeds Maximum Profile

Dimension

  Both length and width exceed

  Maximum Profile Dimension.
 

Both length and width are within

Maximum Profile Dimension.

Both length and width are within

Maximum Profile Dimension.

- 141 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Fly Cut settings

 l Disable
Turn off fly cutting. Interior profiles will be cut one at a time.

 l Use settings table

Fly cutting will be enabled and applied according to the Fly Cut settings table (spreadsheet). Using a spreadsheet for fly cutting is
useful if you want to apply different fly cutting settings for different materials in a job or apply fly cutting for certain materials and
not others.
 
In the box, you can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Fly Cut spreadsheet settings
folder (defined in Preferences).

Tip:
To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

To read more, see Fly Cut spreadsheets.

 l Use general settings

Fly cutting will be enabled and applied to all nests according to the general settings specified below.

Note: General settings are also used as a fall-back when a Fly Cut settings table is in use but no record can be matched in that
XLS for a given nest. In this scenario, general settings are used for that nest.

General settings
Overtravel length
Overtravel used on circular and slot-shaped interiors. The start point is shifted back by this distance, to maintain a fluid, straight cut-
ting motion and ensure that the interior is completely cut out.

Max distance between profiles

This setting defines the maximum distance between aligned entities for fly cutting. Aligned entities from different interiors will be not
be fly cut if the distance between them is greater than this value.
 
Recommended value: 5 in. (127 mm)

- 142 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: If one line does qualify but another doesn't you will get fly cutting only on the entity that does, the other entities will be
cut one by one.

Max profile size

This setting defines the upper size limit for fly cut interiors. If the smaller dimension of the interior is greater than this value, fly cutting
will not be applied.
 
Recommended value: 2.5 in. (63.5 mm)

How do I get here in ProNest?

 l Settings > click Fly Cut

- 143 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Skeleton Cut-Up settings

Skeleton cut-up allows the user to slice the skeleton into smaller pieces. This is typically done to aid in the movement, storage, or disposal
of the skeleton.

 l Disable
Turn off skeleton cut-up. No cut lines will be applied to the skeleton.

 l Use settings table

Skeleton cut-up will be enabled and applied according to the Skeleton Cut-Up settings table (spreadsheet). Using a spreadsheet
for skeleton cut-up is useful if you want to apply different skeleton cut-up settings for different materials in a job or apply skel-
eton cut-up for certain materials and not others.
 
In the box, you can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Skeleton Cut-Up spread-
sheet settings folder (defined in Preferences).

Tip:
To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

To read more about using Skeleton Cut-Up spreadsheets, see Skeleton Cut-Up spreadsheets.

 l Use general settings

Skeleton cut-up will be enabled and applied to all nests according to the general settings specified below.

Note: General settings are also used as a fall-back when a Skeleton Cut-Up settings table is in use but no record can be
matched in that XLS for a given nest. In this scenario, general settings are used for that nest.

General settings
General tab
Minimum skeleton area
Leftover plate smaller than this value won't have skeleton cut-up applied and can't be saved as inventory skeleton plates. This mostly
applies to situations where there is either a crop or a plate edge CLC part on the nest and one or more small sections of plate remain.
 
Units: Area

Minimum cut length

Minimum acceptable length of a skeleton cut-up line.  All skeleton cut-up lines below this threshold value will be deleted during pro-
cessing.
 
Units: Distance
Range:0.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.5 in.
 
Ignore leads
Select this setting if it is acceptable for skeleton cut-up lines to cut through part leads.

Tolerances tab
Plate edge tolerance

- 144 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The closest distance to which a skeleton cut-up line may approach the plate edge if no extension values are used.  Non-zero extension
values take precedence over this setting.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.1 in.
 
Safe zone tolerance
This defines the closest distance to which a skeleton cut-up line may approach a safe zone.  For example, if you wanted a skeleton cut-up
line to start or stop no closer than 1 inch from a safe zone, set this value to 1.0 in.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.1 in.
 
Part tolerance
This defines the closest distance to which a skeleton cut-up line may approach a part.  For example, if you wanted the skeleton cut-up
line to start or stop no closer than 1 inch from a part on the nest, set this value to 1.0 in.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.1 in.
 

Cut Direction tab

Horizontal lines
Direction which horizontal skeleton cut-up lines will be cut.
 
Choices: Left to Right, Right to Left, Serpentine
 
Left to Right
All horizontal skeleton cuts will be cut from the left edge of the plate to the right edge of the plate.
 
Right to Left
All horizontal skeleton cuts will be cut from the right edge of the plate to the left edge of the plate.
 
Serpentine
The cut direction of horizontal skeleton cuts will alternate between Left to Right and Right to Left.
 
Vertical lines
Direction which vertical skeleton cut-up lines will be cut.
 
Choices: Top to Bottom, Bottom to Top, Serpentine
 
Top to Bottom
All vertical skeleton cuts will be cut from the top edge of the plate to the bottom edge of the plate.
 
Bottom to Top
All vertical skeleton cuts will be cut from the bottom edge of the plate to the top edge of the plate.
 
Serpentine
The cut direction of vertical skeleton cuts will alternate between Top to Bottom and Bottom to Top.

- 145 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Lines at the plate edge
Defines the behavior of skeleton cut lines that touch the plate edge.
 
Choices: Cut towards the plate edge, Cut away from the plate edge, Default
 
Cut towards the plate edge
The portion of the skeleton cut line that touches the plate edge will be cut so that it starts at a part (if possible) and is cut towards the
plate edge.
 
Cut away from the plate edge
The portion of the skeleton cut line that touches the plate edge will be cut so that it starts at the plate edge and is cut towards a part (if
possible).
 
Default
No special cut direction will be applied to the segments of skeleton cut lines that touch the plate edge.  The normal cut direction used by
the rest of the skeleton cut line will be used.

Extensions tab
Top edge
Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the top edge of the plate.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
 
Bottom edge
Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the bottom edge of the plate.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
 
Left edge
Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the left edge of the plate.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
 
Right edge
Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the right edge of the plate.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > click Skeleton Cut-Up

- 146 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Skeleton Cut-Up - Skeleton Grid settings

Skeleton cuts are defined by a grid that is laid on top of the nest. Grid lines are evenly spaced along the nest’s length and width, so any
grid spacing values specified by the user are target length and width values only.

Grid Settings
Enable skeleton cut-up
This indicates whether Skeleton Cut-Up is active and is repeated from the Skeleton Cut-Up page.

Note: The following settings are active only if Enable skeleton cut up is selected.

Use separate grids for exterior and interior skeleton cuts

Select this setting if you want to use different grid spacing for interior skeleton cuts (skeleton cuts that both begin and end at a part)
and exterior skeleton cuts (skeleton cuts that have at least one end at a plate edge) .
 

Exterior skeleton cuts on this nest are shown in blue, interior skeleton cuts are shown in red
 
If Use separate grids... is cleared, a single skeleton grid will be used to determine where the skeleton is cut. In this case, the following set-
tings are available:

Vertical grid spacing

This setting specifies the desired spacing between vertical grid lines. In effect, this determines the maximum length of skeleton pieces.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.

Horizontal grid spacing

This setting specifies the desired spacing between horizontal grid lines. In effect, this determines the maximum width of skeleton pieces.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.

Advanced: If Use separate grids... is selected, then two separate skeleton grids will be used to determine where the skeleton is cut.
The exterior grid will have is own settings to define horizontal and vertical grid spacing - as will the interior grid.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click Skeleton Cut-Up > click Skeleton Grid

- 147 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Skeleton Cut-Up - Cut Sequence settings

Advanced Skeleton Cut-Up Settings
Enable skeleton cut-up
This indicates whether Skeleton Cut-Up is active and is repeated from the Skeleton Cut-Up page.

Note: The following settings are active only if Enable skeleton cut-up is selected.

Integrate skeleton lines with parts

Skeleton lines and exterior part profiles will be cut together in groups. All skeleton lines intersecting the exterior profile will be cut first,
followed by the exterior profile. The sequence will then move on to the next group of skeleton lines and parts. Selecting this setting
can reduce part defects due to plate movement as well as collisions with tip-ups.

When cleared, all skeleton lines on a nest are sequenced together (according to the Skeleton Cut-Up - Cut sequence order selected).

Note:  l This setting does not affect the drop order of parts on the nest.
 l When converted to a Cut Sequence Rule, skeleton lines and exterior profiles will be added in the same task.
 l This setting is repeated on the Cut Sequence Rules settings page.

Cut sequence order

Using this list, you can define when skeleton lines are cut in relation to parts.
 
If you are using a single skeleton grid, you can simply order the cut sequence for parts and skeleton lines. If you are using interior and
exterior skeleton grids, you can select the relative order between parts, interior skeleton cuts, and exterior skeleton cuts. For more
information about setting up single or double skeleton grids, see "Skeleton Cut-Up - Skeleton Grid settings" on page 147.
 
To edit the sequence:
 1. Select an item in the list that you want to move.
 2. Do one of the following:

- 148 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Press the up button to move the selected item up in the sequence order.

 l Press the down button to move the selected item down in the sequence order.

Advanced: Cut sequence rules can provide greater flexibility over when skeleton lines are cut. For more information, see "Cut
Sequence Rules settings" on page 125.

Note: The following two settings are active only if Use separate grids for exterior and interior skeleton cuts setting is selected. This
setting can be found on the Skeleton Grid page.

Exterior cut order

Defines the order in which exterior skeleton cuts are made.

(None)
Exterior skeleton cuts are made in the order in which they were created.

Circle the plate (clockwise)

Exterior skeleton cuts are made in a clockwise direction around the plate, starting at the machine home.

Cut vertical lines first

All vertical exterior skeleton cuts are made first, followed by all horizontal exterior skeleton cuts.

Cut horizontal lines first

All horizontal exterior skeleton cuts are made first, followed by all vertical exterior skeleton cuts.

Traverse along the plate edge between exterior cuts

Select this setting if you would like the torch head to follow along the plate edge between exterior skeleton cuts, or to track back down
the just cut exterior skeleton cut if cutting the other end of it which touches the plate edge.

Tip: This setting is useful if you are worried about the pieces of the skeleton created by skeleton cut up tipping up as the exterior
skeleton lines are cut.  If the torch head were to run into one of these tipped up pieces of plate, a lot of damage could be done
to the cutting head or the cutting machine itself.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click Skeleton Cut-Up > click Cut Sequence

- 149 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Crop settings
Use settings table
Crops will be applied according to the Crop settings table (spreadsheet). Using a spreadsheet for cropping is useful if you want to apply
different crop settings for different materials in a job or apply crop for certain materials and not others.
 
In the box, you can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Crop spreadsheet settings folder
(defined in Preferences).

Tip:
To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

When a Crop settings table is in use but no record can be matched in that XLS for a given nest, AutoCrop will not be applied to that nest.
Manual cropping will still be available in this case, however, and will adhere to the default settings listed below.
 
To read more, see "Crop spreadsheets" on page 240.

Use default settings

Crop will be applied to all nests according to the default settings specified below.

Default settings
Extension
A crop line is always defined with respect to the plate edge.  A crop extension allows the pierce point to move off the plate (a positive
extension) or onto the plate (a negative extension).
 
Units: Distance
Range: -10.0 to 10.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
 
Crop process
If you have more than one cut process on your machine, you can select the process that you want to use for cutting crop lines.

Automatic
The crop process will match the process of the first cut profile on a nest.

{Cut process}
Crops on all nests will be cut using this process.

Minimum remnant area

During AutoCrop, all calculated crop lines will be rejected unless they produce a remnant with at least this much surface area. During
manual cropping, if the remnant area is smaller than this value, the crop will not generate a valid remnant.
 
Units: Area
Range: 0.0 to 100000000.0 in.²
Recommended Value: 500.0 in.²
 
Step 1: Find the best vertical crop
When finding a crop line, ProNest will first find the best vertical (straight) crop line.  This step is always checked.

- 150 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Step 2: Find the best L-shape crop

If this step is checked, ProNest will try to improve on Step 1.  An L-shaped crop has one (or two) 90-degree turns resulting in an L-shaped
remnant.

You can force ProNest to accept the L-shaped crop line only if it beats Step 1 with a better (larger) remnant.  The setting reads: Use only if
the remnant area improves by at least x%. This means that the vertical crop from Step 1 will be used unless the remnant calculated in step
2 is at least x% larger.
 
To edit the L-shape crop improvement:
 1. Click the % value (its a hyperlink).
 2. Type a value for L-shape crop improvement in the box.
 3. Click OK.
 
Step 3: Find the best profile crop
If this step is checked, ProNest will try to improve on the previous steps.  A profile crop is built by trying to stay as close to the parts as
possible.  This method generally creates a remnant with the most area.  The tradeoff, however, is that the crop line usually has significantly
more motions.

You can force ProNest to accept the profile crop line only if it beats the previous steps with a better (larger) remnant.  The setting reads:
Use only if the remnant area improves by at least x%. This means that the best crop line from the previous steps will be used unless the
remnant calculated in step 3 is at least x% larger.
 

- 151 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

To edit the profile crop improvement:

 1. Click the % value (its a hyperlink).
 2. Type a value for profile crop improvement in the box.
 3. Click OK.

Remnant Webs
When ProNest creates a crop line (especially when Step 3 is checked) it can create remnants that have useless, thin spokes of material.  
Use the following settings to have ProNest adjust the crop line to remove these webs from the remnant.
 

A remnant with several protrusions or "webs." Note that the uppermost web is considered "along plate edge."
 
Minimum usable web width
ProNest will remove any webs that are thinner than this value.  This does not include webs that share the plate edge.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 12.0 in.
 
Minimum width - along plate edge
Webs that share the plate edge are considered separately.  Any such web thinner than this value will be removed.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 18.0 in.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > click Crop

- 152 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Interior Remnants settings

Important: On the Nesting settings page, you must have the Allow nesting outside the crop setting cleared in order to use the
interior remnants feature.

Automatically create interior remnants

When you enter Interior Remnants mode (on the Nest tab, click Interior Remnants), all cut-outs larger than the minimum size will be
automatically selected as interior remnants, while smaller cut-outs will not be selected as remnants.
 
Clear this setting if you do not want interior remnants to be automatically selected.

Minimum area
Cut-outs with an area less than this value will not be considered interior remnants by default.

Minimum side length

If the shortest side of a bounding rectangle around the cut-out is less than this value, the cut-out will not be considered an interior rem-
nant by default. This setting is useful for determining whether irregularly-shaped interiors should be saved as remnants.

The side length of this cut-out is shown in red. Though the area of this cut-out may be large enough, its shape makes it imprac-
tical to use as a remnant. Setting a good value for minimum side length solves this problem.
How do I get here in ProNest?
 n Settings > click Interior Remnants

- 153 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Costing settings
The settings on this page are used to calculate Production Cost and Production Time in ProNest.

Machine Settings
These settings are not specific to any process. Machine cost, Labor rate, and Labor cost per weight are always included in final pro-
duction costs for parts and nests. Plate loading cost is always used in final nest-level costs. If you don't want one of these costs to be
used, set it to zero.

General tab
Machine cost
This represents the baseline hourly cost of running your cutting machine, excluding labor costs and process-specific costs associated
with cutting or marking (such as consumable wear and gas usage). It may include things like facility overhead, electricity costs, repairs
and maintenance, and even equipment depreciation.
 
Units: Currency
Range: 0.00 to 1,000,000,000.00 (Monetary Units)
 
Plate loading cost
The cost of loading and unloading a single plate of material onto the cutting machine. This cost is applied once per nest in costing cal-
culations, so it should include the total cost of loading a plate and the cost of unloading the leftover skeleton after parts are cut.
 
Units: Currency
Range: 0.00 to 1,000,000,000.00 (Monetary Units)

Note: This value is included in nest-level costs, but is not used for individual part costs (unless you are viewing allocated part
costs).

Labor rate
The hourly rate you pay for labor for the people involved in the running of your cutting machine.
 
Units: Currency
Range: 0.00 to 1,000,000,000.00 (Monetary Units)

Note: This setting should be set to zero if a Labor cost per weight is specified).

Labor cost per weight

The amount you pay the people involved in running the cutting machine per unit weight. The weight used in the calculation is the
weight of the cut parts as opposed to the weight of the full sheets.
 
Units: Currency
Range: 0.00 to 1,000,000,000.00 (Monetary Units)

Note: This setting should be set to zero if a Labor rate is specified).

Text marker time

Buge text marking can be acccounted for in costing calculations. This is a flat time that is added for each instance of buge text.

- 154 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Units: Time in seconds
Range: 0 to 12,000 s

Traverse tab
Full raise/lower time
This setting represents the average amount of time required to fully retract the cutting head on a full raise and then fully lower the cut-
ting head when it is turned back on. This setting is used for costing purposes only.
 
Units: Time
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 s

Note: See How is production time calculated? for information on how this setting is used in production time calculations.

Partial raise/lower time

This setting represents the average amount of time required to partially retract the torch for a partial raise and then fully lower the torch
when it is turned back on. This setting is used for costing purposes only.
 
Units: Time
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 s

Note: Not all cutting machines differentiate between a partial raise and a full raise. If your machine doesn't support partial raises,
set this to match the Full raise/lower time.

Rapid rate
This setting describes the machine's maximum traverse speed while the torch/head is off. Consult your machine table manufacturer spe-
cifications to find out your machine's rapid traverse speed.
 
The Rapid rate setting is used only for generating costing figures - it is not included in any NC output code. The actual rapid rate used by
your real-world machine must be set at the machine itself.
 
Units: Length per minute
Range: 0 to 10,000 in./min (254,000 mm/min)
Recommended Value: 600 in./min (15,240 mm/min)

Note: Often there is a discrepancy between the table manufacturer's specification and the actual real-world rapid traverse speed of
your machine, due to acceleration and deceleration differences from one machine to another. To get the most accurate value
possible, you can use a stopwatch to measure the actual rapid rate of your machine.

X rapid rate and Y rapid rate

Some cutting tables have drive mechanisms where X and Y traverse motions have different maximum speeds. These two settings let you
enter separate maximum traverse speeds for the X and Y axes. Consult your machine table manufacturer specifications to find out your
machine's rapid traverse speed.
 
The X rapid rate and Y rapid rate settings are used only for generating costing figures - they are not included in any NC output code.
 
Units: Length per minute
Range: 0 to 10,000 in./min (254,000 mm/min)

- 155 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Recommended Value: 600 in./min (15,240 mm/min)

Note:  l These settings are only used for costing calculations if Rapid rate is set to zero.
 l For the purposes of this setting, X motions are horizontal on the nest, Y motions are vertical.
 l Often there is a discrepancy between the table manufacturer's specification and the actual real-world rapid traverse
speed of your machine, due to acceleration and deceleration differences from one machine to another. To get the
most accurate value possible, you can use a stopwatch to measure the actual rapid rate of your machine.

Minimum rapid time

When separate X and Y rapid rates are used, you can set a minimum traverse time to use in costing calculations. Any X or Y traverse
motion that takes a shorter amount of time than the minimum rapid time value will be rounded up to that value.
 
Units: Time in seconds
Range: 0 to 12,000 s

Process Settings
Each tab in this section contains costing settings for a specific process supported by your machine.
 
Settings table
This setting specifies whether to use a settings table (spreadsheet) for costing. You can select any settings table from the list, which con-
tains all the XLS files found in the Costing spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences).
 
Settings spreadsheets are useful in costing if you want to differentiate your process-specific costs by material type, thickness, and class.

Tip:
To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

To read more about using Costing spreadsheets, see "Costing spreadsheets" on page 220.
 
The next three settings are used if:
 l you are not using a settings table.
-or-
 l you are using a settings table, but a material and thickness used in your job cannot be found in the settings table.
 
Default activation time
The amount of time to turn the process on (can also include the time to turn the process off). For cut processes, this is the total time from
the point where the traverse motion stops until the cutting motion begins, which can include pre-heats, pierces, raising/lowering, etc.
 
Units: Seconds
Range: 0.0 to 12000.0 s
Recommended Value: 3.0 s

Note: Default activation time is only used for costing calculations if no valid Activation Time can be found in a Costing spreadsheet
(settings table) and you do not have a Full or Partial raise/lower time or Pierce Time specified. Refer to "How is production
time calculated?" on page 591 for more information.

Default cost per activation

The cost incurred in activating a particular process. For cut processes, this would be the cost to turn the process on and fully pierce the

- 156 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

material (can also include the cost to turn the process off). This should account for the cost of consumables used during an activation,
since piercing significantly contributes to consumable wear.
 
Units: Currency
Range: 0.00 to 1,000,000,000.00 (Monetary Units)
 
Default operating cost
The cost per minute of using the process. This cost should include the cost of the consumables used while running the process, but not
during activation (turning the process on and off, piercing, etc.) or rapid motion. For cut processes, this would be the cost per minute
while the torch/head is moving during cutting motions.
 
Units: Currency
Range: 0.00 to 1,000,000,000.00 (Monetary Units)

Note: This setting is not available for Punch or Drill processes.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > click Costing

- 157 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Export DXF settings

This settings page controls how DXF files are created when a single part or nest is exported to DXF.

General Settings
Export folder
ProNest will save DXF files in the folder defined here.
 
Before ProNest creates the DXF file, it will prompt for a file name in the Export dialog. Initially, the folder will be the Default export
folder, but the Export dialog allows you to browse to any folder. If the file is saved to a folder other than the default output folder,
ProNest will remember the new folder and use it next time DXF files are exported.

Note: If the specified folder does not exist, a yellow warning symbol ( ) will appear to the left of the field.

Export polylines
Select this setting to export DXF files using polylines. Each profile would be generated as a single polyline entity. Clear this setting to out-
put DXF files as individual DXF entities (arcs and lines).
 
Export plate geometry
Select this setting to include plate geometry (edges) in the DXF file. Applies to nests only.
 
Export safe zones
Select this setting to output the safe zone geometry into the DXF file. Applies to nests only.
 
Export leads
Select this setting to export existing lead-ins and lead-outs on profiles when exporting DXF files. Otherwise, leads are removed.
 
Export original layer names whenever possible
Select this setting to include the original CAD layer names as the entity layer names in the DXF file. If the profile being exported was not
originally a CAD file, then the default layer information will be used (this comes from either the post processor or the Process Parameters
settings table).
 

Process Settings
In this section, you can map the available processes in the your machine to layers that will be created in the CAD file. You can export all
geometry to a single layer or specify a different layer for each process.
 
The Name column on the left shows available processes on your ProNest machine. For each process, you can enter a layer name that will
be created in the CAD file. Geometry assigned to that process in ProNest will be placed on the specified layer in the CAD file.
 
Display only information on parts or nests is not included when DXF files are exported.
How do I get here in ProNest?
 l Settings > click Export DXF
 
Related articles
 n Exporting a part to DXF
 n Exporting a nest to DXF file

- 158 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output settings

Output DLL
This setting allows the user to choose which output DLL to use to generate CNC code. The list of DLLs to choose from is populated with
the valid output DLLs in the ProNest 2019 folder.
 
Recommended Value: Standard

Code Format tab

Mode
Defines how motions are output.
 
Choices: Absolute, Incremental
 
Absolute
All motions are defined with respect to the initialization (home) point.
 
Incremental
All motions are defined with respect to the controller's current position.
 
Precision
This setting governs the number of decimal places output for many floating point values in the CNC file, including coordinates, kerf val-
ues, and feedrates. The actual number of decimal places is governed by the CFF itself.
 
Choices: Normal, Extra
 
Normal
Output with reduced precision: usually 2 or 3 decimal places.
 
Extra
Output with enhanced precision: usually 3 or more decimal places.
 

Example:
 
If a raw value is 12.34567, it might be output as:
 
12.35 (Normal precision)
12.346 (Extra precision)

 
Units
This setting controls the units used to output the CNC file. Generally speaking, if outputting in "Inches", no conversion value is applied to
the output coordinates.
 
Choices: Inches (in.), Millimeters (mm)
Line numbers in CNC
Defines how line numbers are added to output files.
 
Choices: (None), Every Line, Start of Part

- 159 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
(None)
Line numbers are not added to output.
 

Example: (None)
%
G70
G91
G00X0.7Y0.51
G41
M21
G01Y0.75
...

 
Every Line
Line numbers are added to every line of output. Exceptions include comments and the start/end line - containing a single "%".
 

Example: Every Line

%
N1G70
N2G91
N3G00X0.7Y0.51
N4G41
N5M21
N6G01Y0.75
...

 
Start of Part
Line numbers are inserted before the start of each part or profile - as determined by the CFF.
 

Example: Start of Part

%
G70
G91
N1
G00X0.7Y0.51
G41
M21
G01Y0.75
...

 
Line number increment
Defines the increment for line numbers added to output files.
 
Range: 1 to 100
Recommended Value: 1
 

- 160 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:
 
Setting the increment to 1 will number the lines 1, 2, 3, ...
%
N1G70
N2G91
N3G00X0.7Y0.51
N4G41
N5M21
N6G01Y0.75
...
 
Setting the increment to 5 will number the lines 5, 10, 15, ...
%
N5G70
N10G91
N15G00X0.7Y0.51
N20G41
N25M21
N30G01Y0.75
...

Note: This setting is active only if Line numbers in CNC is set to something other than "(None)".

Program number
This setting allows the user to specify a program number to be inserted into the first CNC file output for each job. The exact way that this
setting is used (or whether it is even used at all) is determined entirely by the particular CFF being used.
 
Range: 0 to 99,999,999
Recommended Value: 0
Show program number in the output dialog
In the CNC Output dialog, a box will be displayed where you can specify a program number to be inserted into the first CNC file output
for your job.

Output Files tab

CNC file extension
Defines the file extension for CNC files generated by Output CNC.
 
Before ProNest begins generating output, it will prompt for a file name in the Output CNC dialog. This dialog provides a default file name
that uses the CNC file extension. If multiple nests are output, unique file names will be created automatically.
 

Example 1:
CNC file extension = cnc
Output a single nest with the name: MyJob.cnc
Output file: MyJob.cnc
 
Output three nests with the name: MyJob.cnc
Output files: MyJob01.cnc, MyJob02.cnc, MyJob03.cnc
 

- 161 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Clear this setting and ProNest will generate an output file that has no extension. If multiple nests are output, unique file names will
be created automatically.
 
Example 2:
Clear the CNC file extension setting
Output a single nest with the name: MyJob
Output file: MyJob
 
Output three nests with the name: MyJob
Output files: MyJob.N1, MyJob.N2, MyJob.N3
 
The N# file extension will ensure unique extensions are applied to all nests.
 
Example 3:
CNC file extension = N#
Output a single nest with the name: MyJob
Output file: MyJob.N1
 
Output three nests with the name: My Job
Output files: MyJob.N1, MyJob.N2, MyJob.N3

 
Default output folder
ProNest will save output files in the folder defined here.
 
Before ProNest begins generating output, it will prompt for a file name in the Output CNC dialog. Initially, the output folder will be the
Default output folder, but the Output CNC dialog allows you to browse to any folder. If output is saved to a folder other than the
default output folder, ProNest will remember the new folder and use it next time CNC output is generated.

Note: If the specified folder does not exist, a yellow warning symbol ( ) will appear to the left of the field.

Use long file names

Select this setting to allow ProNest to generate long file names for CNC output files. Clear this setting to limit output file names to 8 char-
acters (commonly known as the DOS 8.3 file naming convention).
Generate token files during output
If this setting is selected, a token file version of the nest will be output to the same location as the CNC file.
 
Generate data files during output
Select this setting to produce a data file along with the output CNC files. Data files contain information about each nest in a human-read-
able format - such as utilizations and home points - as well as information about the parts contained on each nest.
 
Data file location
Data files will be placed in the folder specified by this setting. Click the button to browse for the folder. To clear this setting, click the
button. This will cause ProNest to save the data files in the same folder as the CNC files.

Note: This setting is activated only when Generate data files during output is selected.

- 162 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Additional machines
Default list of additional machines that will be associated with the current ProNest machine. Any machine listed here will appear in the
Output dialog by default. See Additional machine output for more information.
 

Options tab
Include machine parameters in output
Check this setting to enable machine parameters (such as kerf and feed rate) to be inserted into the CNC files as they are output. These
parameter values may be specified through the Process Parameters page for each process.
 
Drill/Punch/Scribe first
If this setting is selected, then each nest will be processed in the following order:
 1. Complete all punches on the nest
 2. Complete all scribe profiles on the nest
 3. Complete all cut profiles on the nest
If this setting is cleared, then each part on the nest will be fully processed before the next part is started. Profiles within each part are pro-
cessed in their natural order.

Note: This setting should be selected when cutting with underwater plasma. Normally, very light metal should not have punching
or scribing done first - to avoid problems with metal movement.

Advanced: This setting may be overridden through the use of "Cut Sequence Rules settings" on page 125.

Stop before drilling

If this setting is selected, code will be inserted to cause the machine to stop before drilling begins.

Note: This setting is activated only when Drill/Punch/Scribe first is selected.

Stop before punching

If this setting is selected, code will be inserted to cause the machine to stop before punching begins.

Note: This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected.

Stop before scribing

If this setting is selected, code will be inserted to cause the machine to stop before scribing begins.

Note: This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected.

Stop before cutting

If this setting is selected, code will be inserted to cause the machine to stop before cutting begins.

Note: This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected.

Order punches by process

- 163 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

If this setting is selected, all punches will be grouped together by process. For each nest, all punches using a particular process will be
done before the next punch process is used.

Note: This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected.

Order scribes by process

If this setting is selected, all scribes will be grouped together by process. For each nest, all scribes using a particular process will be done
before the next scribe process is used.

Note: This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected.

Order cuts by process

If this setting is selected, all cuts will be grouped together by process. For each nest, all cuts using a particular process will be done before
the next cut process is used.

Note: This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected.

Return to machine home

When this setting is selected, ProNest will return the torch to the machine's home point at the end of each nest. If this setting is cleared,
the torch will remain in its position at the end of each nest.
 
Adjust machine home to center for circular plates
On circular plates, the machine home ( ) used in CNC output will be moved to the center of the plate. The adjusted machine home is
visible in Cut Simulation mode.
 
Adjust machine home on remnants
For remnants that do not have a corner at the machine home ( ) specified on the Machine settings page, the home point can be adjus-
ted to an existing corner on the remnant. This can make it easier to initialize the torch head prior to cutting the nest.
 
With this setting selected, use the vertical and horizontal settings to control the direction in which the home point should be adjusted.

Notes:  l Adjustments to the machine home are visible in Cut Simulation mode and will be included in CNC output.
 l Selecting both Adjust machine home along vertical plate edge and Adjust machine home along horizontal plate
edge will move the machine home to the closer of the two intersection points.
 l If a circular plate is loaded and the Adjust machine home to center for circular plates setting is cleared, selecting
this setting will adjust the machine home to the edge of circular plates as well as remnants.

 
Adjust machine home along vertical plate edge
The machine home will be moved vertically from its original position until it intersects the remnant's edge.
 

- 164 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: This setting is activated only when Adjust machine home on remnants is selected.

Adjust machine home along horizontal plate edge

The machine home will be moved horizontally from its original position until it intersects the remnant's edge.
 

Note: This setting is activated only when Adjust machine home on remnants is selected.

Insert part name as comment

Select this setting if a comment should be output in the CNC file before the first profile of each part. This comment typically gives the
sequence number of the part and the part name.
 
Validate plate size
When this setting is selected, the plate size is validated. The procedure for this typically consists of the following actions:
 1. Start with the torch head at the machine home
 2. Traverse to the opposite corner of the plate
 3. Traverse back to the machine home
 4. Begin normal processing of the nest
 
Enable automatic CNC torch spacing
If this setting is selected, ProNest will insert code to automatically change the torch spacing at the cutting machine. Otherwise, ProNest
will insert a stop code to allow an operator to manually adjust the torches (quantity and/or spacing) whenever they need to be changed.

- 165 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Important: Select this setting only if the machine is capable of arranging torches automatically. To facilitate this, a special post pro-
cessor (CFF) may be required.  Please contact Hypertherm if you require this ability.

Pre-kerf
Selecting this setting will remove all kerf left, kerf right, and kerf off commands from the CNC code. ProNest will alter the part geometry
to compensate for this change.
Example
Suppose you have a 10 × 10 inch rectangular part, to be cut from 1.5 inch thick mild steel with plasma at 200 A. The kerf width for
this is 0.192 inches.

With this Pre-kerf setting turned off, the NC code for the part would contain the normal kerf commands:
 
G91
...
G00X1.7569Y1.0053
...
G43X0.192
G41
M07
G01Y1.5
G01Y10.
G01X10.
G01Y-10.
G01X-10.
G01X-0.75
M08
G40

If this Pre-kerf setting is enabled, kerf commands (in this case, G43, G41, and G40) are removed and the part's geometry is adjusted
to account for kerfing.

One-half of the kerf width (0.096 inches) is added along the edges of the part.

G91
...
G00X1.6609Y1.0053
...
M07
G01Y1.5

- 166 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

G01Y10.096
G01X10.192
G01Y-10.192
G01X-10.096
G01X-0.75
M08

Note that in ProNest, the adjusted geometry of pre-kerfed parts is only visible in Cut Simulation mode in ProNest.

Note: If the cutting machine is slow at kerfing the CNC code, you may want to select this setting.

No radius of corners
If you are using both Cutting Techniques with Corner Radius (rounding off corners for a smoother motion) and pre-kerfing, parts may be
rounded incorrectly in certain instances, depending on your machine setup. When selected, ProNest will not apply any corner rounding
cutting techniques to any nested parts.

Note: This setting is activated only when Pre-kerf is selected.

Radius corners before pre-kerfing

If you are using both Cutting Techniques with Corner Radius (rounding off corners for a smoother motion) and pre-kerfing, parts may be
rounded incorrectly in certain instances.
 
With this setting selected, corner rounding will be applied to parts before kerf compensation is applied and kerf commands are removed.
This may correct problems with rounding on your parts, depending on your setup.

Note: This setting is activated only when Pre-kerf is selected.

Radius corners after pre-kerfing

If you are using both Cutting Techniques with Corner Radius (rounding off corners for a smoother motion) and pre-kerfing, parts may be
rounded incorrectly in certain instances.
 
With this setting selected, corner rounding will be applied to parts after kerf compensation is applied and kerf commands are removed.
This may correct problems with rounding on your parts, depending on your setup.

Note: This setting is activated only when Pre-kerf is selected.

Ignore for output

Processes listed here will not appear in the CNC file. The list of ignored processes will be highlighted and underlined - like a hyperlink.
 
To edit the list:
 1. Click the process list hyperlink.
 2. Select the processes you want to ignore during output and click OK.

Note: This setting is ignored if Cut Sequence Rules are used.

- 167 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Single Part Output tab

Part home
When creating output for a single part, this is the home point (or initialization point) that the cutting head starts at before traversing to
the first cut, scribe, or punch on that part.
 
Choices: Same as Machine Home, Lower Left, Upper Left, Lower Right, Upper Right, Center of Region, CAD Origin

The Machine Home is set in the "Machine settings" on page 27 or Output Axis pages of your settings. CAD Origin refers to the point of
origin set when the CAD file was created.
 
All choices (except CAD Origin) are set in terms of the rectangular box surrounding the part (including any leads or extensions).
 

 
Generate token files during output 
If this setting is selected, an MTC token file version of the part will be output to the same location as the CNC file.
 

Important: CNC Output settings and the Post Processor (CFF)

 
Certain CNC Output Settings require specific capabilities to be present in the CFF in order to function properly. While
many CFFs are already set up for this functionality, it is possible that you may require changes to your CFF before it will
work correctly. Please contact Hypertherm for further assistance if you feel you have one of these CFFs.  
 
The settings which activate functionality resident in the CFF are:
 
 l Include machine parameters in output
 l Line numbers in CNC
 l Program number
 l Return to machine home
 l Insert part name as comment
 l Validate plate size
 l Enable automatic CNC torch spacing  
 
CFFs may override the values of Mode, Precision, and Units. In addition, the CFF may override the settings in the above
list. For example, a CFF may be configured to always output in incremental mode or without the ability to output machine
parameters in the CNC file.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > click CNC Output

- 168 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - Post Processor settings

Advanced: Changing these settings is considered an advanced type of change. Exercise caution when making any changes to the
settings on this page.

On this settings page you can edit custom CFF settings (settings specified in the [Custom Settings] section of the current CFF) and save
the edited values to the current ProNest machine (CFG) or job. During output, the custom settings values saved on this page will be used
when creating output code, instead of the values in the CFF.
 
When you’ve finished editing values on this page, click Save to permanently store your changes with the ProNest machine. Clicking OK
will save the changes with your job but will not save them permanently to the CFG.

Note: This settings page is not a CFF editor and will not change your post processor (CFF) in any way.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click CNC Output > click Post Processor Settings
 

- 169 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - Pre-Pierces settings

Piercing can cause a lot of wear on consumables. You can use pre-pierce on cut profiles to reduce consumable wear during pierces. Com-
mon scenarios where you'd pre-pierce include:
 l Use older, worn consumables for piercing, saving wear and tear on newer cutting consumables
 l Pierce with a punch or drill, reducing consumable wear and eliminating slag spatter at the pierce site
 l Pierce with a different cut process (such as oxyfuel) and then cut profiles with your normal cut process
Before each profile is cut, the machine can be instructed to create a pierce hole that will serve as the starting point when the profile is
cut. The settings on this page help to define exactly how these pre-pierces should be made.  Pre-pierces are represented by an action that
can be sequenced through Cut Sequence Rules - so it is possible to control exactly when profiles are pre-pierced.

 l Disable
Turn off pre-piercing. No pre-piercing will be applied to profiles.

 l Use settings table

Pre-piercing will be enabled and applied according to the Pre-Pierces settings table (spreadsheet). Using a spreadsheet for pre-
piercing is useful if you want to apply different pre-pierce settings for different materials in a job or apply pre-pierces for certain
materials and not others.
 
In the box, you can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Pre-Pierces spreadsheet set-
tings folder (defined in Preferences).

Tip:
To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

When a Pre-Pierces settings table is in use but no record can be matched in that XLS for a given nest, pre-piercing will not be
applied to that nest. To read more, see "Pre-Pierces spreadsheets" on page 242.

 l Use default settings

Pre-piercing will be enabled and applied to all nests according to the default settings specified below.

Default settings
Style
This setting defines the method used to pierce holes.

Pre-pierce as Circles
All pierce holes are created by piercing and cutting a small circle.
 

Pre-pierce as Punch
If the machine has a punch, all pierce holes are punched.

- 170 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Torch Blow Through

All pierce holes are created simply by piercing each start point. Normal piercing parameters (such as Pierce Time) are used for Torch
Blow Through pre-pierces.

Pre-pierce as Drill
For drill-capable machines, all pierces for cut profiles are drilled.

 
Enable only for materials thicker than <value> in.
Pre-piercing can be limited to materials that are thicker than a specific value.  The value is highlighted and underlined - like a hyperlink.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
 
To edit this setting:
 1. Click the value (its a hyperlink).
 2. Type a value in the Pre-pierce threshold box.
 
Process
This setting defines the process that will be used to create pierce holes.  When Style is set to Pre-Pierce as Circles or Torch Blow
Through, the choices are limited to valid cut processes.  When Style is set to Pre-Pierce as Punch, the choices are limited to valid punch
processes.
 
Radius
This setting defines the radius for circle pierce holes.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.01 to 10.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.5 in.
 
This setting is activated only when Style is set to Pre-Pierce as Circles.
 
Pre-pierce by part
If this setting is selected, then pre-pierces are done on a part-by-part basis. This means that the profiles for a single part will be pre-

- 171 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

pierced and cut before moving on to cut the next part. When this setting is cleared, pre-pierces are done for the entire nest before any
profiles are cut.
 

Important: This setting is used only if the active Cut Sequence Rule is 'Use settings instead of rules'. A true cut sequence rule
would dictate exactly when pre-pierces are to be cut and this setting would be effectively ignored.

Advanced Control
By default, when pre-piercing is enabled, pre-pierces are applied to all cuts. However, you can use these advanced controls to disallow
pre-piercing in scenarios where there may be a potential conflict with a cut path.
 
Allow pre-piercing for:
 
Interior profiles only
Pre-pierces will be applied to interior profiles only - they will not be applied to any exterior profiles. This is designed for users who have
to clean the slag after pre-piercing and are only concerned about the pierces on interiors.
 
Profiles without lead-ins
Select this setting to allow pre-piercing for profiles that do not have lead-ins.
 
Profiles whose pre-pierce would interfere with the profile geometry
Select this setting to allow pre-pierces that interfere with their own profiles.
 
Profiles whose pre-pierce would interfere with another profile
Select this setting to allow pre-pierces that interfere with other profiles.
 
Profiles that start on the plate edge
Select this setting to allow pre-pierces for profiles that share a point with the plate edge.
 
Tabs
Select this setting to apply pre-pierces to tabs. This applies only to tabs that have lead-ins.
 
Tabs without lead-ins
Select this box to allow pre-pierces to be placed on tabs that do not have lead-ins. When selected, pre-pierces will be allowed on all tabs.
 

Viewing pre-pierces on a part

Pre-pierces are applied when the cut sequence is set for a part or nest. You can view pre-pierce geometry in Cut Simulation mode (either
from the main nesting window or Advanced Edit).

Part with Pre-pierce as Circles set. Pre-pierce geometry is visible in Cut simulation mode.

- 172 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

How are lead-ins shortened for pre-piercing?

Lead-ins are automatically shortened by a length equal to the radius (r) of the pre-pierce hole. This is done so that the lead-in starts right
at the edge of the hole.

An exterior lead-in with a drilled pre-pierce, where r is the radius of the drill tool
 
For Pre-pierce as Circles, radius is specified using the Radius setting on this page. For Pre-pierce as Drill, ProNest uses the radius of the
pre-pierce drill tool.
 
With Torch Blow Through and Pre-pierce as Punch pre-pierce styles, lead-ins are shortened by the radius set in the "Pierce Radius"
column in the cut Process Parameters spreadsheet. If the column doesn't exist or the value is blank, lead-ins will not be trimmed - they
will start at the center of the pre-pierce hole.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click CNC Output > click Pre-Pierces

- 173 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - Auto Height Control settings

Auto Height Control Settings
Disable for interior profiles smaller than <value> in.²
Disabling of auto height control can be limited to interior profiles that are smaller in area than a specific value. Auto height control is dis-
abled for the entire profile (from the end of the lead-in to the end of the lead-out). The value, Auto height control threshold, is high-
lighted and underlined - like a hyperlink.
 
Units: Area
Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.²
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.²
 
To edit the value:
 1. Click the value (it’s a hyperlink).
 2. Specify the Auto height control threshold.

Note: This setting is useful for machines where the cutting head tends to follow the surface of the material being cut. When an
interior profile drops out, the cutting head on these machines may dive into the hole - risking damage.

Disable for all lead-outs

Select this setting to disable auto height control at the beginning of the lead-out.

Note: This setting applies to interior, exterior, and open profiles. However, this setting does not apply to interior profiles that already
fit the criterion defined by the Disable for interior profiles smaller than… setting. That setting takes precedence for interior
profiles.

Disable no further than <value> in. before the lead-out

Disables auto height control the specified distance before the beginning of a lead-out. The value is highlighted and underlined – like a
hyperlink.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 in.
Recommended Value: 1.0 in.
 
This setting is active only if Disable for all lead-outs is selected.
 
To edit the value:
 1. Click the value (it’s a hyperlink).
 2. Specify the Disable no further than... value.

Notes:  l For parts with overtravel, auto height control will be disabled at the specified distance from the end of the over-
travel.
 l For parts with no lead-out, auto height control will be disabled at the specified distance from the torch off point.

Disable for crop lines

- 174 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Select this setting to disable auto height control for crop lines.
 
Re-enable before the torch turns off
Select this setting to re-enable auto height control immediately before the cutting head turns off at the end of the lead-out. If this setting
is not selected, the auto height control will be re-enabled immediately after the cutting head turns off at the end of the lead-out.
 
This setting is active if...
 
 l The value for Disable for interior profiles smaller than… is set to a non-zero value
-or-
 l The Disable for all lead-outs check box is selected
-or-
 l The Disable for crop lines check box  is selected.
 
Disable for skeleton lines
Select this setting to disable auto height control for skeleton cut up lines.

Important: The value of this setting is used only at the moment when a nest's skeleton is created.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click CNC Output > click Auto Height Control

- 175 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - Step and Repeat settings

Step and Repeat allows the CNC file to be repeated along the length or width of the plate.  This has the same effect as arraying a row or
column of parts, except that the CNC file is much smaller.  

Step and Repeat Settings

Use step and repeat
Select this setting if you wish to use step and repeat mode during output.

Offset
Each repeated row or column will be offset this distance from the previous row or column.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in.

Direction
Repeated rows (or columns) will be offset in the direction selected here.
 
Choices: Left, Up, Right, Down
 
When repeating horizontally nested parts (rows), this setting should be set to either Up or Down.  Likewise, when repeating vertically nes-
ted parts (columns), this setting should be set to Left or Right.

Advanced: Since some details of step and repeat are machine specific, please refer to your machine’s programming manual and con-
tact Hypertherm in the event that changes are required to your post processor (CFF).

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click CNC Output > click Step and Repeat

- 176 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - Traverse settings

Traverse Settings
With traverse settings, you can control how the torch/head is raised when traversing away from different types of actions. This enables
you to reduce production time and energy consumption when processing your parts.

Important: Not all cutting machines differentiate between a partial raise and a full raise. You should make sure that the machine you
are generating output for can make both partial and full raises before using these settings.

You can set how the torch/head is raised when traversing away from the following types of cuts:
 
 l Exterior profiles
 l Interior profiles
 l Open profiles
 l Skeleton cuts
 l Crops
 l Pre-pierces
 
For each action, you can choose:
 
(Default) - This setting will leave the torch/head in the normal, default position (as set in your part source file) when traversing away
from a given action.
 
Partial Raise -This setting will result in a partial raise of the torch/head when traversing away from a given action.
 
Full Raise - This setting will result in a full raise of the torch/head when traversing away from a given action.

Note: In order to avoid potential collisions, Collision Avoidance generates avoidance paths for certain traverse motions. When Col-
lision Avoidance is turned on, these avoidance paths take precedence over the Traverse Settings on this page. Traverse settings
will only have an effect on traverses that are not assigned avoidance paths.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click CNC Output > click Traverse

- 177 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - Output Axis settings

The Output Axis settings page allows you to modify your machine home and to define the output axis that will be used to generate CNC
files.
 
This screen shows a simplified view of a rectangular plate.
 

 
One corner of the plate will be highlighted and will have two arrows coming out of it - representing the output axis. In the center of the
plate are 3 buttons which allow you to modify the output axis.

Changing the Machine Home

To change your machine home:

 1. Hover the mouse over one of the corners of the plate. This will cause the corner to become temporarily highlighted.
 2. Click the left mouse button to select the new machine home.
 
As you change the machine home, the output axis will remain the same.
 

Example:
 
With a machine home in the lower-left corner, the arrow pointing up is labeled as the +Y axis and the arrow pointing right is labeled
as the +X axis. If the machine home was then changed to the upper-left corner, there would be a down arrow labeled as the -Y axis.
Notice that the output axis hasn't changed: up is still +Y and right is still +X.

Changing the Output Axis

Some machines have the plate loaded with the long side on the bottom, but as far as the machine is concerned this is the right-hand side
of the plate. These machines assume a lower-right machine home. Presenting this vertical plate correctly in ProNest would result in a
much smaller view of the nest (because most monitors are wider than they are tall). To provide the best view of the nest and to also allow
for correct output you would select a lower left machine home, but rotate the axes 90 degrees clockwise. During output, this has the
effect of changing the nest to one with a lower-right machine home and with its long side on the right, rather than the bottom.

Note: Changes to the output axis will only affect CNC output.

To change your output axis, use the three buttons in the middle of the plate...

- 178 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l The first button ( ) will rotate the output axis clockwise by 90°.

 l The middle button ( ) will flip the output axis vertically.

 l The last button ( ) will flip the output axis horizontally.

 
Click Default to restore the default output axis with +Y in the up direction and +X in the right direction.
 

Example:
 
With a machine home in the lower-left corner, the arrow pointing up is labeled as the +Y axis and the arrow pointing right is labeled
as the +X axis. Click the rotate button once and the up-arrow will become -X while the right-arrow changes to +Y. Click the flip axis
vertically button and the up-arrow will become +X while the right-arrow remains the same as +Y.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click CNC Output > click Output Axis

- 179 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - Subroutines settings

A subroutine is a basic program unit, usually representing a profile or collection of profiles. Certain types of machines, primarily lasers,
allow the use of subroutines to reduce CNC file size. For example, on a nest of 500 identical circles, rather than specifying the geometry
for the circle 500 times, a single subroutine could be created, which would then be called 500 times.

Important: A specialized section in the post processor governs whether this settings page is available. Usually this section is not used.
This section also controls the available choices for Type and Mode, and whether or not Use rotation angle is active. If
you need subroutine support, contact Hypertherm.

Subroutine Settings
Type
Defines the type of subroutines that will be generated.
 
Choices: (None), Profile, Part, Profile Cluster, Part Cluster, Optimized
 
(None)
No subroutines will be created.
 
Profile
Each subroutine will represent a single profile.
 
Part
Each subroutine will represent a collection of profiles (a part).
 
Profile Cluster
This functionality is not currently implemented.
 
Part Cluster
This functionality is not currently implemented.
 
Optimized
This functionality is not currently implemented.

Note: The rest of the settings on this page are activated only if Type is set to something other than (None).

Mode
This setting defines the mode that will be used for generating the CNC code for the subroutines.
 
Choices: Always Absolute, Always Incremental, Same as Main Program
 
Always Absolute
Subroutines will be generated in absolute mode, irrespective of the mode of the main program.
 
Always Incremental
Subroutines will be generated in incremental mode, irrespective of the mode of the main program.
 
Same As Main Program
Subroutines will be generated using the same mode as the main program.
 

- 180 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Use rotation angle

Select this setting to allow ProNest to use the same subroutine for similar geometry being output at different rotation angles. Otherwise,
a different subroutine will be used for each unique rotation of the same geometry.
 
Allow nested subroutines
Check this setting to allow one subroutine to call another subroutine.  For example, this would allow a part subroutine to be composed of
calls to profile subroutines.

Important: This functionality is not currently implemented.

Allow subroutined nests

Select this setting to generate subroutines for each nest in the job.  These nest subroutines may be output into a single master CNC file.
This setting is intended for machines with automatic plate handling systems.

Important: This functionality is not currently implemented.

Allow subroutines that contain only collision avoidance motions

Select this setting if you are using collision avoidance and want separate profile subroutines generated that contain only the rapid tra-
verses between profiles. Otherwise, the collision avoidance motions will be contained within their respective part or profile subroutines.

Note: This setting is intended to reduce the number of subroutines required. A unique subroutine will be generated based on the
total geometry of the part or profile - including the avoidance motions. If the avoidance motions are removed from con-
sideration, it becomes more likely that subroutines can be reused.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click CNC Output > click Subroutines

- 181 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - Microjoint / Plate Handler settings

Important: A specialized section in the post processor governs whether this settings page is available. Usually this section is not used.
If you need microjoint and/or plate handler support, contact Hypertherm.

Microjoint Settings
Microjoints are machine-applied tabs. A place holder is inserted into the CNC code which the cutting machine translates into a tab when
the CNC code is run. Settings in the settings table determine the size of the tab and the length of the tab lead-in. Not all machines have
this capability.
 
Settings Table
This setting specifies which settings table is used for microjoints. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the
XLS files found in the Microjoint spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences).

Tip:
To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

Use programmed microjoints

Select this setting if you want to be able to manually add microjoint tabs to profile geometry.  When adding tabs manually in Advanced
Edit, you will be given the option of adding the tab as a microjoint instead of a normal tab.

Note: The following two settings are active only if Use programmed microjoints is selected.

Replace every lead-out with a microjoint

Select this setting if you want to replace all profile lead-outs with microjoint tabs at output time.
 
Use microjoints during AutoTab
Select this setting to have ProNest insert microjoint tab placeholders during the AutoTab process (instead of normal tabs). Otherwise, nor-
mal tabs will be added.

Important: The value of this setting is used only when tabs are added. Changing the value of this setting does not affect parts that
already have tabs (or don't have tabs).

Use automatic microjoints

Select this setting if you want the machine to automatically insert microjoints where the machine deems appropriate.  Settings from the
Microjoint settings table may be used by the machine to make this determination.

Plate Handler Settings

An automatic plate handler is a mechanism provided by some machine manufacturers that enables the cutting machine to load its own
plates as specified in the CNC code.  Not all machines have this capability.
 
Use plate handler
Select this setting if your machine is capable of using an automatic plate handler and you wish to make use of this feature.

Note: The Settings table setting is active only if Use plate handler is selected.

Settings table

- 182 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

This setting specifies which settings table is used for the plate handler. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains all
the XLS files found in the Plate Handler spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences).

Tip:
To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click CNC Output > click Microjoint / Plate Handler

- 183 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - DXF Output settings

For DXF output, layer and color information is normally stored in the post processor or may be retrieved from Process Parameters (if pro-
cess parameters are being used). Some of the settings on this page allow this behavior to be overridden. The DXF files produced during
output should be readable by ProNest or any CAD system that understands DXF files.

Important: A specialized section in the post processor governs whether this settings page is available. It also controls which DXF Out-
put settings are available. Usually this section is not used. If you need DXF Output support, contact Hypertherm.

DXF Output Settings

Output polylines
Select this setting to output DXF files using polylines. Each profile would be generated as a single polyline entity. Clear this setting to out-
put DXF files as individual DXF entities (arcs and lines).
 
Output plate geometry
Select this setting to output the plate geometry (edges) into the DXF file. Applies to nests only.
 
Output safe zones
Select this setting to output the safe zone geometry into the DXF file. Applies to nests only.
 
Output leads
Select this setting to output existing lead-ins and lead-outs on profiles when outputting DXF files. Otherwise, leads are removed.
 
Use quality to output CAD colors
Select this setting to interpret the QUALITY attribute of arcs and lines as CAD colors. If this setting is cleared, the default CAD color will be
used (this comes from either the post processor or the Process Parameters settings table).

Layer Names
Output original layer names whenever possible
Select this setting to output the original CAD layer names as the entity layer names in the DXF file. If the profile being output was not ori-
ginally a CAD file, then the default layer information will be used (this comes from either the post processor or the Process Parameters set-
tings table).

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > double-click CNC Output > click DXF Output

- 184 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Job Storage settings

This settings page gives you the ability to set job options that are specific to your machine (CFG).

General Settings

Default job folder

You can set a machine-specific default folder for saving jobs (.nif). This can be useful if you want to save job files to different folders
based on the machine used by that job.

Suppress the Save As dialog during a normal save

When selected, the Save As dialog will not appear when a new job is saved for the first time. The job will be saved in the Default job
folder (also specified on this page) with its default file name, which is defined in the Naming preferences.

Note: Regardless of whether this setting is enabled or not, the Save As dialog will always appear when the Save As button is
clicked.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 n Settings > click Job Storage

- 185 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

4. SETTINGS SPREADSHEETS
About spreadsheets
For situations where default settings are not able to provide the desired result, ProNest uses spreadsheets. With spreadsheets, you can dif-
ferentiate settings based on keys such as material type, thickness, profile type, profile area, etc. Each row in the spreadsheet defines a
unique setting based on these parameters, giving you more comprehensive control over cutting and nesting.
 
Available settings spreadsheets:
 l Process Parameters
 l Costing
 l Interior Leads
 l Exterior Leads
 l AutoTab
 l Cutting Techniques
 l Bevel
 l Collision Avoidance
 l Crop
 l Skeleton Cut-Up
 l CNC Output - Pre-Pierces
 l Slug Destroy
 l Fly Cut
 l Drill Parameters
 l Microjoint*
 l Plate Handler*

*Note: The post processor (CFF) must be properly configured to make use of the Microjoint and Plate Handler spreadsheets. If you
need to use microjoints and/or a plate handler, please contact Hypertherm.

Settings spreadsheets can be created and edited with a spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel and are saved with the .xls exten-
sion.
 
Where are settings spreadsheets stored? (see "Default installation folders" on page 14)

Advantages of using spreadsheets

ProNest spreadsheets provide a powerful and flexible way to use settings specific to a given material and process. In addition, factors
such as part class, profile type, profile area, quality, and condition may be used to further specify a group of settings to use. Spreadsheets
give you a great deal of control over how and when settings are applied to parts during processing and nesting.

- 186 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using spreadsheets
You can use spreadsheets for certain process settings, including Process Parameters, Cutting Techniques, AutoTab, and Leads, as well as
selected machine settings. When a spreadsheet is used for a given setting, ProNest will attempt to match records in the XLS with the data
from the required parts. If a match is found, the settings found in that XLS will be used in part processing and nesting.
 
To use a settings spreadsheet:
 1. In the Settings dialog, navigate to the appropriate settings page.
 2. Choose the spreadsheet to use for that setting from the drop down menu.
You can assign a different set of spreadsheets for each process that is supported by your ProNest machine. The same spreadsheet can be
shared by multiple processes, if necessary. Machine settings that use spreadsheets, such as Costing and Bevel, only require one spread-
sheet per machine.

Modifying spreadsheets
Settings spreadsheets can be modified using a spreadsheet application (such as Microsoft Excel). Spreadsheets have a very precise
format, which is specific to XLS type, that should be followed when making modifications. This is discussed in greater detail later in this
section.

Tip: You can easily open and modify a settings spreadsheet from within ProNest:

 l From a settings page, click the Edit button.

Saving information
After making changes to a spreadsheet, you should save your changes through the spreadsheet application. All information in a spread-
sheet is stored in an .xls file, outside of ProNest. Note that settings information within an XLS is not saved with a job. When a job is
loaded, the current settings in the spreadsheets are used, and not those that existed when the job was last saved.

Considerations
There are several considerations that should be taken into account when using spreadsheets:
 l Each key used dramatically increases the number of records required. A large number of records may be needed, particularly
when optional keys are used. However, using wildcards can help mitigate this problem.
 l Each spreadsheet should contain records that cover all combinations of keys that are required by the application. If all com-
binations are not explicitly covered, appropriate default records should be defined in the XLS.
 l Materials listed in an XLS record must exactly match those in the database, and must be the same as when a given part or plate
was originally loaded. Although material names are not case sensitive and white space is not considered, the spelling and punc-
tuation of each material name in the records of the XLS table must be identical to the materials in the database. Otherwise, no
record will be matched in the XLS.

- 187 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

General spreadsheet format

ProNest spreadsheets have a required format consisting of four components: a units cell, a column header row cell, column headers, and
rows of data.
 
Units cell (A1)
Measurement units are specified in cell A1, located in the upper left corner of the table. Allowable values for this cell are "inch" or "mm".
If this cell is blank, inch is assumed.
 
Column header row cell (B1)
The row number of the required column headers must be specified in cell B1, which is located to the right of the units cell. Allowable val-
ues for this cell are whole numbers greater than or equal to "2". If this cell is blank, a value of "2" is assumed. It can be useful to modify
this number if rows of information must be added above the required column header (for things such as translated column-headings or
reference information).

Note: For non-English setups, cell B1 must always specify the English column header row. Any non-English column header row
appears for informational purposes only.

 
Column headers
Column headers are located in the row specified in cell B1. Each cell of this row contains a heading that indicates the data stored in that
column. For instance, the column header "Material" specifies a column containing the names of different materials.
 
There are two basic types of column headers: keys and non-keys. Column header keys, such as Material and Thickness, are used to
determine when a particular group of settings should be used. The other column headers (non-keys) contain the actual settings data
used in part processing and nesting.
 
In general, existing column headers should not be modified, as they must adhere to a specific format and context. Modifying the inform-
ation in this row may lead to the inability to use information in that settings table. However, columns may be moved to improve the lay-
out of the table.

Advanced: For Process Parameters XLS tables, user-defined column headers may be added, though this would be considered an
advanced type of action that requires integration with your CFF. See ""User-defined Process Parameters" on page 197" for
more information.

Data rows
The rows of settings data begin immediately below the column headers. A row of settings data is called a record. Each record contains a
complete set of settings values for a given table. Rows may be added or removed and row data may be modified. It is important that the
proper type of data is entered into each cell. For instance, numeric data should be entered in the "Thickness" column, and alphanumeric
data should be entered into the "Material" column.
 

Example:
 

- 188 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

  A B C D E F G
1 inch 3          
2 Part Attributes Miscellaneous   Separations

3 Material Thickness Feedrate Kerf Part Sep Plate Sep Pierce Sep
4 MS 0.1250 27.0 0.04 0.500 0.500 0.500
5 MS 0.2500 25.5 0.04 0.500 0.500 0.500
6 MS 0.5000 24.0 0.05 0.500 0.500 0.500
7 MS 0.7500 16.0 0.09 1.000 1.000 1.000

Figure 1
 
The table shown in Figure 1 was taken from a sample Process Parameters XLS. Notice that in this spreadsheet:
 l In cell A1, units has been set to "inch".
 l In cell B1, the "3" indicates that row 3 contains column headers.
 l In row 2, there is a description of the column headers, which has been defined by the user. This row is used for informational
purposes and does not define any settings.
 l Column headers appear in row 3, as defined in cell B1. "Material" and "Thickness" are keys used in record matching. The
other column headers represent different Process Parameters settings.
 l Rows 4-7 contain data rows, or records, with settings values. In this example, there is a single material type with four different
thickness values. The feedrate, kerf, and separation values vary based on material thickness.

- 189 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Record matching
Each record, or data row in a spreadsheet, contains a complete set of settings values. This data is organized using keys, which are found
in the column header row of a settings spreadsheet. Keys are used to determine when a given record should be selected.
 
Material and Thickness are required keys for all XLS spreadsheets. Optional keys can be used to further refine record selection. Optional
keys will only be used in record selection if they exist in a given XLS.
 

Key Status Associated XLS Description Valid values

Material Required All settings spreadsheets The name of the material used Character string
   

Thickness Required All settings spreadsheets The thickness of the material used. Thickness Any positive num-
  is expressed as a distance in inches or mm. ber
 

Class Optional Leads XLS The part class of a given part. Part class can Character string
  Process Parameters XLS be used to organize your materials using spe-  
Cutting Techniques XLS cialized information such as cutting gas or
amperage.
 

Profile Area Optional Process Parameters XLS The area of a given profile. Any positive num-
  Cutting Techniques XLS Area is expressed in linear units squared (in. 2 ber
Lead Styles XLS or mm2).
AutoTab XLS
 

Profile Type Optional Process Parameters XLS The type of a given profile I,E,O,H,R,C,V,S,X,N,*
  Cutting Techniques XLS  
AutoTab XLS (see table below)
 

Quality Optional Process Parameters XLS The cut quality assigned to a given entity Integer from 0 - 255
AutoTab XLS  
 

Condition Optional Process Parameters XLS The cut condition (used with cutting tech- Character string
niques)
 

Tool Name Optional Drill Parameters XLS Exact match of tool name. Character string

Note: Keys are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

How is a record selected? 

The basis for selecting a record in a given situation involves matching part data against the information contained in the key columns of
a settings spreadsheet. The record whose key data most closely matches that of the required part will be selected. This process is called
record matching. The method used for record matching varies based on key type:
 

- 190 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Material
An exact match of the material is required to select a record.

Note: When entering material names in an XLS, make sure that the names appear exactly as they are defined in
the Material Database.

 l Thickness
Unlike Material, an exact match is not required for this key. A record will be selected if it contains the thickness value that is
closest to the required material thickness, as long as that value is less than or equal to the required thickness.
 

Example:
Let's say that the required material thickness is 0.5 inches. Consider the following scenarios:
 l If a record exists with a material thickness of 0.5, that record will be selected.
 l If a sole record exists with a material thickness of 0.25, it will be selected.
 l If two records exist, one with a material thickness of 0.25, and another with a material thickness of 0.125,
the record with a material thickness of 0.25 will be selected.
 l If two records exist, one with a material thickness of 0.25, and another with a material thickness of 0.51,
the record with the material thickness of 0.25 will be selected. (Even though 0.51 is the closer of the two
values, it exceeds the required material thickness and will therefore not be selected.)

 l Class
If this key is used, an exact match of the class is required to select a record.
 
 l Profile Area
If this key is used, a record is selected if it contains a profile area greater than or equal to the required area. If more than one
record match is found, the record with the closest profile area greater than or equal to the required profile area is selected.

Tip: The column header "Diameter" can be used in an XLS to help in defining "Profile Area." Note that "Dia-
meter" is not itself a key, and is only used to assist in the calculation of Profile Area.

 l Profile Type
If this key is used, an exact match of the profile type is required to select a record.
 
Profile types are represented in the XLS by using the first letter of their name – "I" for interior, "E" for exterior and "O" for open.
Combinations are represented by listing the letters separated by commas. For example, interior and exterior are represented
together as "I,E".
 
Valid values for profile type are summarized in the following table:
 

Profile Type Valid values

Interior I

Exterior E

Open O

- 191 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Interior and Open I,O

Exterior and Open E,O

Interior and Exterior I,E

Interior, Exterior, and Open I,E,O

Interior round hole H

Exterior round profile R

Crop C

Vaporize V

Skeleton Cut-Up (All) S

Skeleton Cut-Up (Exterior) X

Skeleton Cut-Up (Interior) N

All types *

 
 l Quality
If this key is used, an exact match is required to select a record.
 
 l Condition
If this key is used, an exact match is required to select a record.
 
 l Tool Name
If this key is used, an exact match is required to select a record.
 
If a suitable match is not found in a given XLS during record selection, ProNest will use the default values for that setting.

Wildcards
An asterisk (*) can be used as a wildcard character for any required or optional key and will match any value if no other record is
matched. Wildcards can be used for any key regardless of its data type. Using wildcards is a good way to designate default conditions for
keys, and can help avoid having to add numerous rows to a settings table to cover every possible case. This is especially true when using
multiple optional keys such as Class, Profile Type, and Profile Area. 
 

Example:
If "*" is used in the Material column of a given record, and the required material is "A36", the record containing the "*" will match
unless another record exists that contains a Material value of "A36".

Default records
You can use default records to set default settings values in your spreadsheets. Default records can be defined using wildcards to ensure
a record match for any combination of required and optional keys. Adding a record that contains a wildcard for every key will ensure a
default record match in every scenario. Doing this is similar to using default values from your settings ( ) page. However, if you are
using settings spreadsheets, you should set your default settings in the XLS to ensure that all of your settings are correctly applied.

- 192 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Units conversion
In some instances, settings values in a spreadsheet will need to be converted by ProNest to different units. This may occur, for instance, if
a settings table is in millimeters but CNC output is required in inches. ProNest can convert units on settings spreadsheets, though only
certain values will be converted, as summarized in the following table:
 

Spreadsheet Type Columns converted

Process Parameters Thickness
Feedrate
Part Sep
Plate Sep
Pierce Sep
Kerf
Profile Area

Lead Styles Thickness
Corner In Scale
Corner In Extension
Corner Out Scale
Corner Out Extension
Corner Out Overtravel
Side In Scale
Side In Extension
Side Out Scale
Side Out Extension
Side Out Overtravel

Costing Thickness

Cutting Techniques Thickness
Profile Area

 
When converting from U.S. Standard to Metric, values are multiplied by 25.4; when converting Metric to U.S. Standard, values are divided
by 25.4.

Important: Units conversion is not done on user-defined process parameters.

- 193 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Process Parameters spreadsheets

Process Parameters spreadsheets contain settings specific to different material types, thickness ranges, part classes, profile types and
sizes. These spreadsheets give you dynamic control over cutting speed, kerf, and cutting parameters to be used in nesting, CNC output,
and costing.
 
Each available process (plasma, gas, etc.) on your machine can have a separate Process Parameters spreadsheet.

Use Process Parameters spreadsheets 

 1. In Settings , double-click the cut process, then click Process Parameters .
 2. In the Process Parameters box, select a spreadsheet.

Process Parameters XLS format

Column headers

Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

Allowable column header keys used for record matching:

 
 l Material
 l Thickness
 l Class
 l Profile Area
 l Profile Type
 l Quality
 l Condition
Process Parameter settings defined in the column header row:

Kerf
This defines the width of the torch path. This value is used for kerf commands in output and for pre-kerfing parts in ProNest.
 
Units: Linear distance

Feedrate
Cutting speed. ProNest ultimately uses the value in this column for feedrates in output and costing. Other related columns, such as
Base Feedrate or Feedrate Percentage, may appear as well, though these are used only for calculating the value of this Feedrate
column.
 
Units: Speed (in./min or mm/min)

Tip: When editing the feedrates in a settings spreadsheet, it is recommended that you modify the Feedrate Percentage column to

- 194 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

get the results you want.

Part Sep
Part - part separation. The minimum separation allowed between two nested parts. Nested parts that are closer together will be shown
in conflict.
 
Units: Linear distance

Plate Sep
Part - plate edge separation. The minimum separation allowed between a nested part and the plate edge. Nested parts that are too
close to the plate edge will be shown in conflict.
 
Units: Linear distance

Pierce Sep
Part - pierce separation. The minimum separation allowed between a nested part and the pierce point of another nested part. Nested
parts that are too close to a pierce point will be shown in conflict.
 
Units: Linear distance

Dynamic Pierce
This indicates the number of times to cut a lead-in extension. A value of "1" would result in one back and forth pass along the lead-in
extension.
 
Dynamic Pierce is a method used in waterjet applications for making pierces using lead-in extensions. When dynamic pierce is used,
the cutting head moves back and forth along the lead-in extension to penetrate the plate before cutting the lead-in. The lead-in exten-
sion must be greater than zero for this to be applied to a given profile.
 
Data type: Integer

Pierce Radius
Used for trimming lead-ins for Pre-Pierces. When using Torch Blow Through and Pre-Pierce as Punch styles, lead-ins are shortened by
this distance. See Pre-Pierces for more information.
 
Units: Linear distance

NC Comments
Used to insert a comments in output. Comment will be included in the header of the output file.

Ignore
This column is used primarily to control the visibility of material records in ProNest. If a row is set to be ignored, it will be unavailable in
ProNest and will not be used during record matching.
 
Valid values: 0 or blank = Do not ignore, 1 = ignore row

Example:
 

- 195 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

If you never need to cut aluminum, you may want to hide all aluminum choices so that they never appear in ProNest when you're
selecting a material.
 
For each row where Material = AL, you could set the Ignore value to 1.

Note: The typical Process Parameters spreadsheet contains many additional columns that are machine-specific and beyond the
scope of this Help system. Please contact Hypertherm if you require additional information about your setup.

 
Example:
 
Consider the following excerpt of a Process Parameters spreadsheet:
 

  A B C D E F G H
1 inch 3            
2 Keys Miscellaneous   Separations
3 Material Thickness Profile Feedrate Kerf Part Sep Plate Sep Pierce
Area Sep
4 MS 0.2500 0.50 27.0 0.04 0.500 0.500 0.500
5 MS 0.2500 2.00 25.5 0.04 0.500 0.500 0.500
6 MS 0.7500 * 24.0 0.05 0.500 0.500 0.500
7 MS 0.1000 * 16.0 0.09 1.000 1.000 1.000

 
This table contains a single material with three different thickness values. The optional Profile Area key has been used to further refine
record selection. For the purposes of this example, let's say that a required part has a material and thickness of MS 0.2500 in. with a pro-
file area of 1.9 in. 2. The record in row 5 would be selected, and the settings in that row would be applied.

Process Parameters spreadsheets and materials

When Process Parameters spreadsheets are in use, when you select a material in a job, the list of available materials shows only the mater-
ials found in your Process Parameters spreadsheet. When spreadsheets are not used, the list of available materials comes from your mater-
ial database.

- 196 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

User-defined Process Parameters

Advanced: Adding user-defined process parameters to your spreadsheet and CFF is considered an advanced type of action that is gen-
erally not recommended. If done incorrectly, it could negatively affect your output or cause ProNest to work improperly.
Exercise caution when making any changes your CFF or to the column headers of your spreadsheets. If you have any ques-
tions, please contact Hypertherm for more information.

In addition to the standard process parameters described above, user-defined process parameters can be added to a Process Parameters
spreadsheet and used for CNC output.

To add user-defined process parameters:

 1. Open the Process Parameters spreadsheet with your spreadsheet application.
 2. Add a new column.
 3. Enter your custom name in the header of that column.
 4. Enter data into the appropriate process parameters records.
 5. To use this parameter in CNC output, add the name, data type and default value to the [USER DEFINED VARIABLES] section of the
CFF used by your machine.
 
This parameter can be used in any format section of the CFF and can be output to the CNC file or used in calculations or evaluations.
Note that user-defined process parameters are only used for CNC output and not for nesting or costing. Units conversion is not done on
user-defined process parameters.

- 197 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Drill Process Parameters XLS: Format

Column headers

Keys

Tool Name
This should exactly match the tool name listed in the Drill Tools tab of the tool library. Compound tool names should not be used here,
only individual physical tools. Wildcards (*) are allowed.
 
In order to ensure that you have accurate machine parameters for drilling, be sure to include settings for each drill tool that exists in
the tool library or use wildcards to apply settings to a group of tools. A good practice is to make sure to update the Drill Parameters
spreadsheet each time you add a new drill tool to the tool library.

Tip: You can quickly get a complete list of drill tools in the tool library as follows:
 1. On the Drill Tools tab, press CTRL + A to select all rows.
 2. Press CTRL + C to copy the entire grid.
 3. Open Microsoft Excel and paste in the entire grid into a new sheet.
 4. Copy the contents of the Name column into your settings spreadsheet.

Material
Material type from the Process Parameters spreadsheet.

Thickness
Thickness from the Process Parameters spreadsheet.

Class
Class from the Process Parameters spreadsheet.

Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

Drill parameter settings

Parameters
This is commonly a concatenated string that contains all the drilling parameters for a given row.
 
The actual parameter values used vary from one setup and machine manufacturer to another. Depending on your drilling machine, the
settings in the Drill Parameters file may include values for things like:
 l Spindle speed
 l Vertical feedrate
 l Depth
 l Cycle type such as pecking or boring
 l Coolant
Please contact Hypertherm if you need assistance with this file.

- 198 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About Cutting Techniques spreadsheets

Cutting techniques are used to specify how parts should be cut based on sections of a part's geometry. Machines can have difficulty cut-
ting certain sections of a part, such as sharp corners and small radii. These sections often do not cut well at the speed and parameter
levels that are used in the rest of the profile. With cutting techniques, ProNest will take into account part geometry and apply ramping
techniques or make adjustments to other cutting parameters based on the situation. Cutting techniques can give you a great deal of con-
trol over how parts are cut and can increase cut quality while minimizing damage to parts and to the cutting head.
 
Using cutting techniques effectively in ProNest requires the use of a Cutting Techniques spreadsheet. You can specify a different Cutting
Techniques XLS for each cut process (such as plasma cutting or oxyfuel cutting) or use the same spreadsheet for all of your cut pro-
cesses.
 
To use Cutting Techniques spreadsheets:
 l On the settings page for a given process, from the Cutting Techniques box, select a spreadsheet.

Note: Using cutting techniques in ProNest is optional. If you don’t want to use cutting techniques for a given process, set the cutting
techniques selection box to (none) for that process.

- 199 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using Cutting Techniques spreadsheets

Cutting Techniques spreadsheets contain a list of instructions to be executed in certain situations. These instructions generally modify
the state of the machine and can affect things like kerf compensation and cutting speed. There are three central components of a Cutting
Techniques XLS: cutting technique types, keys, and commands.

Fundamental concepts
Types of cutting techniques
A cutting technique type specifies when to use cutting techniques on a given section of a profile, such as a corner, radius (arc), or lead. If
a given cutting technique type is defined, when ProNest encounters the part geometry specified by that type (for instance, a lead-in), it
will assign the appropriate set of actions to take based on the data contained in the XLS. Cutting technique types are defined in the
column header row of the Cutting Techniques spreadsheet.
 
You can set up a Cutting Techniques XLS to use the following types of techniques:
 l Corner Ramp Up
 l Corner Ramp Down
 l Lead In Ramp Up
 l Lead Out Ramp Down
 l Radius Ramp Up
 l Radius Ramp Down
 l Pre Kerf Ramp Down
 l Post Kerf Ramp Up
 l Corner Radius
 l Corner Radius Threshold Angle
 
Record matching
Record matching for Cutting Techniques spreadsheets follows the same criteria as for other ProNest spreadsheets. Keys used for Cutting
Techniques XLS record matching include: Material, Thickness, Class, Profile Area, and Profile Type.
 
Commands
Unlike other settings tables, the Cutting Techniques XLS records contain commands. These commands work with a given cutting tech-
nique type to tell ProNest what series of actions to take in a given situation. Commands are entered in the data row of the appropriate
column in the following format:
 
Command (value)

Generally there is more than one command in a single cell of a given record. Multiple commands are separated by commas.
 

Example:
 
Two common cutting technique commands, "Move" and "Feedrate%", might appear in a single data row cell as follows:
 
Move(0.25), Feedrate%(85)

Note: Though not keys, the Radius and Length commands can be used during record selection when multiple sequences are defined
for the same cutting technique type. For more information, refer to "Cutting Techniques XLS: Commands" on page 209.

- 200 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The Base Condition

The Base Condition refers to the default cutting condition. This is the condition that will be used when no cutting techniques are in
effect. Base Condition data provides a reference point for relative cutting technique values, such as Feedrate% and Kerf%. Base condition
data comes from the Process Parameters spreadsheet.

- 201 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Cutting Techniques XLS: Column Headers

Cutting Techniques spreadsheets must adhere to a specific format. Column headers should be entered in the column header row as spe-
cified. Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

Column headers
Allowable column header keys:
 l Material
 l Thickness
 l Class
 l Profile Area
 l Profile Type
 
Cutting techniques defined in the column header row:
Lead In Ramp Up
This describes the sequence of actions to perform on a lead-in.
 

Example:
 
Consider the following part, where the cut path is represented by the outer line and cut direction is indicated by the arrows:
 

Figure 1

The lead-in of the part in Figure 1 is indicated in red. The dotted blue bracket indicates the portion of the profile to which the Lead In
Ramp Up technique will be applied. Note that this technique is applied over the length of the lead-in.
 

 
Corner n Ramp Down 
This describes the sequence of actions to take prior to cutting a corner (For the purposes of this setting, a corner is defined as the inter-
section of two lines, one arc and one line, or two arcs, such that they form an angle that is less than or equal to 90 degrees. In the case of
an arc, the tangent to the arc at the intersection point is used to determine the angle.).
 

Example:
 

- 202 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Consider the following part, where the cut path is represented by the outer line and cut direction is indicated by the arrows:
 

Figure 2
 
The corner of the part in Figure 2 is indicated in red. The dotted blue bracket indicates the portion of the profile to which the Corner
Ramp Down technique will be applied. The length of the Corner Ramp Down technique is defined by the Move (or Distance) com-
mand.
 

 
The n variable can be used to specify multiple Corner Ramp Down techniques. Values of n must be consecutive integers. If you use mul-
tiples of this type of technique (for example, "Corner 1 Ramp Down", "Corner 2 Ramp Down", etc.), the Length command should be used
to determine when a given multiple should be used.
 
If you do not want to use multiples of this cutting technique, this column header can simply be entered as "Corner Ramp Down".
 
Corner n Ramp Up 
This describes the sequence of actions to take after cutting a corner (For the purposes of this setting, a corner is defined as the inter-
section of two lines, or of one arc and one line, such that they form an angle that is less than or equal to 90 degrees. In the case of an arc,
the tangent to the arc at the intersection point is used to determine the angle.).
 

Example:
 
Consider the following part, where the cut path is represented by the outer line and cut direction is indicated by the arrows:
 

Figure 3
 

- 203 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The corner of the part in Figure 3 is indicated in red. The dotted blue bracket indicates the portion of the profile to which the Corner
Ramp Up technique will be applied. The length of the Corner Ramp Up technique is defined by the Move (or Distance) command.
 

 
The n variable can be used to specify multiple Corner Ramp Up techniques. Values of n must be consecutive integers. If you use multiples
of this type of technique (for example, "Corner 1 Ramp Up", "Corner 2 Ramp Up", etc.), the Length command should be used to determ-
ine when a given multiple should be used.
 
If you do not want to use multiples of this cutting technique, this column header can simply be entered as "Corner Ramp Up".
 
Radius n Ramp Down 
This specifies a sequence of actions to take prior to cutting an arc (radial entity).
 

Example:
 
Consider the following part, where the cut path is represented by the outer line and cut direction is indicated by the arrows:
 

Figure 4
 
There are two arcs in the part in Figure 4, which are indicated in red. The dotted blue brackets indicate the portions of the profile to
which the Radius Ramp Down technique will be applied. The length of the Radius Ramp Down technique is defined by the Move (or
Distance) command.
 

 
The n variable can be used to specify multiple Radius Ramp Down techniques. Values of n must be consecutive integers. If you use mul-
tiples of this type of technique (for example, "Radius 1 Ramp Down", "Radius 2 Ramp Down", etc.), the Radius command should be used
to determine when a given multiple should be used.
 
If you do not want to use multiples of this cutting technique, this column header can simply be entered as "Radius Ramp Down".
 
Radius n Ramp Up 
This describes the sequence of actions to perform after cutting an arc (radial entity).
 

- 204 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:
 
Consider the following part, where the cut path is represented by the outer line and cut direction is indicated by the arrows:
 

Figure 5
 
There are two arcs in the part in Figure 5, which are indicated in red. The dotted blue brackets indicate the portions of the profile to
which the Radius Ramp Up technique will be applied. The length of the Radius Ramp Up technique is defined by the Move (or
Distance) command.
 

 
The n variable can be used to specify multiple Radius Ramp Up techniques. Values of n must be consecutive integers. If you use multiples
of this type of technique (for example, "Radius 1 Ramp Up", "Radius 2 Ramp Up", etc.), the Radius command should be used to determine
when a given multiple should be used.
 
If you do not want to use multiples of this cutting technique, this column header can simply be entered as "Radius Ramp Up".

Note: You must use the "Radius" command to indicate the maximum radius to apply the cutting technique to when doing a Radius
Ramp Up or Radius Ramp Down. Otherwise, the technique will be applied to all radii.

Lead Out n Ramp Down

This describes the sequence of actions to perform prior to cutting a lead-out.
 

Example:
 
Consider the following part, where the cut path is represented by the outer line and cut direction is indicated by the arrows:
 

- 205 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 6
 
The lead-out of the part in Figure 6 is indicated in red. The dotted blue bracket indicates the portion of the profile to which the Lead
Out Ramp Down technique will be applied. Note that unlike the technique shown in Figure 1, this ramping technique is not applied
directly to the lead itself. Instead, it is applied to the portion of the profile that is just ahead of the lead-out.
 

 
The n variable can be used to specify multiple Lead Out Ramp Down techniques. Values of n must be consecutive integers. If you use mul-
tiples of this type of technique (for example, "Lead Out 1 Ramp Down", "Lead Out 2 Ramp Down", etc.), the Length command should be
used to determine when a given multiple should be used.
 
If you do not want to use multiples of this cutting technique, this column header can simply be entered as "Lead Out Ramp Down".

Note: If there is no lead-out on a part, the Lead Out Ramp Down is applied before the end point of the part as if the lead-out was
still there.

 
Pre Kerf Ramp Down
When cutting skeleton lines, bridged parts, or CLC parts, this describes the sequence of actions to perform prior to crossing the kerf.

 
Post Kerf Ramp Up
When cutting skeleton lines, bridged parts, or CLC parts, this describes the sequence of actions to perform immediately after crossing the
kerf.

- 206 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Corner Radius

Note: This technique is used primarily with laser machines to round off the corners of a profile, resulting in a smoother cutting
motion.

The Corner Radius describes the radius to apply to corners during rounding. If this column header is absent from your Cutting Techniques
XLS, corners will not be rounded. Also, if either entity forming the corner is not long enough to accommodate the radius, that corner will
not be rounded.
 
Expressed as: Linear distance

Example:
 

Figure 7
 
The part shown in Figure 7 has three corners that have not yet been rounded.
 
 

Figure 8
 
In Figure 8, the same part is shown with a Corner Radius value applied to each corner.
 
 

- 207 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 9
 
A close-up of a rounded corner is shown in Figure 9, with the solid red line depicting the radius of the arc used in rounding. The
Corner Radius value specifies the length of this radius.
 

 
Corner Radius Threshold Angle
Maximum corner angle that will be converted into a radius. If this value is not specified, a default of 90 degrees is used. The Corner Radius
column header must be specified in order to use this technique.
 
Expressed as: Angle in degrees

Reserve Length
This indicates the shortest segment to be created adjacent to a cutting technique.
 
Expressed as: Linear distance

Base Condition
The Base Condition sets the overall conditions present throughout the profile. These conditions come from your Process Parameters
spreadsheet.

Note: When applying corner or radius ramping techniques to a profile, it is important to remember to return to the normal, base con-
dition after the technique has been applied. For instance, if you have a Corner Ramp Down specified, you should also use a
Corner Ramp Up so that the cutting head returns to the base condition after cutting a corner.

- 208 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Cutting Techniques XLS: Commands

Commands are entered in the data row of the appropriate column in the following format:
 
Command (value)

Multiple commands in a single cell are separated by commas. Commands are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.
 

CUTTING TECHNIQUES - COMMANDS

Command Description Parameter Value

Move Perform a motion along an entity. This is expressed as a linear distance in units (inches Linear distance in units (or 
or mm) with one exception; when used with "Lead In Ramp Up", it refers to the per- percentage)

centage of the total length of the lead-in.

 
The total distance specified by all of the Move commands in a given cutting technique
sequence is the total amount of space required to apply that sequence.
 

Radius Maximum radius for which a particular Radius Ramp Up or Radius Ramp Down can be Linear distance
used. If this is not used for a given radius ramping technique, then that particular tech-
nique will be applied to all radii.
 

Feedrate Cutting speed to be inserted at a particular point Cutting speed (in./min

  or mm/min)
 

Feedrate% Percentage of the base Feedrate to be inserted at a particular point Percentage

 

Kerf Kerf compensation value to insert at a particular point Kerf compensation

  value expressed as a lin-
ear distance
 

Kerf% Percentage of the base kerf compensation value to insert at a particular point Percentage
 

Condition This command refers to the cutting condition, which must be specified in your Process Character string
Parameters XLS.
 

CFF Section Section of the CFF file to be output at a particular point. Generally, you will not need to Character string
use this command.
 

Dwell This is the duration of a dwell to be inserted at a particular point. When used, the cut- Time in seconds
ting head will remain stationary for the duration specified.
 

Distance Similar to the "Move" command. However, this command represents an absolute dis- Linear distance
tance whereas the "Move" command represents a relative distance.

- 209 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Command Description Parameter Value

 
Distance must be entered in descending order for a ramp down, and in ascending order
for a ramp up.
 

Length This describes the minimum length to which a cutting technique should be applied. Linear distance
 

Angle This represents the maximum corner angle for which a corner ramping technique Angle in degrees
should be used.
 

Shorthand Commands
Due to the fact that individual cutting technique records can become very long, you can use shorthand to specify cutting technique com-
mands. Abbreviated commands can be used interchangeably with their longer counterparts, and are expressed as follows:
 

Command Shorthand

Move Mv

Radius R

Feedrate Fr

Feedrate% Fr%

Kerf K

Kerf% K%

Condition Cond

CFF Section CS

Dwell Dw

Distance Dist

Length Ln

Angle An

Command sequences
Generally, a given cutting technique involves performing a series of commands. When multiple commands are entered for a given cutting
technique, they are executed in the order that they are written (from left to right).
 

Example:
 
Consider the following excerpt of a Cutting Techniques XLS:
 

- 210 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

  A B C D
1 inch 3    
2 Keys Corner Ramping  

3 Material Thickness Corner Ramp Down Corner Ramp Up

4 * * Feedrate%(80), Kerf%(110), Move(0.25),  Move(0.25), Feedrate%(90), Kerf%(105), 
Feedrate%(70), Kerf%(115), Move(0.25) Move(0.25), Feedrate%(100), Kerf%(100)

Figure 1
 
The spreadsheet in Figure 1 contains two cutting techniques, each with its own sequence of commands to follow.

Note: The total length of a given cutting technique can be calculated by totaling all of the Move lengths for that technique.

The Corner Ramp Down in this example would be executed as follows: 

 1. At the point 0.50 in. ahead of the corner, the feedrate would drop to 80% of the base feedrate, and the kerf compensation
value would increase to 110% of the base kerf. The cutting head would proceed the next 0.25 in. with these parameters in
place.
 2. When the cutting head reaches the point 0.25 in. ahead of the corner, the feedrate would drop to 70% of the base feedrate,
and the kerf would increase to 115% of the base kerf. The rest of the ramp down would be cut with these parameters (70%
and 115%) in place.
The Corner Ramp Up would then be executed as follows:
 1. From the corner (the intersection point), until the point 0.25 in. after the corner, the feedrate would remain at 70% and the
kerf would remain at 115%. (This is because the Move command was specified before the Feedrate% or Kerf% commands for
the ramp up technique.)
 2. At the point 0.25 in. after the corner, the feedrate would increase to 90% of the base feedrate, and the kerf compensation
would decrease to 105% of the base kerf. The cutting head would then proceed the next 0.25 in. using these parameters .
At the point 0.50 in. after the corner, the feedrate and kerf would return to their base values.
 
Let's see how these techniques might look when applied to a sample part. For the part shown in Figure 2, the cut path is represented
by the outer line and cut direction is indicated by the arrows:
 

- 211 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 2
 
The solid blue line along the profile represents the total length of the Corner Ramp Down cutting technique, which is 0.50 in. The
solid red line represents the total length of the Corner Ramp Up technique, which is also 0.50 in. The numbers indicate different
points along the two cutting techniques. Assume that points 2 and 4 are both 0.25 in. from the corner.
 
The following table details the effects of cutting techniques applied to the part in Figure 2:
 

Location Cutting parameters

Between 1 and 2 Feedrate% = 80; Kerf% = 110
Between 2 and 3 Feedrate% = 70; Kerf% = 115
Between 3 and 4 Feedrate% = 70; Kerf% = 115
Between 4 and 5 Feedrate% = 90; Kerf% = 105
After 5 Feedrate% = 100; Kerf% = 100

Commands and technique selection

The Radius, Length, and Angle commands are used to select between multiple cutting techniques of the same type (for example, Radius 1
Ramp Down and Radius 2 Ramp Down, etc.). 
 
Radius
The Radius command is used to specify the largest radius for which a particular radius ramp up or ramp down will be used. This enables
you to set up different radius ramping techniques for each specific radius size, or for ranges of radius sizes. This is entered as a maximum
length.
 
Length
The Length command enables you specify different cutting techniques for corners and lead-outs based on the available space in which
the cutting technique will be applied. This is entered as a minimum length.
 
Angle

- 212 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using the Angle command, you can specify when a given corner ramping technique should be used, based on the angle of the corner.
This enables you to set up different corner ramping techniques for ranges of corner angles. This is entered as a maximum angle.
 

Example:
 
Consider the following excerpt of a Cutting Techniques XLS, which is using multiple Radius Ramp Down techniques:
 

  A B C D
1 inch 3    
2 Keys Radius Ramping  

3 Material Thickness Radius 1 Ramp Down Radius 2 Ramp Down

4 * * Radius(2.99), Feedrate%(90), Move(0.50) Radius(10), Feedrate%(85), Move(0.25)

 
Arcs with a radius of 2.99 in. or less will have the Radius 1 Ramp Down technique applied to them. Arcs with radii greater than 2.99 in.
and less than or equal to 10 in. will use the sequence defined in Radius 2 Ramp Down.
 

- 213 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Cutting Techniques XLS: Walkthrough

Now that we’ve covered all the basics, let’s see how to use a few different sample cutting techniques. For this example, we will only con-
sider a single material, though this discussion is applicable to any number of material records. This walkthrough is intended as an
example and does not represent actual cutting techniques to be used in production.
 

Example:
 
Assume that a Cutting Techniques spreadsheet is already set up with units defined and Material and Thickness columns inserted in
the column header row.
 
Base Condition
The Base Condition is simply the condition to use when no cutting techniques are in effect. For purposes of this example, a column
header called "Base Condition" would be inserted with “Base” in the data row of that column.
 
Lead In Ramp Up
Lead In Ramp Up allows parameters to be varied over the length of the lead-in. Let’s assume for this example that it is necessary to
start out at 50% of the base feedrate and 110% of the base kerf, move 25% of the total length of the lead-in, then change to 75% of
the base feedrate and 105% of the base kerf. After another move of 0.25 in., both the feedrate and kerf should be set to 100% of their
base values. This would be entered as follows:
 
Feedrate%(50), Kerf%(110), Move(0.25), Feedrate%(75), Kerf%(105), Move(0.25), Feedrate%(100), Kerf%(100)

Notice that the final Feedrate%(100) and Kerf%(100) are not necessary, as the base conditions are automatically inserted at the end
of the lead-in.

Note: Unlike with other cutting techniques, when the Move command is used with Lead In Ramp Up, it refers to the per-
centage of the total lead length, and not an absolute linear distance.

Radius n Ramp Down

Radius Ramp Down enables you to specify parameter changes and special output conditions just prior to an arc motion. For this
example, let’s consider 2 ranges of radii:
 
 1. Less than or equal to 5 in.
 2. Greater than 5 in. up to and including 10 in.
 
In this instance, multiple Radius Ramp Down techniques ("Radius 1 Ramp Down" and "Radius 2 Ramp Down") are needed. These two
techniques would be entered in separate columns, with the technique name (for example, Radius 1 Ramp Down) entered in the
column header row.
 
For radii less than or equal to 5 in., we need to drop the feedrate to 85%, output the contents of the CFF section “SMALL RADIUS”,
move 0.5 in., drop the feedrate to 75%, then move 0.25 in. In the Radius 1 Ramp Down column, we would enter the following:
 
Radius(5), Feedrate%(85), CFFSection(SMALL RADIUS), Move(0.5), Feedrate%(75), Move(0.25)

For radii larger than 5 in. and up to and including 10 in., let’s output the contents of the CFFSection “LARGE RADIUS”, move 0.1 in.,
drop the feedrate to 90%, then move 0.25 in. In the Radius 2 Ramp Down column, we would enter the following:
 

- 214 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Radius(10), CFFSection(LARGE RADIUS), Move(0.1), Feedrate%(90), Move(0.25)

Always keep in mind that you must use the “Radius” command to indicate the maximum radius to apply the cutting technique to
when doing radius ramp up or radius ramp down. Otherwise, the technique will be applied to all radii.

Note: The CFF section entry is not necessary in most applications. It is used to output specific commands required by cer-
tain controls in a variety of situations. Its use in this example is meant to show the power and flexibility of ProNest.

Radius n Ramp Up
Radius Ramp Up is used to restore the cutting parameters to their base conditions after cutting an arc motion. For radius ramp up,
let’s assume that we always want to come out of a radius the same way, no matter the size. We’ll move 0.25 in. then return to the
base condition. For this, we’ll need a column with the header "Radius Ramp Up". In the data row of this column, we would write:
 
Move(0.25), Condition(BASE)

Note: Because we are coming out of every radial arc the same way, we do not need to define multiple Radius Ramp Up
techniques.

Corner n Ramp Down

Corner Ramp Down allows cutting parameters to be changed when approaching a corner.

Advanced: The following example makes use of conditions commands. It also makes additions to the Process Para-
meters XLS that allow many different values to be inserted into the code. Because of this, when a specific
condition is encountered, the base values can be changed to reflect chain cutting requirements.

For this example of Corner Ramp Down, we will exclusively use the Move and Condition commands and assume that our CFF is cap-
able of outputting the correct parameters. We will perform three 0.25 in. motions, setting conditions CRD1, CRD2, and CRD3. There
will be a dwell of 2 seconds at the corner.
 
In the Corner Ramp Down column we would type:
 
Condition(CRD1), Move(0.25), Condition(CRD2), Move(0.25), Condition(CRD3), Move(0.25), Dwell(2)

Because we have used the conditions CRD1, CRD2, and CRD3 in this cutting technique, we must make sure that there are records in
the Process Parameters XLS table that use those conditions.
 
Corner n Ramp Up
Corner Ramp Up is used to restore cutting conditions to their base values when coming out of a corner. Let’s assume that we will
need to return to the base condition after we output the CFF section CORNER and move 0.5 in. As noted earlier, the base condition is
simply BASE. In the Corner Ramp Up column we would type:
 
CFFSection(CORNER), Move(0.5), Condition(BASE)

Lead Out n Ramp Down

Lead Out Ramp Down is used to alter process parameters just prior to leading out from the profile. For this example, we’ll slow down
to 50% of cutting speed at a distance of 0.25 in. from the start of the lead-out. In the Lead Out Ramp Down column, we would enter
the following:
 
Feedrate%(50), Move(0.25)

- 215 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

- 216 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About Interior and Exterior Leads spreadsheets

Each cut process can have two leads spreadsheets associated with it, one for interior leads and one for exterior leads. These spreadsheets
contain the necessary information for adding leads to both the sides and corners of a profile. Lead styles spreadsheets enable you to
apply different leads based on the material, thickness or profile area of a given part.
 
To use Leads spreadsheets:
 l On the settings page for a given process, from the Interior Leads or Exterior Leads box, select a spreadsheet.

- 217 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Leads XLS: Format

The following table details the required format for a Leads spreadsheet:

Category Column Header Description Valid values

Keys Material The name of the material used Character string
This is a required key.
 
Thickness The thickness of the material used Any positive number
This is a required key.  
 
Class The class of the material used. Class can be used to organize your Character string
  materials using specialized information such as cutting gas or
amperage.
Tab Lead Indicates whether or not leads will be used for tabs. This includes Character string
both the leads on normal tabs, as well as the "tab" gap that is cre-
ated during AutoTab by using undertravel at the start point (with
Number of Tabs and At Intervals styles).
 
This is an optional key.
 
0, n, no, or <blank>= row will not be used for tab leads
any other character string, such as 1 , y , or yes = row will be
used for tab leads
* = wildcard
Profile Area The area of a given profile Any positive number
Area is expressed in linear units squared (in. 2 or mm2). This is an
optional key.
 
Quality   Integer from 0 to 255
Leads set- CornerIn Name Lead-in style to use for corners Character string representing
tings lead-in style:
ARC, LINEAR, SPIRAL, TLOCK,
LOCK7, LOCK9, STEP,
DIAGONAL STEP, or NONE
 
CornerIn Scale Lead-in size to use for corners Linear distance
 
CornerIn Angle Lead-in angle to use for corners Angle in degrees
 
CornerIn Extension Extra length to add to beginning of corner lead-ins Linear distance
 
CornerOut Name Lead-out style to use for corners Character string representing
lead-out style:
ARC, LINEAR, or NONE

- 218 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Category Column Header Description Valid values

 
CornerOut Scale Lead-out size to use for corners Linear distance
 
CornerOut Angle Lead-out angle to use for corners Angle in degrees
 
CornerOut Extension Extra length to add to beginning of corner lead-outs Linear distance
 
Leads set- CornerOut Overtravel Overtravel / Undertravel distance to use for corners Length value in linear units. A
tings   negative value will result in
undertravel, a positive value
will result in overtravel.
SideIn Name Lead-in style to use for sides Character string representing
lead-in style:
ARC, LINEAR, SPIRAL, TLOCK,
LOCK7, LOCK9, STEP,
DIAGONAL STEP, or NONE
 
SideIn Scale Lead-in size to use for sides Linear distance
 
SideIn Angle Lead-in angle to use for sides Angle in degrees
 
SideIn Extension Extra length to add to beginning of side lead-ins Linear distance
 
SideOut Name Lead-out style to use for sides Character string representing
lead-out style:
ARC, LINEAR, or NONE
 
SideOut Scale Lead-out size to use for sides Linear distance
 
SideOut Angle Lead-out angle to use for sides Angle in degrees
 
SideOut Extension Extra length to use at end of side lead-outs Linear distance
 
SideOut Overtravel Overtravel / Undertravel distance to use for sides Length value in linear units. A
negative value will result in
undertravel, a positive value
will result in overtravel.
 

Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

- 219 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Costing spreadsheets
You can assign a different Costing spreadsheet for each process used by your machine. Costing spreadsheets can be used to assign dif-
ferent process-level settings values based on material, thickness, or class. In addition, drill or punch-specific spreadsheets can be used to
assign costing values by tool.
 
To use a Costing spreadsheet: 
 l On the Costing settings page, select the tab for the appropriate process, then from the Settings table box, select a spreadsheet.
 
The following table details the required format for a Costing spreadsheet: 
 

Category Column Header Description Valid values

Keys Tool Name For drill-specific Costing spreadsheets only. Enter a tool name that matches Character
exactly with the name from the tool library. string
  15 character
max
Material The name of the material used Character
string

Thickness The thickness of the material used Any positive

  number
 
Class The class of the material used. This is an optional key. Character
  string
Costing set- Activation Time Process activation time Time in
tings   seconds > 0
In order to be used by ProNest, the column header must exist, a record match  
must be made, and the value must be greater than zero.
Cost Per Activation Cost of each activation. Monetary
  units
For drilling or punching, this is the cost per hit. Can be blank
Operating Cost Per This describes the cost incurred for running a given process for 60 seconds. Not Monetary
Minute used for drill or punch spreadsheets. units
  Can be blank

Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

How do Costing spreadsheets interact with other ProNest costing settings?

If a Costing spreadsheet is in use, the values in the spreadsheet take precedence over default settings from the Costing settings page.
Note however, that the default Costing settings serve as a fall-back in case spreadsheet values can't be found.
 
Activation Time follows this hierarchy:

- 220 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. ProNest will try to use the Activation Time from the Costing spreadsheet.
 2. If no value can be found, use Raise/Lower Time from the Costing settings page + Pierce Time from Process Parameters XLS
 l For full raises, if the sum of the Full Raise/Lower Time + Pierce Time is greater than zero, it will be used as the Activation
Time.
 l For partial raises, if the sum of the Partial Raise/Lower Time + Pierce Time is greater than zero, it will be used as the Activ-
ation Time.
 3. If the sum of Raise/Lower Time and Pierce Time is zero or can't be found, the Default Activation Time from the Costing settings
page will be used.
 
Cost Per Activation follows this hierarchy:
 1. Try to use the Cost Per Activation from the Costing spreadsheet.
 2. If no such column exists or a record can't be matched, use the Default Cost Per Activation from the Costing settings page.
 
Operating Cost Per Minute follows this hierarchy:
 1. Try to use the Operating Cost Per Minute from the Costing spreadsheet.
 2. If no such column exists or a record can't be matched, use the Default Operating Cost from the Costing settings page.

Specialized Costing spreadsheets

Some Costing spreadsheets contain many columns with a lot of machine-specific data and built-in calculators to determine accurate con-
sumable wear and other costs. Keep in mind that ultimate purpose of any Costing spreadsheet is to provide any of the three settings val-
ues (Activation Time, Cost Per Activation, Operating Cost Per Minute) to ProNest for use in costing calculations. All of the other
information in those Costing spreadsheets is used to arrive at good values for those three settings.

- 221 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

AutoTab spreadsheets
Autotab spreadsheets are used to define when tabs should automatically be added to parts. You can apply tabs to parts based on mater-
ial, thickness, profile area, profile type, and quality. AutoTab spreadsheets are assigned at the process level.
 
To use AutoTab spreadsheets:
 l On the settings page for a given process, from the AutoTab box, select a spreadsheet.
 
The following table details the required format for an Auto Tab spreadsheet: 

Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

Valid val- Blank

Category Column Header Description Required
ues allowed?
Keys Material The name of the material used. This is a required key. Character *  
string

Thickness The thickness of the material used. This is a required key. Any pos- *  
  itive num-
ber
 
Profile Area The area of a given profile. Area is expressed in linear units squared Any pos-    
(in. 2 or mm2). This is an optional key. itive num-
  ber
 
Profile Type The type of a given profile. This is an optional key. I, E, O, C,    
V, S, X, N,
*
 
(For
details,
see
"Record
matching"
on page
190)
Quality The cut quality assigned to a given entity. This is an optional key. Integer    
from 0 to
255
 
Auto Tab set- Apply Only to Lines When set to "1", this setting will restrict AutoTab placement to lin- 0 or 1    
tings ear motions only (no arcs). When set to "0", tabs will be applied to  
both lines and arcs.

- 222 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Valid val- Blank

Category Column Header Description Required
ues allowed?
 
Length This describes the length of each tab that will be added during Linear dis-    
AutoTab. This length represents the distance along the original tance
part geometry that will remain uncut for each tab.
 
Minimum Distance This describes the minimum spacing distance between tabs on the Linear dis-    
same profile. No two tabs will be placed closer than this value tance
along any profile perimeter. Tabs will also not be placed closer
than this distance to the start or end point of the profile. (The
exception to this is the "At Corners" strategy.)
 
Snap Tolerance If the location chosen as the start point of the tab is within this dis- Linear dis-    
tance from the start point of the chosen entity, the tab start point tance
will be shifted to the beginning of the entity. Similarly, if the tab
would end within this distance from the end of the entity, the tab
will be shifted so that its end point coincides with the entity end
point.
 
Profile Dimension If the profile can be rotated so that its length or width is less than Linear dis-    
or equal to this value, it will be AutoTabbed. Otherwise, the profile tance
will not have tabs applied.
 
Apply Leadouts Lead-outs will be applied to tabs. Lead-outs will use the properties 0, n, no    
from your Leads XLS or settings page. 1, y, yes
 
0, n, or no= do not apply lead-outs
1, y, or yes = apply lead-outs
Strategies Strategy This setting determines which AutoTab strategy that will be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4    
employed.  
 
0= None. No tabs will be added during AutoTab.
1 = Center of Line
2 = Number of Tabs
3 = Tabs at Intervals
4 = Tabs at Corners
 
Strategy Center Line Size This setting applies to Strategy 1: Center of Line. It defines the minimum Linear dis-    
dependent line length that is taken into consideration. tance
settings  
Number Per Profile This setting applies to Strategy 2: Number of Tabs. It defines the Integer    
maximum number of tabs applied per profile. from 0 to
  100

Distance Between This setting applies to Strategy 3: Tabs at Intervals. It defines the dis- Linear dis-    
Tabs

- 223 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Valid val- Blank

Category Column Header Description Required
ues allowed?
tance you want between tabs. This should never be less than the tance
Minimum Distance value.
 
Corner Type This setting applies to Strategy 4: Tabs at Corners. It defines the 0, 1, 2, 3    
corner type on which to apply tabs.
 
0 = None
1= Shortest Side
2= Longest Side
3= Both Shortest and Longest Side
 
Corner Angle This setting applies to Strategy 4: Tabs at Corners. It defines the Angle in    
maximum angle to be considered a corner. Corner angles that degrees
exceed this value will not be considered a corner during AutoTab.  
 
Distance From Corner This setting applies to Strategy 4: Tabs at Corners. It defines the min- Linear dis-    
imum distance from each corner that a tab will start or end, tance
depending on which side of a corner.  
 
Near Start Point This setting applies to Strategy 4: Tabs at Corners. It defines Y or N *  
whether to place a tab immediately after a lead-in.
Y = Yes
N = No
 
Near End Point This setting applies to Strategy 4: Tabs at Corners. It defines Y or N *  
whether to place a tab immediately before a lead-out.
Y =  Yes
N = No
 

Tip: You can set specific leads for tabs using the Tab Lead column in Leads settings spreadsheets. To find out more, see Leads XLS:
Format.

- 224 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Bevel spreadsheets
Most beveling applications require modification of process parameters such as voltage, kerf, current, and feedrate at particular locations
in the NC code. ProNest accomplishes this using Bevel spreadsheets, allowing you to assign specific cutting conditions based on the type
of bevel cut, bevel angle, material type, thickness, and class.
 
Settings used for beveled profiles are stored in the bevel settings spreadsheet. When a beveled edge is applied to a part (using either the
manual method or AutoBevel), settings including feedrate, kerf, transition loops, and special cutting compensations are automatically
applied to the beveled edge based on the values found in your Bevel spreadsheet.

Important: For beveled entities, the cutting conditions in the Bevel spreadsheet will take precedence over the cutting conditions in
a Process Parameters spreadsheet.

Bevel XLS Column Headers

Allowable column header keys:
Material
The type of material used. This is a required key.
 
Thickness
The thickness of the material used. This is a required key.
 
Class
The class of the material used. This is an optional key.
 
Bevel Angle
This defines the angle of the beveled cut, in relation to the top angle orientation (+/-). If the top angle orientation is set to Positive (+), a
positive angle value (e.g. 45°) will be a "V cut". A negative angle (e.g. -45°) will result in an "A cut." When applying a beveled edge manu-
ally through Advanced Edit, the list of available bevel angles is limited by the angles listed in the Bevel XLS.
 
Units: Angle in degrees

Note: The number of records that you have listed will depend upon the type of bevel cuts you are making and the rotary bevel cut-
ting machine that you are using.

Bevel Type
This limits record matching by bevel type. When applying a beveled edge manually through Advanced Edit, the list of available bevel
types is limited by the types listed in the Bevel XLS.
 
Valid values: I, V, A, X, Y, K, *

Notes:  l A "Y Bottom" cut is specified using a negative bevel angle value combined with a "Y" bevel type.
 l An "A" cut is specified by entering a negative bevel angle combined with an "A" bevel type (this assumes a positive
orientation).

Land dimension 

- 225 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The thickness of the Land Pass. This is used for record matching with the multi-pass profiles Y, Y-Bottom, and K.
 

 
 
Bevel settings defined in column header row:
Kerf
This defines the width of the torch path and is used for the purposes of nesting.
 
Feedrate
Feedrate to use in CNC output.
 
Height
Torch height. For beveling applications, the torch height is the perpendicular distance from surface of the plate to the tip of the torch.
 

 
Dwell
This is the duration of a dwell to be inserted at a particular point in the CNC code. When used, the cutting head will remain stationary for
the duration specified.
 
Units: Time in seconds

Loop Macro
This specifies the loop macro to use for a given record. Loop macros detail the geometry of the transition loops inserted when entering or
exiting a bevel pass.
 
Valid values: The root name of the macro. (For example, if the macro name is "Side.mtl", you would input "Side" in this
field.)

Loop Scale
You can adjust the scale of the loop specified in the Loop Macro column. 
 
Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal
Default value: 1.0

Examples:

- 226 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l A value of "0.5" would scale a loop down to 50% of its original size.
 l A value of "2.0" would cause the loop to double in size.
 l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the loop unchanged.

Process Compensation
This is an output-related setting used with top cut beveling (such as a "V cut") that allows you to tweak the distance between the top of a
beveled edge and the opposite plate edge.
 
Units: Distance in linear units (positive or negative)

The following diagram depicts a side view of a part with a top-cut beveled edge:

The distance between points 1 and 2 can be adjusted using process compensation. A positive value will extend the distance (moving
point 2 further away from point 1), and a negative value will reduce the distance (moving point 2 closer to point 1).

Important: In order for this setting to be active, Compensate geometry must be selected on the Bevel - Pass Profiles page of your
settings ( ).

Angle Adjustment
When fine-tuning a bevel setup, you may find that a given bevel angle in the output code is actually being cut at a slightly different
angle by your real-world machine (for example, a 45° bevel cut may be physically cut at 46°). 
 
Using the Angle Adjustment setting, you can alter the angle specified in the output code to compensate for this discrepancy.
 
Units: Angle in degrees (positive or negative)

Example:
 
An excerpt of NC code for a start transition loop and 30° "V-cut" beveled edge (positive orientation used):
 
G03X-5.Y5.I-0.J5.
G01Y-5.
A30.
Y-10.
Y-5.

The 30° degree angle is coded as "A30." If this angle were physically being cut at 28° due to machine inaccuracy, you could add an
Angle Adjustment of "2" to compensate. The output code would then appear as:
 
G03X-5.Y5.I-0.J5.
G01Y-5.
A32.
Y-10.
Y-5.

As a result of this correction in the NC code, when the part is physically cut, the bevel angle would measure a true 30°.
 

- 227 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

(Note that if the angle was originally output as 30° but was physically cut at 32°, you would need to insert an Angle Adjustment of "-
2" in order to compensate properly.)

Important: In order for this setting to be active, Compensate geometry must be selected on the Bevel - Pass Profiles page of your
settings ( ).

Voltage
The voltage value to insert into the NC code prior to cutting the beveled entity. This is used for machines with advanced bevel setups.
 
Current
The current to insert into the NC code prior to cutting the beveled entity. This is used for machines with advanced bevel setups.
 
 
Corner leads:
Corner In Name
The style of lead to use on corners when leading in to a beveled edge. This value must match the root name of the lead-in macro that you
want to use.
 

Example:
 
If there is a lead macro in your Sample Bevel Macros folder named "BevelLead.mli", you would enter "BevelLead" in the cell.

 
Corner In Scale
You can adjust the scale of the lead-in specified in the Corner In Name column.
 
Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal
Default value: 1.0

Examples:
 l A value of "0.5" would scale the lead down to 50% of its original size.
 l A value of "2.0" would cause the lead to double in size.
 l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the lead unchanged.

 
Corner In Angle
The angle of the lead-in specified in the Corner In Name column.
 
Units: Degrees
Range:-360.0° to 360.0°

Corner In Extension
Extra cut length to add at the start of a corner lead-in.
 

- 228 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.

Corner Out Name

The style of lead to use on corners when leading out from a beveled edge. This value must match the root name of the lead-out macro
that you want to use.
 

Example:
 
If there is a lead macro in your Sample Bevel Macros folder named "BevelLead2.mlo", you would enter "BevelLead2" in the cell.

 
Corner Out Scale
You can adjust the scale of the lead-out specified in the Corner Out Name column. 
 
Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal
Default value: 1.0

Examples:
 l A value of "0.5" would scale the lead down to 50% of its original size.
 l A value of "2.0" would cause the lead to double in size.
 l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the lead unchanged.

Corner Out Angle

The angle of the lead-out specified in the Corner Out Name column. 
 
Units: Degrees
Range: -360.0° to 360.0°

Corner Out Extension

Extra cut length to add at the end of a corner lead-out. 
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.

Corner Out Overtravel

Overtravel / undertravel distance to apply to a corner lead-out. A negative value will result in undertravel, a positive value will result in
overtravel.
 
Units: Distance

 
Side leads:
Side In Name
The style of lead to use when leading in to a beveled edge with a side lead. This value must match the root name of the lead-in macro
that you want to use.
 

- 229 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:
 
If there is a lead macro in your Sample Bevel Macros folder named "BevelLead3.mli", you would enter "BevelLead3" in the cell.

 
Side In Scale
You can adjust the scale of the lead-in specified in the Side In Name column.  
 
Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal
Default value: 1.0

Examples:
 l A value of "0.5" would scale the lead down to 50% of its original size.
 l A value of "2.0" would cause the lead to double in size.
 l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the lead unchanged.

Side In Angle
The angle of the lead-in specified in the Side In Name column. 
 
Units: Degrees
Range: -360.0° to 360.0°

Side In Extension
Extra cut length to add at the start of a side lead-in. 
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.

Side Out Name

The style of lead to use when leading out from a beveled edge with a side lead. This value must match the root name of the lead-out
macro that you want to use.
 

Example:
 
If there is a lead macro in your Sample Bevel Macros folder named "BevelLead4.mlo", you would enter "BevelLead4" in the cell.

Side Out Scale

You can adjust the scale of the lead-out specified in the Side Out Name column.  
 
Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal
Default value: 1.0

Examples:
 l A value of "0.5" would scale the lead down to 50% of its original size.
 l A value of "2.0" would cause the lead to double in size.

- 230 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the lead unchanged.

Side Out Angle

The angle of the lead-out specified in the Side Out Name column.
 
Units: Degrees
Range: -360.0° to 360.0°

Side Out Extension

Extra cut length to add at the end of a side lead-out. 
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.

Side Out Overtravel

Overtravel / undertravel distance to apply to a side lead-out. A negative value will result in undertravel, a positive value will result in over-
travel.
 
Units: Distance

 
Blind bevel leads and loops:
Blind In Name
The style of lead-in to use for a blind bevel entity. This value must match the root name of the lead-in macro that you want to use for
blind beveling.
 

Example:
 
If there is a lead macro in your Sample Bevel Macros folder named "BlindLead.mli", you would enter "BlindLead" in the cell.

 
Blind In Scale
You can adjust the scale of the lead-in specified in the Blind In Name column.
 
Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal
Default value: 1.0

Examples:
 l A value of "0.5" would scale the lead down to 50% of its original size.
 l A value of "2.0" would cause the lead to double in size.
 l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the lead unchanged.

 
Blind In Angle
The angle of the lead-in specified in the Blind In Name column.
 

- 231 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Units: Degrees
Range: -360.0° to 360.0°

Blind Out Name

The style of lead-out to use for a blind bevel entity. This value must match the root name of the lead-out macro that you want to use for
blind beveling. 
 

Example:
 
If there is a lead macro in your Sample Bevel Macros folder named "BlindLead2.mlo", you would enter "BlindLead2" in the cell.

 
Blind Out Scale
You can adjust the scale of the lead-out specified in the Blind Out Name column. 
 
Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal
Default value: 1.0

Examples:
 l A value of "0.5" would scale the lead down to 50% of its original size.
 l A value of "2.0" would cause the lead to double in size.
 l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the lead unchanged.

Blind Out Angle

The angle of the lead-out specified in the Blind Out Name column.
 
Units: Degrees
Range: -360.0° to 360.0°

Blind Start Loop Macro

The loop macro to insert at the start of the blind bevel entity. This value must match the root name of the start loop macro that you want
to use for blind beveling. 
 
Blind Start Loop Scale
You can adjust the scale of the loop specified in the Blind Start Loop Macro column. 
 
Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal
Default value: 1.0

Examples:
 l A value of "0.5" would scale the loop down to 50% of its original size.
 l A value of "2.0" would cause the loop to double in size.
 l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the loop unchanged.

Blind End Loop Macro

The loop macro to insert at the end of the blind bevel entity. This value must match the root name of the end loop macro that you want

- 232 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

to use for blind beveling.

 
Blind End Loop Scale
You can adjust the scale of the loop specified in the Blind End Loop Macro column. 
 
Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal
Default value: 1.0

Examples:
 l A value of "0.5" would scale the loop down to 50% of its original size.
 l A value of "2.0" would cause the loop to double in size.
 l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the loop unchanged.

 
Multi-pass:
Bridge Macro
The transition macro to insert between multi-pass bevel interiors. This can reduce pierces by cutting multiple, successive bevel passes
with a continuous cut.
 
Example:
 
An interior Y-top bevel might normally be cut with two separate passes, an I-cut and a bevel V-cut, each requiring its own pierce. With
Bridge Macro enabled, after piercing and cutting the land pass, the cutting head remains on, transitions to the bevel angle, and then
cuts the bevel pass. The result is less piercing and a clean, finished hole.

Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

- 233 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Collision Avoidance spreadsheets

Format for Collision Avoidance settings tables:
 

Valid val-
Category Column Header Description
ues
Keys Material The name of the material used. This is a required key. Character
string

Thickness The thickness of the material used. This is a required key. Any pos-
  itive num-
ber
 
General Enable    
Sequence Resequence Interior Pro- Sequence the interior profiles for an optimal path. Select this setting if gen- 0 or 1
files erating avoidance paths should re-sequence the interior profiles of each
part. Re-sequencing interior profiles may avoid potential collision situ-
ations.
0 = Not enabled
1 = Enabled
Plate Warping Max Head Down Distance Maximum length allowable for a torch-down avoidance path for interior Distance
for Interiors cuts.
Max Head Down Distance Maximum length allowable for a torch-down avoidance path for exterior Distance
for Exteriors cuts.
Max Head Down Distance Maximum length allowable for a torch-down avoidance path for scribes. Distance
for Scribes
Tip-Ups Head Diameter This setting represents the diameter of the torch head and is used as a Distance
safety margin around profiles when creating avoidance paths. It should be
treated as the maximum diameter of the torch head that could collide with
a tip-up.
Max Profile Size Maximum profile size to avoid. This setting determines the largest profile Distance
size that collision avoidance will try to avoid. Collision avoidance will try to
avoid any profiles with a length or width smaller than this threshold value.
Profiles with lengths and widths greater than this threshold value will not
be avoided.
Head Raise Time Full raise/lower time. This setting represents the average amount of time Time in
required to fully retract the cutting head on a full raise and then fully lower seconds
the cutting head when it is turned back on.
Head Partial Raise Time Partial raise/lower time. This setting represents the average amount of time Time in
required to partially retract the torch for a partial raise and then fully lower seconds
the torch when it is turned back on.
Ignore Tabbed Profiles Select this setting if you want to treat tabbed profiles as if they cannot tip 0 or 1
up and therefore do not need to be avoided.

- 234 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Valid val-
Category Column Header Description
ues
 
0 = Do not ignore tabbed profiles
1 = Ignore tabbed profiles
Max Number to Avoid Maximum number to avoid. This setting determines the maximum number Integer
of profiles that should be avoided when traversing between profiles.
Avoidance Ratio Avoidance ratio. This setting is used when determining which type of path Decimal
is more desirable in a given situation: an avoidance path or a direct full- number
raise path. A larger avoidance ratio will tend to select a direct full-raise
more often than the avoidance path.
 
Percentage expressed as decimal number (e.g. 50% would be entered as
0.50).
Lead Positioning Move Exterior Leads Automatically move exterior leads for avoidance. Select this setting if gen-  
erating avoidance paths should automatically move leads on exterior pro-
files. By moving leads, it is possible that straight-line paths can be found
that do not pass over potential tip-up situations.
Move Interior Leads Automatically move interior leads for avoidance. Select this setting if gen-  
erating avoidance paths should automatically move leads on interior pro-
files.
Corner Lead Preference When moving leads, try: Corners. Select this setting if leads should be 0, 1, or 2
placed on profile corners when automatically moving leads for avoidance.
0 = Do not try corners (this is equivalent to Try: Perimeter points but not
Corners)
1 = Give special preference to corners (this is equivalent to Try: Perimeter
points and Corners)
2 = Try only corners (this is equivalent to Try: Corners but not Perimeter
points)
Trim Leads Trim leads if they are placed in conflict. While avoidance paths are gen- 0 or 1
erated, leads are moved. Sometimes they can be moved into conflict.
Select this setting if ProNest should try shortening the leads to resolve the
conflict.
0 = Do not trim leads
1 = Trim leads
Percentage Interval Used to compute the minimum and maximum interval allowable between Integer
prospective lead locations. (related to Try: Perimeter points). from 50 to 1
 
Range from 50 to 1. Entering "50" would place one perimeter point halfway
along the profile (dividing the profile in half). Entering "25" would place
three perimeter points on the profile (dividing into 4 equal segments), and
so forth.
Holes Small Hole Size Any hole that is less than or equal to this size will fall within the "Small"  
range and will be cut before medium size holes or other larger interiors (as
long as it is within the Proximity specified).

- 235 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Valid val-
Category Column Header Description
ues
Medium Hole Size Any hole that is less than or equal to this size, but greater than the small  
hole size will fall within the "Medium" range and will be cut after small
holes but before other larger interiors (as long as it is within the Proximity
specified).
Proximity The maximum distance that a small or medium hole can be from another Distance
larger interior. Holes within this distance will be sequenced first, while
holes that are further away will not have their sequence adjusted, regard-
less of their size.
Laser Do Not Create Paths from Don’t create avoidance paths when traversing away from exterior profiles. 0 or 1
Exteriors  
 
Do Not Move Leads on Prevent leads from being moved on the last interior profile of each part. 0 or 1
Last Interiors This may lead to fewer profile subroutines.
 

Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

- 236 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Skeleton Cut-Up spreadsheets

Skeleton Cut Up spreadsheets must adhere to a specific format.
 

Category Column Header Description Valid values

Keys Material The name of the material used. This is a required key. Character
string

Thickness The thickness of the material used. This is a required key. Any pos-
  itive num-
ber
 
General Enable Apply skeleton cut-up for the XLS record.   0 or 1
0 = do not apply
1 = apply skeleton cut-up
Tolerances Safe Zone Tolerance Safe zone tolerance. This defines the closest distance to which a skeleton Distance
cut-up line may approach a safe zone. For example, if you wanted a skel-
eton cut-up line to start or stop no closer than 1 inch from a safe zone, set
this value to 1.0 in.
Part Tolerance Part tolerance. This defines the closest distance to which a skeleton cut-up Distance
line may approach a part. For example, if you wanted the skeleton cut-up
line to start or stop no closer than 1 inch from a part on the nest, set this
value to 1.0 in.
Plate Edge Tolerance Plate edge tolerance. The closest distance to which a skeleton cut-up line Distance
may approach the plate edge if no extension values are used. Non-zero
extension values take precedence over this setting.
Ignore Leads Ignore leads. Select this setting if it is acceptable for skeleton cut-up lines 0 or 1
to cut through part leads.
0 = Do not ignore leads
1 = Ignore leads
Min Cut Length Minimum cut length. Minimum acceptable length of a skeleton cut-up Distance
line. All skeleton cut-up lines below this threshold value will be deleted dur-
ing processing.
Cut Dir- Horizontal Line Direction Horizontal lines. Direction which horizontal skeleton cut-up lines will be 0, 1, or 2
ection cut.
0 = Left to Right
1 = Right to Left
2 = Serpentine
Vertical Line Direction Lines at the plate edge. Direction which vertical skeleton cut-up lines will 0, 1, or 2
be cut.
0 = Top to Bottom
1 = Bottom to Top
2 = Serpentine
Plate Edge Direction Lines at the plate edge. Defines the behavior of skeleton cut lines that 0, 1, or 2

- 237 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Category Column Header Description Valid values

touch the plate edge.
0 = Cut towards the plate edge
1 = Cut away from the plate edge
2 = Default
Extensions Top Extension Top edge. Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the top edge of Distance
the plate.
Bottom Extension Bottom edge. Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the top edge Distance
of the plate.
Left Extension Left edge. Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the top edge of Distance
the plate.
Right Extension Right edge. Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the top edge Distance
of the plate.
Grid Independent Grids Use separate grids for exterior and interior skeleton cuts. Select this setting 0 or 1
if you want to use different grid spacing for interior skeleton cuts (skeleton
cuts that both begin and end at a part) and exterior skeleton cuts (skeleton
cuts that have at least one end at a plate edge).
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
Horizontal Spacing Exterior grid: Horizontal grid spacing. Distance
Vertical Spacing Exterior grid: Vertical grid spacing. Distance
Interior Horizontal Spacing Interior grid: Horizontal grid spacing. Distance
Interior Vertical Spacing Interior grid: Vertical grid spacing. Distance
Cut Traverse Plate Edge Traverse along the plate edge between exterior cuts. Select this setting if 0 or 1
Sequence you would like the torch head to follow along the plate edge between
exterior skeleton cuts, or to track back down the just cut exterior skeleton
cut if cutting the other end of it which touches the plate edge.
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
Interior Before Parts Cut sequence order. 0 or 1
0 = Parts will be cut before interior skeleton lines
1 = Interior skeleton lines will be cut before parts
Exterior Before Parts Cut sequence order. 0 or 1
0 = Parts will be cut before exterior skeleton lines
1 = Exterior skeleton lines will be cut before parts
Exterior Before Interior Cut sequence order. 0 or 1
0 = Interior skeleton lines will be cut before exterior lines
1 = Exterior skeleton lines will be cut before interior lines
After Nest Cut sequence order. Only used when Independent Grids is off. 0 or 1
0 = Parts will be cut before skeleton lines
1 = Skeleton lines will be cut before parts
Exterior Cut Order Exterior cut order. Defines the order in which exterior skeleton cuts are 0, 1, 2, or 3
made.

- 238 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Category Column Header Description Valid values

0 = (None)
1 = Circle the plate (clockwise)
2 = Cut vertical lines first
3 = Cut horizontal lines first
Integrate with parts Cut sequence order. 0 or 1
0 = Disable "Integrate with parts" sequencing. All skeleton lines on a nest
are sequenced together.
1 = Enable "Integrate with parts" sequencing. Skeleton lines and exterior
part profiles will be cut together in groups.

Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

- 239 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Crop spreadsheets
Material-based crop settings are specified in the Crop settings spreadsheet.
 

Category Column Header Description Valid values

Keys Material The name of the material used. This is a required key. Character string

Thickness The thickness of the material used. This is a required key. Any positive number
   
Crop set- Enable Enable cropping for the row. If AutoCrop is applied to a nest and it is 0 or 1
tings using a material and thickness row marked "0", a crop line will not be
applied.
 
0 = do not enable
1 = enable
Extension A crop line is always defined with respect to the plate edge. A crop exten- Distance
sion allows the pierce point to move off the plate (a positive extension) or
onto the plate (a negative extension).
Nest Outside Crop If this setting is selected, parts that are nested outside the crop (in the rem- 0 or 1
nant) will not be shown in conflict.
 
0 = do not enable
1 = enable
Crop Process If you have more than one cut process on your machine, you can select Number representing
the process that you want to use for cutting crop lines. the cut process
 
1, 2, 3, etc.
AutoCrop Min Remnant Area All calculated crop lines will be rejected unless they produce a remnant Area in in. 2 or mm2
settings with at least this much surface area.
 
Allow Vertical Crop Step 1: Find the best vertical crop. When finding a crop line, ProNest will 0 or 1
first find the best vertical (straight) crop line.
 
0 = do not enable
1 = enable
Allow L Shaped Crop Step 2: Find the best L-shape crop. If this step is selected, ProNest will try 0 or 1
to improve on Step 1. An L-shaped crop has one (or two) 90-degree turns
resulting in an L-shaped remnant.
 
0 = do not enable
1 = enable
Min L Shape Improve- You can force ProNest to accept the L-shaped crop line only if it beats Decimal number
ment Step 1 with a better (larger) remnant. The setting reads: Use only if the
remnant area improves by at least x%.
 

- 240 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Category Column Header Description Valid values

Percentage expressed as decimal number (e.g. 50% would be entered as
0.50).
Allow Profile Crop Step 3: Find the best profile crop. If this step is checked, ProNest will try 0 or 1
to improve on the previous steps. A profile crop is built by trying to stay
as close to the parts as possible. This method generally creates a remnant
with the most area. The tradeoff, however, is that the crop line usually has
significantly more motions.
 
0 = do not enable
1 = enable
Min Profile Improve- You can force ProNest to accept the profile crop line only if it beats Step Decimal number
ment 1 or 2 with a better (larger) remnant. The setting reads: Use only if the rem-
nant area improves by at least x%.
 
Percent expressed as decimal number (e.g. 50% would be entered as
0.50).
Work Zones Single Crop Per Nest Allow one crop for each nest. This setting is available only if you have the 0 or 1
Work Zones module. Normally, only one crop is allowed per nest and 1
will be selected in the box. To allow one crop for each work zone, select 0.
 
0 = Work Zone
1 = Nest
Remnant Min Web Width Minimum usable web width. ProNest will remove any webs thinner than Distance in inches or
Webs this value. This does not include webs that share the plate edge. mm
Min Top Web Width Minimum usable web width - along top of plate edge. Any such web thin- Distance in inches or
ner than this value will be removed. mm
Min Bottom Web Minimum usable web width - along bottom of plate edge. Any such web Distance in inches or
Width thinner than this value will be removed. mm

Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

- 241 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Pre-Pierces spreadsheets
Pre-Pierces spreadsheets must adhere to a specific format.
 

Category Column Header Description Valid values

Keys Material The name of the material used. This is a required key. Character string

Thickness The thickness of the material used. This is a required key. Any positive num-
  ber
 
General Enable Apply pre-pierce for the XLS record. 0 or 1
0 = do not apply
1 = apply pre-pierce
Cut By Part Pre-pierce by part. 0 or 1
Sequence 0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
Process Process (Cut process number). Number rep-
1, 2, 3... resenting cut pro-
cess
Use Profile Process Process: (Same as profile). 0 or 1
Strategy Style. 1, 2, or 3
1 = Pre-pierce as Circles
2 = Pre-pierce as Punch
3 = Torch Blow Through
4 = Pre-pierce as Drill
Radius Radius. This setting defines the radius for circle pierce holes. Distance
Allow Pre- Interiors Only Interior profiles only. 0 or 1
Piercing 0 = not enabled
For... 1 = enabled
Profile Without Leadins Profiles without lead-ins. 0 or 1
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
Allow Conflict with Current Pro- Profiles whose pre-pierce would interfere with the profile geo- 0 or 1
file metry.
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
Allow Conflict with Other Pro- Profiles whose pre-pierce would interfere with another profile. 0 or 1
files 0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
Plate Edge Profiles that start on the plate edge. 0 or 1
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
Tabs Tabs. 0 or 1

- 242 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Category Column Header Description Valid values

0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
Tabs Without Leadins Tabs without lead-ins. 0 or 1
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled

- 243 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Slug Destroy spreadsheets

Slug Destroy spreadsheets are used to define when the leftover cutouts inside interior profiles should be cut up, based on a part's mater-
ial type and thickness.
 
To use slug destroy spreadsheets:
 l On the Slug Destroy settings page, for Slug Destroy table, select a spreadsheet.
 
The required format for a slug destroy spreadsheet is as follows:

Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

Column headers

Keys
 l Material
 l Thickness

Tip: When setting thickness ranges for slug destroy in the spreadsheet, keep in mind that slug destroy is designed for materials 3/8"
(0.375" or 10 mm) or less.

Slug Destroy settings

Note: These three spreadsheet settings are based on the Slat spacing setting on the Slug Destroy settings page and on the Kerf width
setting on the Process Parameters settings page.

Maximum Profile Dimension

This setting defines the upper size limit for slug destroy interiors. This is expressed as a factor of the Slat spacing setting - 2x would be
double the slat spacing, 2.5x would be two and a half times the slat spacing, and so on.
 
Slat spacing is multiplied by this factor to get a distance. If either the length or width of an interior profile is greater than this distance,
slug destroy will not be applied.
 
Recommended value: 2x (Slat spacing × 2)
Required column: yes
Blank allowed: no

Edge Offset
Buffer distance between the edge of the interior profile and the cut-up lines. This is entered as a percentage of the Kerf width setting (on
the Process Parameters settings page).
 
Recommended value: 50% (Kerf width × 0.5)
Required column: yes
Blank allowed: no

- 244 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: Due to kerf offset, slug destroy cut lines are automatically shortened in areas where the kerf on the cut-up lines would cut into
the part. Likewise, a radius corner is put on the opposite end of those cuts to compensate for the Kerf Left or Kerf Right offset
distance, ensuring that cut-up lines will reach the interior profile.
 
You can see the compensated slug destroy cuts (as they would be written in output code) by entering Cut Simulation mode.

Minimum Profile Dimension

This is expressed as a percentage of the Slat spacing setting.
 
Recommended value: 50% (Slat spacing × 0.5)
Required column: yes
Blank allowed: no

This setting has two purposes:

 l Represents the lower size limit for slug destroy interiors. If both the length and width of an interior profile are less than this value,
slug destroy will not be applied. (This allows cut-up lines to be applied on long skinny cutouts where one dimension is below the
minimum value.)
 l Controls the maximum width of the leftover fragments created by slug destroy cuts.

A good value for this setting will keep the size small enough so that the fragments will fall through the slats of your cutting table.

- 245 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Fly Cut spreadsheets

Fly Cut spreadsheets are used to define when the fly cutting should be applied, based on a part's material type and thickness.
 
To use Fly Cut spreadsheets:
 l On the Fly Cut settings page, for Fly Cut table, select a spreadsheet.
 
The required format for a interior cut-up spreadsheet is as follows:

Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

Column headers

Keys
 l Material
 l Thickness
 l Class

Tip: When setting thickness ranges for fly cutting in the spreadsheet, keep in mind that fly cutting is designed for materials 3/8"
(0.375" or 10 mm) or less.

Fly Cut settings

Overtravel Length
Overtravel used on circular and slot-shaped interiors. The start point is shifted back by this distance, to maintain a fluid, straight cut-
ting motion and ensure that the interior is completely cut out.
 
Required column: yes
Blank allowed: no

Max Distance
This setting defines the maximum distance between aligned entities for fly cutting. Aligned entities from different interiors will be not
be fly cut if the distance between them is greater than this value.
 
Recommended value: 5 in. (127 mm)
Required column: yes
Blank allowed: no

- 246 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: If one line does qualify but another doesn't you will get fly cutting only on the entity that does, the other entities will be
cut one by one.

Max Profile Size

This setting defines the upper size limit for fly cut interiors. If the smaller dimension of the interior is greater than this value, fly cutting
will not be applied.
 
Recommended value: 2.5 in. (63.5 mm)
Required column: yes
Blank allowed: no

- 247 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

5. PREFERENCES
What are preferences?
Preferences provide a way to customize the general behavior of ProNest. Unlike settings, preferences are not specific to any particular
machine and do not have a direct impact on nesting.
 
To edit ProNest preferences, open the Preferences dialog:
 l On the File tab, click Preferences.
Once you have opened the Preferences dialog, you can make any kind of preference change you want. After you are done making
changes, click OK to accept your changes and return to the main window. Click Cancel to discard your changes and return to the main
window.

Note: All changes made to preferences take immediate effect except for changes made to preferences on the Settings page. For more
details, see the topic on "Settings preferences" on page 257.

The Preferences dialog

General Layout
The preferences dialog is presented as a collection of pages. Each page can be accessed by clicking the corresponding item on the left
pane.
 

- 248 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The Buttons
There are two buttons at the bottom of the preferences dialog:
 

Button Action when clicked

OK Keeps your changes and closes the preferences dialog.
Cancel Discards your changes and closes the preferences dialog.

- 249 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

General preferences
Options
Job Preferences:
When opening jobs, detect modified part files and reload them
ProNest jobs contain a record of the original file name and date modified for every part added to the part list. When this preference is
selected, ProNest will compare the recorded date with the original file. If the file has been modified since it was added to the job, it will be
reloaded.
 
The following reasons will prevent a part from reloading:
 l The part is nested and the nest has a defined cut sequence.
 l The part has been nested and is chained or bridged together with other parts, or if it has been common line cut together with
other parts.  
 
When a part is reloaded:
 l All existing leads will be retained
 l All tabs and transition loops will be removed
 
Save the part list (*.pnl) and plate list (*.snl) with the job
If this preference is selected, a part list file (a part list file (*.pnl) is a tab-delimited text file containing a list of the parts used in the job.
The attributes for each part is saved: file name, material and thickness, required quantity, etc.) and a plate list file (a plate list file (*.snl) is
a tab-delimited text file containing a list of the plates used in the job. The attributes for each plate is saved: name - if any, material and
thickness, required quantity, etc.) will also be saved when the job (*.nif) is saved. These files contain no information about nesting, and
are primarily used to quickly import a list of parts and plates into ProNest. They can also be used to integrate ProNest with an MRP/ERP
system.

Note: Parts that were created with Pipe or VSP will not be saved in the part list file.

Automatically open the Edit Part List window after starting a new job
When this preference is selected, the Edit Part List window will be opened automatically after each new job is started.
 
When changing machines, how should leads be modified?
Set the default action for modifying leads when the machine is changed while a job is open.
 
Show the technology panel
Display the technology indicator panel on the main nesting screen.
 
 
Part List Preferences:
Allow parts in the Part List to be renamed
When selected, you can rename an added part in the Edit Part List window by clicking the part name.
 
Keep file extension in the part name when parts are added
When this preference is selected, parts will retain the file extension from the part's source file when they are added to the part list. When
cleared, the file extension will be removed when parts are added.

- 250 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Always reapply leads when changing materials
When changing the material of a part in the part list, you may want the leads to be reapplied using the new material's lead settings. Select
this preference to always reapply leads on parts when the material is changed.
 
When cleared, you will be prompted to either reapply leads or not when changing materials.
 
This preference applies when changing the material for parts in the part list, but not when changing the material for the entire job (using
the Change Materials dialog).
 
 
Nesting:
Disable automatic bumping of parts
Select this preference to turn off automatic bumping during manual nesting. With automatic bumping disabled, when you click an
anchored part or drag and drop a part onto the nest, the part will be placed exactly where you clicked or released the cursor.

 
With this preference cleared automatic bumping will be active. The part will be moved from where you clicked or released the cursor
towards the Nesting Home ( ):

See Adding parts to the nest manually for more information.

Note: When the Automatic Nesting module isn't in use, automatic bumping is always enabled when you manually nest parts by
double-clicking in the part list or pressing ENTER.

 
CNC Output
After output, save job history data 
Select this preference to record historical job information in the ProNest database. Job information will be recorded when output is gen-
erated. Information stored includes: part list, plate list, nests, work orders, and inventory data.
 
For more info, see History data.

- 251 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
After output, change each nest's status to 'Complete'
Clearing this preference will set nest status to Pending after output. Typically, this preference should be cleared when using the Pro-
duction Manager module.
 
After output, save the current job
ProNest will automatically save the current job after creating CNC output.
 
After output, save an image of each nest
ProNest will save an image file of each nest after creating CNC output. The image will be saved to the Nest Image folder specified on the
Miscellaneous tab of your preferences.
 
This is useful for viewing nest images in Production Manager.
After output, make remnants immediately available for nesting
When enabled, a remnant plate can be nested on when its parent plate still has a Pending status. When cleared, remnants will only be
available for nesting if their parent plate has a Complete status.

Note: This preference only has an effect when After output, change each nest's status to Complete is cleared.

After output, save an image of each nest for job history

ProNest will save an image file (.png) of each nest for history data after creating CNC output. The image file will be named according to
the history tables' NestID for a given nest and will be saved to the History Nest Image folder specified on the Miscellaneous tab of your
preferences.
 
After output, save job history data must be enabled in order to use this preference.
 
Close progress window on successful completion
Select this preference to hide the Output Progress window after CNC output is successfully created. You will still be able to see any warn-
ing or error messages that may occur during output.
 
 
Plate Inventory
Allow negative stock quantities
Select this preference to permit inventory plates to have negative stock quantities. A negative stock quantity can be used to indicate that
an inventory plate is needed for ordering.

Important: Allowing negative stock quantities will remove all user reservations on inventory plates. Any future plate reservations
that are made (while this preference in enabled) will be ignored by ProNest.

 
Optimization
Disable drawing of trials
During Optimization, ProNest will likely try nesting on several plates using various nesting strategies. As each combination (or trial) is
attempted, the nesting results are normally displayed in the nesting area and in a progress window. When this preference is cleared,
ProNest will not draw the nesting results of each trial. The progress of the optimization will be displayed only in the progress window.

Tip: Selecting this preference will improve the speed of Optimization by not drawing each nesting trial.

- 252 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Scribe Text
Show abbreviations when adding variables
When adding scribe text variables in Advanced Edit, show abbreviated variables by default in the Scribe Text Field dialog.
 

Color scheme
This preference enables you to change the skin of the application. Skins affect the look and coloring of the entire ProNest graphical user
interface.

Mouse Control
Selection tolerance
This preference determines how accurate you have to be to select parts, profiles, leads, and other items on the nest.
 
Corner snap distance
This preference determines how accurate you have to be to select part corners.
 
Both preferences in this section are controlled by a slider that affects a small cross-hair diagram on its right.
 

 
The orange circle in the cross-hair diagram represents the size of the preference value being edited. Move the slider all the way to the left
and the orange circle will shrink to a single point. For the selection tolerance preference, this would mean that selection of anything on
the nest would require clicking exactly on that item. Move the slider all the way to the right and the orange circle will grow to a very large
size. For the selection tolerance preference, this would mean that selection of anything on the nest would not require much accuracy at
all.

Tip: A test area is provided to test your selection tolerance and corner snap distance. Selection of the part in the test area is con-
trolled by the selection tolerance. An will appear on the corner of the part if you click within the corner snap distance from
that corner.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 l On the File tab, click Preferences , then click General.

- 253 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Miscellaneous preferences
Folders
Safe zone file
All safe zones schemes are saved in the file specified by this preference.
 
Plate Inventory folder (stores remnants and skeletons)
Remnants and skeletons saved in your plate inventory are linked to a Token File (*.tok), which defines its geometry. Use this preference to
specify the folder where these files should be saved.
 
 
Part Library folder
This folder stores token files for library parts and work order parts that were added from the part list.
 
Nest Image folder
If ProNest is set up to automatically create images of nests that are output, those images will be saved to this folder.
 
History Nest Image folder
If ProNest is set up to automatically save nest images for job history after output, those images will be saved to this folder.
 
 

Options
PNL Delimiter
Enter a separator to use for PNL files. When a delimiter is set, only PNLs that use that delimiter can be imported into ProNest. Likewise,
when a PNL is exported, it will use the delimiter specified here.
 
Choices:
TAB (this is the default)
Comma (,)
Semicolon (;)
Vertical Bar (|)

How do I get here in ProNest?

 l On the File tab, click Preferences , then click Miscellaneous.

- 254 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Regional preferences
Translation and Display Units
Language
ProNesthas been translated into many languages. To change the current language, select a different language from the Language box.

Note: ProNest will switch to the selected language after you click OK.

Display units
ProNest can display values in either IPS units (inch, pound, second) or MMKS units (millimeter, kilogram, second).
 
Precision: Length
This preference defines the number of digits that should appear to the right of the decimal separator for length-type values. This pref-
erence is used only for display purposes - meaning that actual values are maintained even if they are not displayed with their full accur-
acy.
 
Precision: Weight
This preference defines the number of digits that should appear to the right of the decimal separator for weight-type values. This pref-
erence is used only for display purposes - meaning that actual values are maintained even if they are not displayed with their full accur-
acy.
 
Precision: Cost
This preference defines the number of digits that should appear to the right of the decimal separator for currency-type values. This pref-
erence is used only for display purposes - meaning that actual values are maintained even if they are not displayed with their full accur-
acy.
 
Precision: Volume 
This preference defines the number of digits that should appear to the right of the decimal separator for volume-type values. This pref-
erence is used only for display purposes - meaning that actual values are maintained even if they are not displayed with their full accur-
acy.

Note: The preferences that control decimal places are used throughout ProNest. The examples on the right-hand side will show the
effect of your changes.

Size format
You can customize how length and width dimensions for plates and parts are displayed in ProNest. This preference is used only for dis-
play purposes, it doesn't have any impact on the actual dimension values of parts or plates.
 
Choices: Length × Width or Width × Length

Example:
 
A plate with a Length of 96 in. and a Width of 48 in. can be shown as either "96 × 48" or "48 × 96" using this preference.

 
 

- 255 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Material display format

You can customize how ProNest displays material names throughout the application. Materials can be formatted to use any arrangement
of material name, thickness, grade, and gauge.
 
Choices: %Name%, %Thickness%, %Grade%, %Gauge%

Fields in the material display formula must be surrounded by percent signs (%) in order to be recognized by ProNest. You can use any
combination of fields in any order that you want. However, if you are using a field in the material database, it is recommended that you
also use it in the material display formula.
 

How do I get here in ProNest?

 l On the File tab, click Preferences , then click Regional.

- 256 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Settings preferences
Important: Changes made to preferences on this page will not take effect until you restart ProNest.

Machines
Machine folder
All machines (*.cfg) are saved in the folder specified by this preference.
 
 l For more information about machines, see the topic called "What is a ProNest machine?" on page 18
 l For more information about how ProNest machines are saved, see the topic called "How are settings saved?" on page 19
 
Post processor folder (CFF)
All post processor files (*.cff) are saved in the folder specified by this preference.
 
 l For more information about post processors, see the topic called "Select a Post Processor (CFF)" on page 30.
 l For more information about where post processors are saved, see the topic called "How are settings saved?" on page 19
 
Primary machine
When ProNest is started, a new job is automatically created using the machine specified here.
 
For more information about ProNest machines, see the topic called "What is a ProNest machine?" on page 18
 
Prompt for machine at startup
If this preference is selected, the Machine Selection dialog will appear whenever ProNest is started. The machine selected in this dialog
will then be used as the primary machine.

Note: If this preference is selected, the Primary machine preference will be used as the default selection in the Machine Selection dia-
log.

Spreadsheet Settings Folders

Settings spreadsheets are each saved in a specific folder. These folders may be local to your computer, or may reside somewhere on the
network. Point each of these folder locations to correct location for each type of spreadsheet you use.
 
For more information about spreadsheets, see the topic called "About spreadsheets" on page 186.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 l On the File tab, click Preferences , then click Settings.

- 257 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Check for Updates

Using the Check for Updates feature, you can see if software updates or major version upgrades of ProNest are available for download.
ProNest must be running and your PC must be connected to the Internet to use this feature.

Updates vs. Version Upgrades

Updates are released frequently and typically include new features, enhancements, and bug fixes. A version upgrade refers to a new
major version of ProNest. For example, going from ProNest 2019 version 12.0.1 to ProNest 2019 version 12.0.2 would be an update,
whereas going from ProNest 2017 to ProNest 2019 would be a version upgrade.

Manually check for updates

 1. On the File tab, click Help.

 2. Click Check for Updates.
If there is an update or version upgrade available, you can click the associated link to open the ProNest download web page.

Automatically check for updates

You can configure ProNest to automatically check for updates or version upgrades.
 1. On the File tab, click Preferences.
 2. Click Updates.
 3. Set how often you want ProNest to check for updates.
 l Choices: Every day, Once a week, Every other week, Once a month, Never (this will turn off Automatic Check for
Updates)
 4. If you want ProNest to also notify you when new version upgrades are available, select In addition to updates, also check for ver-
sion upgrades.
When ProNest is running, it will automatically check for updates and upgrades on the schedule that you have assigned.

Important: The Check for Updates feature can always be used to see if a more recent version of ProNest is available. However,
downloading an update or version upgrade is only available with an active software subscription.

- 258 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Work Orders preferences

Options
Unique key
You can specify a combination of fields that creates a unique identifier for each Work Order record. This is the criteria used to identify a
work order item when updating the Work Orders database in ProNest.
 
You cannot enter a unique key that includes fields that are blank for existing work orders.
 
Part library matching
Select whether or not to use the Part Library for your work order parts. If your work orders reference ProNest library parts, you can control
how part matching should work.
 
(None)
Do not try to match parts in the work order with ProNest library parts.
 
Part Name
Part Name in work order must match the library part name. If the part specified in the work order cannot be found in the
part library, the part will be imported into the database and highlighted with an error. You will not be able to add the work
order part to the part list.
 
Part Name and Revision
Part Name and Revision in work order must match both the library part's name and revision. If either the part name or revi-
sion specified in the work order cannot be found in library, the part will be imported into the database and highlighted
with an error. You will not be able to add the work order part to the part list.
 

When a job is saved, release all unnested quantities

When selected, work order parts in the part list that have not been nested will be un-allocated from the job when that job is saved. The
work order parts will be removed from the part list and will become available in the Work Orders grid in the Edit Part List window.
 
When cleared, unnested work order parts in the part list will remain allocated to the job when that job is saved.
 
Miscellaneous fields
You can map miscellaneous fields in the work order to available part property fields in ProNest. In this way, part information such as ini-
tial rotation, priority, grain restraint, etc. can be specified in the work order using text fields.
 
The Misc # field and Caption are used for matching.
 
For instance, if a work order contains a field called "Rotation Limit" and is mapped to the ProNest part property "Grain Restraint" in pref-
erences, when that work order part is added to the part list, it will automatically use the grain restraint specified in the work order.

Warnings and Errors

Controls how warnings and errors will be displayed in the Work Orders grids. Work order parts with a warning will be displayed in the grid
with a warning icon ( ), and the associated field highlighted in yellow. Work order parts with an error will be displayed in the grid with
an error icon ( ), and the associated field highlighted in red. Any item that is set to (Ignore) will not be flagged in the Work Orders grid.
 
Any work order that contains warnings can still be added to part list, whereas work orders with an error can not be added until the error
condition is fixed.
 

- 259 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Could not find library part (required)

If Part library matching is enabled (set to "Part Name" or "Part Name and Revision") this is required and set to error. Parts that can't be
matched will be imported into the Work Orders Database, but highlighted with an error. If Part library matching is set to "(None)" this
setting is hidden.
 
ProNest material could not be found
When the material specified in the work order cannot be found in the ProNest Material Database.
 
ProNest customer could not be found
When the customer specified in the work order cannot be found in the ProNest Customer Database.
 
Revision doesn't match library part
When the work order's Part Name matches a library part, but the Revision does not. This preference is active only when Part library
matching is set to "Part Name".
 
Material doesn't match library part
When the work order's Part Name matches a library part, but the Material does not. This preference is active only when Part library
matching is set to "Part Name" or "Part Name and Revision".
 
Customer doesn't match library part
When the work order's Part Name matches a library part, but the Customer does not. This preference is active only when Part library
matching is set to "Part Name" or "Part Name and Revision".
 
How do I get here in ProNest?
 l On the File tab, click Preferences , then click Work Orders.

- 260 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Managing Users and Permissions

The Users and Permissions feature lets you create defined roles for users, enabling you to control which areas of ProNest that users can
access and change. This is especially useful in scenarios where multiple people access the same computer. When activated, each person
logs on to ProNest with their own user name and password.

Account types
There are four different types of accounts, each giving the user a different level of control in ProNest:
 
 l System Administrator
The system administrator manages all other user accounts, including all other administrators. There can be only one system admin-
istrator account. This account has full capabilities and permissions in ProNest. The system administrator is listed as "Admin-
istrator" in the log in screen.

 l Administrator
The administrator can add new users, deactivate existing users, change permissions for users, reset user passwords, etc. This
account has full permissions in ProNest.

 l Normal
The normal account is for users who perform common tasks in ProNest. This account can be configured to have permissions set
for access to various database editors and preferences.

 l Guest
The guest account is primarily for people who need temporary access to ProNest. This account type does not require a user name
or password and it gives you the lowest level of access.

Administrative tasks
Administrators can manage users and permissions using ProNest preferences:
 1. On the File tab, click Preferences.
 2. In the left pane, select Users and Permissions.
A list of ProNest users will be displayed. You can edit user accounts and permissions from this page. Modifying users and permissions
requires administrative privileges.

Turn on or off Users and Permissions in ProNest

 l On the Users and Permissions preferences page, simply click ON or OFF.

Note that turning off the Users and Permissions feature will not delete any existing user accounts. It will merely disable the feature so that
users are not required to log on when ProNest is started. With the feature turned off, user access to ProNest will not be restricted.

Note: When turning on Users and Permissions for the first time, you will be prompted to sign in as the system administrator. Ini-
tially, the Administrator password is set to "hypertherm". After signing in as Administrator and turning on Users and Per-
missions, it is recommended that you reset the Administrator password, as described in User account basics.

- 261 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Add new user

 1. Click the +Add new user button.

 2. Enter account details for the user. Typically, the full name should match their Windows user name. The email address is used for
informational purposes.
 3. Select a user account type. "Administrator" will give the user full administrative rights, "Normal" will add an account with con-
figurable permissions.
 4. For Permissions, clear a box to restrict access to that database editor.
 5. Click OK.

Change permissions for normal users

For each Normal user account, you can turn on or off the ability to make changes in the Material, Customer, Plate Inventory, Part Library,
Assembly, or Work Orders database editors.
 1. Select a user account (on the Users and Permissions preferences page, click the user name).
 2. For Permissions, clear the checkboxes next to the database editors to restrict access to them.
When a permissions checkbox is cleared, the user will have read-only access in that database editor. They will not be able to make
changes (such as adding, editing, or deleting records) within that database editor. Note that database changes that happen during the
normal course of using ProNest will not be prohibited for any user.

Reset user passwords

If a user forgets their password, you can reset the password as follows:
 1. Select a user account (on the Users and Permissions preferences page, click the user name).
 2. Select Reset password.
 3. Click OK.
The password will be reset to the default value shown on screen.

Deactivate user

 1. Select a user account (on the Users and Permissions preferences page, click the user name).
 2. Set the Status to Inactive.
 3. Click OK.
Inactive users can be hidden in the Users list by clearing the Show inactive users box.

Allow users to have their password remembered

You can configure ProNest so that the "Remember my password" setting appears on the user log in page at startup.
 l On the Users and Permissions page in preferences, select Allow "Remember my password".
You may want to disable this feature for enhanced privacy and security.

- 262 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Naming preferences
Naming preferences let you control how jobs, quotes, and remnant and skeleton inventory plates are automatically named when they are
created. You can use variables to name items in numerical order and/or by date. You can also enter a combination of variables and text to
create a customized naming convention.

Variables
The following variables can be used in naming formulas. Variables must be surrounded by percent signs (%) in order to be recognized by
ProNest.
 
%ID%
This will name new items in ascending numerical order. For jobs, if you start new session (close and re-open ProNest), the
ID number count will be reset to 1.

%JobID%
For jobs, this will name new jobs in numerical order, giving a unique number to each job that is started. Starting a new ses-
sion (close and re-open ProNest) will not cause the ID number will be reset to 1.

%TodaysJobID%
Similar to %JobID%, except this variable will reset the count to 1 after each day. This is used in combination with %Date%
to give a unique name to each job within a given day.

%Date%
Today's date will be inserted into the item name, in the date format specified.

%JobPath%
Job file path will be inserted into the item name.

%JobName%
Job name will be inserted into the item name. This is typically not used for job naming conventions.

%NestCutTimes%
The number of times a parent nest is cut will be inserted into the remnant or skeleton name.

%NestMaterial%
The material of the parent nest will be inserted into the remnant or skeleton name.

%NestIndex%
The index number of the parent nest will be inserted into the remnant or skeleton name.

%PlateName%
The name of the parent inventory plate will be inserted into the remnant or skeleton name.

%Quote ID%
A number that increases by 1 for each new quote that is started. Unlike the %ID% variable, this value is never reset.

By default, there are several pre-defined formulas for jobs that are already available in the Formula box:
 
 l Job%ID%: The text "Job" will be appended with the ID variable described above.
 l %JobID%: The JobID variable described above will be used.
 l %TodaysJobID%_%Date%: A unique number will be followed by an underscore (_) and today's date.
 

- 263 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note that you can enter additional text into the formula at any point, as long as it doesn't alter the variable text inside of the percent
signs (%).
 

Example:
 
If you wanted to append the JobID with location information, you might enter %JobID%_Building12 into the Formula box. As a res-
ult, you would get jobs named "01_Building12", "02_Building12", "03_Building12", etc.

 
As you edit the naming formulas, look at the Examples box to get an idea of how your jobs or plates will be named.

Note: The following characters are invalid for file names and should not be used in the formula:
 
\ / : * ? " <> |

Padding
When selected, numerical variables (%ID%, %JobID%, and %TodaysJobID%) will be carried out to the specified precision value for
decimal places, even if the precision is unnecessary.
 
Date format
When using the %Date% variable, this controls how date is formatted in the job name.
 
Choices: mdyy, mdyyyy, mmddyy, mmddyyyy, ddmmyy, ddmmyyyy, yymmdd, yyyymmdd
 

For unsaved jobs, use the quote number as the job name
When this preference is selected, the quote number will be used as the job name. This only happens if the job (.nif) is not yet saved and
the quote number is specified on the Quote page (File > Quote).
 

How do I get here in ProNest?

 l On the File tab, click Preferences , then click Naming.
 
Related articles
 n Creating jobs
 n Saving remnants and skeletons
 n Creating a new quote

- 264 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CAD Font preferences
CAD drawings that contain text may also contain font information for that text. ProNest supports both native AutoCAD®fonts in SHX
format, Windows® system fonts (TrueType, PostScript, OpenType, etc.), or Hypertherm fonts (.fnt) for CAD text.
 
This ProNest preference page controls which fonts are available when importing CAD drawings with text or adding scribe text in
Advanced Edit. You can also specify a default font to use for CAD import or scribe text added in Advanced Edit.

Font Options
Font folder
Point to the folder that your CAD program uses for CAD fonts. For AutoCAD®, CAD fonts are stored in SHX format. If this preference is left
blank or invalid, ProNest will not be able to use CAD fonts when importing CAD files.

Note: The AutoCAD Fonts folder varies based on the version and installed options for AutoCAD.
 
Some sample locations include:
 
C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2010\Fonts
C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD 2011\Fonts

Hypertherm fonts (.fnt) are also supported CAD fonts. To use these fonts, set Font folder to:
 
C:\Program Files\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019

If this preference is left blank or invalid, ProNest will not be able to use CAD fonts for scribe text (though Windows fonts are always avail-
able).
 
Always use default font
When selected, the default font specified on this preferences page will be used for all text in CAD files, regardless of the font used in the
CAD file. When cleared, the default font will only be used if the CAD font used in the drawing can't be found or there is no font specified
in the drawing.
 
 

Default Font
Use CAD font
You can select a CAD font (.shx or .fnt) to use as the default for text in CAD files. The list of available fonts comes from the folder spe-
cified in the Font folder preference.
 
For Hypertherm fonts (.fnt), choices include: Mtcpro, Mtcmono, NoLift.
 
Use system font
You can select a system font to use as the default for text in CAD files. These are most commonly TrueType (.ttf), PostScript (.ps) or
OpenType (.otf) fonts. The list of available fonts comes from your C:\Windows\Fonts folder.
 

How do I get here in ProNest?

 l On the File tab, click Preferences , then click CAD Font.

- 265 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

3D CAD Files preferences

SOLIDWORKS
These preferences control how ProNest imports SOLIDWORKS® features and geometry.
 
Import specific cut faces
This preference can be used to specify the particular faces that you want to cut and have ProNest ignore the other faces in the drawing.
Only faces that match the Cut face names specified will be included and assigned to the cut process when the part is imported.
 
If this preference is cleared or the specified cut face name can't be found in the part, ProNest will import the part according to the Top
view coordinate system name (see below) or the face with the largest surface area.
 
Cut face names
The names of the faces that should be imported as cut geometry. Multiple names should be separated by a semi-colon (;)
with no spaces in between. An asterisk (*) can be used as a wildcard.
 

Example:
 
With Import specific cut faces selected and Cut face names set to "Cut*", all faces that begin with "Cut" would be
imported.

Top view coordinate system name

A coordinate system is a system of planes used to assign Cartesian coordinates to features, parts, and assemblies. Part and assembly doc-
uments contain default coordinate systems; other coordinate systems can be defined with reference geometry.
 
The Top view coordinate system name preference in ProNest can be used to specify the name of a coordinate system in SOLIDWORKS. If
this is left blank, the default coordinate system in the drawing will be used during import.
 
The primary purpose of this preference is to aid in troubleshooting if parts are being brought into ProNest incorrectly flipped or mirrored.
 
To specify a custom coordinate system in SOLIDWORKS:
 1. On the Features tab, click Reference Geometry, then click Coordinate System.

 2. Set the origin by clicking a point on the part that intersects the face that you want to import. Click subsequent edges to set the
positive X, Y and Z axes.

- 266 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l The origin must intersect the face you want to import.

 l The XY plane should be parallel to the face you want to import.
 l The Z axis should be perpendicular to the face you want to import.

 3. Click the green checkmark to accept your changes.

 4. In the node on the right, you can rename the coordinate system as needed.

 5. In ProNest, make sure that you enter the same coordinate system name you use in SOLIDWORKS in the Top view coordinate sys-
tem name box (File > Preferences > 3D CAD Files).
 
Import full flat pattern
When selected, ProNest will import geometry for the whole surface that the largest face belongs to. When cleared, ProNest will import
only the geometry of the largest face (the default behavior).
 

- 267 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:
 
Consider the following part:

 
By default, ProNest will import the face with the largest surface area.

With Import full flat pattern selected, the entire surface will be imported:

Bend lines are imported as display only information in ProNest.

 
Detect part thickness
When this preference is enabled, ProNest will attempt to determine the thickness of the SOLIDWORKS part and assign a ProNest material
type and thickness to the part during import.
 
Part thickness is detected by locating a face that is parallel to the chosen face and is the furthest away in the same solid body. The dis-
tance between the two faces is calculated and set as the BOM thickness so that it gets applied when the part is added.
 
Tolerance
The stated thickness must be ±0.001 in. (±0.0254 mm) of a listed ProNest thickness in order for a match to be made.

- 268 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

When you select a material type and thickness in the Edit Part List and then import a SOLIDWORKS part, the detected thickness in the part
will be used instead of the thickness you selected. If there is BOM information in the SOLIDWORKS file that specifies a material type (and
optionally, grade), this BOM information will be used instead of the material selected in ProNest.

Note: This preference only applies to solid parts. Sheet metal parts always have their thickness detected during import.

Ignore parts that do not contain

This is used to flag the parts that should be imported into ProNest. If the SOLIDWORKS part does not contain the property name specified
in Custom property name, it will not be imported. This can be useful if you have several SOLIDWORKS parts in a drawing and only want
certain parts included when the drawing is imported into ProNest.
 
Custom property name
The property name that must exist in order for a part to be imported. For more than one property, separate names with a
semicolon (;) with no space in between.

Import sheet metal parts only

This is used to specify whether parts being imported are solid parts and/or sheet metal parts. When selected, only sheet metal parts will
be imported. When cleared, ProNest will import both solid parts and sheet metal parts.
 
Enable bevel detection
Identify beveled edges on SOLIDWORKS parts and automatically assign ProNest beveling to them during import. This method doesn't
require any bevel layer naming in CAD.

Note:  l Gradual bevel is not supported.

 l Bevel detection for sheet metal parts is not supported.

To use automatic bevel detection for 3D CAD parts:

 l Select this Enable bevel detection preference.

 l On the Bevel page of your ProNest settings ( ):

 l Select Use AutoBevel.
 l Enter a prefix for bevel layer names. By default, the prefix is "BVL".

 l On the Importing Parts page of your ProNest settings ( ):

 l Map beveling to the cut process by entering the bevel prefix + wildcard (*). For instance, if the prefix is "BVL" you would
enter BVL* for the Cut process.
 l Make sure that you set the correct material for the 3D CAD file in ProNest before adding it to the part list.
 l Set a Default Class that is bevel-compatible for the materials that you will be using. This way, when a material type and thickness
are matched automatically, the correct bevel-compatible class will be assigned as well.
 l In SOLIDWORKS, you may need to use a user coordinate system to ensure that the part is imported at the intended orientation.

- 269 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The origin of the user coordinate system would need to intersect the top face of the bevel part. See Top view coordinate system
name for more information.
 
Include construction geometry
Enables or disables the reading of geometry used only for construction purposes.
 
Enable drill detection
ProNest will attempt to map drill holes added via the Hole Wizard in SOLIDWORKS to available drill tools in ProNest. See Importing
SOLIDWORKS drill holes for more information.
 
Default thread style
For threaded holes that require tapping, this is the default tap style that will be used when the SOLIDWORKS part is imported. ProNest
will attempt to match the threaded hole to an available tap tool that matches this thread style.
 
Choices: Coarse, Fine

Note: You can override the default thread style by including the word "Coarse" or "Fine" in the feature name for a given hole. See
Importing SOLIDWORKS drill holes for more information.

Inventor
These preferences control how ProNest imports AutoDesk Inventor® features and geometry.
 
Top view coordinate system name
The Top view coordinate system name preference in ProNest can be used to specify the name of a coordinate system in Inventor. If this
is left blank, the default coordinate system in the drawing will be used during import.
 
The primary purpose of this preference is to aid in troubleshooting if parts are being brought into ProNest incorrectly flipped or mirrored.
 
To specify a user coordinate system (UCS) in Inventor:
 1. On the 3D Model tab, in the Work Features group, click User Coordinate System.

 2. Set the origin by clicking a point on the part that intersects the face that you want to import. Click subsequent points to set the
positive X, Y and Z axes.

- 270 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l The origin must intersect the face you want to import.

 l The XY plane should be parallel to the face you want to import.
 l The Z axis should be perpendicular to the face you want to import.

 3. In the node on the right, you can rename the coordinate system as needed.

 4. In ProNest, make sure that you enter the same coordinate system name you use in Inventor in the Top view coordinate system
name box (File > Preferences > 3D CAD Files).
 
Import sheet metal parts only

- 271 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

When selected, only sheet metal parts will be imported. When cleared, ProNest will import both solid parts and sheet metal parts.
 
This preference is used primarily when importing Inventor assembly files (.iam) to select which parts are included and which are not.
 
Detect part thickness
When this preference is enabled, ProNest will attempt to determine the thickness of the Inventor part and assign a ProNest material type
and thickness to the part during import.
 
Part thickness is detected by locating a face that is parallel to the chosen face and is the furthest away in the same solid body. The dis-
tance between the two faces is calculated and set as the BOM thickness so that it gets applied when the part is added.
 
Tolerance
The stated thickness must be ±0.001 in. (±0.0254 mm) of a listed ProNest thickness in order for a match to be made.

When you select a material type and thickness in the Edit Part List and then import an Inventor part, the detected thickness in the part will
be used instead of the thickness you selected. If there is BOM information in the Inventor file that specifies a material type (and option-
ally, grade), this BOM information will be used instead of the material selected in ProNest.
 
Include construction geometry
Enables or disables the reading of geometry used only for construction purposes.
 
Enable bevel detection
Identify beveled edges on Inventor parts and automatically assign ProNest beveling to them during import. This method doesn't require
any bevel layer naming in CAD.

Note:  l Gradual bevel is not supported.

 l Bevel detection for sheet metal parts is not supported.

To use automatic bevel detection for 3D CAD parts:

 l Select this Enable bevel detection preference.

 l On the Bevel page of your ProNest settings ( ):

 l Select Use AutoBevel.
 l Enter a prefix for bevel layer names. By default, the prefix is "BVL".

 l On the Importing Parts page of your ProNest settings ( ):

 l Map beveling to the cut process by entering the bevel prefix + wildcard (*). For instance, if the prefix is "BVL" you would
enter BVL* for the Cut process.
 l Make sure that you set the correct material for the 3D CAD file in ProNest before adding it to the part list.
 l Set a Default Class that is bevel-compatible for the materials that you will be using. This way, when a material type and thickness
are matched automatically, the correct bevel-capable class will be assigned as well.
 l In Inventor, you may need to use a user coordinate system to ensure that the part is imported at the intended orientation.

- 272 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The origin of the user coordinate system would need to intersect the top face of the bevel part. See Top view coordinate system
name for more information.

- 273 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Warnings preferences
Warnings
All of these preferences control the visibility of certain warnings in ProNest. By default, all of the preferences in this section are selected -
meaning that their associated warning dialog would appear. Each of these warning dialogs contains a "Do not show me this again" check
box. Selecting this check box would clear the associated preference in this section.

How do I get here in ProNest?

 l On the File tab, click Preferences , then click Warnings.

- 274 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Quoting preferences
General
The preferences in this section serve as default values when a new quote is created. Note that changing these preferences will not affect
existing quotes.
 
Expiration days
Set a default number of days after the Created date when the quote will expire.
 
Tax shipping
Set whether or not to tax shipping costs by default.
 
Show discount separately
When selected, Discount will be displayed in a separate line at the bottom of a quote, below the subtotal.
 
When cleared, Discount will not be displayed separately in the quote, even though it is still being used in final price calculations.
 
Include material costs
When cleared, the Include material costs property (File tab > Quote > Properties) will be cleared by default.
 
Custom fields
These are default captions and values for custom fields. When a new quote is created, these custom fields will be available by default on
the quote's Properties page (File tab > Quote > Properties). Note that custom fields will not appear in the actual quote unless a value is
entered.
 
To add a new default custom field:
 1. Click the Add button.
 2. Enter a Caption.
 3. If you want a default value to be inserted each time a new quote is created, enter a Value.

Costing
Part area
Select a method of computing a part's area that will be used for quoting. This is then used to calculate weight and ultimately the material
costs shown in quotes.

True Shape
The 2-D surface area of the part. If a part has an interior profile, the surface area of the cut-out will not be considered a portion of that
part.

- 275 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Rectangular
The minimum rectangular space that a part occupies (including cut-outs, part leads, lead extensions, and loops).

Enclosed
The area contained within a part's exterior profile, including cut-outs.

Include scrap in the part area

Select this preference if you want scrap attributed to parts when area is calculated for quoting.
 
Scrap method:

Area increase (%)

Take the part's area using the method selected above (True Shape, Rectangular, or Enclosed) and increase it by this percentage.
 
Example
 

- 276 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

If the actual area of a part is 200 in.2 and the Area increase is set to 10%, the part area used in quoting figures would be: 220 in.2
[200 in. 2 + (200 × 10%)]

Added margin
Only applies when using Rectangular for Part Area. An extra margin or buffer will be added around the rectangular box surrounding a
part.

You can enter the width of the margin (d in the illustration) in the lower box.
 
Units: in. or mm

Allocated Scrap Area

Use the allocated costing method to attribute scrap to a part's area.

Note: Quote preferences control how costing figures for parts (items) are calculated in quotes. They do not affect area calculations
for secondary operations costs or shipping by weight (True Area is always used for secondary operations and shipping).

Company information
Enter the default information about your company that you want to appear in the Prepared By section at the top of quotes.

- 277 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

This information will be used by default when new quotes are created. Any changes made here will not affect existing quotes, except for
the Logo.
 
Logo
The Logo set in preferences will be used whenever a new quote is created or an existing quote is opened.
 
You can click the Browse button and select an image file to add your organization's logo. Allowable image file formats:
.bmp
.png
.gif
.jpg
.jpeg

Phone
The phone number set here will not appear by default in quotes. Instead, the phone number for the Author section on the Prepared By
page (File tab > Quote > Prepared by) will appear in the quote.
 

PDF Export
These preferences are used when a quote is exported to PDF.
 
Compressed
Output file compression. This reduces file size but increases export time.
 
Embedded fonts
All fonts used in the report will be contained in the PDF output file so that the file will be displayed correctly when opened on a computer
where these fonts are absent. This increases output file size.
 
Background
Export of graphic image will be assigned to a page into PDF file. This increases output file size.
 
Print optimized

- 278 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Graphic images are output in high resolution for correct printing. Enabling this option is necessary only when the document contains
graphics and printing is necessary. This increases output file size.
 
Outline
When a report outline is used, this option enables export of the outline to the PDF document.
 
 
Document information
This information will be embedded in the PDF document (in Document Properties):
 l Title
 l Author
 l Subject
 l Producer
 l Creator
 
Authentication and permissions
Owner password
Entering an owner password will turn on PDF security permissions. The owner password will be required to change PDF document secur-
ity settings and permissions.
 
User password
This password will be required to open the PDF document. (The user password is also known as a Document Open Password.) If no user
password is specified, the PDF will not require a password to be opened.
 
The following options control the PDF security settings and permissions, which restricts what can be done to the PDF document:
 l Print the document
 l Modify the document
 l Copy of text and graphics
 l Add or modify text annotations
Selecting a checkbox will enable the action in the PDF, clearing a checkbox will prohibit the action.

Note: An owner password must be set for these security and permissions options to take effect.

 
Viewer preferences
Hide toolbar
Hides the toolbar in the PDF viewer.
 
Hide menubar
Hides the menubar in the PDF viewer.
 
Hide window user interface
Hides the window controls that are displayed in the background of the PDF viewer.
 
Fit window
Adjusts the document window to fit snugly around the opening page.

- 279 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Center window
Positions the window in the center of the screen area.
 
Print scaling
When selected, in the PDF document print setup screen, Page scaling is set to "Shrink to printable area" by default. When cleared, Page
scaling is set to "(None)".
 
How do I get here in ProNest?
 l On the File tab, click Preferences , then click Quoting.

- 280 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

6. JOBS
What is a job?
ProNest jobs provide you with an easy and powerful way of organizing your work by storing your settings, part list, plate list, and nesting
information in a single file. Jobs have many different uses and applications. You can save unfinished work and return to it at a later time,
store completed jobs for archival purposes, modify old jobs, or use multiple jobs to store different settings configurations for a single
machine. Jobs are also an important part of organizing production information such as costing and material usage.

Jobs and settings

Jobs are designed to work with the ProNest settings files that are installed on your computer. Each job is assigned a single machine (.cfg),
which its settings are based on. A job must be able to access its machine file in order to function properly.
 
As you work on a job, you can customize your settings. When you save a job, your customized settings will be saved in the job file (.nif),
separately from the settings saved in the machine. Later, when a job is opened, the settings from that job will be restored.
 
For a more in-depth look at how ProNest jobs work, follow the links below.
 l "Creating jobs" on page 282
 l "Saving jobs" on page 285
 l "Changing your machine" on page 287
 l Job templates
 l "Changing materials in your job" on page 288
 l "Job information" on page 289
 l "Naming preferences" on page 263
 l "Job Storage settings" on page 185

- 281 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Creating jobs
ProNest always has a current job. When you open ProNest, a job is automatically started for you using the primary machine (.cfg) spe-
cified in your Preferences. You can create a new job using the machine of your choice at any time.

Start a new job

 1. On the File tab, click New.

 2. In the Description box on the right, type a description for your job.
 3. In the Machine box, select a machine for your job.
This machine will become the basis for the settings in your job. Generally, you should select the machine that corresponds to the
real world machine that you want to generate output for.
 4. Select a default Material type and thickness for your job. All parts, plates, and nests in your job will use this material, unless oth-
erwise specified.
 5. If you are using a Process Parameters spreadsheet that uses class, select a default Class for your job.
 6. Click Create.
Once you have entered the job description and machine you will be ready to begin working on your job.
 
Note that until a job is explicitly saved with its own name, it has not been fully created. To learn more about saving your jobs, see "Saving
jobs" on page 285.

Tip: The name of the current job is listed in the title bar at the top of the main ProNest window.

Start a new job from a template

 1. On the File tab, click New.

 2. Click New from existing.
 3. Browse and select the job that you want to use as a template.
 4. Click Open.

Set naming convention to use when new jobs are created

Job naming preferences let you control how jobs are automatically named when they are created.
 1. Open Preferences (on the File tab, select Preferences).
 2. In the left pane, select Naming.
 3. Using variables and text, enter a job naming formula.
To learn more, see "Naming preferences" on page 263.

- 282 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Opening jobs
Open a job

 1. On the File tab, click Open.

The Open dialog will appear. With the Files of type box set to ProNest Job (*.nif), browse to the folder containing the job you
want to open.
 2. Select the job file you want to open.
 3. Click Open.

Open Job dialog in ProNest

 
On the right-hand side of the Open Job dialog is a box containing job information. This includes:
 l The job’s file name and extension
 l Description (if any)
 l ProNest machine used by the job
 l Quote associated with the job (if any)
 l Date created
 l Date last modified
 l Version of ProNest last used to save the job

Restore settings from job

Directly below the Job Information box is the Restore settings from job option. This controls how settings are loaded when a job is
opened.
 
When selected:

- 283 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l A fresh copy of settings from the machine used by the job (as shown in the job information box) is loaded from the CFG file.
 l Any job-specific settings saved in the job will be used instead of the settings from the machine (CFG).
This tells ProNest to completely restore settings to what they were when the job was saved.
 
When cleared:
 l A fresh copy of settings from the machine used by the job is loaded from the CFG file.
 l Any job-specific settings that were saved in the job will not be used.
This is typically done when you have edited your machine settings and want to re-output a job using those new settings.

When an existing job is opened, ProNest always attempts to load the machine used by that job. This means that ProNest changes
from the current machine to the machine used by the job. The only exception is when the machine can't be found, in which case
you will be prompted to select a replacement machine.

Open a copy of a job

Any existing ProNest job can be opened as a template for a new job.
 1. On the File tab, click New.
 2. Click New from existing.
 3. Select the job file you want to open.
 4. Click Open.
To learn more, see "Job templates" on page 286.

Opening a PNL

You can also use the Open dialog to open a ProNest PNL (Part Nest List) file. This gives you a quick way to create a job around an exist-
ing part list.
To open a PNL using the Open dialog:
 1. On the File tab, click Open.
 2. Set the Files of Type box to ProNest Part List (*.pnl) and browse to the folder containing the PNL you want to open.
 3. Select the PNL you want to open.
 4. Click Open.
The contents of the part list will be replaced with parts from the PNL file that was opened. The plate list will be emptied, all
existing nests will be deleted, and your current job will be renamed to match the name of the PNL file. Note that your
machine and settings configuration will not be affected.

- 284 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Saving jobs
Often you will want to save your work so you can return to it at a later time. The exact state of your job can be saved in a job file. ProNest
jobs have an .nif extension.

Save a job

 1. On the File tab, click Save.

If the job hasn't been saved previously, the Save As dialog will appear.
 2. Browse to the appropriate folder for your job.
 3. In the File name box, type the name for your job file.
 4. Click Save.
The current job will be saved with the name you specified.

What is saved in a job?

Specifically, the job file (.nif) contains:
 l Nests. The exact state of all nests in your job are saved.
 l Plate List. All of the plates in your plate list are saved.
 l Part List. All of the parts that have been added to your part list are saved.
 l Settings configuration. This includes your machine and process settings.
If you have added any optional modules to ProNest, any changes made with these features will also be saved in your job.

Set default folder for saving jobs

 1. Open settings (in the Quick Access toolbar, click Settings ).
 2. In the left pane, click Job Storage.
 3. Enter a default job folder.
When a job (.nif) that uses that machine is saved, it will be stored in the specified folder by default.

- 285 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Job templates
Any existing ProNest job can be used as a template for a new job. Instead of building a new job from scratch, you can take the part list,
plate list, nests, and settings from an existing job and use that as a starting point for the new job. This can reduce time spent setting up
jobs, especially if they contain commonly-used parts.

Start a new job from a template

 1. On the File tab, click New.

 2. Click New from existing.
 3. Browse and select the job that you want to use as a template.
 4. Click Open.
-or-
 1. On the File tab, click New.
 2. In the My Templates section, select a job. The list of available jobs reflects the jobs found in the templates folder specified on that
page.
-or-
 1. On the File tab, click Recent.
 2. Right-click a job and select Open a copy.
A new job will be created based on the selected template. The new job will contain the nests, parts, plates, and settings from the original
job. The new job will be named based on your Naming preferences.

Impact on inventory
Any inventory plates that are used in the original job will be used again for the new job, as long as there is a sufficient quantity in invent-
ory.
 
Nests that have been output in the original job will not yet be output in the new job. As a result, remnants or skeletons will not yet be
saved to inventory. Likewise, inventory plates that are nested on in the new job will not yet be consumed from inventory.

- 286 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Changing your machine

Each job is assigned a single machine (.cfg) that serves as the basis for its settings. Changing this machine will cause ProNest to discard
the current machine settings and reload new settings from the replacement machine that is selected.

Change the machine for the current job

 1. On the File tab, click Info.

 2. Click the arrow next to Machine, then click Change Machine.
 3. Select a new machine from the list.
If needed, the Change Machine dialog will appear.
 

 
This dialog only appears when you need to map processes and modify existing leads in your job.
 
In the Process Mappings section, ProNest will automatically map the existing processes in your job to the processes in your replacement
machine. If the replacement machine has more than one process per process class (cut, scribe, punch), you can manually select new pro-
cess mappings for your job.
 
In the Leads (Part and Crop) section, you can specify whether to modify the leads for existing parts in your job with the leads settings in
your replacement machine. Selecting Never will leave existing leads unchanged.

Tip: You can set the default action for modifying leads when the machine is changed while a job is open.
 1. On the File tab, click Preferences.
 2. On the General page, use the When changing machines, how should leads be modified to set a default action.

- 287 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Changing materials in your job

Using the Change Material feature, you can substitute a new material in place of an existing material that is used in your job. When a
material is changed, all parts, plates and nests that are using the existing material will be reassigned to use the new material specified.
 
To change a material in your job:
 1. On the File tab, click Info, then click Change Materials. All of the current materials used in your job will be listed.
 2. For each material you want to reassign, select a new material. If you are using a Process Parameters spreadsheet, the list of avail-
able materials comes the spreadsheet. Otherwise, the list will come from the Materials in the database.
 3. Click OK.

Changing materials of nested parts

When parts are already nested, the Change Materials feature can still be used to change materials used in the job. Most often, this is done
in order to change the Class assigned to parts and not the material type and thickness.
 
Some common scenarios where you may want to do this include:
 l Removing True Hole® or other technology
 l Changing from one consumable set to another
 
When the material is changed for nested parts:
 l Feedrate, Kerf, and other Process Parameters will be updated with values for the new material.
 l Parts will not be moved on the nest. If the separation values of the new material are different, parts may be in conflict on the nest.
 l Leads of nested parts are not updated.
 l Cut sequence of nests is not reapplied.
 l Inventory plates that are in use will not have their material changed.

Considerations
 l Changing from a non-True Hole class to a True Hole class will update the Process Parameters used, but won't use True Hole leads.
 l Some different classes can't be used together on the same nest, even if the material and thickness is the same. After changing
classes of nested parts, it may be a good idea to review your nests to make sure that your material utilization is still acceptable.
 l Changing the material type or thickness of parts nested on inventory plates will cause those parts to be in conflict on the nest.

Changing the material of beveled parts

Once a part has been beveled and Make Pass Profiles is selected, the material type, thickness, and class should not be modified for that
part. Bevel angles, leads, and other settings parameters are applied based on material. Also, bevel consumables are specified using the
class name. Changing the material of a beveled part can result in incorrect cutting parameters.
 
If you need to change the material of a part that is already beveled, you will need to delete the part from the part list, add it again with the
new material, and then reapply beveling.

- 288 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Job information
This area provides you with general information and four different utilization figures for your current job.
To view job information:
 l On the File tab, click Info.
This section displays the file path, description, number of nests, number of parts, maximum torch spacing, and maximum torches used
for your job. You can edit the description of your job in this section.
 

Utilization (Averages)
This section contains four different utilization percentages: true, crop, rectangular, and plate used. These utilization percentages, which
detail material usage for your entire job, reflect the ratio of part surface area to total plate surface area.

True
This is the ratio of the true area of all nested parts relative to the total plate area. Note that if a part has an interior profile, the surface area
of the cut-out will not be considered a portion of that part.
 

Example:
 

 
Figure 1
 
The nest shown in Figure 1 has a true utilization of 6.58%. For the purposes of this demonstration, the true area of the part is light
blue, the plate area is outlined in red.

Crop
If any of the nests in your job have been cropped, ProNest will calculate the crop utilization as the ratio of the true area of all nested parts
relative to the plate area up to the crop line. The section of plate that has been cropped off will not be included in the calculated plate
area. If your job does not contain any cropped nests, this value will be identical to the true utilization percentage.
 

Example:
 

- 289 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 2
 
The nest shown in Figure 2 has been cropped. The true area of the part appears light blue, the plate area used for this calculation is
outlined in red. The crop utilization for the nest in this job is 48%.

Plate used utilization

This percentage can be useful for determining how tightly parts are nested in a job. To generate this value, ProNest places an X,Y point
on the part that is furthest away from the nesting home. As the distance between the furthest part and the nesting home increases, the
plate used utilization will decrease.
 

Example:
 

Figure 3
 
The nest in Figure 3 has a plate used utilization of 47%. The part area is light blue, the total plate area is outlined in red.
 
 

- 290 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 4

The nest in Figure 4 has a plate used utilization of 17%. Note that this percentage is lower than the nest in Figure 3 because the parts
are further away from the nesting home.

Rectangular utilization
ProNest uses the minimum rectangular space that a part occupies (including part leads and lead extensions) when calculating part area.
Rectangular utilization is the ratio of the rectangular area of all parts in a job relative to total plate area.
 

Example:
 

Figure 5

The nest in Figure 5 has a rectangular utilization of 11.1%. The rectangular area of the part is light blue in color, the plate area is out-
lined in red.

Note: The true, crop, rectangular, and plate used utilizations shown in this dialog are averages of all of the nests in your job. You can
find utilization values for a single nest by viewing Nest Properties (double-click Nest n of n in the status bar of the main win-
dow.

- 291 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

History data
The ProNest database can store archival job and nest information, which can be used for reporting and analysis.

Important: It is recommended that you save job history data if you are using Data Sync and need ProNest production data related
to work orders or inventory plates. Be sure to activate the preference to save history data before doing any work in
ProNest, as archival job data is only recorded when this preference is enabled.

Saving history data

 1. On the File tab, click Preferences.

 2. On the General page, select After output, save job history data.
With this preference enabled, historical job and nest information will be stored in the ProNest database each time you create output for a
job.

Viewing history data

Unlike other areas of the ProNest database, history data is not viewable from within ProNest. To view history data, you must access the
database using SQL Server or some other means.
 
You can view history data from within SQL Server Management Studio. This is software is free to download and use. If you do not have
SQL Server Management Studio installed, you will need to install it before proceeding.

History data and SQL Server

During installation, the following history tables are created in the ProNest database (ProNest13):
 l history.JobParts
 l history.Jobs
 l history.NestParts
 l history.Nests
 l history.PlateInvCreated
 
In addition, there are four views that contain history data:
 l history.PlatesCreated
 l history.PlatesUsed
 l history.UniqueNestParts
 l history.WorkOrderParts

Saving nest images for job history

You can configure ProNest to save images of each nest in history data after output:
 1. On the File tab, click Preferences.
 2. On the General page, select After output, save an image of each nest for job history.
ProNest will save an image file (.png) of each nest for job history after creating NC output. The image file will be named according to the
NestID for a given nest (in the history tables) and will be saved to the History Nest Image folder specified on the Miscellaneous tab of
your preferences.

- 292 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Production Manager
Production Manager is an optional module that enables you to find jobs and nests that are currently in production and view details
about each nest, including the amount of available space on the nest and whether it has been cut or not.
 
Production Manager also provides a way of limiting inventory plate usage, so that inventory plates that are nested on but not yet cut are
blocked from being used in another nest/job. Likewise, any remnant or skeleton plates that are created from inventory plates do not
appear as available plates for nesting until after the parent plate has been completed.

Open the Production Manager editor

You can access ProNest database editors internally from the Data tab in the main ProNest window. Database editors can also be run
externally as stand-alone applications.
 
To access stand-alone Production Manager database editor:

 l Start > Hypertherm CAM > Production Manager.

 
To open the Customers editor from within ProNest:

 l On the Data tab, click Production Manager.

 

The Production Manager editor shows a view of all past and present jobs, as well as the nests that belong to each job.

Note: If you need to make changes to a nest's NC program (before the nest is cut), you can simply "undo output" for the nest or for
all nests in the job. This will delete any program(s) associated with that nest/job and release all inventory plates used.

- 293 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Enabling Production Manager

 1. In ProNest, on the File tab, click Preferences.

 2. On the General tab, clear the After output, change each nest's status to 'Complete' box.
Clearing this preference will set nest status to Pending after output.

Status
Each nest listed has a status:

Pending
The NC program has been created for a nest, but the nest has not yet been cut.

In Production
Nest is being cut, but is not yet complete. When a nest is started in Production Kiosk, the status is automatically set to In Production.

Complete
When a nest has been cut, it's status can be set to Complete. Any inventory plate the nest is using will be depleted from inventory,
while any remnants or skeleton plates saved from the nest will be created in inventory.
 
Nests that are finished in Production Kiosk will automatically be set to Complete.
 
When using Production Manager with Data Sync, when nest status changes to Complete, this can trigger a Data Sync Export Task (it is
a Nest Cut event). Refer to Data Sync Help for more information.
 
Jobs also have a status, which can't be edited. If any nest in a job is Pending, the job will be Pending as well. A job will have a Complete
status when all of its nests are Complete.

Changing the status of a nest

Nest status can be changed using the Change Status toolbar button.
 1. On the Nests tab, select the nest you want to change.
 2. Click the Change Status button in the toolbar and select a new status.

Free space
The amount of free space for each nest is shown in the grid. This allows you to easily identify nests that still have available space and loc-
ate the corresponding job so that additional parts can be added, if needed.
 
The Free space percentage is a rough estimate of the amount of usable space on a nest. ProNest subtracts the area of all nested parts and
the separation around them from the total plate area to get this number. The higher the number, the more available space on the nest.

Adding parts to existing nests

If a nest is Pending (meaning it is not yet cut) and has enough free space, you can add more parts to it:
 1. Open the corresponding job (NIF) for that nest in ProNest.
 2. Find the nest.
 3. Undo output for that nest (Home tab > Output > Undo Output).
 4. Add more parts.
 5. Output the nest again.

- 294 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The nest will appear again in Production Manager, with a Pending status.

- 295 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

7. PART LIST
What is the part list?
The ProNest part list contains all of the parts that you have added to your job. When you import part files into your job from a part
source, ProNest processes these files and then adds them to the part list. Added parts contain all of the information from the source file
as well as the nesting information that was added when the part was imported.
 
To learn more about using the part list, see "The Part List task pane" on page 297.

- 296 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The Part List task pane

The Part List task pane contains all of the parts that have been added to your job. It also displays additional part information including
quantity, nesting status, revision, and whether the part can be placed on the current nest.

Show or hide the Part List task pane

 l On the View tab, select Part List.

 

Part List task pane

 
Characteristics of the part list:
 l Beneath each part name, ProNest displays the quantity nested versus the total required quantity of a part (for example, "2 of 4 nes-
ted").
 l If a part on the nest is selected, the quantity selected will appear in brackets after the nested/required quantity (for example, "1 of
4 nested [1]").

 l A vertical gold bar ( ) next to a part indicates that the part can be nested on the current nest.

 l A vertical gray bar ( ) will appear next to parts that cannot be nested on the current nest.
Certain parts cannot be nested on a given plate. This will occur if the part material and plate material do not match, or if you are
using part class and are attempting to nest two or more parts of different classes on the same plate.

Tip: By right-clicking a part in the part list you can view or edit part properties, make last minute changes to your part in Advanced
Edit, export the part to DXF, output NC code for the part, or delete the part from the part list.

Hide depleted parts

Selecting this checkbox will hide parts in your part list that have already been nested; only non-nested parts will be displayed.

- 297 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Anchor part to cursor
When selected, the highlighted part in the part list will be affixed to the mouse cursor.

You can place copies of that part on the nest by simply clicking on the nest. See for Adding parts to the nest manually for more inform-
ation on nesting using anchored parts.
 
To remove an anchored part from the cursor:
 l Press ESC
-or-
 l Right-click an empty area on the nest.

Part List Pane Options

You can customize the Part List task pane by clicking Options to reveal a list of modifiable settings.
Select parts to show
This setting controls which parts are visible in the part list.
 
Choices: All parts, Only matching current nest material and class, Only nested on the current nest

All parts: All parts in the job will be visible.

 
Only matching current nest material and class: Parts that cannot be nested on the current nest will not be displayed in the part list.
 
Only nested on the current nest: Only parts that are nested on the current nest will be displayed in the part list.
 
Select how the list is sorted
This setting controls the order in which parts appear in the part list.
 
Choices: Nesting order, Alphabetical order

Nesting order: Parts will be listed in the order in which they would be nested. Parts will be listed from largest to smallest, with the largest
part appearing at the top. However, if parts in the part list have different priority values, they will be listed according to priority.
 
Alphabetical order: Parts will be listed alphabetically by part name.
 
Show property hints for parts
Using your mouse cursor, you can point to a part in the part list to display part details.
 
Automatically anchor part to cursor
The Anchor part to cursor option on the Part List pane will be enabled automatically whenever you click a different part in the part list.

- 298 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
 
Any changes that you make to the above Part List settings will be stored when you save your job.
 

Part List torch settings

Using the Part List, you can modify the torch settings used for manual nesting. By default, the Part List torch settings match your ProNest
settings ( ) for torches. Any changes that you make to Part List torch settings will apply only to the parts added manually to nests in
your current job.
Number of torches
This setting defines the actual number of torches/heads that will be used for manual nesting. The number of available torches is limited
by the maximum number of torches listed in your ProNest settings ( ).
 

Important: The remaining torch settings are only active if Number of Torches is greater than 1.

Torch spacing type

This setting defines the torch spacing type for manual nesting. 
 
Choices: Equal, Fixed, Variable
 
Equal: The torch spacing is based on the nest width and the number of torches being used. It is calculated by dividing the nest's width
(ProNest y-axis) by the Number of torches.
 
Fixed: The torch spacing is always the same value (defined by Torch spacing) - regardless of the number of torches used.
 
Variable: ProNest will first try to nest all parts using the maximum number of torches allowed. If it cannot place the part, it will reduce the
number of torches by one and try again. This process is repeated until it has tried with only one torch.
 
Torch spacing
Whenever Torch spacing type is set to Fixed, this value defines the torch spacing used for manual nesting.
 
Units: Distance
Range: Minimum torch spacing to 10,000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 20.0 in.
 
This setting is activated only if Torch spacing type is set to Fixed.

- 299 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Part properties
To view and edit part properties from the main ProNest window:
 l Right-click a part in the Part List task pane and select Properties.
The Properties pane will open, showing properties for the part that is currently selected in the part list.
 
Quantity
Required
The required quantity of the selected part can be modified in this box.
 
Range: 1 to 10,000
 
Attributes
Name
The name of the selected part can be modified in this box.

Note: The Allow parts in the Part List to be renamed preference (File > Preferences > General tab) must be selected in order to
edit a part name.

Revision
The revision of the selected part can be edited in this box. Revision can be used to keep track of different versions of a part.
 
File name
The full path of the part's source file.
 
If the part was loaded from a part file token, this will be indicated by a icon.
 
Size
Length × width of the selected part, including leads and extensions.
 
Material
The material assigned to the selected part.

Note: When spreadsheets are used, the list of available materials comes from the materials found in your Process Parameters spread-
sheet. When spreadsheets are not used, the list of available materials comes from your material database.

Class
The class of the selected part. Class can be used to organize your materials using specialized information such as cutting gas or amper-
age. Parts with the different classes can't be placed on the same nest.
 
Available classes come from the Process Parameters spreadsheet. See Overview of class for more information.
 
Priority
Priority is used to sort parts for automatic nesting. All things being equal, parts with a priority of 1 will nest before parts with a priority of
99.
 

- 300 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Range: 1 to 99
Recommended Value: 5

Tip: A priority value of 99 is reserved for filler (A generally useful part that can be nested on any nest - as long as doing so doesn't
prevent non-filler parts from nesting. During automatic nesting, parts with a priority of 99 are used as filler parts) parts.
Filler parts are nested on a plate during automatic nesting only when:
 l At least one non-filler part has already been nested on the plate.
 l Automatic nesting has already tried to place all other parts with a priority less than 99 on the plate.

Initial rotation
A part can be rotated (counter-clockwise) by defining an initial rotation angle. This rotation will become the part's "natural" orientation.
Adjusting this value will not change the position of parts that are already nested.
 
Units: Degrees (°)
Range: 0 to 360°
Recommended Value: 0°
 
Grain restraint
This setting is commonly used with parts that have grain restrictions (they must run parallel with the grain of the material). The grain
restraint angle defines a set of valid part orientations. For example, a value of 180° will limit valid part orientations to 0° and 180°. A value
of 360° will restrict rotation completely - allowing only the part's natural orientation. A value of 0° will allow any rotation.
 
Units: Degrees (°)
Range: 0 to 360°
Recommended Value: 0°
 

Note: The grain restraint angle will not restrict parts that are rotated manually, except during smart drag with rotation. If a part is
rotated manually to an angle that violates the part's rotation restriction, ProNest will display the error message Part orientation
violates rotation restriction and will show the part in conflict.

Mirror
A part's mirror value will affect how ProNest will nest the part during automatic nesting, CLC Quad, and CLC Array.
 
Choices: Never, Always, Either
 
Never - ProNest will never mirror the part.
Always - ProNest will always mirror the part.
Either - ProNest will decide which part orientation is best: natural or mirrored.

Important: For CLC Quad to work with certain parts (triangles, parts with only one square corner) the mirror value must be set to
Either.

Prohibit filling
When selected, a part will not be allowed to have smaller parts nested inside of it. As a result, ProNest will not place parts inside the
interior profiles of the part during AutoNest. If a smaller part is manually placed inside of the part, the smaller part will appear in conflict
on the nest.
 
A part with Prohibit filling turned on has cross-hatching drawn in its interior profiles.

- 301 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Allow fly cutting

Select this setting to enable fly cutting for the part. Parts that do not have this property selected will not be fly cut.
 
AutoNest Properties
Allow pattern array
Having this setting selected means that a part can be pattern arrayed during AutoNest.
 
Allow CLC array

Having this setting selected means that a part can be CLC arrayed during AutoNest.
 
Allow leads to move
Having this setting selected means that a part's leads can be moved during AutoNest.
 
Allow dynamic align

When selected, a part can be dynamically aligned during AutoNest. Eligible parts will be common line cut or bridged, depending on the
Strategy in Dynamic Align settings page.
 
 
Other Properties
Reference
You can assign whatever type of reference to a part that you want.
 
Due date
Use the expanding calendar in this box to assign a due date to a part.
 
Customer
A customer can be assigned to a part from this box. The list of customers comes from your customer database.
 
Remarks
Any remarks for a part can be added in this field.
 
Misc 1-3
These fields can be used to add miscellaneous information about a part.
 

- 302 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

What is a PNL?
A PNL (Part Nest List) file is a tab-delimited text file (by default) containing a list of the parts used in a particular job. PNLs contain the
attributes for each part, including file name, material, thickness, required quantity, description, and other BOM information, as well as
nesting status. PNLs enable you to easily store all of the parts in your job in a single file.

Important: Parts that were created with Pipe or VSP will not be saved in the PNL.

PNL and SNL files

PNL files work in conjunction with SNL (Sheet Nest List) files. SNL files contain a list of all of the sheets (or plates) in a particular job, and
store all sheet information such as plate type, dimensions, material, thickness, weight, and required quantity. Each time a PNL is created,
a corresponding SNL of the same name is automatically created and stored with it.

Tip: You can configure ProNest to automatically save PNL and SNL files when a job is saved:
 l On the File tab, click Preferences, and then, on the General page, select the Save the part list (*.pnl) and plate list (*.snl)
with the Job box.

Using PNLs, you can:

 l Easily store parts and plates from a job
 l Open a part list and/or plate list in different jobs whenever you want
 l Transfer lists of parts between ProNest and other software applications
 l Exchange part and plate information with external manufacturing systems, such as ERP and MRP

- 303 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing/Exporting a PNL
You can easily create a new PNL in ProNest at any time using the Export PNL feature. Existing PNLs can be opened in ProNest using the
Import PNL feature.

Importing a PNL

Importing a PNL will bring the list of parts and plates into your current job.

 1. On the Home tab, click the arrow next to Edit Part List, then click Import Part List.
 2. Browse to the folder containing the PNL you want to open.
 3. Select the PNL you want to open.
 4. Click Open.
The parts and plates contained in the PNL and associated SNL will be added to your current job, appending any parts,
plates and nests that already exist in your job. Note that your job name, machine, and settings configuration will not
change.

Tip: You can also open a PNL file in ProNest using the Open dialog. This can be useful if you intend to create a new job that is built
around an existing PNL. To learn more, see "Opening jobs" on page 283.

Exporting a PNL

You can create a PNL containing all of the parts, plates and current nests in your job by exporting your parts list.

 1. On the Home tab, click the arrow next to Edit Part List, then click Export Part List.
 2. In the File name box, type a name for your PNL.
 3. Click Save.
Your part list file will be saved in the designated folder. An SNL file of the same name will also be saved in this folder.

Important: Parts that were created with Pipe or VSP will not be saved in the PNL.

When a part list is exported, ProNest will store the nesting status of all parts and plates in your job. If you have parts in your parts list that
are not yet nested and then export a PNL, ProNest will create a main PNL containing all nested and unnested parts in your job, as well as
a separate "leftover" PNL file containing only unnested parts. This "leftover" PNL file will have a name that is appended with "_lo", fol-
lowed by the .pnl extension (for example, "FileName_lo.pnl").

Advanced: You can also create a PNL manually outside of ProNest using a text editor. To learn more, see "Manually generating a PNL
(PNL file format)" on page 305.

- 304 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Manually generating a PNL (PNL file format)

PNLs and SNLs are tab-delimited (by default) ASCII text files that contain information about a particular job, including lists of parts and
sheets. Typically, these files are created in ProNest using the Export Part List feature. However, you can also create or edit a PNL outside
of ProNest using a text editor (such as Notepad) or a spreadsheet program (such as Excel).

Advanced: Manually creating a PNL or SNL is considered an advanced type of action.

PNL file format

The first line of the PNL gives general information about the job, including job description, work order name, customer, and material
thickness units. Lines two, three, and four are not used, and should be denoted with a character return. Each of the remaining n lines give
information about a part to be nested. Tabs must separate the fields on a given line (although a tab can be replaced by a different delim-
iter by adjusting the PNL Delimiter on the Miscellanous preferences page). If a text field is blank (only certain fields are allowed to be
blank), it must be represented by three spaces. All other fields must contain a valid value. A PNL file name must have the .pnl extension.
 
The following table details the file format for a PNL file:
 

Blank
Allowed?
Row/ Column Maximum (Use 3
Field Description Valid Values
Line No.   Field Size spaces
for blank
fields)
1 A Job descrip- description of the job 60 any text string yes
tion
1 B Work order name of the work order 50 any text string yes
name
1 C Customer the name of the customer for this job 50 any text string yes
1 D Material The units used to define/interpret the 1 I = inch yes
thickness material thickness. If left blank, inch is M = metric
units assumed.
2 - (not used) -- -- (character return) yes
3 - (not used) -- -- (character return) yes
4 - (not used -- -- (character return) yes
n (start- A Name the full path of the part file 259 valid path name no
ing at 5)
n B File type the type of file (no longer used). This 1 0 = token file no
should be set to 0. 1 = nc file
n C Required the number of copies of the part to nest 5 0 - 65535 no
n D Nested the number of copies of the part already 5 0 - 65535 no
  nested
n E Priority influences the order of nesting 2 0 - 99 (a priority value of 99 is no
reserved for filler parts)

- 305 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Blank
Allowed?
Row/ Column Maximum (Use 3
Field Description Valid Values
Line No.   Field Size spaces
for blank
fields)
n F Grain an angle by which to limit rotation by a 20 0.0 - 360.0 (360 will prevent rota- no
restraint multiple of (for things like grain restric- tion by any angle except the initial
tion), generally either 0 (no restriction) or orientation)
180  
n G Initial rota- the initial rotation angle of the part 20 0.0 - 360.0 no
tion
n H Units units used to define/interpret the part 1 I = inch no
M = metric
n I Mirror determines mirror state of nested copies of 1 0 = never mirrored no
option the part 1 = always mirrored
2 = either
n J Autocluster determines if part will be clustered with 1 0 = don't autocluster  
itself 1 = try to autocluster
n K Controller The name of the controller. If you are 259 valid controller name = CNC file  
importing a CNC file, it's the name of the CADFILE = CAD file
CIF. If you are importing an MTC token file, BTOKEN = MTC Token file
BTOKEN. If you are importing a CAD file,
CADFILE.
n L Inventory The inventory Part ID number (if the part is 10 0 - 4294967295 no
ID from the Part Library Database)
Zero (0) indicates a non-inventory part.
 
n M Reference the Job ID number of the part (for the His- 60 any text string yes
(Job ID) tory Database)
n N Description the description of the part 80 any text string yes
n O Auto com- determines if a part will be common line 1 0 = don't auto CLC no
mon line cut with itself 1 = try pair CLC
cut 2 = try quad CLC
3 = try both pair and quad CLC
n P Material name of the material 29 Valid material name yes
name
n Q Material thickness of the material 20 0.0 - 100.0 yes
thickness
n R Due date due date string of the part 30 any text string yes
string
n S Misc 1 miscellaneous text field 60 any text string yes
n T Misc 2 miscellaneous text field 60 any text string yes

- 306 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Blank
Allowed?
Row/ Column Maximum (Use 3
Field Description Valid Values
Line No.   Field Size spaces
for blank
fields)
n U Misc 3 miscellaneous text field 60 any text string yes
n V Auto tab determines if part will be automatically 1 0 = don't auto tab no
tabbed using auto tab settings 1 = try auto tab
n W Due date due date of the part 20 the integral part of the value is the yes
number of days that have passed
since 12/30/1899. The fractional
part of the value is the time of day,
for example:
35065.75 = 1/1/1996 6:00 p.m.
n X Customer the name of the customer for the part (this 50 any text string yes
must exactly match the name of a cus-
tomer in the database)
n Y Remarks remarks for the part 60 any text string yes
n Z Part class part class of the part (used to restrict nest- 50 any text string yes
ing and as an optional key into the process
parameters spreadsheet.
n AA CAD File If this part belongs to a multi-part CAD -- 0 = part does not belong to a no
Number drawing, it is the number of the part. multi-part CAD drawing
  Note: Any non-zero value for this field n = the number of the part in the
should be set only by ProNest when a PNL CAD drawing
is exported.
n AB Prohibit Prohibit filling for the part 1 0 = Do not prohibit filling no
filling 1 = Prohibit filling
n AC Grade Material grade 40 any text string yes
n AD Revision Part revision 20 any text string yes
n AE Allow CLC The part can be CLC arrayed during 1 0 = Do not allow CLC array during yes
Array AutoNest automatic nesting
1 = Allow CLC array during auto-
matic nesting

 
 
The text of a PNL file should be organized as follows, with tabs separating the fields in a given line:
 

  A B C D E F
1 job description work order name customer material thickness units    

- 307 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

  A B C D E F
2 (character return)          
3 (character return)          
4 (character return)          
n  name file type (not used) required nested priority (etc.)

SNL File Format

The SNL is a tab-delimited text file that contains a list of sheets. Each group of 5 lines defines a particular sheet (1n - 5n, where n is the
nth sheet). The fields on a given line must be separated by tabs (although a tab can be replaced by a different delimiter by adjusting the
PNL Delimiter on the Miscellanous preferences page). If a text field is blank (only certain fields are allowed to be blank) it must be rep-
resented by three spaces. If a blank field is the only field of a given line (2n, 3n, or 4n), no spaces should be used. All other fields must con-
tain a valid value. The SNL file name must be identical to the PNL file it is associated with and must have the .snl extension.
 
The following table details the file format for an SNL file:
 

Row/ Maximum
Column Field Description Valid Values
Line No. Field Size
1n A Type the type of sheet 1 0 = rectangle
1 = circle
2 = remnant
3 = skeleton
1n B Required the number of copies of the sheet to nest on 5 0 - 65535
1n C Nested the number of copies of the sheet already nested on 5 0 - 65535
1n D Thickness the material thickness 20 0.0 - 99.0
1n E X dimension the X dimension of the sheet 20 0.0 - 999.0
1n F Y dimension the Y dimension of the sheet 20 0.0 - 999.0
1n G Diameter the diameter of the sheet (for circular sheets) 20 0.0 - 999.0
1n H Units the units used to define/interpret the sheet 1 0 = inch 1 = met-
ric
1n I Inventory ID the inventory ID of the sheet 10 0 - 4294967295
1n J Controller the name of the controller 259 valid controller
name = CNC file
BTOKEN = MTC
token file
1n K Weight the weight of the sheet 20 0.0 - 999999.0
1n L Date the date assigned to the sheet 11 a text string in
the following
format (can be

- 308 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Row/ Maximum
Column Field Description Valid Values
Line No. Field Size
blank):
YYYYMMDD
YYYY = year MM
= month DD =
day (for example:
19961117 =
November 17,
1996)
1n M Priority influences the order of nesting 2 0 - 99
1n N Stack the number of sheets that can be stacked edge to edge for 2 1 - 99
multiple torch cutting
2n A Material the sheet material 29 any text string
(can be just a car-
riage return)
3n A Display name the name of the sheet to be used in screens, etc. 39 any text string
(can be just a car-
riage return)
4n A Sheet description a description of the sheet 79 any text string
(can be just a car-
riage return)
5n A Name the full path of the sheet file 259 valid path name
(can be blank)
5n B Initial Rotation the initial rotation angle of the sheet 20 0.0 - 360.0
5n C Grade material grade 40 any text string

 
The text of an SNL file should be organized as follows, with tabs separating the fields in a given line: 
 

  A B C D E F
1n type required nested thickness x dimension (etc.)
2n material          
3n display name          
4n sheet description          
5n name initial rotation angle grade      

- 309 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Exporting a part to DXF file

Any part in the ProNest part list can be saved as a DXF file. The DXF file will be saved according to your Export DXF settings.

Export a part to DXF file

 1. Right-click a part in the part list and click Export to DXF.
 2. Browse to a folder and enter a file name.
 3. Click Save.
-or-
 1. Bring a part into Advanced Edit.

 2. On the File menu, select Export to DXF.

 3. Browse to a folder and enter a file name.
 4. Click Save.

Export multiple parts in the part list to DXF file

 1. Open the Edit Part List window (on the Home tab, click Edit Part List ).
 2. In the Part List grid, select the parts that you want to export.
 l Hold CTRL + click to select parts individually
 l Hold SHIFT + click to select a range of parts
 l Press CTRL + A to select all parts in the part list.

 3. Right-click the selection and click Export to DXF.

 4. Browse to a folder to save the files, then click Select Folder.
A separate DXF file will be created for each part, with a file name that matches the part name in ProNest.

- 310 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About the Edit Part List window

The editing of a job's part list is done in the Edit Part List window. From this window you can build a part list for your job by importing
part source files into ProNest and adding properties to those parts.

Open the Edit Part List

 l On the Home tab, click Edit Part List.

 

The Edit Part List window

 
The Edit Part List window has menus and toolbars along the top and a status bar along the bottom.

Note: 2D CAD Program

ProNest 2019 includes a 2D CAD editor that provides all of the basic features needed to create or edit a detailed CAD drawing.

 l You can open 2D CAD at any time while using ProNest by clicking the button in the toolbar of the
Edit Part List window.

The rest of the window is split into four sections:

 
Part Sources
The upper-left contains ProNest part sources. Each part source appears as a different tab. The CAD and VSP tabs are standard part
sources. Other tabs will also appear here, depending on which modules you have purchased.

- 311 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
The following part sources are available in ProNest, either as standard features or as part of an optional module:

 l CAD

 l VSP

 l Pipe (optional module)

 l Library

 l Assemblies

 l Work Orders (optional module)

 
Part List
The lower-left contains the job’s part list. All parts that have been added will appear here. The nesting properties for each part in the part
list are displayed next to the part name. You can modify these nesting properties by clicking on a field and entering the value you want.
 
Preview
The upper-right contains a tool window called Preview. The currently selected part is displayed here. If the selected part is from one of
the part sources, then this preview is showing a pre-processed view of the selected part file. If the selected part is in the part list, then the
preview displays the part exactly as it would nest on a plate.
 
Properties
The lower-right contains a tool window called Properties. Properties for the currently selected part source file are displayed here.
Changing these values will affect the selected part and any subsequent parts that are added to the part list. If the selected part is from the
part list, however, the properties reflect the actual properties of that part only.

Tip: You can configure ProNest to open the Edit Part List window automatically when you start a new job:
 l From the main ProNest window, on the File tab, click Preferences, then on the General page under Job Preferences,
select "Automatically open the Edit Part List dialog after starting a new job".

- 312 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding parts to the part list

Generally, parts are added to the part list using the Edit Part List window.

Open the Edit Part List

 l On the Home tab, click Edit Part List.

 
When you add parts into ProNest using the Edit Part List window, you can control how properties are applied to the part. There are two
basic stages to adding parts to the part list in your job:

Stage 1: Applying part properties

This involves changing the CAD Import (for CAD files only), Nesting, and Leads properties that will be applied to the selected part source
file. These changes are made to selected parts before they are added to the part list.
 
To apply part properties:
 1. From the Edit Part List window, in the Part Sources explorer, select a part source file by clicking it once.
 2. From the Properties task pane (lower-right), using the Nesting, Leads, or CAD Import (if applicable) tabs, make any changes you
want to part properties.
If no changes are made to the properties of a selected part in the Part Sources explorer, ProNest will apply default properties from your
settings when the part is added.
 
To learn more about applying nesting and leads properties, see "Nesting properties" on page 322 and "Leads properties" on page 315.

Stage 2: Adding the part to the part list

The second stage of this procedure involves actually adding the part to the part list. Once you are satisfied with the properties applied to
part source file, you will be ready to add the part.
 
To add a selected part to the part list:
 l Click the Add Part button while a part is selected.
-or-
 l Double-click a part in the Part Sources explorer.
Added parts will appear in the Part List grid (in the lower-left of the Edit Part List window).
 
Once a part has been added to the part list, it will contain all of the information from the part source file, such as part geometry, as well as
CAD Import (for CAD files only), Nesting, and Leads properties that have been applied to the part.
 
If necessary, parts in the part list can be modified after they have been imported. Modifying parts can be done in a number of places in
the Edit Part List window, including the Preview, Part List, and the Properties panes, as well as from the main ProNest window.

Tip: You can view the part attribute, utilization, and costing information for an added part by selecting the part and then clicking the
Utilization and Costing tab in the Properties section of the Edit Part List window.

The method for adding parts differs based on the type of part source being added. To learn how to add specific types of parts to the part
list, follow the links below:

- 313 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l "Adding CAD files to the part list" on page 333

 l "Adding VSP parts" on page 383
 l "Adding a pipe part to the part list" on page 389
 l "Adding library parts to the part list" on page 390
 l "Adding assemblies to the part list" on page 391

- 314 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Leads properties
Before a part is added to the part list, it is important to specify how leads should be applied to that part source file. You can control how
leads are assigned to a part using the Leads tab.
 
To access the Leads tab:
 l From the Edit Part List window, in the Properties tool window, click the Leads tab.
When you make changes to leads properties, your changes will be applied to the selected part(s) in the Part Sources explorer, as well as
any subsequent parts that are added in the current job. You can customize the leads for as many different parts as you want.
Leads properties can be customized for each of the following categories of leads:
 l Interior Corner Leads
 l Interior Side Leads
 l Exterior Corner Leads
 l Exterior Side Leads
 
If a part doesn't have a certain category of lead (for example, a circular part doesn't have a corner lead), the leads property is ignored for
that part.
 
By default, leads properties reflect the default values specified in your ProNest settings ( ). Changing a leads property in the Edit Part
List window has no effect on the default values in your settings.
 
Use interior/exterior leads from settings
Leads will be applied using the information in your ProNest settings when importing parts.
 
Use the custom leads below
Leads will be applied using the properties specified below.

Note: The following settings are active only when Use the custom leads below is selected.

Locked
When locked, lead position on the profile (start/end point) and lead properties (style, size, angle, etc.) will not change during any manual
or automatic operation in ProNest. This includes automatic nesting, collision avoidance, manual or automatic move leads, etc.
 
Locked leads are indicated by a yellow padlock.

To lock the leads on a part:

 1. In the Edit Part List window, select an added part in the Part List grid.
 2. In the Preview, click the leads that you want to lock. You can click anywhere on the profile to select the leads.
 3. In the Properties pane, on the Leads tab, select the Locked checkbox.

- 315 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: You can also lock leads in the main nesting area in Modify Leads mode (by right-clicking) or in Advanced Edit, where you
can lock a multiple selection of leads on a part at the same time.

Lock overtravel
You can lock only the overtravel/undertravel on leads, while allowing other lead properties (placement, style, size, etc.) to change. This is
done primarily when leads use undertravel to form a tab and you want to retain that tab during automatic nesting, collision avoidance,
etc.
 
Locked overtravel is indicated with a white padlock ( ), while leads that are totally locked are marked with a yellow padlock ( ).
 
Style
The style of a lead defines its basic shape.
 
Choices for Lead In: (None), Arc, Linear, Spiral, Lock-9, Lock-7, Step, Diagonal Step, T-Lock
 
Choices for Lead Out: (None), Arc, Linear
 
To change a lead style:
 1. Click the right-hand side of the Style row (where it shows the actual style used).
 2. Click the down arrow and select a new style from the list.
 3. Click OK.

Tip: You can pin ( ) commonly used lead styles to the top of the list, for quick access.

Size
For the linear style, Size specifies the length of the lead. For the arc style, Size specifies the radius of the arc. For all other lead styles, Size
controls the scale of the lead.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.5 in. for a lead-in, 0.25 in. for a lead-out
 
Angle
For linear leads, the angle of a lead-in is defined with respect to the first motion after the lead. A 0° lead-in will lead straight into the first
cut. Positive lead-in angles are defined clockwise from the 0° position, so a 90° lead-in will cause a sharp left-turn into the first cut. Lead-
out angles are defined in a similar fashion with a 0° lead-out extending straight out of the last cut. Positive lead-out angles are defined
counter-clockwise from the 0° position, so a 90° lead-out will cause a sharp left-turn out of the last cut.
 
For arc leads, angle defines the distance the lead will extend around a circle. A 90° lead would extend one quarter of the way around,
whereas a 180° lead would extend half way around - forming a semicircle.
 
Units: Degrees
Range: -360.0 to 360.0°
Recommended Value: 0.0° for corner leads, 180.0° for a side lead-in, 90.0° for a side lead-out
 

Example:

- 316 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
The following part has two sets of leads: a pair of linear corner leads (on the exterior profile) and a pair of arc side leads (on the
interior profile).

The Angle of both corner leads is set to 0°. The side lead-in has Angle of 180°, the side lead-out has an Angle of 90°.

 
Extension
The tip of the lead-in (or lead-out) will be extended by this distance.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
 

Example:
 
The following parts have different Extension values. The arrows along the part profiles indicate cut direction.
 

Figure 1 Figure 2
   
The part displayed in Figure 1 has two exterior arc-style The part displayed in Figure 2 also has two exterior arc-style leads. The
leads. The Extension for both the lead-in and lead-out is lead-in has an Extension of 1.0 in. and the lead-out has an Extension of
0.0 in. 0.0 in. Notice that the lead-in for this part is longer than the lead-in of the
part from Figure 1.

 
Overtravel
This value applies only to the lead-out. If this value is positive (overtravel), then the torch/head will travel past the start point before cut-
ting the lead-out. If this value is negative (undertravel), then the torch/head will begin cutting the lead-out before reaching the start
point.

- 317 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Units: Distance
Range: -100.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
 

Example:
 
The following parts have different Over/Under travel values. The arrows along the part profiles indicate cut direction.

Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5

     
The part displayed in Figure 3 has two exter- The part displayed in Figure 4 also has two The part displayed in Figure 5 has two exter-
ior, arc-style leads with an Over/Under exterior, arc-style leads with a positive Over- ior, arc-style leads with a negative Over-
travel value of 0.0 in. The start point /Under travel value of 1.0 in. The distance /Under travel value of -1.0 in. This part
(where the lead-in intersects the part pro- between the start point and end point of exhibits undertravel. The lead-out occurs
file) and end point (where the lead-out this part is 1.0 in. The portion of part profile before the torch finishes cutting the entire
intersects the part profile) are the same. that is highlighted in yellow represents the profile. As a result, the part in Figure 5 will
overtravel, which will be cut twice by the be connected to the plate by a 1.0 in. wide
torch. strip of material after it is cut.

 
Quality
Assigns a quality number to leads. Assigning quality to a lead can be used to apply specific cutting parameters to that motion.

Inherit
Lead will have the same quality as the adjacent entity.

0..255
Leads will be assigned the quality number specified.
 
The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes based on the
quality number.
 
Pierce
The type of pierce at the beginning of the lead-in. Pierce styles other than Standard are used primarily for waterjet applications. For
many waterjet cutting applications, a moving pierce cuts through material more quickly than a standard pierce because the machine
motion clears the cut of the abrasive and material debris.
 
Styles: Standard, Dynamic, Circular, Wiggle, Stationary

- 318 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

By default, waterjet pierce type is applied automatically (via Process Parameters spreadsheet) based on lead length, material type and
thickness, the available space around the pierce site, and pierce duration (ProNest will try to apply the fastest pierce when possible). In
this section, pierce type can be edited manually for a lead-in.

Standard
This is the usual non-moving pierce; no special pierce type will be applied.

Dynamic pierce
For the dynamic pierce, the waterjet moves along the part lead-in at the pierce Speed for the pierce Time. When the pierce Time
elapses, the waterjet changes to the cut speed. Be sure the part has a lead-in that is long enough to allow the waterjet to pierce the
workpiece completely before changing to the cut speed.
 

 
1= Dynamic pierce starts at the beginning of the lead-in.
2= The waterjet changes to the cut speed after the Time elapses.

Editable properties include:

 l Time: Duration of the pierce
 l Speed: Feedrate to use while piercing

Circle pierce
A circular pierce may take longer than a dynamic or wiggle pierce but not as long as a stationary pierce. Use the circular pierce for
small internal features.
 
For the circular pierce, the waterjet moves at the pierce Speed for the pierce Time in a circular motion. The pierce Displacement is
the diameter of the pierce circle. The circle diameter depends in part on the size nozzle being used.
 

Circular pierce geometry is shown in blue

 
1= Circular pierce starts at the beginning of the lead-in, travels to the edge of the pierce circle
2= It travels around the pierce circle until the specified Time elapses.
3= When the pierce time has elapsed, the waterjet returns to the center point.
4= It then cuts the lead-in at the full cut speed.

- 319 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Editable properties include:

 l Time: Duration of the pierce
 l Displacement: Diameter of the pierce circle
 l Speed: Feedrate to use while piercing

Wiggle pierce
For the wiggle pierce, the waterjet moves back and forth over a linear segment for the pierce Time at the pierce Speed. The pierce
Displacement defines the length of the segment. On linear lead-ins, the wiggle segment follows the path of the lead. On arc lead-
ins, the segment is tangent to the lead. When the pierce Time elapses, the waterjet returns to the beginning of the pierce, then
changes to the Cut Speed.
 

1 = Pierce starts at the beginning of the lead-in, then makes a linear motion for the Displacement length, then cuts
back and forth over the wiggle pierce segment.
2 = When the pierce time has elapsed, the waterjet returns to the initial point and cuts the lead-in at the normal cut
speed.

Use the wiggle pierce for narrow features such as slots, closely nested parts, or when space constraints prevent the use of a circular
or dynamic pierce. Use a wiggle pierce for thicker materials where a dynamic pierce may become too long and interfere with internal
features.
 
Editable properties include:
 l Time: Duration of the pierce
 l Displacement: Length of the linear wiggle pierce segment
 l Speed: Feedrate to use while piercing

Stationary pierce
For the stationary pierce, the waterjet stays at the pierce point until the pierce Time elapses. Use the stationary pierce on thinner
materials or small internal part features.
 
Editable properties include:
 l Time: Duration of the pierce

Note:  l For Hypertherm setups, the pierce information is included in output code as special controller codes. For other
setups, the actual pierce motions are included in code.
 l If Wiggle pierce is specified but is too large and would conflict with part geometry, it will be replaced with a
smaller Circular pierce.
 l If Circular pierce is specified but is too large, it will be replaced with a Stationary pierce.

Tip: Clicking Reset with defaults from settings at the bottom of the Leads tab will reset all of the leads properties with the default
values from your ProNest settings.

- 320 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Once a part has been added to the part list, the contents of the Leads tab will appear inactive when the added part is selected. However,

you can still make changes to the leads of an added part using the Modify Leads button in the Preview (which reactivates the Leads
tab for the selected part), Advanced Edit, or from the main ProNest window.

- 321 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Nesting properties
When parts are added to the part list, they are assigned nesting properties like quantity and priority. Nesting properties can be assigned
to parts using the Nesting tab.
 
To access the Nesting tab:
 l From the Edit Part List window, in the Properties pane, click the Nesting tab.
When you make changes to nesting properties, your changes will be applied to the selected part(s) in the Part Sources explorer, as well as
any subsequent parts that are added in the current job. You can customize the nesting properties for as many different parts as you want.
 
By default, nesting properties reflect the default values specified in your settings. Changing nesting properties in the Edit Part List will
have no effect on the default values in your settings ( ).
 
Quantity
Required
This defines the quantity of the selected part.
 
Range: 1 to 10,000
 
Attributes
Name
The name of the selected part can be modified in this box.

Note: The Allow parts in the Part List to be renamed preference (File > Preferences > General tab) must be selected in order to edit a
part name.

Revision
The revision of the selected part can be edited in this box. Revision can be used to keep track of different versions of a part.
 
File name
The full path of the part's source file.
 
If the part was loaded from a part file token, this will be indicated by a icon.
 
Material
This defines the material of the selected part.

Note: When spreadsheets are used, the list of available materials comes from the materials found in your Process Parameters spread-
sheet. When spreadsheets are not used, the list of available materials comes from your material database.

Class
The class of the selected part. Class can be used to organize your materials using specialized information such as cutting gas or amper-
age. Parts with the different classes can't be placed on the same nest.
 
Available classes come from the Process Parameters spreadsheet. See Overview of class for more information.

- 322 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Setting a default class

You can set a default class value for a given material type and thickness:
 1. Select a material type and thickness in the Properties: Nesting pane on the Edit Part List window.
 2. Select the class that you want to use as the default for that type and thickness.
 3. Right-click the class value and select Make [class] my default class for [material.]
The next time that material is selected, the default class will automatically be selected as well.
 
Initial rotation
A part can be rotated (counter-clockwise) when it is added to the part list by defining an initial rotation angle. This rotation will become
the part's "natural" orientation.
 
Units: Degrees (°)
Range: 0 to 360°
Recommended Value: 0°
 
Grain restraint
When editing your part list, you can specify a rotation restriction that will be used when importing parts.
 
Units: Degrees (°)
Range: 0 to 360°
Recommended Value: 0°
 
This setting is commonly used with parts that have grain restrictions (they must run parallel with the grain of the material). The grain
restraint angle defines a set of valid part orientations. For example, a value of 180° will limit valid part orientations to 0° and 180°. A value
of 360° will restrict rotation completely - allowing only the part's natural orientation. A value of 0° will allow any rotation.

Note: The grain restraint angle will not restrict parts that are rotated manually, except during smart drag with rotation. If a part is
rotated manually to an angle that violates the part's rotation restriction, ProNest will display the error message Part orientation
violates rotation restriction and will show the part in conflict.

Priority
Priority is used to sort parts for automatic nesting. All things being equal, parts with a priority of 1 will nest before parts with a priority of
99.
 
Range: 1 to 99
Recommended Value: 5

Tip: A priority value of 99 is reserved for filler (A generally useful part that can be nested on any nest - as long as doing so doesn't
prevent non-filler parts from nesting. During automatic nesting, parts with a priority of 99 are used as filler parts) parts.
Filler parts are nested on a plate during automatic nesting only when:
 l At least one non-filler part has already been nested on the plate.
 l Automatic nesting has already tried to place all other parts with a priority less than 99 on the plate.

Mirror
A part's mirror value will affect how ProNest will nest the part during automatic nesting, CLC Quad, and CLC Array. When editing your
part list, you can specify a mirror value that will be used when importing parts.

- 323 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Choices: Never, Always, Either
 
Never - ProNest will never mirror the part.
Always - ProNest will always mirror the part.
Either - ProNest will decide which part orientation is best: natural or mirrored.

Important: For CLC Quad to work with certain parts (triangles, parts with only one square corner) the mirror value must be set to
Either.

Prohibit filling
When selected, a part will not be allowed to have smaller parts nested inside of it. As a result, ProNest will not place parts inside the
interior profiles of the part during AutoNest. If a smaller part is manually placed inside of the part, the smaller part will appear in conflict
on the nest.
 
A part with Prohibit filling turned on has cross-hatching drawn in its interior profiles.

 
Cluster
ProNest will automatically build clusters of parts that have this property selected.
 
Fit ratio
This ratio defines the cutoff for desirable clusters created automatically for parts with their Cluster property selected. The main reason to
create a cluster is because it uses less space than two of that part placed next to each other. The space used by two parts placed next to
each other is used as the 'benchmark'. An improvement is defined as follows:
 
Improvement = Space used by the cluster / Space used by two parts
 
If the improvement is better (less) than the fit ratio, then the cluster is added to the Part List as a custom part.
 
Units: Percentage
Range: 50 to 100%
Recommended Value: 90%
 
Common line cutting

ProNest will automatically build CLC clusters of parts that have this property set to anything other than (None).
 
Choices: (None), Pair, Quad, Both
 
(None) - CLC clusters will not be built for the part.
Pair - If possible, a pair CLC cluster (2 parts) will be built for the part.
Quad - If possible, a quad CLC cluster (4 parts) will be built for the part.
Both - If possible, will build a pair and a quad CLC cluster.

- 324 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Allow fly cutting
Select this setting to enable fly cutting for the part. Parts that do not have this property selected will not be fly cut.
 
 
AutoNest Properties
Allow pattern array
Having this setting selected means that a part can be pattern arrayed during AutoNest.
 
Allow CLC array

Having this setting selected means that a part can be CLC arrayed during AutoNest.
 
Allow leads to move
Having this setting selected means that a part's leads can be moved during AutoNest.
 
Allow dynamic align

When selected, a part can be dynamically aligned during AutoNest. Eligible parts will be common line cut or bridged, depending on the
Strategy in Dynamic Align settings page.
 
 
Import Actions
Retain all existing leads
When the part is imported, this setting will control whether or not the part's existing leads will be removed and replaced. Select this set-
ting to keep any existing leads where they are. Profiles that do not have leads will still have leads applied.

Note: If you are importing a CAD file with existing leads, you must also select the User drawn leads setting (on the CAD Import tab).

Add tabs
Select this setting to AutoTab a part as it's imported. AutoTab will be applied to the part, based on your AutoTab settings.
 
Slug destroy
Select this setting to automatically apply slug destroy to a part as it's imported. Slug destroy will be applied to the interior profiles of the
part, based on your Slug Destroy settings.
 
 
Other Properties
Reference
You can assign whatever type of reference to a part that you want.
 
Due date
Use the expanding calendar in this box to assign a due date to a part.
 
Customer
A customer can be assigned to a part from this box. The list of customers comes from your customer database.

- 325 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Remarks
Any remarks for a part can be added in this field.
 
Misc 1-3
These fields can be used to add miscellaneous information about a part.
 

Tip: Clicking Reset with defaults from settings at the bottom of the Properties pane will reset all of the properties on that tab with
the default values from your ProNest settings.

Once a part has been added to the part list, you can modify the nesting properties for that part from the Part List grid in the lower-left of
the Edit Part List.
 

Part List Key

Warning

Initial Rotation (°)

Grain Restraint (°)

Mirror

Cluster

Common Line Cutting

Allow leads to move

Allow pattern array

Prohibit filling

Loaded from token file

- 326 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Utilization and costing properties

This shows dimension, utilization, and costing figures for the selected part(s) in the part list.

Attributes
Length
The length of the selected part, measured horizontally along the X-axis. This includes leads and extensions.
 

Width
The width of the selected part, measured vertically along the Y-axis. This includes leads and extensions.
 

Cut length
The length of all of that part's profiles that will be cut. This includes leads and extensions.
 

Utilization
True area
The 2-D surface area of the part. If a part has an interior profile, the surface area of the cut-out will not be considered a portion of that
part.
 

- 327 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
True weight
The mass of the part. This is calculated using density (from Material Database), true area, and material thickness.
 
Rectangular area
The minimum rectangular space that a part occupies (including cut-outs, part leads, and lead extensions)
 

 
Rectangular weight
The mass of the part, including all material within the minimum rectangular space. This is calculated using density (from Material Data-
base), rectangular area, and material thickness.
 

Costing
Production time
The process production time for all processes used to produce the selected part. Refer to "How is production time calculated?" on page
591 for more information.
 
Production cost
Production cost of the selected part. Refer to "How are costs calculated?" on page 584 for more information.
 
Material cost
Material cost of the selected part. Refer to "How are costs calculated?" on page 584 for more information.
 
Total cost
Total cost (Material cost + Production cost) of the selected part. Refer to "How are costs calculated?" on page 584 for more information.
 

- 328 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Preview
You can look at a preview of a selected part in the upper left section of Edit Part List window. After a selected part has been added to the
part list, you can use the Preview window to edit the part.
 

Preview button Description

Select Mode After a part has been added to the part list, you can select cutting
profiles and review or change the lead-in/out properties for that
profile.

Modify Leads You can select new locations for the lead in/out positions for your
part by simply clicking on a new location. This button will be inact-
ive until a part is added to the part list.

Zoom Window You can zoom in on an area of your part by dragging a box
around the area you want to view. Right-click to return to select
mode.

Zoom In Zooms in to next magnification level

Zoom Out Zooms out to next magnification level

Zoom Extents Returns to the full view of the part

Maximize Opens a maximized view of the part

CAD Cleanup (2D CAD) Opens the 2D CAD program in Cleanup mode, where the selected
CAD file can be modified. This is available before a part is added to
the part list.
 
To learn more, see "CAD Cleanup - 2D CAD" on page 359.

CAD Cleanup (Simple) Opens CAD Cleanup, you can make changes to CAD layers before
CAD files are added to the part list. This can be useful if you have
CAD files with duplicate or incorrectly named layers and want to
quickly clean up these files without using an external CAD editor.
 
To learn more, see "CAD Cleanup - Simple" on page 356.

Advanced Edit Opens Advanced Edit, where you can modify part properties. This
button will be inactive until a part is added to the part list.
 
To learn more, see "About Advanced Edit" on page 411.

- 329 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Notice that when you select a part in the Part Sources section, the preview will display a pre-processed view of the part. Leads or part
properties are not yet applied to the part. However, after a part has been added to the part list, the preview will display a processed view
of that part (which will include leads).

Tip: While in Select Mode, you can using your mouse wheel to zoom in or out on a part in the Preview window.

- 330 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About CAD files

In the Edit Part List window, CAD files can be accessed through the Part Sources explorer.
 

Part Sources explorer

 
The CAD tab works like Windows Explorer, allowing you to browse the folders and files on your system. Use the Look in box to help nav-
igate to the folder containing the CAD files you want to add. You can use Favorites ( ) to create a list of frequently used folders that
contain CAD files. Clicking Recent Folders ( ) will display a list of recently accessed folders for CAD source files.

Files of type

You can use the Files of type box to filter for specific file types. The selection in this box will filter the contents of the current folder, only
showing the files that match. Selecting All files (*.*) will display all file types in the selected folder. By default the Files of type box will be
set to AutoCAD files (*.dwg; *.dxf).
 
The following types of CAD files can be added to the part list in ProNest:
 l AutoCAD files (.dwg; .dxf)
 l FastCAM files (.cam)
 l IGES files (.igs; .iges)
 l EPS files (.eps)
(Vector format only)
 l DGN files (.dgn)
 l DSTV files (.nc; .nc1)
 l Raster image files (.bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, .gif, .png)
 l Token files (.tok)
 l Pro/Engineer files
(Pro/Engineer™ Interface module required. Note that files in .prtt or .asm format cannot be imported directly into ProNest. The
Pro/E interface can be used to create a .dwg file in Pro/E that can be imported into ProNest. )
 l Autodesk Inventor files (.iam; .ipt)
(Inventor™ Interface module required)
 l SolidWorks files (.sldprt; .sldasm)

- 331 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

(Solidworks® Interface module required)

 l Solid Edge files (.par; .asm)
(Solid Edge® Interface module required)

Filter

You can use the Filter box to filter the contents of the current folder by CAD file name. When text is entered into the Filter box, CAD file
names that contain some or all of the entered text will be shown, all others will be hidden.

- 332 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding CAD files to the part list

CAD files are added to the part list similarly to other files, except that CAD Import properties are applied along with Nesting and Leads
properties before CAD files are imported. Adding CAD files is a multi-stage process, as detailed below:

Stage 1: Selecting a CAD file

First, you will need to find and select your CAD file:
 1. Open the Edit Part List window.
 2. Browse to the folder containing your CAD file.
 3. Using the Files of Type box, select the type of CAD file that you will be importing.
 4. Click the CAD file once to select it.
Once selected, you will be ready to apply part properties.

Tip: You can select multiple CAD files in the Part Sources explorer by holding the SHIFT key and clicking part names. This can be use-
ful if you want to apply custom properties to a group of parts before they are added.

Stage 2: Applying CAD Import properties

Once a CAD file is selected in the Part Sources explorer, you can begin applying CAD Import properties to the file. With your CAD file
selected:
 1. In the Properties pane, select the CAD Import tab.
 2. Assign general CAD Import properties to your part.
 3. Map CAD layers to available processes. This will tell ProNest to associate an available process with a given layer found in the CAD
file.
 4. Assign other CAD Import properties to your part, as necessary.

Stage 3: Applying Nesting and Leads properties

After CAD Import properties and process layer mappings have been assigned, you will be ready to assign Nesting and Leads properties:
 1. In the Properties pane, select the Nesting tab.
 2. Assign a part quantity.
 3. Set the Material type and thickness for the part.
 4. Set any other Nesting properties for the part, as needed.
 5. Select the Leads tab.
 6. If you want to assign leads that differ from the default interior/exterior leads in your settings, you can do so here.

Note: Nesting and Leads properties can also be edited after a part has been added to the part list.

Stage 4: Adding the part to the part list

With CAD Import, Nesting, and Leads properties assigned to your CAD file, you will be ready to add the part to the part list:
 l With the part selected, click Add Part.

- 333 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Your part will be added to the part list. You can still modify nesting or leads for your part or bring the part into Advanced Edit to make fur-
ther changes.

- 334 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CAD Import properties

Before CAD files are added to the part list, CAD Import properties for that file should be assigned. This will ensure that drawing details are
properly processed as they are brought into ProNest. The changes you make to CAD Import properties will apply to the currently selected
CAD file, as well as any subsequent parts that are added to the part list in your job.
 
CAD Import properties are listed on the CAD Import tab in the Edit Part List window. By default, they will reflect the default values spe-
cified in your settings. Changing a property value in the Edit Part List window has no effect on the setting that provides its default value.

General
File type
This is the type of file that you are importing.
  
Choices: CAD File, Raster Image File, CNC File, Token File
 

Advanced:  Importing CNC Files

 
You can add computer numerically controlled (CNC) files to ProNest using the Edit Part List. During this process, CNC files
are reverse-engineered (decoded) from controller instructions to part geometry. You must assign the correct CIF in order
to generate accurate part geometry.

To add a CNC File to the part list:

 1. In the part source explorer, browse to the folder containing the CNC file you wish to open. Make sure that the Files
of Type filter is set to All files (*.*).
 2. Select the CNC file you want to add by clicking it once.
 3. From the CAD Import tab in the Properties section, set File type to CNC file.
 4. In the CIF box, select the applicable CNC decoder.
 5. Select the File units that were used when the CNC file was saved.
 6. Click the Add Part button.

File units
This is used when importing CAD or CNC files. The file itself was saved using a particular length unit. The value of this property should
match with the length unit that most of your files are saved with.
 
Choices: Inch (in.), Millimeter (mm)
 
Drawing scale
Used for CAD files and raster images. A part can be scaled as it is imported into ProNest.
 
Units: Percentage (%)
Range: 0.1 to 1,000,000%
Recommended Value: 100%
 
To edit the drawing scale:
 l Type a value in the box.
 l Select the Drawing Scale box and click the down arrow.
 

- 335 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

When editing the drawing scale, the scale editor will appear:
 

 
In the editor, you can enter a scale directly in the Scale box.
 
You can also specify a scale by defining the ratio between a length in the drawing and the corresponding imported length.
 

Example:
 
In this example, most CAD files in our CAD folder must be scaled as they are imported into ProNest. For whatever reason, a length of
2.5 in. in each drawing should be imported as 10 in.
 
In the scale editor:
 1. Type 2.5 in the Drawing box.
 2. Type 10 in the Imported box.
As values are typed in each box, the value in the Scale box will update to match the ratio implied by the Drawing and Imported val-
ues. When complete, the Scale box will contain the value: 400%. Click OK and the Drawing scale field will contain 400%. Now when
your CAD part is imported, it will be scaled to 400% of their actual size in the drawing.

 
Open profile tolerance
This setting specifies the maximum distance allowed for joining line and arc entities. In other words, if Open profile tolerance is set to
0.005 in., gaps that are 0.005 in. or smaller will be closed - helping to prevent open profiles.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.001 to 1.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.005 in.

Raster to Vector
When a raster image file is selected in the Part Sources pane, the following import settings will become available:
 
Preview raster image
Select this box to view the source raster image in the Preview pane. Clear the box to view the processed vector version of the image.
 
Auto threshold
When an image is vectorized, it is first converted to black and white (1-bit image). The lines that remain are then traced into vectors,
which become the edges of the part. Threshold controls how the original image is transformed into black and white. Ultimately, this

- 336 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

affects how edges are formed for the vector part.

 
When Auto threshold is selected, ProNest will attempt to automatically find a good value.

Threshold
If Auto threshold doesn't yield good results, you can manually adjust the threshold by selecting a number from 0 to 255.
 
Straighten
An averaging routine that straightens profiles in the drawing. Selecting zero will produce profile that looks pixelated, with no straight-
ening. Higher numbers will result in straighter lines, but less definition.
 
Range: 0 to 15
Recommended value: 1 or 2

Trace type
This value should be set depending on how the image is drawn.
 
Choices: Outline, Center Line

For line drawings, select Center Line:

 
For filled images, select Outline:

 
Recognize circles
Attempt to detect arc shapes in the image and convert to arc entities during import:

- 337 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
When cleared, all shapes in the image will be imported as line entities only:

Angle adjust
For lines that are almost square with the rectangular edges of the image file, selecting this setting can align them to be parallel with the
edges.
 
Part length / Part width
The best way to adjust the final part size is by using scale in ProNest and not by adjusting the source image. As a rule, with the Draw-
ing scale set to 100% in ProNest, 1 pixel in the drawing = 1 inch in ProNest.
 
Use Part length and Part width properties to scale images to the finished size you want. This sets the size of the bounding rectangle
around the part.

1 = Part length
2 = Part width
 
The aspect ratio is automatically maintained, so that the image is not distorted. This means that when you type a value in one box, the
other value will automatically be updated.

Note: Drawing scale will automatically be updated based on this value.

CAD Layers
When importing CAD files, you must make sure that drawing layers or colors in the CAD file are assigned to available processes used by
your machine. Typically, each layer name in a CAD file defines a different attribute, such as profiles for cutting, scribing, punching, or
dimension information. Using layers in this way allows ProNest to distinguish between the different aspects of a drawing when the part is
added. When adding parts, assigning layers to the proper machine processes is critical to creating correct output.
 
Cut all layers with [Cut Process]
This setting is automatically named according to the cut process used by the machine. For example, if the cut process was called
"Plasma", then this setting would appear as "Cut all layers with [Plasma]".Select this check box if all layers found in a CAD file should be
cut by the process shown. Most applications will require that this checkbox be cleared.
 
Cut - [Cut Process]

- 338 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to a particular cut process. Each cut process supported by the machine will have its own
setting.
 
If a CAD file is selected in the Part Sources section, when you click the down-arrow ( ) in right column of this setting, a list of CAD layer
names will appear. If a layer name is found in the selected CAD file it will have a small image of a part next it ( ). If a layer name is
defined as a default layer in your settings it will have a small settings image next to it ( ).
 

Example 1:
 
If a machine supported both a Gas and a Plasma process, then there would be two rows here:
Cut - [Gas]
Cut - [Plasma]
 
Example 2:
 
If your machine supported a cut process called "Gas" and you wanted to assign "0" and "CUT" CAD layers to that process, you would
enter:
 

Cut - [Gas] 0;CUT

When a CAD file is imported, all geometry on the "0" and "CUT" layers would be mapped to the machine's "Gas" process.

 
Scribe - [Scribe Process]
Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to a particular scribe process. Each scribe process supported by the machine will have its
own setting.
 
If a CAD file is selected in the Part Sources section, when you click the down-arrow ( ) in right column of this setting, a list of CAD layer
names will appear. If a layer name is found in the selected CAD file it will have a small image of a part next it ( ). If a layer name is
defined as a default layer in the your settings it will have a small settings image next to it ( ).
 

Example:
 
If a machine supported a single scribe process called "Scribe-G", then there would be one row here:
Scribe - [Scribe-G]

 
Punch - [Punch Process]
Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to a particular punch process. Each punch process supported by the machine will have its
own setting.
 
If a CAD file is selected in the Part Sources section, when you click the down-arrow ( ) in right column of this setting, a list of CAD layer
names will appear. If a layer name is found in the selected CAD file it will have a small image of a part next it ( ). If a layer name is
defined as a default layer in the your settings it will have a small settings image next to it ( ).
 

- 339 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:
 
If a machine supported a single punch process called "MyPunch", then there would be one row here:
Punch - [MyPunch]

 
Turret
Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to the machine's turret process
 
Display Only
Defines the CAD layers that should be displayed in ProNest, but should not be cut.
 
BOM
Defines the CAD layers that contain BOM information
 
Map to CAD color numbers
Select this setting to allow importing parts by CAD color number instead of by layer name.
 

Example:
 
A part file defines a part in one layer: "CUT". The part is a simple rectangle with a hole in it. The exterior profile of the part has a color
number of 1, but the interior hole has a color number of 2.
 
If Map to CAD color numbers is cleared, then a cut process must be mapped to "CUT" in order to import the part properly. Importing
the part in this way will cause the same cut process to cut both the interior and exterior profiles.
 
If Map to CAD color numbers is selected, then one cut process must be mapped to "1" and another (or the same) cut process must
also be mapped to "2". Importing the part in this way can result in one process handling the exterior profile while another process
handles the interior profile.

Note:  l If you have more than one CAD layer for a single process, separate the layers with a semicolon (;) and do not include a
space (for example, "0;CUT").
 l Process-layer mapping can also be done using the CAD Cleanup feature.

Cut Sequence
Strategy
This defines the method used to create the part's interior cut sequence.

Lead to Lead
The next profile to be sequenced will be the one whose start point is closest to the end point of the current profile.

Center to Center
The next profile to be sequenced will be the one whose center point is closest to the center point of the current profile. 

Vertical

- 340 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Interior profiles will be sequenced in a generally upward (or downward) direction.

Horizontal
Interior profiles will be sequenced in a generally left to right (or right to left) direction. 

Find Best
Selecting this option will try all strategies (except Heat Dissipation) and use the optimal result for cut sequencing.

Heat Dissipation
Creating a cut sequence by heat dissipation will distribute the heat input across the part to avoid overheating. This usually results in a
randomized cut sequence.

Options
Leads origin
This determines where the origin of the lead-in/out of the part is, in relation to the drawing being processed. This applies to both interior
and exterior leads.
 
Choices: Lower-Left, Upper-Left, Upper-Right, Lower-Right, Left, Top, Right, Bottom
 

Upper Left Upper Right Lower Right Lower Left

Top Right Bottom Left

Punch/Scribe first
If selected, the machine will complete all punching and scribing on the part before any cutting is done. If you are cutting with under-
water plasma,you should select this option. Normally, when processing very light metal, "Punch/Scribe first" should not be selected to
avoid problems with metal movement.
 
Reverse direction and kerf
Select this to import parts with a reversed cut direction. Interior profiles will be cut clockwise and exterior profiles will be cut counter-
clockwise. Right-handed kerf compensation is also used.
 
Delete overlapped entities
When this setting is selected, duplicate or coincident entities (lines or arcs) are automatically deleted as the part is imported.
 
Contains multiple parts
If there is more than one part in your drawing, select this setting.
 
Explode multiple parts
Select this setting if there is more than one part on your drawing and you want to separate them as they are imported.

- 341 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: This setting is active only when Contains multiple parts is selected.

User drawn leads

Select this setting if your part was drawn with its own leads. If this setting is cleared, leads will be added to the part.

Note: To import user-drawn leads, you must also have the Retain existing leads setting selected (on the Nesting tab). Refer to Import-
ing a part with pre-drawn leads for more information.

Quality
Attaches a quality value to every entity.

(None)
Quality values will not be attached to any entity in the part.

Use CAD Colors

Each entity's color number (from the CAD drawing) will be used as the entity's quality number.

0 - 255
All entities will be assigned the same quality value.

Advanced: The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes
based on the quality number.

Smooth entities
Select this setting to convert curves made from line segments (approximated curves) into true arcs whenever possible.
 
Smooth tolerance
When converting a set of line segments into a curve, it is important to define how accurate the curve must be. The Smooth tolerance
value specifies a maximum distance from the approximated curve in which an arc can be formed. A large tolerance will likely cause more
smoothing to occur at the expense of a less accurate curve.
 
This tolerance value is opposite, but similar, to Arc radius tolerance found on the Importing Parts (Advanced) settings page.
 

SOLIDWORKS
Configuration name
In SOLIDWORKS, configurations allow you to create multiple variations of a part or assembly model within a single document. Con-
figurations provide a convenient way to develop and manage families of models with different dimensions, components, or other para-
meters.
 
This property can be used to specify a configuration to use when importing a SOLIDWORKS part or assembly.
 l For parts (.sldprt), the configuration name entered here will be used when that part is imported.
 l For assemblies, unless otherwise specified in the assembly explorer, the configuration name entered here will be used for the
assembly and all sub-parts.
If this configuration can't be found in a part or assembly or it is left blank, the default configuration in the assembly or part file will be
used instead.
 

- 342 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

To bring in a specific configuration of a single SOLIDWORKS part:

 1. Type in a configuration name in this box.
 2. Click the SOLIDWORKS part in the Part Sources explorer. A preview of the part in the specified configuration will appear in the Pre-
view.
 3. Click Add Part.
 

- 343 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About part token files

When a CAD file is imported, information and geometry in the drawing is processed and temporarily stored in a format that is usable by
ProNest. This processing can take some time depending on the complexity of the drawing. To improve the speed of importing CAD files,
you can choose to permanently save these ProNest token files (the "processed" versions of the CAD files) and use them whenever the
CAD drawings are imported in the future.

Enable saving of part tokens

 1. Open the Importing Parts (Advanced) settings page (Settings > Importing Parts > Importing Parts (Advanced)).
 2. Select Save part file tokens.
 3. Click Save.
When "Save part file tokens" is enabled, ProNest will create a token file (.tok) as each CAD file is processed. The token file will be saved in
the same location as the CAD file and will have the same file name, except with a .tok extension.

How does this impact importing CAD files?

When the "Save part file tokens" is enabled, the next time the CAD file is imported, ProNest will search for its matching token file. If the
CAD file hasn't been modified since the token file was created, ProNest will import from the token file - saving on processing time. Other-
wise, the CAD file will be processed and a new token file will be saved.
 
In the Edit Part List window, CAD files that have associated token files are displayed differently than other CAD files.
 
 l When the CAD file is selected in the Part Sources explorer, a File selection includes part file tokens message appears in the Prop-
erties pane, indicating that the CAD file has an associated token file. When the part is added, the token file will be used instead of
the CAD file (as long as it is more recent than the CAD file).
 l If "Save part file tokens" is enabled and no message appears when the part is selected, this indicates that either the CAD file has
no associated token file or the CAD file is newer than the associated token file. In either of these cases, the CAD file will be impor-
ted and a new token file will be created.

Overriding use of the token file

You can force ProNest to import from the CAD file, even though there is a more recent associated token file available. To import from the
CAD file:
 1. In the Part Sources area, on the CAD tab, select the CAD file by clicking it once.

 2. Below the Preview, click the File selection includes part file tokens message.
 3. Select Use CAD file.
 4. Click Add Part.
The part will be imported from the CAD file and not the token file.
 
Of course, you can always turn off "Save part file tokens" setting to disable this behavior entirely and always import from the CAD file.

- 344 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Reloading parts
Using Reload, you can re-import any part from its source CAD file. This can be useful if you have updated a CAD file outside of ProNest
and want the updates to be carried over into a ProNest job.
 
Reloading a part is available only for CAD files - not VSP or Pipe parts.

Reload a part

 1. Right-click the part in the part list.

 2. Select Reload.
 3. Select either Modify Leads or Preserve Leads.
Modify Leads: Removes current leads from the part and reapplies them based on your ProNest settings.
Preserve Leads: Will keep the existing leads in place.
 
When a part is reloaded, the source CAD file is imported into ProNest again using the same CAD Import and Nesting properties (material,
quantity, etc.) that the part was originally imported with.

Notes:  l Reloading nested parts is allowable, but may result in conflicts on the nest if the leads or part geometry have
changed.
 l Parts cannot be reloaded if they have been common line cut, bridged, or chained together with other parts.
 l If any changes were made to the part in Advanced Edit (such as added tabs, loops, scribe text, etc.) those changes
will be lost when the part is reloaded.

Automatically reload modified parts when a job is opened

You can also configure ProNest to automatically reload all modified parts in a job:
 1. On the File menu, select Preferences.
 2. On the General tab, select When opening jobs, detect modified part files and reload them.
If part source files have been changed outside of ProNest, when the job is opened those parts will be reloaded. Certain conditions apply
when using this preference. To learn more, refer to "General preferences" on page 250.

- 345 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Bill of Materials (BOM)

The Bill of Material (BOM) layer of a CAD file is an optional drawing layer used to specify part information like material, grade, thickness,
and quantity. The BOM layer is added to a CAD file using CAD software and cannot be added using ProNest. If you include BOM inform-
ation in a CAD file, ProNest will automatically utilize that information as the part is added to your part list.
 
BOM information must be in the form of text entities on the BOM layer and must contain specific keywords to specify the part properties.
Keywords are case sensitive and the spelling must match exactly. Do not include spaces between the keyword and the equals sign (=) or
between the equals sign (=) and the property value.

Note: When importing a CAD file with a BOM layer, ProNest will search for the keywords MATERIAL, THICKNESS, CLASS, and
CUSTOMER in the Material and Customer databases. If there is no match found, the keys will be ignored.

Keyword Description Type

QUANTITY Quantity Integer (range: 0 - 9999)

PART_NAME Part name String (40 characters maximum)

MATERIAL Material String (40 characters maximum)

PART_CLASS Class String (50 characters maximum)

THICKNESS Thickness Float (range: 0 - 9999)

Must be ±0.001 in. (±0.0254
mm) of the listed ProNest
thickness.

GRADE Material Grade String (40 characters maximum)

INIT_ROTATION Initial Rotation Float (range: 0 - 360)

ROTATION Rotation Float (range: 0 - 360)

PRIORITY Priority Integer (range: 0 - 99)

MIRROR Mirror Integer (range: 0 - 2)

0 = never mirrored
1 = always mirrored
2 = either

CLUSTER Auto Cluster Integer (range: 0 or 1)

0 = don't autocluster
1 = try to autocluster

CLC Auto Common Line Integer (range: 0, 1, 2, 3)

0=Do not Auto CLC
1=CLC Pair
2=Quad CLC
3= Both Pair & Quad CLC

REFERENCE Reference String (60 characters maximum)

- 346 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Keyword Description Type

CUSTOMER Customer String (50 characters maximum)

REMARKS Remarks String (60 characters maximum)

MISC1 Miscellaneous 1 String (60 characters maximum)

MISC2 Miscellaneous 2 String (60 characters maximum)

MISC3 Miscellaneous 3 String (60 characters maximum)

PROHIBIT_FILLING Prohibit filling Integer (range: 0 or 1)

0=Do not prohibit filling
1=Prohibit filling

REVISION Revision String (30 characters maximum)

CLCARRAY Allow CLC Array during Integer (range: 0 or 1)

AutoNest 0=Do not allow
1=Allow

 
The keywords in a BOM layer match the part property fields in the Part List section of the Edit Part List window. When a CAD file with a
BOM layer is imported into ProNest, those part property fields will automatically be filled with the values found in the BOM for that part.
 

Example:
 
The following table displays BOM keywords with sample property values.
 

BOM Layer Information Result

(KEYWORD=Value)  

QUANTITY=12 12

PART_NAME=My Part My Part

MATERIAL=SS SS

PART_CLASS=O2 300 AMP O2 300 AMP

THICKNESS=0.250 0.250

GRADE=304 304

INIT_ROTATION=0.0 0.0

ROTATION=90.0 90.0

PRIORITY=7 7

- 347 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

BOM Layer Information Result

(KEYWORD=Value)  

MIRROR=0 NO

CLUSTER=0 NO

CLC=1 YES (CLC Pair)

REFERENCE=45678 45678

CUSTOMER=Acme Co. Acme Co.

REMARKS=My Remarks My Remarks

MISC1=Notes 1 Notes 1

MISC2=Notes 2 Notes 2

MISC3=Notes 3 Notes 3

PROHIBIT_FILLING=0 NO

REVISION=A A

CLCARRAY=1 YES

Note:  l If you are importing a PNL file that references a CAD file with a BOM layer, the BOM information will take precedence
over the part information in the PNL.
 l You can import a multi-part drawing with BOM information, as long as each part has BOM information. The origin of
each text block must be located within the exterior profile of part.

Mapping the BOM layer in ProNest

Once you have CAD files set up with BOM information on a dedicated BOM layer, you will need to map the layer name to the BOM pro-
cess in ProNest settings:

 1. Open Importing Parts settings (Settings > click Importing Parts ).
 2. In the BOM field, add the CAD layers that you use for BOM information.

If you use BOM layers in CAD called "BOM" and "INFO", you would enter this in ProNest as:
 

BOM BOM;INFO

- 348 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Buge text marking

For machines with a special text marking device, you can configure ProNest to identify text in a CAD file and automatically convert it to
buge marking information when output code is created.

Add a CAD file that contains BUGE text

First, ProNest settings must be configured to identify buge text information in CAD files:

 1. Open settings (in the Quick Access toolbar, click Settings ).
 2. In the left pane, double-click Importing Parts and then click Importing Parts (Advanced) directly below it.
 3. Make sure that the Use text marker setting is selected.
 4. Click Save to keep your changes.
In the CAD file, buge text is typically placed on a dedicated layer. You will need to map the buge text CAD layer to the Scribe and Display
Only processes in ProNest:

 1. Open the Edit Part List window (on the Home tab, click Edit Part List ).
 2. Browse to the folder containing your CAD file.
 3. Using the Files of Type box, select the type of CAD file that you will be importing.
 4. Click the CAD file once to select it.
 5. In the Properties pane on the right, select the CAD Import tab.
 6. For the Scribe or Mark process, make sure the CAD layer that contains buge text is selected.

For example, if you have a plasma machine with a scribe process and your buge text is on a CAD layer called "TEXT", this would
appear as follows:

Scribe - [Plasma Mark] TEXT

 7. For the Display Only process, make sure that the CAD layer that contains buge text is also selected. This will ensure that the buge
text is visible on the part in ProNest.

If your buge text is on a CAD layer called "TEXT", this would appear as follows:

Display Only TEXT

 8. Click Add Part in the toolbar.

Buge text position, size and angle will be read in directly from the CAD file. In ProNest, the start location of the Buge text is indicated by
the icon. When output is created for the part, special text marking instructions will be included in the NC code.

Tip: You can account for buge text marking in ProNest costing figures. See Costing settings for more information.

- 349 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing raster images

ProNest can import raster files and convert them to vectorized part files that can be cut on your machine.

In this article...
Supported image formats
Preparing images prior to import
Adjusting raster import settings in ProNest
Cleaning up the drawing
Adding image to the part list
Saving your vector results

Supported image formats

The following image file formats can be imported:
 l PNG
 l JPG, JPEG
 l BMP
 l GIF

Preparing images prior to import

Before importing image files, please consider the following tips.

Larger image files will get better results

An image file that is 1600 × 1200 px will have better definition when converted compared to an image that is 160 × 120 px.
 

Whether you are drawing the image yourself or are provided with an image from another source, try to get the largest size image pos-
sible. You can then use scaling feature in ProNest to get the correct finished size.

Plan how drawing will be cut

Make sure that the drawing has a well-defined exterior border and doesn't contain too many nested profiles. During import, ProNest
looks for a closed exterior profile and any closed interior profiles, if they exist.

- 350 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
An image with too many nested interior profiles can produce a part with interiors that drop out prior to being cut.
 

You can avoid these situations by making sure the image only has a single nested "level" of interior profiles:
 

Increase contrast and reduce noise

Clean images with high contrast and minimal noise work best. Soft blended edges, such as with a photo, may need to be cleaned up prior
to import.
 

Remove stray lines and marks

Stray lines on a drawing may be imported as open profiles, which can be included as errant motions in output code. The best practice is
to remove stray marks in the source image. You can also use CAD Cleanup / 2D CAD in ProNest to get rid of any entities you don't want
later on.

Adjusting raster import settings in ProNest

When an image file is selected in the Part Sources area of the Edit Part List window, raster import options will appear:

- 351 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Open the Edit Part List (Home tab > Edit Part List ).
 2. Set Files of Type to Raster image files.
 3. Browse to the image file you want to import. You can click the view menu to see medium or large thumbnail images.

 4. Click the file once to select it.

 5. In the Properties pane on the lower right, click the CAD Import tab.

 6. In the Raster to Vector section, there are several settings (Threshold, Straighten, and so on) that you can adjust prior to adding
the part. As you change the values for these settings, your vector results will be displayed in real time in the Preview pane (as long
as Preview raster image is off). For a full description of these settings, see CAD Import properties.

Adjust the scale of the drawing

The best way to adjust the final part size is by using scale in ProNest and not by adjusting the source image. As a rule, with the Drawing
scale set to 100%, 1 pixel in the drawing = 1 inch in ProNest.
 
To adjust the scale of the drawing:
 l In Raster to Vector import properties, use the Part length and Part width properties to scale images to the finished size that you
want. This sets the size of the bounding rectangle around the part.

1 = Part length

- 352 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

2 = Part width
 
The aspect ratio is automatically maintained, so that the image is not distorted. This means that when you type a value in one box, the
other value will automatically be updated.

Note: Drawing scale will automatically be updated based on this value.

Additional settings that affect raster images

The following CAD Import properties (which aren't in the Raster to Vector section) also have an effect on raster images:
 l Open profile tolerance
 l Smooth entities
These two properties work the same way for raster images as they do for CAD drawings. When changing Open profile tolerance or
Smooth entities, you will not see the results until after the part is added.

Cleaning up the drawing

Once you've gotten your image close to how you want it using the steps outlined above, you can use CAD Cleanup to make additional
changes, such as removing stray profiles, closing open profiles, or correcting bad geometry.
 
 1. In the Preview window, click the arrow next to CAD Cleanup.

 2. Select a method of CAD Cleanup:

 l CAD Cleanup - 2D CAD
Uses 2D CAD to clean up the file. All CAD editing features in 2D CAD are available; you can add, edit, move, and delete
objects. You can also save a DXF or DWG version of the part.

- 353 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l CAD Cleanup -Simple

A good option for quick fixes such as moving existing geometry or deleting profiles.

 3. When you've finished making changes, return to the ProNest Edit Part List window.

Adding image to the part list

Once the image close to how you need it, you will be ready to import it:
 l With the part selected in the Part Sources section, click Add Part.
The part will be added to the part list, ready for nesting.

Saving your vector results

If you are cutting a raster part more than once, it may be useful to save a processed vector version of the image for later use. This way,
you can save all of the changes you have made to the part during the import process, such as scaling, cleaning up stray profiles, smooth-
ing, and so on.

Adding to part library

Saving an added raster part to the part library will ensure that all image processing and added leads are preserved.
 l Right-click part in the part list and select Add to Library.

- 354 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The next time you need to cut the part, simply add it from the Library tab in the Edit Part List window.

Saving to DXF or DWG

 1. In the Part Sources: CAD tab, select the image file.
 2. In the Preview, click Cleanup > Use 2D CAD.
 3. Make changes as needed.
 4. Save as DXF or DWG.
Likewise, you can also Export a DXF of a part after it's been added, in order to save a processed version that includes leads.
 1. Right-click the part in the part list.
 2. Select Export to DXF.

- 355 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CAD Cleanup - Simple

With the Simple CAD Cleanup feature, you can make changes to CAD layers before CAD files are added to the part list. This can be useful
if you have CAD files with duplicate or incorrectly named layers and want to quickly clean up these files without using an external CAD
editor.

Note: Keep in mind that any changes made to a part using CAD Cleanup will only effect the instance of the part that is being added
to the part list, and will not be permanently saved with the source CAD file.

In this article...
Open CAD Cleanup
Selecting entities and layers
Moving entities and layers
Creating a new layer
Renaming an existing layer
Deleting a layer

Open CAD Cleanup

 1. From the Edit Part List, select a CAD file from the Part Sources explorer by clicking it once.
 2. In the Preview, click Simple CAD Cleanup.
The CAD Cleanup window will open, displaying the layers found in the selected CAD file.
 

Example:
 

Figure 1
 
The sample CAD file MF2.DXF has been brought into CAD Cleanup, as shown in Figure 1. Different CAD layers are indicated in red,
yellow, and blue.

Selecting entities and layers

You can select any entity or layer in your CAD file.

 
To select an entity:

 1. Click the Entity Select button.

- 356 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 2. Click on the entity.

The selected entity will be displayed with a dotted line.
 

Example:
 

Figure 2
 
An entity along the profile of the red layer is selected.

Tip: To select multiple entities, hold SHIFT and click the entities you want to select.

To select a layer:

 1. Click the Layer Select button.

 2. Click anywhere on the CAD layer.
The selected layer will be displayed with a dotted line.
 

Example:
 

Figure 3
 
The entire red layer is selected, as indicated by the dotted line.
 

Moving entities and layers

Once a layer or entity is selected, it can be moved to a different layer or to a different process.
 
To move to Layer:

- 357 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Select the entity or layer you want to move.

 2. On the Selections menu, select Move To Layer.
 3. From the box, select a layer to move the entity or layer to.
 4. Click OK.
The selected entity or layer will be moved to the specified layer.
 
To move to Process:
 1. Select the entity or layer you want to move. 
 2. On the Selections menu, select Move To Process.
 3. From the box, select a process to move the entity or layer to.
 4. Click OK.
The selected entity or layer will be moved to the specified process.

Creating a new layer

 1. In the Available Layers section on the right pane, click the New Layer button.
 2. Enter a name for your new layer.
 3. From the drop-down list, assign a process to your new layer.
Once created, you can move existing entities or layers to your new layer.

Renaming an existing layer

 1. In the Available Layers section on the right pane, select the layer that you want to rename.
 2. Rename the layer, then press ENTER.

Deleting a layer

If your CAD file contains extra layers that you want to delete, you can do so using the CAD Cleanup window.
 1. Using Layer Select, select the layer you want to delete.
 2. On the Layers menu, select Delete Layer.

Advanced: If you have a CAD file with blocks that are assigned to the turret or drilling layer, you can show or hide the block inser-
tion points by selecting Punch Points from the View menu.

- 358 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CAD Cleanup - 2D CAD

2D CAD is an easy to use CAD application that provides all the basic features needed to create or edit a detailed CAD drawing. In ProNest,
the CAD Cleanup feature can be used to make quick changes to the CAD drawing in 2D CAD before it is added to the part list.
 
Any CAD file type that can be imported into ProNest can also be edited in CAD Cleanup prior to import. This includes:
 l AutoCAD files (.dwg; .dxf)
 l FastCAM files (.cam)
 l IGES files (.igs; .iges)
 l EPS files (.eps)
 l DGN files (.dgn)
 l DSTV files (.nc; .nc1)
 l Raster image files (.bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, .gif, .png)
 l Autodesk Inventor files (.iam; .ipt)
(Inventor™ Interface module required)
 l SolidWorks files (.sldprt; .sldasm)
(SolidWorks® Interface module required)
 l Solid Edge files (.par; .asm)
(Solid Edge® Interface module required)

Bring a CAD file into 2D CAD Cleanup

 1. Select a CAD file in the Part Sources section of the Edit Part List window.

 2. In the Preview, click CAD Cleanup > Use 2D CAD. The 2D CAD program will open with your drawing loaded.
 3. In 2D CAD, make the required changes to the CAD file (modifying geometry, changing layer properties, etc.). Refer to 2D CAD
Help for assistance.

 4. Click the Return to ProNest button.

- 359 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 5. Click Yes to update the CAD file in ProNest with your changes.
 a. Selecting the Save to file checkbox ( ) will permanently save your changes to the CAD file (available for DXF or DWG
formats only).
 b. Clicking Yes with Save to file cleared will update that instance of the part that is being added to the part list, but will not
be permanently save changes in the source CAD file.

Note:  l Using CAD Cleanup, you can edit any type of CAD file that ProNest supports (for example, SOLIDWORKS, Inventor,
DSTV, etc.) and update ProNest with your changes. However, saving your CAD Cleanup changes permanently is only
available in DXF or DWG file format.
 l Token files (.tok), CNC files (.cnc), VSP, or Pipe parts cannot be edited using CAD Cleanup.

- 360 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

DSTV files
A DSTV file is a space-delimited, ASCII text file containing geometry and other information for a structural steel part. The DSTV file exten-
sions recognized by ProNest are .nc or .nc1.
 
DSTV Code Blocs supported by ProNest:
 

Corresponding
DSTV Code
Signification ProNest machine pro-
Bloc
cess

ST Start of piece description. This is the header section that contains part information. --
   
Note: The only fields in the ST bloc that are brought into ProNest are Material, Quantity and
Thickness.*
 l Material is on line 7
 l Quantity is on line 8
 l Thickness is on line 15 (and is always in metric)

EN End of piece description (this is not required) --

AK Exterior profiles Cut

IK Interior profiles (this does not include interior profiles that qualify as holes or slots) Cut

BO Holes and slots Punch or Cut (depend-

ing on how your
machine handles holes
and slots).

SI Text (Bloc Numeration) Scribe or Display Only

 
Note: In ProNest, this bloc is recognized as "NUMBERING" and not "SI". So, if you want to
map the SI bloc in a DSTV file to your machine's scribe process, you would enter
"NUMBERING" (and not "SI") in the process-layer mappings on the Importing Parts page of
your settings.

KO Scribing or marking Scribe

* If no geometry is listed on the AK layer, ProNest can recognize Width, Length, Start Angle, and End Angle information in the ST code
bloc.

Mapping DSTV layer names to available processes

You can set up ProNest to handle DSTV code bloc layers automatically during import:

 1. Open settings (in the Quick Access toolbar, click Settings ).
 2. In the left pane, select the Importing Parts page.

- 361 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

In the CAD Layers section, there are one or more CAD layers mapped to each process supported by your machine (cut, scribe,
punch, etc.). The DSTV code bloc names (listed in the table above) will be added to this section.
 3. In the column on the right, enter the DSTV code bloc that corresponds to each process.

Example:
 

Machine process DSTV Code Bloc

Cut AK;IK
Scribe NUMBERING;KO
Punch BO
Display Only  

Note: If you have more than one CAD layer/code bloc for a single process, separate the layers/blocs with a
semicolon (;) and do not include a space (for example, "0;CUT;AK;IK").

 4. Click Save to permanently store your changes.

 5. Click OK.
Now, each time you import a DSTV file into the part list, ProNest will automatically map the DSTV layers in the part to available machine
processes.

Filtering for DSTV parts

In order to view DSTV files in ProNest:

 l In the Edit Part List, in the CAD sources section, set Files of type to DSTV files (*.nc;*.nc1).

Note: FabTrol inquiry files, which contain parts and plates for nesting, use DSTV format. When creating a job from a FabTrol inquiry
file (File tab > New > New from Inquiry), be sure that CAD layer mappings for that ProNest machine are set up for DSTV
import, as described above.

- 362 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Rules and tips for using the SOLIDWORKS interface

Rules
 l SOLIDWORKS must be installed on the same PC that is running ProNest in order to import SOLIDWORKS parts.
 l Parts are imported according to your 3D CAD Files preferences and Importing Parts settings. In 3D CAD Files preferences, you can
set things like:
 l Coordinate system name
 l Automatically detect part thickness
 l Which face to import and which faces to ignore
 l Whether to import sheet metal parts only
 l Automatically detect beveled edges
In Importing Parts settings, you can set up:
 l Default process - layer mapping (assign SOLIDWORKS layers to available ProNest processes - see below for more details)
 l Configuration name to use by default
 l Bendlines and Bendtangents can be imported to etch/scribe on the part (see below for more details)

Cut geometry
By default, the interior and exterior edges of the face that is brought into ProNest are assigned to the main ProNest cut process.
 

- 363 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The part pictured above contains cut information in the Base feature, which has been extruded to a 3D solid. The outer and inner edges
of the Front face of this model will be interpreted by ProNest as cut profiles and mapped to the main cut process (e.g. Plasma, Laser, and
so on).

Scribing/marking and punching

The best practice for bringing in scribe/mark geometry or punch geometry is to create a separate sketch feature for each process. The
sketch feature's name in SOLIDWORKS has to match the layer name assigned to that process in ProNest process layer mapping (Settings
> Importing Parts > CAD Import tab).
 

- 364 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Scribe geometry has been drawn on a sketch called "SCRIBE" in the part shown above. You would then need to enter "SCRIBE" as a layer
name in ProNest Importing Parts settings:
 

Scribe - [Mark] SCRIBE

Note: Multiple layer names should be separated by a semi-colon (;) with no spaces in between (for instance "SCRIBE;ETCH;MARK").
An asterisk (*) can be used as a wildcard.

Likewise, punch geometry in the SOLIDWORKS part shown above is drawn on a separate sketch called "PUNCH". In order to bring these
punches into ProNest, you would need to enter "PUNCH" as a layer name for the punch process in Importing Parts settings.
 

- 365 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Punch - [P] PUNCH

When drawing a punch in SOLIDWORKS, sketch the punch as circle geometry and not as point geometry.

Bendlines
If you have a part with bend lines and you want the bends to be scribed/marked when the part is cut, you'd enter "BENDLINES" as a layer
name next to the scribe process.
 

Scribe - [Mark] ETCH;SCRIBE;BENDLINES

Note: You must put the layer names in ProNest settings ( ) and save it with your machine. Unlike other CAD file types, you can't
select layers found in a SOLIDWORKS part in the Edit Part List if they're not already listed in settings.

Multiple cut processes

If your machine supports multiple cut processes and you want to assign some edges of a part face to one cut process and other edges to
a different cut process, you need to use Hypertherm's ProNest Layering Add-In in SOLIDWORKS. With the layering add-in, you can spe-
cify different cut processes for different entities within a single face. For instance, you may want to cut the interiors of a part with plasma,
but cut the exterior edges with oxyfuel.
 
Please contact Hypertherm's CAD/CAM software division for more information on this feature.

- 366 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding SOLIDWORKS parts and assemblies

Import a SOLIDWORKS part into ProNest

 1. In ProNest, open the Edit Part List window (Home tab >Edit Part List).
 2. Set the Files of type to SOLIDWORKS files.
 3. In the Properties: CAD Import tab on the lower right, in the Configuration name box you can enter a specific configuration to
use. Leaving this blank will bring in the default configuration in the part.

 4. Select your SOLIDWORKS part file (*.sldprt).

 5. Click Add Part.
After a SOLIDWORKS part is added to the part list, its configuration is shown as a part property of that part. Also, in the Part List in the
main window, the configuration used is appended to the part name. For example, a SOLIDWORKS part called "Ring" that was imported
with the configuration "Default" would appear as "Ring c.Default").

Import a SOLIDWORKS assembly into ProNest

 1. In ProNest, open the Edit Part List window (Home tab >Edit Part List).
 2. Set the Files of type to SOLIDWORKS Files.
 3. Browse to the folder containing your SOLIDWORKS assembly file (*.sldasm).
 4. At this point, you can either:
 l Select the assembly file and click Add Part to add the entire assembly to the part list.
 l Double-click the file to open the SOLIDWORKS assembly explorer. In the assembly explorer, you can examine and preview
all parts in the assembly, choose to import only some parts in the assembly, and select different Configurations for parts.
See below for more details.

- 367 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

SOLIDWORKS assembly explorer
When you double-click a SOLIDWORKS assembly in the Edit Part List window, an assembly explorer view will open in the Part Sources
pane.

SOLIDWORKS assembly explorer in the Edit Part List window

 
Each part in the assembly is shown as an item in the tree. The checkbox ( ) next to any part can be cleared to exclude that part when
the assembly is added.

Quantity
For each part, the quantity specified in the assembly is listed here.

Adjusted quantity
This is the quantity from the assembly multiplied by the Required Quantity in ProNest (on the Properties: Nesting tab in the Edit Part
List window).

Configuration
You can select a different configuration for each part in an assembly. The configuration specified in this assembly explorer will take pre-
cedence over any configuration name from Properties: CAD Import tab or Importing Parts settings.
 

Note: Unless otherwise specified in the assembly explorer, the configuration name on the Properties: CAD Import tab will be used
for the assembly and all sub-parts. If this configuration can't be found in any assembly or sub-parts, the default con-
figuration in the assembly or part file will be used instead.

- 368 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing SOLIDWORKS drill holes

For SOLIDWORKS parts that contain holes that will be drilled, you can set up ProNest to recognize these holes and assign them to the cor-
rect tool when the part is imported.
 
These instructions assume that you are already familiar with the Drill Machine Interface in ProNest. Please refer to About drilling for more
information on how drilling works.

In this article...
Drawing drill holes in SOLIDWORKS
Setting up ProNest to bring in drill holes in SOLIDWORKS parts
Importing drilled SOLIDWORKS parts

Drawing drill holes in SOLIDWORKS

ProNest supports the following drill hole types for SOLIDWORKS parts:
 l Straight drill holes
 l Threaded holes that require tapping
 l Countersunk holes
 
In order to draw holes that are recognized as drill holes by ProNest, you must use the Hole Wizard in SOLIDWORKS.

The Hole Wizard in SOLIDWORKS 2018

 
If a hole in a drawing is created as a simple hole (and not with Hole Wizard), ProNest will recognize it as cut geometry by default. For
instance, if you were to include a circle on a 2D sketch and then extrude that to create a 3D solid feature, that hole would be interpreted
as cut geometry during import.

 
In SOLIDWORKS, when adding a hole using the Hole Wizard, select one of the following hole types based on your requirements:

- 369 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Hole
 l Straight Tap
 l Countersink

Straight drill holes

For normal drill holes, in the Hole Wizard, for Hole Type, select Hole.

Enter a hole diameter that matches the diameter of the drill tool you want to match. Be sure to set End Condition to Through All, as par-
tial depth holes aren't supported.

Tapped holes
Threaded holes that require tapping can be drawn in a few different ways with the SOLIDWORKS Hole Wizard. The easiest way is to select
Straight Tap as the Hole Type.

Keep in mind that hole diameter is used to match SOLIDWORKS holes to ProNest tools. The physical hole diameter you get in
SOLIDWORKS for a tap hole varies based on how it's added:

- 370 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Tap drill diameter - The hole diameter will match the diameter of the standard tap drill (tap pre-drill) for that thread size.
 l Cosmetic thread - Both the tap drill and the threaded hole are drawn, but ProNest will use the tap drill diameter during import.
 l Remove thread - The hole diameter will match the major thread diameter.
 
You can use either Tap drill diameter or Cosmetic thread if your ProNest tap tool will match to the tap drill diameter (2).

Side view of a part with major thread diameter (1) and tap drill diameter (2) shown.

Select Remove thread if your ProNest tap tool has a diameter equal to the major thread diameter (1) of the hole.

- 371 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
For example, if your ProNest tap tool for a 1/4-20 hole has a 0.25 in. diameter, you would want to select Remove thread when adding a
1/4-20 tap hole to your drawing.

Differentiating between coarse and fine tap

In a drawing you may have threaded holes that are the same diameter, but differ by thread style; they are either coarse or fine. For
instance, suppose a drawing has the following threaded holes: 1/4-20 (Coarse) and 1/4-28 (Fine).
 
You can match these holes to the correct drill tool by including the word "Coarse" or "Fine" in the feature name:

- 372 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

You can set a default thread style (coarse or fine) in 3D CAD Files preferences.

Countersink
Countersink holes can be added with any of the three hole types: Hole, Countersink, or Straight Tap. When ProNest detects a coun-
tersunk hole, it will try to match it to a countersink tool based on the top diameter of the hole (3).

Side view of a part with top diameter of the countersunk hole (3) shown.
 
Some countersunk holes require more than two tool hits. For instance, a hole may require tap drill, tap, and countersink tool hits. Unlike
holes in other types of CAD files, holes in SOLIDWORKS files can't be matched to compound tools automatically. Instead, you can add
these holes as follows:
 1. In the Hole Wizard, for Hole Type, select Straight Tap.
 2. Set properties for the threaded hole as described in the previous section.
 3. Select the Near Side Countersink box.
 4. Enter countersink dimensions.
 5. Position the hole on the part.
 6. If the threads require a thread style that is different from the default style in 3D CAD Files preferences, you can include "Coarse" or
"Fine" in the feature name.

Positioning holes
When positioning the hole on your part, be sure to place it so that the top of the hole is on the face that will be imported.

- 373 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

User coordinate system

The best practice is to assign a user coordinate system in your drawing. This will ensure that the correct face is brought in.
 l The origin must intersect the face you want to import.
 l Enter a name that matches your ProNest Top view coordinate system name preference.

Limitations for detecting SOLIDWORKS drill holes

 l Only round holes added via Hole Wizard are supported
 l ProNest can't match to a specific compound tool based on feature name
 l Partial-depth (blind) holes are not supported
 l Counterbore holes are not supported

Setting up ProNest to bring in drill holes in SOLIDWORKS parts

Generally speaking, a drill-capable ProNest setup must be in use in order to use this feature.

ProNest preferences
Several preferences on the 3D CAD Files tab should be set.
 1. On the File tab, click Preferences.
 2. Click the 3D CAD Files tab.
 3. In the SOLIDWORKS section, select Enable drill detection.
This preference must be enabled in order to identify drill holes and map them to drill tools in ProNest.
 4. In the Top view coordinate system name box, enter the name of the user coordinate system that you use in SOLIDWORKS (as
described above).

ProNest settings
The following areas of ProNest settings should be configured so that tapped or countersink holes can be brought in.

Drill process layer mapping

 l On the Settings > Importing Parts page, on the CAD Import tab, in the box next to the Drilling process, type the layer name
(s) that you are using for drilling in your CAD drawings.
Example

- 374 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

If your ProNest machine supported a tooling process called "Drilling" and you wanted to assign "Drill" and "Tool" CAD layers to
that process, you would enter:
 

Drilling Drill;Tool

When a CAD file is imported, all geometry on the "Drill" and "Tool" layers would be brought in as drilled holes.

Use CAD Colors
 l On the Settings > Importing Parts page, on the CAD Import tab, set Quality to Use CAD Colors.

Pilot drill options

 l On the Settings > Tooling page, set Pilot drill options to Enable pilot drill, sequence them separately. This keeps holes that
require multiple tool hits in the correct sequence.

Tap and countersink colors

This is required if you want ProNest to assign holes to tap or countersink tools during import.
 l On the Settings > Tooling page, set Coarse tap color, Fine tap color, and Countersink color to each have a unique color index
number. Even though SOLIDWORKS doesn't support colors, this is required by ProNest.

Importing drilled SOLIDWORKS parts

Drilled SOLIDWORKS parts are imported just like any other SOLIDWORKS part. Follow the instructions in Adding SOLIDWORKS parts and
assemblies.
 
Once parts have been imported, you can confirm that the right tools are assigned:
 l Verifying tool assignments for holes
 l Changing tool assignments for holes

- 375 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding Inventor parts

Import an Inventor part into ProNest

 1. In ProNest, open the Edit Part List window (Home tab > Edit Part List).
 2. Set the Files of type to Autodesk Inventor Files.
 3. Select your Inventor part file (*.ipt). The part will be shown in the Preview.
 4. Click Add Part.

Import an Inventor assembly into ProNest

 1. In ProNest, open the Edit Part List window (Home tab >Edit Part List).
 2. Set the Files of type to Autodesk Inventor Files.
 3. Browse to the folder containing your Inventor assembly file (*.iam).
 4. At this point, you can either:
 l Select the assembly file and click Add Part to add the entire assembly to the part list.
 l Double-click the file to open the Inventor assembly explorer. In the assembly explorer, you can examine and preview all
parts in the assembly, choose to import only some parts in the assembly. See below for more details.

Inventor assembly explorer
When you double-click an Inventor assembly in the Edit Part List window, an assembly explorer view will open in the Part Sources pane.
Each part in the assembly is shown as an item in the tree.

The checkbox ( ) next to any part can be cleared to exclude that part when the assembly is added.

Quantity
For each part, the quantity specified in the assembly is listed here.

Adjusted quantity
This is the quantity from the assembly multiplied by the Required Quantity in ProNest (on the Properties: Nesting tab in the Edit Part
List window).

Configuration
Not used for Inventor parts.

- 376 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Rules and tips for using the Inventor interface

Rules
 l Inventor must be installed on the same PC that is running ProNest in order to import Inventor parts.
 l Inventor parts can be imported as single parts (.ipt) or assemblies (.iam).
 l ProNest always imports the face with the largest surface area, unless a user coordinate system name is used (see 3D CAD Files pref-
erences). There must be a Flat Pattern for the .ipt file that you want to import.
 l Parts are imported according to your 3D CAD Files preferences and Importing Parts settings. In 3D CAD Files preferences, you can
set things like:
 l Coordinate system name
 l Automatically detect part thickness
 l Whether to import sheet metal parts only
 l Automatically detect beveled edges
In Importing Parts settings, you can set up:
 l Default process - layer mapping (assign Inventor layers to available ProNest processes - see below for more details)
 l Bendlines and Bendtangents can be imported to etch/scribe on the part (see below for more details)
 l BOM can be used by making sure that the iProperties of the part is set up properly (see below for more details).

Cut geometry
By default, the interior and exterior edges of the face that is brought into ProNest are assigned to the main ProNest cut process.
 

- 377 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
The part pictured above contains cut information in the Base feature, which has been extruded to a 3D solid. The outer and inner edges
of the Front face of this model will be interpreted by ProNest as cut profiles and mapped to the main cut process (e.g. Plasma, Laser, and
so on).

Scribing/marking and punching

The best practice for bringing in scribe/mark geometry or punch geometry is to create a separate sketch feature for each process. The
sketch feature's name in Inventor has to match the layer name assigned to that process in ProNest process layer mapping (Settings >
Importing Parts > CAD Import tab).
 

- 378 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Scribe geometry has been drawn on a sketch called "SCRIBE" in the part shown above. You would then need to enter "SCRIBE" as a layer
name in ProNest Importing Parts settings:
 

Scribe - [Mark] SCRIBE

Note: Multiple layer names should be separated by a semi-colon (;) with no spaces in between (for instance "SCRIBE;ETCH;MARK").
An asterisk (*) can be used as a wildcard.

Likewise, punch geometry in the Inventor part shown above is drawn on a separate sketch called "PUNCH". In order to bring these
punches into ProNest, you would need to enter "PUNCH" as a layer name for the punch process in Importing Parts settings.
 

Punch - [P] PUNCH

- 379 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Bendlines
If you have a part with bend lines and you want the bends to be scribed/marked when the part is cut, you'd enter "BENDLINES" as a layer
name next to the scribe process.
 

Scribe - [Mark] ETCH;SCRIBE;BENDLINES

Note: You must put the layer names in ProNest settings ( ) and save it with your machine. Unlike other CAD file types, you can't
select layers found in a SOLIDWORKS part in the Edit Part List if they're not already listed in settings.

BOM information
The Bill of Material (BOM) layer of a CAD file is an optional drawing layer used to specify part information like material, grade, thickness,
and quantity. Inventor has a feature called iProperties which you can use to enter BOM information for a part.
 
To enter ProNest BOM information in an Inventor part:
 

 1. With the part open in Inventor, click > iProperties.

 2. In the iProperties dialog, click the Custom tab.
 3. Enter ProNest BOM fields and values. See Bill of Materials (BOM) for a list of allowable BOM fields.

 4. Click Apply and then save the drawing.

 
When the Inventor part is imported into ProNest, those BOM properties will be automatically assigned to the part. Note that unlike BOM
information in a DWG or DXF file, there is no need to map the BOM layer in Importing Parts settings.
 
Materials

- 380 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Material name, thickness, class, and grade can be entered as Custom iProperties. They will be recognized by ProNest and assigned during
import.
 
Alternately, you can specify a BOM material with Inventor's Material feature (on the Physical tab of the iProperties dialog). When an
Inventor Material is assigned, ProNest will attempt to match it to a material type in ProNest. Be sure to add the Inventor material name to
the ProNest material alias list. Inventor Material can be used in conjunction with the Detect part thickness preference to match a mater-
ials during import.

- 381 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

What is a VSP part?

The Variable Shape Parts (VSP) feature offers an easy way to create custom parts within ProNest, without the need of a CAD file. ProNest
provides you with a repository of more than 50 different variable shape parts that are based on commonly used geometric profiles.
 

Some of the VSP shapes available in ProNest

 
A simple interface allows you to specify dimensions for interior and exterior geometries. These simple profiles can also be used in com-
bination with each other to create an endless variety of custom profiles.
 
To view the VSP repository of parts:

 l From the Edit Part List window, in the Part Sources explorer, click the VSP tab.

- 382 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding VSP parts

To add VSP parts to your part list:

 1. From the Edit Part List window, in the Part Sources section, click the VSP tab.
 2. Select the part you want to add by clicking it once.
 3. Modify Nesting and Leads properties, as necessary.
 4. Click the Add Part button.
The VSP Shape Reference will appear. From this dialog you can modify VSP part dimensions, add cut-outs, and assign cut pro-
cesses.
 5. When you are finished modifying your part, click OK.
The VSP part will now be added to your part list.

- 383 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

VSP Shape Reference

The VSP Shape Reference is used to enter required part information for the VSP part you want to add. Using this dialog, you can input
part dimensions, add cut-outs to parts, and assign cut processes to part profiles.
 
To open the VSP Shape Reference for a part:

 1. In the Edit Part List, click the VSP tab.

 2. Double-click a VSP part.
-or-
With a VSP part selected, click the Add Part button.
The VSP Shape Reference is organized as follows:
Dimensions grid
The upper-left section contains a grid where you can input dimensions for the selected VSP part or added cut-out.
 
Reference diagram
The upper-right section contains a diagram of the selected VSP part or added cut-out.
 
VSP Preview
The lower right section contains the VSP Preview, which shows your part exactly as it will appear on the nest. The VSP Preview will be
updated as you make changes to part dimensions.
 
The rest of the VSP Shape Reference contains fields for part name and quantity, as well as buttons for adding cut-outs and assigning cut
processes.

Entering part dimensions

When you click a field in the Dimensions grid, that field will become active and editable. A hint describing the active field will appear at
the bottom of the Dimensions grid. The reference diagram to the right will display the VSP part profile in black. The currently active field
will be indicated by a blue line.
 
To enter dimensions for a VSP part:
 1. In the Shape Reference, from the Dimensions grid, click the field you want to change.
 2. Input a value for that field.
 3. Press ENTER.
After dimensions are changed and a part is added to the part list, ProNest will store the modified dimensions for that VSP part. The next
time the Shape Reference for that part is opened, it will contain the modified dimensions.

Note: If you enter a numerical value in the dimensions grid that is geometrically impossible, an "Invalid Dimensions" message will
appear in the VSP Preview.

Example 1:
 1. Open the VSP Shape Reference for the VSP part Notched Rectangle.
 2. In the Dimensions grid, click Width.
The Width field will become active and the reference diagram will change.

- 384 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The blue line in the reference diagram for Notched Rectangle shows the part's width.
 3. In Dimensions grid, in the Width field, type 15.
 4. Press ENTER.
Notice that the shape of the image shown in reference diagram will not change, whereas the VSP Preview will reflect the
changes made to your VSP part.
 5. Click Cancel.
The VSP Shape Reference will close and ProNest will not store the changes made to Notched Rectangle.

Example 2:
In certain instances, you can enter negative dimension values for concave or convex entities to manipulate a VSP part. This is only
works with specific types of entities.
 

Figure 1
 
The VSP Preview for Notched Rectangle is shown in Figure 1. All radii for this part have a value of 1. Note that all four arc-shaped
entities are concave.
 

- 385 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 2
 
The VSP Preview for a modified Notched Rectangle is shown in Figure 2. This part is identical to the part in Figure 1 except that the
value for Radius 2 has been changed to -1. Because this value is negative, the upper arc-shaped entity has become inverted, and is
now convex.
 

- 386 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding a cut-out
Cut-outs can be added to any VSP part that does not already have an interior profile.
 
To add an interior profile to your part:
 1. In the VSP Shape Reference, click the Add Cut Out button.
A pop-up dialog will appear prompting you to enter a shape and position for your cut-out. The left column contains a list of 36
different shapes to choose from.
 2. Select a shape for your cut-out.
 3. Select an Initial start point for your cut-out. This describes where your cut-out will initially be placed on the part.
 4. Click OK.
Once added, the size, shape, and placement of a cut-out can be modified using the Dimensions grid. Cut-out placement can be adjusted
using the X Offset and Y Offset fields. You can view a complete picture of your VSP part and cut-out in the VSP Preview.
 
You can use the arrows ( ) above the reference diagram to select either the VSP part profile or any added cut-outs. Note that a part
or cut-out must be selected in order to be modified.

Important: Be sure to adjust your cut-out so that it is not in conflict with the profile of your VSP part. ProNest will not prevent you
from adding a cut-out that overlaps with the part profile or another cut-out.

To delete a cut out:

 1. Select a cut-out using the arrows above the reference diagram.
 2. Click the Delete Cut Out button.

Note: Any added cut-outs will be applied to your current VSP part only. Unlike VSP part dimensions, added cut-outs are not saved for
use with future VSP parts.

- 387 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Assigning cut processes to VSP parts

You can select the type of cut processes to use for the interior and exterior profiles of the part. This can be useful for multi-process
machines such as those using plasma and hi-definition plasma. The list of available cut processes comes from the cut processes sup-
ported by your current ProNest machine.
 
To assign cut processes for a VSP part:
 1. Open the VSP Shape Reference for your part.
 2. Click the Cut Process button.
 3. Select a cut process from the list of available processes for both interior and exterior profiles.
 4. Click OK.

- 388 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding a pipe part to the part list

Add a pipe part to your part list

 1. From the Edit Part List window, in the Part Sources explorer, click the Pipe tab.
 2. Select the pipe part that you want to add by clicking it once.
 3. Modify any nesting or lead part properties, as necessary.
 4. Click Add Part.
The Pipe Shape Reference will open. From this dialog you can modify pipe part dimensions, settings, cut processes, and other
properties.
 5. When you are finished modifying your part, click OK.
The part will be added to your part list.

- 389 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding library parts to the part list

Add an library part to the part list

 1. From the Edit Part List window, in the Part Sources explorer, click the Library tab.
 2. Select the library part you want by clicking it once.
 3. Modify any nesting or lead part properties, as necessary.
 4. Click Add Part.
The library part will be added to your part list.

- 390 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding assemblies to the part list

Add an assembly to the part list

 1. From the Edit Part List window, in the Part Sources explorer, click the Assemblies tab.
 2. Select the assembly you want by clicking it once.
 3. Modify any nesting or lead part properties, as necessary. Any changes to properties will be applied to all parts in your assembly.
 4. Click Add Part.
The parts in your assembly will be added to your part list.

- 391 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About quality
In ProNest, each entity in a part can have a unique quality value. Quality numbers can have an associated color, which can be useful for
visually verifying the quality on parts in ProNest. You can also add a descriptive alias to a quality number.
 
For applications (such as waterjet) where quality is already specified in the CAD file using colors to indicate cut quality, this can be
brought in automatically in ProNest when the CAD file is imported. Quality can also be assigned or edited in Advanced Edit, after parts
have been imported.

How is quality used to apply cutting parameters?

In the Process Parameters spreadsheet, Quality is an allowable key used in record matching. It is also allowed in Interior and Exterior
Leads spreadsheets.
 
To learn more about how quality is used in ProNest, see:
 l Using quality from a CAD file
 l Assigning quality to a part
 l Viewing quality values on a nest
 l Setting up quality colors and aliases
 l Record matching in settings spreadsheets

- 392 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Use quality from a CAD file

Some CAD drawings already contain quality information for individual entities using CAD color numbers. These color numbers can be car-
ried over into ProNest as quality numbers when the part is imported.
 1. In the Part Sources pane of the Edit Part List window (Home tab > Edit Part List), click a CAD file once to select it.
 2. In the Properties: CAD Import tab on the lower right, set Quality to Use CAD Colors.

 3. Click the Add Part button in the toolbar.

 
Example:
 
A CAD file contains an exterior and an interior profile.
 

In the CAD editor, the entities on the exterior are assigned a color with an index number of 3 and the entities on the interior are
assigned a color with an index value of 4.
 
When the CAD file is imported (with Quality set to Use CAD Colors), the exterior would have a quality of 3 and the interior would
have a quality of 4.

- 393 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Assigning quality to a part

Quality can be assigned during CAD import (for CAD files only) or after parts are added.

Assign a single quality to an entire part during import

CAD files can have a single quality assigned to all entities in the part. Note that this is not available for VSP or Pipe parts.
 1. In the Part Sources pane of the Edit Part List window (Home tab > Edit Part List), click a CAD file once to select it.
 2. In the Properties: CAD Import tab on the lower right, select a number for Quality.

 3. Click the Add Part button in the toolbar.

Every entity in the part will have the same quality value. Note that part lead-ins and lead-outs get their quality values separately from
Leads settings.

Change the quality on added parts

You can set the quality on individual part entities in Advanced Edit.
 1. Bring the added part into Advanced Edit (right-click the part and select Advanced Edit).

 2. In Select Mode ( ), click an entity to select it. You can use SHIFT + click to select multiple entities, or press CTRL + A to select
all entities.
 3. In the Properties pane, change the Quality.
 4. Click the Apply button.

- 394 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Setting up quality colors and names

Each quality number can have a color and alternate name (such as "Coarse", "Fine", etc.) assigned to it. You can change colors and
names assigned to quality numbers to suit your needs.

Change the color assigned to a quality number

You can quickly change the quality colors for qualities that exist in the current job from the Color Legend:
 1. In the main nesting screen, open the Color Legend (View tab > Color Legend).
 2. Click the color swatch ( ) for the number that you want to change.
 3. Select a new color.
 4. Click OK.
 
In Preferences, you can set the quality colors for all numbers (0 - 255):
 1. Open Preferences (File tab > Preferences).
 2. On the left side, click Colors.
 3. Click the color swatch ( ) for the number that you want to change.
 4. Select a new color.
 5. Click OK.
All entities with that quality number will be displayed in ProNest in the color that you selected.

Effect on importing parts

When CAD files are imported in ProNest with a quality, they will be colored according to the ProNest color index that is in Preferences.
 
If there are different color to number assignments in the CAD editor than what is in ProNest, the part will use the quality number from
CAD editor, but will be colored according to the ProNest quality index.
 
Example:
 
Let's say that in your CAD program (such as AutoCAD®) Red ( ) has a color index number of 1, but in ProNest you have the quality
number 1 set to Blue ( ).
 
With "Use CAD Colors" enabled, if you import a CAD file containing a profile that is colored Red, it will be brought into ProNest with
a quality number of 1, but will be colored in Blue.

Add a name for a quality number

You can add a name for any quality number. A quality name typically contains identifying characteristics for that quality. For instance,
you might add a cut quality (such as "Coarse" or "Fine") or cut speed (80%, 60%, etc.) as a name.
 1. Open Preferences (File tab > Preferences).
 2. On the left side, click Colors.
 3. For the quality that you want to change, in the Name column, type a name.
 4. Click OK
The assigned name will appear wherever that quality is listed in ProNest. For instance, "Quality = 1 - Separation Cut". Quality names are
saved with your machine (.cfg).

- 395 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
To quickly add or change the quality name of a number:
 1. In the main nesting screen, open the Color Legend (View tab > Color Legend).
 2. Click the color swatch ( ) for the number that you want to change.
 3. Click Edit Name.
 4. Enter a new quality name in the box.
 5. Click OK.

- 396 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Viewing quality values on a nest

Parts on a nest, in the part list, and in Advanced Edit can be colored according to quality values. This can be helpful when visually veri-
fying the quality of a part.

Show quality colors on parts

 1. In the main nesting screen, open the Color Legend (View tab > Color Legend).

 2. Click the Outline link.

 3. Select Quality.

Quality

Nest showing quality colors

 
Note that in the Color Legend, only the qualities that are used by parts in the job will be displayed.

Highlight a single quality on a nest

You can hover the cursor over a color box in the Color Legend and all entities of that quality will be drawn in bold on the nest.
 

- 397 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Quality

Entities with Quality 3 are highlighted on the nest

- 398 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

8. PLATE LIST
What is the plate list?
The ProNest plate list contains all of the user defined plates and inventory plates that have been added to your job. Unlike Standard Plate
Sizes, which are defined in your settings, plates in the plate list can be assigned various plate properties such as material, type, stack
quantity, priority, etc. Plates are added to your job's plate list using the Edit Plate List window.

- 399 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About the Edit Plate List window

Plates are added to the plate list using the Edit Plate List window. From this window you can define and add custom plates to your plate
list, modify properties of existing plates, and delete plates.

Open the Edit Plate List

 l On the Home tab, click Edit Plate List.

Like the main window, the Edit Plate List window has menus and toolbars along the top and a status bar along the bottom. The rest of the
window is split into four sections: 
 
Plate Sources
The upper-left contains ProNest plate sources. Each plate source appears as a different tab. The User Defined tab is a standard plate
source. If you have purchased the Plate Inventory module, the Inventory tab will also appear here.
 
Plate List
The lower-left contains the job’s plate list. All plates that have been added will appear here. The properties for each plate in the plate list
are displayed next to the plate name. You can modify these properties by clicking on a field and entering the value you want.
 
Preview
The upper-right contains a tool window called Preview. The currently selected plate is displayed here. You can use the dimensions button
( ) to show or hide dimensions of your plate.
 
Properties
The lower-right contains a tool window called Properties. Properties for the currently selected plate are displayed here. When you change
the properties of a selected plate in the Plate Sources explorer, your changes will be made to that plate as well as any subsequent plates
that are added in the current job. However if you change properties for a selected plate in the plate list, your changes will be applied to
that plate only.

- 400 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Plate properties
When plates are added to the plate list, they are assigned properties like quantity and priority. Plate properties can be assigned to plates
using the Properties grid in the lower right section of the Edit Plate List window or via the Plate List tool window.
 
When you change the properties of a selected plate in the Plate Sources explorer, your changes will be made to that plate as well as any
subsequent plates that are added in the current job. However if you change properties for a selected plate in the Plate List tool window,
your changes will be applied to that plate only.
 
Quantity
Required 
This defines the quantity of the selected plate.
 
Stack 
Stacks are used with real-world machines that can process multiple plates at the same time. Stack quantity defines the number of plates
that will be cut simultaneously. The Required quantity for a plate should always be greater than or equal to that plate's Stack quantity.
 
Range: 1 to 100
Recommended value: 1

When you nest on a plate that has a Stack quantity greater than one, ProNest will automatically create identical nests for each additional
stack specified. When a part is added to the current nest, a copy of that part will also be added to each of the duplicate stack nests.
 

Example:
 
Let's say you are using a custom plate with a Stack quantity of 2. In your part list, you have a single part with a Required quantity of
10. During nesting, parts will be added 2 at a time (one part on the current, visible nest and the other on the hidden stack nest).
When all 10 parts have been nested, you will only see 5 nested parts on the current nest, though the Part List tool window will indic-
ate "10 of 10 nested".

Advanced: Typically, using stacks requires a special post processor to generate output for your machine. Contact Hypertherm for
more information.

 
Attributes
Material
Plate material can be assigned with this setting.
 
Safe zone scheme
In the Safe zone scheme list, select the safe zone scheme that should be assigned to your plate. You can also create new schemes or edit
existing ones in the list.
 
For more information on safe zone schemes, see "What are Safe Zones?" on page 408
 
Priority
Priority is used to sort plates for automatic nesting. All things being equal, plates with a priority of 1 will be nested on before plates with a
priority of 99.

- 401 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Range: 1 to 99

Rotation (°)
This describes the initial rotation angle of the plate. This setting can be useful for irregularly shaped plates, such as remnants.
 
Plate name
This defines the name of your plate.
 
 
When a plate in the Plate List tool window is selected, the Plate type, Size, Inventory ID and Nested fields will also appear in the Properties
section. These fields appear for informational purposes only and cannot be modified.

- 402 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding custom plates to the plate list

You can define properties for custom rectangular, circular, or remnant plates and add the plates to the plate list.

Add a custom plate to the plate list

 1. In the Edit Plate List window, from the Custom Plates tab, double-click the type of plate you want to add.
The Custom Plate dialog will appear.
 2. From the Custom Plate dialog, adjust plate details and properties, as necessary. (See below for a description of properties.)
 3. Click the Add button.
Your custom plate will be added to the plate list.
 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each custom plate you want to add.
 5. When you have finished adding plates, click Close.

The Custom Plate dialog

Using the Custom Plate dialog, you can define the plate details and properties for the user defined plate you want to add. You can add
multiple user defined plates by simply adjusting dimensions and properties and clicking the Add button.

Define your plate

Name
This defines the name of your plate.
 
Type
This defines the type and size of your plate. Rectangular and Circular are standard plate types. If you have purchased the Plate Inventory
or Custom Remnant option, Remnant can also be selected.
 
Choices: Rectangular, Circular, Remnant (if applicable)

Rectangular
Rectangular plates are measured using length x width. You can use the list of standard plate sizes to select a rectangular plate, or type in
a custom size using the Length and Width fields.
 
Circular
Circular plates are measured using diameter.
 
Remnant
If you want to add remnant plates, click the Define Remnant button. To learn more, see "Custom remnants" on page 405.
 
Material
This defines the material of the plate. Parts that have the same material will be able to be nested on this plate.

Note: When spreadsheets are used, the list of available materials comes from the materials found in your Process Parameters spread-
sheet. When spreadsheets are not used, the list of available materials comes from your material database.

Safe zone scheme

In the Safe zone scheme list, select the safe zone scheme that should be assigned to your plate. You can also create new schemes or edit
existing ones in the list.

- 403 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
For more information on safe zone schemes, see "What are Safe Zones?" on page 408
 

Properties
Quantity
This defines the quantity of the selected plate.
 
Priority
Priority is used to sort plates for automatic nesting. All things being equal, plates with a priority of 1 will be nested on before plates with a
priority of 99.
 
Range: 1 to 99

Stack quantity
Stacks are used with real-world machines that can process multiple plates at the same time. Stack quantity defines the number of plates
that will be cut simultaneously. The required Quantity for a plate should always be greater than or equal to that plate's Stack quantity.
 
Range: 1 to 100
Recommended value: 1

When you nest on a plate that has a Stack quantity greater than one, ProNest will automatically create identical nests for each additional
stack specified. When a part is added to the current nest, a copy of that part will also be added to each of the duplicate stack nests.
 

Example:
 
Let's say you are using a custom plate with a Stack quantity of 2. In your part list, you have a single part with a Required quantity of
10. During nesting, parts will be added 2 at a time (one part on the current, visible nest and the other on the hidden stack nest).
When all 10 parts have been nested, you will only see 5 nested parts on the current nest, though the Part List task pane will indicate
"10 of 10 nested".

Advanced: Typically, using stacks requires a special post processor to generate output for your machine. Contact Hypertherm for
more information.

Rotation (°)
This describes the initial rotation angle of the plate. This setting can be useful for irregularly shaped plates, such as remnants.
 

- 404 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Custom remnants
With custom remnants, you can input the dimensions of an irregular plate or remnant into ProNest. After they are created, custom rem-
nants can be used immediately or stored in the Plate Inventory for use at a later time.

Custom remnants are defined based on a series of reference points on the Cartesian (X,Y) plane, which can be specified in either absolute
or incremental coordinates. Absolute coordinates are entered relative to the point of origin (0,0); incremental coordinates are entered rel-
ative to the last point added.
 
In ProNest, custom remnants can be created using the AutoNest Setup dialog, the New Nest dialog, the Edit Part List window, or the
Plate Inventory editor. If a custom remnant is created using the Plate Inventory editor, that remnant can be stored in the database and
used at a later time. Otherwise, custom remnants will be added to the nest or plate list you are currently working on.

Tip: Before you define your custom remnant in ProNest, make sure that you have the dimensions of your physical plate handy.

To define a custom remnant (from the Edit Plate List window):

 1. On the Custom Plates tab, double-click Remnant.
 2. In the Type box, make sure Remnant is selected.
 3. Click Define Remnant.
 4. Click Clear All Points.
 5. Using your preferred coordinate system (absolute or incremental), click the Add Point button to make 0,0 the start of your rem-
nant.
 6. Change the x and y values to define to the next point for your remnant.
 7. Click Add Point.
 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until your remnant is complete.

- 405 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding inventory plates to the plate list

Add an inventory plate to the plate list

 1. In the Edit Plate List window, click the Inventory tab.
 2. Select the inventory plate you want to add by clicking it once.
 3. Adjust plate properties, if necessary.
 4. Click the Add Plate button.
Your plate will appear in the plate list.

- 406 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Plate reservations
You can reserve inventory plates so that other users cannot access them. When a plate is reserved, ProNest will not allow that plate to be
used by any user other than the one who has reserved it.

In this article...
Reserve an inventory plate
Release an inventory plate
View plate reservations

Reserve an inventory plate

 1. In the Edit Plate List window, select the Inventory tab.
 2. Right-click the inventory plate that you want to reserve.
 3. Select Reserve.
 4. Enter a quantity to reserve.
 5. Click Reserve.
The inventory plate will remain reserved until you either release it or use it to generate output.

Release an inventory plate

 1. In the Edit Plate List window, select the Inventory tab.
 2. Right-click the inventory plate that you want to release.
 3. Select Release.
 4. Enter a quantity.
 5. Click Release.
Reserved plates can only be released by the user who made the initial reservation.

View plate reservations

 1. In the Edit Plate List window, select the Inventory tab.
 2. Right-click the inventory plate that you want to view.
 3. Select View Reservations.
ProNest will show the user who made the reservation, as well as the quantity and date reserved.

Tip: An alternate way of reserving plates is to first add any inventory plates that you will use to the plate list, and then select Reserve
All in the Plate List tool window. This will prevent other users from accessing the inventory plates that you have already added to
the plate list.
 
If the plate list contains reserved inventory plates, you can release all of these plates by selecting Release All in the Plate List tool
window.

- 407 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

What are Safe Zones?

Safe zones define areas of a plate on which parts should not be nested. Typically these areas are used for clamping. During any kind of
automatic nesting, ProNest will avoid all safe zones. Also, during manual nesting ProNest will show conflicts between parts and safe
zones.
 
Sometimes, a particular group of safe zones can be used on several different plate sizes. This group is called a safe zone scheme. In
ProNest, you can define safe zone schemes and then use (and re-use) them on any nest. You can add as many different safe zone
schemes as you want in ProNest.
 

A plate with a safe zone scheme consisting of four safe zones, which appear in yellow. Safe zones must be rectangular in shape
and are positioned relative to the plate edges.

Creating a new safe zone scheme

You can add a new safe zone scheme from the New Safe Zone Scheme dialog, which can be accessed from the New Nest Setup dialog,
the AutoNest Setup dialog, or from the Standard Plate Sizes page in your settings.

 1. Open Settings.

 2. On the Standard Plate Sizes page, in the Safe Zones section, click drop-down arrow on the Scheme box.
 3. Select New.
The New Safe Zone Scheme dialog contains a field for Scheme Name, a Safe Zones tab, a Repositions tab, and a Preview.
 4. In the New Safe Zone Scheme dialog, enter a Scheme Name. You will now be ready to add safe zones to the scheme.
 5. On the Safe Zones tab, click the Add button.
The Add Safe Zone dialog will appear.
 6. Enter your safe zone dimensions in the Length and Width fields.
 l Length: Distance along the plate edge

- 408 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Width: Distance to extend into the plate

 7. In the Edge list, select the plate edge that you want to place your safe zone on.
 8. Use Offset when the safe zone is not at the corner.
 l From Edge: Select the plate edge from which to offset the safe zone.
 l Distance: Distance between the plate edge (specified in From Edge) and the safe zone.

 9. Click OK.

Your safe zone will appear in the Safe Zones tab. At this point, you can either repeat steps 5 - 9 to create additional safe zones for
your scheme or use the Repositions tab to duplicate existing safe zones at a regular interval.
 
When you have finished adjusting your safe zone scheme, click the OK button at the bottom of the New Safe Zone Scheme dialog.
ProNest will store your new safe zone scheme.

Set a default safe zone scheme

 1. Open Settings.

 2. On the Standard Plate Sizes page, in the Safe Zones section, click drop-down arrow on the Scheme box.
 3. Select a default scheme from the list.
The scheme selected here will be applied to all new nests, whether the nest uses a custom plate in the plate list, an inventory plate, or just
a standard plate size.

- 409 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

9. ADVANCED EDIT

- 410 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About Advanced Edit

Advanced Edit is powerful utility that can be used to make advanced changes to parts after they have been added to the part list. With
Advanced Edit, you can create output for a single part, manually add beveled edges to a part, change part scale, add scribe text, add
loops to corners, and more.
 
To bring a part into Advanced Edit:

 l From the Edit Part List window, select a part in the part list, then click the Advanced Edit button.
or
 l From the main ProNest window, right click a part in the part list and select Advanced Edit.
or
 l Right-click a nested part and select Advanced Edit.
 

The Advanced Edit window

 
Like the main window, the Advanced Edit window has menus and toolbars along the top and a status bar along the bottom. There is a
main part editing area where part geometry can be viewed and modified. The Properties tool window appears to the side of this area, dis-
playing properties of the selected part geometry. (If you cannot see the properties window, select Properties Toolbar in the View menu.)

- 411 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Understanding part geometry

This article provides an overview of part geometry as it relates to ProNest and will help you when working with parts in Advanced Edit.

Profiles
A part consists of one or more profiles. A profile is generally classified as either an exterior profile or an interior profile.

 
The outermost profile (1) shown above is the part's exterior profile. The other two profiles (2, 3) are interior profiles, which will
be cut out of the part. Note that leads, extensions, and loops on a given profile are considered part of that profile.
 
In some cases, parts contain a third type of profile called an open profile. An open profile is a profile that doesn't form a closed circuit.

Entities
Each profile in a part can be broken down into component linear or arc motions. These motions are called entities. The number of entities
in a part depends on the complexity of that part's geometry. For instance, a circular part may consist of only one entity, whereas a part
containing a spline would consist of many entities.

 
There are nine entities in the part shown above. Notice that each profile in this part has been broken down into either linear or
arc-shaped entities. The circular interior profile (5) is a single arc motion, and therefore contains only one entity.

Start points
The start point of a given profile refers to the point on that profile where cutting begins. If leads are in use, this is the point where the
lead-in intersects the profile.

- 412 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The part pictured above has three profiles, each with its own start point.

Intersection points
Any point where two entities meet (except for the start point) is called an intersection point.

Intersection points denote the limits of a given entity. Loops can be applied at the intersection points of a part.

- 413 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Working with part geometry

In Advanced Edit you can view, select, and delete profiles, entities, start points, and intersection points.

In this article...
Select a profile
View profiles one at a time
Select an entity
Select a start point
Select an intersection point
Delete part geometry

Select profile

To select a single profile:

 1. Click the Select Profiles button ( ) in the main toolbar.

 2. Click anywhere on the profile.
 
To select multiple profiles:

 1. Click the Select Profiles button ( ) in the main toolbar.

 2. Hold the CTRL and click the profiles you want to select.
 
To select all profiles of a part:

 1. Click the Select Profiles button ( ) in the main toolbar.

 2. On the Edit menu, click Select All.

View profiles one at a time

 1. On the View menu, select View Single Profile.

 2. Use the arrows ( ) to advance through profiles on the part.

When View Single Profile is enabled, the active profile is displayed on the part and all other profiles are hidden.

Select entity

To select a single entity:

 l While in Select Mode ( ), click anywhere on the entity.

 
To select multiple entities:

- 414 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l While in Select Mode ( ), hold SHIFT and click the entities you want to select.
 
To select all entities of a part: 
 1. Select any single entity.
 2. On the Edit menu, click Select All.

Select start point (leads)

To select a single start point:

 l While in Select Mode ( ), click the leads or the start point.

 
To select multiple start points:

 l While in Select Mode ( ), hold SHIFT and click the start points you want to select.
  
To select all start points on a part: 
 1. Select any single start point.
 2. In the Edit menu, click Select All.
 
In order to easily view the start points on a part in Advanced Edit, make sure Start Points is checked in the View menu. Start points will
be indicated by a square ( ).

Select intersection point

To select an intersection point:

 l While in Select Mode ( ), click the intersection point on a part.

 
To select multiple intersection points: 

 l While in Select Mode ( ), hold SHIFT and click the intersection points you want to select.
  
To select all intersection points on a part:
 1. Select any intersection point.
 2. In the Edit menu, click Select All.
 
In order to easily view the intersection points on a part in Advanced Edit, make sure Intersection Points is checked in the View menu.
Intersection points will be indicated by a circle ( ).
 
Once a profile, entity, start point (leads), or intersection point is selected, its corresponding properties will appear in the Properties tool
window. If you cannot see the Properties tool window in Advanced Edit, check Properties Toolbar in the View menu.

Delete part geometry

To delete a profile, entity, loop, or pair of leads from a part in Advanced Edit:

- 415 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Select the part geometry (as described above).

 2. Press DELETE.

- 416 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Move or recalculate part home

The part home defines the initialization (0,0) point for the part, or the point where the cutting head will move to before the part is cut. Set-
ting the proper part home location lets the machine operator know how to place a plate on a table.
 
Part home is indicated by a yellow and white target.

Recalculating the part home

You can reset the part home automatically to one of six locations.
 
Choices: Lower Left, Upper Left, Lower Right, Upper Right, Center of Region, CAD Origin
 
The CAD Origin refers to the point of origin set when the CAD file was created.

To recalculate the part home: 

 1. With the part in Advanced Edit, on the Part menu, select Recalculate Part Home.
 2. Select a location and click OK.

Moving the part home

You can manually move the part home to a user-defined location.

 
To move the part home manually:
 1. With the part in Advanced Edit, on the Part menu, select Move Part Home.

 2. Using the target cursor ( ), click the point on the part where you want to place the part home.
A dialog will display the current position, and the new position that you just specified. If you want, you can relocate the new pos-
ition in terms of X and Y.
 3. Click OK.

- 417 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Creating output for a single part

You can create machine-ready NC output for a single part using ProNest. Creating single part output is done after a part has been pro-
cessed and added to the part list.
 
To create output for a single part:
 1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit.
 2. Make any needed changes (such as leads positioning) to your part in Advanced Edit.
 3. From the File menu, select Output Part.
The Output Part dialog will open. The selected part will be listed, with a checkbox next to it.
 4. Enter a name for the output file.
 5. Select a Home Position for your part. By default, this will match the Part home from your CNC Output settings.
 6. Click Output.
Your output file will be created in the specified location.

- 418 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Modifying the cut sequence within a single part

You can manually change the cut sequence for profiles within a single part using Advanced Edit. This applies only to parts that contain
more than one profile.
 
To modify the cut sequence of part profiles:
 1. With the part in Advanced Edit, on the Part menu, select Cut Sequence.
The cut sequence number of each profile in the part will appear.

 2. Click each profile that you want to change.

-or-

Click the Clear Cut Sequence toolbar button ( ) to remove the entire sequence.
 3. Click each profile in the order that you want them cut.
 4. Click Close on the Cut Sequence toolbar.

- 419 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Change part scale

From Advanced Edit, you can change part size proportionally using scaling. Note that changing the scale of a part must be done before
the part is nested.
 
To scale a part:
 1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit.

 2. Click the Scale button.

 3. With the cursor, drag a line on your part.
The length of this line will be used to calculate the DX (delta or change in x), DY (delta or change in y) and the distance.
 4. In the Scale (%) box, enter a percentage to resize your part by.
You can also enter a value for DX or DY, and part dimensions will change proportionally.
 5. Click OK.
Part dimensions will be resized proportionally. Note that this will not affect the size of any leads, extensions, loops, and/or tabs on
the part.

- 420 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Flip leads
This is useful in special situations where you need to change an interior profile to an exterior profile, or vice versa.
 

When leads are flipped, the selected pair of leads (both lead-in and lead-out) is mirrored over the profile that it is on. The start point and
any leads properties (style, size, etc.) will remain unchanged.
 
To flip a pair of leads:
 1. With a part in Advanced Edit, select the pair of leads by clicking on them.

 2. Click the Flip Leads button.

- 421 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Split profile
You can select one or more entities on a single profile and split them off into separate profiles. Splitting a profile into multiple component
profiles can be used to apply specific settings to different sides of a part or to control the cut sequence of a part with a beveled edge.
 
To split a profile:
 1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit.

 2. While in Select mode ( ), click the entity that you want to split off into a new profile. You can select multiple entities using
CTRL + click.
 3. In the Entity menu, select Split Profile.
The entity will be split into a separate profile. The part geometry will not change, though the start and end points of the newly-cre-
ated profile will be considered open profiles.

- 422 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Split entity
You can split an entity into multiple component entities. This is used primarily for blind beveling applications where only one section of
an entity requires a beveled edge.
 

 
To split an entity:
 1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit.

 2. While in Select mode ( ), click the entity that you want to split. The selected entity will appear blue.
 3. On the Entity menu, select Split Entity.
The Split Entity dialog will appear.
 4. Using one of the Split Options (see below), select how you want the entity to be split.
 5. Click OK.
The entity will be split into two separate entities. The part geometry will not change. Transition loops can be added at the ends of
each new entity.

Tip: In order to clearly see the limits of an entity, make sure that Intersection Points is checked on the View menu of Advanced Edit.

Split Options
Angle value from point
This applies to arc-shaped entities only. The greater the angle, the further the split point ( ) will be from the specified point ( or ).
 
Coordinate specification
You will only need to modify one value, as X and Y are automatically synched so that split point ( ) remains on the selected entity.
 
Distance from point
The distance along the entity from the specified point ( or ) to the split point ( ).
 
Equal split of selected entity
The selected entity will be divided in half.
 

- 423 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Close open profiles

If you have imported a part with an open profile that forms a gap, you can close the gap using Advanced Edit.
 

To be considered an open profile, a gap must exceed the Open profile tolerance specified in the Importing Parts settings page.

Important: Closing open profiles with ProNest can be effective when used with relatively small, linear entities. However, the best way
of closing an open profile is to fix the part's geometry using an external CAD editor.

To close an open profile:

 1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit.
 2. In the View menu, make sure Open Profiles is selected.
Diamond-shaped markers ( ) will indicate the edges of the gap.
 3. In the Part menu, select Close Open Profiles.
 4. Click inside a diamond marker to indicate where the connecting line should begin.
 5. Click the other diamond marker to draw a line.
 6. Select the profile type (Exterior, Interior, or Open) that matches the type of profile that is being closed.
 7. Select the appropriate kerf value for that profile type.
 8. Right-click on the part to close the profile.

- 424 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Saving changes to a part

Any changes made to a part in Advanced Edit will not go into effect until those changes are saved.
 
To save changes to a part:
 l On the File menu, select Save Changes.
All changes made to that part (such as scaling, added scribe text, modified leads, relocated part home, etc.) will be saved. Note that these
changes apply to the specific part in the part list, and not to the part's source file.

Saving Advanced Edit tokens

You can make your changes to a part in Advanced Edit permanent by selecting Save Advanced Edit tokens and Save part file tokens in
the Importing Parts (Advanced) page of your ProNest settings ( ). This will save all part changes made in Advanced Edit to the part's
token file.
 
The next time the CAD file is imported from the part source, the part's token file will be loaded instead. In this way, changes made to parts
in Advanced Edit can be kept after the current job is output.

Note: Saving Advanced Edit changes using tokens applies to CAD files only.

- 425 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Entity properties
When an entity is selected in Advanced Edit, its properties will be displayed in the Properties toolbar. When modifying the properties of
an entity, be sure to click the Apply button after you have finished making your changes.

Geometry
Start point
The location of the point at the beginning of the selected entity, expressed in terms of X and Y.
 
Center point
The center point if the selected arc were extended to form a complete circle. This is a location expressed in terms of X, Y and applies to
arc-shaped entities only.
 
Length
For straight entities this is a linear distance; for arc-shaped entities this is the arc length.
 
Radius
The radius if the selected arc were extended to form a complete circle. This is a distance expressed in linear units and applies to arc-
shaped entities only.
 

Parameters
Quality
The quality assigned to the selected entity. Assigning quality to an entity can be used to apply specific cutting parameters to that entity.
 
Pulse cut
Pulse cutting is a special technique used with laser cutting machines. When selected, pulse cut instructions will be inserted into the CNC
code for the selected entity.
 

Bevel Properties
This section is available as part of the Bevel Cutting module.
 
Gradual bevel
With gradual bevel, you can transition from one bevel angle to another along one or more entities. When this box is checked, you will be
prompted to enter a bevel cut type for the Start and End of the selected entity. It is recommended that you use the same cut type for both
the Start and End, however you can transition from one bevel type to another (for instance, V to A) depending on your machine's cap-
ability.
 
The most important aspect of gradual bevel is to set a different Angle for the Start and End of the selected entity. When the gradual bevel
part is cut, the cutting head will gradually transition from the Start angle to the End angle.
 

- 426 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The beveled edge pictured above is a "V cut" with a Start angle of 15° and an End angle of 45°. (This assumes a positive ori-
entation is used and that the part will be cut in a clockwise direction)

Note: Gradual beveling is possible only with certain types of machines and bevel cutting heads. Please make sure that your
machine is capable of making transitional bevel cuts before using this feature.

Start
The bevel conditions set at the beginning of the selected entity. The properties in this section will be applied to the entire selected entity
(unless gradual bevel is used).
 
Cut type 
You can specify a type of bevel cut to apply to the selected entity. The list of available bevel cut types is limited by the types listed in your
Bevel XLS.
 
Choices: I (no bevel), V, A, X, Y, Y-Bottom, K

See "Bevel types" on page 829 for an overview of different cut types.

Pass
For the selected entity, each pass of the cutting head is listed here. For single-pass beveled edges, this will simply be Pass. For multi-pass
bevel edges, Top Pass, Land Pass, and/or Bottom Pass will be listed, depending on the Cut type selected.
 
For each pass, you can specify a bevel Angle. Once a bevel Cut type and Angle are selected, Feedrate, Kerf, Current, and Voltage will auto-
matically use the associated values from your Bevel spreadsheet.
 
Angle 
This defines the angle of the beveled cut, in relation to the top angle orientation (+/-). 
 
Units: Angle in degrees

It is recommended that you use the drop-down list when selecting an angle for a given pass.
 

 
This list of available bevel angles reflects the angles in your Bevel spreadsheet, which already have associated settings val-
ues.

- 427 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

End
This is the bevel cut type and angle that is assigned at the end of the selected entity and is used for the purposes of gradual beveling.
 

- 428 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Profile properties
When a profile is selected in Advanced Edit, its properties will be displayed in the Properties toolbar.

Note: When modifying the properties of a profile, be sure to click the Apply button after you have finished making your changes.

Region
The Min X, Min Y, Max X, and Max Y coordinates describe the minimum rectangular space that the part occupies on the X,Y plane.
 

Attributes
Process
The process assigned to the selected profile. For setups that have more than one cut process (for example, plasma and oxyfuel), you can
switch the cut process assigned to the profile.
 
Drill-enabled setups allow you to change the process for a circular profile between cut (plasma, oxyfuel, and so on) and drilling. See
Changing tool assignments for holes for more information.
 
Kerf
The kerf command assigned to the selected profile (cut processes only)
 
Choices: Left, Right, Off

Cut Direction
Generally, ProNest will process parts so that interior profiles are cut in a counter-clockwise direction and exterior profiles are cut in a
clockwise direction.
 
For cut and scribe processes, you can change the direction in which the selected profile is cut.
 
Choices: Clockwise, Counterclockwise

Tip: To view cut direction in Advanced Edit:

 l On the View menu, select Cut Direction.

Tool Name
When the profile's process is Drilling, this is the name of the assigned tool. You can change the tool assigned to a hole using this box. See
Changing tool assignments for holes for more information.
 
Single drill tool, no pilot drill
Drill tool with a pilot drill
Compound tool
Missing tool

Description
For drilled profiles, the description of the assigned drill tool
 
Diameter
For drilled profiles, the diameter of the assigned drill tool

- 429 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Cut Sequence Number Position
Location on the profile the cut sequence number will be displayed
 
Choices: Upper Left, Middle Left, Lower Left, Upper Center, Middle Center, Lower Center, Upper Right, Middle right, Lower
Right, Start Point

Tip: To view cut sequence in Advanced Edit:

 l On the View menu, select Cut Sequence.

Slug Destroy
Force slug destroy to be applied to the selected profile, even if it doesn't qualify based on Slug Destroy settings. Clearing this box will
remove slug destroy from the profile.
 
Slug destroy can be applied to interior profiles only. If the interior is too small (based on the Minimum Profile Dimension setting), slug
destroy can not be applied.
 

- 430 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Start point properties

When a profile's start point is selected in Advanced Edit, the X,Y coordinates of the start point and properties of the lead-in and lead-out
are displayed in the Properties window. When modifying the properties of a start point, be sure to click the Apply button after you have
finished making your changes.

Properties
Locked
When locked, lead position on the profile (start/end point) and lead properties (style, size, angle, etc.) will not change during any manual
or automatic operation in ProNest. This includes automatic nesting, collision avoidance, manual or automatic move leads, etc.
 
Locked leads are indicated by a padlock.

To lock the leads on a part:

 1. In Advanced Edit, select one or more leads (start points) for the profiles in your part. You can use SHIFT + click to select multiple
start points.
 2. In View menu, make sure that the Properties Toolbar is selected.
 3. In the Properties pane, under Start Point properties, select the Locked checkbox.
 4. Click Apply.
Lock overtravel
You can lock only the overtravel/undertravel on leads, while allowing other lead properties (placement, style, size, etc.) to change. This is
done primarily when leads use undertravel to form a tab and you want to retain that tab during automatic nesting, collision avoidance,
etc.
 
Locked overtravel is indicated with a white padlock ( ), while leads that are totally locked are marked with a yellow padlock ( ).
 
Style 
The style of a lead defines its basic shape.
 
Choices for Lead In: (None), Arc, Linear, Spiral, Lock-9, Lock-7, Step, Diagonal Step, T-Lock
 
Choices for Lead Out: (None), Arc, Linear
 
To change a lead style:
 1. Click the right-hand side of the Style row (where it shows the actual style used).
 2. Click the down arrow and select a new style from the list.
 3. Click OK.
 
Size
For the linear style, Size specifies the length of the lead. For the arc style, Size specifies the radius of the arc. For all other lead styles, Size
controls the scale of the lead.
 

- 431 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.5 in. for a lead-in, 0.25 in. for a lead-out
 
Angle
For linear leads, the angle of a lead-in is defined with respect to the first motion after the lead. A 0° lead-in will lead straight into the first
cut. Positive lead-in angles are defined clockwise from the 0° position, so a 90° lead-in will cause a sharp left-turn into the first cut. Lead-
out angles are defined in a similar fashion with a 0° lead-out extending straight out of the last cut. Positive lead-out angles are defined
counter-clockwise from the 0° position, so a 90° lead-out will cause a sharp left-turn out of the last cut.
 
For arc leads, angle defines the distance the lead will extend around a circle. A 90° lead would extend one quarter of the way around,
whereas a 180° lead would extend half way around - forming a semicircle.
 
Units: Degrees
Range: -360.0 to 360.0°
Recommended Value: 0.0° for corner leads, 180.0° for a side lead-in, 90.0° for a side lead-out
 

Example:
 
The following part has two sets of leads: a pair of linear corner leads (on the exterior profile) and a pair of arc side leads (on the
interior profile).

The Angle of both corner leads is set to 0°. The side lead-in has Angle of 180°, the side lead-out has an Angle of 90°.

 
Extension
The tip of the lead-in (or lead-out) will be extended by this distance.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
 

Example:
 
The following parts have different Extension values. The arrows along the part profiles indicate cut direction.
 

- 432 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 1 Figure 2
   
The part displayed in Figure 1 has two exterior arc-style The part displayed in Figure 2 also has two exterior arc-style leads. The
leads. The Extension for both the lead-in and lead-out is lead-in has an Extension of 1.0 in. and the lead-out has an Extension of
0.0 in. 0.0 in. Notice that the lead-in for this part is longer than the lead-in of the
part from Figure 1.

 
Overtravel  
This value applies only to the lead-out. If this value is positive (overtravel), then the torch/head will travel past the start point before cut-
ting the lead-out. If this value is negative (undertravel), then the torch/head will begin cutting the lead-out before reaching the start
point.
 
Units: Distance
Range: -100.0 to 100.0 in.
Recommended Value: 0.0 in.
 

Example:
 
The following parts have different Over/Under travel values. The arrows along the part profiles indicate cut direction.

Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5

     
The part displayed in Figure 3 has two exter- The part displayed in Figure 4 also has two The part displayed in Figure 5 has two exter-
ior, arc-style leads with an Over/Under exterior, arc-style leads with a positive Over- ior, arc-style leads with a negative Over-
travel value of 0.0 in. The start point /Under travel value of 1.0 in. The distance /Under travel value of -1.0 in. This part
(where the lead-in intersects the part pro- between the start point and end point of exhibits undertravel. The lead-out occurs
file) and end point (where the lead-out this part is 1.0 in. The portion of part profile before the torch finishes cutting the entire
intersects the part profile) are the same. that is highlighted in yellow represents the profile. As a result, the part in Figure 5 will
overtravel, which will be cut twice by the be connected to the plate by a 1.0 in. wide
torch. strip of material after it is cut.

- 433 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Quality
Assigns a quality number to the selected lead. Assigning quality to a lead can be used to apply specific cutting parameters to that
motion.
 
Choices: Inherit, 1..255

Inherit - Lead will have the same quality as the adjacent entity.
 
0..255 - The selected lead will be assigned the quality number specified.
 
The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes based on the qual-
ity number.
 
Pierce Style
See Leads properties for a detailed description

- 434 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Tab properties
Length
The distance between the limits ( ) of the tab. Tab length represents the distance along the original part geometry that will remain
uncut.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 in.
 

 
Microjoint
When selected, the tab will be a microjoint. When cleared, it will be processed as a normal tab.
 
Microjoints are machine-applied tabs. A place holder is inserted into the CNC code which the cutting machine translates into a tab when
the CNC code is run.

Note: This setting will only have an effect on machines with microjoint support.

 
Lead-In/Lead-Out
By default, tab leads are applied based on Leads settings. If you are using a leads spreadsheet, you can use the Tab Lead column to apply
tab-specific leads. See Leads XLS: Format for more information.
 
Style
The style of a lead defines its basic shape. If set to a value other than (None), a lead-in or lead-out will be placed at then end of the tab
where the profile begins again. Available tab styles are based on the tab macros (*.mti) present in your Macros folder.
 
Default Choices : (None), Arc, Linear
 

Note:  l By default, tab macros are stored in the root Macros folder specified on the Settings page in Preferences (go to File >
Preferences, then click Settings in the left pane).
 l If you are using a bevel setup, tab macros are stored in the Macros folder specified on the Bevel settings page.

Size
For the linear style, this specifies the length of the tab lead. For the arc style, this specifies the radius of the arc.
 
Units: Distance

- 435 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.

 

 
Angle
The angle of a tab lead is defined with respect to the motion on the profile next to the lead. A 0° lead will go straight into or out of the
profile, while a 90° lead will be perpendicular to the adjacent motion.
 
Units: Degrees
Range: -360.0 to 360.0°

A 90° tab lead-in, with no lead-out

Important: Setting the angle to 180° or more may result in a lead-in/out that cuts into your part. Use caution when setting the tab
lead-in angle.

Extension
The tip of the tab lead-in or lead-out will be extended by this distance.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.
 
Quality
Assigns a default quality number to manually-added tabs. Assigning quality to a tab can be used to apply specific cutting parameters to
that motion.

Inherit
Tab will have the same quality as the next adjacent entity.

0 - 255
Tab will be assigned the quality number specified.
 
The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes based on the qual-
ity number.
 

- 436 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dwell
Time in seconds that the cutting head will dwell when cutting resumes after tab.

Note: This field is used for plasma setups and only appears if the selected lead style (macro) supports it.

Pierce time
The time in seconds that the cutting head should remain stationary while piercing the beginning of the lead-in.

Note: This field is used for plasma setups and only appears if the selected lead style (macro) supports it.

Pierce percentage
The height of the pierce. This a expressed as a percentage of the cut height.

Note: This field is used for plasma setups and only appears if the selected lead style (macro) supports it.

Transfer height
The height at which the arc is transferred. This expressed as a percentage of the cut height.

Note: This field is used for plasma setups and only appears if the selected lead style (macro) supports it.

- 437 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Loop properties
Loop style
The style of a loop defines its basic shape. Available loop styles are based on the loop macros (*.mtl) present in your Macros folder.
 
Standard Choices for Loop Style: (None), cone, diamond, half-cone, side
 

Notes:  l By default, loop macros are stored in the root Macros folder specified on the Settings page in Preferences (go to File
> Preferences, then click Settings in the left pane).
 l If you are using a bevel setup, loop macros are stored in the Macros folder specified on the Bevel settings page.

Size
The scale of the loop
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 in.
 

Dwell
Time in seconds that the cutting head will dwell at the intersection point

Quality
Assigns a default quality number to loops. Assigning quality to a loop can be used to apply specific cutting parameters to that motion.
 
Choices: Inherit, 1..255

Inherit - Loop will have the same quality as the next adjacent entity.
 
0..255 - Loop will be assigned the quality number specified.
 
The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes based on the qual-
ity number.
 

- 438 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Bevel side view

The Bevel Side View tool window displays a cross section of the selected entity. This is used to preview beveled edges. In order to view
this tool window, Bevel Side View must be selected on the View menu of Advanced Edit.
 
Consider the following 3-D illustration of a rectangular part with one "V" Cut beveled edge:

If the beveled entity on this part were selected in Advanced Edit, a cross section of the entity would appear in the bevel side view as fol-
lows:
 

Gradual Bevel
When a gradual bevel is applied to an entity, the bevel angle is different at various points along that entity.
 l You can use the slider in the Bevel Side View tool window to view the progression of the gradual bevel.

 l Start Cut Angle ( ) will display the bevel side view at the beginning of the selected entity.

 l End Cut Angle ( ) will display the bevel side view at the end of the selected entity.

- 439 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding scribe text to a part

In Advanced Edit, you can add scribe text to a part. Scribe text is assigned to the Scribe Process of your machine.

Apply scribe text

 1. In Advanced Edit, click the Scribe Text button.

 2. Using the cursor ( ), click the point on the part where the scribe text should be placed.
By default, the text will be the name of the source file for that part (for example, "Rectangle.vsp").
 3. In the Properties pane, you can change the text, font, size, angle, and assigned process of the scribe text.

 l To add scribe text variables, click the browse button ( ) in the Text box. For more info, see Variables in scribe text.
 l The list of available fonts comes from your CAD Font preferences.
 4. When you're finished, right-click anywhere in the display area to exit Scribe Text mode.
The scribe text will be added to the part.

Note: If you cannot see the Properties toolbar in Advanced Edit, go to the View menu and select Properties Toolbar.

Changing existing scribe text

Scribe text can be selected and modified:

 1. In Advanced Edit, click the Scribe Text button.

 2. Using the cursor ( ), click the text that you want to modify.
 3. Make your changes in the selected text. You can reposition the text or modify its contents in the Properties pane.
 4. When you're finished, right-click anywhere in the display area to exit Scribe Text mode.
 

Note: If you select existing scribe text while in Entity Select mode (the default mode in Advanced Edit), you will only be selecting the
individual entities in the text, and will not be able to use the scribe text Properties pane.

Moving scribe text

Scribe text can easily be repositioned using the mouse cursor.

 1. In Advanced Edit, click the Scribe Text button.

 2. Using the cursor ( ), click and drag the text that you want to move.

- 440 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 3. Right-click anywhere in the display area to exit Scribe Text mode.

Deleting scribe text

 1. In Advanced Edit, click the Scribe Text button.

 2. Using the cursor ( ), click the text that you want to delete.
 3. Press the DELETE key.
 4. Right-click anywhere in the display area to exit Scribe Text mode.

- 441 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Variables in scribe text

Variables can be used in scribe text, providing a convenient way of adding standard information (such as heat number, part name, mater-
ial, etc.) to your parts for marking. Variables, which act as placeholders for actual values, can be added in Advanced Edit in ProNest or
included as text in the CAD file.
 

In ProNest, the part's scribe text variables will appear on the part during nesting. When the part is cut, the actual value of the variable will
be scribed. You can view the part as it will be cut in Cut Simulation mode.

Add a text variable in Advanced Edit

 1. In Advanced Edit, click the Scribe Text button.

 2. Using the cursor ( ), click an area on the part to place the text.

 3. In the Properties pane, in the Text box, click the browse button ( ) to open the Edit Field dialog.
By default, the part's name will be used.
 4. Enter any combination of text and variables. You can double-click a variable in the list to add it to the formula.

 l Unlike other variables in ProNest, which are surrounded by percent signs (%), scribe text variables must be sur-
rounded by dollar signs ($).
 l Abbreviations can be used for displaying variables if there is limited space on the part. Abbreviations only affect
how the variable is displayed in ProNest, they do not have any effect on how the text will actually be scribed.

 5. Click OK.

 6. Right-click anywhere in the display area to exit Scribe Text mode.

Add a text variable in CAD drawing

When you insert text into a CAD drawing, you can add scribe text variables that will be recognized by ProNest when the part is imported.
Be sure to surround the ProNest variable name with dollar signs and curly brackets, as follows:

{$variable$}

Refer to the table below for a list of available scribe text variables.

View actual value of scribe text variable

To view how the variable text on the part would be scribed by your machine, use Cut Simulation mode:
 l In either Advanced Edit or the main nesting window, click the Cut Simulation toolbar button.

- 442 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

List of available scribe text variables

Variable Abbreviation Comment

PartName PN  

Customer Cust This must be a valid customer listed in your Customer Database

Revision RV  

SequenceNo Sq The part's cut sequence number on the nest

QtyRequired Req  

QtyNested Nst  

Material Mat  

Thickness Thk  

Grade Gr  

InventoryPlateName Inv If the part is nested on an inventory plate, the plate name will be scribed

StockNo STNo If the part is nested on an inventory plate, the plate's stock number will be scribed

HeatNo HTNo If the part is nested on an inventory plate, the plate's heat number will be scribed

Class CL  

NestNumber NN  

PartNestInstanceNumber NI Used for serialization. On a given nest, parts will be numbered in the order that they're
cut. Numbering resets going from one nest to another.

PartJobInstanceNumber JI Used for serialization. Nested parts will be numbered in the order that they're cut, but
numbering will continue from one nest to another.
 
Note: If a nest is cut more than once (as with Cut Number of Times), there will be a gap in
the numerical sequence following that nest.

Remarks Rem  

Misc1 M1  

Misc2 M2  

Misc3 M3  

JobFilename JFN The file name of the job associated with that nest/part will be scribed

JobId JId This is the Reference property of a part.

- 443 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Variable Abbreviation Comment

 
Note: This is not related to the JobID field in the ProNest database, which is used to track
jobs.

Reference Ref This is the Reference property of a part. Identical to JobId.

JobDescription JDesc The description of the job associated with that nest/part will be scribed

WorkOrderNo WONo For work order parts, the work order number will be scribed

PONumber PONo For work order parts, the purchase order number will be scribed

Example variable expressions

You can create scribe text and use the variables listed above in mathematical equations. This may be useful for applying serial numbers or
other data to parts or plates.
 
Surround mathematical equations with square brackets. For instance:

{$PartName$ [$NestNumber$+100]}

Several examples to help you get started:

 
Example 1
Every part on a nest is scribed with part name, followed by the letter N, and then nest number, where the number starts at 30000:

{$PartName$ N[30000+$NestNumber$]}

Result for a part named "ArcTrap" that is nested on Nest 1:

ArcTrap N30001

The same part nested on Nest 2 would read:

ArcTrap N30002

 
Example 2
Every part on a nest is inscribed with a sequence number. The first digit is the nest number and the last digits represent the cut
sequence order on that nest:

{[$NestNumber$*1000+$SequenceNo$]}

Result for parts on Nest 1:

- 444 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Example 3
Nested parts are scribed with the heat number of the inventory plate that they are nested on, part name, and quantity nested out of the
total required quantity.

{$HeatNo$ $PartName$ $PartJobInstanceNumber$/$QtyRequired$}

Result:

- 445 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About loops
Generally, loops are used either to ensure a precise corner on a part or for parts with beveled edges. A loop can be applied at any inter-
section point (any point where two entities meet, excluding the start point) on a part.
 

A part with three loops added at the corners

 
Loops are added to a part in one of two ways: manually (using Advanced Edit) or automatically (using Bevel spreadsheets). Manually
added loops are generally used in scenarios where you want to ensure a sharp corner on a non-beveled part; eliminating rounding at the
corners of the part.
 
For beveling applications, loop placement is typically done automatically using Bevel spreadsheets. However, you can also manually add
transition loops between beveled entities on a part-by-part basis.

Loop macros
The number and type of available loops in ProNest is limited by the loop macros (*.mtl) that are present in your Macros folder. A loop
macro contains the geometric information needed by ProNest to create a given loop.

Notes:  l By default, loop macros are stored in the root Macros folder specified on the Settings page in Preferences (go to File
> Preferences, then click Settings in the left pane).
 l If you are using a bevel setup, loop macros are stored in the Macros folder specified on the Bevel settings page.

- 446 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Default loop settings

These settings define the initial loop properties that will be used when adding loops to a part in Advanced Edit. Default loop settings can
be accessed from the Edit menu of Advanced Edit. Note that default loop settings do not appear in the ProNest settings ( ) tree.

Loop style
The style of a loop defines its basic shape. Available loop styles are based on the loop macros (*.mtl) present in your Macros folder.
 
Standard Choices for Loop Style: (None), cone, diamond, half-cone, side
 

Notes:  l By default, loop macros are stored in the root Macros folder specified on the Settings page in Preferences (go to File
> Preferences, then click Settings in the left pane).
 l If you are using a bevel setup, loop macros are stored in the Macros folder specified on the Bevel settings page.

Size
The scale of the loop
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 in.

Dwell
Time in seconds that the cutting head will dwell at the intersection point

Quality
Assigns a default quality number to loops. Assigning quality to a loop can be used to apply specific cutting parameters to that motion.
 
Choices: Inherit, 1..255

Inherit - Loop will have the same quality as the next adjacent entity.
 
0..255 - Loop will be assigned the quality number specified.
 
The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes based on the qual-
ity number.

- 447 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Working with loops

With Advanced Edit, you can manually add a loop to a part. Manually added loops are typically used for intersecting non-bevel entities
where you want to ensure a precise corner. Loops that have been added to a part manually or using Bevel spreadsheets can be modified
or deleted using Advanced Edit.

In this article...
Add loops
Modify loops
Delete loops

Add loops

To manually add a loop to a profile:

 1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit.

 2. Click the Modify Loops button.

 3. Using the wrench cursor ( ), click the intersection point where you want to apply the loop.
The loop will be applied based on your Default loop settings.

Note: This method of adding loops is advisable for non-bevel loops. Typically, transition loops between beveled entities should be
added automatically using a Bevel spreadsheet.

Modify loops

To modify an existing loop:

 1. With the part in Advanced Edit, make sure that you are in Select mode.
 2. On the View menu, make sure that Properties Toolbar is checked.
 3. Click the loop that you want to modify.
The selected loop will turn blue.
 4. Using the Properties toolbar, change loop properties as necessary.
 5. Click Apply.

Delete loops

To delete a loop:
 1. With the part in Advanced Edit, make sure that you are in Select mode.
 2. Right-click the loop and select Delete.

- 448 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Editing tabs
With Advanced Edit, you can manually add a tab (a gap in a profile that is used to hold a part in place during cutting) to a part. Tabs that
have been added to a part manually or using AutoTab can be modified or deleted using Advanced Edit.

In this article...
Add tabs
Modify tabs
Delete tabs
Limitations

Add tabs

To manually add a tab to a profile:

 1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit.

 2. Click the Modify Tabs button.

 3. Using the wrench cursor ( ), click the location on the profile where you want to apply the tab.

Modify tabs

Once a tab has been added you can modify the properties of that tab.
 
To modify an existing tab:

 1. With the part in Advanced Edit, make sure that you are in Select mode.
 2. On the View menu, make sure that Properties Toolbar is checked.
 3. Click the tab that you want to modify.
The selected tab will turn blue.
 4. Using the Properties toolbar, change tab properties as necessary.
 5. Click Apply.

Delete tabs

To delete a tab:
 1. With the part in Advanced Edit, make sure that you are in Select mode.
 2. Right-click the tab and select Delete.

Limitations
Tabs can't span multiple entities in a profile. The entity must be long enough to fit the tab length within it.
 
If the Tab Length fits within the entity, the tab can be applied:

- 449 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Tab Length (cd) is shorter than entity length (ab); tab is applied successfully.
 
When Tab Length is longer than entity length, tab cannot be placed.

On the left side of this profile, entity length (ab) is too small for the tab (cd).
 
Attempting to manually apply a tab to this type of profile may result in the following error:

Tab lead exceeds available length

 
Likewise, AutoTab will not add tabs to these areas of a profile.

- 450 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About Part Cut-Up

With the Part Cut-Up feature, you can divide a part into smaller segments. This can be useful if you have a large part that will not fit onto
a plate and want to break the part into smaller sections that can be nested and cut. Typically, after the sections of the part have been nes-
ted, output, and cut, they are then assembled to form the larger, original part.
 

Part Cut-Up can be applied to a part after it has been added to the part list. Nested parts must be un-nested before Part Cut-Up can be
applied.
 
To enter Part Cut-Up mode:
 1. In the Edit Part List window, select a part in the part list.

 2. In the Preview window, click the Advanced Edit button.

 3. From the Part menu, select Part Cut-Up.
The Part Cut-Up toolbar will appear. The green grid lines ( ) show where the part will be divided. Initially these lines are
applied based on your Part Cut-Up settings.

Part Cut-Up toolbar

The Part Cut-Up toolbar will become active upon entering Part Cut-Up mode. Like all other toolbars in ProNest, this toolbar can be free-
floating or docked. The toolbar contains the following functions: 
 

Toolbar
Name Description
button

Edit Lines From Edit Lines mode, you can add, move, or delete cut-up lines.
   

Preview Preview mode will show the part as it would appear after being cut.
   

Add Horizontal Line You can add a horizontal cut-up line to the grid. Horizontal lines are specified in terms of where
they intersect the Y-axis.
 

Add Vertical Line You can add a vertical cut-up line to the grid. Vertical lines are specified in terms of where they
intersect the X-axis.
 

Clear If this is clicked when the Edit Lines button is selected, all of the cut-up lines will deleted.
 

- 451 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Toolbar
Name Description
button

Calculate New Lines This will open the Part Cut-Up settings page, where you can make adjustments to Part Cut-Up
settings and apply those changes to the current part.

- 452 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using Part Cut-Up

Upon entering Part Cut-Up mode, a grid of cut-up lines is automatically applied to a part. The cut-up grid can be adjusted in a number of
ways.

In this article...
Add cut-up lines
Move cut-up lines
Delete cut-up lines
Accept your changes
Save your changes

Add cut-up lines

To manually add a cut-up line:

 1. Click either the Add Horizontal Line button ( ) or Add Vertical Line button ( ), depending on the type of line you
want to add.
 2. In the Offset box, specify the point along the X or Y axis where you want to place the line.
 3. Click OK.
 
To automatically add a entire cut-up grid:

 1. Delete the existing grid by clicking the Clear button.

 2. Click the Calculate New Lines button.

 3. Adjust your Part Cut-Up settings, as necessary.
 4. Click OK.
New part cut-up lines will be applied according to your settings.

Move cut-up lines

To move an existing cut-up line:

 l Click and drag the line using the cursor ( ).

Delete cut-up lines

To delete a cut-up line:

 l With the Edit Lines button ( ) selected, right-click a line and select Delete Line.
 
To delete an entire cut-up grid:

- 453 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l With the Edit Lines button ( ) selected, click the Clear button.

Accept your changes

Once cut-up lines are in the correct position, click Close on the part cut up toolbar and then click Yes to accept the part cut up lines. The
part will then be segmented into smaller parts. Each of these new, smaller parts will be displayed individually in the Advanced Edit win-

dow. You can use the arrows ( ) to scroll through the newly-created parts in Advanced Edit.

Save your changes

To save your changes:

 l From the File menu, select Save Changes.
or
 l Click Return to Nesting and click Save when prompted to save your changes.
When you return to the main ProNest window all of the parts created will be added to the part list, ready to be nested.

- 454 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About Edit Cut Paths mode

Using the Edit Cut Path feature in Advanced Edit, you can modify the cut path and direction defined for CLC parts.
 
To enter Edit Cut Paths mode for a CLC part:
 1. Right-click a CLC part and select Advanced Edit.
The CLC part will be brought into Advanced Edit.

 2. Once in Advanced Edit, click the Edit Cut Paths button.
This will display the automatically generated cut paths, which can be modified.

Edit Cut Path toolbar

There are several tools on the Edit Cut Path toolbar that can be useful when editing the cut path.
 

Edit Cut
Path Tool- Name Description
bar Button

Previous  Backs up the cut path to the previous intersection. If there is no previous intersection, the cut path is deleted.
Decision   
Point

Previous  Backs up the cut path one motion. Many times, there is no active intersection after this kind of back up. Pre-
Motion vious Motion can back up until the selected cut path is deleted.
 

Next  Advances the cut path forward one motion. This is enabled only when the direction is established and the cut
Motion path is not terminated at an intersection. This is usually available after Previous Motion is selected.
 

Next  Advances the cut path forward until the next intersection that has two or more choices. This button is only
Decision  enabled when the direction is established and the cut path is not terminated at an intersection. This usually
Point
available after Previous Motion is selected.
 

Reverse  This will reverse the cut path direction for selected cut paths. If there is an active decision point, that point will
Cut Dir- change.
ection
 

Calculate  Calculates the cut path for any remaining cuts. If this is clicked before any cut paths are generated, it will cal-
New  culate the cut paths for all the common line cuts. If this button is clicked after several cut paths have been cre-
Paths
ated, it will fill in the cut path for the rest of the cuts.
 

- 455 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Edit Cut
Path Tool- Name Description
bar Button

Delete All This will delete all of the cut paths assigned to your part.
 

- 456 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using Edit Cut Paths

The cut paths of CLC parts can be modified by bringing a CLC part into Advanced Edit and selecting Edit Cut Paths in the Part menu.

In this article...
Selecting cut paths
Deleting cut paths
Defining a new cut path

Selecting cut paths

You can select a single cut path, multiple cut paths, or all cut paths for your CLC part.
 
To select a single cut path:
 l Click anywhere on the path.
When a cut path is selected it will turn blue in color, as depicted below:

 
To select multiple cut paths: 
 l Hold SHIFT and click multiple cut paths.
 
To select all cut paths:
 l On the Edit menu, click Select All.

You can use the navigational arrows ( ) to select different cut paths on your part.

Deleting cut paths

You can delete a selected cut path or delete all cut paths (both selected and non-selected) for your CLC part.
 
To delete a selected cut path:
 l Right click on the selected cut path and select Delete.
 
To delete all cut paths:

 l Click the Delete All button.

All cut paths on your part will be deleted.

- 457 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Defining a new cut path

The first step to defining a new cut path is to delete the existing paths. Once paths are deleted, you can click on the part profile where
you want to begin the new cut path. Directional arrows will appear on the part.
 

 
Moving the mouse pointer over one of the directional arrows will show the start point and cut path up to the next decision point. You
can click on one of the directional arrows to choose a cut path direction.
 
After an initial cut path direction is chosen, ProNest will advance the cut path forward to the next intersection, where you will need to
specify the next direction that the cut path should take.

As you progress, two or more directional arrows will appear at each decision point until the cut path is complete. When a cut path is com-
pleted, it will remain active until another action is taken.

Note: You can also use the Cut Path Editing window to define cut paths. This window can be opened by selecting Cut Path Editing
on the View menu.

- 458 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

10. NESTING
What is a nest?
Nests are comprised of parts that have been positioned on a plate in a particular orientation. In order to create output for a nest in
ProNest, a nest must have at least one part added to it.
 

A nest with 24 parts nested

 
Creating a nest is a fundamental operation in ProNest. Nesting can be done manually, where parts are added to the plate one at a time. A
part or group of parts can also be arrayed onto a nest. If you have purchased an Automatic Nesting module, nesting can also be done
automatically.
 
Nests are created and modified from the main ProNest window, after parts have been added to the part list. The first phase of nesting
involves adding parts to your nest. Once the parts are nested, many features used to modify the nest will become available. Parts on the
nest can be moved, rotated, clustered, tabbed, duplicated, and mirrored; cut direction can be changed; and leads can be adjusted. The
plate can be cropped and the cutting sequence can be changed. When all modifications have been made, the nest can be saved with
your job and then output as a CNC file.

- 459 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Creating a new nest

In the main ProNest window, there is always a default plate to begin nesting on. You can begin nesting on this plate immediately without
explicitly creating a new nest. However, you can create a new nest at any time using the plate of your choice.

Create a new nest

 1. On the Home tab, click New Nest.

-or-

Click the New Nest tab.

 2. Select the plate and safe zone scheme (if applicable) that you want to use.
 3. Click OK.
New nests are always created as the last nest at the end of the nest order in the job.

Insert a nest

With insert nest, you can create a new nest and specify where it should be inserted in the nest order in the job. For instance, if there are 5
nests in the job, you could insert a nest between nests 2 and 3. The inserted nest would become nest 3 in the job.

 1. Right-click the nest tab ( ) to the right of where you want to insert the nest.
 2. Select Insert.
The Insert Nest dialog will appear.
 3. Select the plate and safe zone scheme (if applicable) that you want to use.
 4. Click OK.

The New Nest / Insert Nest dialog

Use a plate from the Plate List

- 460 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

If you have added plates to your plate list, you can use one of those plates for your new nest. If there are no plates in your plate list, this
will be inactive.

Use a custom plate

You can define a custom plate type, size and material for your new nest.
 
Choices: Rectangular, Circular, Remnant

Rectangular
Rectangular plates are measured using length x width. You can use the list of standard plate sizes to select a rectangular plate, or type in
a custom size using the Length and Width fields.
 
Circular
Circular plates are measured using diameter.
 
Remnant
If you want to add remnant plates, they can be defined using the Define Remnant button. To learn more, see "Custom remnants" on
page 405.
 
The list of available materials reflects the materials of parts in your job.

Safe zone scheme

You can apply a safe zone scheme to your new nest.

Note:  l Selecting Reset will use default plate and nest values from your settings.
 l The dimensions button ( ) can be used to show or hide plate dimensions.

- 461 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Deleting or clearing a nest

You can delete a nest from the main ProNest window at any time. When a nest is deleted, the parts on that nest will be returned to the
part list and will become available for nesting. Also, if the nest used a plate from the plate list, that plate will be returned to the plate list.
 
Alternately, clearing a nest will remove all parts from that nest but will keep the blank plate as an empty nest.

In this article...
Delete a single nest
Delete all nests in your job
Delete all nests of a single material
Delete all empty nests
Clear a single nest

Delete a single nest

 1. Use the nest navigation tabs ( ) to select the nest you want to delete.

 2. On the Home tab, in the Nests group, click Delete Nest.
-or-

 l Right-click the nest navigation tab ( ) and select Delete Nest.

-or-
 l Press CTRL + DELETE.

Delete all nests in your job

 l On the Home tab, in the Nests group, click Delete All Nests.

Delete all nests of a single material

 1. On the Home tab, in the Nests group, click the arrow next to Delete All Nests.
A list of materials used by all nests in your job will appear.
 2. Select Delete All [material ] Nests for the material that you want to delete nests by.
 3. Click OK.
All nests in your job that are using the selected material will be deleted.

Note: ProNest always has a current nest – even if you delete all nests or if you delete the only nest in the job. If you delete the last
remaining nest in the job (referred to as Nest 1 of 1), the end result will be similar to selecting all the parts on this nest and then
deleting them. Similarly, if you delete all nests, the end result will be similar to deleting every nest past the first nest and then
clearing the first nest.

Delete all empty nests

- 462 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. On the Home tab, in the Nests group, click the arrow next to Delete All Nests.
A list of materials used by all nests in your job will appear.
 2. Select Delete All Empty Nests.
Nests that do not have contain parts will be deleted.

Clear a single nest

Remove all parts from the current nest, but keep the empty plate.
 1. Use the nest navigation tabs to select the nest you want to clear.
 2. On the Home tab, in the Nests group, click Clear Nest.

- 463 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding parts to the nest manually

With manual nesting, parts are added from the part list to the nest one at a time. There are several different ways to manually nest parts:

Nesting with anchored parts

One quick way to manually nest a part is with the “Anchor part to cursor” option.
 1. Make sure Anchor part to cursor is enabled on the Part List pane.

With this option enabled, the highlighted part in the part list will be affixed to the mouse cursor.
If Drag Rotation is ON in the status bar ()
 2. Simply click an empty area of the nest to place the part.
The part will be dropped and bumped towards the corner of the plate that is designated as the Nesting Home in settings.
 

 
Clicking again will nest more copies of the part.

Tip:  l Holding the CTRL key as you nest using Anchor part to cursor will place the part at the location you click on the nest – it
will not be bumped towards the corner of the plate.
 l To turn off part bumping, select the Disable automatic bumping of parts option in General Preferences.

To manually rotate anchored parts prior to placing them on the nest:

- 464 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Press CTRL to open the rotate menu for an anchored part.

 2. Click the buttons to rotate the part.

-or-

 l Press Q, W, E, and S keyboard shortcuts to rotate anchored parts.

Each copy of the part will be dropped and bumped at the new orientation.
 
To remove an anchored part from the cursor:
 l Press ESC
-or-
 l Right-click an empty area on the nest.

Note: You can also start a drag array with an anchored part by simply clicking and dragging on the nest. See Dragging to create an
array to learn more.

Drag and drop

You can also manually nest parts by dragging them from the part list onto the nest.
 1. Click a part in the part list and drag it over the nest.

 2. Release the mouse button.

The part will be bumped towards the corner of the plate.

Tip:  l Holding the CTRL key as you drag and drop will place the part at the location you release the mouse button on the nest –
it will not be bumped towards the corner of the plate.
 l To turn off part bumping, select the Disable automatic bumping of parts option in General Preferences.

Control how parts bump and rotate during dragging (Smart Drag)

- 465 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

You can change the way parts bump and rotate while being dragged on a nest. There are three states to choose from in the status bar of
the main window:
 

Smart Drag: On, Rotation: On

With Smart Drag enabled, parts will bump up against neighboring parts or the plate edges as they are dragged around on a nest or
moved as anchored parts. With Rotation enabled, the part will automatically rotate to fit into the empty spaces on the nest. With this
method, parts slide along the edges of other parts without coming into conflict.

You can use this to get a tight fit during manual nesting.

- 466 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: Any part with a Grain restraint set will not auto-rotate as it is dragged.

Smart Drag: On, Rotation: Off

During dragging, parts will bump up against neighboring parts or the plate edges, but will not automatically rotate to fit against other
contours.
 

This is a good option for any parts that you don't want to rotate freely, such as rectangular parts.

Smart Drag: Off

This disables both bumping and automatic rotation during dragging.
 

- 467 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
To change how parts bump and rotate during dragging:
 l Click the Smart Drag button in the status bar.
-or-
 l Press F6.

Manual nesting with double-click or ENTER

ProNest can also manually nest parts, while also rotating them so that they fit snugly into existing empty areas of the nest:
 l Double-click a part in the part list.
-or-
 l Highlight a part in the part list, then press the ENTER key.
With these methods, the part can be nested at various orientations close to other parts, interlocked with other parts, or placed inside
other parts automatically.

Note: If the Automatic Nesting module is not authorized, these methods of manual nesting will use the drop and bump method.

Once parts have been nested, you can move them around freely on the nest.

- 468 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Removing parts from the nest

Parts can be removed from a nest in several ways.
 
To remove a part from the nest:
 l With the part selected, press the DELETE key.
or
 l Click and drag the part from the nest back onto the Part List task pane.
or
 l Right-click the part and select Delete.
When a part is removed from the nest, it is returned to the part list.

- 469 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Moving and rotating parts

Once parts are selected, they can be moved and rotated into any position.
 
To move a selected part:
 l Drag a part from one location on the nest to another.

Using the bump handles

Parts can be moved in a variety of ways using the bump handles. Bump handles ( ) are located on the sides of the selection box.

As you point to each bump handle, the pointer will change to an arrow indicating the bump direction.
 
 l Normal bump: Click a bump handle. This moves a part until it comes in contact with either another part or the plate edge and will
leave the part a normal separation distance from other parts or from the plate edge.
 l Nudge: While holding SHIFT, click a bump handle. The part will move a small distance in the specified direction. The distance is
defined in settings.
 l Zero separation bump: While holding CTRL, click a bump handle. This works similar to normal bump except that it will leave the
part in contact with the other part or with the plate edge (with no separation). This is useful for building working CLC clusters for
advanced common line cutting.
 l Dynamic align bump: While holding SHIFT + CTRL, click a bump handle. This is used to align rectangular parts on one side and
join them with CLC or bridging.

Tip: You can also use the arrow keys to bump parts. Pressing the UP ARROW key, for example, acts just like clicking the top bump
handle. Like the bump handles, the arrow keys can be combined with SHIFT and CTRL to perform nudges and zero separation
bumps.

Using the rotate handles

Rotate handles ( ) are located in the corners of the selection box. As you point to each of these handles, the pointer will change to indic-
ate a specific rotate function.
 

Rotate Left (upper-left)  

Click this handle to rotate the part counter- Free rotate (upper-right)
clockwise by a fixed amount (the Rotation Incre- Drag this handle to rotate the part
ment angle defined on the Parts tab). freely.

- 470 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

   

Rotate to next 90 (lower-left)   Rotate long side (lower-right)

Click this handle to rotate the part counter- Click this handle to rotate the part
clockwise to the next 90° rotation. 90° rotations counter-clockwise to the next 90° rota-
are all based on the part’s neutral orientation tion for the part’s longest side. A right-
(not its current rotation). triangle part would rotate to positions
that place its hypotenuse at 90°, 180°,
270°, and 360° orientations.

Using the rotate controls in the ribbon

With parts selected on a nest, on the Parts tab in the ribbon, in the Arrange group, you can rotate the selection left or right at a specified
angle.

The angle specified in the Rotation Increment box determines the amount of rotation applied to a part selection when either the Rotate
Left or Rotate Right buttons are clicked.
 
To rotate a part selection by the "Rotation Increment" angle:

 l Click Rotate Left . This will rotate the part counter-clockwise.

 l Click Rotate Right .  This will rotate the part clockwise.

 l Click the upper-left rotate handle .  This will rotate the part counter-clockwise.

Tip: You can also press Q, W,E, and S keyboard shortcuts to rotate selected parts.

Rotating anchored parts manually

To rotate anchored parts prior to placing them on the nest:

 1. Press CTRL to open the rotate menu for an anchored part.

 2. Click the buttons to rotate the part.

Each copy of the part will be dropped and bumped at the new orientation.
 
 l You can also press Q, W, E, and S keyboard shortcuts to rotate anchored parts.

Control how parts bump and rotate during dragging (Smart Drag)

- 471 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

You can change the way parts bump and rotate while being dragged on a nest. There are three states to choose from in the status bar of
the main window:
 

Smart Drag: On, Rotation: On

With Smart Drag enabled, parts will bump up against neighboring parts or the plate edges as they are dragged around on a nest or
moved as anchored parts. With Rotation enabled, the part will automatically rotate to fit into the empty spaces on the nest. With this
method, parts slide along the edges of other parts without coming into conflict.

You can use this to get a tight fit during manual nesting.

- 472 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: Any part with a Grain restraint set will not auto-rotate as it is dragged.

Smart Drag: On, Rotation: Off

During dragging, parts will bump up against neighboring parts or the plate edges, but will not automatically rotate to fit against other
contours.
 

This is a good option for any parts that you don't want to rotate freely, such as rectangular parts.

Smart Drag: Off

This disables both bumping and automatic rotation during dragging.
 

- 473 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
To change how parts bump and rotate during dragging:
 l Click the Smart Drag button in the status bar.
-or-
 l Press F6.

View current rotation angle of a nested part

 1. Click a part on the nest to select it.

 2. Right-click the selected part.
 3. Select Properties for [part name}.
In the Part Properties window, the Angle is the current rotation angle of that instance of the part on the nest.

- 474 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
This angle is relative to the part's Initial Rotation angle.

Undo or redo a move

When moving and rotating selected parts on the current nest, you can undo the last move that was made.
 
To undo a move:
 l On the Parts tab, click Undo.
-or-
 l Press CTRL + Z.
After a move is undone, it can be redone by selecting Redo from the Parts tab or by pressing CTRL+ Y.

- 475 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Nested vs. selected parts

By default, a nested part that is to be cut will appear green (though this color may vary depending on what you have set in the Color
Legend). A selected part will appear blue with circular and square handles surrounding it.
 

Nested part Selected part

 
Technically, if a part has been added to the nest, but is currently selected, it will not be considered nested. Parts can be selected while in
Select Parts mode.

Select a part on a nest

 l Click the part.

Tip: Sometimes clicking a part to select it can cause the part to move slightly on the nest. You can hold CTRL when clicking to select a
part to ensure that it doesn't move at all.

Clear the selection of a part on a nest

 l Click anywhere in the nesting area away from the part. The part will appear green and will now be considered part of the nest.

- 476 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Multiple torches
By default, multi-torch parts are nested according to the settings values found on the Torches (or Heads) page of your ProNest settings (
). It is important that these settings values reflect the capabilities of your real-world machine.

In this article...
About multi-torch nesting
Manual nesting with multiple torches
AutoNest with multiple torches
Change the number of torches and spacing for a nested part
How do multiple torches affect output?

About multi-torch nesting

When multi-torch parts are added to a nest, you will notice that there is one master part and a pre-defined number of subordinate parts. 

The master part is darker in color than the subordinate parts. The master part is always positioned closest to the Nesting Home ( ) spe-
cified on the Nesting settings page.

Manual nesting with multiple torches

 l Simply drag the part onto the nest.

or
 l Double-click the part in the part list.
You can make last minute changes to torch settings (Number of Torches, Torch spacing type, and Torch spacing) used during manual
nesting by clicking Options on the Part List task pane and adjusting settings as necessary.
 

- 477 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The Part List task pane

 
Any changes made to torch settings from the Part List task pane will apply only during manual nesting.

AutoNest with multiple torches

 l On the Home tab, click the yellow Set Up Then Start AutoNest button ( ) then click OK.
or

 l On the Home tab, click the green AutoNest button.

 
You can make last minute changes to the torch settings (Number of Torches, Torch spacing type, Torch selection, and Torch spacing)
used during automatic nesting using the yellow AutoNest button:

 1. On the Home tab, click the yellow Set Up Then Start AutoNest button.
The AutoNest Setup dialog will appear.
 2. In the Torch Settings section, adjust settings as needed.
 3. Click OK to start automatic nesting.
Any changes made to torch settings from the AutoNest Setup dialog will apply only during automatic nesting.

Change the number of torches and spacing for a nested part

 1. Select one or more parts on the nest.

 2. On the Parts tab, in the Number of Torches box ( ), select the number of torches from the list.

 3. If you want, you can also change the torch spacing for the selection using the adjacent Torch Spacing box.
You can select a value from the list or type a custom value in the box.

- 478 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Equal Spacing: The torch spacing is based on the nest width and the maximum number of torches being used.
 l Minimum Spacing: The torch spacing will use the Minimum torch spacing specified in your settings.

How do multiple torches affect output?

When output is created for a nest with multiple torches, a stop code and comments are included in the code. This tells the operator
which torch settings to use, allowing him or her to set up the machine properly.

- 479 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Clusters
Two or more parts can be grouped together into a cluster. A cluster maintains the orientation of its parts with respect to each other while
allowing you to work with the cluster as if it were a single part. This is typically used when parts are arranged in a way that is generally use-
ful. Clustering a group of parts makes the cluster available in the part list as a "Custom Part." The custom part can then be used as if it
were a regular part.

Clustering

To create a cluster of parts:

 1. On the nest, select the parts that you want to include in the cluster.
You can select a group of parts on a nest by dragging a selection box around them, or by clicking each part while holding the
SHIFT key.
 2. On the Parts tab, in the Arrange group, click Cluster.
A cluster is treated as an individual part; it can be bumped, rotated, arrayed, duplicated, etc. Once a cluster is created, it is added to the
part list and can be used in interactive or automatic nesting.

Note: Autocluster
You can build a cluster of like parts automatically from the Edit Part List window. With a part selected in the part list, select the
Cluster checkbox in the Nesting properties section. When you return to the main ProNest window, a cluster will be created and
added to the part list.

Unclustering

A cluster can be broken up so that its component parts are no longer grouped together.
 
To uncluster a group of parts:
 1. Select the cluster that you want to break apart.
 2. On the Parts tab, in the Arrange group, click the arrow next to Cluster and then click Uncluster.
After unclustering, individual parts can again be selected individually, though the cluster still exists in the part list and can be added to
the plate at any time.

- 480 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using Edge Pierce

Edge piercing is a method of extending a selected part's lead-in so that it connects it to the edge of the plate. This allows for faster pierce
times, especially when cutting thick material.

ProNest will not generate edge pierce extensions that are in conflict with other parts or other edge pierce extensions. Edge pierces are
applied based on the settings values found in the Edge Pierce page of your settings ( ).

Apply an edge pierce

 1. Select a part.

 2. On the Parts tab, in the Edit group, click Edge Pierces and then click Edge Pierce.

Remove edge pierces

 1. Select a part with an edge pierce.

 2. On the Parts tab, in the Edit group, click Edge Pierces and then click Remove Edge Pierces.

- 481 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using AutoTab
You can AutoTab one or more nested parts. You can also AutoTab parts automatically as they are imported into ProNest. Tabs hold mater-
ial in place during cutting, reducing the chance of tip-ups or parts dropping out.
 

The two interior profiles have tabs added, which will hold the cut-outs in place after they are cut. The white lock icons ( )
indicate that undertravel on the leads are locked. This ensures that the "tab" that is created by the lead undertravel remains in
place during nesting.

Automatically apply AutoTabs to a nested part

 1. Select one or more nested parts.

 2. On the Parts tab, click the arrow next to Tabs, then click AutoTab.
Tabs will be applied based on your AutoTab settings.

Remove tabs from a part

 1. Select one or more parts containing tabs.

 2. On the Part menu, click the arrow next to Tabs, then click Remove Tabs.
All tabs will be removed, whether they were added by AutoTab or manually added in Advanced Edit.

Automatically apply AutoTabs during import

Tabs can be applied to a part before it is added to the part list:

 1. In the Edit Part List window, select the part in the Part Sources area.
 2. In the Properties pane (lower-right), on the Nesting tab, select Add tabs.
When the part is added, tabs will be applied based on your AutoTab settings.

- 482 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Cut direction
Generally, ProNest will process parts so that interior profiles are cut in a counter-clockwise direction and exterior profiles are cut in a
clockwise direction. You can change the direction in which a part is cut after it has been nested.

Tip: Before changing the cut direction of a part, it may be useful to activate the cut direction view in order to see changes to your
parts.

View the cut direction of a part:

 l On the View tab, click Nest Image Objects and then select Cut Direction.
Arrows will appear along the profiles of your nested parts, indicating cut direction.
 

Change the cut direction of a part:

 1. Select a part.

 2. On the Parts tab, in the Edit group, click Reverse Cut Direction.

Change the cut direction of a single profile within a part:

 1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit (right-click the part and select Advanced Edit).
 2. On the Edit menu, click Select Profiles.
 3. Select the profile that you want to change by clicking it. The selected profile will appear blue.
 4. In the Properties window, set the Cut Direction to either Clockwise or Counterclockwise.
 5. Click Apply.
 6. Click Return to Nesting.
 7. When prompted, click Save to keep your changes.

- 483 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Mirror
You can convert a part to a mirror image of itself.
 

Part mirrored on a vertical axis, which runs   Part mirrored over horizontal axis, which runs through the center of the
through the center of the part. part.

Mirror a part

 1. Select a part.

 2. On the Parts tab, in the Arrange group, click the arrow next to Mirror.
 3. Select either Horizontal or Vertical.

Notes:  l On the Nesting page of your ProNest settings, there is a check box called Reverse cut direction on mirror. When
this check box is selected, the cut direction of a part will be reversed when the part is mirrored. This means that clock-
wise cuts will change to counter-clockwise cuts, and vice versa. When this box is not selected, the mirrored part will
retain the same cut direction as the original.
 l If a nested part's Mirror value is set to Always or Never and it is then mirrored on the nest, a "Part violates its mirror
property" error message ( ) will be displayed. This is designed to prevent mirroring of parts that should not be
flipped over. However, if you still want to mirror the part, set its Mirror value to "Either" and you will not see the error.
You can also turn off mirror error checking entirely by going to File tab > Preferences > Warnings.

- 484 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Duplicate
You can create a duplicate of a nested part, as long as there is a sufficient quantity of that part in the part list.

Duplicate a part

 1. Select a part.

 2. On the Parts tab, in the Arrange group, click Duplicate.

 
The original part will remain nested. A copy of the part will be anchored to the cursor at the same orientation as the original.

Note: Duplicating a part has the side effect of turning on the Anchor part to cursor option in the Part List pane.

Cancel duplicate

With a duplicate part anchored to the cursor, you can cancel the duplicate operation:
 l Press ESC.
-or-
 l Right-click on an empty area of the nest.

- 485 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Move All Leads

You can have the leads of selected parts automatically moved.

Move all leads on selected parts

 1. Select one or more parts on the nest.

 2. On the Parts tab, click Move All Leads.

 3. The Automatic Move Leads dialog will appear. You can specify how to move your leads here.
 4. Click OK.
 

Automatic Move Leads settings

Move leads to
The location on the part where leads will be moved.
 

Upper Left Upper Right Lower Right Lower Left

Top Right Bottom Left

Move interior leads

When selected, interior leads on the part will also be moved to the location specified in Move leads to.

Last cut on interior of plate

Leads will be moved such that parts that fall within the Plate edge tolerance specified will have their leads moved away from the plate
edge, towards the interior portion of the plate. This will override the Move leads to setting for these parts. This is useful as a general way
to move part leads away from the plate edge on a nest.

Plate edge tolerance

The closest distance to which exterior leads may approach the plate edge (if no extension values are used). Non-zero extension values
take precedence over this setting. If Automatic Move Leads would place leads closer to the plate edge than the value specified, those
leads will not be automatically moved.

- 486 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Changing how many times a nest is cut

You can specify the number of times a particular nest is cut. This is useful if you want to duplicate an existing nest and have a remaining
quantity of parts. By default, a nest is cut only once unless otherwise specified.

Change the number of times a nest is cut

 1. On the status bar, click Cut: n times. By default, number that appears will be the maximum number of times that nest could be
cut, based on the remaining quantity of parts.
 2. Change this number if needed.
 3. Click OK.
Notice that in the Navigation toolbar, the current nest will be listed with the number of times it is to be cut indicated in parentheses.
 

Example:
 
Let's say the first of three nests in a job needs to be cut five times. This would appear in the status bar as follows:
 
Nest: 1 of 3    Cut: 5 times
 

Points to consider
When a nest is cut more than once:
 n A single CNC file is still created for the nest.
 n There is no indication in the CNC output code that the nest should be cut more than once.
 n Reports are typically used to determine how many times to cut a CNC file. The nest or job reports contain Cut Number of Times
information for a given nest.
 n For automatic nesting, you can configure ProNest to always cut each nest the maximum number of times (On the AutoNest set-
tings page, select Cut each nest the maximum number of times).

- 487 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Managing nests using nest tabs

In the main ProNest window, each nest has a tab at the bottom of the screen.
 

You can click any nest tab to make that nest current. The navigation arrows on the left ( ) can be used to page through nest
tabs.

View a thumbnail image of other nests

 l Hover the cursor over inactive nest tabs ( )

Inserting a nest

Create a new nest after the last nest in the job:

 l Click the New Nest tab.

 
Insert a new nest before an existing nest in a job:
 l Right-click an existing nest tab and select Insert Nest.

Reorder nests in the current job

 l Click and drag a nest's tab to a new location on the navigation bar. The arrow indicators ( ) will show the insertion point.

Move parts from one nest to another nest

You can move nested parts from one nest to another while keeping the parts in the same orientation.

- 488 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note that both nests must use the same material in order to do this.
 1. Select one or more parts on the first nest. You can select all parts on a nest by pressing CTRL + A.
 2. Click the tab for the nest that you want to move the parts to.

- 489 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Exporting a nest to DXF file

A single nest can be saved as a DXF file. The DXF file of the nest will be saved according to your Export DXF settings.

Export a single nest to DXF file

 1. In the main window, make sure that the current nest is the one you want to export.

 2. On the Nest tab, click Export to DXF.

 3. Browse to a folder and enter a file name.
 4. Click Save.
-or-

 1. Right-click a nest tab.

 2. Select Export to DXF.
 3. Browse to a folder and enter a file name.
 4. Click Save.

- 490 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Why do parts appear in conflict?

A part appearing in conflict on a nest indicates that the part's profile is in violation of some limiting parameter. A typical case might be
when a part is nested too close to another part, encroaching on the Part-part separation value specified in the Process Parameters set-
tings page.
 
When a part is shown in conflict on a nest, the part will appear red.
 

The part shown here appears in conflict because its profile overlaps the plate edge

These parts do not overlap, but are nested too close together - creating a conflict

Note: Parts in conflict will appear in the color assigned in the Color Legend pane on the main window. By default, the assigned
color is red.

A part may appear in conflict for one of several reasons:

 l A part is nested in violation of the separation values in your Process Parameters settings (Part-part, Part-plate edge, Part-pierce,
Pierce-pierce, Pierce-plate edge)
 l A part encroaches on a safe zone
 l A part intersects a crop line
 l A part is manually rotated to an angle that violates the part's grain restraint
 l A part is manually mirrored in violation of the part's mirror property
 l There is a class mismatch on the nest
 l "When opening a job, detect modified part files and reload them" is selected in Preferences, but the applicable nested parts can-
not be reloaded due to an existing chain, CLC, bridge, etc
 l Multi-torch parts are already nested and then Torch spacing or Number or torches settings are changed so that the parts violate
these new parameters
 l A part is nested outside of a given work zone
 l Part contains drilling but there are not enough compatible turret stations
 l Part contains missing tools

Effect on nesting and output

ProNest will not prevent you from nesting and creating output with parts that are in conflict. Please be aware that outputting and then
cutting a nest with parts that are in conflict may result in damaged parts.

- 491 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Checking nests for conflicts

You can check the nests in the current job to see if there are any parts nested in conflict:

 1. On the Home tab, in the Verify group, click Check for Conflict.
 2. Click Check for Conflict repeatedly to cycle through the nests that contain conflicts.
 
You can also find conflicts using the status bar (at the bottom of the main window):
 

No conflicts exist on nests in the current job.

There are conflicts in the current job. You can also click this button repeatedly to cycle through nests with conflicts.

- 492 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Nest properties
You can view information about the current nest from the main ProNest window, including plate dimensions, number of parts nested,
and nest-level utilization and costing figures.

View properties for the current nest

 l On the status bar of the main window, click Nest n of n.

 
General
Dimension
The plate dimension, expressed as length × width. In ProNest, length is measured horizontally along the X-axis; width is expressed ver-
tically along the Y-axis.
 
Material
The material assigned to the current plate.
 
Times cut
Number of times the current nest is to be cut
 
Technology
Indicates which performance applications or technology is in use on the nest. If beveled edges have been applied to a part on the nest,
"Bevel Cut" will appear here.
 
Number of parts
This refers to the number of parts on the current nest. Remember, if a part is selected while on a nest, it is not technically considered to be
nested.
 
 
Utilization
Length used  
This refers to the distance along the X-axis between the nesting home and the furthest nested part.
 

Example:
 

- 493 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 1
 
The length used for this nest is indicated by the horizontal blue line.

 
Width used
This refers to the distance along the Y-axis between the nesting home and the furthest nested part.
 

Example:
 

Figure 2
 
The width used for this nest is indicated by the vertical blue line.

 
True utilization
This is the ratio of the true area of all nested parts relative to the total plate area. Note that if a part has an interior profile, the surface area
of the cut-out will not be considered a portion of that part.
 

- 494 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:
 

 
Figure 3
 
The nest shown in Figure 3 has a true utilization of 6.58%. For the purposes of this demonstration, the true area of the part is light
blue, the plate area is outlined in red.

 
Crop utilization
If the current nest has been cropped, ProNest will calculate the crop utilization as the ratio of the true area of all nested parts relative to
the plate area up to the crop line. The remnant (the section of plate that has been cropped off) will not be included in the calculated
plate area. If your nest is not cropped, this value will be identical to the true utilization percentage.
 

Example:
 

Figure 4
 
The nest shown in Figure 4 has been cropped. The true area of the part appears light blue, the plate area used for this calculation is
outlined in red. The crop utilization for this nest is 48%.

- 495 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Plate used utilization

This percentage can be useful for determining how tightly parts are nested. To generate this value, ProNest draws a bounding rectangle
around all parts on the nest (including leads), with one corner of the rectangle at the nesting home ( ). The area of this rectangle is
the plate used.
 
The true area of all nested parts is then divided by the plate used area to get the plate used utilization percentage:
 
Plate used utilization % = (True area of all nested parts ÷ Plate used area) × 100

Example:
 

Figure 3
 
The nest in Figure 3 has a plate used utilization of 30%. The part area is light blue, the plate used area is outlined in red.
 
 

Figure 4
 
The nest in Figure 4 has a plate used utilization of 20%. Note that this percentage is lower than the nest in Figure 3 because the parts
are more loosely spaced.
 

 
Rectangular utilization

- 496 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

ProNest uses the minimum rectangular space that a part occupies (including part leads and lead extensions) when calculating part area.
Rectangular utilization is the ratio of the rectangular area of all nested parts relative to total plate area.
 

Example:
 

Figure 7
 
The nest in Figure 7 has a rectangular utilization of 11.1%. The rectangular area of the part is light blue in color, the plate area is out-
lined in red.

 
 
Costing
Material Cost
This is the material cost for the current nest.
 
A nest's material cost is the sum of the material costs of each part on the nest. True area is used to get this material cost.
 
For more information, see "How are costs calculated?" on page 584.
 
Production Cost
This is the production cost for the current nest.
 
A nest's production cost includes the production cost of all nested parts, as well as additional nest-level factors, such as:
 l Plate Loading Cost (from Costing settings)
 l Additional cutting if parts are bridged or chained
 l Additional cutting from crop lines or skeleton cut-up
 l Reduced cutting if parts are common line cut
 l Rapid motions between the machine home and nested parts
 l Rapid motions between nested parts
 l Additional cutting from edge pierces
 
For more information, see "How are costs calculated?" on page 584.
 
Total Cost

- 497 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

This is the total cost for the current nest. For more information, see "How are costs calculated?" on page 584.
 
Production Time
The total production time for the current nest. For more information, see "How is production time calculated?" on page 591.

- 498 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Separations task pane

In ProNest, the Part, Pierce, and Plate separation values used for nesting are taken from the Process Parameters settings page. The Separ-
ations task pane enables you to view and edit separation values for each material in your job directly from the main ProNest window,
without modifying your settings. Changes made to separation values in the Separations task pane apply to materials in that job only -
they have no effect on your machine settings.
 

The Separations task pane

View separation values in your job

 l In the main ProNest window, on the View tab, select Separations.

 
The Part to part, Part to pierce, and Part to plate separations for each material in your job are listed in the Separations window. By default,
the separations listed will match the values found in your Process Parameters settings.

Change separation values for a material in your job

 1. In the Separations task pane, find the material that you want to edit separation values for.
 2. In the column on the right, type in a new separation value for Part (Part - part), Pierce (Part - pierce), or Plate (Part - plate).
 3. Press ENTER.
Entering a separation value that differs from the one found in your settings will cause the new value to become highlighted in yellow.

Effect on nesting
 l All materials in your job will use the separation values specified in the Separations task pane. Parts placed on the nest will auto-
matically use the separation values in the Separations window.
 l Parts that are already nested when their separation values are changed will not be repositioned on the nest. If the position of the
nested part violates the new separation value entered, the part will be shown in conflict.

- 499 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Revert to separation values in your settings

If a separation value in your job has been edited in the Separations task pane, but you want to go back to using the separation values
found in your settings:
 1. In the Separations task pane, click the edited separation value that you want to change.
 2. Click the Revert button ( ).
The default separation value for that material will be listed.
 3. Click Revert to match settings.

Important: Any changes made to separation values in the Separations task pane are not saved in the job (.nif).

- 500 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Nest Background Image

With Nest Background Image, you can superimpose a digital photo of your plate onto the ProNest work area. This is ideal for waterjet
applications where the source material has surface defects and you want to see exactly where those defects are during nesting.
 
To use this feature, simply take a digital picture of your plate and assign that image to a nest, as described below:

Taking the photograph

When taking a photo of your plate, make sure that camera is centered and squared to the plate.
 

 
Proper positioning of the camera will ensure an accurate 2-D image of the plate.

Uploading the image to your computer

Once you have taken the photo of your plate, upload the image to your computer. Digital photos must be saved as a JPEG Image File
(*.jpg, *.jpeg) or Bitmap (*.bmp) in order to be used as a background image.

Setting the background image for a nest

After the photo of your plate is uploaded to your computer, you will be ready to add it as a nest background image.
 
To set a background image for your current nest:
 1. Make sure that the dimensions of the current nest in ProNest match those of your physical plate.

 2. Right-click the nest navigation tab.

 3. Select Background Image.
 4. Click Load and then browse to the folder containing your image.
 5. Select the image and click Open.
The Nest Background Image dialog will display your image.

- 501 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 6. Click Define Corner Point and then using the cursor, click on an actual corner of your plate as it appears in your photo.

 7. Set the Corner point location to match the corner point that you defined in the previous step (choices: Lower Left, Upper Left,
Lower Right , or Upper Right).
 8. Click Define Measurement Line.
 9. On your image, drag the yellow line over a measured physical distance on the plate. Typically, one of the plate's edges can be
used for this measurement.

 10. In the Measured distance box, specify the length of the measurement line that you defined in the previous step.
 11. Click OK.
Your background image will appear on the current nest. You can now add parts to the nest as normal.
 

Note:  l The nest background image should be used as a reference for the current nest only. Though nests with a background
image can be saved with your job, they cannot be stored as plates in the plate inventory for later use.
 l Nest Background Image is only available with waterjet setups.

- 502 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

How to start automatic nesting

After you have developed a list of parts and plates, you will be ready to begin automatic nesting. Unlike interactive nesting, which
involves manually placing parts on a nest, you can use the AutoNest function to nest parts automatically. ProNest will nest the parts
based on the AutoNest strategies defined in your settings.
 
There are two different ways of starting AutoNest in ProNest:
 l On the Home tab, click the arrow next to AutoNest and then click Set Up Then Start.
-or-

 l On the Home tab, click the arrow next to AutoNest and then click AutoNest.

The Start AutoNest button: Yellow vs. Green

The yellow AutoNest button is slightly different from the green button.
 
The yellow button opens the AutoNest Setup dialog. Using this dialog, you can make last-minute changes to things like:
 l The selected nesting strategy
 l Where automatic nesting should begin (on a new nests only or on the current nest).
 l The types and sizes of plates to use
 
The green button will simply go ahead and begin automatic nesting using the last settings specified in the AutoNest Setup dialog. In
effect, clicking the green button is equivalent to opening the AutoNest Setup dialog and clicking OK.

Tip: In ProNest, you can utilize both automatic and interactive nesting on the same job. Place a few parts on the plate manually in the
manner desired then click AutoNest to complete the plate. Likewise, you can AutoNest first and then manually rearrange nested
parts to enhance the utilization of the plate.

- 503 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Setting up AutoNest
When you click the Set Up Then Start AutoNest ( ) for automatic nesting, you will be prompted with the AutoNest Setup dialog
before nesting begins. Using this dialog, you can make last-minute changes to things like nesting strategy, where nesting should begin,
and the types and sizes of plates to use.

The AutoNest Setup dialog

The any modifications made to AutoNest settings from this dialog will apply only to the nesting done in the current AutoNest session.
 
AutoNest Settings
Strategy
You can select which AutoNest strategy to use for the nests created during automatic nesting. For an in-depth discussion of strategies,
refer to "AutoNest settings" on page 104.
 
Only create new nests
Select this to have automatic nesting begin on a new nest, instead of beginning on the current nest. ProNest will not fill any existing
nests before it starts to create new nests.
 
When cleared, ProNest will begin AutoNest on the current nest.

Note: This setting will be automatically cleared if Do not create new nests is selected.

 
How should ProNest create new nests?
Do not create new nests
Selecting this radio button will limit automatic nesting to existing nests in your job. ProNest will not create new nests during AutoNest.
 
Use a plate from the Plate List 
If you have added plates to your plate list, you can use one of those plates for your new nest. If there are no plates in your plate list, this
will be inactive.
 
Use a custom plate
You can define a custom plate type and size to use for the new nests that will be created during automatic nesting. The number of new
nests that will be created is limited by the Quantity entered.
 
Choices: Rectangular, Circular, Remnant

Rectangular
Rectangular plates are measured using length x width. You can use the list of standard plate sizes to select a rectangular plate, or type in
a custom size using the Length and Width fields.
 
Circular
Circular plates are measured using diameter.
 
Remnant
If you want to add remnant plates, they can be defined using the Define Remnant button. To learn more, see "Custom remnants" on
page 405.
 

- 504 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Safe zone scheme

If you are using a custom plate, you can apply a safe zone scheme for that plate.
 
 
Torch Settings
Number of torches 
This setting defines the maximum number of torches/heads that will be used during AutoNest. Usually this setting will match the physical
limitation of the machine.
 
Range: 1 to 100
Recommended Value: 1
 
Torch selection 
When AutoNest is run, ProNest uses Torch selection to select how many torches are used.
 
Choices: Fixed, "Fixed, Then One", Variable
 
Fixed - ProNest will try to nest all parts using the maximum number of torches allowed (specified by Number of torches). Unless each
part quantity divides evenly into the number of torches, a small remainder of parts will not be nested.
 
Fixed, Then One - Similar to Fixed. Whenever a part cannot be nested using the number of torches, it will try to nest the part with only
one torch.
 
Variable: ProNest will first try to nest all parts using the maximum number of torches allowed. If it cannot place the part, it will reduce the
number of torches by one and try again. This process is repeated until it has tried with only one torch.
 
Torch spacing type 
When AutoNest is run, ProNest uses Torch spacing type to select the torch spacing. The spacing used by is always limited by the Min-
imum torch spacing specified in your default settings.
 
Choices: Equal, Fixed, Variable
 
Equal: The torch spacing is based on the nest width and the maximum number of torches being used. It is calculated by dividing the
nest's width (ProNest y-axis) by the Number of torches.
 
Fixed: The torch spacing is always the same value (defined by Torch spacing) - regardless of the number of torches used.
 
Variable: Torch spacing will be adjusted based on the size of the part, so that the minimum part separation between multi-torch parts is
used. This option is available as part of the Variable Multi-Head Cutting module.
 
Torch spacing 
Whenever Torch spacing type is set to Fixed, this value defines the torch spacing used.
 
Units: Distance
Range: Minimum torch spacing to 10,000.0 in.
Recommended Value: 20.0 in.
 

Note: This setting is activated only if Torch spacing type is set to Fixed.

- 505 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Notes:  l Selecting Default will use default plate and nest values from your settings.
 l The dimensions button ( ) can be used to show or hide plate dimensions.

- 506 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Stopping AutoNest
You can stop automatic nesting that is in progress. When AutoNest is stopped, parts that are already nested will stay on the nest; any
parts that have not yet been nested will remain in the part list.

Stop AutoNest

 l In the status bar, click the Stop button.

- 507 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

11. MODES OF OPERATION

What are modes of operation?
ProNest has many different modes of operation, each with its own function. Click the following links to explore modes of operation:
 l "Select mode" on page 509
 l "Zoom" on page 511
 l "Measure mode" on page 513
 l "Cut Simulation mode" on page 514
 l "Modify Leads mode" on page 515
 l "Pan mode" on page 512

- 508 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Select mode
Select mode is the default mode of operation in ProNest. Select mode is used while manually nesting parts; selecting, moving and rotat-
ing nested parts; and generally as the base mode of operation on the main ProNest window. Often, you will enter Select mode as a way of
exiting another mode of operation.
 
To enter Select mode:

 l On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select Parts.

Once you have added parts to the nest, you are free to modify the nest in any way. You can delete parts from the nest, add more parts,
rotate and move parts around, and perform more advanced functions such as clustering. This section of the guide will showcase several
ways of working with parts on a nest.

Selecting parts

Nested parts cannot be moved or rotated until they are selected.

 
To select a single part:
 l Click anywhere inside the part.
 
To select all parts on the nest:

 l On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select All.

-or-
 l Press CTRL + A
 
To select multiple parts:
 l Hold SHIFT as you click on each part.
 
To area-select multiple parts:
 l Right-click and drag a rectangular area to surround the parts that should be selected. As you drag, the selection area will be
drawn as a box with dotted lines.

Tip: The direction of an area-select drag changes how parts are selected. If the selection area is created by dragging to the right, then
parts will be selected only if they are fully contained by the selection area. If the selection area is created by dragging to the left,
then parts will be selected if they are fully contained by the selection area or if they come in contact with the border of the selec-
tion area.

When a part (or group of parts) is selected, it will turn blue and will be surrounded by a selection box. The selection box surrounds the
entire selection and features bump and rotate handles. These handles provide specialized ways to move and rotate the selection. See
"Moving and rotating selected parts" for more information about using the selection box handles.
 

- 509 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Unselecting parts

When parts are selected, they are not truly nested. It is more correct to think of selected parts as a floating group of parts. To nest a selec-
tion, unselect it.
 
To unselect all parts:
 l Click anywhere in the nesting area that is not inside any part.
 
To remove a single part from the selection:
 l Hold SHIFT and select the part you want to unselect.
All other parts in the selection will remain selected.

Note: As you select and unselect nested parts, you may have noticed changes in the Part List. Sometimes the reported nested quant-
ity appears like this:
2 of 5 nested [1]

This means that 2 out of 5 parts are nested and that 1 part is selected. If the selected part were then unselected, the quantities
would appear like this:
3 of 5 nested

Removing a part from the nest

A nested part can be removed from the nest, returning it to the part list. This causes the part’s available quantity to rise as its nested quant-
ity decreases.
 
To remove a selected part from the nest:
 l Press DELETE.
-or-
 l Drag the part from the nesting area into the Part List task pane.

- 510 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Zoom
With ProNest, you can zoom in and out on a nest in a number of different ways. Zoom functions are found on the View tab in the Zoom
group and in selected modes.
 

Ribbon
Zoom Function Usage
Control
Zoom Window After selecting Zoom Window, you can
use your mouse to drag a box around the
area of the nest that you want to magnify.
Zoom Real Time After selecting Zoom Real Time, click an
area of the nest and drag the pointer up or
down to zoom in or out.
Zoom In This will zoom in to next magnification
level.
 
Keyboard shortcut: PAGE UP
Zoom Out This will zoom out to next magnification
level.
 
Keyboard shortcut: PAGE DOWN
Zoom Selection With one or more parts selected on your
nest, Zoom Selection will zoom to a view
of the selected part(s).
Zoom Extents This will return to a view of the entire nest.
 
Keyboard shortcut: SHIFT + Z
Zoom Work Zone n/a If work zones are in use, this will zoom to a
view of the currently active work zone.

Tip: You can also easily zoom in and out at any desired location on your nest using the mouse wheel. Rotating the mouse wheel for-
ward will zoom in, rotating it backward will zoom out. Another way of doing this is to position the mouse cursor on an area of
the nest and press the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key.

- 511 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Pan mode
You can use Pan mode to grab and drag an entire nest.

Pan on the nest

 l Using the mouse wheel, click and drag in the nesting area.

-or-

 l On the View tab, click Pan.

Using the hand cursor, you can click and drag anywhere in the nesting area.

Exit Pan mode

 l Right-click anywhere on the nest.

- 512 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Measure mode
In measure mode, you can measure distances on your nest using your mouse. The accuracy of the measurement is limited by the distance
represented by one pixel on the screen and by how accurately you select the measurement points.

Enter measure mode

 l On the Home tab, in the Verify group, click Measure.

ProNest will display cross-hairs across the nesting area and the mouse cursor will change to a measuring tape.

Make a measurement

 1. While in measure mode, click and drag a measurement line anywhere on the nest.
 2. Release the mouse button.
The cursor will automatically “snap” to the edges of nested parts to make measuring from a part edge more exact. Your measurement will
be displayed in the bottom left of the status bar. For each measurement, the distance, the DX (delta, or change in X) and the DY (delta, or
change in Y) are displayed.

Note: Holding the SHIFT key while making a measurement will cause the measurement line to “snap to” the nearest horizontal, ver-
tical, or 45 degree line.

Exit measure mode

 l Click Select Parts.

-or-
 l Right-click anywhere on the nest.
-or-
 l Press ESC.

Tip: It is often helpful to zoom in on the area being measured.

- 513 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Cut Simulation mode

Before generating output, it is often convenient to see how a nest will be cut. Cut Simulation mode presents an animation that approx-
imates how a nest would be cut by your machine. ProNest allows simple control over the simulation, similar to playing a movie.

View cut simulation for the current nest

 l On the Home tab, in the Verify group, click Cut Simulation.

When you enter Cut Simulation mode, the parts on the nest will be drawn in the Uncut color from the Color Legend. Also, the Cut Sim-
ulation controls will appear in the ribbon.

Play the simulation

 l On the Cut Simulation tab, click Play.

When cut simulation starts, a small image of a cutting head will appear at the machine home of the nest. The cutting head will then move
around the nest, cutting, scribing, and punching the nest in the same order as CNC output would instruct the machine.

Pause the simulation

 l On the Cut Simulation tab, click Pause.

Stop the simulation

 l On the Cut Simulation tab, click Stop.

Quit cut simulation and return to normal nesting

 l On the Cut Simulation tab, click Close Cut Simulation.

Tips:  l The speed of the cut simulation can be controlled by moving the Speed slider. Move the slider to the left for a slower sim-
ulation. Move the slider to the right for a faster simulation.
 l You can advance or rewind the simulation by clicking on any profile in the nest.
 l You can also view the cut simulation for a single part from Advanced Edit (Part menu > Cut Simulation).

- 514 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Modify Leads mode

After a part has been added to the Part List, you can modify its leads through the Preview window of the Edit Part List window or through
Advanced Edit. You can also modify a nested part's leads from the main ProNest window.

Enter Modify Leads mode

 l On the Nest tab, click Leads.

Move the position of a lead on a profile

Using the wrench ( ) you can click any location along a given profile and the lead will be moved there.
 
When leads are moved between a side location and a corner location, ProNest will apply the lead style as specified in your settings.

Tips:  l If you need to zoom in or out on a profile while in Modify Leads mode, it is best to use your mouse wheel or the Page
Up and Page Down keys to do so. This type of zooming will not cancel Modify Leads mode.
 l While in Modify Leads mode, you can right-click on the lead of a nested part to view or modify the properties (style,
size, angle, etc.) of that lead.

View or change the properties of leads

 1. In Modify Leads mode, use the wrench ( ) to right-click the leads that you want to modify.
The Modify Leads dialog will open, displaying the properties for the selected lead.
 2. Change the properties (Style, Size, Angle, etc.) for the leads.
 3. Click Apply and then click OK to keep your changes.

Lock the leads on a profile

This will lock the position and properties of the lead on that profile. Once leads are locked, they will not be moved or altered during any
manual or automatic operation in ProNest.

 1. In Modify Leads mode, use the wrench ( ) to right-click the leads that you want to modify.
The Modify Leads dialog will open, displaying the properties for the selected lead.
 2. Select the Locked checkbox.
 3. Click Apply and then click OK to keep your changes.
The selected leads will be locked. Locked leads are indicated by a padlock.

- 515 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Exit Modify Leads mode

 1. On the Leads tab, click Close.

-or-
 2. Press ESC.

Note: Since moving leads will cause ProNest to generate a new cut sequence, it is best to move leads prior to setting a cut sequence.

- 516 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

12. LEADS
How are leads applied in ProNest?
Leads are initially applied to parts in ProNest when the part files are added to the part list. The style of lead that is applied depends on the
geometry of the part. There are several styles of leads that can be used, but the most common are linear leads and arc leads.
 

Linear leads Arc leads

 
Typically, linear leads are applied at the corner of a profile, so that the lead-in forms a straight line into the cut profile. In cases where
there is no corner to place the lead, arc style leads are applied on the side of a profile, to gradually get the cutting head moving in the dir-
ection of the cut profile.

Which settings control how leads are applied?

 l When a part is imported, leads are applied based on your Interior and Exterior Leads settings or the custom leads properties that
you specify in the Edit Part List window.
 l Interior/Exterior Leads settings
 l Leads properties (in the Edit Part List window)
 l On the Importing Parts settings page, the Leads origin setting is used to specify where on a part the leads will be placed (Bottom,
Left, Top, Right, etc.).
 l You can also import a part with pre-drawn leads.

Changing leads in ProNest

 l When are leads moved automatically by ProNest?
 l Manually change lead position and properties in Modify Leads mode
 l Locking leads on a part to prevent leads from being moved or properties from being changed
 l Use Move All Leads to reposition leads on nested parts

- 517 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Locking leads on a part

When locked, lead position on the profile (start/end point) and lead properties (style, size, angle, etc.) will not change during any manual
or automatic operation in ProNest. This includes automatic nesting, collision avoidance, manual or automatic move leads, etc.
 
Locked leads are indicated by a yellow padlock.

Lock leads on a part

 1. In the Edit Part List window, select an added part in the Part List grid.
 2. In the Preview, click the leads that you want to lock. You can click anywhere on the profile to select the leads.
 3. In the Properties pane, on the Leads tab, select the Locked checkbox.

Note: You can also lock leads in the main nesting area in Modify Leads mode (by right-clicking) or in Advanced Edit, where you
can lock a multiple selection of leads on a part at the same time.

Lock all leads on a part

For parts that have more than one profile, you can lock a multiple selection of leads on a single part at the same time.
 1. In the Edit Part List window, select an added part in the Part List grid.

 2. Click the Advanced Edit button.

 3. In Advanced Edit, select a lead location/start point on your part by clicking it.

(In the View menu, Start Points ( ) is selected to clearly show the lead locations on the part)
 4. Press CTRL + A to select all leads on the part.

 5. In the Properties pane, under Start Point properties, select the Locked checkbox.
 6. Click Apply.
All leads on the part will be locked.

- 518 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Save locked leads permanently

You may want to permanently lock lead properties and position on a part so that they're always the same whenever that CAD file is impor-
ted into ProNest. You can do this as follows:

 1. Open the Importing Parts (Advanced) settings page (Settings > Importing Parts > Importing Parts [Advanced]).
 2. Select both Save part file tokens and Save Advanced Edit tokens.
 3. Click Save to keep your settings changes.
 4. Open the Edit Part List window (Home tab > Edit Part List).
 5. Add the part to the part list.

 6. Bring the added part into Advanced Edit (with the part selected in the part list, click the Advanced Edit button ).

 7. Make your modifications to the leads, as necessary. You can use the Modify Leads button ( ) to move the leads on the pro-
file.
 8. With the leads that you want to lock selected, in the Properties Toolbar, select the Locked checkbox.
 9. Exit Advanced Edit, making sure to save changes to the part.
Each time that CAD file is imported into ProNest, the leads will be locked with the position and properties that you specified.

Locking overtravel/undertravel only

You can lock only the overtravel/undertravel on leads, while allowing other lead properties (placement, style, size, etc.) to change. This is
done primarily when leads use undertravel to form a tab and you want to retain that tab during automatic nesting, collision avoidance,
etc.
 1. In the Edit Part List window, select an added part in the Part List grid.
 2. In the Preview, click the leads that you want to lock. You can click anywhere on the profile to select the leads.
 3. In the Properties pane, on the Leads tab, select the Lock Overtravel checkbox.

Note: If AutoTab is applied with the Number of Tabs or At Intervals strategies, undertravel on lead-outs will automatically be locked
on those profiles.

- 519 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing a part with pre-drawn leads

To import a CAD file with pre-drawn (or user-drawn) leads:
 l The part has to be drawn in a way that ProNest can recognize the geometry as a lead.
 l ProNest must be set to recognize the leads on import.

Drawing leads in the CAD File

The leads in the CAD file must be drawn at the intersection point of two line or arc segments. A user drawn lead drawn in the middle of a
line or arc segment will not be recognized as a lead, but instead as an open profile.

Setting ProNest to recognize the leads

In the Edit Part List window, there are two options to set before you add the part:
 1. On the Properties: CAD Import tab (on the lower right below the Preview), select the User drawn leads checkbox.
This will enable ProNest to identify the user-drawn leads during import.
 2. On the Properties: Nesting tab (on the lower right below the Preview), under Import Actions, select the Retain all existing leads
checkbox.
With this setting selected, ProNest will not apply new leads based on the material type and thickness of the part during import.

- 520 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

When are leads moved automatically by ProNest?

When a part is imported into ProNest, leads are applied based on your Interior and Exterior Leads settings pages or the custom leads prop-
erties that you specify in the Edit Part List window.
 
Once a part has been added to the part list, there are several different operations in ProNest that may cause the leads on that part to auto-
matically move:

Reload
 l If a part is reloaded in the part list (right-click and select Reload and Modify Leads), leads will be reapplied.

Changing material or class

 l When using Interior/Exterior Leads settings spreadsheets, changing the material of a part will cause leads to be reapplied based
on the new material that is selected.

Change machine
 l When changing the machine of a job, leads on parts in the job may be adjusted if the new machine has leads settings that are dif-
ferent from the previous machine.

Reverse cut direction

 l Reversing the cut direction of an entire part or single profile (from Advanced Edit) will most often swap the position of the lead-in
and lead-out.

Common line cutting

 l Applying common line cutting will remove leads on the part and reapply them to the entire CLC group.

Bridging
 l Bridging parts together will reduce the number of pierces (and therefore leads) that are necessary. A bridged group of parts only
requires a single lead-in/lead-out.

Move All Leads

 l When you select a nested part and select Move All Leads (on the Parts tab), leads will be repositioned on the part according to
the specified settings.

Automatically move leads during AutoNest or pattern array

 l On the AutoNest settings page, if Automatically move leads is selected, leads may be moved during automatic nesting or pattern
array.

Collision avoidance
 l On the Collision Avoidance settings page, if Automatically move exterior leads for avoidance and Automatically move interior
leads for avoidance are selected, leads may be repositioned in order to generate optimal torch paths for avoidance.

Part cut up
 l Applying Part cut up in Advanced Edit will apply new leads to the component parts that are created.

- 521 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Preventing leads from moving during...

All operations:
 l Lock the leads to keep lead position and properties during all operations.
 
AutoNest or pattern array:
 l On the AutoNest settings page, clear the Automatically move leads setting.
 l You can also prevent leads from moving during autonest/pattern array on a part by part basis:
 1. In the Edit Part List window, select the added part.
 2. In Nesting properties, in the AutoNest Properties section, clear the Allow leads to move setting.
When that part is automatically nested its leads will not move.
 
Reload:
 l When you right-click the part in the part list, select Reload > Preserve Leads.
 
Collision avoidance:
 l On the Collision Avoidance settings page, clear the Automatically move exterior leads for avoidance and Automatically move
interior leads for avoidance settings.
 
Change the current machine in a job:
 1. Go to File tab > Preferences.
 2. On the General page, set When changing machines, how should leads be modified? to Never.
 
Change material of a part in the part list:
 1. Go to File tab > Preferences.
 2. On the General page, clear the Always reapply leads when changing materials preference.

- 522 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

13. ARRAYING PARTS

About Array
Using the array feature, you can automatically place multiple copies of a part or group of parts onto a plate, in a specific arrangement.
Arrayed parts are placed as close as possible to one another, based on the part separation value in your settings, in order to maximize
material utilization.
 
In the following diagram, a single part has been arrayed on a plate:
 

 
 

Example 1:
 
Parts are arrayed based on the orientation of the master part.
 

Figure 1
 

- 523 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The nest in Figure 1 contains a rectangular part that is positioned diagonally on the plate. For the purposes of arraying, this is the
master part.
 
 

Figure 2
 
Figure 2 shows the nest in Figure 1 after the rectangular part has been arrayed. Notice that the position of the arrayed parts are that
same as the master part.

Example 2:
 
Groups of dissimilar parts can also be arrayed.
 

Figure 3

- 524 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
The nest in Figure 3 contains three master parts, which are all currently selected.
 
 

Figure 4
 
Figure 4 shows the same nest in Figure 3 after the selected parts have been arrayed.

- 525 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

How to array parts

Arrays can be applied either automatically or interactively on a nest.

Automatically array parts

 1. Drag one or more copies of the part onto the nest.

For best results, place the parts close to the Nesting Home ( ).
 2. Make sure that the parts you want to array are selected.

 3. On the Parts tab, in the Array group, click the arrow next to Array ( ) and select Automatic.
The required quantity of your parts will be arrayed on the nest.

Interactively array parts

Interactive arraying involves an intermediate step where you can define the array grid that is used.
 1. Drag one copy of the part onto the plate.
 2. Make sure that the part is selected.

 3. On the Parts tab, in the Array group, click the arrow next to Array ( ), then click Interactive.
The Array dialog will open.
 4. In the Rows and Columns boxes, enter the number of rows and columns that you want the Array Grid to use.
 5. In the Row spacing and Column spacing boxes, define the dimensions to use for the rows and columns in the Array Grid.
 6. Click OK.
The required quantity of your parts will be arrayed on the nest.
 

Array Grid

Rows
The number of rows in the array grid
 

Example:
 

An array grid with 3 rows

- 526 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Columns
The number of columns in the array grid
 

Example:
 

An array grid with 5 columns

Row spacing
This defines the spacing of rows in the array grid. Row spacing is expressed as a distance along the Y-axis.
 

Example:
 

The row spacing would be a negative number in this example, because it is measured along the Y-axis in the negative dir-
ection.

 
Column spacing
This defines the spacing of columns in array grid. Column spacing is expressed as a distance along the X-axis.
 

Example:
 

- 527 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The column spacing would be a positive number in this example, because it is measured along the X-axis in the positive dir-
ection.

 
By default, the values for rows and columns will be adjusted to best fit your parts. However, you can change these values to whatever
you want.

- 528 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dragging to create an array

With drag array, you can quickly place parts in a pattern array inside of a rectangular region on the nest. You can create different array
configurations as you drag the mouse around and see the results on the nest instantly. This provides fast manual nesting with greater con-
trol over the size and direction of the array.

Nest selected parts with drag array

 1. Select one or more parts on the nest.

 l Hold SHIFT + click to select multiple parts one by one.
 l Right-click and drag the selection box to select a group of parts.
 2. Click the yellow handle on top of the selection and drag in the direction that you want to place the parts.

 3. Simply drag the cursor around the nest to create various pattern array configurations. As you drag, the selected part or parts will
be pattern arrayed within the dotted rectangle.
A number indicator tells you the total quantity of parts in that array.*
 
 4. Release the mouse button to nest the parts.

Tip: Before releasing the mouse button, you can press ESC to cancel the array.

Nest anchored part with drag array

You can also quickly start a drag array with an anchored part.
 1. In the main window, on the Part List pane, make sure Anchor part to cursor is selected.
 2. The highlighted part in the Part List will be anchored to the mouse cursor.

- 529 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 3. Click and drag on an empty area of the nest to begin the array.
 4. While holding down the mouse button, simply move the cursor around the nest to create various pattern array configurations. As
you drag, the anchored part will be pattern arrayed within the dotted rectangle.

 5. Release the mouse button to nest the parts.

 
*Number indicator
If a nest is cut more than once, the number indicator will show the parts in that array followed by the total number of parts in par-
entheses. For instance, if there are 4 parts on the nest in an array box and the nest is cut twice, the number indicator would appear as “4
(8)”.

Also, if multiple torches are in use, the number indicator will reflect the total number of parts in the array box, including master and sub-
ordinate parts.

Controlling the direction of the array

During a drag array, the array’s origin point is set at the corner of the nest that is opposite to the direction you drag. For instance, con-
sider the following selected part:

- 530 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

If you click the yellow handle ( ) and drag down and to the left, the selected part will be placed in a pattern array starting at the upper
right corner of the nest.

Holding the CTRL key while dragging will anchor the array’s origin to the location of the selected part, instead of one of the plate’s
corners.

- 531 -
ProNest 2019 Manual

- 532 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Pattern Array
Pattern array is designed to maximize plate usage when arraying parts. With pattern array, ProNest automatically determines the spacing
and orientation to use for a selected part or group of parts to maximize the number of that part that can be nested in the available plate
area. Pattern array can be applied to a single part or a group of parts.
 
There are three different levels of pattern array nesting: basic, intermediate, and advanced. The basic level uses the fewest options and is
the fastest; the advanced level uses the most options and is the slowest. The intermediate level is a balance between speed and thor-
oughness. Generally, the advanced level offers the best result.

Nest a part using pattern array

 1. Place a part on the nest.

For best results, place the part close to the Nesting Home ( ).
 2. Make sure the part is selected.

 3. On the Parts tab, in the Array group, click the arrow next to Pattern Array ( ) and select an array level of Basic, Intermediate,
or Advanced.
The required quantity of your part will be nested with pattern array.
 
Example: The following example shows the difference between basic arraying and pattern array.
 
Consider the following nests, which are using the same size plate:
 

Figure 1
 
Let's say that the selected part in Figure 1 has a required quantity of 15. For the purposes of pattern array, this is considered the mas-
ter part.
 
 

- 533 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 2
 
The nest in Figure 2 shows the master part with basic arraying applied. Note that only 12 parts have been nested. All parts follow the
same orientation as the master part.
 
 

Figure 3
 
The nest in Figure 3 shows the same master part with pattern array applied (at the advanced level). Notice that all 15 parts have been
nested. The orientation of the parts has been changed so that they fit together better, creating a tighter nest.

- 534 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CLC Array
The CLC Array feature enables you to array and create common line parts at the same time. This will reduce your scrap and cut time, while
preserving consumables. CLC array is part of the Common Line Cutting module.
 

A nest with CLC Array applied to a triangular-shaped part

 
CLC Array can only be used with parts whose sides can have common lines. You can apply CLC Array either automatically or interactively.

Automatic CLC Array

To automatically apply CLC Array to a part:

 1. Drag one copy of the part onto the plate. This part should be located in the corner of your plate that has been designated as your
nesting home ( ).
 2. Make sure that the part is selected.

 3. On the Parts tab, in the Common Line Cut group, click the arrow next to Array ( ) and click Automatic.
The required quantity of your part will be nested using CLC Array.

Interactive CLC Array

Interactive CLC Array involves an intermediate step where you can define the CLC Array grid that is used.
 
To interactively apply CLC Array to a part:
 1. Drag one copy of the part onto the plate. This part should be located in the corner of your plate that has been designated as your
nesting home.
 2. Make sure that the part is selected.

 3. On the Parts tab, in the Common Line Cut group, click the arrow next to Array ( ) and click Set Up Then Start. The CLC Array
dialog will open.
 4. Enter the number of rows and columns that you want the CLC Array grid to use. Rows and columns are defined in terms of CLC
units, which are set up in your settings.
 5. Click OK.
Your part will be nested using CLC Array.

- 535 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: All forms of CLC will pre-kerf your parts according to the value set in your Common Line Cut settings page. You may also use
the checkbox on this page of your settings so that ProNest uses the kerf value from your Process Parameters.

- 536 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Chain Array
Chain array gives you a way of automatically chaining parts together in an array. Parts can be chained together in either vertical columns
or horizontal rows on the nest.

With chain array, parts are not fitted together as closely as with basic arraying or pattern array. However, chain array yields a uniform
arrangement of parts that requires only one pierce per row or column (for the exterior profiles). Chain array is available as part of the
Chain Cutting optional module.

Using Chain Array

To chain array a part:

 1. Drag one copy of the part onto the plate. This part should be located in the corner of your plate that has been designated as your
nesting home ( ).
 2. Make sure that the part is selected.

 3. On the Parts tab, in the Array group, click Chain Array.
The Chain Array dialog will appear.
 4. Adjust the array grid and chain array settings, as necessary. (See below for a description of chain array settings.)
 5. Click OK.
Your part will be added to the nest in a chain array.

The Chain Array dialog

Each time you apply chain array on a nest, you will be prompted to configure the array with the chain array dialog. By default, the array
grid values will be adjusted to best fit your parts. However, you can change these values to whatever you want.
 
Vertical
The chain will be created in vertical columns on the nest.

Horizontal
The chain will be created in horizontal rows across the nest.

- 537 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Rows
The number of rows in the array grid
 

Example:
 

A Chain Array grid with 3 rows

 
Column
The number of columns in the array grid
 

Example:
 

A Chain Array grid with 5 columns

 
Row Spacing
This defines the width of a row in the array grid. Row spacing is expressed as a distance along the Y-axis.
 

- 538 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:
 

The row spacing would be a negative number in this example, because it is measured along the Y-axis in the negative dir-
ection.

 
Column spacing
This defines the width of a column in array grid. Column spacing is expressed as a distance along the X-axis.
 

Example:
 

The column spacing would be a positive number in this example, because it is measured along the X-axis in the positive dir-
ection.

 
Show/hide advanced settings
Using the Advanced settings button, you can make quick adjustments to your Chaining settings before chain array is applied. Any
changes made to these settings will be applied to the current chain only, and will not be saved permanently in your settings. For a
detailed description of these settings, see Chaining settings.

Note: If you are trying to apply a Chain Array to a part, but your chain is not configured properly, an error icon ( ) will appear and
the OK button will be disabled. The values in the Chain Array dialog and the geometry of the part must meet a certain criteria

- 539 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

before Chain Array can be applied. Possible reasons for a conflict may include:
 n The position of the leads on your part are preventing the application of the chain. Try adjusting the position of the leads
on your part.
 n The chain cannot be created without crossing the cut path. Try selecting Allow cut to cross kerf in the advanced set-
tings.
 n The chain cannot be created using the existing cut sequence order. Try selecting Chain parts in reverse order in the
advanced settings.

- 540 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Stopping an array
You can stop any array that is in progress:

 l In the status bar, click Stop.

- 541 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

14. CUT SEQUENCE

About Cut Sequence mode
When you nest parts in ProNest, the program generates a cutting sequence for those parts based on your current settings. The cut
sequence determines the order in which individual parts on a nest will be cut. Cut sequence is generated whether parts have been nested
manually or automatically.
 
You can view or modify the cut sequence for your current nest by entering Cut Sequence mode.

Enter Cut Sequence mode

 l On the Nest tab, in the Modify group, click Cut Sequence.

The parts on your nest will appear numbered by cut sequence.
 

Note: The part sequence numbers show the order in which exterior profiles are cut. This represents the order in which the parts will
drop out.

 
In cases where nested parts are grouped together (such as with bridging, chaining, or common line cutting), normal cut sequence num-
bers are appended with sub-sequence numbers which indicate the cut order of parts within that group.
 

- 542 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

On this nest, the chained parts have cut sequence numbers of 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, and 1-4. The group of chained parts will be cut first
on the nest, starting with the bottom-most part in the chain.
 
Once you are in Cut Sequence mode, you can modify the cut sequence for your nest, or delete the current sequence entirely and define a
new sequence manually.

The Cut Sequence tab

The Cut Sequence tab will become active upon entering Cut Sequence mode. The Cut Sequence tab contains the following functions:
 

Ribbon
Name Description
control
Toggle This is an indicator signaling that you can add or remove parts from the cut sequence by clicking them. If
you click on a sequenced part, it will become unsequenced. If an unsequenced part is clicked, it will be
added to the cut sequence.
Finish: Insert This enables you to move or insert the unsequenced part into the cut sequence before parts that have
Unsequenced already been sequenced.
Parts Before
Finish: Append This appends the unsequenced parts on the current nest to the end of the cut sequence.
Unsequenced
Parts to End
Clear From This will clear the cut sequence from a user-defined point onward.

Clear This will clear the entire cut sequence for the current nest.

Calculate This will open the Cut Sequence settings page, where you can make adjustments to your cut sequence set-
tings and apply your changes to the current nest.

- 543 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Modifying the cut sequence of a nest

The cut sequence of a nest can be modified in a number of different ways. You should be in Cut Sequence mode to modify the cut
sequence of a nest.

Enter Cut Sequence mode

 l On the Nest tab, click Cut Sequence.

In this article...
Change the cut sequence of a few parts on the nest
Calculate a new cut sequence
Place parts in a specific spot in the cut sequence
Move parts to the end of the cut sequence
Reassign the cut sequence of an entire nest
Reassign the cut sequence from a user-defined point onward
Exit Cut Sequence mode

Change the cut sequence of a few parts on the nest

 1. On the Nest tab, click Cut Sequence ( ). You will enter Cut Sequence Mode.
 2. Click each part that you want to change the cut sequence for. The parts will become unsequenced.
 3. Click on those parts again in the order that you want to assign the new cut sequence.

Calculate a new cut sequence 

 1. Click the Recalculate button.

 2. Adjust your Cut Sequence settings, as necessary.
 3. Click OK.

Place parts in a specific spot in the cut sequence

 1. Click each part that you want to insert in the proper order. These parts will become unsequenced. The order in which the parts are
clicked will be the order that they are added during insertion.

 2. Click Finish, then click Insert Unsequenced Parts Before.

 3. Click the sequenced part that your selected parts should immediately precede.
The sequence numbers of all parts will be adjusted to show the new order.

Move parts to the end of the cut sequence

 1. Click each part that you want to insert in the proper order. These parts will become unsequenced. The order in which the parts are
clicked will be the order that they are added at the end.

- 544 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 2. Click Finish, then click Append Unsequenced Part to End button.
Your parts will be shifted to the end of the cut sequence.

Reassign the cut sequence of an entire nest

 1. Click Clear.

 2. Click on each part in the order that you want them to be cut.
-or-
 3. Click Recalculate to apply the cut sequence automatically.

Reassign the cut sequence from a user-defined point onward

 1. Click Clear ( ) , then click Clear From.

 2. Click on the sequenced part where you want to break the current cut sequence. Parts with sequence numbers lower than this part
will remain sequenced. All parts after this point (included the selected part) will become unsequenced.
 3. Click on each unsequenced part in the order that you want them to be cut.

Exit Cut Sequence mode

 l Click Close on the Cut Sequence tab.

-or-
 l Press ESC.
ProNest will automatically sequence any remaining unsequenced parts and return to the Nest tab.

- 545 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

15. CROP
What is a crop?
In ProNest, cropping is used to cut away a usable portion of the plate from the skeleton that is created after parts are cut. The portion of
plate that is cropped from a nest is called a remnant. Cropping can help you to maximize material usage by saving portions of plates that
might otherwise be scrapped. Crops can be applied automatically to a nest using the AutoCrop feature. You can also manually apply a
crop to a plate after your parts have been nested.
 

A nest with two parts nested. Note that a sub-   The same nest with a crop applied. The remnant,
stantial portion of the plate has not been nested or cropped portion of plate, appears gray. This
on. remnant can be cataloged and used at a later
date.

How do crops affect output?

When a crop is defined for a nest, the default output sequence would place the crop at the end of the CNC file, causing the crop to be
cut after all parts are cut. However, you can change how crops are added to output by modifying your cut sequence rules.

Cropping a nest
When you crop a nest, data from the Crop page of your settings (such as a crop's Extension) will affect how the crop is applied. Typically,
crops are applied after all of your parts have been nested.
 
Crops can be applied either manually or automatically. When applied automatically, ProNest uses the data found in the Crop page of
your settings to find the best remnant that can be generated from the current nest and then applies automatic crop lines accordingly.
Before using Auto Crop on your nests, you should make sure that your "Crop settings" on page 150 are configured properly.

Automatic cropping (AutoCrop)

To apply an automatic crop to your current nest:

 l On the Nest tab, click AutoCrop.

 
To apply an automatic crop to all nests in your job:

 l On the Nest tab, click the arrow next to AutoCrop and then click AutoCrop All Nests.

- 546 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Manual cropping

 1. On the Nest tab, click Crop.

You will enter Crop mode, where you can define the path for a crop on the current nest.
 2. Using the cross-hair cursor, click anywhere in the area outside of the plate edge. This will define where your crop should begin.
 3. Click a series of points on your nest to define the cut path.
 4. Click Close Crop or press ESC to finish the crop and exit the mode.
ProNest will automatically trim or extend the last crop line to the plate edge, if necessary.

Tips:  l You can click and drag while applying a crop line in order to see where each section of the crop will be cut.
 l Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking and dragging will cause the crop line to snap to the nearest 45° angle.
 l While defining a crop, you can delete the most recent section of the crop by pressing the BACKSPACE key.

Deleting crops

To delete a crop from your current nest

 l On the Nest tab, click Delete Crop.

 
To delete all crops in your job:

 l On the Nest tab, click Delete Crops from All Nests.

Important: ProNest will not prevent you from defining a crop line that extends through a nested part. When applying crop lines,
please be sure that there is no conflict with the part profiles on your nest.

- 547 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

16. REPORTS
Standard reports
Reports provide detailed information about various different aspects of your job, including production times and costs, utilization fig-
ures, part and plate information, customer information, and printable part labels. ProNest can produce a variety of reports, as detailed in
the following table:
 

Standard reports Description

Nest Plot This report shows an image of each nest, the plate size, material information, and the cut sequence
number for each part.
 
Nest Plot (Color) Identical to the Nest Plot report, but parts are always drawn color-filled when using Fill By Part Prop-
erty. The Job Color Legend report, which contains a separate color key mapping fill colors to part prop-
erty values, is included automatically.
 
See Colorized reports for more information.
Nest Plot (Draw Parts Only) This is identical to the Nest Plot report but doesn't show any plate geometry, crops or skeleton lines.
 
Single-Head Nest Detail This report shows an image of each nest, the plate size, material information, and the cut sequence
number for each part. A list of nested parts in cut sequence order is also displayed, with part dimen-
sions and weight shown.
 
Single-Head Nest Detail Identical to the Single Head Nest Detail report, but parts are always drawn color-filled when using Fill
(Color) By Part Property. The Job Color Legend report, which contains a separate color key mapping fill colors
to part property values, is included automatically.
 
See Colorized reports for more information.
Single-Head Nest Sequence This report shows an image of each nest, the plate size and material information, and the cut sequence
number for each part. A list of the nested parts in cut sequence order is also displayed. The Single-
Head Nest Sequence report can be useful if you have a nest with many parts nested and want to fit
everything on a single report page.
 
Multi-Head Nest Detail This report shows an image of each nest, the plate size, material information, and the cut sequence
number for each part. A list of the nested parts in cut sequence order showing the number of torches
used and the torch spacing for each part is also displayed.
 
Job Summary Provides summaries of the utilizations, plates, and production cost information for each nest in the job
 
Part Detail Provides dimensions, material, weight, quantity, and other part information, as well as a picture of
each part. Part costs are calculated using true area.
 
Part Detail (Color) Identical to the Part Detail report, but parts are drawn color-filled when using Fill By Part Property. The
Job Color Legend report, which contains a separate color key mapping fill colors to part property val-

- 548 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Standard reports Description

ues, is included automatically.
 
See Colorized reports for more information.
Allocated Part Detail This contains the same fields as the Part Detail report, but involves a completely different method for
calculating costs, known as allocated costing. To learn more see "What is allocated costing?" on page
600
 
Rectangular Part Detail Similar to the Part Detail report, except that all calculated values are based on the part's rectangular
  area (as opposed to its true area).
 
Part Summary Similar to the Part Detail report, except that a picture of the part is not included
 
Inventory Plate Detail Provides the dimensional information for each inventory plate that was used in the job
 
Inventory Plate Summary Accounts for inventory plates used in the job
 
Optimization Displays the utilization and production information for each nest in the job, along with the optim-
ization strategy that was used to create it (if applicable)
 
Part List by Customer The Part List report contains the file names (including file path), quantity required, quantity nested, pri-
ority, restriction angle, initial rotation and reference value for each part in a job, sorted by customer.
 
Part Label (Avery 5264) Will print the part information on standard Avery 5264 labels
 
Stack Label (Avery 5264) Similar to Part Label report, except that this label is designed to stick on top of a stack of like parts.
Prints on standard Avery 5264 labels.
 
HVAC Label (A5164) Will print labels for HVAC parts on Avery 5164 labels
 
Job Color Legend When color filling by a part property is used, this report shows a legend with a color swatch ( ) and
associated part property value for the entire job. This report explains what each color means when
reading the other colorized reports.
 
See Colorized reports for more information.
Tooling Layout Used with the Drill Machine Interface to show tooling information by nest. Details each tool that must
  be loaded into a respective turret station in order to complete all tooling on a nest.

Note: Reports contain different utilization and costing figures, based on report type. For more information on how costs and util-
ization figures are calculated, refer to "How are costs calculated?" on page 584 and "How are utilization figures calculated?" on
page 608

- 549 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using reports
Typically reports are generated after nesting is complete, though you can generate a report at any time in ProNest. You can select which
types of reports you want to view and print from the Reports Manager dialog. The list of available reports may vary based on the optional
modules that are installed.

In this article...
Viewing reports
Exporting reports
Printing reports

Viewing reports

 1. Open the Report Manager dialog (From the main ProNest window, on the Home tab, click Reports ).
A list of standard reports will be displayed in the right-hand section of the screen.
 2. Select the reports you want to view by clicking them.

Note: To select multiple individual reports, hold the CTRL key and click the reports that you want to select. To
select a range of reports, hold the SHIFT key and click the first and last report in the list of reports that
you want to select.

 3. Click the Print Preview toolbar button.

You can use the arrows ( ) in the preview dialog to scan through your reports.

Exporting reports

 1. Open the Report Manager dialog (From the main ProNest window, on the Home tab, click Reports ).
 2. On the left pane, select the folder containing the reports that you want to export.
 3. Select the reports that you want to export by clicking them.
 4. Click the Export toolbar button.
You can choose to export to Adobe PDF, CSV (Comma-Separated Values), XLS or HTML file.

Printing reports

 1. Open the Report Manager dialog (From the main ProNest window, on the Home tab, click Reports ).
 2. On the left pane, select the folder containing the reports that you want to print.
 3. Select the reports that you want to print by clicking them.
 4. Click the Print toolbar button.

Tip: You can quickly print a scaled Nest Report (similar to the Nest Plot Report) for your current nest from the main ProNest window.
 
To print a Nest Report:

- 550 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. On the Nest tab, in the Print group, click Print Current View.
 2. Click Print.
 3. Set print options.
 4. Click OK.

- 551 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Custom reports
With custom ProNest reports, you can create reports that fit your specific needs. Unlike standard reports, custom reports are modifiable -
they can be renamed or edited using the FastReport designer.

In this article...
Creating a new custom report
Editing a custom report
Adding custom reports subfolders
Renaming a custom report

Creating a new custom report

You can either start a new custom report from scratch or use an existing standard or custom report as a template to build your new
report. 
 
To create a new report:

 1. Open the Report Manager dialog (From the main ProNest window, on the Home tab, click Report Manager ).
 2. On the File menu, select New, then Report.
The New Report dialog will open.
 3. Select a template that you want to use as a basis for your report. You can choose from the following templates:
 l Blank: creates a new report with no existing data, text, or formatting
 l Standard reports: creates a duplicate of a standard report, with existing data, text, and formatting
 l Custom reports: creates a duplicate of a custom report, with existing data, text, and formatting
 4. Select a report.
 5. Click Create.
Your new report will be added to your list of custom reports.

Tip: You can quickly copy any standard report to your custom reports.

 1. On the left pane, select the Standard folder ( ).

 2. From the right-hand section of the screen, drag and drop a standard report over the Custom reports folder ( ) that you
created.

The selected report will be added to the custom reports folder.

Once a standard report is copied to a custom reports folder, the report can be edited or renamed,

- 552 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Editing a custom report

Custom reports can be edited using the built-in FastReport designer.

 
To edit a custom report:

 1. Open the Report Manager dialog (From the main ProNest window, on the Home tab, click Report Manager ).

 2. On the left pane, select the Custom Reports folder ( ) containing the report you want to edit.
 3. In the right-hand section of the screen, select the report.
 4. Click the Edit toolbar button.
The FastReport designer will open, where your custom report can be edited.

Adding custom reports subfolders

 1. Open the Report Manager dialog (From the main ProNest window, on the Home tab, click Report Manager ).

 2. Right-click the Custom Reports folder ( ), select New, then Folder.
A subfolder will appear beneath the Custom Reports folder.
 3. Enter a name for the subfolder.

Renaming a custom report

 1. Open the Report Manager dialog (From the main ProNest window, on the Home tab, click Report Manager ).

 2. On the left pane, select the Custom Reports folder ( ) containing the report you want to rename.
 3. In the right-hand section of the screen, right-click the report and select Rename.
 4. Enter a new name for the report.

- 553 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Colorized reports
ProNest reports can display color-filled parts. You can set the fill color according to a part's property (such as Customer).
 
The following standard reports are designed to be viewed in color:
Nest Plot (Color)
Single Head Nest Detail (Color)
Part Detail (Color)
When they're exported or printed, they include a color key on the last page.

In order to show color-filled parts in these reports:

 l In Report Options (File > Options in Report Manager), set Fill to By Part Property (you can choose any property listed).
-or-
 1. In Report Options, set Fill to Same as Application.
 2. In the Color Legend, set the Fill scheme to By Part Property (you can choose any property listed).
 
You can also enable color-filling in many of the other standard reports that include part images. In addition to the options above, set the
following:
 l In Report Options, on the Nest tab, select Draw with parts filled.Images of parts on nests will be color-filled.
 l In Report Options, on the Part tab, select Draw with parts filled. Images of individual parts will be color-filled.
Unlike the three color reports listed previously, other standard reports will not include a color key page. You can add that manually by
exporting/printing the Job Color Legend standard report.

Note: When Draw with parts filled is enabled and Fill scheme is set to Standard or Highlight Part, parts will be filled in gray in
reports.

- 554 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Batches
A batch is a user-defined group of standard and/or custom reports. Typically, you would create a batch of commonly used reports that
you want to generate on a regular basis.

In this article...
Creating a batch
Adding reports to a batch
Exporting a batch
Printing a batch
Removing reports from a batch

Creating a batch

In the left pane, a root folder named "Batches" ( ) will already exist. Under this folder, you can add as many batches as you want.
 
To create a new batch:

 1. Open Report Manager (on the Home tab, click Reports ).
 2. On the File menu, select New, then Batch.

 3. Your new batch will be listed under the Batches root folder ( ) in the left pane.
 4. Enter a name for your batch.

Adding reports to a batch

 1. On the left pane, select the source of your reports (Standard or Custom).
 2. Select the report(s) you want to include in the batch.

Tip: To select multiple individual reports, hold the CTRL key and click the reports that you want to select. To
select a range of reports, hold the SHIFT key and click the first and last report in the list of reports that you
want to select.

 3. Drag the selected report over the Batches sub-folder that you created.

The selected reports will be added to the batch.

Exporting a batch

 1. On the left pane, select the batch that you want to export.
 2. Click the Export toolbar button.

- 555 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

You can choose to export to Adobe PDF, CSV (Comma-Separated Values), or HTML file.

Printing a batch

 1. On the left pane, select the batch that you want to print.
 2. Click the Print toolbar button.

Removing reports from a batch

 1. On the left pane, select the batch that you want to modify.
 2. From the right-hand section, select the reports you want to remove.
 3. Click the Delete toolbar button.

- 556 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Reports options
You can adjust how information is displayed in your reports using the Options dialog.
 
To open the Options dialog:
 l From the Report Manager dialog, on the File menu, select Options.
 

Format Options
Precision
The number of places after a decimal point
 
Padded
When selected, all numbers will be carried out to the specified precision value for decimal places, even if the precision is unnecessary.
 
Format according to regional preferences
When selected, reports will use the display units (MMKS or IPS) and precision specified on the Regional tab of your preferences.
 

Image Options
Fill
When the Draw with parts filled report option is enabled, you can select a color fill scheme to use for reports.

Standard
Parts will be filled with a light gray color.

No fill
Parts will not be color-filled in ProNest reports.

- 557 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Same as application
Parts will be filled according to your current Color Legend fill scheme.

Fill by a Part Property

This can be used to set a fill scheme that is independent of the scheme used in the Color Legend. Parts can be color-filled according to
a particular part property. Parts with different values for that property will be filled with different colors in reports.
 
Font
The font used for text that appears in nest, part, or plate images. This includes part names, cut sequence numbers, and dimensions.
 
Font size
The size of text that appears in nest, part, or plate images. This includes part names, cut sequence numbers, and dimensions.
 
Line width 
The width of the plot lines shown in nest, part, or plate images
 
Show cut sequence numbers
Display the cut sequence numbers in nest images

Show part names

Display part names in nest images
 
Show display only
Show display-only profiles in part or nest images

- 558 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Show cut direction
Display the cut direction of parts in nest images

Show pierces
Show pierces in part or nest images

Show open profiles

Show open profiles in part or nest images
 
Show dimensions
Display part or plate dimensions in part/plate images

Show plate shadow

Display a darkened shadow underneath plate or nest images
 
Draw with parts filled
When enabled, parts will be color-filled in selected standard reports.
 
If enabled on the Nest tab, parts in the nest-level reports can be color-filled.

- 559 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

If enabled on the Part tab, parts in the part-level reports can be color-filled.

If this option is turned off, parts will not be color-filled in selected standard reports. See Colorized reports for more information.

Note: This option is ignored by the following standard reports: Nest Plot (Color), Single Head Nest Detail (Color), and Part Detail
(Color).

- 560 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using destinations
Report destinations provide a way to pre-define a folder and file name, as well as set various default printer and export properties, so that
you don't have to do this each time a report or batch of reports is exported or printed.
 
Available types of destinations include: Printer, PDF, CSV, XLS, or HTML.

Creating destinations

 1. Open Report Manager (on the Home tab, click Reports ).

 2. In the left pane, right-click the Destinations folder.

 3. Select New, then select the type of destination that you want. Choices include Printer, PDF, CSV, XLS, or HTML.
 4. Type a name for the destination.
 5. Enter destination properties. Each of these destination types has a setup page where you can set folder and file name, as well as
properties and document settings. Click a link below for more information on a destination type:
 l "Printer report destinations" on page 563
 l "PDF report destinations" on page 565
 l "CSV report destinations" on page 567
 l "XLS report destinations" on page 568
 l "HTML report destinations" on page 569

Sending reports to a destination

You can send a single report or batch of reports to a destination as follows:

 1. Open Report Manager (on the Home tab, click Reports ).
 2. Select a report or batch by clicking it.

 3. Click the Send to toolbar button.

 4. Select a destination from the list.
 
-or-
 

 1. Open Report Manager (on the Home tab, click Reports ).
 2. Simply click and drag the report or batch onto the destination.
 
-or- (for batches only)
 

 1. On the Home tab, in the Produce group, click the arrow next to Reports.

 2. Click the side arrow for the batch you want.
 3. Select a destination from the list.
Your batch of reports will be sent to the destination specified.

- 561 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Delete a destination

 1. Open Report Manager (on the Home tab, click Reports ).
 2. In the left pane, select a destination.

 3. Click the Delete toolbar button.

- 562 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Printer report destinations

Printer
Name
Select a printer from the list of installed printers.
 
Properties
Click this button to change the properties, such as paper type, for the selected printer.
 
Where
The location of the selected printer or port that the printer is connected to.
 

Copies
Number of copies
In this list, select the number of copies that you want printed.
 
Collate
Select this check box if you want your print job to be kept in the order that you created in your document when printed. This check box
is applicable if you are printing more than one copy.
 

Print mode
The paper size that the report should be printed on. This will override the page size set in printer properties.
Default
The page size defined in the report matches the paper size it will be printed on.
 
Split big pages
Reports will be split apart (if necessary) to fit on the paper size specified in "Print on sheet".
 
Join small pages
Reports will be joined together (if necessary) to fit the paper size specified in "Print on sheet".
 
Scale
Reports will be scaled (up or down) to the paper size specified in "Print on sheet".
 

Other
Print
In this list, click if you want to print all pages, odd pages, or even pages.
 
Order
The order in which to print the pages of the document. Selecting "Reverse" will print the last page first.
 
Duplex
Default

- 563 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Uses the settings saved in the report (In FastReport, go to File > Page Settings > Other Options).
 
Vertical
Vertical duplex printing. The bottom of one page is at the same end of the sheet as the top of the next page.
 
Horizontal
Horizontal duplex printing. The tops of both sides of the page are on the same end of the sheet.
 
Simplex
Single sided printing (no duplex).

- 564 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

PDF report destinations

File name
You can enter text and variables to specify a file path and name where the destination will be saved.
 

In the File name box, you can click the browse button ( ) to open the Edit Field dialog, where you can customize the file name for-
mula. See "Using variables" on page 921 for more information.
 
 

Export properties
Compressed
Output file compression. This reduces file size but increases export time.
 
Embedded fonts
All fonts used in the report will be contained in the PDF output file so that the file will be displayed correctly when opened on a computer
where these fonts are absent. This increases output file size.
 
Background
Export of graphic image will be assigned to a page into PDF file. This increases output file size.
 
Print optimized
Graphic images are output in high resolution for correct printing. Enabling this option is necessary only when the document contains
graphics and printing is necessary. This increases output file size.
 
Outline
When a report outline is used, this option enables export of the outline to the PDF document.
 
 

Document information
This information will be embedded in the PDF document (in Document Properties).
 

Authentication and permissions

Owner password
Entering an owner password will turn on PDF security permissions. The owner password will be required to change PDF document secur-
ity settings and permissions.
 
User password
This password will be required to open the PDF document. (The user password is also known as a Document Open Password.) If no user
password is specified, the PDF will not require a password to be opened.
 
The following options control the PDF security settings and permissions, which restricts what can be done to the PDF document:
 l Print the document
 l Modify the document

- 565 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Copy of text and graphics

 l Add or modify text annotations
Selecting a checkbox will enable the action in the PDF, clearing a checkbox will prohibit the action.

Note: An owner password must be set for these security and permissions options to take effect.

Viewer preferences
Hide toolbar
Hides the toolbar in the PDF viewer.
 
Hide menubar
Hides the menubar in the PDF viewer.
 
Hide window user interface
Hides the window controls that are displayed in the background of the PDF viewer.
 
Fit window
Adjusts the document window to fit snugly around the opening page.
 
Center window
Positions the window in the center of the screen area.
 
Print scaling
When selected, in the PDF document print setup screen, Page scaling is set to "Shrink to printable area" by default. When cleared, Page
scaling is set to "(None)".
 

- 566 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CSV report destinations

File name
You can enter text and variables to specify a file path and name where the destination will be saved.
 

In the File name box, you can click the browse button ( ) to open the Edit Field dialog, where you can customize the file name for-
mula. See "Using variables" on page 921 for more information.
 
OEM code page
Saves output file in current OEM code page.
 
Separator
The values separator to use in the output file. The default separator is a semicolon (;).
 

- 567 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

XLS report destinations

File name
You can enter text and variables to specify a file path and name where the destination will be saved.
 

In the File name box, you can click the browse button ( ) to open the Edit Field dialog, where you can customize the file name for-
mula. See "Using variables" on page 921 for more information.
 

Export properties
Continuous
 
 
Pictures
Graphic images will be included in the XLS worksheet.
 
As text
All objects are transferred into the worksheet as text objects. This option may be useful when transferring numeric fields with com-
plicated formatting.
 
Fast export
Usage of optimized fast data transferring to Excel. Disabling this option slows down data transfer but increases export compatibility on
any errors during data transfer.
 
Grid lines
Grid lines will be displayed in the worksheet.
 
Merge cells
Empty, adjacent cells will be merged together in the worksheet.
 
WYSIWYG
Full compliance to report appearance. On this option disabling the optimization for reducing the number of lines and columns in res-
ulting table is performed.
 
Background
Export of filling color assigned to report page.
 
Page breaks
Page breaks will be included in the worksheet.
 

- 568 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

HTML report destinations

File name
You can enter text and variables to specify a file path and name where the destination will be saved.
 

In the File name box, you can click the browse button ( ) to open the Edit Field dialog, where you can customize the file name for-
mula. See "Using variables" on page 921 for more information.
 

Export properties
Styles
Transfers text object design styles. Clearing this setting optimizes exporting but worsens document appearance.
 
All in one folder
When selected, all HTML files and images will be saved the same root folder. When cleared, files will be saved in a tiered subfolder struc-
ture.
 
Page navigator
A special navigator bar (JavaScript) is included in HTML output for paging from one HTML report to the next. This is useful when Mul-
tipage is enabled.
 
Fixed width
Selecting this setting will block automatic width modification when the window is resized.
 
Multipage
When selected, each report is saved in a separate HTML file. Clearing this setting will save all reports in a single HTML file.
 
Background
Include graphics from the background of the report page.
 
Pictures
Select a format for saving pictures.
 
Choices: JPEG, BMP, GIF, PNG, (None)

Selecting "(None)" will omit images from HTML output.

- 569 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

17. OUTPUT
Creating NC output
After nesting is complete, CNC output can be created for your job. During output, ProNest creates separate CNC files for each nest in
your job. Each CNC file contains coded instructions for your cutting machine to cut an entire nest, including any crops or skeleton cuts
that may have been added.

Create NC output for nests in the current job

 1. On the Home tab, click the arrow next to Output then click Output NC.
The Output dialog will open.
 2. In the File name box, type a name for your output file.
ProNest will assign a unique file name to each nest in your job, based on the file name that you entered.
 3. Make sure the nests that you want to output are selected.
 4. Click Output.
ProNest will generate a CNC file for each nest in your job. These CNC files would then be sent to your machine controller.
To learn about creating CNC output for nests, explore the following the links:
 l "The Output dialog" on page 571
 l "How does NC file naming work?" on page 574
 l "The Output Progress dialog" on page 577
 l "Additional machine output" on page 579
 l "CNC Output settings" on page 159
 
You can also create single post CNC output for an individual part. Click the following link to learn more:
 l "Single part output" on page 578

- 570 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The Output dialog

Generating output for your nests is done using the Output dialog. 

Open the Output dialog

 l On the Home tab, click the arrow next to Output, then click Output NC.
 

The Output dialog

 
Each nest in your job is listed separately in this dialog, along with the nests's File Name and Action. You can use the checkboxes next to
each nest to indicate whether or not that nest should be output.

Note: If you are using subroutines, all nests in your job must be output at the same time. Because of this, checkboxes do not appear
next to each nest when subroutines are in use.

Output folder
By default, this will be set to the location specified in your CNC Output settings.
 
File name
You can insert a file name for your output files here. If you have more than one nest, ProNest will insert your file name and then append it
with a different number for each CNC file. By default this box will contain the name of your current job.
 

Example:
If you have two nests and you entered "TEST" in the File name box, ProNest would create two output files named "TEST01.CNC" and
"TEST02.CNC".

- 571 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: If the Use long file names option is not selected in your CNC Output settings, ProNest will truncate the file name so that it does
not exceed eight characters.

To learn more about how output files are named, see "How does NC file naming work?" on page 574
 
Program number
You can specify a program number to be inserted into the first CNC file output for your job. The exact way that this setting is used (or
whether it is even used at all) is determined entirely by the particular CFF being used. This will appear only when Show program number
in output dialog is selected in your CNC Output settings.
  
Use subroutines to name output files 
When selected, CNC output files will be named according to subroutine address. This will appear only when subroutines are in use and
Show program number in output dialog is selected in your CNC Output settings.
 
Machine
The current machine.
 
Post processor
The CFF file used by the current machine.
 
Additional machines
You can create NC output files for one or more additional machines at the same time you create output for the current machine. See Addi-
tional machine output for more information.
 
Tools

Output Settings
Clicking this link will take you directly to the CNC Output page of your settings. From there, you can make changes to your output set-
tings on the fly and apply those changes to your current job without closing the CNC Output dialog.

Note: Any changes made to these settings will only affect the current machine - it will not have any impact on output for addi-
tional machines.

Change Materials
You can change the materials used in your job. To learn more, see Changing materials in your job.
 

Remnants and Skeletons

You can save remnants and skeletons of your nests to the Plate Inventory Database for use at a later time. Remnants and skeletons are
added to the database once a nest is output.
 
To learn more, see "About remnants and skeletons" on page 706.
 
Browse Folders
This will open an explorer view of your output file path.
 

- 572 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
The machine (CFG) and post processor (CFF) used to generate output are displayed at the bottom of the CNC Output dialog.

Tip: The NC output icon ( ) shows the output status of a nest. Nests that have not yet been output have an inactive icon ( ).
Nests that have already been output have an active icon ( ), which you can click to view the NC code created for that nest.

- 573 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

How does NC file naming work?

When you output a job, there are several variables that control how output files will be named. Output file names are assigned from
the Output dialog.
 

Figure 1: The CNC Output dialog

 
In the File name box (indicated by the red arrow), you can input a name that should be applied to all of the nests in your job. If your job
has only one nest, the value in this box will match the CNC file name (indicated by the green arrow). If there is more than one nest in the
job (as shown in Figure 1), each CNC file name will be appended as follows: <Filename>01, <Filename>02, <Filename>03, etc.
 
Note that you can also edit CNC file names individually by clicking the file name and entering an alphanumeric name.
 

Note: If the Use long file names option is not selected in your CNC Output settings, ProNest will truncate the file name so that it does
not exceed eight characters.

File extensions

- 574 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The default file extension for output files is .cnc. This can be changed to any extension using the CNC file extension setting, found on
the CNC Output page of your ProNest settings. If this settings value is left blank and a job has more than one nest, the extension will auto-
matically be added as follows: .N1, .N2, .N3, etc.
 

Example 1:
CNC file extension = cnc
Output a single nest with the name: MyJob.cnc
Output file: MyJob.cnc
 
Example 2:
CNC file extension = cnc
Output three nests with the name: MyJob.cnc
Output files: MyJob01.cnc, MyJob02.cnc, MyJob03.cnc
 
Example 3:
Clear the CNC file extension setting
Output a single nest with the name: MyJob
Output file: MyJob
 
Example 4:
Clear the CNC file extension setting
Output three nests with the name: MyJob
Output files: MyJob.N1, MyJob.N2, MyJob.N3

Subroutines and file naming

If your CFF is set up to use subroutines, output files can be automatically named using the program number as the base file name.
 

Figure 2: The CNC Output dialog with Program number and Use subroutines to name output files displayed
 

- 575 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

When Use subroutines to name output files is selected, the first nest in your job will be named with the program number (as shown in
Figure 2). Subsequent nests will be named during output, based on how many subroutines are present in a given nest. Notice that you
can modify the program number from this dialog.

Note: In order to view Program number and Use subroutines to name output files from the CNC Output dialog, Show program
number in output dialog must be selected on the CNC Output page of your settings.

If you are using subroutines and/or program number, but do not want to name your output files with subroutines, simply clear the Use
subroutines to name output files box. Your output files can be named as normal.

Additional machines and file naming

If an additional machine has a different output folder from the current machine, the additional machine's output files will have the same
names as the output files for the current machine.
 
If an additional machine has the same output folder as the current machine, the additional machine's output file names will be appended
with the machine name (for example, "MyJob01.cnc" would become "MyJob01 - Conventional plasma.cnc").

- 576 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The Output Progress dialog

The Output Progress dialog, which appears while CNC output is being generated, displays the status of each output file.
 

Tip: You can open any CNC output file directly from the Output Progress dialog by clicking the file name, as shown in the above dia-
gram.

Status
The status of your output file will be displayed upon output.
 

Completed The CNC file was created successfully
 

Warning CNC file was created, but there are issues that may require attention.
 

Error Conflicts in your job must be addressed before viable output can be created
 

Cancelled Output was cancelled
 

Close this window on successful completion

Selecting this box will hide Output Progress dialog when status for all nests is Completed ( ). This setting can be changed from your
ProNest preferences.

- 577 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Single part output

You can create machine-ready CNC output for a single part or group of parts using ProNest. Creating single part output for a part is done
after the part has been processed and added to the part list.
 
Single part output works a lot like creating output for a nest. During output, each individual part is coded into a separate CNC file.
ProNest takes into account all of your CNC Output and Output Axis settings, as well as other machine and process settings information
when writing the NC code for a part.
 
To create output for one or more parts:
 1. In the Edit Part List window, add your parts to the part list.
 2. Make any needed adjustments (such as leads positioning) to your part in Advanced Edit, then return to the Edit Part List.
 3. In the Part List grid, select all of the parts that you want to output.

To select multiple parts, hold CTRL as you click the parts. To select all parts in the part list, click Select All on the Edit menu.
 4. Click the Output Part button in the Part List.
The CNC Output dialog will open. All selected parts in your part list will be listed, with a checkbox next to each part.
By default, the name of your parts' output file will match the part name. If you want, you can rename parts individually or enter a
root file name for all parts using the File name box (for more information, see "How does NC file naming work?" on page 574).
 5. Select a Home Position for your part. By default, this will match the Part home from your CNC Output settings.
 6. Click Output.
Your output file will be created in the specified location.

Note: You can also output a single part from Advanced Edit:
 1. From the Edit Part List window, add your part to the part list.
 2. Make sure that your part is currently selected in the part list.

 3. In the Preview, click the Advanced Edit button.

 4. Make any needed adjustments (such as leads positioning) to your part in Advanced Edit.
 5. From the File menu, select Output.
 6. Browse to a folder for your output file.
 7. In the File name box, enter a file name for your part. The extension for this file reflects the CNC file extension specified in
the CNC Output page of your settings.
 8. Click Output.

- 578 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Additional machine output

You can create NC output files for one or more additional machines at the same time you create output for the current machine. This is
useful in cases where the current machine is down or unavailable but there are other machines in your operation that can cut the nest.
You can quickly shift jobs between similar machines to remain agile and maximize production, without having to rebuild the part list and
nest again.
 

Create NC output for nests in the current job for additional machines

 1. On the Home tab, click the arrow next to Output then click Output NC.
The Output dialog will open.
 2. In the File name box, type a name for your output file.
ProNest will assign a unique file name to each nest in your job, based on the file name that you entered.
 3. Make sure the nests that you want to output are selected.
 4. In the Additional machines box, click Add and select one or more machines from the list.

- 579 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 5. Click Output.

For each nest, ProNest will generate a separate NC file for each machine. These NC files would then be sent to the appropriate machine
controller.

Note: You can create a default list of additional machines in CNC Output settings (on the Output Files tab).

Where are output files for additional machines saved?

Output files are created in the additional machine's Default output folder, specified in the CNC Output settings for that machine. In the
Output dialog, the output folder for an additional machine is shown next to the machine name.
 
If an additional machine has the same output folder as the current machine, it will say Same as current machine.

Tip: You can use the Machines manager to change the default output folder for an additional machine. See Managing machines for
more information.

How does file naming work with additional machines?

If an additional machine has a different output folder from the current machine, the additional machine's output files will have the same
names as the output files for the current machine.
 
If an additional machine has the same output folder as the current machine, the additional machine's output file names will be appended
with the machine name (for example, "MyJob01.cnc" would become "MyJob01 - Conventional plasma.cnc").

Best practices for using additional machine output

 l Make the most complex machine in your operation the current machine and pick less complex machines as the additional
machines. If the current machine is an oxyfuel table, creating additional output for a high definition plasma table may not yield
the best cutting results. Instead, it would be better to create the job with the high definition plasma as the current machine and
then add the oxyfuel table as an additional machine during output.

- 580 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Pick similar machines with similar processes and capabilities. If the current machine is a fiber laser and the additional machine is a
conventional plasma, the leads and spacing may be too different, resulting in poor cutting results.

Which machine's settings are used when an additional machine output file is created?
Additional machine output is designed for quickly creating NC output for alternate machines, without changing your job. As a result,
nests are not modified for additional machine output files. Cutting parameters and output settings are updated to use settings from the
additional machine.

The following table summarizes rules and limitations for output files created for additional machines:
 

Feature Where do the settings Remarks

come from?
Cutting para- Additional machine Process parameters such as feedrate, kerf, and so on, come from the additional machine's set-
meters tings.
Output set- Additional machine Most output settings (including output axis, incremental/absolute mode, units, pre-kerfing for
tings non-CLC parts, etc.) come from the additional machine's settings.
Part position Current machine The position and spacing of nested parts does not change for additional machine output.
and sep- Nests are created based on the current machine's settings.
arations
Leads Current machine Leads do not change for additional machine output.
Cut sequence Current machine Cut sequence does not change for additional machine output.
Collision Current machine Collision avoidance does not change for additional machine output.
avoidance
Skeleton cut- Current machine Skeleton cut-up does not change for additional machine output.
up
Common line Current machine Common edges of parts are always separated based on kerf width from the current machine
cutting and not the additional machine. If the kerf width is different for an additional machine, this
may result in oversized or undersized parts.
Bridge cutting Current machine Dynamic align bridge parts that are separated based on kerf percentage will always use the kerf
width from the current machine and not the additional machine. If the kerf width is different
for an additional machine, this may cause unexpected results.
Bevel Current machine Not recommended. Macro names for leads and loops, bevel spreadsheets, and orientation may
be inconsistent from one machine to the next.
Multi-head Current machine Not recommended.

- 581 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

cutting
True Hole® Both True Hole feedrates for additional machines are used, but leads from current machine are used.
Pre-pierces Current machine Pre-pierces for the current machine are always used. If pre-pierces are enabled for an addi-
tional machine but are disabled in the current machine, they will not be applied.
Drill machines n/a Not supported.
and sec-
ondary posts
Plate invent- n/a Not affected by additional machine output.
ory
Work orders n/a Not affected by additional machine output.

- 582 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Undo output
Previously-created output can be undone for nests in the current job. When output is created for nests, inventory plates may be con-
sumed and remnants or skeletons may be produced. If you need to make changes to nests that have already been output, you can undo
the output in order to ensure that inventory quantities are correct.

Undo output in the current job

 l On the Home tab, in the Produce group, click the arrow next to Output then click Undo Output.
 
This will undo output for all nests in the current job.

Results of undo output

 l Output files created for the current machine will be deleted.
 l Output files created for additional machines will be deleted.
 l Inventory plates consumed will be returned to the database.
 l Any remnants or skeletons produced will be removed from the inventory database.

- 583 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

18. COSTING
How are costs calculated?
The ProNest costing system is designed to help you understand the costs of cutting a particular part, nest, or job. ProNest can produce
cost estimates with varying degrees of complexity - from simple estimates to extensive production costs.

In this article...
Introduction
How are costs calculated?
Summary of costing formulas

Introduction
In ProNest, costs are presented in terms of both time and money. Production Time, which is available for individual parts, nests, or entire
jobs, is displayed for your information and is also used to calculate monetary costing figures. The monetary cost for a part, nest, or job is
split into two main areas: Material Cost and Production Cost.
 
Available final costs for parts, nests and jobs include:
 l Production Time
 l Material Cost
 l Production Cost
 l Total Cost
 

Excerpt of the Part Detail report, which shows final costs for individual parts
 
These final costs are the end product of a number of different calculations, as detailed in the next section.

Tip: Try to get your final ProNest cost figures as close as possible to your real-world costs. The goal in ProNest costing is to accurately
reflect your actual costs. If you need to add markups to cover margins or profit, it is recommended that you do this outside of the
core costing calculations (this can be done using Quoting).

- 584 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

How are costs calculated?

Total Cost
Total Cost = Material Cost + Production Cost

Material Cost
Material Cost represents the cost of the material required to fabricate a part. This cost is available for parts, nests, and entire jobs. Material
Cost is calculated using the following:

Area
ProNest calculates this using the part's geometry. To learn more, see Part area methods used in costing.

Thickness
Thickness of the material.

Density
Density of the material.

Unit price
This is the price at which the material was purchased.
It is important to enter correct Unit Price and Density values for each material in the database. Doing so will ensure that material weight
and ultimately Material Cost are accurate. See Setting up costing in ProNest for more information on entering these values.

Production Cost
Production Cost represents the cost of running each process needed to fabricate a part plus the baseline machine and labor costs. This
cost is available for parts, nests, and entire jobs.

Process Costs
On the Costing page of your ProNest settings, there is a tab for each machine process. Each process can have its own spreadsheet
and/or default settings values.

Activation time
The time it takes to activate a particular process, expressed in seconds. The activation time is the total time from the point where the
traverse motion stops until the cutting motion begins, which can include pre-heats, pierces, raising/lowering, and so on. See How is
production time calculated? for more information.

Cost per activation

The cost incurred in activating a particular process. For cut processes this can be thought of as the cost per pierce. This should also
include the cost of the consumables used during this time, since piercing significantly contributes to consumable wear.

Operating cost
The cost per minute of using the process. This cost should include the cost of the consumables used while using the process, but not
while turning the process on and off during activations.

Rapid rate
This setting describes the machine's maximum traverse speed while the torch/head is off.

Number of activations

- 585 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

ProNest calculates this based on the number of torch/head starts required for a part. For a cut process, this is the number of pierces.
For scribing or marking, this is the number of torch on commands.

Feedrate
This is the cut speed. You typically won't need to edit feedrate values. See How is production time calculated? for more information.

Machine and Labor Costs

Machine and labor related costs are entered in the Costing settings page. These values cover anything that would be included in the
baseline operation of the machine itself, not taking into consideration any cutting or other processing.

Machine cost
This represents the baseline hourly cost of running your cutting machine, excluding labor costs. It may include things like facility
overhead, electricity costs, repairs and maintenance, and even equipment depreciation.

Plate loading cost

The cost of loading a single plate of material onto the cutting machine. This is used to calculate nest-level costs, but is not used for
individual part costs.

Labor rate
The hourly rate you pay for labor for the people involved in the running of your cutting machine.

Labor cost per weight

The amount you pay the people involved in running the cutting machine per unit weight. The weight used in the calculation is the
weight of the cut parts as opposed to the weight of the full sheets. (This should not be used if a Labor rate is specified.)
 
To learn more about where to enter costing inputs, see Setting up costing in ProNest.

Summary of costing formulas

ProNest uses the following formulas to calculate cost:

Parts

Material Weight = Area × Thickness × Density

Material Cost = Material Weight × Unit Price

Feed Time = Cut Length / Feedrate

Rapid Time = Rapid Length / Rapid Rate

Total Activation = [(Number of Activations × Activation Time) / 60]

Time

Process Cost = (Feed Time × Operating Cost Per Minute) + (Number of Activations × Cost per Activation)

Production Time = Feed Time + Total Activation Time + Rapid Time

- 586 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Machine and Labor = (Material Weight × Labor Cost per Weight) + (Labor Rate × Production Time) + (Machine Cost per
Cost Hour × Production Time)

Production Cost = Process Cost for all processes + Machine and Labor Cost

Total Cost = Production Cost + Material Cost

Nests

Material Cost = Material Cost of All Parts on the Nest

Feed Time = Cut Length / Feedrate

Rapid Time = Rapid Length / Rapid Rate

Total Activation = [(Number of Activations × Activation Time) / 60]

Time

Process Cost = (Feed Time × Operating Cost Per Minute) + (Number of Activations × Cost per Activation)

Production = Feed Time + Total Activation Time + Rapid Time

Time

Machine and = Plate Loading Cost + (Material Weight × Labor Cost per Weight) + (Labor Rate × Production Time) +
Labor Cost (Machine Cost per Hour × Production Time)

Production = Process Cost for all processes + Machine and Labor Cost
Cost

Total Cost = Production Cost + Material Cost

Note: For punch and drill processes, Process Cost is calculated as:
 
Process Cost = Number of Activations × Cost per Activation

Neither Process Production Time nor Operating Cost per Minute are included for drilling or punching.

- 587 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Setting up costing in ProNest

When you install a ProNest machine setup (PNCA), all of the machine specific files you need will be installed along with it. All
PNCA setups contain some default costing settings. Often, these costing settings will have to be adjusted to match your real-world costs.

Costing inputs
The following table summarizes the settings that are used to calculate costs in ProNest. These are the inputs that you can adjust to get
more accurate costing figures:
 

Used to
Setting Location in ProNest Tips
compute...
Thickness Materials editor Weight, Required for accurate costing data. You typically won't need to add any
(Data tab > Materials) Material thicknesses specifically for costing.
Cost
Density Materials editor Weight, Required for accurate costing data. Density is needed to calculate
(Data tab > Materials) Material weight and material cost, be sure that all of the materials in the Materials
Cost editor have a valid Density.
Unit Price Materials editor Material Required for accurate costing data. Unit price is the basis for calculating
(Data tab > Materials) Cost material cost. Be sure that all of the materials in the Materials editor have
-and- a valid Unit Price.
Plate Inventory  
(Data tab > Plate Invent- You can also enter Unit Price in the Plate Inventory. This would be the
ory) unit price at which a plate was purchased. For nests that use inventory
plates, Unit Price will be taken from the Plate Inventory instead of the
Materials editor. However, if an inventory plate is in use that has a Unit
Price of zero, the Unit Price from the Materials editor will be used
instead.
 
Labor rate Costing settings page Production Leave at zero if Labor cost per weight is specified. See Costing settings
(Settings > click Costing) Cost for details.
Labor cost per Costing settings page Production Leave at zero if Labor rate is specified. See Costing settings for details.
weight (Settings > click Costing) Cost
Machine cost Costing settings page Production Non-process specific cost of running the cutting machine. See Costing
(Settings > click Costing) Cost settings for details.
 
Sometimes this field is set to zero if these costs are included in the Oper-
ating cost per minute.
Plate loading cost Costing settings page Production Optional. You can include the loading/unloading cost of a single plate
(Settings > click Costing) Cost here and it will be added to nest-level production costs (and allocated
part costs).
 
See Costing settings for details.
Rapid rate Costing settings page Production Required for accurate costing data.
(Settings > click Costing) Time  
  Consult your machine table manufacturer specifications to find out your

- 588 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Used to
Setting Location in ProNest Tips
compute...
machine's rapid traverse speed.
 
Often there is a discrepancy between the table manufacturer's spe-
cification and the actual real-world rapid traverse speed of your
machine, due to acceleration and deceleration differences from one
machine to another. To get the most accurate value possible, you can
use a stopwatch to measure the actual rapid rate of your machine.
 
See Costing settings for details.
Feedrate Process Parameters Production Required for accurate costing data. You typically won't need to edit
spreadsheet Time feedrate values. See How is production time calculated? for more inform-
(Settings > [process] > ation.
Process Parameters)  
  Note: For Hypertherm setups, scribe/mark feedrates specified in ProNest
(Default value can also Process Parameters aren't used in output code. These scribe feedrates
be assigned on the Pro- are used for costing purposes only.
cess Parameters settings
page.)
 
Activation time Costing spreadsheet Production Use a spreadsheet if activation time varies by material thickness or class.
-or- Time  
Enter Full and Partial You can use a stopwatch to time different pierces at different material
Raise/Lower Time on thicknesses to get a rough idea of how long an activation takes.
Costing settings page  
AND Pierce Time column See How is production time calculated? for more information.
in Process Parameters
XLS.
-or-
Costing settings page
(Settings > click Costing)
 
Cost per activation Costing spreadsheet Production Use a spreadsheet if cost per activation varies by material thickness or
-or- Cost class. See Costing settings for details.
Costing settings page  
(Settings > click Costing) For Cost per Activation, you may know the life expectancy of your con-
sumable set in terms of number of pierces. Dividing the total cost of the
consumables by the total number of pierces you expect will give you a
rough idea of the cost per activation.
 
For Hypertherm plasma setups, a special Phoenix Costing spreadsheet is
available that has very accurate Cost per Activation information already
built in. Contact Hypertherm for more information.
Operating cost Costing spreadsheet Production Use a spreadsheet if cost per activation varies by material thickness or
-or- Cost class. See Costing settings for details.
Costing settings page
(Settings > click Costing)
 

- 589 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The accuracy of any cost estimate is only as good as the settings information that was used to calculate it. Please make sure that the
data in your settings is correct prior to utilizing costing.

- 590 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

How is production time calculated?

Production time is first calculated at the process level. The following formula is used to calculate production time for a given process:
 

Cut Length Rapid Length Number of Activations × Activation Time

 Process Production Time  =  + +
Feedrate Rapid Rate 60

Note: When calculating the production time for a scribe process, the same formula is used except that "Scribe Length" will replace
"Cut Length."

When a single process is used, the process production time will equal the total production time. When multiple processes are used, the
individual production times for each process are calculated and then added together to produce the total production time for a part,
nest, or job.

Parts vs. nests

When calculating the production time for parts, the Cut Length doesn't include any additional or reduced cutting from bridging, chain-
ing, common line cutting, edge pierce, crop lines, or skeleton cut-up. Also, the Rapid Length for a part includes rapid motions associated
with that part only - traversals between the part home and the start point, as well as any motions between profiles on the part. It doesn't
include rapid motions between the machine home and nested parts or rapid motions between nested parts.

Note: Allocated costing provides a way of including nest-level costs (such as plate loading, bridging, skeleton cuts and so on) in
individual part costs. See What is allocated costing? to learn more.

Production time for nests does include additional or reduced Cut Length from bridging, chaining, common line cutting, edge pierce,
crop lines, and skeleton cut-up. Rapid Length for nests includes all rapid motions on the nest.

Required inputs
In order to get a valid production time in ProNest, the following three settings must be accurate:

Feedrate
This is the cut speed. Feedrate is specified in the Process Parameters page of ProNest settings. ProNest will use the currently active
feedrate, based on whether you are using default values on the settings page or using a Process Parameters spreadsheet. If a Process
Parameters spreadsheet is in use and contains multiple feedrates based on profile area or type, ProNest will use the applicable feedrates
in the calculations.
 
Virtually all ProNest machine setups (PNCA) come with all the correct feedrates already built in - this means that you typically won't
need to enter or change any feedrates for costing.

Note: When Cutting Techniques are in use, cut speed can be ramped up and down within a single profile. If Feedrate or
Feedrate% commands are explicitly used in Cutting Techniques, those feedrate reductions are taken into account for
ProNest costing. If ramping is controlled using special CFF Section commands, you may need an updated setup in order to
see feedrate variations in costing figures. Contact Hypertherm for more information.

Rapid rate

- 591 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

This setting describes the machine's maximum traverse speed while the cutting head is off. The rapid rate for a machine is specified on
the Costing settings page. The rapid rate in your ProNest settings should match that of your real-world cutting machine. Note that on
the Costing settings page, rapid rate can be entered as a single value in the Rapid rate setting or as two separate values in the X rapid
rate and Y rapid rate settings.

Activation time
This setting describes the time it takes to activate a particular process, expressed in seconds. The activation time is the total time from
the point where the traverse motion stops until the cutting motion begins, which can include pre-heats, pierces, raising/lowering, etc.
 
Activation time can be specified in one of three ways in ProNest:
 l In a Costing spreadsheet. A column called "Activation Time" lets you specify different activation times based on material thick-
ness.
-or-
 l If your machine is capable of doing partial and full raises of the cutting head, ProNest can differentiate between a full and par-
tial raise when calculating activation time. To include full/partial raise times in activation time:
 1. Enter a value for Full raise/lower time and Partial raise/lower time on the Collision Avoidance settings page. If you do
not have the Collision Avoidance module, enter these values on the Costing settings page.
 2. If you are using a Process Parameters spreadsheet, enter a Pierce Time for each material and thickness listed.
When ProNest calculates activation time using this method, it will add the full or partial raise/lower time to the pierce time.
Note that if you are using a Costing spreadsheet with an Activation Time column (and valid values), activation time will be
taken from the spreadsheet and not using the method described above.
-or-
 l On the Costing page of your settings. This setting is called Default activation time. This figure should reflect the average activ-
ation time for a particular process. Default activation time is only used for costing calculations if you are not using a Costing
spreadsheet and you do not have a Full or Partial raise/lower time and Pierce Time specified.
 
In summary, Activation Time follows this hierarchy:
 1. ProNest will try to use the Activation Time from the Costing spreadsheet.
 2. If no value can be found, use Raise/Lower Time from the Costing settings page + Pierce Time from Process Parameters XLS.
 l For full raises, if the sum of the Full Raise/Lower Time + Pierce Time is greater than zero, it will be used as the Activation
Time.
 l For partial raises, if the sum of the Partial Raise/Lower Time + Pierce Time is greater than zero, it will be used as the Activ-
ation Time.
 3. If the sum of Raise/Lower Time and Pierce Time is zero or can't be found, the Default Activation Time from the Costing set-
tings page will be used.

- 592 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Part area methods used in costing

In ProNest, a part's area can be accounted for in different ways. Consider the following part, which contains five cut-outs:

ProNest can calculate the area of this part in one of three ways:
 

True Area Enclosed Area Rectangular Area

The actual area of a part, exclud- The area contained within a The area of the bounding rect-
ing cut-outs part's exterior profile, including angle surrounding a part, includ-
cut-outs ing cutouts, leads, extensions,
and loops.*

*Note: In allocated scrap area calculations, rectangular area includes cut-outs as well as a small margin surrounding the exterior pro-
file, but does not encompass the part's exterior leads, lead extensions, or loops. See Allocated area for more information.

Parts nested inside of other parts

In the case of enclosed area or rectangular area, when a part is nested inside of another part, ProNest subtracts the area of the smaller
part when calculating the larger part's area.
 
Consider the following two parts, where a smaller triangular part is nested inside of a larger circular part:
 

- 593 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
When calculating the enclosed area of the larger part, ProNest excludes the enclosed area of the smaller part:
 

Area used in ProNest costing

 l True area is used in calculations for the Material Cost that is displayed in:
 l ProNest user interface outside of reports and quoting
 l Part Detail report
 l Job Summary report
 l Optimization report
 l Rectangular area is used for costing calculations in the Rectangular Part Detail report.
 l Enclosed area is used in allocated costing calculations found in the Allocated Part Detail report. See What is allocated costing? to
learn more.

Area used in quoting

You can choose which area method to use in quotes in the Quoting preferences page.

Note: Quoting preferences controls how costing figures for parts (items) are calculated in quotes. They do not effect area cal-
culations for secondary operations costs (true area is always used for operations).

- 594 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Viewing final costs

The ultimate goal of ProNest costing is to provide final costs for parts, nests, materials, and jobs that are as close as possible to your real-
world costs.

Available cost figures

The following are available final cost figures for parts, nests, jobs, and inventory plates:

Part costs
 l Production cost
 l Material cost
 l Scrap cost (allocated costing only)
 l Total cost

Note: Part costs normally do not take nesting into consideration. The following are typically not included in individual part costs:
 l Plate Loading Cost (from Costing settings)
 l Additional cutting if parts are bridged or chained
 l Additional cutting from crop lines or skeleton cut-up
 l Reduced cutting if parts are common line cut
 l Rapid motions between the machine home and nested parts
 l Rapid motions between nested parts
 l Additional cutting from edge pierces
 l If one copy of a nested part is edited in Advanced Edit, but the part list is not updated with the changes, the changes
will not be shown in costing figures for that part.
An exception to this rule is allocated part costs (in the Allocated Part Detail report), which do account for nesting-related
costs. Allocated costs also include a separate Scrap Cost field. See What is allocated costing? for details.

Nest costs
 l Production cost
 l Material cost of parts
 l Scrap value
 l Total cost

Note: Nest-level costs take into account individual part costs and additional operations done on the nest. The following are
included in nest costs:
 l Plate Loading Cost (from Costing settings)
 l Additional cutting if parts are bridged or chained
 l Additional cutting from crop lines or skeleton cut-up
 l Reduced cutting if parts are common line cut
 l Rapid motions between the machine home and nested parts
 l Rapid motions between nested parts
 l Additional cutting from edge pierces

Job-level costs

- 595 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Total production time

 l Production cost
 l Material cost of parts
 l Scrap value

Inventory plate costs

 l Material cost

Where are these costing figures found in ProNest?

You can find these costing figures in several different areas in ProNest.

View costs in the ProNest user interface

In the ProNest user interface you can easily find part and nest costs.
 
To view costs for an individual part:
 l In the Edit Part List window, select an added part in the part list, then in the Properties section, click the Utilization and Costing
tab.

- 596 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
To view costs for the current nest:
 1. From the main ProNest window, navigate to the nest that you want to view costs for.
 2. In the status bar (at the bottom), click Nest: n of n.

- 597 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Viewing costs in reports

With ProNest reports (Home tab > Reports ), you can generate the most detailed costing information.
 

Excerpt of the Part Detail report, which shows final costs for individual parts
 
Parts
Standard reports that show individual part costs:

- 598 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Part Detail
Rectangular Part Detail
Allocated Part Detail
 
Nests
Standard report showing nest-level costs:
Job Summary
 
Job totals
Standard reports that show job-level costs:
Job Summary
Optimization
 
Inventory plates
Standard report showing plate costs:
Plate Inventory Detail

Quotes

Quotes use all of the baseline ProNest costs described above. Secondary operations (such as grinding and bending), handling and ship-
ping, quantity discounts, and various markups can be added using quoting. Refer to About quoting for more information.

- 599 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

What is allocated costing?

Allocated costing is a way of distributing the cost of cutting one or more nests proportionally across the individual parts on those nests.
These costs account for such things as scrap, additional cutting (as with skeleton cut-up lines, crop lines, chaining, or bridging), lessened
cutting (as with common line cutting), additional traverse motions (as with collision avoidance), and plate loading costs.

Note: Allocated costing is an alternative method of costing used to calculate figures found in the Allocated Part Detail report. All
other costing data found throughout ProNest is calculated using the traditional method (non-allocated). For more information
on the traditional costing method, see How are costs calculated?

When an allocated cost is computed for a given part, ProNest takes the cost of all of the nests that the part appears on and assigns that
cost proportionally to the part.
 
Points to consider with allocated costing:
 l Allocated values for an individual part are based on all nests on which that part appears.
 l Area is calculated differently for allocated values than it is throughout the rest of ProNest. Refer to Allocated area for more details.
 l This method takes into account all additional costs of processing a nest (scrap costs; cutting of skeleton cut-up lines, crop lines,
bridges, chains, common lines [CLC], collision avoidance traversals, etc.) and assigns them proportionally to nested parts.
 l When calculating allocated values, ProNest automatically subtracts parts nested within other parts and accounts for number of
times a nest is cut and number of torches.

Important: When using allocated costing for estimating purposes, keep in mind that changes to the number of parts nested, types of
parts nested, orientation of parts, and number of nests created will affect allocated part costs.

- 600 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Allocated area
There are a few key differences in the way that a part's area is computed with respect to allocated costing. Before describing these dif-
ferences, let's take a look at some of the different ways that part area is calculated in ProNest.

Area calculations in ProNest

Consider the following part, which contains five cut-outs:

ProNest can calculate the area of this part in one of three ways:
 

True Area Enclosed Area Rectangular Area

The actual area of a part, exclud- The area contained within a The area of the bounding rect-
ing cut-outs part's exterior profile, including angle surrounding a part.
cut-outs  
This includes cut-outs as well as
the separation area surrounding
the exterior profile.
 
Note that for allocated costing
calculations, the bounding rect-
angle does not encompass the
part's exterior leads and lead
extensions.
 
In other areas of ProNest, Rect-
angular Area does include a
part's leads and extensions.

- 601 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Parts nested inside of other parts
In the case of enclosed area or rectangular area, when a part is nested inside of another part, ProNest subtracts the area of the smaller
part when calculating the larger part's area.
 
Consider the following two parts, where a smaller triangular part is nested inside of a larger circular part:
 

 
When calculating the enclosed area of the larger part, ProNest excludes the enclosed area of the smaller part:
 

What type of area is used when calculating allocated values?

In the Allocated Part Detail report, which contains all allocated costing data, enclosed area and rectangular area are used for calculations.

Allocated scrap area

When calculating allocated area for a part, ProNest uses enclosed area to determine the area of the individual part itself. The other part of
this equation involves assigning the area of leftover plate, or scrap area, proportionally to the part. This ensures that the material cost of
the scrap created by a nest is included in selected part-level cost figures.
 
Consider the following nest:
 

 
The following image shows the total scrap area of this nest (in white):
 

- 602 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Scrap area is the area of the plate that is left over after parts are cut. Note that scrap area does not include cut-outs within nested parts.

Note: If a plate has a crop line applied, the area of the remnant (the usable portion of plate that is cropped off) is not considered part
of the scrap area.

When allocated area figures are calculated, the scrap area of a nest is apportioned to all individual parts on that nest. The scrap area
apportioned to an individual part is that part's allocated scrap area.

How is allocated scrap area calculated?

Some parts account for more or less scrap than others, based on their shape. To adjust for this, ProNest uses a shape-based method of
allocating a nest's scrap area to individual parts on that nest. First, ProNest subtracts a part's enclosed area from its rectangular area, giv-
ing us its residual area.
 

   

Rectangular Area – Enclosed Area = Residual Area

The residual areas of different parts on the same nest are then compared. Parts with a larger residual area will be assigned a greater por-
tion of the total scrap area than parts with a smaller residual area.
 
An individual part's allocated scrap area is then calculated as follows:
 

Allocated Scrap Area =  Scrap area of nest × (Residual area of part ÷ Residual area of all parts)

 
Note that the allocated scrap area of a part is calculated from all nests in the job that the part appears on.
 

Consider the following two parts:

 

- 603 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Circle Square
Radius = 2.821 in. Length of side = 5.0 in.
Part separation = 0.50 in. Part separation = 0.50 in.
Enclosed area = 25.0 in. 2 Enclosed area = 25.0 in. 2
Rectangular area = 37.7 in. 2 Rectangular area = 30.25 in. 2
 

 
The residual area of these individual parts would be:
 

Circle Square
Residual area = 37.7 - 25.0 = 12.70 in.2 Residual area = 30.25 - 25.0 = 5.25 in.2

 
Though parts have the same enclosed area, Square has a smaller residual area than Circle.
 
Let's assume that we nest 10 copies of Square and 10 copies of Circle on a 64 in. × 32 in. plate.
 

- 604 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Total plate area = 64 in. × 32 in. = 2,048 in. 2
Plate area used by parts = 25 in. 2 × 20 parts = 500 in. 2

To get the scrap area of the nest, the total enclosed part area is subtracted from the total plate area:
 
Total scrap area of nest = 2,048 in. 2 - 500 in. 2 = 1,548 in.2
 

After scrap area (1,548 in. 2) is calculated for the nest, ProNest adds up all of the residual areas for all parts on the nest:
 
Square: 5.25 in. 2 × 10 parts = 52.5 in. 2
Circle: 12.7 in. 2 × 10 parts = 127.0 in. 2
 
Total residual area of all 20 parts = 52.5 + 127.0 = 179.5 in.2

Once we have total scrap area of the nest , total residual area of all parts on the nest, and an individual part's residual area, we can
plug these values into the following formula to get the allocated scrap area of the part:
 
Allocated scrap area = Scrap area of nest × (Residual area of part ÷ Residual area of all parts)

- 605 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Results:
 
Allocated scrap area of Square = 1,548 × (5.25 ÷ 179.5) = 45.28 in.2

Allocated scrap area of Circle = 1,548 x (12.70 ÷ 179.5) = 109.52 in.2

Although these two parts have the same enclosed area, the amount of scrap allocated to them differs substantially, due to their dif-
fering residual areas. In this scenario, Circle is allocated a much greater portion of the total scrap area of the nest because of its
shape.
 
Note that the sum of all allocated scrap areas for all parts on the nest will always be equal to the total scrap area of that nest.
 
(45.28 in. 2 × 10) + (109.52 in. 2 × 10) = 1,548 in. 2 

Putting it all together

Once the allocated scrap area of the part has been determined, it is added to the part's enclosed area, which gives us the allocated area
for the part.
 

Allocated Area =  Enclosed Area + Allocated Scrap Area

 
 
In the Allocated Part Detail report, Area reflects the part's allocated area; while Weight is calculated using allocated area.
 

 
Scrap Cost is calculated using allocated scrap area, and Material Cost is calculated using allocated area.

- 606 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Allocated costing formulas

The figures on this page pertain to the fields found in the Allocated Part Detail report only. Keep in mind that allocated figures for an
individual part represent a portion of the total cost of processing the nests on which that part appears.
 
Allocated part figures
Production Time
Allocated production time apportions the time to process one or more nests proportionally to the individual part. This accounts for time
spent cutting interior/exterior profiles, skeleton lines, crops, bridges, chains, and common lines (CLC); rapid traversal time between parts,
including any collision avoidance motions; and activation times.
 

Production Time =  Production time for all nests on which the part appears × (Production time for a single copy of the
part ÷ Production time for all parts on those nests)

 
To learn more about how production time is calculated by ProNest, see "How is production time calculated?" on page 591
 
Cut Length
ProNest totals the length of all profiles to be cut for all nests that contain the part, accounting for any additional or reduced cutting due
to skeleton cuts, crop lines, bridges, chains, and common lines (CLC). Total cut length is then allocated to the individual part.
 
Pierces
ProNest totals all pierces for all nests that contain the part, accounting for any additional pierces from skeleton cuts and crop lines, and
reduced number of pierces due to bridges, chains, or CLC. Total pierces are then allocated to the individual part.
 
Area
This is the allocated part area. To calculate this, ProNest adds the part's enclosed area and allocated scrap area. For a more information on
either enclosed area or allocated scrap area, see "Allocated area" on page 601.
 

Area =  Enclosed Area + Allocated Scrap Area

 
Weight
This is the allocated weight and is calculated using a material's density and thickness, which are assigned in the Material Database. Area
refers to allocated part area (listed above).
 

Weight =  Density × Area × Thickness

 
Production Cost 
Allocated production cost apportions the cost to process one or more nests proportionally to the individual part. This is based on pro-
duction time, process cost, and machine cost. Production cost accounts for: rapid traversals between parts, including collision avoidance
motions; all cutting; additional or reduced pierces; activation costs; and plate loading costs.

- 607 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Production Cost =  Production cost for all nests on which the part appears × (Production cost for a single copy of the
part ÷ Production cost for all parts on those nests)

 
To learn more about how production cost is calculated in ProNest, see "How are costs calculated?" on page 584
 
Scrap Cost
This is reflects a portion of the total cost of the nest scrap, and is based on the part's allocated scrap area. Unit price, density, and thick-
ness come from the Material Database.*
 

Scrap Cost =  Unit Price × Density × Allocated Scrap Area × Thickness

*Note: If a nest is using an inventory plate, the unit price will be taken from the Plate Inventory Database, and not the Material Data-
base.

To learn more about how allocated scrap area is calculated, see "Allocated area" on page 601.
 
Material Cost
This is the material cost of the enclosed area of the part. Unit price, density, and thickness come from the Material Database.*
 

Material Cost =  Unit Price × Density × Enclosed Area × Thickness

*Note: If a nest is using an inventory plate, the unit price will be taken from the Plate Inventory Database, and not the Material Data-
base.

To learn more about enclosed area , see "Allocated area" on page 601.
 
Total Cost
The sum of the allocated material cost, the allocated scrap cost, and the allocated production cost.
 

Total Cost =  Production Cost + Material Cost + Scrap Cost

How are utilization figures calculated?

Four utilization percentages (true, crop, rectangular, and plate used) reflect the ratio of part surface area to total plate surface area. Addi-
tional utilization figures detail plate usage; as well as area and weight for individual parts.
 
Utilization percentages

- 608 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

True utilization
This is the ratio of the true area of all nested parts relative to the total plate area. Note that if a part has an interior profile, the surface area
of the cut-out will not be considered a portion of that part.
 

Example:
 

 
Figure 1

The nest shown in Figure 1 has a true utilization of 6.58%. For the purposes of this demonstration, the true area of the part is light
blue, the plate area is outlined in red.

 
Crop utilization
If a nest has been cropped, ProNest will calculate the crop utilization as the ratio of the true area of all nested parts relative to the plate
area up to the crop line. The section of plate that has been cropped off will not be included in the calculated plate area. If your nest does
not contain any cropped nests, this value will be identical to the true utilization percentage.
 

Example:
 

Figure 2

- 609 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The nest shown in Figure 2 has been cropped. The true area of the part appears light blue, the plate area used for this calculation is
outlined in red. The crop utilization for the nest in this job is 48%.

 
Plate used utilization 
This percentage can be useful for determining how tightly parts are nested. To generate this value, ProNest draws a bounding rectangle
around all parts on the nest (including leads), with one corner of the rectangle at the nesting home ( ). The area of this rectangle is
the plate used.
 
The true area of all nested parts is then divided by the plate used area to get the plate used utilization percentage:
 
Plate used utilization % = (True area of all nested parts ÷ Plate used area) × 100

Example:
 

Figure 3
 
The nest in Figure 3 has a plate used utilization of 30%. The part area is light blue, the plate used area is outlined in red.
 
 

Figure 4

- 610 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
The nest in Figure 4 has a plate used utilization of 20%. Note that this percentage is lower than the nest in Figure 3 because the parts
are more loosely spaced.
 

 
Rectangular utilization 
ProNest uses the minimum rectangular space that a part occupies (including part leads and lead extensions) when calculating part area.
Rectangular utilization is the ratio of the rectangular area of all parts in a job relative to total plate area.
 

Example:
 

Figure 5
 
The nest in Figure 5 has a rectangular utilization of 11.1%. The rectangular area of the part is light blue in color, the plate area is out-
lined in red.

 
 
Additional nest utilization figures
Length used
This refers to the distance along the X-axis between the nesting home and the furthest nested part.
 

Example:
 

- 611 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 6
 
The length used for this nest is indicated by the horizontal blue line.

 
Width used
This refers to the distance along the Y-axis between the nesting home and the furthest nested part.
 

Example:
 

Figure 7
 
The width used for this nest is indicated by the vertical blue line.

 
Part utilization figures
True area
The 2-D surface area of the part. If a part has an interior profile, the surface area of the cut-out will not be considered a portion of that
part.
 

- 612 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:
 

 
True weight
The mass of the part. This is calculated using density (from Material Database), true area, and material thickness.
 
Rectangular area
The minimum rectangular space that a part occupies (including cut-outs, part leads, and lead extensions)
 

Example:
 

 
Rectangular weight
The mass of the part, including material within the minimum rectangular space. This is calculated using the density (from Material Data-
base), rectangular area, and material thickness.
 

- 613 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Where are utilization figures found?

You can find utilization figures in four areas in ProNest: the Edit Part List window, the main window, the File tab, and throughout various
ProNest reports.
 

Nest utilization figures

These include true, crop, rectangular, and plate used percentages, as well as length and width used.

View utilization figures for the current nest

 l On the status bar of the main window, click Nest: n of n.

Utilization figures for nests can also be found in the following reports:
Nest Plot
Single Head Nest Detail
Single Head Nest Sequence
Multi-Head Nest Detail
Optimization
Nest Zoom View
 

Job utilization figures

These are average utilization percentages for all of the nests in your job.

View utilization percentages for your job

 l On the File tab, click Info.

Utilization figures for jobs can also be found in the following report:
Job Summary
 

Utilization for individual parts

Utilization figures for an individual part include true area, true weight, rectangular area, and rectangular weight.

View utilization figures for an individual part

 l In the Edit Part List window, select an added part in the part list, then in the Properties section, click the Utilization and Costing
tab.

- 614 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Utilization figures for individual parts can also be found in the following reports:
Part Detail (shows true area and true weight)
Rectangular Part Detail (shows rectangular area and rectangular weight)

- 615 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

19. QUOTING
About quoting
Quoting enables you to easily create itemized quotes for any ProNest job. Using baseline material and production costs that are cal-
culated by ProNest, quotes can account for secondary operations, markups, and discounts to provide itemized (by part) and total prices
for a job.
 
For help getting started with quoting, see:
 l Setting up quoting
 l Main Quote page
 l Creating a new quote
 l Working with line items
 l Add secondary operations to a line item
 l Markups
 l Discounts
 l Printing quotes

- 616 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Setting up quoting
In ProNest, there are several areas that you should confirm are set up properly before you begin generating quotes.

Costing
Costing provides basis for the unit cost dollar amounts used in quoting. This involves calculating accurate Material Cost and Production
Cost values for a line item.
 
Before utilizing quoting, it is a good idea to set up ProNest costing as accurately as possible. The goal of costing should be to get the pro-
duction times and material and production costs as close as possible to your real world figures.
 
See How are costs calculated? and Setting up costing in ProNest to get started.

Quote preferences

How should area be calculated?

You can use True Area, Enclosed Area, or Rectangular Area when computing costing figures used in quoting. You can also choose to
account for scrap in quoting costs. See the Costing section of the Quoting preferences page for more information.

How should quote numbers be generated?

You can set a naming convention for quote numbers on the Naming preferences page. You can also set whether to use the quote num-
ber as the job (.nif) name.

Organization info and logo

Add your organization's information and logo to the header of your quotes:
 1. Open Quote preferences (File tab > Preferences > click Quoting).
 2. In the Company Information section, enter your company's name, address, etc.
 3. In the Logo area, click Browse.
 4. Select an image file to use in the header.

- 617 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

This information will be used by default whenever a new quote it created. You can always change this information for any quote on the
File > Quote > Prepared By page.

Customers
If you want to use ProNest customers from the Customers editor (Data tab > Customers) for quoting, you will need to make sure that
your customers are entered in the database. Benefits of using the Customers editor include:
 l Less data entry - Once a customer is set up in the Customers editor, you won't have to type in all of their information each time
you prepare a quote for them.
 l Set markup rates and tax rates by customer - You can set Material Markup, Production Markup, and Tax Rates in the Customers
editor. When that customer is selected for a quote, these rates will automatically be applied to the quote.

Selecting a quote report template you'd like to use

The layout, appearance, and information contained in a quote is controlled using reports. See Quote reports to learn more.

- 618 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Creating a new quote

In ProNest, a quote corresponds to a single job (.nif). Follow the instructions below to create a quote for a job. When a job is saved, the
quote is saved in that job.

Start a new quote

 1. Start a new job or open an existing job that you want to create the quote for.
 2. Add the required parts to the part list. If you are using inventory plates to compute material costs or want to include allocated
scrap costs for parts, you must nest all of the parts before generating a quote.
 3. On the File tab, click Quote.

-or-

On the Home tab, click Quote.

The main Quote page will open. Note that all parts in your job are already listed as line items.
 4. In the Produce section at the top, click the link next to Report.
The Quote report page will open, showing several available quote reports or templates to choose from.
 5. Click the report that you want to use for the quote.

 6. Click Back.

 7. On the main Quote page, click Generate quote number. The number is created based on the naming convention set in Naming
preferences.
 8. Click the link next to Prepared for.
 9. Use the Customer page to enter details about the customer you're preparing the quote for. In the Name box, you can type any
name that you want or you can click the down arrow to select a customer from the ProNest Customers editor.
Note that in the Quote preview on the right, the customer that you entered is shown in the upper left of the quote.

- 619 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

As you enter information for a quote, your changes will be shown in real-time in the Quote preview.

 10. Click Back.

 11. Click the link next to Prepared by.
 12. In the Author section at the top, enter your name and contact information. If you organization's info and logo have been added
in Quoting preferences, the rest of the information on this page should already be filled out.
You can always change your organization's information for a particular quote from this page. The author information is not found
in preferences because it often changes from one quote to another, depending on who is preparing the estimate.

 13. Click Back.

 14. On the main Quote page, next to Properties, click the Dates, shipping, material costs... link.
 15. On this page you can add an expiration date to the quote, add shipping and tax, change the baseline Material Unit Cost used in
costing calculations in this quote, and add notes and custom fields. Make any needed changes in this area.

 16. Click Back.

 17. Save your ProNest job (File tab > Save). Your quote will be saved with the job.
At this point, you'll have a basic quote ready, with no secondary operations or discounts. Unless you picked a customer from the Cus-
tomers database with pre-existing markups, you won't have any markup rates entered.
 
To read more about entering these things in a quote, see:
 l Markups
 l Discounts
 l Working with line items
 l Add secondary operations to a line item

- 620 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Discounts
General discounts represent a price reduction for an entire quote. Line items can also have quantity discounts, which are used for inform-
ational purposes only in quoting (they aren't used in final calculations).

General discounts for quotes

A general discount rate can be applied to an entire quote. With a general discounts, the total price of all line items and their secondary
operations in the quote will be reduced by the percentage that is entered.
 
For display purposes, you can either show the discount rate and price reduction at the bottom of the quote in the subtotal area or simply
apply the price reduction to all unit prices listed, without explicitly showing the discount rate.

Apply a general discount to a quote

 1. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 2. Click the Properties link.
 3. In the Discount box, enter a discount percentage.
 4. Select or clear the Show Separately box.
 l When selected, Discount will be displayed in a separate line at the bottom of the quote, below the subtotal.

Sub total: $100.00

Discount (2%): ($2.00)

 l When cleared, Discount will not be displayed separately in the quote, even though it is still being used in final price cal-
culations. The displayed unit price of each line item will be shown at the discounted rate.

Note: When tax is applied to a quote with a discount, the tax rate is applied to the discounted subtotal.

Negative markups
Entering a negative rate for markups will make them behave as discounts. For example, entering a Production Markup of -10% for a line
item is equivalent to taking 10% off the cost of that line item.
 
When negative markups are used, keep in mind that any general discounts for a quote will be taken off the lower unit price (which has
already been discounted by the negative markup).

Quantity discounts for line items

An item (part) can have it's own quantity discount. Quantity discounts show the hypothetical cost per unit for a line item if it was ordered
at a larger quantity. Unlike general discounts, quantity discounts appear in quotes for informational purposes only; they are not used in
unit price or extended price calculations.
 
If a line item has a starting unit price of $3.00, the quantity discount chart may look like this:
 

Quantity Discount Unit Price Extended Price

10 10% $2.70 $27.00
100 12% $2.64 $264.00

- 621 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
In the actual quote, the line item will show the Quantity discount amounts below it:
 

Item Name Quantity Unit Price Extended Price

1 P135 1 $3.000 $3.00

Quantity discount:
10 $2.70 $27.00
100 $2.64 $264.00
Sub total: $3.00

 
Note that the Extended Price of the quantity discount items isn't included in the subtotal.

Apply quantity discounts for a line item

 1. Open the Line Item page (File tab > Quote, double-click a line item).

 2. In the Quantity Discounts section, click the Add button.

 3. Enter a Quantity and Discount rate.
 l Quantity - the quantity at which the item would be charged at the lower unit price
 l Discount - the rate that would be applied to the line item's unit price.

Remove quantity discounts for a line item

 1. Open the Line Item page (File tab > Quote, double-click a line item).
 2. In the Quantity Discounts section, select the discount you want to delete.

 3. Click the Remove button.

- 622 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Markups
In ProNest quoting, markups represent the difference between the cost of an item or service and the price at which it is sold. The sum of
all markups is the amount of profit for a quote, item, or secondary operation.

In this article...
Material markups
Production markups
How are markups assigned?
Negative markups
Apply default markup rates for a customer
Change the markup of a line item
Change the production markup of a specific secondary operation

Markups can be specified for Material or Production costs:

Material markups
In ProNest quotes, the material costs of line items are calculated based on:
 l Material unit cost (on Quote > Properties page).
 l Density (from Materials editor)
 l Part area (using the method specified in Quoting preferences).
Once accurate material costs are being calculated by ProNest, you can easily enter a markup rate to apply to those costs. Material markup
rate should reflect the amount of profit you want to make on materials.
 
Example:
If the material cost of a part is $10 and the material markup is set to 10%, the material price of the line item would be $11 [$10 + (10
× 0.10)]. The Unit Price shown in the quote for that part would be calculated using the $11 material price.

Production markups
Production costs typically involve cutting, loading/unloading plate, consumable wear, and so on. Like material costs, production costs
for parts are also calculated based on ProNest costing settings. Once the production costs are accurate enough, you can add a pro-
duction markups. This gives you a way to specify the profit you want to make for production-related work.
 
Example:
If the production cost of a part is $10 and the production markup is set to 10%, the production price of the line item would be $11
[$10 + (10 × 0.10)]. The Unit Price shown in the quote for that part would be calculated using the $11 production price.

How are markups assigned?

Material markups can be assigned to a customer or line item. Production markups can be assigned to a customer, line item, or sec-
ondary operation. Markups follow a hierarchy:
 

- 623 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Customer
 l Line Item
 l Secondary Operation
 l Secondary Operation
 l Line Item
 l Secondary Operation
 l Secondary Operation
 
By default, all line items inherit the markup rate from their parent customer. All secondary operations inherit the markup rate from their
parent line item. For example, if a customer has a production markup of 3%, when you're creating a quote for that customer, all items and
secondary processes will also have a 3% production markup by default.
 
However, you can override the markup value for any customer, item, or secondary process (as described below).

Note: Typically, markups are not seen in the finalized customer-facing quotes.

Negative markups
Entering a negative rate for markups will make them behave as discounts. For example, entering a production markup of -10% for a line
item is equivalent to taking 10% off the price of that line item.
 
When negative markups are used, keep in mind that any general discounts for a quote will be taken off the lower unit price (which has
already been discounted by the negative markup).

Apply default markup rates for a customer

For a customer in the Customers editor:

 1. Open the Customers editor (Data tab > Customers ).

 2. Double-click the customer record that you want to edit.
 3. Click the Shipping tab.
 4. Enter a Production markup or Material markup value.
 5. Click OK.
By default when a customer from the Customers list is assigned to a quote, these markup rates will be applied to the quote, including all
items and secondary processes.
 
For customers not in the Customers editor:
 1. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).
 2. Click the Prepared for link.
 3. In the Material markup or Production markup boxes, enter a markup percentage.
These rates will become the defaults for all line items and secondary processes in the quote. Note that you can always override these
default markup values, if needed.

Change the markup of a line item

 1. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 2. In the Line items section, double-click the item that you want to edit.

- 624 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 3. In the Material markup or Production markup box, enter a markup percentage.

The value that you enter will appear in highlighted in yellow, indicating that it is overriding the default value.

Tip:
You can click and select Clear override to revert to the default value.

Change the production markup of a secondary operation

Secondary operations can have a production markup (but not a material markup). When a secondary process is added to a line item, it
will inherit the production markup from that line item by default.
 
To override the inherited production markup of a secondary operation:
 1. Open the Line Item page (File tab > Quote > double-click the line item containing the operation).
 2. Double-click the secondary operation that you want to edit.
 3. In the Production markup box, enter a markup percentage.

The value that you enter will appear in highlighted in yellow, indicating that it is overriding the default value.

Tip:
You can click and select Clear override to revert to the default value.

Note: Secondary operations in the library do not have their own markup values.

- 625 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Quote customers
Customer information
Name
You can enter any text here or select a customer from the Customers editor .

Note: Using a customer from the Customers editor will automatically bring in that customer's default information into the quote,
including contact info, address, markup values, and tax rate.

Material markup
Material markup rate to apply to the entire quote. This value will be inherited by all line items in the quote by default. See Markups for
more information.
 
If the quote is assigned to a customer in the Customer editor, this will already match the value for that customer.

Production markup
Production markup rate to apply to the entire quote. This value will be inherited by all line items and secondary operations in the quote
by default. See Markups for more information.
 
If the quote is assigned to a customer in the Customer editor, this will already match the value for that customer.

Tax rate
Enter a tax percentage to apply to the quote, if desired. Tax rate will be applied to the Extended Price subtotal in the quote, after all sec-
ondary operations, markups and discounts have been factored in.
 
If the quote is assigned to a customer in the Customers editor, this will already match the value for that customer.

Address
Shipping/Billing
Select which address you want to use in the header area of the quote. This is used primarily for customers in the Customers editor, who
may have both a shipping and a billing address.

- 626 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Contact
Name
The primary contact person for the customer.

Email
Email address for the customer. The email address that you enter here will be used by default if you send the quote as an email.

Phone
Telephone number for the customer that will appear in the quote.

Fax
Fax number for the customer that will appear in the quote.
How do I get here in ProNest?
 n File tab > click Quote > click Prepared for link

- 627 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Entering your organization's information

Each time a new quote is started, the Prepared By information comes from your Quoting preferences by default. The exception to this is
author information, which is not found in preferences because it often changes from one quote to another, depending on who is pre-
paring the estimate. You can always change Prepared By information for any quote.
 
To enter or change Prepared By information in a quote:
 1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).
 2. Click the link next to Prepared by.
 3. Enter your name, company, and contact information.
This information will be shown in the upper right area of the quote.

Note that in the standard quote reports, the Email and Phone from the Author section is used. The Phone, Email, and URL fields
from the Company Information section do not normally appear in quotes, unless they've been added using custom quote reports.
 4. If a logo hasn't been specified yet in preferences, you can click the Browse button and select an image file to add your organ-
ization's logo. Allowable image file formats:
 l .bmp
 l .png
 l .gif
 l .jpg
 l .jpeg

 5. Click Back to return to the main Quote page.

How do I get here in ProNest?
 n File tab > click Quote > click the Prepared by link

- 628 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Main Quote page

Status
Each quote can have a status associated with it. See Quote status to learn more.
 

Drafting
Pending Approval
Accepted
Rejected

Produce
Print/Create PDF/Send in Email
Use this button to print, save to PDF, or send the current quote via email. See Printing quotes to learn more.

Report
The currently selected quote report will be shown here. The quote report is used as a basis for creating the quote. It defines the layout,
appearance, and information contained in the quote. You can switch back and forth between quote reports using this link. This can be
useful if you want to print different versions of the same quote. See Quote reports for more details.

Note: When a job is saved, ProNest will remember which quote report that job is using. The next time the job is opened, the
quote report that was in use will be the current report (and not the default report).
 
If the quote report used by a job was deleted since the job was last saved, when the job is re-opened, the default report
will be used.

Quote Information
Quote number
You can enter any text here or generate a quote number (see below).

Generate quote number

Click this link to generate a quote number, according to the naming convention set up in your Naming preferences.

Prepared for
This is the customer that you are preparing the quote for. See Quote customers for more information.

Prepared by
Enter your organization's information here. By default, most of this information comes from your Quoting preferences. See Entering
your organization's information for more details.

Properties
Set the expiration date, add shipping, override material unit costs, and enter notes and custom fields for your quote. See Quote prop-
erties to learn more.

Secondary Operations Library

- 629 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The secondary operations library should be used for common secondary operations that will be reused on different line items. See Sec-
ondary operations library for more information.

Line Items
 
All of the line items in the quote are listed here. See Working with line items for more information.
How do I get here in ProNest?
 n File tab > click Quote

- 630 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Quote properties
Dates, shipping, and discount
Created
The date the quote was created. By default, this is set to today's date, but you can set this to whatever you want.

Expiration
If you want to add an expiration date to your quote, pick a date from the list. You can also use the Days control to set this auto-
matically.

Days
Enter the number of days after the Created date when the quote will expire. You can also use the Expiration control to set this auto-
matically. A default number of days can be entered in Quoting preferences.

Discount
General discount rate to apply to the entire quote. See Discounts for more information.

Show separately
When selected, Discount will be displayed in a separate line at the bottom of the quote, below the subtotal.
 

Sub total: $100.00

Discount (2%): ($2.00)

 
When cleared, Discount will not be displayed separately in the quote, even though it is still being used in final price calculations. The
displayed unit price of each line item will be shown at the discounted rate.

Shipping
Use this option to apply shipping costs to an entire quote. Shipping is displayed at the bottom of a quote, below the subtotal.
 
You can enter a flat cost for shipping in the first box:

 
In the second box, you can enter a by weight shipping rate:

With by weight shipping, true area is used to calculate part weight. ProNest will add the weights of all line items that are linked to the
part list. The total weight will then be multiplied by this rate.

Tip: Make sure that all line items have a valid weight before using this option. For parts, this means assigning a material type and
thickness with a valid Density in the Materials editor.

- 631 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The final shipping cost shown in the quote is the sum of the flat cost and the cost by weight.

Tax rate
Enter a tax percentage to apply to the quote, if desired.
 
If the quote is assigned to a customer in the Customer editor, this will already match the value for that customer.

Tax shipping
When selected, shipping costs will be included in the subtotal that is taxed. When cleared, shipping costs will not be taxed.
 
Example:
 
Let's say that the subtotal of all items in a job is $500, shipping costs are $20, and the tax rate is 8%.
 
When Tax shipping is selected, the total would be ($500 + $25) × 1.08 = $567
 
When Tax shipping is cleared, the total would be ($500 × 1.08) + $25 = $565

Material unit costs

The material unit cost numbers shown here are used to calculate a line item's Material Cost. By default, material unit cost comes from the
material's Unit Price in the Materials editor . In this section, you can override the default unit cost for any material or exclude material
costs from the quote altogether.

Include material costs

When selected, material costs will be included in quotes.
 
When cleared, material costs will not be included in quote. A *MATERIAL COST NOT INCLUDED disclaimer will appear at the bottom of
the quote. You may want to clear this check box if the customer is supplying the material for the job or it is an in-house job.
 
To override default material unit costs in a quote:
 l In the right-hand column of the grid, enter a new unit cost (by weight) for any material. The new unit cost will be used as a basis
for calculating material cost figures in the quote.
When you edit a material unit cost, the value that you enter will appear in highlighted in yellow, indicating that it is overriding the default
value.

You can click to clear the override and revert to the default value.

Note: Overriding a material unit cost will only affect material costs in that specific quote. If you want to permanently change the
unit cost of a material, edit the Unit Price value for that material in the Materials editor (Data tab > Materials ).

Notes and other information

Notes
Any notes you type here will appear in the quote above the line item list. If nothing is entered, the Notes section will not appear in the
quote.

- 632 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Custom fields
The other fields listed here provide a place to enter additional details in the quote. Custom fields will only be shown in the quote when
there is a Value entered. By default, when a new quote is started, the fields listed here match your Quoting preferences.
 
To add a new custom field:

 1. Click the Add button.

 2. Type a caption and value in the newly created row.
 
To change the order in which fields appear in the quote:
 1. Select a custom field to move.

 2. Use the arrows to reorder the list.

 
To remove custom fields from the quote:
 1. Select the custom field you want to remove.

 2. Click the Remove button.

How do I get here in ProNest?
 n File tab > click Quote > click the Properties link

- 633 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Printing, saving, and sending quotes

Printing a quote

 1. Open the job (.nif) containing the quote you want to print.
 2. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 3. In the upper left area, click the arrow on the Print/Create PDF/Send in Email button.

 4. Select Print.

 5. Select a printer and click OK.

Save quote as PDF

 1. Open the job (.nif) containing the quote you want to export to PDF.
 2. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 3. In the upper left area, click the arrow on the Print/Create PDF/Send in Email button.

 4. Select Create PDF.

Tip: You can set PDF options in the Quoting preferences.

 5. Click OK then select a folder.

 6. Click Save.
Once created, the PDF file can be located by clicking the link on the main Quote page.

Send to email recipient (as PDF attachment)

This will open your default email client and create a new email with the quote attached as a PDF. By default, the email is addressed to the
email address of the customer (specified in the Prepared for section) and the Subject line is formatted as "Quote: [quote number]".
 1. Open the job (.nif) containing the quote you want to send.
 2. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 3. In the upper left area, click the arrow on the Print/Create PDF/Send in Email button.

 4. Select Send in Email.

- 634 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: When a quote with a status of Drafting is printed, saved as a PDF, or sent in an email, the status of the quote will be changed
to Pending Approval.

- 635 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Quote status
Each quote can have a status associated with it. Status helps you track the current state of the quote and prevent unwanted changes
from other actions in ProNest.

View the status of a quote

Status is displayed in the Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 

Drafting
Pending Approval
Accepted
Rejected

 
Status is also displayed from the main screen (Home tab > Quote button).
 

Quote is empty Drafting Pending Approval Approved Rejected

(not yet created)

 
By default, when a new quote is started, the status is automatically set to Drafting.

Change the status of a quote

 1. Open the job (.nif) containing the quote you want to edit.
 2. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 3. In the upper right area, select a quote status from the list.
 

Status Description How are changes made?

Drafting Use this status when you are Any changes made to the ProNest job will also be made in the quote. For
setting up a quote or doing instance, if you add or remove parts, change quantities of parts, nest, or
work in the associated change settings or preferences, all of these changes will be carried over into
ProNest job. the quote.
 
Pending Approval Indicates that the quote has Once a quote is set to Pending Approval, Accepted, or Rejected, it is not
been sent out for approval. affected by any changes made outside the Quote editor. This means that
changes made in the ProNest job (such as to the part list, nests, settings,

- 636 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Status Description How are changes made?

etc.) will no longer impact the quote.
 
Accepted Indicates that the quote has
You can always make changes to the quote from inside the Quote editor
been accepted.
(File tab > Quote), regardless of the quote's status.
 
Rejected Indicates that the quote has If you need changes in the job to be carried over into the quote, you'd need
been rejected. to set the status back to Drafting.
 

Note: When a quote with a status of Drafting is printed, saved as a PDF, or sent in an email, the status of the quote will be changed
to Pending Approval.

- 637 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Working with line items

When you start a quote, each line item corresponds to a part in the part list. You can add secondary operations, markups, and quantity
discounts to line items. You can also add custom line items that aren't linked to parts in the part list.

In this article...
Add new line items
Add new custom line items
Edit existing line items
Change the order in which line items appear in the quote
Remove line items from a quote

Add new line items

Add new line items from the part list:

 1. Make sure the quote's status is set to Drafting.
 2. Add parts to the part list in your job.
 3. The added parts will automatically be added as line items to the quote.

Add new custom line items

Custom line items can also be added to quotes. Custom line items are flexible items that aren't tied to any specific part in your job.
 1. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 2. Click the Add button.

 3. Double-click the item and configure as needed. See Line Item properties for more information.
Enter details for the custom item just as you would a standard line item. Note that you'll need to enter Production and Material Costs for
the custom line item.

Edit existing line items

 1. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 2. Double-click a line item.
 3. Configure the item as needed. See Line Item properties for more information.

Change the order in which line items appear in the quote

 1. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 2. Click a line item to select it.

 3. Use the arrows to reorder the list.

The order in which line items are listed in the main quote page will match the order used in the quote itself.

Remove line items from a quote

- 638 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Line items linked to parts in the job or custom line items can be deleted from a quote.
 1. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).
 2. Click a line item.

 3. Click the Remove button.

Notes:  l Line items linked to nested parts can't be removed.

 l When a quote's status is set to Drafting, removing a line item that is linked to a part in the part list will also delete
that part from the job.

- 639 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Line Item properties

Name
By default, this will match the part name. Changing this name will also change the name of the part in the part list (when Status is set to
Drafting).
 
For custom line items, any name can be entered.
 
Description
When a description is entered, the description will appear in the quote instead of the name for a line item. This can be useful if you
want to change the displayed name of a line item that is linked to the part list without changing the part name in ProNest.
 
Quantity
By default, this will match the part's quantity. Changing the quantity of a line item that is linked to a part in the part list will update the
part's quantity in the job as well (when Status is set to Drafting).
 
Material cost
This should accurately reflect the cost of material needed to fabricate the part. This is calculated based on:
 l Material unit cost (on Quote > Properties page).
 l Density (from Materials editor)
 l Part area (using the method specified in Quoting preferences).
See How are costs calculated? for more information.

Note: By default, material unit costs in a quote match the Unit Price in the Materials editor. However, you can override the base
material unit cost for any quote:
 1. Open the Properties page for a quote (File tab > Quote > Dates, shipping, material costs, etc.).
 2. Enter a new value for Material Unit Cost.
Costs in that specific quote will be based on the override value instead of the default values taken from ProNest costing.

Production cost
This should accurately reflect the cost of production-related work needed to fabricate the part. This is calculated automatically based
on ProNest costing inputs. See How are costs calculated? for more information.

Material markup
Material markup rate to apply to the line item. By default, this value is inherited from the Customer selected for the quote. See Markups
for more information.

Production markup
Production markup rate to apply to the line item. By default, this value is inherited from the Customer selected for the quote. See
Markups for more information.

Secondary operations
Any secondary operations assigned to the current line item will be listed here.

Library

- 640 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

= Indicates that the secondary operation is in the library and is using default values.
= Indicates that the secondary operation is in the library, but its values differ from the default library values.

Unit price
The per-unit price of the secondary operation

Extended price
The per-unit price of the secondary operation multiplied by the item's quantity.

Quantity discounts
Any item (part) can have a quantity discount. Use quantity discounts to show hypothetical decreased unit costs for an item if it were
ordered at a larger quantity.

Quantity
The quantity at which the item would be charged at the lower unit price.

Discount
The discount rate that would be applied to the line item's unit price.

Unit Price
The adjusted unit price for the line item, taking into account the quantity discount rate.

Extended Price
The adjusted unit price × the number in the Quantity column.
 
See Discounts for more information.

Price
In quoting, unit price represents the price at which an item will be sold. Price includes all material and production costs, secondary oper-
ations, and markups.

Unit price
The per item (or per part) price. By default, this is calculated based on the unit cost of the line item (material cost + production cost) as
well as any markups and secondary operations.
 
To override the calculated unit price:
 l Simply type a new price in the box.

The value that you enter will appear in highlighted in yellow, indicating that it is overriding the calculated unit price.
 
To revert back to the calculated unit price:

 l Click the button and select Clear override.

Discounts
When a discount is applied to a quote and Show Separately is selected, the unit price (at the bottom of the Line Item page) will show
both the non-discounted price and the discounted price.
 

- 641 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Unit price: $25.00

  $23.75 (5% discount)

 
The discounted unit price is the figure that is used in the quote. If you override the amount in the Unit price box, the discounted
amount will automatically be adjusted.

Extended price
Unit price × item quantity.
How do I get here in ProNest?
 n File tab > click Quote > double-click a line item

- 642 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Quote reports
The layout, appearance, and information contained in a quote is controlled using reports.

View available standard quote reports

 1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).
 2. In the Produce section at the top, click the link next to Report.
The Quote Report page will open. ProNest contains three standard quoting reports:

Internal Quote
Shows itemized secondary operations for each line item.

Quote - Portrait
Portrait layout that doesn't show itemized secondary operations for each line item.

Quote - Landscape
Landscape layout that doesn't show itemized secondary operations for each line item.
 
Any of these reports can be used for a quote.

Change the quote report used by a quote

 1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).
 2. In the Produce section at the top, click the link next to Report.
 3. Click a different report to select it.

 4. Click the Back button.

With the different quote report in use, you can edit or print the quote as needed. You can always switch back and forth between quote
reports as described above to publish different versions of the same quote. This may be useful if you want to print a customer-facing ver-
sion of a quote and a different internal-only version as well.

Note: When a job is saved, ProNest will remember which quote report that job is using. The next time that job is opened, the quote
report that was in use will be the current report (and not the default report).
 
If the quote report used by a job was deleted since the job was last saved, when the job is re-opened, the default report will
be used.

Set a default report to use for new quotes

 1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).
 2. In the Produce section at the top, click the link next to Report.
 3. Click a report to select it.
 4. Click the Make this my default report link at the top of the Quote report page.

Add custom quoting reports

- 643 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

You can use the existing standard or custom reports as a take-off to create a new customized report.
 1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).
 2. In the Produce section at the top, click the link next to Report.
 3. In the list of Available quote reports, click an existing standard or custom report to select it.

 4. Click the Add button.

 5. Enter a name for your report and click Make Copy.
The quote report will be created. At this point, the contents of the report are identical to its parent report.
 6. With the new custom report selected, click the Design button.
 7. The FastReport designer will open, where your custom report can be edited. When you're finished, remember to save your
changes.

- 644 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Add secondary operations to a line item

Costs associated with secondary operations in part fabrication can be accounted for in quotes. This includes things that may occur after
cutting - like bending, grinding, welding, and painting.
 
Secondary operations are applied to the line items in a quote.

Adding a secondary operation to a line item

To add an existing secondary operation from the library:

 1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 2. In the Line items list, double-click the item that you want to add a secondary operation to.

 3. In the Secondary operations section, click the Add button.

 4. From the list, select a library operation.
 5. If you want to change the properties of the operation, double-click it and configure as needed.

Note: On the Line Item page (Quote > double-click a line item), secondary operations that are already in the library are indicated
with a book icon ( ). If a library operation is in use but its default values have been changed, this will be indicated with a
different book icon ( ).

 
To add a new secondary operation to a line item:
 1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 2. In the Line items list, double-click the item that you want to add a secondary operation to.

 3. In the Secondary operations section, click the Add button.

 4. Select Add New Secondary Operation.
The new operation will appear in the list.
 5. Double-click the newly-created operation.
The Secondary Operation page will appear.
 6. Configure the operation as needed. See the Secondary Operation properties for a detailed explanation of each item.

 7. Click the Back button to return to the Line Item page.

Tip: You can add the newly-created operation to the library by clicking Add to Library.

Add a secondary operation in the library to all line items in the quote

- 645 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Open the secondary operations library (File tab > Quote > click Secondary Operations Library).
 2. Click the secondary operation that you want to apply.
 3. On the Actions button, click Add to all line items.

- 646 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Remove a secondary operation from a line item

Remove a secondary operation from a line item

 1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 2. In the Line items list, double-click the line item.

 3. In the Secondary operations section, click the operation that you want to remove.

 4. Click the Remove button.

Remove a secondary operation in the library from all line items that are using it

 1. Open the secondary operations library (File tab > Quote > click Secondary Operations Library).
 2. Click the secondary operation that you want to remove.
 3. On the Actions button, click Delete from all line items.
All secondary operations that match the name of the selected library operation will be removed from all items in the quote.

- 647 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Secondary operations properties

Secondary operations are set up or edited in the Secondary Operations page.

Edit a secondary operation

To open this page for an item-specific secondary operation:

 1. Open the Line Item page (File tab > Quote > double-click a line item).
 2. Double-click the secondary operation that you want to edit.
 
To open this page for a library secondary operation:
 1. Open the secondary operations library (File tab > Quote > click Secondary Operations Library).
 2. Double-click the secondary operation that you want to edit.
 

Properties
Line Item
For item-specific secondary operations, this is the line item to which the operation is assigned. This doesn't apply for library operations.

Name
Enter a name for the secondary operation. It is recommended that you use a unique name, to avoid conflicts with other secondary oper-
ations in the library.

Production rate
The total hourly rate for the secondary operation. This may include things like hourly labor cost per hour, overhead costs, etc.

Production markup
By default, this value is inherited from the Production Markup for the item that it belongs to. You can enter an override value if the sec-
ondary markup rate should be different from its item's production markup.

Setup cost
Flat costs associated with setting up the secondary operation can be entered here.
 

= Use monetary cost for calculations

= Use time for calculations

 

When time ( ) is selected, the Production rate (specified above) is multiplied by the Time entered to get the total setup cost.

Variable cost
This would cover the cost of the actual secondary operation.
 

= Use monetary cost for calculations

= Use time for calculations

 

- 648 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

When time ( ) is selected, the Production rate (specified above) is multiplied by the Time (per Quantity unit) to get the total vari-
able cost.
 
Quantity unit
You can use the following quantity units for calculating variable costs:

Part
The monetary cost or time will be applied on a per-item basis.

Weight
The monetary cost or time will be applied based on the weight of the part.
Example
Let's say a line item requires special handling. There is no setup cost, but handling is charged by weight. Assume that the Pro-
duction Rate is set to zero for handling. Also assume a Production Markup of 10%.
 
Part weight: 10 lbs.
 
Setup cost: 0
 
Variable cost:
Cost = $0.50
Quantity unit = Weight (lb.)
Quantity = (set automatically by ProNest based on the material and geometry of the part)
 
Variable costs would be:
10 lbs. × $0.50/lb. = $5.00 variable cost
 
Units costs would be:
$0.00 + $5.00 = $5.00 unit cost
 
Then the 10% production markup is taken into account to get the unit price:
($5.00 × 0.10) + $5.00 = $5.50 unit price
 

Area
The monetary cost or time will be applied based on the area of the part.
Example
Let's say a part requires painting. Setting up painting takes 15 minutes total for a job and painting a single part takes 2 minutes
to complete. Production Rate is set at $50/hr. Also assume a Production Markup of 10%.
 
Because secondary operations are assigned to a single line item, you can either average out the total painting setup costs across
all line items or simply add a custom line item covering painting setup. For this example, let's average out the setup costs.
Assume there are 10 line items requiring painting. The total painting setup cost of 15 minutes would be divided by 10 line items,
giving a per item painting setup cost of 1.5 min.
 
Setup cost:
Time = 1.5 min.
 
Variable cost:
Time = 2 min.
Quantity unit = Area ft. 2

- 649 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Quantity = (set automatically by ProNest based on the geometry of the part)

 
Setup costs would be:
$50.00/hr. × 0.025 hrs = $1.25 setup cost
 
Variable costs would be:
2 min. × 2 ft. 2 = 4 min. (0.066 hrs.)
0.066 hrs. × $50/hr. = $3.33 variable cost
 
Units costs would be:
$1.25 + $3.33 = $4.16 unit cost
 
Then the 10% production markup is taken into account to get the unit price:
($4.16 × 0.10) + 4.16 = $4.58 unit price
 

Custom unit
If you need multiple units for the secondary operation, use can the Quantity box to enter a custom unit number. The monetary cost
or time would then be multiplied by this number to get the total for this secondary operation.
Example
Let's say a part requires 4 bends. Setting up bending takes 15 minutes and each bend takes 4 minutes to complete. Your pro-
duction rate is set at $50/hr. Also assume a production markup of 10%.
 
Setup cost:
Time = 15 min.
 
Variable cost:
Time = 4 min.
Quantity unit = Custom unit
Quantity = 4
 
Setup costs would be:
$50.00/hr. × 0.25 hrs = $12.50 setup cost
 
Variable costs would be:
4 min. × 4 custom units = 16 min. (0.266 hrs.)
0.266 hrs. × $50/hr. = $13.33 variable cost
 
Units costs would be:
$12.50 + $13.33 = $25.83 unit cost
 
Then the 10% production markup is taken into account to get the unit price:
($25.83 × 0.10) + 25.83 = $28.41 unit price
 

Important: Area and Weight calculations for secondary operations always use the True Area of the part. This is because it is
assumed that the operation will be done on parts after they are cut.

Add to Library/Update Library

For item-specific secondary operations, you can make changes to the secondary operations library.

- 650 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Add to Library
The selected secondary operation will be added to the secondary operations library.

Update Library
The matching library operation will be updated with values from the selected secondary operation. Use this if you want to use the val-
ues in an individual secondary operation as your defaults.

Price and cost figures

For item-specific secondary operations, the cost and price of the operation are shown at the bottom of the page. These are based on the
line item in which the operation is used.

Unit cost
The cost of the secondary operation for a single line item.

Extended cost
Unit cost × line item quantity

Unit price
Unit cost + production markup for the secondary operation

Extended price
Unit price × line item quantity

- 651 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Secondary operations library

The secondary operations library should be used for common secondary operations that will be reused on different line items. Each lib-
rary operation can have default values.

In this article...
Open the secondary operations library
The Secondary Operations Library page
Add a new secondary operation to the library
Edit a library operation
Remove an operation from the library

Open the secondary operations library

 1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 2. Click the Secondary Operations Library link.

Secondary Operations Library page

All operations in the library are listed in this section.

In Use
Indicates that the library operation is currently in use for at least one line item in the quote.
 
The Details section contains a summary of the currently-selected library operation.

Actions

Add to all line items

The selected secondary operation in the library will be added to all line items in the quote.

Update line items containing...

All secondary operations that are in use and match the name of the selected library operation will be updated with default values from
the library.

Delete from all line items

All secondary operations that match the name of the selected library operation will be removed from all line items in the quote.

Add a new secondary operation to the library

To add a new secondary operation to the library:

 1. Open the secondary operations library (File tab > Quote > click Secondary Operations Library).

 2. Click the Add button.

- 652 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 3. From the list, double-click the newly-created library operation.

 4. Configure properties as needed. See Secondary operations properties for more information.
 
You can also add an existing secondary operation (that is in use) to the library:
 1. On the Quote page (File tab > Quote) double-click a line item containing the operation you want to add.
 2. On the Line Item page, double-click the secondary operation in the list.
 3. Click Add to Library.

Edit a library operation

 1. Open the secondary operations library (File tab > Quote > click Secondary Operations Library).
 2. In the list, click the operation that you want to modify.
 3. Click the Edit button.
 4. Configure properties as needed. See Secondary operations properties for more information.

Remove an operation from the library

 1. Open the secondary operations library (File tab > Quote > click Secondary Operations Library).
 2. In the list, click the operation that you want to remove.

 3. Click the Remove button.

Removing an operation from the library will not remove it from the line items where it's already in use. To remove the operation from all
items, use Delete from all line items (on the Actions button). Then, if desired, you can remove the operation from the library.

- 653 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

20. MATERIALS
About materials
Explore the links to find out more about materials in ProNest:
 
 l Process Parameters spreadsheets
 l Materials database editor
 l Assigning materials to parts
 l Material aliases
 l Material display format preference
 l Assigning a material to an inventory plate
 l Changing materials in your job

- 654 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Assigning materials to parts

In ProNest, setting a material is a very important step. Using settings spreadsheets, ProNest assigns different parameters such as feedrate,
kerf, leads, and separation distances on the nest based on material. Setting a material is also essential for getting accurate costing inform-
ation for your job.

Assign material type and thickness to a part

In the Edit Part List window, material can be applied to parts before or after import:
 1. Select one or more parts.
 a. Hold CTRL + click to select parts individually.
 b. Hold SHIFT + click to select a range of parts.
 2. On the Nesting Properties tab on the lower right, in the Material box, select a material from the list.

Note: When spreadsheets are used, the list of available materials comes from the materials found in your Process Parameters spread-
sheet. When spreadsheets are not used, the list of available materials comes from your material database.

You can also change the material assigned to a part from the main nesting window, as long as the part isn't nested yet:
 1. In the Part List pane, right-click a part and select Properties.
 2. In the Properties pane, in the Material box, select a material from the list.

Important: Do not change the material assigned to parts that have already been beveled. See Applying beveled edges for more
information.

Set a default material for a new job

You can select a default Material type and thickness for a new ProNest job. All parts, plates, and nests in your job will use this material,
unless otherwise specified.
 1. On the File tab, click New.
 2. On the right side, in the Material box, select a default material.

- 655 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Materials editor
The Materials editor stores a list of all of the different materials that you use. Once this list is created, it will be available within ProNest,
enabling you to assign a material type and thickness for each part and plate. Other material-related information such as density, chemical
composition, and price is also stored in the database.

Open the Materials editor

You can access ProNest database editors internally from the Data tab in the main ProNest window. Database editors can also be run
externally as stand-alone applications.
 
To access the stand-alone Materials database editor:

 l Start > Hypertherm CAM > Materials.

 
To open the Materials database editor from within ProNest:

 l On the Data tab, click Materials.

Once the Materials editor is open, you can add, modify, or remove materials from it.

Add a material

 1. On the File menu, select New.

 2. Enter the Material and Thickness of the material, as well as any other information you want to include.
 3. Click OK.

Tip: You can easily add a material type with a range of different thicknesses to the database:
 1. On the File menu, select New Material List.
 2. Enter a material type in the uppermost box.
 3. Use the From and To boxes to specify the lowest and highest values in the set.
 4. In the Increment box, enter an appropriate increment value.
 5. Add any additional material information, such as density or unit price.
 6. Click OK.

Edit material information

To edit a single material:

 1. Select the material record.
 2. Click the Edit toolbar button ( ).
 3. Change material information as needed.
 4. Click OK.
 
To edit multiple materials at once:

- 656 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Select multiple materials.

 a. To select a range of materials, hold the SHIFT key while clicking the first and last material records in the range.
 b. To select multiple materials one at a time, hold CTRL key while clicking the material records.
 2. Click the Edit toolbar button ( ).
The Properties dialog will open. Note that each field has an unselected checkbox ( ) next to it, indicating that the current value
has not been edited.
 3. Change material information as needed.
When you edit information in a field, the checkbox next to it becomes selected ( ), indicating that the value has been edited.
 4. Click OK.
Your changes will be applied to all selected materials.

Delete a material

 1. Select the material.

 2. On the File menu, select Delete.

The Material Database and Process Parameters spreadsheets

In addition to materials added directly to the database, the materials from all current and former Process Parameters spreadsheets will
also be saved in the database. ProNest will automatically add materials found in your spreadsheets to your database.

Note: When spreadsheets are used, the list of available materials comes from the materials found in your Process Parameters spread-
sheet. When spreadsheets are not used, the list of available materials comes from your material database.

- 657 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Material properties
Material Properties
Material
Material type or name. This is a required field used throughout ProNest.
 
Thickness
Material thickness in inches or millimeters. This is a required field used throughout ProNest and to calculate part and plate weight for
costing purposes.
 
Grade
Material grade is an optional field that can be used to further differentiate materials beyond type and thickness. Parts of the same mater-
ial type and thickness but different grades could not be placed on the same nest.
 

Example:
 
Let's say you added following two materials to the database:
 
MS 0.25 A36
MS 0.25 1018

Though these have the same material type and thickness, they would be considered different materials in ProNest, due to their dif-
fering grades. Each material could have a unique unit price, scrap value, density, etc.

 
Gauge
Gauge is an optional field used for display purposes only. This must be used in conjunction with the Thickness field; it can't be used by
itself to differentiate materials.
 
Density
Density of the material in lb/in. 3or kg/m3. This is used for calculating part and plate weight for costing purposes.
 
Unit Price
The material's unit price in monetary units/lb or monetary units/kg. This is used for calculating material costs for parts and plates.
 
Scrap Value
The material's scrap value in monetary units/lb or monetary units/kg. This is used to calculate a nest's scrap value (in the Job Summary
report).
 

- 658 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing ProNest materials from a spreadsheet

You can import an XLS or XLSX file containing a list of materials into the ProNest Materials database.

Considerations
 l This feature is designed specifically for adding a list of new materials to the database. It will not update or delete existing mater-
ials.
 l When a machine is loaded in ProNest, the any materials found in the Process Parameters spreadsheet that aren't already in the
Materials database are automatically added. However, Process Parameters only include the Material and Thickness properties. By
importing a separate XLS file, you can quickly bring in a master list of materials that includes costing and other data into ProNest.
 l In ProNest, when Process Parameters spreadsheets are in use, the list of available materials in a job is limited by what is found in
the Process Parameters XLS.

Required format
Units cell (A1)
Measurement units are specified in cell A1, located in the upper left corner of the table. Allowable values for this cell are "inch" or "mm".
If this cell is blank, inch is assumed.
 
Column header row cell (B1)
The row number of the required column headers must be specified in cell B1, which is located to the right of the units cell. Allowable val-
ues for this cell are whole numbers greater than or equal to "2". If this cell is blank, a value of "2" is assumed. It can be useful to modify
this number if rows of information must be added above the required column header (for things such as translated column-headings or
reference information).
 
Column headers
Column headers are located in the row specified in cell B1. Each cell of this row contains a heading that indicates the data stored in that
column. For instance, the column header "Material" specifies a column containing the names of different materials.
 
The following are allowable column headers:
 

Maximum Field
Column Header Valid Values Units Column Required? Blank Allowed?
Size

Material 40 any text string   yes no

Thickness 20 0 - 65535 in. or mm yes no

Grade 40 any text string   no yes

Gauge 40 any text string   no yes

Density 20 0.0 - 999.0 lbs./in. 3 or kg/mm3 no yes

Unit Price 20 0.0 - 999.0 monetary units/lb. no yes

or monetary unit-
s/kg

Scrap Value 20 0.0 - 999.0 monetary units/lb. no yes

- 659 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Maximum Field
Column Header Valid Values Units Column Required? Blank Allowed?
Size

or monetary unit-
s/kg

Group Code 40 any text string   no yes

Chemical Comp 40 any text string   no yes

Remarks 60 any text string   no yes

 
Data rows
Rows 3 - n would contain records for each material you want to add.

Example table

inch 2          
Material Thickness Grade Gauge Density Unit Scrap
Price Value
MS 0.1250 A36   0.28 0.500 0.500
MS 0.2500 A36   0.28 0.500 0.500
MS 0.5000 A36   0.28 0.500 0.500
MS 0.7500 A36   0.28 1.000 1.000

Note: Material ID is assigned automatically by ProNest during import.

- 660 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About material aliases

In ProNest, a material's alias is an alternate name by which the material can be identified. This can be useful if outside of ProNest, you
name and organize materials differently from the format used in the Process Parameters spreadsheets. With aliases set up, material inform-
ation in a part file (BOM), work order, ERP/MRP import file, or PNL can be automatically identified and matched to the right ProNest
material during import.

Why use aliases?

In ProNest, most setups use Process Parameters spreadsheets as a means of applying specific settings based on material type and thick-
ness, and optionally, class. However, the format used in the spreadsheet may not match the material naming convention that you use out-
side of ProNest.
 
With aliases, you don't have to enter additional material information or adhere to the ProNest material naming convention when creating
your BOM parts, work orders, etc.

Why not edit materials directly in the Process Parameters spreadsheet instead?
 l Making changes to the Process Parameters spreadsheet is considered an advanced type of action. Many of the cells are cal-
culated based on other cells and it is easy to make mistakes that could result in problems.
 l You may have more than one alias for a given material (for example, A36, 1080, and Mild Steel might all map to MS in ProNest).
You wouldn't want to enter duplicate rows in the spreadsheet for all of these types.
 l Some material name formats are a combination of different material attributes. For instance, a material description used outside of
ProNest may be a single concatenated value containing material type, thickness, grade, finish, and even plate size. There is no
practical way to enter this into the spreadsheet.

- 661 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Setting up material aliases

Initial setup of material aliases can be done from the Aliases list in the Materials editor.

In this article...
The Aliases list
Adding aliases
Deleting aliases
Rules for matching materials
Quickly add an alias from the Edit Part List window
Aliases and Data Sync

The Aliases list

To open the Aliases list:

 1. Open the ProNest Materials editor (Data tab > Materials ).
 2. On the File menu, click Aliases.
The Aliases list will appear, with three tabs at the top.

The Aliases list

 
Material Name tab
Use this tab for aliases that correspond to a ProNest material type (e.g. "MS"). When ProNest encounters a material type in BOM data that
matches one of these aliases, it will automatically use the assigned material type instead.
Example
In this example, the material type SS exists in the ProNest Materials editor. In source files outside of ProNest, there are several vari-
ations in how this material is labeled (Stainless Steel, Stainless, HC-1, and so on). Each of these variations would be added to the Ali-
ases list and mapped to SS.
 

- 662 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Alias Material Name

Stainless Steel SS
Stainless SS
НС-1 SS
62538016 SS

 
When ProNest encounters a material value that matches any of these aliases, it will interpret the type as SS when trying to make a
match.
 
Grade tab
  Use this tab for aliases that correspond to a ProNest material grade (e.g. "304"). When ProNest encounters a grade in BOM data that
matches one of these aliases, it will automatically use the assigned material grade instead.
Example
In this example, the grade 304 exists for stainless steel in the ProNest Materials editor. In source files outside of ProNest, there are sev-
eral variations in how this grade is labeled (SS 304 BA, 304 2B, and so on). Each of these variations would be added to the Aliases list
and mapped to 304.
 

Alias Grade
SS 304 BA 304
SS 304 #4 304
SS 304-BA PVC 1 SIDE 304
304 BRIGHT ANNEALED 304
304 2B 304

 
When ProNest encounters a grade value that matches any of these aliases, it will interpret them as 304 when trying to make a match.
 
Material tab
Use this tab when a single alias corresponds to a full ProNest material type, thickness and, optionally, grade (e.g. "MS 0.25 in. A36"). The
alias would correspond to a single row in the Materials editor.
Example
In this example, the material record SS 0.105 in. 304 exists in the ProNest Materials editor. In source files outside of ProNest, there
are several variations in how this material is labeled (12 GA SS 304 BA, 12 GA SS 304 2B PVC, and so on). Each of these variations
would be added to the Aliases list and mapped to SS 0.105 in 304.
 

Alias Material
12 GA SS 304 AB SS 0.105 in. 304
12 GA SS 304 BRIGHT ANNEALED SS 0.105 in. 304
12 GA SS 304 2B PVC SS 0.105 in. 304

- 663 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
When ProNest encounters a material value that matches any of these aliases, it will interpret them as SS 0.105 in. 304 when trying to
make a match.

Adding aliases

 1. Open the ProNest Materials editor (Data tab > Materials ).
 2. On the File menu, click Aliases.
 3. The Aliases list will open.
 4. Select a tab (Material Name, Grade, or Material) to begin assigning aliases.
 5. In the Alias column on the left, type an alias.
 6. In the box to the right of that alias, use the drop down arrow to select a value.

This list of available material names, grades, or full materials comes from the Materials editor.
 7. When you are finished, click OK.
The next time a part or plate that uses an alias is imported, the corresponding ProNest material will automatically be assigned.

Delete aliases

 1. Open the ProNest Materials editor (Data tab > Materials ).
 2. On the File menu, click Aliases.
 3. Click a row in the Aliases list.
 4. Press the Delete key.

Rules for material matching

Ultimately, the purpose of using aliases is to match a ProNest material using material information from the import file. The following rules
govern how ProNest materials are selected during import:
 l Thickness is always required in order to make a match. Note that the stated thickness must be ±0.001 in. (±0.0254 mm) of the
thickness listed in the Materials editor.
 l When using the Material Name tab:
 l Material type is required in the BOM information. If a material record has a Grade in the Materials editor, the grade must
also be specified in BOM information in order to make a match.
 l When using the Grade tab:
 l Material type is not required in the BOM information. A match can be made using Grade and Thickness.
 l When using the Material tab:
 l Material with an alias that maps to a full material is required in the BOM information. For BOM parts, you'd need to enter
this alias in the MATERIAL= field. For Data Sync, see below for more details.
If a match to a material is not made during import, you will not have the correct material specified for the item in ProNest. You would
then need to change the material after parts have been added.

Quickly add an alias from the Edit Part List window

- 664 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

When adding parts to the part list, if an alias specified in the part file is not found in the Alias table, you may see a Material inform-
ation in the part file did not match a ProNest material warning.
 
To quickly assign a ProNest material for this alias:
 1. Click the Warnings box.
 2. Click the arrow next to a part.

 3. Click the browse button ( ) on the right

 4. Select a material from the list.
The alias-to-material assignment will be added to the Aliases list. The next time that alias is encountered, the corresponding ProNest
material will automatically be assigned.

Note: The Material information in the part file did not match a ProNest material warning may also appear for the following reas-
ons:
 l Grade is use in the Materials editor, but grade is not specified in the BOM information.
 l Thickness is not found.

Aliases and Data Sync

In Data Sync, the ERP/MRP field that is mapped to Material Description (in the Data Mapping tab of the Data Sync Manager) will be
brought in as the ProNest material. During import of a work order or inventory plates, if there are new materials in the work order or list of
plates that aren't in the ProNest Materials database, those materials will automatically be added to the Aliases list (on the Material tab).
 

Material Name Grade Material

Alias Material
PL 0.125  
PL 0.250  
PL 0.375  

 
Initially, the right column displaying corresponding ProNest materials is blank, because these aliases haven't been assigned to ProNest
materials yet. You would then need to select a full ProNest material (type, thickness, and optionally grade) to each alias, as described
above.
 n Mapping material names for work orders
 n Importing material aliases from a spreadsheet

- 665 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing material aliases from a spreadsheet

You can import an XLS or XLSX file containing a list of material alias assignments into the ProNest Aliases list:

 1. Open the ProNest Materials editor (Data tab > Materials ).
 2. On the File menu, click Aliases.
The Aliases list will open.
 3. At the bottom of the dialog, click the Import button.
 4. Browse to the spreadsheet containing your list of aliases.

Considerations
 l This feature is designed specifically for quickly adding a list of new aliases to the Aliases list in ProNest. It will not update existing
aliases (except in the case of full Material aliases where the alias is set to "None").
 l Material aliases can also be added or edited directly in the ProNest Aliases list grid.
 l Be careful to enter the Material Name, Gauge, and/or Material exactly as they appear in the Materials editor.
 l You can't have an Alias XLS with Alias, Material, and Grade columns and no Thickness column. Thickness must be included if you
want to map an alias to a full ProNest material.

Required format
Units cell (A1)
Measurement units are specified in cell A1, located in the upper left corner of the table. Allowable values for this cell are "inch" or "mm".
If this cell is blank, inch is assumed.
 
Column header row cell (B1)
The row number of the required column headers must be specified in cell B1, which is located to the right of the units cell. Allowable val-
ues for this cell are whole numbers greater than or equal to "2". If this cell is blank, a value of "2" is assumed. It can be useful to modify
this number if rows of information must be added above the required column header (for things such as translated column-headings or
reference information).
 
Column headers
Column headers are located in the row specified in cell B1. Each cell of this row contains a heading that indicates the data stored in that
column.
 
The following are allowable column headers:
 

Column Header Description Maximum Field Size Valid Values Blank Allowed?

Alias Enter the alias used 259 any text string no

outside of ProNest
in this column.

Material Material type from 20 0 - 65535 yes

the Materials data- (required when mapping
base. to a full material)
 
Material type is
required when alias

- 666 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Column Header Description Maximum Field Size Valid Values Blank Allowed?

matches a full
material (a single
record in the Mater-
ials database).

Thickness Material thickness 40 any text string yes

from the Materials (required when mapping
database. to a full material)
 
Thickness is used
only when alias
matches a full
material (a single
record in the Mater-
ials database).

Grade Material grade from 40 any text string yes

the Materials data-
base.
 
Use this column
when the alias
denotes a material
grade.

 
Data rows
Rows 3 - n would contain records for each alias you want to add.

Example tables
Example 1: Aliases only
The following import table is used to only bring in aliases with nothing mapped:
 

inch 2    
Alias
12 GA 304-2B 48 IN X 120 IN LPVC    
12 GA 304-2B SS 48 IN X 144 IN LPVC    
12 GA 304-2B 48 IN X 121 IN LPVC    
12 GA 316-2B 48 IN X 120 IN [L-4]    

 
After import, you would then map the aliases to available materials in the Aliases list.
 
Example 2: Alias to full material

- 667 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

This import table would be used to match alias to a full material (the Material tab in the Aliases list):
 

inch 2    
Alias Material Thickness Grade
12 GA 304-2B SS  PVC SS 0.105 304
12 GA 304-BA SS PVC SS 0.105 304
12 GA 316L-4 SS PVC SS 0.105 316L
12 GA 316L-2B SS PVC SS 0.105 316L
14 GA 304-2B SS  PVC SS 0.075 304
14 GA 304-BA SS PVC SS 0.075 304

In this instance, the Materials database must have the following records in order for the alias to match during part import:
 
SS 0.105 304
SS 0.105 316L
SS 0.075 304

Material and Thickness are required columns that can't be blank when mapping to a full material. Grade is an optional column.
However, if a Grade column does exist, the grade must not be blank for any row.
 

Tip: You can easily start a new Material Alias XLS by copying and pasting one of the example tables shown above into Microsoft Excel
or other spreadsheet program.

- 668 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Overview of class
In ProNest, class is used to apply specific cutting parameters based on the consumables that will be used to cut a part or nest. It is also
used to limit parts that require different consumables from being nested together on the same plate. Lastly, it is used to apply per-
formance applications and other technologies to parts.

How does Class work in ProNest?

In ProNest settings spreadsheets, each record (or data row) contains a complete set of settings values. A given row or record is selected
depending on the keys specified (such as Material, Thickness, Class, Profile Area, etc.) in your job. Class is an optional column in the Pro-
cess Parameters spreadsheet that is used as a key for record matching.
 
Consider the following excerpt of a Process Parameters spreadsheet:
 

  A B C D E F G

1 inch 3          
2 Keys Process Parameters
3 Material Thickness Class Profile Profile Feedrate Kerf
Type Area
4 MS 0.2500 80Amp O2/Air * * 110 0.068
5 MS 0.2500 130Amp O2/Air * * 150 0.071
6 MS 0.2500 200Amp O2/Air * * 200 0.078
7 MS 0.2500 260Amp O2/Air * * 245 0.100

This table shows a single material and thickness with four different class values. In this case, the Class column is used to apply
specific cutting parameters (Kerf and Feedrate) based on amperage and plasma/shield gas.

Note: In order to use class in ProNest, the Process Parameters spreadsheet must contain a Class column.

When you set a class for a part in ProNest, you are specifying the cutting parameters that will be used in output, which are based on the
consumables.
 
For some plasma machines, class is also used to apply special Hypertherm cutting technology or performance applications to parts in
ProNest, including True Hole® and the other Phoenix features discussed in this chapter.

Applying class
Class is applied at the part level. After selecting a material type and thickness for a part, there is a list of available classes to choose from
based on your selection.
 

 
Please follow the links below to find out more:
 l Using the class selector

- 669 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Plasma
 l Selecting a class for plasma
 l Plasma consumables and performance applications
 
Laser
 l Selecting a class for laser
 l Vaporize
 
Waterjet
 l Selecting a class for waterjet
 

How does class affect nesting?

If you had two parts of the same material type and thickness that needed to be cut at different amperages, you'd select different classes
for either part. For instance, one part may be MS 0.25 in. 130 Amp O2/Air and a second part may be MS 0.25 in. 80 Amp O2/Air. These
parts would each have different cutting parameters (feedrate, kerf, etc.) applied based on their class. They also could not be nested
together on the same plate in ProNest. This prevents having to make a consumable change in the middle of cutting a nest.
 
An exception to this rule is parts that have classes differing only in performance applications. For instance, a True Hole part cut at MS
0.25 in. 130 A could be nested on the same plate as a non-True Hole MS 0.25 in. 130 A part.

Default class
You can set a default class for any material type and thickness. With a default class set, when you select a material type and thickness in
ProNest, that class will automatically be selected as well. To learn how, see Default Class settings.

- 670 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using the class selector

After selecting a material type and thickness for a part, there is a list of available classes to choose from based on your selection.

 
When you click the down arrow ( ) in the Class box, a list of classes will appear. Depending on the cut process and setup you have,
this class selector may look different.
 
A Hypertherm plasma setup shows consumable and cut speed information, as well as special performance applications and other fea-
tures in the filter at the top:

 
Other setups with no special performance applications or other features don't have a class filter, but information about consumables and
cut speed is still shown:

 
Whatever the configuration, you can use the class selector to help you pick the right class for the part.

- 671 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Refine results using the filter

The filter at the top of the class selector displays performance applications and some other items. Clicking a checkbox will limit the list so
that only classes containing that item are shown.
 
For instance, if you only wanted to view classes with True Hole® in them, you would select the True Hole checkbox.

 
You can select multiple checkboxes to create a compound filter. Only classes that contain both items would be shown.

Comparing cut speeds of different choices

On the right side of the class selector is a speed indicator for each class listed. This shows the relative cut speed for each choice. These
cut speeds are based on the Base Feedrate listed in the Process Parameters spreadsheet for a given class.*

The slowest cut speed is always shown as 1.0x. All other speeds shown are relative to the slowest speed. So, 1.5x is one and a half times
faster than the 1.0x class, 6.0x is six times faster than 1.0x, and so on.

- 672 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

*Note: If a Base Feedrate column doesn't exist in the Process Parameters spreadsheet, cut speeds are based on the Feedrate column.

Comparing cut quality of different choices

On the right side of the class selector is a cut quality indicator for each class listed. This shows the predicted cut quality for each choice.

= Higher quality: Good choice when edge quality is more important than speed.
= Optimized quality: Best overall balance of productivity and cut quality.
= Lower quality: Good choice when speed is more important that edge quality.

Note: Quality indicator only available for certain Hypertherm systems.

- 673 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Viewing technology in use on a nest

In the Technology panel, you can view the performance applications (such as True Hole®) or other technologies (Fine Feature, HDi) that
are currently in use on a nest. You can also quickly identify nested parts that have been beveled. The Technology panel is an indicator
only - it can't be used to apply or remove features or technologies in ProNest.
 

The Technology panel (shown in red)

Note: SureCut™ technology is the embedded expertise within Hypertherm CAM/CNC products that maximizes cutting per-
formance for end users.

Highlighting technology on the nest

In the Technology panel, you can hover the cursor over certain features to view where that technology is used on the nest. This func-
tionality is available for True Hole, Fine Feature, Bevel Cuts, and Vaporize profiles.

True Hole
When a True Hole class is selected for a part, only profiles that meet the size requirements have True Hole technology applied. You can
view which profiles actually have True Hole using the Technology panel.
 
To view the holes with True Hole applied:
 l Hover the cursor over True Hole in the Technology panel.
True Hole interiors will be drawn in bold on the nest.
 

- 674 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

In the nest pictured above, all parts were assigned the "True Hole" class, but only some of the holes qualified for True Hole.
Using the Technology panel, you can see exactly which holes have True Hole applied.

Fine Feature
When the Fine Feature class is selected for a part, it is only applied to profiles that meet the criteria in the Process Parameters spreadsheet.
As with True Hole, you can view the specific profiles that have Fine Feature using the Technology panel.
 
To view Fine Feature profiles on a nest:
 l Hover the cursor over Fine Feature in the Technology panel.
Fine Feature profiles will be drawn in bold on the nest.
 

Bevel Cut
You can quickly view beveled edges on nested parts. Note that this applies to parts that have been beveled (the edges will be cut at a
non-perpendicular angle) in Advanced Edit or using AutoBevel. This doesn't apply to parts using a Bevel or True Bevel class, which refers
to Hypertherm Bevel consumables and True Bevel cut angles.
 
To view beveled part geometry on a nest:
 l Hover the cursor over Bevel Cut in the Technology panel.
Beveled edges on parts will be drawn in bold on the nest.
 

- 675 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Vaporize
To view vaporize geometry on a nest:
 l Hover the cursor over Vaporize in the Technology panel.
Vaporize profiles will be drawn in bold on the nest.
 

Fly Cut
To view fly cutting on a nest:
 l Hover the cursor over Fly Cut in the Technology panel.
Fly Cut profiles will be drawn in bold on the nest.
 

- 676 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: Because Fly Cutting is applied during output, pierces (View tab > Nest Image Objects > Pierces) drawn on fly cut parts do not
reflect the actual pierce locations.

Show or hide the Technology panel

To hide the Technology panel:

 l Click the Close button on the panel.
 
To show the Technology panel:
 1. On the File tab, click Preferences.
 2. On the General page, select Show the technology panel.
Note that the Technology panel will appear only when there is a relevant technology applied on the nest.

Open Nest Properties dialog to view technology in use

 l On the status bar of the main window, click Nest n of n.

- 677 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Selecting a class for plasma

For plasma systems, the amperage and cutting gas/shield gas can be selected in ProNest using class. In selecting an amperage and gas,
you are also specifying which consumables (electrode, nozzle, etc.) should be used for a part or nest.

Picking an amperage

When selecting an amperage for a nest using class, the list of available amperages is based on the material and thickness that is already
selected. These represent the allowable amperages for cutting that material. If there are multiple available amperages, consider the fol-
lowing when making a selection:

How fast do you need the job?

Cutting at a higher amperage is generally faster than cutting at a lower amperage. In the Class box, on the right side there is a speed
indicator for each class listed. This shows the relative cut speed for each amperage and gas.
 

The Class box with MS 0.50 in. (12 mm) selected

 
The slowest cut speed is shown as 1.0x. All other speeds shown are relative to the slowest speed. So, 1.5x is one and a half times faster
than the 1.0x class, 6.0x is six times faster than 1.0x, and so on.

What kind of quality is acceptable?

There are several different aspects of cut quality, including cut angularity, top edge sharpness, edge finish, and dross formation.
 
ProNest Process Parameters spreadsheets contain built-in process expertise; they are designed to include only cut speeds and amper-
age ranges that provide a reasonable cut quality. However, there are still differences in cut quality within the listed ranges.
 l As a general rule, selecting a lower amperage with a slower cut speed will typically result in a better quality cut than cutting at
a higher amperage.
On the right side of the class selector is a cut quality indicator for each class listed. This shows the predicted cut quality for each
choice.

- 678 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

= Higher quality: Good choice when edge quality is more important than speed.
= Optimized quality: Best overall balance of productivity and cut quality.
= Lower quality: Good choice when speed is more important that edge quality.

Note: Quality indicator only available for certain Hypertherm systems.

While the quality indicator gives you a good general idea of the edge quality to expect, there are other complicating factors that may
come into play.
 
Cutting too slowly may result in:
 l Low speed dross formation
 l Excessive top spatter
 l Inconsistent edge quality
 
Cutting too fast can cause:
 l High-speed dross
 l Too much torch lag
 
Ultimately, achieving a cut quality that is acceptable for your application involves finding the right cut speed and amperage. You may
need to examine test cuts and look at the lag line (10° - 15° is ideal) on the cut edge to determine the correct speed for your job.

Tip: For Hypertherm plasma machines and consumables, the Hypertherm Training and Education website (http://www.hy-
pertherm.com/en/) provides a very thorough and in-depth information on achieving good cut quality and maximizing con-
sumable life.

What is the amperage limitation of the power supply?

Be sure to select an amperage that is within the allowable range of your physical machine. While most newer ProNest setups will only
display amperages that can be cut by your physical machine, some older setups may show a wider range of amperages that is outside
the capability of your machine.

What gases and consumables are available?

- 679 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Be sure that you have the correct consumable set and plasma/shield gases for the amperage that you are setting in ProNest. Cutting at
an amperage that exceeds the maximum rated amperage of a consumable set can lead to faster consumable wear. Please consult your
machine documentation for more information.

Plasma gas and shield gas

For multi-gas plasma systems, the gas that is used for cutting can have a significant impact on cut quality, speed, consumable wear, and
cost of operation. Different cutting parameters (such feedrate, kerf, and cut height) are included in output code, depending on the gas
that is selected. It is important to select the correct gas combination that will be used for cutting.
 
In most instances, when cutting mild steel, there is only one plasma gas/shield gas option at a given amperage. For instance, when cut-
ting at 80 A, you must also select O2/Air; at 50 A only O2/O2 is available. Once an amperage is selected, there is no choice to make for
plasma/shield gas.
 
For stainless steel and aluminum, there are several gas options at a given thickness and amperage. For instance, for aluminum 0.25 in. (6
mm) at 260 A, you can select N2/Air (nitrogen plasma gas with air shield gas) or H35/N2 (argon-hydrogen plasma gas with nitrogen
shield gas). In these instances, the decision of what gas to choose will probably be limited by what is in stock or and system's capability.
However, if availability is not a limiting factor, there are several other factors to take into account when selecting a gas combination for a
given amperage, such as cost or quality.

Tip: A good online resource covering plasma gases is the Plasma gas cutting guide (https://www.hypertherm.com/en-US/customer-
support/consumables-and-torches/). (Website is available in English only.)

What is the effect of picking an incorrect amperage or gas in ProNest?

It is important to select an amperage and gas combination in ProNest that matches what will be used at the machine during cutting.
Otherwise, the output code may contain incorrect feedrates, kerf values, cut heights, and pierce heights. This can lead to poor quality
parts and damaged consumables.

For further information on selecting a plasma class, including True Hole and Fine Feature, refer to Plasma consumables and performance
applications.

- 680 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Plasma consumables and performance applications

For Hypertherm plasma setups, you can use Class to apply performance applications and other technologies to parts in ProNest.

In this article...
SureCut
True Hole
Fine Feature
HDi
Bevel
True Bevel
Moving Pierce
Thick Pierce
Underwater
Edge Pierce Only

SureCut™
SureCut technology is the embedded expertise within Hypertherm CAM/CNC products that maximizes cutting performance for end users.
 
Visit http://www.hypertherm.com/SureCut to learn more.

True Hole®
Produces bolt hole quality with virtually no hole taper and minimal ding on mild steel. When True Hole is selected, it is applied to a part's
holes automatically based on the ratio of material thickness to hole diameter. So in a given part, with the True Hole class selected, some
holes may get True Hole while other holes do not.
 

Material: Mild Steel 0.135 to 1.0 inches (3 to 25 mm)

Hole diameter: 1x to 2x material thickness

 
Pros
 l Automatically delivers "bolt-hole" quality
 l Virtual elimination of hole taper
 l Ding is reduced and biased to the outside of the hole
 
Cons
 l Slower than a standard cut
 l Slightly longer cut length (due to adjusted leads)

Fine Feature
Fine Feature is a technology that is designed for jobs in which the greatest importance is placed on achieving the best possible finish on
the cut surface, a sharp top edge, and tight control over angle deviation.
 

- 681 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Material: Mild Steel 0.135 to 1.0 inches (3 to 25 mm)

Amperage: 260 A and lower
(Not all listed amperages are available for each material thickness.)

 
Pros
 l Best finish on the cut surface
 l Sharp top edge quality
 l Tight control over angle deviation
 
Cons
 l Slower than a standard cut

Note: Not available with XPR. XPR cut charts are already optimized to provide superior cutting on mild steel, stainless steel, and alu-
minum throughout all thin and thick processes.

HDi
HyDefinition inox (HDi) 60 A cutting process for thin stainless steel that produces high quality cuts with minimal dross.
 

Material: Stainless Steel 0.135 to 0.20 inches (3 to 6 mm)

Amperage: 60 A

 
Pros
 l Sharp top edge quality
 l Shiny surface finish
 l Superior angularity with reduced angle variation
 l Less dross
 
Cons
 l Only for thin material
 l Only available at 60 A
 l Requires F5/N2 gas

Note: Not available with XPR. XPR cut charts are already optimized to provide superior cutting on mild steel, stainless steel, and alu-
minum throughout all thin and thick processes.

Bevel
Use Hypertherm bevel consumables (shield, nozzle, electrode, etc.).
 

Material: Mild Steel 0.075 to 3.0 inches (2 to 76 mm)

Stainless Steel 0.25 to 6.25 inches (6 to 160 mm)

- 682 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Pros
 l Bevel-capable consumables can be used for both bevel and non-bevel (perpendicular) cutting
 l Better consumable life, even when cutting non-bevel (perpendicular)
 
Cons
 l Only available at certain amperages and bevel angles
 l Requires extensive user testing

Notes:  l If parts will have a beveled (non-perpendicular) edge applied in ProNest, a bevel-compatible class must be selected.
 l True Bevel uses the exact same consumables as Bevel
 l Not available with XPR. For XPR systems, standard consumables (which are all bevel-capable) will be used for all
classes, including True Bevel.

True Bevel™
Use Hypertherm bevel consumables (shield, nozzle, electrode, etc.) and True Bevel™ cut charts at factory-tested bevel angles and thick-
nesses. Note that both True Bevel and Bevel classes require bevel consumables.
 

Material: Mild Steel 0.25 to 2.0 inches (6 to 50 mm)

Amperage: 80 A and higher
(Not all listed amperages are available for each material thickness.)
Plasma Gas/Shield Gas: O2/Air
Bevel Types: I, V, A and Y Top cuts at selected angles up to 45°

 
Pros
 l Setup time and scrap material are greatly reduced for new job setup due to reduced trial and error.
 l Bevel cut sequence recommendation is provided for improved accuracy and consistent quality.
 l Scalable parameter tables with embedded equations allow you to add new angles with ease.
 l Better consumable life, even when cutting non-bevel (perpendicular).
 l Requires minimal user testing
 
Cons
 l Only available at certain amperages and bevel angles
 l Not available for K cuts

Notes:  l If parts will have a beveled (non-perpendicular) edge applied in ProNest, a bevel-compatible class must be selected.
 l True Bevel uses the exact same consumables as Bevel
 l For XPR systems, standard consumables (which are all bevel-capable) will be used for all classes, including True
Bevel.

Moving Pierce
A pierce technique that is combined with PowerPierce® technology to extend stainless steel pierce capability for the HPR800XD to 4
inches (100 mm) and for the HPR400XD to 3 inches (75 mm).
 

- 683 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Moving pierce is a linear motion that uses torch lifter positioning, current ramping and table motion to gouge into the plate, directing
molten metal away from the work piece, until the plate is penetrated and standard cutting can begin. The moving pierce is applied on the
lead-in on a profile.
 

Material: Stainless Steel 2 to 4 inches (50 to 200 mm)

Amperage: 400 A, 800 A
(Not all listed amperages are available for each material thickness.)
Plasma Gas/Shield Gas: H35-N2/N2, H35/N2
System: HPR400XD or HPR800XD is required

 
Pros
 l Eliminates need for pre-piercing
 l Ability to pierce thick stainless without an edge pierce
 l Piercing interior profiles with plasma is possible (as long as the hole is large enough and has a linear lead-in)
 l Keeps torch away from molten material
 
Cons
 l Can only be applied to Linear style lead-ins
 l Leaves molten slag ("rooster tail") that can spatter onto adjacent parts
 l Requires high amperage

Other considerations
 l If you are nesting parts with moving pierces, the parts should be oriented so that the lead-ins all follow the same direction. This
can be achieved through manual nesting or by using array (Parts tab > Array). In general, automatic nesting is not a good option
when using moving pierce.
 l When nesting a part with a moving pierce, be sure to leave sufficient space on the nest for the molten slag (or "rooster tail") that
is created by the pierce. For this reason, proper manual positioning of parts on the nest or using a large enough part-pierce sep-
aration for these parts can prevent slag from spattering onto adjacent parts.
 l Moving pierces are applied over relatively long lead-ins. As a result, they cannot be applied to lead-ins on interior profiles that are
smaller than the minimum distance needed for the moving pierce. If a part has interiors that can't have moving pierces applied, a
standard dwell pierce will be used instead.
 l If a profile is edge pierced (or pre-pierced), the moving pierce technique will not be applied to that lead-in. This means that even
if you've added a part and set the class to Moving Pierce, if that part is edge pierced the moving pierce will not be applied (as it is
no longer necessary).

Note: Not available with XPR. XPR cut charts are already optimized to provide superior cutting on mild steel, stainless steel, and alu-
minum throughout all thin and thick processes.

Thick Pierce
Use special piercing instructions in Phoenix controller for HPRXD Thick Pierce.
 

Material: Mild Steel 1.0 to 2.5 inches (25 mm to 65 mm)

Amperage: 260 A
Plasma Gas/Shield Gas: O2/Air
Hardware: HPRXD at 260 A

- 684 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Pros
 l Ability to pierce thick material without an edge pierce
 
Cons
 l Not available for Stainless Steel or Aluminum

Note: Not available with XPR. XPR cut charts are already optimized to provide superior cutting on mild steel, stainless steel, and alu-
minum throughout all thin and thick processes.

Underwater
Underwater cutting can significantly reduce the level of noise and smoke generated by normal plasma cutting, as well as the glare of the
plasma arc. Hypertherm has developed underwater cut charts for mild steel at 80 A, 130 A, 200 A, 260 A, and 400 A.
 

Material: Mild Steel 0.135 to 1.75 inches (3 to 25 mm)

Amperage: 80 A and higher
(Not all listed amperages are available for each material thickness.)
Plasma Gas/Shield Gas: O2/Air
System: Plasma with underwater table
Max Depth: Can cut up to 3 inches (75 mm) below the surface of the water

 
Pros
 l Reduced noise, smoke and glare compared to normal plasma cutting
 l Reduced heat distortion and warping
 l Parts can be handled immediately after they are cut
 l Available at many different amperages
 
Cons
 l Slower than a standard cut
 l Cut charts do not support Stainless Steel or Aluminum
 l Scribing/marking/centermarking is not supported
 l Not compatible with True Hole®
 

Edge Pierce Only / Edge Start

For thicker materials, edge pierces may be required when cutting at specific amperages and with certain gases. This is because a tra-
ditional pierce wouldn't physically cut through the plate.
 
In ProNest, the "Edge Pierce Only" class indicates that when cutting that thickness with the specified amperage and assist gas, you must
use edge piercing for parts. For instance, if you are cutting mild steel at 260 A with O2/Air, all available classes would be "Edge Pierce
Only".
 
Pros

- 685 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Eliminates need for pre-piercing

 l Ability to pierce thick materials
 
Cons
 l Edge pierce can only be applied to exterior profiles
 l Parts must be oriented on the nest so that exterior leads are close to the plate edge

- 686 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Selecting a class for laser

For Laser setups, class may contain gas information, lens focal length, cut condition. Laser classes are also used to apply vaporize to a
plate.
 
In most cases, there is a single gas or consumable set listed for a given material type and thickness. However, in cases where there are mul-
tiple choices, the cut speed indicator can be used to determine how fast one class is relative to the others.

- 687 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Vaporize
Some plates come coated with a thin protective film in order to protect the surface of the plate. The coating can negatively affect cut
quality on certain machines if it is not burned off prior to cutting, particularly with laser machines. ProNest has the ability to program the
cutting head to "vaporize" this film by pre-tracing profiles at low wattage prior to cutting.

How is vaporize applied in ProNest?

The Process Parameters spreadsheet uses a class (for instance, "N2 Assist – Vaporize") that is particular to vaporizing. When you set the
class for a part, you can select whether or not to apply vaporize to that part.
 
To apply vaporize to a part:
 l When setting the Class for the part, select a class with "Vaporize" in the name. Some examples include:
 l Vaporize / N2 / Lens 5.0 / Nozzle 1.4
 l N2 Assist - Vaporize
When NC output is created for the part, vaporize commands will automatically be included in the code. The cutting head will first pass
over a profile at a low wattage, burning off the coating, and then will come back and cut the profile (you can view this using cut sim-
ulation in ProNest.)

Viewing vaporize profiles on a nest

To view vaporize profiles on a nest:

 l Hover the cursor over the Vaporize feature in the Technology panel.

 
To view animated vaporize motions:

 1. Open Cut Simulation mode (Home tab > Cut Simulation ).
 2. Play the simulation.
The cutting head will pass over each profile twice: first with a vaporize pass and then with a cut pass.

Vaporize settings
Vaporize commands are applied based on the Process Parameters spreadsheet. A column called "Vaporize" is used to specify whether or
not to vaporize a profile that matches a given row.
 

- 688 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

  A B   C       D E
1 inch 3              
2 Keys       Miscellaneous
3 Material Thickness Class Profile Diameter Profile Vaporize Feedrate Kerf
Type Area
4 SS 0.0360 N2 Assist * * * 0 27.0 0.04
5 SS 0.0360 N2 Assist I 0.3750 0.1104 0 25.5 0.04
6 SS 0.0360 N2 Assist - Vaporize * * * 1 24.0 0.05
7 SS 0.0360 N2 Assist - Vaporize I 0.3750 0.1104 1 16.0 0.09
8 SS 0.0360 N2 Assist - Vaporize V * * 1 16.0 0.09

 
In the Vaporize column:
 
0 = Do not vaporize
1 = Vaporize the profile
 
In the XLS above, "N2-Assist – Vaporize" class rows have Vaporize set to 1.
 
As with any Process Parameters spreadsheet, you can have more than one row for a given Material, Thickness, and Class, further dif-
ferentiated by Profile Type and also Profile Area. Multiple rows with differing Profile Areas can be used to vaporize holes of a certain size,
for instance, while not vaporizing larger profiles which may not need the same cut quality.
 
The "Profile Type = V" row
For a given material/thickness/class, a special row is inserted with the Profile Type set to "V". This row lets you set a specific Cut Condition
(if needed), Feedrate, Kerf, etc. to use for vaporizing.
 
For the Profile Type = V row, the Vaporize column is ignored (it doesn’t matter if it's set to 0 or 1).

Vaporizing and cut sequence

By default, vaporize is applied on a profile by profile basis. This is to say that the vaporizing will be done for a profile and then that profile
will be cut, before the cutting head moves on to vaporize the next profile, and so on.

Advanced: If you require a different cutting sequence for nests that will be vaporized, please contact Hypertherm for more inform-
ation.

- 689 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Selecting a class for Hypertherm waterjet setups

For waterjet setups designed for Hypertherm controls, class contains information on the pressure, orifice and nozzle diameter, and abras-
ive flow. When you select a class for a waterjet machine, a built-in waterjet calculator embedded in the Process Parameters spreadsheet
applies the correct cutting parameters (feedrate, kerf, etc.) to the part based on these values and Machinability Index of the material.

Format of waterjet class

For the material shown below, class may appear in a Hypertherm waterjet setup as follows:
 

Material: MS 0.125 in.

Class: P60 O0.012 N0.03 A0.79

 
The format of the class name can be explained as follows:
 

Units Units
Code Column   Description
(IPS) (MMKS)
P Pressure psi bar   Output pressure for cutting.
 
For the CNC to send the water pressure setting to the pump, it requires that the
pump be equipped with electronic proportional pressure control. If the pump
has dual manual pressure control, then the Pressure shows the recommended
setting that must be manually set at the pump. Refer to the pump operator
manual for more information.
 
Note that the pressure set here doesn't necessarily mean that the entire part
will be cut at this pressure. There are low pressure pierces that may be applied.
O Orifice inches mm Diameter of the orifice
Diameter

N Nozzle inches mm Diameter of the nozzle or focus tube

Diameter

A Abrasive lbs/min kg/min Abrasive flow rate

Flow
Rate

Picking a class

The list of available Class choices is based on the material that is already selected.
 
For instance, if you select MS 0.25", the following class choices may appear:
 
P60 O0.010 N0.03 A0.67
P60 O0.011 N0.03 A0.73
P60 O0.012 N0.03 A0.79
P60 O0.014 N0.04 A1.2

- 690 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

P60 O0.016 N0.04 A1.3

In this example, the pressure remains constant while the consumable set and abrasive flow rate vary. Note that orifice size is tied to nozzle
size and flow rate. In general, the larger the orifice size, larger the nozzle size and the faster the abrasive flow rate.

Orifice or nozzle size and abrasive flow rate

These represent the allowable consumables for cutting that material. If there are multiple available nozzle or orifice sizes, consider the fol-
lowing when making a selection:
 
Larger orifice sizes correlate to a greater the flow of water and faster abrasive flow rates. Picking a larger orifice size can result in:
 l Faster cutting speeds
 l Increased performance when cutting thicker material
HyPrecision waterjet pumps have a maximum orifice size based on the horsepower of that model. For instance, a 50 hp model can accom-
modate up to 0.014 in. orifice and not larger. Please consult your machine documentation for more information.

Multiple heads
Waterjet cutting with multiple jets requires a smaller orifice size compared to cutting with a single jet. A smaller orifice allows the water-
jet to maintain the pressure and flow rate needed during multiple head cutting.
 
For instance, a 60 hp pump with a single head could use a 0.016 in. orifice, but with two heads the maximum orifice size would be 0.012
in. Consult your pump documentation to determine allowable orifice sizes for multi-head cutting.

- 691 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

21. PART LIBRARY

About the Part Library
The Part Library stores a list of parts that need to be cut more than once. This list can be used to build assemblies or for repeat orders of a
given part. Once this list is created, it can be accessed within ProNest when adding parts from the Edit Part List window. 

Open the Part Library database editor

 l From the main ProNest window, on the Data tab, click Part Library.
From the Part Library database editor, you can view all of the library parts that are available. You can also create new library parts, and
modify or delete existing parts from the database.

- 692 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding parts to the Part Library

You can add CAD files or token files to the Part Library.

Add a part to the part library

 1. Open the Part Library database editor (Data tab > Part Library ).
 2. On the File menu, select New.
The Import dialog will appear.
 3. Browse to the folder containing the part you want to add.
 4. Using Files of type box, specify a file type (CAD files, Token files, or All files).
 5. Click the file once to select it.

 6. If you are adding a CAD file, click the Properties button ( ) and assign CAD Import properties.

 7. Click the Preview button ( ). A preview of your part will appear in the right screen.
 8. Click OK.
The Part Record View will open.
 9. In the Quantity box, enter the required quantity of your part.
 10. In the Material box, select a material type and thickness for your part.
 11. Click Calculate.
This will automatically calculate the length, weight, true area, true weight, rectangular area and rectangular weight.
 12. Enter any other part properties as necessary.
 13. Click OK.
The part will be added to the Part Library.

Adding parts to the Part Library (from the Edit Part List window)

Each time a CAD file, VSP part, or Pipe part is added to the part list, it is processed as a token file (.tok), which contains the part's geo-
metry as well as any added part properties (such as leads) that have been applied. You can quickly save a token file of this processed part
to the Part Library from the Edit Part List window:
 1. In the Edit Part List window, apply part properties and add the part to the part list.
 2. From the part list, right-click the part and select Add to Part Library.
Your part, including any part properties, will be saved to the Part Library.

- 693 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Assemblies
An assembly is simply a list of library parts. Assemblies can be accessed by selecting Assemblies on the Data tab.

Note: Prior to creating an assembly, you should make sure that all the parts that you want to add to it are listed in the part library.

Create an assembly

 1. Open the Assemblies database editor (Data tab > Assemblies ).
 2. On the File menu, click New.
 3. Enter a name for your assembly.
 4. Click OK.
Once an assembly is created, library parts can be added to it.

Add parts to an assembly

 1. Select the assembly in the Assemblies editor.

 2. On the File menu, click Add Parts.
 3. Select the inventory parts you want to add.
 4. Click Add.
Assemblies can be accessed within ProNest through the Edit Part List window as you are adding to your part list.

Tip: From the part list, you can quickly add one or more parts to an existing assembly or create a new assembly from them:
 1. Select one or more parts in the part list. You can hold CTRL + click to select multiple parts.

 2. Right-click and select Add to Assembly.

 3. In the Assembly name box, either select an existing assembly or type a name for a new assembly. Selecting an existing
assembly will add selected parts to that assembly. Entering a new name will create a new assembly and add selected parts
to it.
 4. Click Select or Create.
The parts in the part list will be added to the Part Library and referenced in the assembly that you specified.

- 694 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

22. PLATE INVENTORY

About the Plate Inventory
The Plate Inventory stores a list of plates that you have in stock in the ProNest database. Once this list is created, it can be accessed
within ProNest so that a user can easily see what is available for nesting. The Plate Inventory also stores remnants and skeletons.

Open the Plate Inventory database editor

 l From the main ProNest window, on the Data tab, click Plate Inventory.
From the Plate Inventory database editor, you can view all of the inventory plates that are available. You can also create new inventory
plates, as well as reserve, modify or delete existing plates in the database.

Tip: Number of records per page

If you have many plates in the Plate Inventory, you can break the grid up into several pages. This can reduce the time it takes to
open the Plate Inventory editor or refresh data (especially with network databases), in addition to making things easier to read.
 1. In the Plate Inventory editor, locate the Plates per page box in the lower right corner of the window.
 2. Set the desired number of plates per page. 
Choices: 25, 50, 100, 200, All (all plates will be shown on a single page)

- 695 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Viewing inventory plate information

There are several places from within ProNest where you can find plate inventory information:
 l The Plate Inventory database editor
 l On the Data tab, select Plate Inventory. Your inventory plates are listed in the grid.
 l Reports
 l The Plate Inventory Detail and Plate Inventory Summary reports provide the most detailed information about inventory
used and created in a job.

The Plate Record View dialog

General tab
Name
The name of your plate
 
Type
Choices: Rectangular, Circular, Remnant, Skeleton

Rectangular
The dimensions of a rectangular plate are measured using length and width.
 
Circular
The dimensions of a circular plate are measured using diameter.
 
Remnant
When Remnant is selected you can either import an existing remnant or define a custom remnant.
 
Skeleton
When Skeleton is selected, an existing skeleton must be imported.
 
 
Properties
Material
The material type and thickness of the plate. This is used to determine which parts can be nested on the plate. Material and thickness
information is also used to calculate area, weight, total weight, value and total value for your plate.
 
Unit Price
Unit price is expressed in monetary units per pound.
 
Rotation
This describes the initial rotation (in degrees) of your plate. Rotating a plate can be useful if you need to align an irregularly shaped plate
(such as a remnant) before nesting.
 
Stock Qty
The quantity of the plate that is in stock
 
Reserved
This describes the quantity of plates that is currently reserved. Reserving plates can be useful if you have multiple users who access the

- 696 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

same Plate Inventory Database.

 
Created
The date that your plate was created
 
Parent ID
For remnant or skeleton plates that were created from inventory plates, this is the ID number of the immediate parent plate. This can be
used to track an inventory plate through it's life as it is nested on, cropped, saved, and nested on again.
 
Root ID
For remnant or skeleton plates that were created from remnant or skeleton inventory plates, this is the ID number of the original, eldest
parent plate. This number can be used to track an inventory plate through its life as it is nested on, cropped, saved, and nested on again.
 
Example:
 

ID = 101
Parent ID = 0
RootID = 0
 

ID = 102
Parent ID = 101
RootID = 101
 

ID = 103
Parent ID = 102
RootID = 101

- 697 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding plates to the plate inventory

You can add a rectangular, circular, remnant, or skeleton plate to the Plate Inventory.

Add a plate to the database

 1. Open the Plate Inventory database editor (On the Data tab, click Plate Inventory ).
 2. On the File menu, select New.
The Plate Record View dialog will appear.
 3. On the General tab, enter a name for your plate.
 4. Select the type of plate to add.
 5. In the Material box, select a material type and thickness for your plate.
 6. Click Calculate.
This will automatically calculate the area, weight, total weight, value and total value for your plate.
 7. Enter any other plate details as necessary.
 8. Click OK.

The Plate Record View dialog

When a plate is added to the Plate Inventory, you must define its dimensions and properties. This can be done using the Plate Record
View dialog.
 
Plate Definition
Name
The name of your plate
 
Type
Choices: Rectangular, Circular, Remnant, Skeleton

Rectangular
The dimensions of a rectangular plate are measured using length and width.
 
Circular
The dimensions of a circular plate are measured using diameter.
 
Remnant
When Remnant is selected you can either import an existing remnant or define a custom remnant.
 
Skeleton
When Skeleton is selected, an existing skeleton must be imported.
 
 
Properties
Material
You can assign a material type and thickness for your plate. This is used to determine which parts can be nested on the plate. Material
and thickness information is also used to calculate area, weight, total weight, value and total value for your plate.
 

- 698 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Unit Price
Unit price is expressed in monetary units per pound.
 
Rotation
This describes the initial rotation (in degrees) of your plate. Rotating a plate can be useful if you need to align an irregularly shaped plate
(such as a remnant) before nesting.
 
Stock Qty
The quantity of the plate that is in stock
 
Reserved
This describes the quantity of plates that should be reserved. Reserving plates can be useful if you have multiple users who access the
same Plate Inventory.
 
Created
The date that your plate was created
 

Note: Remnants and skeletons that are generated during nesting in ProNest can easily be saved to the Plate Inventory. To learn more,
see "Saving remnants and skeletons" on page 707.

- 699 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Creating an inventory plate from a CAD file

An alternate way of defining a custom plate size is to create a CAD file of the plate externally, and then import the CAD file into ProNest's
Plate Inventory.

Add a CAD file to the Plate Inventory

 1. Open the Plate Inventory database editor (On the Data tab, click Plate Inventory ).
 2. On the File menu, select New.
The Plate Record View dialog will appear.
 3. On the Type tab, select Remnant.
 4. Select Create Remnant and then Import Remnant.
 5. Navigate to the folder containing your CAD file.

 6. Click the Preview button ( ). A preview of your plate should appear in the right screen.

Note: If you do not see a preview for your plate, your CAD layers may not be assigned properly. In this case, click

the Properties button ( ) and in the CAD Layers section, assign a process to the CAD layer that con-
tains the plate's geometry.

 7. Click OK. You will return to the Plate Record View dialog.
 8. Enter plate details and properties as you would any other plate.
 9. Click OK.
Your inventory plate will be added to the plate inventory using the dimensions from the CAD file. This plate can now be modified or
added to the plate list and nested on like any other inventory plate.

- 700 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Modifying inventory plates

Inventory plates can be modified or deleted at any time from the Plate Inventory database editor (available on the Data tab).
 
To change plate information:
 1. Select the plate.
 2. Click the Edit toolbar button ( ).
 3. Modify your plate as necessary.
 4. Click OK.
Your changes will be saved.
 
To delete an inventory plate:
 1. Select the plate.
 2. On the File menu, select Delete.
 3. Click Yes.

- 701 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing a CSV file into the plate inventory

You can import a CSV (comma - separated values) file containing a list of plates into the Plate Inventory.

Note: This feature is designed specifically for adding new plates to the database. It will not update or delete existing plates and is
not intended as a means of updating the Plate Inventory on a continuous basis, as with an MRP system.

Import a CSV file into the plate inventory

 1. Open the Plate Inventory editor (on the Data tab, click Plate Inventory ).
 2. On the File menu, select Import.
 3. Using the browser, select the CSV file that you want to import.
 4. Click Open.
Your plates will be added to inventory.

CSV File Format

CSV files are comma delimited and can be created in a spreadsheet program such as Excel. A CSV file must have the .csv extension.

Line 1 : Column Headers

The first line of the CSV is reserved for column header names. The first line of the CSV file must contain the following:
 
Description,Plate Type,Units,Length,Width,MaterialID,Material,Thickness,Stock Qty,Unit Price,Date
Created,Rotation,Heat Num,Stock Num,Misc1,Misc2,Misc3,Location,Reorder limit,Reorder quant-
ity,Supplier,Created by,Plate Path,Grade

Lines 2 - n: Plate Records

A plate is defined in a single row of the CSV table, beginning at row 2. The following table details the required format for each plate
record:
 

Row/
Column Field Description Valid Values Blank Allowed?
Line No.

1 (see (see above) The first line of the CSV is (see above) no
above) reserved for column header
names.

2 A Description The plate name any text string no

2 B Plate type Plate type expressed as a 0, 1, 2, or 3 no

numerical value:
 
0 = Rectangular
1 = Circular
2 = Remnant
3 = Skeleton

- 702 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Row/
Column Field Description Valid Values Blank Allowed?
Line No.

2 C Units The units used to define/in- 0 or 1 yes

terpret the material thickness (defaults to inch if
and dimensions. blank)
 
0 = inch
1 = metric

2 D Length Plate length (only needed for numerical value yes

rectangular or circular (required for rect-
plates). angular or circular
  plates)
For circular plates, this is the
diameter.

2 E Width Plate width (only needed for numerical value yes

rectangular plates). (required for rect-
angular plates)

2 F Material ID     yes

2 G Material Material type of the plate Valid material name yes (will default to
(must exist in Material Data- "None" if no match
base). found)

2 H Thickness Material thickness of the Valid thickness yes

plate (must exist in Material
Database).

2 I Stock Qty The quantity of the plate that numerical value yes
is in stock.

2 J Unit Price Unit price is expressed in numerical value yes

monetary units per pound.

2 K Date Created The date and time the plate MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS yes
record was created, in
DateTime format (short date)

2 L Rotation The initial rotation angle of 0.0 - 360.0 yes

the plate.

2 M Heat number   any text string yes

2 N Stock number   any text string yes

2 O Misc 1   any text string yes

2 P Misc 2   any text string yes

2 Q Misc 3   any text string yes

- 703 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Row/
Column Field Description Valid Values Blank Allowed?
Line No.

2 R Location   any text string yes

2 S Reorder limit   any text string yes

2 T Reorder quantity   any text string yes

2 U Supplier   any text string yes

2 V Created by The job that created the any text string yes
plate.

2 W Plate path For remnant or skeleton valid file path to CAD file yes
  plates, this is the full path of (for example: C:\Program (required for rem-
the CAD file for that plate. Files\MyPlate.dxf) nants or skeletons)

2 X Grade Material grade of the plate any text string (40 char- yes
(must exist in Materials Data- acters maximum)
base).

- 704 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Exporting an inventory plate to DXF file

You can export a single inventory plate to DXF file. The plate edge geometry will be placed on the 0 (default) layer in the CAD file.

Export an inventory plate to DXF

 1. Open the Plate Inventory database editor (Data tab > Plate Inventory ).
 2. In the grid, select the plate that you want to export.
 3. On the File menu, select Edit.
The Plate Record View dialog will appear.
 4. Click the Export to DXF button at the bottom of the dialog.
 5. Browse to the folder where you want to save the file.
 6. Enter a name for the DXF file. By default, this will match the plate name.
 7. Click Save.

 n Creating an inventory plate from a CAD file

 n About the Plate Inventory

- 705 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About remnants and skeletons

Remnants and skeletons refer to the portions of plate that are left over after a nest is cut.
 

Remnants   Skeletons

   
A remnant is the portion of plate that is A skeleton is the portion of plate that
cropped off after crop lines have been cut remains after parts have been cut. Note that
(shown in gray). Note that crop lines must a plate does not need to have skeleton cut-
be applied to your nest in order to create a up or crop lines applied in order to become
remnant. a skeleton.

Note: Remnants can also be created from the cut-outs of parts. To learn more, see "Interior remnants" on page 715.

Remnants and skeletons and the Plate Inventory

When there is enough viable space remaining on a plate after all of your parts are nested, you may want to catalog and save the skeleton
and/or remnant of that nest for use at a later time. After nesting is complete, remnants and skeletons can be saved to the Plate Inventory
and used in future nesting.

- 706 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Saving remnants and skeletons

You can save skeletons and remnants of nests to the Plate Inventory for use at a later time. Remnants and skeletons are saved during nest-
ing, before a nest is output.

Saving remnants

After a plate is cropped, the resulting remnant can be saved to the Plate Inventory.
 
To save a remnant:

 1. On the Nest tab, in the Remnants group, click Save to Inventory.
A list of all available remnants for each nest in your job will be listed.
 2. Select the nest with the remnant you want to save. By default, remnants are named according to the naming convention specified
on the Naming page in Preferences.
 3. Click Save Remnants.
When the job is output, your remnant will be saved to the Plate Inventory.
 

Example:
 
Consider the following nest:

Figure 1
 
The nest in Figure 1 has been cropped. The remnant created by the crop line appears gray.
 
Let's say the nest in Figure 1 is ready to be output and you want to save the remnant for later use. You would take the following
steps:
 
Step 1: Save the remnant
 1. On the Nest tab, in the Remnants group, click Save to Inventory.
 2. Select the nest from the list. If you want, you can rename the remnant.

- 707 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 3. Click Save Remnants.

 4. Click OK.

Step 2: Generate output

 1. On the Home tab, select Output NC.
 2. Select your nests and click Output.

When you output your nest, the remnant will be saved in the Plate Inventory and will be available for future nesting.

Saving skeletons

Once you have nested your parts, you can save the skeleton of that nest in your Plate Inventory for use at a later time.
 
To save a skeleton:

 1. On the Nest tab, in the Remnants group, click Save to Inventory.
A list of all available skeletons for each nest in your job will be listed.
 2. Select the nest with the skeletons you want to save. By default, skeletons are named according to the naming convention spe-
cified on the Naming page in Preferences.
 3. Click Save Skeletons.
When the job is output, your skeleton will be saved to the Plate Inventory.
 

Example:
 
Consider the following nest:

Figure 2
 
Let's say that you are ready to output the nest in Figure 2 and you want to save the skeleton of this nest for use at a later time. You
would take the following steps:
 
Step 1: Save the skeleton
 1. On the Nest tab, in the Remnants group, click Save to Inventory.

- 708 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 2. Make sure that the appropriate checkboxes are selected. If you want, you can rename the skeleton.
 3. Click Save Skeletons.
 4. Click OK.

Step 2: Generate output

 1. On the Home tab, click Output NC.
 2. Select your nests and click Output.

When you output your nest, the skeleton will be saved in the Plate Inventory and will be available for future nesting.

Note: In your Preferences, on the Miscellaneous tab, an Inventory folder is specified. When you create a skeleton or remnant, a token
file of your skeleton or remnant will be stored in the specified Inventory folder. This token file will be brought into the Plate
Inventory during output.

- 709 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Nesting on inventory remnants and skeletons

You can nest on existing remnant or skeleton plates that have been saved in the Plate Inventory.

Nesting on inventory remnants

There are two basic steps to take before you can begin nesting on an inventory remnant plate: 
 
Step 1: Add the remnant to the plate list

 1. Open the Edit Plate List window (on the Home tab, click Edit Plate List ).

 2. Click the Inventory tab.

 3. Select the remnant from the list of inventory plates.
 4. Click Add Plate.
 5. Click Return to Nesting to return to the main ProNest window.

Step 2: Create a new nest using the remnant as your plate

 1. Create a new nest by clicking New Nest in the Home tab.
 2. Select Use a plate from the Plate List.
 3. Select your remnant plate.
 4. Click OK.

The remnant will appear in the main nesting area, ready to be nested on.

Note: You can also create a new nest that uses your remnant plate by clicking the yellow AutoNest button.

Example: Nesting on an Inventory Remnant

 
Consider the following nest:

- 710 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Let's say that you have saved the remnant for this nest to the Plate Inventory and now want to create a new nest using the remnant.
Because the remnant is an irregular shape in this case, it will be useful to rotate it before nesting. You would proceed as follows:
 
Step 1 : Rotate the remnant

 1. On the Data tab, click Plate Inventory.

 2. Select the remnant from the list and click the Properties button.
 3. Change the rotation to 180.
 4. Click OK. The initial rotation of the remnant will now be 180°.
 5. Close the Plate Inventory Database.

 Step 2: Add the remnant to the plate list

 1. Open the Edit Plate List window.

 2. Click the Inventory tab.

 3. Select the remnant from the list of inventory plates.
 4. Click Add Plate.
 5. Click Return to Nesting to return to the main ProNest window.

Step 3: Create a new nest using the remnant as your plate

 1. Create a new nest by clicking New Nest in the Home tab.
 2. Select Use a plate from the Plate List.
 3. Select the remnant.
 4. Click OK.

Your new nest would appear as follows:

 

 
The remnant plate can be nested on as you would any other plate.
 

- 711 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Nesting on inventory skeletons

There are two basic steps to take before you can begin nesting on an inventory skeleton plate:
 
Step 1: Add the skeleton to the plate list

 1. Open the Edit Plate List window (on the Home tab, click Edit Plate List ).

 2. Click the Inventory tab.

 3. Select the skeleton from the list of inventory plates.
 4. Click Add Plate.
 5. Click Return to Nesting to return to the main ProNest window.

Step 2: Create a new nest using the skeleton as your plate

 1. Create a new nest by clicking New Nest in the Home tab.
 2. Select Use a plate from the Plate List.
 3. Select your skeleton plate.
 4. Click OK.

The skeleton will appear in the main nesting area, ready to be nested on.

Note: You can also create a new nest that uses your skeleton plate by clicking the yellow AutoNest button.

Click here to view example

Example: Nesting on an Inventory Skeleton

 
Consider the following nest:

- 712 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Let's say that you have saved the skeleton for this nest to the Plate Inventory Database (as described here) and now want to nest on
the skeleton. You would proceed as follows:
 
 Step 1: Add the skeleton to the plate list

 1. Open the Edit Plate List window (on the Home tab, click Edit Plate List ).

 2. Click the Inventory tab.

 3. Select the skeleton from the list of inventory plates.
 4. Click Add Plate.
 5. Click Return to Nesting to return to the main ProNest window.

Step 2: Create a new nest using the skeleton as your plate

 1. Create a new nest by clicking New Nest in the Home tab.
 2. Select Use a plate from the Plate List.
 3. Select the skeleton.
 4. Click OK.

Your new nest would appear as follows:

 

- 713 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The skeleton plate can be nested on as normal.

 

- 714 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Interior remnants
Interior remnants are remnants that are created from the cut-outs (or drops) of nested parts. These remnants are then saved to the Plate
Inventory, where they are saved for later use.
 

The cut-out inside the circular part on this nest can be saved as an interior remnant

Select interior remnants on a nest

Interior remnants can be manually selected:

 1. On the Nest tab, click Interior Remnants.

You will enter Interior Remnants mode.
 2. Click the cut-outs that you want to save as remnants.
Selected interiors will turn gray (or whatever your background color is). To remove the selection from an interior, simply click the
cut-out again.
 3. When you are finished selecting remnants, click Close.

Automatically select interior remnants

You can also automatically select interior remnants on a nest:

 1. On the Interior Remnants settings page (Settings > Interior Remnants), make sure that Automatically create interior remnants is
selected and that you have entered a minimum area and side length.

 2. On the Nest tab, click Interior Remnants.

When you enter Interior Remnants mode, all interiors larger than the minimum size specified in settings will be automatically selected as
interior remnants.

Save interior remnants

 1. On the Nest tab, in the Remnants group, click Save to Inventory.
A list of all available remnants for each nest in your job will be listed.
 2. Using the check box, select the nests containing the interior remnants you want to save.
 3. Click Save Remnants.

- 715 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The quantity of remnants saved for a given nest is the number of interior remnants plus any remnants that were created by a crop
line.
When the job is output, your remnant will be saved to the Plate Inventory.

- 716 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

23. PIPE
What is a pipe part?
The Pipe parametric library is designed for ProNest users who want to automatically generate flat-pattern developments for fabricated,
welded, cylindrical pipe joints and transitions used in blowpipe applications. Each fitting is designed with flexibility in mind and includes
powerful features like offsets, tilts, extensions and laps. Cylindrical, conical, rectangular boot, elliptical, and rectangle-to-round (take-off)
tees can be added to Pipes and Cones.
 
To view the Pipe library of parts:

 l From the Edit Part List window, in the Part Sources explorer, click the Pipe tab.

- 717 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Pipe Shape Reference

The Pipe Shape Reference is used to enter required part information for the pipe part you want to add. Using this dialog, you can input
part dimensions, add cut-outs to parts, and assign cut processes to part profiles.
 
To open the Pipe Shape Reference for a part:
 l From the Edit Part List window, with a pipe part selected, click the Add Part button.
The Pipe Shape Reference is organized as follows:
Dimensions grid
The upper-left section contains a grid where you can input dimensions for the selected pipe part or added tee.
 
Reference diagram
The upper-right section contains a diagram of the selected pipe part or added tee.
 
Pipe preview
The lower right section contains the pipe preview, which is divided into two perspectives: Layout View and 3D View.
 
The rest of the Pipe Shape Reference contains areas for adjusting settings, adding tees, assigning cut processes, and opening and saving
pipe part developments. You can also enter part name, quantity, and make (With this setting, you can specify whether to include the
base part only (Base Part), added tees only (Tees), or include both the base part and tees (Both) in the part that is added to the part list.)
using this dialog.

Entering part dimensions 

When you click a field in the Dimensions grid, that field will become active and editable. A hint describing the active field will appear at
the bottom of the Dimensions grid. The reference diagram to the right will display the pipe part profile in black. The currently active field
will be indicated by a blue line.

To enter dimensions for a pipe part:

 1. In the Pipe Shape Reference, from the Dimensions grid, click the field you want to change.
 2. Input a value for that field.
 3. Press ENTER.

Note: If you enter a numerical value in the dimensions grid that is geometrically impossible, an "Invalid Dimensions" message will
appear in the pipe preview.

To learn more about using Pipe, explore the following:

 l "Using the pipe preview" on page 719
 l "Adding a tee" on page 720
 l "Pipe settings" on page 723
 l "Saving and opening pipe parts" on page 721
 l "Assigning cut processes to pipe parts" on page 722

Tip: You can easily access the online help for a specific pipe part or tee, including a description of that part or tee's dimensions, by
pressing the F1 key while the part or tee is selected in the Pipe Shape Reference.

- 718 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using the pipe preview

The pipe preview gives you two different views of your part: Layout View and 3D View. These views will be updated to reflect any changes
you make to a pipe development in the Pipe Shape Reference.

Layout View
The Layout View displays a 2D flat pattern layout for your pipe part and any added tees.
 
Layout View functions:
 l The arrows ( ) in the upper right corner of the Layout View can be used to select either your pipe part or any added tees.  
 l Right-click the part and select Measure to open measurement mode. Click and drag to make a measurement of your part. The
selected distance will be displayed at the bottom of the Layout View.
 l Right click the part and select Zoom to open area zoom. You can zoom in on an area of your part by dragging a box around the
area you want to view.

3D View
This gives you a 3D rendering of your pipe part and any added tees. There are also three smaller views of your part on the right side of the
3D View, which show the Top, Front, and Side. You can click anywhere inside these views to reorient the 3D View of your part.
 
3D View functions:

 l To rotate your part, use the arrows in the 3D View ( ) or click anywhere on a part and drag it.
 l Right-click the part and select View Wireframe to open a wireframe rendering of the part.
 l Rotate the wheel button on your mouse to zoom in or out on your part.
 l Right click the part and select Zoom to zoom in or out by a percentage.

Tip: When a pipe part has one or more tees, the currently selected component will appear yellow in the 3D View.

- 719 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding a tee
Tee branches can be added to the following pipe developments: Tee into Partial Pipe, Straight Pipe, or Offset Cone.

To add a tee branch profile to your part:

 1. In the Pipe Shape Reference, click the Add Tee button.
The Add Tee dialog will appear.
 2. Select a shape for your tee.
 3. Click OK.
Once added, the size, shape, and placement of a tee can be modified using the Dimensions grid. You can view a complete picture of your
part and tee in the Pipe preview.
 
You can use the arrows ( ) above the reference diagram to select either the pipe part profile or any added tees. Note that a part or
tee must be selected in order to be modified.
 
To delete a tee:
 1. Select a cut-out using the arrows above the reference diagram.
 2. Click the Delete Cut Out button.

- 720 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Saving and opening pipe parts

Saving a pipe part

You can save pipe parts and open them at a later time. When you save a pipe part, ProNest stores the exact state of your pipe part, includ-
ing dimensions and added tees, as well as nesting and leads properties that were applied when the part was imported. ProNest pipe part
files have a .pjb extension.
 
To save a pipe part:
 1. In the Pipe Shape Reference for your part, click the Save button.
The Save Dimension File dialog will appear.
 2. Browse to the appropriate folder for your file.
 3. In the File name box, type the name for your pipe part file.
 4. Click Save.
Your pipe part will be saved with the name you specified.

Opening a pipe part

You can open a previously saved pipe part using the Pipe Shape Reference.
 
To open an existing pipe part:
 1. Open the Pipe Shape Reference for any pipe part.
 2. Click the Open button.
 3. Browse to the folder containing the pipe part you want to open.
 4. Select the pipe part file.
 5. Click Open.
Your pipe part will be loaded into the Pipe Shape Reference.

- 721 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Assigning cut processes to pipe parts

You can select the type of cut processes to use for the interior and exterior profiles of the part. This can be useful for multi-process
machines such as those using plasma and hi-definition plasma. The list of available cut processes comes from the cut processes sup-
ported by your current ProNest machine.
 
To assign cut processes for a pipe part:
 1. Open the Pipe Shape Reference for your part.
 2. Click the Cut Process button.
 3. Select a cut process from the list of available processes for both interior and exterior profiles.
 4. Click OK.

- 722 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Pipe settings
Using pipe settings, you can control the lay-out and default values used for pipe parts. Pipe settings apply to all pipe parts and tees in
ProNest.

Dimension Options
Measure dimensions from
The dimension option determines whether diameters and rectangular dimensions are calculated from the center line, inside, or outside
diameter of the material.
 
Choices: Center, Inside, Outside
 

Outside Up development
You can specify if the sheet of material is laying with the outside up or outside down (inside up). If this box is selected, pipe parts will be
processed as though the sheet is laying with the outside up.
 
Adjust transition height for material thickness
When selected, ProNest will take material thickness into account when calculating height for part entities that are not parallel to the cen-
ter line. Generally, this will result in a more accurate measurement.

Tee Options
Measure dimensions from
This dimension option determines whether diameters and rectangular dimensions are calculated from the center line, inside, or outside
diameter of the material.
 
Choices: Center, Inside, Outside
 

Tee joint location

Determines the way the tee fits up with the hole.
 
Choices: Center, Inside, Outside
 

Material thickness
The thickness of the material.
 
2 stitch Tee size
This value represents the minimum diameter hole that would have 2 stitches. Anything less would not have stitches.
 
4 stitch Tee size
This value represents the minimum diameter hole that would have 4 stitches. Anything smaller would have either 2 stitches or none.
 
Stitch lead-in length
The desired length of the stitch lead-in.

Bend/Quarter Marks
Type
This defines the type of mark.

- 723 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Choices: Quarter, Bend, (None), Half Mark

Quarter
Quarter marks involve a small deviation in the motion of the torch. These are used when aligning pipe transitions that must be welded
together.
 
Bend
This allows material to be marked for bending.
 
(None)
When None is selected, no marks will be applied.
 
Half Mark
Half marks are applied just like quarter marks, except that there are fewer marks made. This can be useful for smaller parts.
 
Style
The style of mark is specified here.
 
Choices: Circle, Notch, Slot, Dwell, Punch, Scribe

Circle The size of the circle is dependent on the Mark Size entered. Note that this style
involves cutting a previously cut kerf.

Notch The size of the notch is dependent on the Mark Size entered.

Slot The length of the slot is dependent on the Mark Size entered. Note that this style
involves cutting a previously cut kerf.

Dwell The torch/head will not deviate from the profile. A dwell command will be inserted
at the specified mark point along the profile, causing the torch to stall briefly at the
bend/mark point.
 
Note: The dwell mark is not visible in the Layout or 3D views.

Punch If your machine supports a punch process, the punch will be placed at the mark
point.

Scribe If your machine supports a scribe process, the bend mark can be scribed. The
length of the scribe is dependent on the Mark Size entered.

- 724 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Mark size
Marks are used when aligning pipe transitions that must be welded together. You can input the size of the mark here or leave at 0 for no
marks. The mark can either be done with the torch or scribed with a marking tool.
 
Bend frequency
This is a measurement for how often the bends used to form parts will be marked. A value of 1 indicates a mark at every bend line; a value
of 2 would be at every other bend line, etc. This only applies when Type is set to "Bend".
 

Default Values
Top Lap
The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.
 
Bottom Lap
The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.
 
Left Lap
The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 
Right Lap
The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 
Max segment size
The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.
 
Kerf width
The width of the torch. This is used to determine the proper part separation so the common line in pre-nested parts does not infringe on
either part.
 
Stitch width
The width of the stitch cut when cutting the offset as a single piece. (Pre-Nested)
 
Material thickness
Default thickness of the material.
 
Plate X
Length of the plate.
 
Plate Y
Width of the plate.
 

Line to Arc Options

Convert lines to arcs
When selected, Pipe will attempt to convert developed, segmented curves into arcs. In general, this will result in smaller files and a
smoother cut.
 

- 725 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Maximum radius
Some CNC controllers have limitations as to the size of an arc motion that they can handle. With Convert lines to arcs selected, Pipe will
automatically turn as many line segments as it can into a single arc when viable. You may specify a maximum arc radius if your controller
is limited to a certain size. If this value is set to 0, all curvatures will be developed as small straight lines.

Note: This setting is only applicable if Convert lines to arcs is selected.

Arc tolerance
The maximum allowable distance that arcs can be from the developed curve when replacing line segments. Replacing the lines of a
developed curve will smooth the curve and create smaller CNC files but if the arc tolerance is too large, accuracy will be diminished.

Note: This setting is only applicable if Convert lines to arcs is selected.

- 726 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Angled Pipe

Dimension Description

Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.
 

Pipe Diameter The diameter of the pipe section.

 

Pipe Length The short side length of the pipe section.

 

Left Angle The angle of the cut on the left of the pipe. The angle runs counter-clockwise from the bot-
tom of the pipe.
 

Right Angle The angle of the cut on the right of the pipe. The angle runs counter-clockwise from the bot-
tom of the pipe.
 

Left Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 

Right Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 

Top Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.
 

Bottom Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.
 

Weld Gap Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.
 

Number of Pieces The number of pieces that will make up the pipe.
 

Angle of Weld Seam The rotation angle of the weld seam (in degrees).
 

- 727 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Ellipse in Rectangle

Dimension Description

Points per Quarter The points per quarter defines how many lines will make up a quarter of the ellipse. The
higher the number of points, the smoother the opening.
 

Rectangle Length Rectangle length in the X (horizontal) direction.

 

Rectangle Width Rectangle width in the Y (vertical) direction.

 

Major Diameter The larger diameter of the ellipse. This value can be calculated if the minor diameter and
angle are provided.
 

Minor Diameter The smaller diameter of the ellipse. This value must be provided.
 

X Offset Offset in inches of the center of the ellipse from the center of the rectangle. A positive value
shifts the ellipse to the left.
 

Y Offset Offset in inches of the center of the ellipse from the center of the rectangle. A positive value
shifts the ellipse upward.
 

Angle The angle that the ellipse will be tilted. The angle will be used to calculate the major diameter
if none is provided. Since this part refers to the diameters, this will be the longer of the 2 cross
sectional dimensions.
 

- 728 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Flange

Dimension Description

Outside Diameter The outside diameter of the flange.

 

Inside Diameter The inside diameter of the flange.

 

Width The width of the flange, calculated by subtracting the inside radius from the outside radius. If
the width is used the OD will not be needed.
 

Bolt Circle Diameter The diameter of a circle running through the center of the bolt holes.
 

Bolt Hole Diameter The diameter of each of the bolt holes.

 

Angle Adjustment An adjustment in the angle at which the bolt holes will be located on the flange. This is an
important option for fabrication of split flanges. For instance; if the flange has 6 holes and is
to be cut into 4 parts; just use Ang. Adj. = 12 degrees and the cuts will not interfere with the
holes.
 

Number of Holes Number of bolt holes or marks required.

 

Hole Type Cut or Punch - If an impact (punch) marker, zinc marker or laser etch function is available,
this will enable the machine to locate the holes without actually cutting. An excellent idea for
small diameter holes that need a special finish on them. Use the CUT option to cut the hole.
 

Pieces per Flange Number of pieces to make up a single flange. Use with "Angle Adjustment" to avoid cut sec-
tions from crossing bolt holes.
 

- 729 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

ID OD Ellipse

Dimension Description

Points per Quarter The points per quarter defines how many lines will make up a quarter of the ellipse. The
higher the number of points, the smoother the arc.
 

Outside Major Diameter The major (larger) diameter of the outside ellipse. This value can be calculated when using
the minor diameter and angle. (Optional)
 

Outside Minor Diameter The minor (smaller) diameter of the outside ellipse. This value must be provided.
 

Inside Major Diameter The larger diameter of the inside ellipse. This value cannot be greater than the outside values.
 

Inside Minor Diameter The smaller diameter of the inside ellipse. This value cannot be greater than the outside val-
ues.
 

Angle The angle at which the ellipse will be tilted. The angle will be used to calculate the major dia-
meters of the ellipse if none is provided.
 

- 730 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Offset Cone

Dimension Description

Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature. Parts with higher numbers gen-
erally have developed curves that are less "smooth" than those with smaller numbers. For instance, the curve
using 1 inch as maximum segment size will be smoother than the same curve using 4 inches as the max-
imum segment size. The curve with 1 inch segments will have 4 times the number of points as the one using
4 inch segments. More segments yield a smoother curve, but also produce a larger file.
 

Cone Top Diameter The diameter of the cone top.

 

Cone Base Diameter The diameter of the cone base (bottom)

 

Cone Height The vertical height of the cone

 

Cone X Offset The X direction offset of the top center from the base center. Looking at the plan view; positive X is to the
left, negative X is to the right.
 

Cone Y Offset The Y direction offset of the top center from the base center. Looking at the plan view; positive Y is up and
negative Y is down.
 

Base Tilt Angle The tilt angle for the base of the cone. (Optional - this field is not required to create the offset cone)
 

Base Rotation Angle If the base of the cone is tilted, specify the rotation the tilt should be at in relation to the seam of the cone.
 

Top Tilt Angle The tilt angle for the top of the cone. (Optional)
 

Top Rotation Angle If the top of the cone is tilted, specify what rotation the tilt should be at in relation to the seam of the cone.
 

Left Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 

Right Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 

Top Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.
 

- 731 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension Description

Bottom Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.
 

Weld Gap Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.
 

Top Collar This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the top. It has the same diameter as the top of the
cone.
 

Bottom Collar This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the bottom. It has the same diameter as the bottom of
the cone.
 

Number of Pieces Number of pieces to make the offset cone.

 

Inside Base / Outside If "No" is selected, the part will be measured as designated in the settings, if ‘Measure inside base, outside
Top top dims’ is selected, the part will be measured from inside the base of the part, and outside the top of the
cone.
 

Angle of Weld Seam This describes the rotation of the Weld Seam (in degrees)
 

- 732 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Offset Pipe

Dimension Description

Elbow Diameter The diameter of the elbow. This value must be no more than half the length of the offset.
 

Elbow Radius The radius of the elbow which will be used for the construction of the offset.
 

Length of Offset The overall length between the two pipe ends, excluding the extensions. This value must be
AT LEAST two times the radius of the elbow.
 

Horizontal Offset The horizontal distance between the centers of the two parallel pipes being offset.
 

Vertical Offset The vertical distance between the centers of the two parallel pipes being offset.
 

Extension A The length of the added material to one end gore of the offset.
 

Extension B The length of the added material to the other end gore of the offset.
 

Number of Segments The default is 5 segments. You may change this number to suit your development. This can
be any odd number from 3 to 31.
 

Pieces per Segment The number of pieces used to develop each segment.
 

Kerf Width This value is required only when the elbow is cut as Prenested. Since there is a common cut
between gores, an accurate kerf value is necessary to ensure the correct gore dimensions.
Remember, this is the full kerf diameter.
 

Stitch Width The width of the stitch cut when cutting the off-set as a single piece. (Pre-Nested)
 

Separate Parts Pre-Nest – The parts are nested together, connected by 233 stitches (tabs). Separate Parts –
Each segment is treated as an individual part.
 

Stitch Cut Stitch cut can only be answered "YES" if ‘separate parts’ is set to ‘Pre-Nested’.
 

- 733 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension Description

Seam Type SIDE will put all the weld seams on the side of the offset pipe, alternating from left to right. By
forming every other gore inside out, all seams will end up on the right or left. Heel/Throat loc-
ates the seam on the short side of the offset pipe.
 

Left Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 

Right Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 

Top Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.
 

Bottom Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.
 

Weld Gap Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.
 

Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.

- 734 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Rectangle to Round

Dimension Description

Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.
 

Rectangle Length The length of the rectangular base.

 

Rectangle Width The width of the rectangular base.

 

Transition Height The vertical height of the transition. This height is derived from a plane that passes hori-
zontally through the center of the circular end (no matter what the tilt), to a parallel plane
that passes horizontally through the center of the rectangular end (no matter what tilt).
 

Exit Diameter The diameter of the exit. This shape will always be maintained as a circle no matter what the
tilt.
 

Exit Center X Offset The offset of the center of the exit in relation to the center of the rectangle. A positive value
moves the center to the left, a negative, to the right.
 

Exit Center Y Offset The offset of the circular center from the center of the rectangle in the positive (up) or neg-
ative (down) Y direction.
 

Exit Tilt Angle The tilt of the exit from the horizontal plane. When looking at the transition in elevation, with
the diameter on top, if the diameter is horizontal then this is zero (0). The right side MUST
rotate down (clockwise). This will establish the tilt "Angle". To adjust the position of the angle
use the next input field.
 

Exit Rotation Angle The rotation of the low point of the exit tilt, as viewed from the plan view. A zero value loc-
ates the low point at the 3 o'clock position. A positive angle rotates this low point in a
counter-clockwise direction. (i.e.: 60° rotates the low point to about the 1 o'clock position
and 120° rotates the low point to the 11 o'clock etc...)
 

Rectangle Tilt Angle The tilt of the rectangular portion of the transition from the horizontal plane. Looking at the
elevation, a tilt of 30° will drop the right side 30° from the center of the rectangle, while the
left will rise by the same degree. A negative number will reverse this tilt. In order to tilt the bot-
tom front and back, the entire part will have to be described from the side, thus, reorienting

- 735 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension Description

all other dimensions.

 

Joint Type Side Heel/Corner Specify where you would like the welds/seams: on the corners (in the
middle of the bend) or on the flat sides. If you choose 8 pieces, there will be a bend at the
corners and the sides.
 

Skirt Length 1 A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 1. This extension
can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange.
The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically.
 

Skirt Length 2 A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 2. This extension
can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange.
The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically.
 

Skirt Length 3 A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 3. This extension
can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange.
The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically.
 

Left Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 

Right Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 

Top Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.
 

Weld Gap Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.
 

Top Collar This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the top. It has the same diameter as the
top of the cone.
 

Number of Pieces The rectangle to round can be made from 1, 2, 3, 4, or 8 pieces.

 

Inside Base / Outside Top Dimensions If "No" is selected, the part will be measured as designated in the settings, if "Measure inside
base, outside top dimensions" is selected, the part will be measured from inside the base of
the part, and outside the top of the cone.
 

- 736 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Reducing Elbow

Dimension Description

Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.
 

Entrance Diameter The entrance or larger diameter of the reducing elbow.

 

Exit Diameter The exit or smaller diameter of the elbow.

 

Elbow Entrance Radius This measurement is the horizontal distance from the center of the elbow entrance radius to
the elbow exit.
 

Elbow Exit Radius This measurement is the vertical distance from the center of the elbow exit radius to the
elbow entrance.
 

Elbow Angle From 1 to 359 degrees. Be careful when going beyond 180 degrees.
 

Number of Segments The number of sections (gores) used to make the elbow. This number cannot exceed 12.
 

Kerf Width The width of the torch. This is used to determine the proper part separation so the common
line does not infringe on prenested parts.
 

Stitch Width The desired width of the stitch.

 

Separate Parts Pre-Nest – The parts are nested together, connected by stitches (tabs). Separate Parts – Each
segment is treated as an individual part.
 

Stitch Cut Stitch cut can only be answered "YES" if ‘separate parts’ is set to ‘Pre-Nested’. The stitches
(tabs) hold the segments together.
 

Seam Type SIDE will put all the weld seams on the side of the elbow, alternating from left to right. By
forming every other gore inside out, all seams will end up on the right or left. Heel/Throat loc-
ates the seam on the short side of the elbow.
 

Pieces per Gore The number of individual pieces used to make a single section (gore). (1,2,4,8)

- 737 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension Description

Left Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 

Right Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 

Top Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.
 

Bottom Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.
 

Weld Gap Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.
 

Top Collar This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the top. It has the same diameter as the
top of the cone.
 

Bottom Collar This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the bottom. It has the same diameter as
the bottom of the cone.
 

- 738 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Segmented Elbow

Dimension Description

Elbow Diameter The diameter of the elbow.

 

Elbow Radius The elbow center-line radius. In all cases this radius MUST be greater than one-half of the dia-
meter.
 

Extension A The length of the extensions to be added to the end gores. This can save an extra weld seam
at the end of the elbow. The A extension is the lower.
 

Extension B The length of the extensions to be added to the end gores. This can save an extra weld seam
at the end of the elbow. The B extension is the higher.
 

Elbow Angle The angle of the elbow. When getting down to very small angles (10° or less) be very careful
to look at the flat layout to check for interference with quarter marks and if the part can really
be cut. The limit is 180 degrees. If you need more than 180, try the reducing elbow with the
same size entrance and exit.
 

Number of Gores The number of sections (gores) used to make the elbow.
 

Pieces per Gores The number of individual pieces used to make a single section (gore).
 

Kerf Width This value is used only when the elbow is cut as a single piece. Since there is a common cut
between gores, an accurate kerf value is necessary to ensure the correct gore dimensions.
 

Stitch Width The stitch width is the width of the tab holding the gores together when pre-nested.
 

Separate Parts Pre-Nest – The parts are nested together, connected by stitches (tabs). Separate Parts – Each
segment is treated as an individual part.
 

Stitch Cut Stitch cut can only be answered "YES" if ‘separate parts’ is set to ‘Pre-Nested’.
 

Seam Type SIDE will put all the weld seams on the side of the elbow, alternating from left to right. By
forming every other gore inside out, all seams will end up on the right or left. HEEL/THROAT

- 739 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension Description

will develop the seams alternating from the heel to the throat. To get all the seams on the heel
(or throat) takes a little more creativity. Call us and we'll be happy to explain.
 

Left Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 

Right Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 

Top Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.
 

Bottom Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.
 

Weld Gap Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.
 

Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.
 

- 740 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Straight Pipe

Dimension Description

Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.
 

Pipe Diameter The diameter of the pipe segment.

 

Pipe Length The length of the pipe segment, measured from end to end.
 

Left Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 

Right Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 

Top Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.
 

Weld Gap Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.
 

Number of Pieces The number of pieces used to make the straight pipe. (1 - 36)
 

Angle of Weld Seam The rotation angle of the weld seam (in degrees).
 

- 741 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Tee into Partial Pipe

Dimension Description

Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.
 

Pipe Diameter The diameter of the main pipe section.

 

Material at Top The amount of material on the pipe section extending above the tee opening. This is measured on the flat
layout.
 

Material at Bottom The amount of material on the pipe section extending below the tee opening. This is measured on the flat
layout.
 

Material at Sides The amount of material on the pipe section extending beyond the tee opening. This is measured on the flat
layout.
 

Left Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 

Right Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 

Top Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.
 

Bottom Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.
 

Number of Pieces The number of pieces that will make up the pipe can be 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16.
 

- 742 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Trapezoid to Round

Dimension Description

Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.
 

Trapezoid Width The width of the trapezoidal base.

 

Length of Base 1 The length of one of the parallel sides of the trapezoidal base.
   

Length of Base 2 The length of the other parallel side of the trapezoidal base.
 

Left Trapezoid Angle This describes the angle on the left side of the trapezoid
 

Right Trapezoid Angle This describes the angle on the right side of the trapezoid.
 

Transition Height The vertical height of the transition. This height is derived from a plane that passes hori-
zontally through the center of the circular end (no matter what the tilt), to a parallel plane
that passes horizontally through the center of the rectangular end (no matter what tilt).
 

Exit Diameter Angle The diameter of the exit. This shape will always be maintained as a circle no matter what the
tilt.
 

Exit Center X Offset The offset of the center of the exit in relation to the center of the rectangle. A positive value
moves the center to the left, a negative, to the right.
 

Exit Center Y Offset The offset of the circular center from the center of the rectangle in the positive (up) or neg-
ative (down) Y direction.
 

Exit Tilt Angle The tilt of the exit from the horizontal plane. When looking at the transition in elevation, with
the diameter on top, if the diameter is horizontal then this is zero (0). The right side MUST
rotate down (clockwise). This will establish the tilt "Angle". To adjust the position of the angle
use the next input field.
 

Exit Rotation Angle The rotation of the low point of the exit tilt, as viewed from the plan view. A zero value loc-
ates the low point at the 3 o'clock position. A positive angle rotates this low point in a

- 743 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension Description

counter-clockwise direction. (i.e.: 60° rotates the low point to about the 1 o'clock position
and 120° rotates the low point to the 11 o'clock etc...)
 

Rectangle Tilt Angle The tilt of the rectangular portion of the transition from the horizontal plane. Looking at the
elevation, a tilt of 30° will drop the right side 30° from the center of the rectangle, while the
left will rise by the same degree. A negative number will reverse this tilt. In order to tilt the bot-
tom front and back, the entire part will have to be described from the side, thus, reorienting
all other dimensions.
 

Joint Type Side Heel/Corner Specify where you would like the welds/seams: on the corners (in the
middle of the bend) or on the flat sides. If you choose 8 pieces, there will be a bend at the
corners and the sides.
 

Skirt Length 1 A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 1. This extension
can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange.
The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically.
 

Skirt Length 2 A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 2. This extension
can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange.
The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically.
 

Skirt Length 3 A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 3. This extension
can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange.
The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically.
 

Left Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 

Right Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 

Top Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.
 

Weld Gap Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.
 

Top Collar This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the top. It has the same diameter as the
top of the cone.
 

Number of Pieces The rectangle to round can be made from 1, 2, 3, 4, or 8 pieces.

 

Inside Base / Outside Top Dimensions If "no" is selected, the part will be measured as designated in the settings, if "Measure inside
base, outside top dimensions" is selected, the part will be measured from inside the base of

- 744 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension Description

the part, and outside the top of the cone.

 

- 745 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Y Joint

Dimension Description

Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.
 

Base Diameter The diameter at the base or waist of the Y-Joint.

 

Diameter 1 The diameter to be established at the end (cuff) of the leg. Like the base diameter, this is a true circle and will
retain its circular shape no matter what orientation it's in.
 

Vertical Dimension 1 The distance from the base line to the center of the leg opening.
 

Horizontal Dimension 1 The horizontal distance from the base diameter center line to the center of the leg opening.
 

Angle from Base 1 The angle in degrees, from the base line to the centerline of the leg.
 

Length of Leg 1 The linear distance measured from the center of the base opening to the center of the leg opening.
 

Angle of Left Pipe The angle of the left leg opening (cuff) with respect to the plane of the base (horizontal). Zero (0) makes the
opening parallel to the base. Minus one (-1) makes the angle perpendicular to the center-line of the leg.
 

Diameter 2 The diameter to be established at the end (cuff) of the leg. Like the base diameter, this is a true circle and will
retain its circular shape no matter what orientation it's in.
 

Vertical Dimension 2 The vertical distance from the base diameter center line to the center of the leg opening.
 

Horizontal Dimension 2 The horizontal distance from the base diameter center line to the center of the leg opening.
 

Angle from Base 2 The angle in degrees, from the base line to the centerline of the leg.
 

Length of Leg 2 The linear distance measured from the center of the base opening to the center of the leg opening.
 

Angle of Right Pipe The angle of the right leg opening (cuff) with respect to the plane of the base (horizontal). Zero (0) makes
the opening parallel to the base. Minus one (-1) makes the angle perpendicular to the center-line of the leg.

- 746 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension Description

Left Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 

Right Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 

Top Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.
 

Bottom Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.
 

Weld Gap Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.
 

Leg 1 Collar This describes the rotation of the Weld Seam (in degrees)
 

Leg 2 Collar This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of Leg 2. Its diameter is the same as Diameter 2 of the Y
Joint.
 

Bottom Collar This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the bottom. It has the same diameter as the bottom of
the cone.
 

Number of Pieces The number of pieces required to make the Y-Joint. (Maximum 36)
 

- 747 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Conical Tee

Dimension Description

Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.
 

Diameter at End The diameter to be established at the end (cuff) of the tee.
 

Diameter at Base The diameter at the base or waist of the tee. This is where the tee meets the pipe. Like the end diameter, this
is a true circle and will retain its circular shape no matter what orientation it's in.
 

Elevation at End The height of the end of the tee. This is the vertical distance from the bottom of the pipe to the end of the
tee. This dimension can be used to control the vertical position of the tee along the pipe.
 

Distance from CL to End The horizontal distance from the center line of the pipe to the end of the tee.
 

Incline Angle The angle (in degrees) of the tee relative to the vertical center line of the pipe.
 

Angle This determines the horizontal position of the tee on the base part.
 

Offset from Radial This is the amount that the tee is offset from the radial line of the pipe. 
 

Saddle Width The saddle width is defined here.

 

Saddle Pieces The number of saddle pieces. (1, 2, 4, or 8 pieces)

 

Copies of Tee If you want to make copies of the tee, you can specify the number of additional copies to make here.
 

Copy of offset angle This defines the rotational angle (in degrees) for copies of the tee.
 

Left Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 

Right Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 

Top Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.

- 748 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension Description

Bottom Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.
 

Weld Gap Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.
 

Number of Pieces The number of pieces required to make the tee. (1,2,4,8,or 16 pieces)
 

Angle of Weld Seam This describes the rotation angle of the weld seam (in degrees).
 

- 749 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Cylindrical Tee

Dimension Description

Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.
 

Diameter of Tee The diameter of the cylinder.

 

Elevation at End The height of the end of the tee. This is the vertical distance from the bottom of the pipe to the end of the
tee. This dimension can be used to control the vertical position of the tee along the pipe.
 

Distance from CL to End The horizontal distance from the center line of the pipe to the end of the tee.
 

Incline Angle The angle (in degrees) of the tee relative to the vertical center line of the pipe.
 

Angle This determines the horizontal position of the tee on the base part. (0 - 359 degrees)
 

Offset from Radial This is the amount that the tee is offset from the radial line of the pipe. 
 

Saddle Width The saddle width is defined here.

 

Saddle Pieces The number of saddle pieces. (1, 2, 4, or 8 pieces)

 

Copies of Tee If you want to make copies of the tee, you can specify the number of additional copies to make here.
 

Copy of offset angle This defines the rotational angle (in degrees) for copies of the tee.
 

Left Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 

Right Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 

Top Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.
 

Bottom Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.
 

- 750 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension Description

Weld Gap Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.
 

Number of Pieces The number of pieces required to make the tee. (1,2,4,8,or 16 pieces)
 

Angle of Weld Seam This describes the rotation angle of the weld seam (in degrees).
 

- 751 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Rectangular Tee

Dimension Description

Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.
 

Rectangle Height The length of the vertical sides of the tee.

 

Rectangle Width The length of the horizontal sides of the tee.

 

Elevation at End The height of the end of the tee. This is the vertical distance from the bottom of the pipe to the end of the
tee. This dimension can be used to control the vertical position of the tee along the pipe.
 

Distance from CL to End The horizontal distance from the center line of the pipe to the end of the tee.
 

Incline Angle The angle (in degrees) of the tee relative to the vertical center line of the pipe.
 

Angle This determines the horizontal position of the tee on the base part. (0 - 359 degrees)
 

Offset from Radial This is the amount that the tee is offset from the radial line of the pipe. 
 

Saddle Width The saddle width is defined here.

 

Saddle Pieces The number of saddle pieces. (1, 2, 4, or 8 pieces)

 

Copies of Tee If you want to make copies of the tee, you can specify the number of additional copies to make here.
 

Copy of offset angle This defines the rotational angle (in degrees) for copies of the tee.
 

Left Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 

Right Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 

Top Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.
 

- 752 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension Description

Bottom Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.
 

Weld Gap Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.
 

Number of Pieces The number of pieces required to make the tee. (1,2,4,8,or 16 pieces)
 

- 753 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Boot Tee

Dimension Description

Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.
 

Diameter at End The diameter to be established at the end (cuff) of the tee.
 

Elevation at End The height of the end of the tee. This is the vertical distance from the bottom of the pipe to the end of the
tee. This dimension can be used to control the vertical position of the tee along the pipe.
 

Distance from CL to End The horizontal distance from the center line of the pipe to the end of the tee.
 

Angle This determines the horizontal position of the tee on the base part.
 

Offset from Radial This is the amount that the tee is offset from the radial line of the pipe.
 

Saddle Width The saddle width is defined here.

 

Saddle Pieces The number of saddle pieces. (1, 2, 4, or 8 pieces)

 

Copies of Tee If you want to make copies of the tee, you can specify the number of additional copies to make here.
 

Copy of offset angle This defines the rotational angle (in degrees) for copies of the tee.
 

Left Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 

Right Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 

Top Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.
 

Bottom Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.
 

Weld Gap Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.
 

- 754 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension Description

Number of Pieces The number of pieces required to make the tee. (1,2,4,8,or 16 pieces)
 

- 755 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Rectangle to Round Tee

Dimension Description

Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.
 

Base Height The height of the tee at its base (where the tee meets the pipe).
 

Base Width The width of the tee at its base (where the tee meets the pipe).
 

End Radius The radius of the circle at the end of the tee.
 

Elevation at End This determines the horizontal position of the tee on the base part.
 

Distance from CL to End The horizontal distance from the center line of the pipe to the end of the tee.
 

Incline Angle The angle (in degrees) of the tee relative to the vertical center line of the pipe.
 

Angle This determines the horizontal position of the tee on the base part.
 

Offset from Radial This is the amount that the tee is offset from the radial line of the pipe.
 

Saddle Width The saddle width is defined here.

 

Saddle Pieces The number of saddle pieces. (1, 2, 4, or 8 pieces)

 

Copies of Tee If you want to make copies of the tee, you can specify the number of additional copies to make here.
 

Copy of offset angle This defines the rotational angle (in degrees) for copies of the tee.
 

Left Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 

Right Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 

Top Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.

- 756 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension Description

Bottom Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.
 

Weld Gap Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.
 

Number of Pieces The number of pieces required to make the tee. (1,2,4,8,or 16 pieces)
 

Angle of Weld Seam This describes the rotation angle of the weld seam (in degrees).
 

- 757 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Elliptical Tee

Dimension Description

Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.
 

End Height The height of the tee (where the tee meets the pipe).
 

End Width The width of the tee (where the tee meets the pipe).
 

End Radius The corner radius at the end of the tee.

 

Elevation at End This determines the horizontal position of the tee on the pipe.
 

Distance from CL to End The horizontal distance from the center line of the pipe to the end of the tee.
 

Incline Angle The angle (in degrees) of the tee relative to the vertical center line of the pipe.
 

Angle This determines the horizontal position of the tee on the base part.
 

Offset from Radial This is the amount that the tee is offset from the radial line of the pipe.
 

Saddle Width The saddle width is defined here.

 

Saddle Pieces The number of saddle pieces. (1, 2, 4, or 8 pieces)

 

Copies of Tee If you want to make copies of the tee, you can specify the number of additional copies to make
here.
 

Copy of offset angle This defines the rotational angle (in degrees) for copies of the tee.
 

Left Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.
 

Right Hand Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.
 

- 758 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension Description

Top Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.
 

Bottom Side Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.
 

Weld Gap Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.
 

Number of Pieces The number of pieces required to make the tee. (1,2,4,8,or 16 pieces)
 

Angle of Weld Seam This describes the rotation angle of the weld seam (in degrees).
 

- 759 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

24. SKELETON CUT UP

About Skeleton Cut-Up
Skeleton Cut-Up is an optional module that can be used to cut up the skeleton (the leftover plate after parts are cut) into smaller pieces,
making it easier to remove the scrap material from the cutting table. You can specify whether skeleton lines should be cut before or after
parts have been cut in the CNC output file.

Important: To use Skeleton Cut-Up, the Enable skeleton cut-up box in the Skeleton Cut-Up page of your settings must be selec-
ted. The information in your settings will determine how skeleton cuts are applied to your nests.

Enter Skeleton Cut-Up mode

 l On the Nest tab, click Skeleton Cut-Up.

You will enter Skeleton Cut-Up mode. The current nest will look as if parts have already been cut out. Skeleton lines, indicating where the
skeleton will be cut, will be displayed in green.
 

The Skeleton Cut-Up tab 

The Skeleton Cut-Up tab will become active upon entering Skeleton Cut-Up mode. It contains the following functions:
 

Ribbon
Name Description
control

Grid: Edit Move or delete skeleton lines.

 

- 760 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Ribbon
Name Description
control

Grid: Clear Delete all skeleton cut-up grid lines. Note that bridge lines will not be deleted.
 

Add Horizontal Line You can add a horizontal skeleton line to the skeleton grid. Horizontal lines are specified in
terms of where they intersect the Y-axis.
 

Add Vertical Line You can add a vertical skeleton line to the skeleton grid. Vertical lines are specified in terms of
where they intersect the X-axis.
 

Bridge Lines: Edit Add cut lines through existing bridges on your nest. For the purposes of this setting, a bridge is
defined as the material between two parts that remains when those parts are cut out.
 

Bridge Lines: Clear Delete all skeleton cut-up bridge lines. Note that grid lines will not be deleted.

Preview mode Preview mode will show the skeleton lines as they would actually be cut based on the current
  grid layout.
 
Tip: If you want to view cut direction or pierces for the skeleton lines, select these items on the
View menu.

Calculate New Lines This will open the Skeleton Cut-Up settings page, where you can make adjustments to your skel-
eton cut up settings and apply your changes to the current nest.
 

Example:
 
Consider the following detail of a nest:
 

- 761 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 1
 
The portion of nest in Figure 1 is shown in Skeleton Cut-Up mode, with a single horizontal cut line shown.
 
 

- 762 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 2
 
A vertical cut-up line has been added, with an X Offset value of 7.5.
 
 

- 763 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 3

The red striped area in Figure 3 represents a bridge. This is the allowable area where a bridge cut-up line can be placed.
 
 

- 764 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 4
 
A bridge cut-up line has been added between the cut-outs of the two parts.
 
 

- 765 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 5
 
The nest in Figure 5 appears in Preview mode, showing how the skeleton will actually be cut.

- 766 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Modifying skeleton lines

The skeleton lines of a nest can be modified in Skeleton Cut-Up mode (on the Nest tab, click Skeleton Cut-Up ).

In this article...
Move skeleton lines
Add new skeleton lines
Delete skeleton lines
Recalculate the entire SCU grid
Exit Skeleton Cut-Up mode

Move skeleton lines

 l With the Edit Lines button ( ) selected, click and drag a cut-up line using the cursor ( ).

Add new skeleton lines

To add a horizontal skeleton line:

 1. Click the Add Horizontal Line button.

 2. In the Y Offset box, specify the point along the Y-axis of your nest where you want to place the line. The Y-axis is measured in
the ruler to the left of the nest.
 
To add a vertical skeleton line:

 1. Click the Add Vertical Line button.

 2. In the X Offset box, specify the point along the X-axis of your nest where you want to place the line. The X-axis is measured in
the ruler above the nest.
 
To add a bridge line between cut-outs:

 1. Click the Edit Bridge Lines button.

 2. Click and drag a line across the bridge where you want to apply a cut line.

Delete skeleton lines

To delete a single skeleton line:

 l With the Edit Lines button ( ) selected, right-click a line and select Delete Line.
 
To delete an entire skeleton cut-up grid:

 l With the Edit Lines button ( ) selected, click the Clear button ( ).
 
To delete a bridge cut-up line:

 l With the Edit Bridge Lines button ( ) selected, right-click a bridge line and select Delete Line.

- 767 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
To delete an entire skeleton bridge cut-up grid:

 l With the Edit Bridge Lines button ( ) selected, click the Clear button ( ).

Recalculate the entire skeleton cut-up grid

 1. Click Recalculate.

 2. Adjust your Skeleton Cut-Up settings, as necessary.
 3. Click OK.
New skeleton cut-up lines will be applied according to your settings.

Exit Skeleton Cut-Up mode 

 l Click Close Skeleton Cut-Up.

-or-
 l Press ESC.

- 768 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

25. BRIDGING
About Bridge mode
Bridging is an optional module that allows parts to be connected with a narrow web of plate. When parts are bridged together, a single
exterior profile is formed, allowing the cutting head to cut the parts in one continuous cut path.
 
The following diagram shows two bridged parts:
 

Figure 1
 
Bridging has different benefits and uses for different cutting applications. For laser and underwater plasma cutting, where plate move-
ment is not a concern, bridge cutting can be used to develop a continuous cutting path for multiple parts. For oxyfuel or dry plasma cut-
ting, in addition to reducing the number of pierces, bridging can be used to prevent loss of geometric accuracy caused by plate
movement. You can bridge together as many parts as you want. The more parts that are bridged together, the fewer pierces needed to
cut those parts.
 
Bridges are applied to parts in Bridge mode (except with dynamic align bridging).

Enter Bridge mode

 l On the Nest tab, in the Modify group, click Bridge.

The Bridge tab

The Bridge tab will become active upon entering Bridge mode. It contains the following functions.

Width
Specifies the width of the bridge between adjacent parts. A positive value will leave a thin web of material connecting the parts. A zero
value means that the torch will travel over the exact same bridge geometry twice: once going to the next part and once returning from it.
A negative value will invert the sides of the bridge, effectively cutting the bridge.
 
Units: Distance
Range: -5.0 to 5.0 in.
 

- 769 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 2 A close up view of the bridge shown in Figure 1, with the Width of the bridge indicated by the red arrows.
 

Radius
Bridges can have a radius where they connect to a part. This radius allows for a smoother transition from the part to the bridge. A value of
0.0 indicates that no radius should be used.
 
Units: Distance
Range: 0.0 to 1.0 in.
 

Figure 3 A close up view of the bridge shown in Figure 1, with the Radius of the bridge indicated by the red circle.

- 770 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using Bridge mode

Bridges can be added or modified in Bridge mode. Bridges will be applied as specified on the Bridging page of your settings. Note that
parts must be nested before they can be bridged together. Bridges are applied between the exterior profiles of parts.

Adding bridges

 1. Enter Bridge mode (On the Nest tab, in the Modify group, click Bridge ).
You can add and edit bridges in Bridge mode.
 2. Click and drag the cursor from inside the exterior profile of the first part to inside the exterior profile of the last part.

By default, bridges will be applied according to your Bridging settings. The bridges that you added will be selected on the nest.

Important: When applying bridges in Bridge mode, the order in which you drag the bridge sets the sub-sequence of the
bridged parts. The part where the drag begins is the first part in the sequence, followed by the next part, and so
on.

 3. You can edit the Width and Radius of selected bridges, as necessary.
 4. Add additional bridges to the nest by clicking and dragging bridge lines between two or more parts.

Tip:  l Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking and dragging will cause the bridge line to snap to the nearest 45° angle.
 l You can easily apply a bridge to a large string of parts by dragging a bridge through the parts.

Editing bridges

As you add bridges between parts, you may need to modify or delete certain bridges. Bridges that haven't been accepted yet can be
edited or deleted.
 
To edit the width or radius of bridges:
 1. While in Bridge mode, click the bridges you want to edit.
 l Press CTRL + A to select all bridges.
 l Hold SHIFT + click to select bridges individually
 l Right-click and drag a selection box around bridges to select them
 2. On the Bridge tab, edit the Width and Radius as needed. (See About Bridge mode for a detailed description of these properties.)
 
To delete selected bridges:

- 771 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. While in Bridge mode, select the bridges you want to delete.
 l Press CTRL + A to select all bridges.
 l Hold SHIFT + click to select bridges individually
 l Right-click and drag a selection box around bridges to select them
 2. Right-click and select Delete.
-or-
Press the Delete key.

Accepting bridges

Once you've added and edited the bridges, you will be ready to lock in your changes.
 1. While in Bridge mode, select the bridges you want to finalize.
 l Press CTRL + A to select all bridges.
 l Hold SHIFT + click to select bridges individually
 l Right-click and drag a selection box around bridges to select them

 2. Click the Accept button.

 3. Click Close to exit the mode.
Once parts have been bridged together, they form a single exterior profile.

Any unnecessary exterior leads for bridged parts will be automatically removed. The bridged parts can now be treated as though they are
a single part.

Breaking bridged parts

Once bridges have been accepted, they can only be removed by exiting Bridge mode and breaking them apart.
 1. Exit Bridge mode.
 2. Select the group of bridged parts.

 3. On the Parts tab, in the Arrange group, click Break.

- 772 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Positive vs negative bridging

Using the Bridge width setting, you can control the thickness of bridges applied between adjacent parts, as well as the style of bridge
that is applied. This setting is available on the Bridging settings page (Job > Settings > [cut process] > Bridging) and on the Bridging tool-
bar.

Positive bridging
Specifying a positive width value (for example, 0.2 in.) will leave a thin web of material connecting the parts.

 l The exterior profile of the bridged parts will only require one pierce.
 l The cutting head will not cross over a previously cut kerf width.
 l Parts will not drop out until after the entire bridge is cut.
 l When cutting is complete, bridged parts will have to be separated manually and may require some finishing if a small notch/tab is
left on the part edge.

Negative bridging
A negative width value (for example, -0.2 in.) will invert the sides of the bridge, effectively cutting the bridge off, causing bridged parts to
drop out as they are cut.

 l The exterior profile of the bridged parts will only require one pierce.
 l The cutting head will cross over previously cut kerf width.
 l Parts will drop out in reverse order as they are cut. The first part in the bridge will drop out last.
 l When cutting is complete, bridged parts will already be separated and will not require any additional finishing to smooth bridge
connection points on the part edges.

- 773 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About dynamic align bridging

Different rectangular parts can be bridged together in rows or columns, with their edges aligned on one side. Bridging with dynamic
align is a special bridging technique designed to do several things:
 l Move bridged parts very close together, to maximize material utilization. The kerf typically overlaps partially into previously cut
kerf.
 l Extend a negative bridge past the aligned part edges. Negative bridges that extend off the part edge reduce blemishes left by
bridge tabs.
 l Complete the final cut along the alignment edge to drop all parts. The negative bridge is consumed by the kerf on the final cut.
This final cut also ensures that parts will drop as the cutting head moves away from them, reducing the chance of collisions.
 

A nest with several columns of bridged parts, aligned to the right

Points to consider:
 l Dynamic align bridging is designed for rectangular parts. Rectangles with clipped or notched corners are allowable. Rectangles
with rounded (radius) corners can't be dynamically aligned.
 l Part edges must be parallel to the X or Y axis of the nest.
 l The alignment edge (top, left, bottom, or right) must be set before creating a column or row. A default alignment edge can be spe-
cified in Dynamic Align settings. Once a stack of aligned parts has been created, the alignment edge can't be changed without
breaking the bridge.
 l This type of bridging doesn't use Bridge mode.

Kerf
Dynamic align bridges have two kerf-related spacing settings.

- 774 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
1 = Part separation
2 = Bridge extension distance
= Kerf
= Area where kerf overlaps previously cut kerf

The part separation (1) is typically set so that the two parallel kerf widths overlap, leaving no "web" or "finger" between bridge parts after
they are cut. A good rule of thumb is to set this to 1.5 times the kerf width (Kerf × 150%). This is set on the Dynamic Align settings page.
 
The bridge extension distance (2) typically extends into, but not completely across, the kerf. A good rule of thumb is to set this to 75% of
the kerf width. This is set on the Bridging settings page.

Cut direction and sequence

In the bridged group below, the exteriors are cut clockwise with Kerf Left. The final cut is along the alignment edge, allowing parts to
drop from top to bottom.
 

The parts will drop as the cutting head moves away from them, reducing the chance of collisions.

- 775 -
ProNest 2019 Manual

- 776 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using dynamic align bridging

Different rectangular parts can be bridged together in rows or columns, with their edges aligned on one side. This method of bridging is
designed to be very fast and easy.

Points to consider:
 l Dynamic align bridging is designed for rectangular parts. Rectangles with clipped or notched corners are allowable. Rectangles
with rounded (radius) corners can't be dynamically aligned.
 l Part edges must be parallel to the X or Y axis of the nest.
 l The alignment edge (top, left, bottom, or right) must be set before creating a column or row. A default alignment edge can be spe-
cified in Dynamic Align settings. Once a stack of aligned parts has been created, the alignment edge can't be changed without
breaking the bridge.
 l This type of bridging doesn't use Bridge mode.

Align and bridge parts on the nest

 1. Add parts to the nest. You can add them using manual nesting, array, automatic nesting, or some other method.

 2. Make sure the parts are in the general orientation that you want when they're added to the bridge.
 3. With the parts in the approximate position you want, select one part.

Note: By default, parts will use the dynamic align Style (Common line or Bridge) and Alignment Edge specified in your
Dynamic Align settings. In the main ProNest window, you can quickly change the alignment edge prior to creating a
column or row from the Parts tab.

- 777 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 4. Hold CTRL + SHIFT and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to bump the parts together. Bump in a direction parallel to the align-
ment edge. For instance, with Alignment edge set to Right, you would bump parts up or down to create columns.

 5. Hold CTRL + SHIFT and continue pressing the arrow key in the same direction. Additional parts will be added to the bridge,
aligned to one side.

 6. Once you've finished creating a single row or column, click an empty area of the nest to finish the bridge.
At this point, the bridge column or row has been successfully created. Unlike with a bridge created in Bridge mode, there is no need to
finalize or accept it.

Edit a dynamic align bridge

You can always add more parts to a single bridged column or row by holding CTRL + SHIFT and then bumping with the arrow keys.
 
If you need to change the alignment edge, reposition existing bridge parts, or remove parts from a bridged group, you will need to break
the bridge and then rebuild it:

- 778 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Select the bridge on the nest.

 2. Click Break.

Creating dynamic align bridges during AutoNest

In order to create dynamically aligned bridge parts during automatic nesting, do the following:
 l A part's Allow dynamic align property must be enabled. You can set a default for this in Importing Parts settings or set it part-by-
part in the Properties pane of the Edit Part List window.
 l On the Dynamic Align settings page (Settings > cut process > Dynamic Align), set Alignment style to Bridge.
 l On the AutoNest settings page (Settings > Nesting > AutoNest), enable Dynamic Align for the nesting strategies that you will use.
 l For IntelliChoice, select IntelliChoice should dynamically align parts.
 l For other nesting strategies, click Edit Strategies, then select Dynamic Align as a nesting approach.

- 779 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

26. CHAINING
About chaining
Chaining is an optional module that allows exterior profiles to be linked together so that they are cut in a single, continuous cut path.
When parts are chained together, the cutting head will continue cutting as it moves from the lead-out of one part to the lead-in of the
next part. Chain cutting reduces the number of pierces needed to cut parts, however it does result in a longer cut length.
 
The following diagram shows two chained parts, with the chain line in blue:
 

 
You can apply chains to as many parts as you want. Chains are applied to parts in Chain mode.

Enter Chain mode

 l On the Nest tab, click Chain.

The Chain tab

The Chain tab will become active upon entering Chain mode. It contains the following functions:

Ribbon
Name Description
control

Draw Chains Using this button, you can add chains and define the cutting path between chained parts.
   

Back Up Delete the most recently added segment of the current chain.

Complete This will complete the current chain.

Select Links Using this button, you can select links in chains that have already been completed. A link refers
to any section of a chain between two parts.

Accept This will accept the currently active chain. After a chain is accepted, it will be locked in and can-
not be selected or modified from chain mode.

- 780 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using chaining
Chains are added or modified in Chain mode. Chains will be applied as specified on the Chaining page of your settings. Parts must be nes-
ted before they can be added to a chain.

Adding chains

Chains are applied from the end of a lead-out of a part to the start of a lead-in of another part. If you want, you can easily move the exter-
ior leads of your parts in Chain mode to help with applying chain lines.
 
To chain parts together:

 1. Make sure that you are in Chain mode (on the Nest tab, click Chain ).

 2. On the Chain tab, make sure that Draw Chains ( ) is selected.
 3. Click the point along the exterior profile of the part where you want to begin your chain. You can select the start point (where
existing leads are) or pick any other point along the exterior profile. If leads are not already located at the point, ProNest will auto-
matically move the leads to that location. A black dot ( ) will appear on the lead-out, indicating that the chain will begin there.

 4. If you want to define a non-direct chain path, click points on the nest to specify the path of your chain. (If you want to apply a dir-
ect path from lead-out to lead-in, skip this step.)
 5. Click the point along the exterior profile of the part that you want to connect to. If you don't click an existing lead, the leads of
this part will move to that location.

 6. Continue applying chain lines to as many parts as you want.

As you draw chains, you can press BACKSPACE or click Back Up ( ) to delete the most recently added segment.

 7. Click Complete ( ) or press ENTER to end your chain.

 8. If needed, you can continue adding other chains on the nest, as described in steps 3 - 7.
 9. Once a chain is completed, the links in the chain must be accepted. A link refers to any section of a chain between two parts.

 10. Click Select Links.

 11. Select the completed chains on the nest:
 n Click the links on the nest to select them one by one.
 n Hold CTRL while clicking to select multiple links.

- 781 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 n Right-click and drag a selection box around links for a group selection.
 n Press CTRL + A to select all links.

 12. Click Accept.

After selected parts have been chained together, they form a single continuous cut.

The start point of the first profile in the chain becomes the start point for the entire chain.

Tip: Once you have added one or more completed chains, you can quickly accept all of them by clicking Close to exit chain mode
and then click Yes when prompted to accept your chains.

Breaking chains

To break a chain:
 1. Select the chain.

 2. On the Parts tab, select Break.

- 782 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

27. COMMON LINE CUTTING (CLC)

About common line cutting (CLC)
Common Line Cutting (CLC) is an optional module that allows two or more parts to be cut so that they share at least one common line
with one another. Common line cutting greatly reduces both the cutting length and number of pierces required.
 
ProNest handles several different methods of common line cutting:

Pair
Two parts are common line cut together.

Quad
A part is common line cut with itself into a 2 × 2 grid.

CLC Array
A part is common line cut with itself in a grid of rows and columns such that they fill a region up to the size of the plate the parts are
being nested on or a smaller, user-defined region.

Dynamic Align CLC

Different rectangular parts are common line cut together in a series of separate rows or columns, with their edges aligned to one side.

- 783 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Advanced CLC
Two or more parts are common line cut together. An unlimited number of dissimilar parts can be used. The plate edge may also be used
as one of the common lines.

Common line cutting can only be applied to linear entities on an exterior profile. Curved portions of an exterior profile and interior pro-
files cannot be common line cut.

Common Line Cut settings

Common line cutting is applied according to the values defined in the Common Line Cut pages of your settings. CLC settings are assigned
at the process level. This means that you can have different CLC settings for each cut process used by your machine. For an in-depth look
at CLC settings, see "Common Line Cut settings" on page 43.

Kerf and part separation

Pre-kerfing is always used for the exterior profiles of common line cut parts. Exterior part geometry is uniformly enlarged by one half the
kerf width, based on the Kerf value from Process Parameters settings. No kerf codes are included in NC output code for finished CLC pro-
files.

On the nest, there is no separation distance between CLC parts along their shared edges, but because of the pre-kerfing, they are sep-
arated by one full kerf width when cut.

- 784 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: If the kerf value is changed in settings, existing CLC parts do not automatically compensate for this change. The parts will
turn red in error if the kerf values have changed since the CLC part was created. If you have changed the kerf values in your
settings and want to apply your changes to existing CLC parts, you will need to break the CLC part into a working cluster and
then reapply CLC.

- 785 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Pair and quad common line cutting

Depending on part geometry, parts can be common line cut in pairs or in groups of four (called Quad CLC).

In this article...
About basic common line cutting
Create a CLC pair
Create a CLC quad
Applying CLC automatically using your settings

About basic common line cutting

The most basic type of common line cutting involves forming a CLC pair of parts.
 
The following diagram shows a CLC pair:
 

The common line shared by these parts will only be cut once.
 
You can also create a CLC pair with dissimilar parts. The following diagram shows two dissimilar parts that form a CLC pair: 
 

Both parts in this CLC pair have a straight exterior edge, allowing them to be common line cut together.
 
Quad CLC allows four of the same part to be common line cut together in a 2 × 2 grid. A part used for Quad CLC must have multiple sides
that can be common line cut.
 
The following diagram shows a Quad CLC part:

- 786 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Once created, a group of CLC parts can be moved, rotated, duplicated, and clustered — basically they can be treated as though they are a
single part.

Create a CLC pair

To create a CLC pair of two like parts:

 1. Make sure that the quantity required for your part is greater than 1.
 2. Drag your part onto the nest.

 3. With the part selected, on the Parts tab, click Common Line Cut.
Your CLC pair will appear on the nest.
 
To create a CLC pair of two dissimilar parts:
 1. Position your two parts so as to approximate how they should be common line cut.
 2. Right-click and drag a selection box around both parts.

 3. Click Common Line Cut.

Create a CLC quad

To create a CLC group of four parts (Quad CLC):

 1. From the Edit Part List window, under the Nesting Properties tab, set the Mirror value for your part to Either.
 2. Enter a quantity for your part that is at least 4.
 3. Click Return to Nesting.
 4. Select the part on the nest.

 5. On the Parts tab, in the Common Line Cut group, click Quad.
Your Quad CLC part will appear on the nest.

Tip: By clicking Cluster( ) when a CLC part is selected, you can add that CLC part to the part list.
 

Applying pair and quad CLC automatically using your settings

You can configure your settings so that parts that can be common line cut will be automatically grouped into CLC pairs or quads when
they are added to the part list.
 
To automatically CLC parts upon import:

 1. On the Importing Parts page of your settings ( ), click the Nesting tab.
 2. Set the Common line cutting setting to Pair, Quad or Both, depending on the types of CLC groupings that you want created
when a part is added to the part list.
 3. If you want CLC Quads to be created, set the Mirror value to Either.
 4. Save your settings.
Now, when you add a CLC-eligible part to the part list, the CLC grouping for that part will also appear in the part list, ready to be
nested.

- 787 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: If you do not want CLC pairs and quads to be created for all eligible parts that are imported, but still want to automatically
create CLC pairs and quads for specific parts, as needed:
 l In Importing Parts settings, set Common line cutting to None.
 l In the Edit Part List window, with the part selected, change the Mirror and Common line cutting properties for that
part only.

- 788 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using CLC Array

The CLC Array feature enables you to array and common line multiple copies of the same part in a grid. This will reduce your scrap and
cut time, while preserving consumables. CLC Array is part of the Common Line Cutting module.
 
The diagram below shows a nest with CLC Array applied to a triangular-shaped part:
 

 
CLC Array can only be used with parts whose sides can have common lines. You can apply CLC Array either automatically or interactively.

Automatic CLC Array

To automatically apply CLC Array to a part:

 1. Drag one copy of the part onto the plate. This part should be located in the corner of your plate that has been designated as your
nesting home.
 2. Make sure that the part is selected.

 3. On the Parts tab, in the Common Line Cut group, click the arrow next to Array( ) and then click Automatic.
The required quantity of your part will be nested using CLC Array.

Interactive CLC Array

Interactive CLC Array involves an intermediate step where you can define the CLC Array grid that is used.
 
To interactively apply CLC Array to a part:
 1. Drag one copy of the part onto the plate. This part should be located in the corner of your plate that has been designated as your
nesting home.
 2. Make sure that the part is selected.

 3. On the Parts tab, in the Common Line Cut group, click the arrow next to Array( ) and then click Set Up Then Start. The CLC
Array dialog will open.
 4. Enter the number of rows and columns that you want the CLC Array grid to use. Rows and columns are defined in terms of CLC
units, which are set-up in your settings.
 5. Click OK.
Your part will be nested using CLC Array.

- 789 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Dynamic align CLC

Different rectangular parts can be common line cut together in rows or columns, with their edges aligned on one side. This method of
common line cutting is designed to be very fast and easy.
 

A nest with several columns of common line cut parts, aligned to the right

Points to consider:
 l Dynamic align CLC is designed for rectangular parts, including rectangles with clipped or notched corners. Rectangles with roun-
ded corners (radius) can't be dynamically aligned.
 l Common line edges must be parallel to the X or Y axis of the nest.
 l The alignment edge (top, left, bottom, or right) must be set before creating a column or row. A default alignment edge can be spe-
cified in Dynamic Align settings. Once a stack of aligned parts has been created, the alignment edge can't be changed without
breaking the CLC.
 l Each dynamic align CLC consists of a single row or column of parts.

Align and common line cut parts on the nest

 1. Add parts to the nest. You can add them using manual nesting, array, automatic nesting, or some other method.

 2. Make sure the parts are oriented so that the edges that will be common line cut are perpendicular to the alignment edge.

- 790 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 3. With the parts in the approximate position you want, select one part.

Note: By default, parts will use the dynamic align Style (Common line or Bridge) and Alignment Edge specified in your
Dynamic Align settings. In the main ProNest window, you can quickly change the alignment edge prior to creating a
column or row from the Parts tab.

 4. Hold CTRL + SHIFT and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to bump the parts together. Bump in a direction parallel to the align-
ment edge. For instance, with Alignment edge set to Right, you would bump parts up or down to create columns.

 5. Hold CTRL + SHIFT and continue clicking the arrow key in the same direction. Additional parts will be added to the CLC group,
aligned to one side.

- 791 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 6. Once you've finished creating a single row or column, click an empty area of the nest to finish the CLC group.
At this point, the CLC group has been successfully created. Unlike with a compound CLC part, there is no need to finalize a working
CLC cluster.

Edit a dynamic align CLC

You can always add more parts to a CLC column or row by CTRL + SHIFT + bump using the arrow keys.
 
If you need to change the alignment edge, reposition parts, or remove parts from a CLC group, you will need to break it into a working
CLC cluster. You can then add more parts or move parts in the cluster as needed.
 1. Select the CLC part on the nest.

 2. Click Break.

Creating dynamic align CLC during AutoNest

In order to create dynamically aligned CLC parts during automatic nesting, do the following:
 l A part's Allow dynamic align property must be enabled. You can set a default for this in Importing Parts settings or set it part by
part in the Properties pane of the Edit Part List window.
 l On the Dynamic Align settings page (Settings > cut process > Dynamic Align), set Alignment style to Common line.
 l On the AutoNest settings page (Settings > Nesting > AutoNest), enable Dynamic Align for the nesting strategies that you will use.
 l For IntelliChoice, select IntelliChoice should dynamically align parts.
 l For other nesting strategies, click Edit Strategies, then select Dynamic Align as a nesting approach.
 
Optionally, if you want the final cut to be completed along the alignment edge across multiple CLC parts:
 l On the CLC Array settings page (Settings > cut process > Common Line Cut: Array), set:
 l Torch path style to Crossing.
 l Enable Use alternate CLC array crossing torch paths.
 l Enable Cut rectangular parts by column.

- 792 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Breaking CLC parts

CLC parts on your nest can be broken apart at any time.

Break up CLC parts

 1. Select the group of CLC parts.

 2. On the Parts tab, in the Arrange group, select Break. Your CLC parts will break apart into a working CLC cluster.
 3. Clear the selection from the working CLC cluster by clicking elsewhere on the nesting window.
 4. Drag an individual part away from the cluster.

Example:
 
Let's say that you want to break up the following CLC parts:
 

To break up the CLC parts you would:

 
 1. Select the CLC parts.
 

 2. Click the Break button.

 

 
 3. Clear the selection.
 

- 793 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
 4. Drag away an individual part.
 

- 794 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About advanced common line cutting

Common line cutting at the most advanced level allows any combination of parts to share common lines with one another part or with
the plate edge. You can manually position any number of parts together to form your own customized CLC part. This type of part is called
a compound CLC part. You can also edit cut paths for CLC parts and apply safety cuts so as to avoid head crashes.
 
The following diagram shows a compound CLC part, which was formed using advanced CLC techniques:
 

 
There are two basic steps to take when creating a viable compound CLC part:
 l Step 1: Creating a working CLC cluster
Two or more parts on the nest must be lined up to create a working CLC cluster. Parts can be positioned using geometric drag and
geometric bump.
 l Step 2: Applying Common Line Cut
The working CLC cluster created in Step 1 must be selected and then the common line cuts must be completed.
To read about the first step in this process, see Working CLC clusters.

- 795 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Working CLC clusters

In this article...
 l About working CLC clusters
 l Creating a working CLC cluster
 l Selecting an entire cluster
 l Adding parts to a cluster
 l Removing parts from a cluster
 l Breaking a cluster
 l Restrictions on working CLC clusters

About working CLC clusters

Working CLC clusters are created by combining multiple parts along common lines using geometric drag and geometric bump. Parts in
working CLC cluster are not yet ready to be output. The working CLC cluster exists so that you can arrange, add, and remove parts before
the finished compound CLC part is created.
 
A working CLC cluster is designated by the orange color of the parts, as shown in the following diagram:
 

A working CLC cluster

 
A working CLC cluster will remain intact as long as at least two parts are still part of it or until it is transformed into a compound CLC part.
If a part in a working CLC cluster is selected, it is still part of the working CLC cluster and it may be further aligned using geometric bump
or drag. Parts in a working CLC cluster retain their tabs, leads, and transition loops, however these are ignored during geometric drag and
bump operations.

Creating a working CLC cluster

You can use geometric drag or geometric bump to align parts on a common line or with the plate edge.

Geometric Drag
This method involves dragging a side of a part so that it snaps together with another part or with the plate edge. Geometric dragging can
only be used with the linear sides of a part's exterior profile.
 
To perform a geometric drag:

- 796 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Click and hold the edge of the part where you want to apply a common line. The selected side will become bold and the geo-
metric drag cursor will appear.

 2. Drag the selected part to the common line edge of another part or the plate edge.
 

 3. Hold it there until the parts snap together into alignment.
 

 
Aligned parts will be shaded in orange to create a working CLC cluster.

Tip: If a rectangle is geometrically dragged into a corner, it will snap the rectangle into the corner to share two common lines.

Geometric Bump
Geometric bump allows a part to be bumped to an existing working CLC cluster, another part, or the plate edge. Geometric bump can
only be done in four directions—up, down, right, and left.
 
To perform a geometric bump:
 1. Select the part you want to bump.
 2. Hold down the CTRL key.
 3. Move the mouse pointer over the bump handle ( ) of your part. The bump handle will change to a geometric bump arrow (
), indicating that the part is ready to be geometrically bumped to a common line.

- 797 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 4. Click the handle. Your part will automatically bump in the desired direction to one kerf distance from the nearest part or zero sep-
aration from the plate edge.

 
Aligned parts will be shaded with orange diagonal lines to create a working CLC cluster.

Note: Geometric bump ignores leads, loops and tabs.

Sliding parts along a common line

Once parts have been aligned to form a working CLC cluster, they can be repositioned along their common lines using geometric bump.
This is usually done by sliding one part to the end of the common line that it shares with another part.
 

To perform a geometric bump along a common line:

 1. Select the part.
 2. Hold down the CTRL key.

- 798 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 3. Press the geometric bump arrow.

The part will slide to the end of the common line.

While geometric bump will move the selected parts up, down, right, or left; geometric bump along a common line will move the selected
parts along a common line at any angle, as long as they can all move in the same direction.

Select a working CLC cluster

An entire working CLC cluster can be selected in any of the following ways:
 l Right-click and drag a selection box around the working CLC cluster.
 l Double-click any part in the working CLC cluster.
 l Right-click on any part in the working CLC cluster and choose Select entire working CLC cluster.
 l Holding the SHIFT key, click on each part in the working CLC cluster.

Add a part to a working CLC cluster

 l Use geometric bump or geometric drag to add a part to an existing working CLC cluster.

Note: You can add as many parts as you want to a working CLC cluster.

Remove a part from a working CLC cluster

 1. Make sure the entire working CLC cluster is not selected.
 2. Drag the part away from the cluster.
The removed part will no longer have orange diagonal lines.

Break a working CLC cluster

 1. Select the entire working CLC cluster.

 2. Click the Break button.
All parts will return to their normal status on the nest.

- 799 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Restrictions on working CLC clusters

 l Parts with beveled exterior profiles may not be added to a working CLC cluster. This is due to the strict cutting requirements
involved in cutting beveled edges. In addition, most of the instructions for the bevel head appear in leads and transition loops,
which may not be maintained when parts are Common Line Cut.
 l For two entities to be Common Line Cut together, they must have the same cut process. If the cut processes are different neither
geometric bump nor geometric drag will allow the parts to be positioned for CLC.
 l Arc-shaped entities, interior profiles, and open profiles cannot be Common Line Cut.
Once a working CLC cluster has been created and adjusted to your satisfaction, you will be ready to convert it into a finished compound
CLC. To learn more, see "Completing a compound CLC group" on page 801.

- 800 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Completing a compound CLC group

A compound CLC group consists of two or more parts that share common lines. A compound CLC group is created from a working CLC
cluster.
 
The following diagram shows a compound CLC group:
 

Creating a compound CLC group

A compound CLC group is created from a working CLC cluster.

 
To create a compound CLC group:
 1. Align your parts into a working CLC cluster using geometric drag and bump.
 2. Select the entire working CLC cluster (double-click a part in the working cluster).

 3.

 4. From the Parts tab, in the Common Line Cut group, click Common Line Cut.

The finished compound CLC group will be ready for output.

- 801 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Leads, Tabs, and Transition Loops

When a compound CLC group is created from a working CLC cluster, leads, tabs, and transition loops are automatically removed from all
common lines or common plate edges. Other leads, tabs, and transition loops may be removed or modified as necessary. Leads are auto-
matically re-applied based on either default leads settings or leads spreadsheet settings. Leads may be modified or moved if they are on
closed profiles. Tabs may not be added to common lines but they will remain on motions that are not common line cut.

- 802 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Plate edge CLC

You can easily position a part so that it shares a common line with the plate edge. Plate edge CLC works just like CLC between parts—the
part is positioned using geometric bumping, a working CLC part is created, and then CLC is applied.

Common line a part with the plate edge

 1. On the Plate Edge page (beneath the Common Line Cut page) of your ProNest settings, make sure that Allow common lines
with the plate edge is selected.
 2. Position your part so that the side that you want to common line cut is parallel with the plate edge. (If necessary, you can use the
lower-left handle [ ] to rotate to next 90°.)

 3. Hold CTRL + an arrow key to perform a zero-separation bump to the plate edge.
The working CLC part will become shaded with orange.

 4. On the Parts tab, in the Common Line Cut group, click Common Line Cut.
The part will be joined with the plate edge.

Note that the side of the part that is common lined with the plate edge will not be cut.

Common line cut with more than one plate edge

You can build CLC groups that are common line cut with multiple plate edges. This is most often done with rectangular parts that are the
same length or width as the plate.

- 803 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. On the Plate Edge page (beneath the Common Line Cut page) of your ProNest settings, make sure that Allow common lines
with the plate edge is selected.
 2. Position your part in the approximate position you want it, close to the plate edges.

 3. Hold CTRL + an arrow key to perform a zero-separation bump to the plate edge. The part will snap to the plate edges, forming a
working CLC cluster.

 4. If you are finished adding CLC parts, on the Parts tab, click Common Line Cut to complete it. If you want to add more com-
mon line cut parts, proceed to step 5.
 5. Place the next part in the approximate position you want it.

 6. Hold CTRL + an arrow key to bump the part into the working CLC cluster. Repeat this process until all CLC parts are added.

- 804 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 7. Select the entire CLC cluster by double-clicking a part or pressing CTRL + A.

 8. On the Parts tab, in the Common Line Cut group, click Common Line Cut.
The parts will be joined with each other and the plate edge.

The sides of parts that are common lined with the plate edge will not be cut. Common edges between parts will be cut with a single pass.

Break up plate edge CLC parts

 1. Select the CLC parts that are common line cut with the plate edge.
 2. On the Parts tab, in the Arrange group, select Break. Your CLC parts will break apart into a working CLC cluster.
 3. Clear the selection by clicking elsewhere on the nesting window.
 4. Drag the individual part away from the plate edge.

- 805 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About Edit Cut Paths mode

Using the Edit Cut Path feature in Advanced Edit, you can modify the cut path and direction defined for CLC parts.
 
To enter Edit Cut Paths mode for a CLC part:
 1. Right-click a CLC part and select Advanced Edit.
The CLC part will be brought into Advanced Edit.

 2. Once in Advanced Edit, click the Edit Cut Paths button.
This will display the automatically generated cut paths, which can be modified.

Edit Cut Path toolbar

There are several tools on the Edit Cut Path toolbar that can be useful when editing the cut path.
 

Edit Cut
Path Tool- Name Description
bar Button

Previous  Backs up the cut path to the previous intersection. If there is no previous intersection, the cut path is deleted.
Decision   
Point

Previous  Backs up the cut path one motion. Many times, there is no active intersection after this kind of back up. Pre-
Motion vious Motion can back up until the selected cut path is deleted.
 

Next  Advances the cut path forward one motion. This is enabled only when the direction is established and the cut
Motion path is not terminated at an intersection. This is usually available after Previous Motion is selected.
 

Next  Advances the cut path forward until the next intersection that has two or more choices. This button is only
Decision  enabled when the direction is established and the cut path is not terminated at an intersection. This usually
Point
available after Previous Motion is selected.
 

Reverse  This will reverse the cut path direction for selected cut paths. If there is an active decision point, that point will
Cut Dir- change.
ection
 

Calculate  Calculates the cut path for any remaining cuts. If this is clicked before any cut paths are generated, it will cal-
New  culate the cut paths for all the common line cuts. If this button is clicked after several cut paths have been cre-
Paths
ated, it will fill in the cut path for the rest of the cuts.
 

- 806 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Edit Cut
Path Tool- Name Description
bar Button

Delete All This will delete all of the cut paths assigned to your part.
 

- 807 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using Edit Cut Paths

The cut paths of CLC parts can be modified by bringing a CLC part into Advanced Edit and selecting Edit Cut Paths in the Part menu.

In this article...
Selecting cut paths
Deleting cut paths
Defining a new cut path

Selecting cut paths

You can select a single cut path, multiple cut paths, or all cut paths for your CLC part.
 
To select a single cut path:
 l Click anywhere on the path.
When a cut path is selected it will turn blue in color, as depicted below:

 
To select multiple cut paths: 
 l Hold SHIFT and click multiple cut paths.
 
To select all cut paths:
 l On the Edit menu, click Select All.

You can use the navigational arrows ( ) to select different cut paths on your part.

Deleting cut paths

You can delete a selected cut path or delete all cut paths (both selected and non-selected) for your CLC part.
 
To delete a selected cut path:
 l Right click on the selected cut path and select Delete.
 
To delete all cut paths:

 l Click the Delete All button.

All cut paths on your part will be deleted.

- 808 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Defining a new cut path

The first step to defining a new cut path is to delete the existing paths. Once paths are deleted, you can click on the part profile where
you want to begin the new cut path. Directional arrows will appear on the part.
 

 
Moving the mouse pointer over one of the directional arrows will show the start point and cut path up to the next decision point. You
can click on one of the directional arrows to choose a cut path direction.
 
After an initial cut path direction is chosen, ProNest will advance the cut path forward to the next intersection, where you will need to
specify the next direction that the cut path should take.

As you progress, two or more directional arrows will appear at each decision point until the cut path is complete. When a cut path is com-
pleted, it will remain active until another action is taken.

Note: You can also use the Cut Path Editing window to define cut paths. This window can be opened by selecting Cut Path Editing
on the View menu.

- 809 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

28. COLLISION AVOIDANCE

About Collision Avoidance mode
Collision Avoidance is an optional module that helps eliminate the chance of torch to part collisions and can significantly reduce pro-
duction time. This is accomplished through a combination of moving lead positions, re-sequencing interior profiles, developing avoid-
ance paths around possible tip-up situations, and by using partial or full torch raises.

Important: To use Collision Avoidance, the Enable collision avoidance box in the Collision Avoidance page of your settings must
be selected. The information in your settings will determine how avoidance paths are generated.

View collision avoidance paths

To view avoidance paths without entering Collision Avoidance mode (useful for seeing paths at all times in ProNest):
 l On the View tab, click Nest Image Objects, then click Avoidance Paths.
 
To view avoidance paths in Collision Avoidance mode:
 l On the Nest tab, click Collision Avoidance.
You will enter Collision Avoidance mode. The traverse (or rapid) motions of the cutting head will be indicated by black lines on the cur-
rent nest.
 

 
A solid black line indicates a full torch raise; a dotted black line indicates a partial raise.
 

- 810 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The Collision Avoidance tab

The Collision Avoidance tab will become active upon entering Collision Avoidance mode. It contains the following functions: 
 

Ribbon
Name Description
control

Direct Path This will straighten an avoidance path so that it takes the most direct route between its ends.

Full Raise You can assign a full raise of the cutting head to a given path.

Partial Raise You can assign a partial raise of the cutting head to a given path.

  Show: Cut Sequence This will display the cut sequence of nested parts.

Recalculate This will open the Collision Avoidance settings page, where you can make adjustments to
your Collision Avoidance settings and apply your changes to the current nest.

- 811 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Modifying collision avoidance paths

In Collision Avoidance mode, you can manually reposition the collision avoidance path; move leads; and specify whether you want the
cutting head to execute a full or partial raise. You can also recalculate an entire group of collision avoidance paths on a nest.

In this article...
Selecting paths
Moving paths
Collision avoidance modifications
View the production time of a specific path

Selecting paths

In Collision Avoidance mode, the traverse motions of the cutting head are indicated by light blue lines.
 
To select a single traversal path:
 1. On the Nest tab, click Collision Avoidance. You will enter Collision Avoidance mode.

 2. Click a path with the target cursor ( ).

When selected, the traversal path appears dark blue.
 

The dotted blue line shown above is the selected path

 
The blue boxes ( ) at either end of a path indicate the start/end points (and in most cases, the lead locations) for the profile.

Tip: It can be useful to zoom in on a part to see exactly how collision avoidance paths are applied.

Moving paths

There are two different ways to move avoidance paths. One method involves moving the end points of the path, which causes the leads
of the part itself to be moved. The other method (bend) affects only the middle of the path and has no effect on a part's leads.
 
To move an end point of a path:

- 812 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Select an avoidance path.

 2. Click and drag the blue box ( ) at the end of the path to the desired location along the part profile.
This will move the leads of the part profile along with the avoidance path.
 
To bend a path:
 1. Select a path.
 2. Without clicking a box, click and drag the avoidance path line to bend it how you want.
You can bend a path into as many segments as you want. This method will not affect lead locations and will leave the ends of the
path unchanged.
 
After bending a path, you can straighten it back to its original form.
 
To straighten a path:
 1. Select a bent path.

 2. On the Collision Avoidance tab, click Direct Path.

Collision avoidance modifications

To assign a partial raise:

 1. Select the path you want to change.

 2. On the Collision Avoidance tab, click Partial Raise.

When a partial raise is assigned, the path will be a dotted line ( ).
 
To assign a full raise:
 1. Select the path you want to change.

 2. Click the Full Raise button.

When a full raise is assigned, the path will be a solid line ( ).
 
To recalculate the entire group of collision avoidance paths:

 1. On the Collision Avoidance tab, click Recalculate.

 2. Adjust your Collision Avoidance settings, as necessary.
 3. Click OK.
New avoidance paths will be applied according to your settings.
 
To display the cut sequence numbers of parts:
 l On the Collision Avoidance tab, in the Show group, select Cut Sequence.

View the production time of a specific path

 1. Right-click a path.

 2. Select Properties.

- 813 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The Path Time will be shown in the Properties dialog. You can compare the production time for the current path against the time it would
take to do a direct full raise.

In this image, the selected path is a partial raise that takes 2 seconds to execute. Were it a direct path with a full raise, it would
take 4 seconds to complete.

Note: Any time you modify a nest, there is a good chance that the cut sequence and avoidance paths on that nest will need to be
recalculated. For this reason, it is recommended that changing collision avoidance paths is one of the last operations per-
formed on a nest prior to saving your job and generating output.

- 814 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About slug destroy

After interior profiles in a part are cut, the cutouts left behind can tip up above the surface of the plate. As the cutting head traverses over
these areas, it can crash into the raised pieces, causing expensive damage to the head. Slug destroy helps eliminate the chance of head-
to-part collisions by slicing up interior cutouts into small fragments during cutting so that they fall through the slats of the table.
 

How it works
Consider the following part:

Cutouts 1 and 2 in this part are tipped up on the cutting table. This due to their size relative to the spacing of the table's slats. Cutout 4 is
small enough to fall through the slats on its own and cutout 3 is large enough to lay flat, as it spans several slats.
 
With slug destroy enabled, interior profiles that meet certain size requirements have cut-up motions applied. The slug destroy cut lines
are cut prior to the lead-in of the profile.

- 815 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Slug destroy cut lines are shown in green on profiles 1 and 2.

 
As the interior profile is cut up, the leftover fragments fall through the slats. The cutouts are destroyed and have no chance of tipping up.

Rules
 l Parts can't be nested inside profiles with slug destroy.
 l If a profile has both slug destroy and AutoTab applied, slug destroy will take precedence over AutoTab.
 l Interior remnants can't be saved from profiles with slug destroy.
 l Cutting Techniques are not applied to slug destroy cut lines.

Additional considerations
 l Slug destroy can be used with collision avoidance to further reduce the chance of head-to-part collisions.
 l With slug destroy, there are extra production costs associated with the additional cut length of the cut lines. This must be
weighed against the lessened chance of collisions or extra time it would take to execute a full raise after each cut.

- 816 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding or removing slug destroy

You can add cut-up lines to interior profiles in your parts from the main nesting window, the Edit Part List window, or Advanced Edit.
You can also apply slug destroy to parts automatically as they are imported into ProNest. Slug destroy helps eliminate the chance of
head-to-part collisions by slicing up cutouts into small fragments during cutting so that they fall through the slats of the table.
 

Part with cut-up lines applied on two interiors

Apply slug destroy to an entire part

Slug destroy will be applied to all interior profiles of the part based on your Slug Destroy settings. If a profile doesn't qualify for slug des-
troy (for instance, it is too big), slug destroy will not be applied.
 
To apply slug destroy to nested parts:
 1. Click one or more nested parts to select them.

 2. On the Parts tab, click the arrow next to Slug Destroy, then click Add Slug Destroy.
 
To apply slug destroy from the Edit Part List window:
 1. Right-click a part in the part list.

 2. Click Slug Destroy.

Apply slug destroy to individual profiles from Advanced Edit

You can also apply slug destroy to individual profiles in a part. With this method, even profiles that are too big (based on settings) can be
forced to use slug destroy.
 1. Bring a part into Advanced Edit.

 2. Click the Select Profiles toolbar button.

 3. Click an interior profile to select it.
 4. In the Properties pane for the profile, select the Slug Destroy box.
 5. Click Apply.
 6. Remember to save your changes when you exit Advanced Edit.

Automatically apply slug destroy during import

Slug destroy motions can be applied to a part before it is added to the part list:

- 817 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. In the Edit Part List window, select the part in the Part Sources area.
 2. In the Properties pane (lower-right), on the Nesting tab, select Slug destroy.
When the part is added, tabs will be applied based on your slug destroy settings.

Remove slug destroy from a part

 1. Select one or more parts.

 2. On the Parts tab, click the arrow next to Slug Destroy, then click Remove Slug Destroy.
All slug destroy cuts will be removed, regardless of how they were added.

Remove slug destroy from individual profiles from Advanced Edit

 1. Bring a part into Advanced Edit.

 2. Click the Select Profiles toolbar button.

 3. Click an interior profile to select it.
 4. In the Properties pane for the profile, clear the Slug Destroy box.
 5. Click Apply.
 6. Remember to save your changes when you exit Advanced Edit.

- 818 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

29. ONECLICK
About OneClick
OneClick is a powerful production tool that automates various tasks in a ProNest job, from automatic nesting to cropping to creating out-
put and printing reports. You can also automatically run optimization, generate collision avoidance paths/raises, save remnants and skel-
etons to inventory, and cut up skeletons, depending on the ProNest modules that you have available.
 
With OneClick, you can set up all the actions that are required to complete a ProNest job. Once parts are added to the part list, OneClick
can be run to complete the rest of the work in your job with limited intervention.

Open the OneClick pane

 l On the View tab, click OneClick Pane.

 

The OneClick control pane

- 819 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

This is a dockable task pane, just like the Part List, Color Legend, Separations pane, and Properties pane.
 
The actions that will be taken during OneClick are listed in Action column. As OneClick completes each action, its status will be shown as
Completed in green.
 

Run/Resume OneClick will step through each action from top to

bottom, displaying the status for each one. While
OneClick is running, you can't interact with ProNest
by changing settings, adding or removing parts, etc.

Pause Temporarily pauses OneClick, which can then be con-

tinued by clicking Resume. Pausing can be useful for
reviewing work completed so far, such as nests.
When paused, you can't interact with ProNest by
changing settings, adding or removing parts, editing
nests, etc.

Stop Stops the current action and ends any OneClick pro-
gress that is already complete. After OneClick has
been stopped, it has to be re-run from the start
again.

Messages

In the Messages area at the bottom of the pane, information on each step is shown. Many of these links can be clicked (once OneClick
has successfully completed) displaying the relevant information either in the nest or in some other area of ProNest.
 
To show or hide the messages area:
 1. Click the Options toolbar button.
 2. Select or clear Show messages.

Configuring OneClick

You can enable or disable actions for OneClick and set whether to pause after each action is completed. You can also configure how
actions will be applied.
 
To configure OneClick options:
 1. Click the Options toolbar button.
 2. Select Configure OneClick.
The OneClick Options dialog will open. To read more about configuring OneClick, refer to "OneClick Options" on page 821.

- 820 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

OneClick Options
The available actions and properties for OneClick job automation are listed in the OneClick Options dialog. From this dialog, you can
enable or disable actions for OneClick and set whether to pause after each action is completed. You can also configure how actions will
be applied. Note that OneClick options are not machine-specific, they are global settings that are similar to ProNest preferences.

Open the OneClick Options dialog

 1. Open OneClick (on the View tab, click OneClick Pane ).
 2. Click the Options button.
 3. Select Configure OneClick.

The OneClick Options dialog

Enabling actions for OneClick

Each action can be either enabled or disabled, based on whether you want to include it in the OneClick process. When an action is dis-
abled, it will be excluded during OneClick, even if it is currently enabled in settings.
 
To enable an action:
 l Select the Enabled checkbox ( ) next to the action in the list.
-or-

- 821 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Select an action by clicking it.

 2. In the General Properties section, select the Action is enabled checkbox ( ).

Pause after this action

For each action, you can automatically pause OneClick after that action is completed. This can be useful if you want to review the work
completed up to that point during OneClick. For instance, if you select Pause after AutoNest, OneClick will pause after automatic nesting
is finished and you can use the nest navigation toolbar to page through each nest in your job before resuming OneClick.
 
To pause after an action:
 l Click the Pause button ( ) next to the action in the list.
-or-
 1. Select an action by clicking it.
 2. In the General Properties section, select the Pause after this action checkbox ( ).

Action properties

Action Properties

Nest (AutoNest / Nesting Sys- You can choose to nest parts using either AutoNest or Nesting System Optimization. This is the
tem Optimization) same as clicking AutoNest ( ) or the Nesting System Optimization ( ).
 
Show setup dialog before nesting starts
If this setting is selected, the AutoNest Setup dialog or Nesting System Optimization Setup dialog
will appear before nesting begins when running OneClick. If this is cleared, ProNest will go ahead
and begin nesting without displaying the setup dialog.

Build collision avoidance Collision avoidance paths and raises will be applied to each nest. This is the same as clicking Col-
lision Avoidance ( ).
 
Note that collision avoidance must be enabled on the Collision Avoidance settings page for this
action to take effect. Also, even if it is enabled in your settings, if this action is not enabled in the
OneClick Options dialog, it will be skipped during OneClick.

Crop AutoCrop will automatically be applied to your nests, according to your AutoCrop settings (on the
Crop settings page). This is the same as clicking AutoCrop All ( ).

Save remnants Any remnants created by AutoCrop will be saved to inventory. This is the same as going to Nest >
Save to Inventory and clicking "Save Remnants" for the nests in the job.
 
Remnants will be named according to the naming convention specified on the Naming page in
Preferences (File > Preferences > Naming).
 
Save interior remnants too
Interior remnants that meet the size requirements in your Interior Remnants settings will auto-
matically be created and also will be stored in inventory.

Cut up skeletons / You can select to either apply skeleton cut-up to your nests or save the skeletons to inventory.

- 822 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Action Properties

Save skeletons There are two choices available because some users cut-up the skeleton into pieces for removal
and scrap, whereas others save the skeleton to inventory so that they can nest on it at a later date.
 
Cut up skeletons
When selected, Enable skeleton cut-up must be selected on the Skeleton Cut-Up settings page
for this action to take effect. Note that even if Enable skeleton cut-up is selected in your settings,
if this action is not enabled in the OneClick Options dialog, it will be skipped during OneClick.
 
Save skeletons
This is the same as going to Nest > Save to Inventory and clicking "Save Skeletons" for the nests in
the job. Skeletons will be named according to the naming convention specified on the Naming
page in Preferences (File > Preferences > Naming).

Output CNC output will be created for each nest in the current job. This is the same as clicking Output NC
( ) and then clicking Output in the CNC Output dialog.
 
An output file naming convention can be set in the Base file name box, using variables and text.
If Base file name is left blank, output files will be named according to the default naming con-
vention.

Create reports You can have OneClick send a report batch to a report destination (a pre-defined target for pub-
lishing a report or batch of reports). One or more batch to destination assignments can be
entered. When this action is run, batch reports will be printed or saved according to the des-
tinations specified.
 
To add a batch to destination assignment:
 1. Click the Add button.
 2. In the Batch box, click the arrow ( ) and select a batch from the list.
 3. In the Destination box, select a corresponding destination from the list.
 
In order for this action to be enabled, report destinations must be set up (in Report Manager).

Save Saves the current job (.nif) in the Default job folder specified in your settings (Settings > Job Stor-
age), with a name based on your job naming formula from your preferences (File > Preferences >
Naming).

What effect does changing machines have on OneClick?

OneClick Options are similar to preferences in that they globally control how OneClick operates and are not specific to any particular
machine. ProNest will attempt to apply OneClick the same way from one machine to another. If an action is enabled in OneClick and is
not available on a given machine, that action will be skipped as OneClick runs. Note that the "Job Storage" setting is machine-specific, so
jobs may be saved to different folders based on which machine is loaded.
 

Example:
 

- 823 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Let's say you have one machine that uses collision avoidance and another that does not. In OneClick, you have Build collision avoid-
ance enabled. When OneClick is run on the machine that does not use collision avoidance, even though Build collision avoidance
will still be enabled in the Options dialog, it will be skipped during OneClick.

- 824 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

30. NESTING SYSTEM OPTIMIZATION

Nesting System Optimization
Nesting System Optimization is an optional module that will try multiple nesting strategies and plate sizes and select the best plate and
strategy to use for parts in the part list. You can fully control the sheet selection methodology and the nesting strategies to use, as well as
whether or not costing factors are included when determining the best nesting result.
 
The information in the Optimization page of your settings will determine how your nest will be optimized. For detailed information on set-
tings that affect Nesting System Optimization, see "Optimization settings" on page 115.
 
Nesting System Optimization can be used at any time, as long as the Part List contains parts to be nested.

Start Nesting System Optimization

 l On the Home tab, in the Automatic Nesting group, click Nesting System Optimization.
The Optimize Setup dialog will appear.

The Optimize Setup Dialog

Using this dialog you can adjust your Optimization settings on the fly and apply those changes to your nests. You can also set up how
plates are considered during the optimization process.

Optimization Settings
Nesting strategies to use
This setting displays the nesting strategies that have been chosen to use for the nesting trials during optimization.
 

 
To select strategies for optimization:
 1. Click on the down-arrow in the Nesting strategies to use box.
 2. Select each nesting strategy that should be attempted during optimization.
 3. Click OK to accept the selection.
See AutoNest to read more about strategies.
 
Plate selection criteria
Algorithm to use when selecting plates to use for each nesting trial.
 

- 825 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Choices: (None), Select One Plate Size, Select Best Plate For Each Nest
 
(None) - Plates will be nested in order. The first plate in the plate list will be optimized first, then the second plate, and so on.
 
Select One Plate Size - All nests created during optimization will be created from a single plate size.
 
Select Best Plate For Each Nest - All nesting trials will be performed on all plates in the plate list. The best result will be chosen, then nest-
ing trials with the remaining parts will be performed on the remaining plates and the best result chosen, etc.
 
Advanced
Clicking the Advanced button will open your Optimization settings page, where you can make further adjustments to your Nesting Sys-
tem Optimization settings.
 

Use plates from the following sources

Plate List
Plates in your plate list will always be considered during nesting trials. The number in parenthesis shows the number of plate list plates
that will be tried.
 
Inventory
Select this box to consider inventory plates during Nesting System Optimization. The number in parenthesis shows the number of invent-
ory plates that will be tried.
 
Clicking the Filter hyperlink will open the Inventory Filter dialog, where you can select which inventory plates to include in nesting trials.
 
Cut-To-Length
Select this box to consider a range of user-defined plate sizes. You can set the minimum and maximum plate lengths to use, as well as
what increments to try them in. This can be useful if you are using rolled coil and want to try long portions of plate during optimization.
Width is specified as a single value.

Note: In ProNest length is measured horizontally along the X-axis; width is expressed vertically, along the Y-axis.

- 826 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using Nesting System Optimization

Nesting System Optimization can be used at any time, as long as the part list contains parts to be nested.

Start Nesting System Optimization

 1. On the Home tab, in the Automatic Nesting group, click Nesting System Optimization.
The Optimize Setup dialog will appear.
 2. Adjust your Optimization Settings and plate sources, as necessary.
 3. Click OK.
Nesting System Optimization will begin.

Note: There is a progress bar in the lower left of the main ProNest window, indicating that optimization is in progress.

After ProNest analyzes all possible combinations and selects the best plate size and nesting strategy, your parts will be nested.

Stop an Optimization that is in progress

 l On the status bar (at the bottom of the main screen), click Stop.

- 827 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

31. BEVEL CUTTING

About bevel cutting
For users operating a cutting machine equipped with a programmable bevel head, the Bevel Cutting module enables you to create output
for parts with various types of beveled edges, such as multi-pass bevel cuts, bevel cuts requiring angle variation within the same entity,
and bevel cuts requiring looped corners (to allow for changes in bevel angle between different entities within the same profile).
 
Beveled edges can either be applied to a part manually using Advanced Edit, or automatically by directly importing bevel information
inside a CAD drawing layer.
 

- 828 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Bevel types
There are six different types of bevel cuts that you can create in ProNest.

Note: The following explanations assume a positive orientation. This means that the top cut, or V cut, is the positive bevel.

Bevel type Diagram (side view) Description

V cut The V cut requires a single top pass of the cutting head, which
is defined by a bevel angle ( ).
 

A cut The A cut requires a single bottom pass of the cutting head,
which is defined by a bevel angle ( ).

X cut The X cut requires two passes of the cutting head: a top pass
and a bottom pass. Each pass is defined by a bevel angle.
 
1 = Angle of Top Pass
2 = Angle of Bottom Pass
 
Note that with the X cut, the top and bottom pass will always
intersect at the horizontal bisector (indicated by the dotted
line).
 
 

Y cut The Y cut requires two passes of the cutting head: a top pass
and a land pass. The top pass is defined by a bevel angle,
while the land pass is defined by a linear distance called the
land dimension.
 
1 = Angle of Top Pass
2 = Land Dimension
 

- 829 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Bevel type Diagram (side view) Description

Y Bottom The Y Bottom cut requires two passes of the cutting head: a
cut land pass and a bottom pass. The bottom pass is defined by a
bevel angle, while the land pass is defined by a linear distance
called the land dimension.
 
1 = Angle of Bottom Pass
2 = Land Dimension

K cut The K cut is the most complicated of the bevel types, requiring
a top pass, a land pass, and a bottom pass.
 
The top and bottom pass are each defined in terms of bevel
angle, much like the V and A cuts. The land pass is defined in
terms of two factors: land dimension (the thickness of the
land pass) and land height (the distance from the bottom of
the plate to the bottom of the land pass).
 
1 = Angle of Top Pass
2 = Angle of Bottom Pass
3 = Land Dimension
4 = Land Height

- 830 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Applying beveled edges

You can manually add beveled edges to a part in Advanced Edit. There are a couple of conditions that are required before bevel pass pro-
files can be applied to a part:
 l Material and thickness assigned to the beveled part must be found in both the Bevel XLS and the Process Parameters XLS. Mater-
ial and thickness must be assigned before the part is added to the part list.
 l If you are using any bevel-specific leads or transition loops, you must make sure that the macros for those leads and loops can be
found in the Macro folder specified in the Bevel page of your ProNest settings ( ).

 l In the Bevel page of your ProNest settings ( ), the Settings table box must specify the correct Bevel spreadsheet.

Stage 1: Preparing the part

 1. Open the Edit Part List.

 2. From the Part Sources section, select the part by clicking it once.
 3. In the Nesting properties section, set the Material to a material type and thickness that can be found in your Bevel spreadsheet.
 4. Apply any other CAD Import, Nesting, or Leads properties, as necessary.
 5. In the Edit menu, select Add Part.

 6. Bring the part into Advanced Edit by clicking the Advanced Edit button ( ) in the Preview.
 7. In the View menu of Advanced Edit, make sure that Properties Toolbar and Bevel Side View are checked.
Once the part has added to the part list and Advanced Edit has been opened, you will be ready to apply bevel.

Stage 2: Applying bevel properties

 1. Using your mouse, select the entity that you want beveled.
The selected entity will turn blue. Entity properties will become visible in the Properties toolbar, and the Bevel Side View will dis-
play a side view of the selected entity, which should be "I" cut.

 2. In the Properties section, under Bevel Properties, select the desired Cut type from the drop-down list. Available cut types reflect
the bevel types listed in your Bevel XLS.
Notice that the Bevel Side View will be updated to show the selected cut type. Depending on the cut type that you select, one or
more Pass subsections will appear.
 3. For each top or bottom Pass, select an Angle from the drop down box.* The list of available angles will reflect the values in your
Bevel XLS.

- 831 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Cutting parameters will be automatically applied based on your Bevel XLS, according to the cut type and angle selected.
 4. If you are making a Y Top, Y Bottom, or K cut you will need to enter a Land dimension for the Land Pass. K cuts also require a
Land Height. Use the drop down box when selecting a value.*

 5. Once you have set your bevel properties as desired, click Apply at the bottom of the Properties toolbar.
 6. Repeat this procedure for all entities on the part that will be beveled.

*Note: When assigning a bevel angle or land dimension to a given pass, the best practice is to use the drop down box to select a
value. This will ensure that the value is listed in your Bevel spreadsheets.
 
If you enter an unlisted angle or land dimension using your keyboard, ProNest will not find a matching settings record for
it in the Bevel spreadsheet. Though it is possible to manually enter cutting parameters for a given pass, it is recommended
that this is done using your Bevel spreadsheets so that the correct settings are applied.

Stage 3: Locking in Pass Profiles

Once you have added all the beveled edges that you need to your part, you will be ready to lock in these pass profiles. Note that once
bevel pass profiles are locked in, they cannot be changed.
 
To lock in bevel pass profiles:
 l In the Bevel menu, click Make Pass Profiles.
or

 l Click the Make Pass Profiles toolbar button.

Beveled edges will be indicated by the color set in your Bevel Color Options. Multi-pass profiles (such as X or Y) will appear in 2-D view as
multiple parallel lines.
 

- 832 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: After Make Pass Profiles is selected, beveled edges cannot be added, altered, or deleted from a part. If for some reason you
locked in pass profiles but need to change the angle or type of bevel, you will need to discard all changes made to the part in
Advanced Edit:
 l If you haven't yet saved your changes to the part, you can select Reload from the File menu. All changes made in
Advanced Edit will be discarded.
 l If you have already saved your changes after making pass profiles, you will have to exit Advanced Edit, remove the
part from the part list, and complete this entire process over again.

Stage 4: Saving your changes

With pass profiles locked in, you should now save the changes to your part:
 l In the File menu of Advanced Edit, select Save Changes.
All changes made to your part in Advanced Edit, including all beveling information, will be saved. It is important to note that saved
changes apply to the part that has been added to the ProNest part list, and not the source file itself.

Changing the material of beveled parts

Once a part has been beveled and Make Pass Profiles is selected, the material type, thickness, and class should not be modified for that
part. Bevel angles, leads, and other settings parameters are applied based on material. Also, bevel consumables are specified using the
class name. Changing the material of a beveled part can result in incorrect cutting parameters.
 
If you need to change the material of a part that is already beveled, you will need to delete the part from the part list, add it again with the
new material, and then reapply beveling.

- 833 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Blind beveling
The blind bevel function in ProNest allows beveled edges to be applied over user-defined segments of a linear or arc entity. Beveled
edges can also be applied to notches on a part’s profile.
 

Note: In order to use blind beveling, your ProNest Bevel spreadsheet must be configured to handle blind beveling. In addition, you
will need special blind bevel lead and loop macros.

Blind beveling works much like conventional beveling, except that the bevel cut is done on only a portion of an entity. Because beveled
edges must be applied to a whole entity, and not a section of one, you must break that original entity down into smaller component entit-
ies before you can apply a blind bevel cut.

Applying a blind bevel

To manually add a blind bevel to a part:

 1. With the part in Advanced Edit, while in Entity Select mode, select the side that you will apply the blind bevel on.

 2. Use the Split Entity function to break down the selected entity so that the segment that you want to blind bevel is a separate
entity. (For instructions on how to use Split Entity, see "Split entity" on page 423.)
 3. Select the newly-created entity that you want to blind bevel.

- 834 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 4. Manually apply a beveled edge to the selected entity, as you normally would. (For detailed instructions on this step, see "Apply-
ing beveled edges" on page 831.)
When Make Pass Profiles is clicked, your special blind bevel leads and transition loops will be applied automatically.

Once pass profiles are locked in, your part will be ready for nesting.

Advanced: You can also blind bevel a part using AutoBevel by simply putting the blind bevel segment on a unique CAD layer and
naming that layer according to bevel type and angle, as described in "Naming CAD layers for AutoBevel" on page 838.

- 835 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Gradual bevel
With gradual bevel, you can transition from one bevel angle to another along one or more entities. When a gradual bevel on a part is cut,
the cutting head will gradually transition from the start type and angle to the end type and angle.
 

The beveled edge pictured above is a "V cut" with a Start angle of 15° and an End angle of 45°. (This assumes a positive ori-
entation is used and that the part will be cut in a clockwise direction)
 
 

Note: Gradual beveling is possible only with certain types of machines and bevel cutting heads. Please make sure that your
machine is capable of making transitional bevel cuts before using this feature.

Applying a gradual bevel

To manually add a gradual bevel to a part:

 1. With the part in Advanced Edit, while in Entity Select mode, select one or more consecutive entities that you will apply the
gradual bevel. To select multiple entities:
 l Hold SHIFT and click the first and last entities in the gradual bevel.
 l Hold CTRL and click the entities one by one.
 2. In the Properties pane, select Gradual bevel.
When this box is checked, you will be prompted to enter a bevel cut type for the Start and End of the selected entity. It is recom-
mended that you use the same cut type for both the Start and End, however you can transition from one bevel type to another
(for instance, V to A) depending on your machine's capability.
The most important aspect of gradual bevel is to set a different Angle for the Start and End of the selected entity. When the
gradual bevel part is cut, the cutting head will gradually transition from the Start angle to the End angle.
 3. For the Start of the selected entity or entities, enter a Type and Angle.
 4. For the End of the selected entity or entities, enter a Type and Angle.
 5. Manually apply a beveled edge to the selected entity, as you normally would. (For detailed instructions on this step, see "Apply-
ing beveled edges" on page 831.)
When Make Pass Profiles is clicked, your bevel leads and transition loops will be applied automatically.
Once pass profiles are locked in, your part will be ready for nesting.

- 836 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About AutoBevel
Using the Automatic Bevel feature, you can configure a CAD drawing so that ProNest will apply bevel information automatically when
the CAD file is imported.
 
The bevel layers are generally assigned to a CAD file using an external CAD editor, such as AutoCAD or 2D CAD, but can also be added
from within ProNest using CAD Cleanup. If you include bevel information in a CAD file, ProNest will automatically utilize that information
to apply beveled edges to the part during CAD import.

Using AutoBevel
To use automatic bevel, make sure that the following is implemented:
 l For 2D CAD files (such as DXF or DWG), set up bevel layer naming as described in Naming CAD layers for AutoBevel. This step is
not required for DSTV or 3D CAD files (SOLIDWORKS and Inventor).

 l  On the Bevel page of your ProNest settings ( ):

 l Select Use AutoBevel.
 l Enter a prefix for bevel layer names that will be used in your CAD drawings. By default, the prefix is "BVL".
Note: 3D CAD files (SOLIDWORKS or Inventor) and DSTV files (.nc1) don't require any specific bevel layer naming in the
part files. Leave this prefix set to "BVL" for these file types.

 l On the Importing Parts page of your ProNest settings ( ):

 l Map beveling to the cut process by entering the bevel prefix + wildcard (*). For instance, if the prefix is "BVL" you would
enter BVL* for the Cut process.

 l On the Bevel > Advanced page of your ProNest settings ( ), Compensate geometry must be selected.
 l Make sure that you set the correct material for the AutoBevel part file in ProNest before adding it to the part list.

AutoBevel for 3D CAD files

ProNest can identify beveled edges in SOLIDWORKS and Inventor parts and automatically assign beveling to them during import. This
method doesn't require any bevel layer naming in CAD.
 
Refer to Enable bevel detection in 3D CAD Files preferences to learn how to set this up.

AutoBevel for DSTV files

ProNest can identify beveled edges in DSTV parts (.nc1) and automatically assign beveling to them during import.
 l Follow the steps listed above for using AutoBevel.
 l Make sure that ProNest is set up to bring in DSTV cut geometry, as described in DSTV files.
 l V, A, Y, X and K cuts are supported.
 l Blind bevel is supported.
 l Gradual bevel is not supported.

- 837 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Naming CAD layers for AutoBevel

When naming CAD layers for AutoBevel, use the following format:
 
{prefix}{command}{value}

The default AutoBevel prefix that ProNest recognizes is "BVL". You can modify this prefix from the Bevel page of your ProNest settings,
but keep in mind that the prefix in your settings must always match the prefix of your CAD layer names.
 
Layer names should contain no blank spaces. Layer names are not case sensitive and it does not matter what order bevel commands
appear in the layer name (for example, BVLT30B30 = BVLB30T30).
 

Key for AutoBevel layers

T = Top Angle
B = Bottom Angle
L = Land Dimension
H = Land Height
S = Start (Gradual Bevel Angle)
E = End (Gradual Bevel Angle)

 
Angles (T, B, S, E) are expressed in degrees; linear distances (L, H) are expressed in inches or millimeters (depending on the CAD file units
used).
 
The following examples show side views of different types of beveled entities, with corresponding CAD layer names. A positive ori-
entation is used.

V Cut A Cut

CAD Layer : BVLT30 CAD Layer : BVLB30

   
 
 
X Cut Y Top Cut

- 838 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

CAD Layer : BVLT45B45 CAD Layer : BVLT45L15

   
 
 
Y Bottom Cut K Cut

CAD Layer : BVLB45L15 CAD Layer : BVLT45B45L8H4

   
 
 
Gradual bevel  
(V Cut with Start and End)
 

CAD Layer : BVLTS15E45  

- 839 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

32. WORK ORDERS

About work orders
The Work Order Processing module provides a way of automatically entering job data from an ERP/MRP system into ProNest. Work
orders that are created in the ERP/MRP system are immediately available in ProNest, where parts in an order can be sorted, added to the
part list, nested, and output to NC code. Once an order is completed, part and job tracking information can then be sent back to the
ERP/MRP system.
 
Follow the links below to read more about the work orders:
 l Work Orders preferences
 l Mapping material names for work orders
 l Importing work orders into ProNest
 l Work Orders database editor
 l Adding work order parts to the part list

- 840 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing work orders into ProNest

Typically, work orders are created by an external MRP system that is synchronized with ProNest. Work orders created by the MRP system
are automatically imported into the ProNest Work Orders database via an established import procedure.
 
MRP work orders that are imported into the Work Orders database have an Active status and are available to be added to the part list in a
ProNest job.

Manually creating work orders within ProNest

Aside from the automatic method described above, work orders can also be manually created and imported into the Work Orders data-
base.

Creating a work order in the Work Orders database

You can create a work order from an existing CAD file or token file.

 1. Open the Work Orders database editor (On the Data tab, click Work Orders ).
 2. On the File menu, select New.
 3. In the New dialog, enter the required work order information. Work Order Number and Part Name are required fields.

 4. In the CAD file name box, click the browse button ( ).

 5. Set the file type (DXF, DWG, etc.) to match the CAD file that you are using.
 6. Select the CAD file and click Open.
 7. Enter any other information for the work order.
 8. Click OK.
Your work order will be created in the database, with an Active status.

Creating a work order from an added part

You can also create work orders from added parts in ProNest. With this method, ProNest will save a token file of your added part with the
work order. The token file represents a processed version of the part and contains part geometry as well as leads and other properties.
 1. Add the part to the part list.
 2. Right-click the part and select Add to Work Orders.
 3. Enter a Work Order Number (WO Number).
 4. Click OK.
Your part will be added to the Work Orders database with an Active status. The token file containing geometry for that work order item is
stored in the Part Library folder specified in your Miscellaneous preferences.

- 841 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Mapping material names for work orders

Material naming conventions may differ between your MRP system and ProNest. To account for this, material aliases can be assigned in
the Materials editor, after a work order is imported:

 1. Open the Materials editor (on the Data tab, select Materials ).
 2. On the File menu, select Aliases.
 3. Click the Materials tab.
A list of MRP materials appear as aliases in the left column. These are the materials found in the work orders that have been impor-
ted. Initially, the right column displaying corresponding ProNest materials is blank.

Alias Material
PL 0.125  
PL 0.250  
PL 0.375  

 4. For each alias listed, select a ProNest material from the drop-down list. The list of available ProNest materials comes from your
Material Database.
Once MRP-ProNest material mapping is complete, ProNest materials will automatically be assigned to work order parts. Note that if a
material mapping does not appear in the Aliases list, it will not be matched to a work order part in ProNest.

Note: In Data Sync, the ERP/MRP field that is mapped to Material Description (in the Data Mapping tab of the Data Sync Manager)
will be brought in as the ProNest material. During import of a work order or inventory plates, if there are new materials in the
work order or list of plates that aren't in the ProNest Materials database, those materials will automatically be added to the
Aliases list (on the Materials tab).

- 842 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Work Orders database editor

The Work Orders database editor lets you view and manage all work orders in ProNest. All work orders that have been imported into
ProNest will remain visible, whether they are Active, Closed, or Cancelled.

In this article...
Open the Work Orders database editor
View work order allocations and status information
View allocations by job
Change the status of a work order
Edit a work order
Delete a work order

Open the Work Orders database editor

 l On the Data tab, click Work Orders.

View work order allocations and status information

 1. Right-click a work order in the grid.

 2. Select Properties.
The Work Order Item Detail dialog will open, displaying allocations for that work order item.
 

- 843 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

View allocations by job

 1. Right-click a work order in the grid that is allocated to the job that you want to view.
 2. Select Properties. The Work Order Item Detail dialog will open.
 3. In the list of Job allocations, click the link for the job.
The Job Detail dialog will open, displaying a list of all the work orders allocated to the selected job.

Change the status of a work order

Once a work order has been nested, output, and cut, you may want to change its status to Complete. Or you may need to cancel a work
order that has an Active status, so that it doesn't appear as an available item in the Edit Part List window.
 1. Select a work order in the grid by clicking it.
 2. Click the Set Status toolbar button.
 3. Select Active, Closed, or Cancelled.
 l Only work orders with an Active status are available to users for adding to jobs and nesting. Closed or Cancelled work
orders cannot be added to the part list.

Edit a work order

 1. Select a work order in the grid by clicking it.

 2. On the File menu, select Edit.
 3. Make your changes.
 4. Click OK when you have finished making changes.

Important: Use caution when editing fields that are used in the Unique ID set in your Work Order preferences (this may include
Part Name, WO Number, Revision). These fields are used by ProNest and the MRP software to identify and track the
work order.

Delete a work order

 1. Select a work order in the grid by clicking it.

 2. On the File menu, select Delete.
Work orders that are allocated in a ProNest job that is currently open can't be deleted until that job is closed.

- 844 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding work order parts to the part list

Work orders with an Active status can be added to the part list as follows:

 1. Open the Edit Part List window (on the Home tab, click Edit Part List ).

 2. In the Part Sources section, select the Work Orders tab.
All active work orders are displayed in the grid.

Tip: It may be useful to use grouping, sorting, and filtering to organize work orders in the grid by due date, material, customer,
etc. To learn more, see How to use grids and Using grid filters.

 3. Select one or more work order parts from the list.
 4. In the CAD Import: Properties pane, set the process to CAD layer mappings.
 5. Click the Add Parts button.
The work order parts will be added with the quantity specified in the work order.

Points to consider
 l Once a work order is added to the part list, it becomes allocated to that job.
 l The properties specified in the work order item will override any properties set in the Edit Part List window.

- 845 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Managing work order allocations

Each work order part has a required quantity specified in the order. When a work order part is added to the part list, the quantity called
for in the order becomes assigned, or allocated, to that ProNest job.

View allocations for work order parts

 1. Open the Work Orders database editor (on the Data tab, click Work Orders ).
 2. Right-click a work order in the grid and select Properties.
The Work Order Item Detail dialog will open, displaying allocations for that work order item.

The Work Order Item Detail dialog

Tip: By clicking a link for a job, you can open the Job Detail dialog, which will display all work order allocations in that job.

Over and under allocations

By default, when a work order part is added to the part list, ProNest will attempt to add the total quantity required from the work order. If
the quantity of the part is adjusted in ProNest so that it is less than the quantity specified in the order, this will be indicated in the part
list.
 

This part is under-allocated by three ( 3). The order calls for 10 copies of the part, but the quantity specified in ProNest is
only 7.
 
Likewise, if the quantity of the part exceeds the quantity specified in the order, the part will appear red in the part list.
 

- 846 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The part shown here is over-allocated by two ( 2).

Correct over or under allocations

 1. Right-click the part in the Part List pane.

 2. Select Work Orders then Correct Allocation
-or-
 l Adjust the quantity of the part manually.

Release unnested quantities

During nesting, you may find that not all of the required quantity of a part can be fit in a given job. Let’s say, for instance, that a part's
allocated quantity is 15, but only ten copies of the part could be nested. You may want to release the other 5 copies of the part back to
the work order database so that those parts can be added to a different job.
 l In the Part List pane, right-click the part and select Release un-nested quantities.
The quantity of the part that is not nested will become un-allocated from the job. In the Work Orders Database, the quantity allocated will
be reduced by the number of parts that were released.

- 847 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

33. CUSTOMERS
Customers editor
The Customers database editor stores a list of all your company’s clients. Once this list is created, it will be available within ProNest,
enabling you to assign a customer for each part. Using this information, ProNest can generate reports that are itemized by customer.

Open the Customers editor

You can access ProNest database editors internally from the Data tab in the main ProNest window. Database editors can also be run
externally as stand-alone applications.
 
To access stand-alone Customers database editor:

 l Start > Hypertherm CAM > Customers.

 
To open the Customers editor from within ProNest:

 l On the Data tab, click Customers.

Once the Customers editor is open, you can add, modify, or remove customer listings from it.

Add a customer

 1. On the File menu, select New.

 2. On the General tab, in the Company box, enter a name for the customer. You can also enter a contact person and billing address
for this customer.
 3. On the Shipping tab, add any shipping information that you would like to include.
 4. Click OK.
Your customer will be added to the database.

Change customer information

 1. Select a customer listing

 2. On the File menu, click Properties.
 3. Change the customer information as needed.
 4. Click OK.
You changes will be saved in the database.

Delete a customer

 1. Select a customer listing

 2. On the File menu, select Delete.
 3. Click Yes.
The customer will be deleted from the database.

- 848 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Customer properties
To open the Properties window for a customer:
 
 l In the Customers editor (Data tab > Customers ), click New to add a new customer or double-click an existing customer record
to edit it.
 

General tab
This tab contains general information about the customer, including company name, primary contact, and billing address.

Note: In quoting, a customer's billing address or shipping address can be used in the Prepared for section.

Shipping tab

Max Delivery Weight

The maximum weight that the customer can accept.
 
Units: lbs. or kg

Material Markup
Markup rate applied to material cost. A negative value would represent a discount.
 
This value is used as a default when creating a quote for the customer.
 
Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal
Range: -100% to 1000000%

Production Markup
Markup rate applied to production cost. A negative value would represent a discount.
 
This value is used as a default when creating a quote for the customer.
 
Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal
Range: -100% to 1000000%

Tax Rate
The sales tax rate that should be used for the customer. This value is used as a default when creating a quote for the customer.
 
Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal

Apply Tax
When selected, the Tax Rate will be applied as a default when creating a quote for the customer.
 

- 849 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

34. DRILLING
About drilling
The Drill Machine Interface in ProNest is designed to support machines capable of tooling parts with a spindle head. You can bring in
parts and automatically assign various size drill tools to the holes.

Setup
 l First time setup
 l Creating a tool library

Drawing parts with drill information

 l Drawing basic drilled parts in CAD
 l Drawing drilled parts with Blocks
 l Tapping
 l Countersink drilling
 l Importing SOLIDWORKS drill holes

Tool library
 l About the tool library
 l Drill tools
 l Compound tools
 l Missing tools

Settings
 l Tooling settings contain import and sequencing options for drilling
 l Drilling process settings
 l Drill Parameters
 l Tips for getting the drill sequence you want

Turret
 l Model the turret with Turret settings
 l The Turret task pane
 l Modifying turret layouts for a nest

Verification and editing

 l Verifying tool assignments for holes
 l Viewing the drill profile sequence
 l Changing tool assignments for holes

Pre-pierces
 l Pre-piercing with drill tools

Costing
 l Accounting for tooling in costing

Reports
 l View drilling information by nest in the Tool Layout standard report

- 850 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Setting up the Drill Interface

This article contains a general overview of what's needed for a typical drill-capable setup in ProNest 2019.

Configuration archive
Drill Interface setups are typically provided in a configuration archive that contains all of the basic files you need to get started. A drill-
compatible configuration archive (.pn, .pnca) would have been provided to you by Hypertherm.
 
 l Make sure that you have the correct configuration archive (.pn or .pnca) and that you've installed it prior to continuing.

Note: ProNest 2019 drill setups use a single CFF for both cutting and drilling.

Preferences
Next, set your preferences to match the folder where the Tool Library XML file is stored.
 l In Preferences (File tab > Preferences), on the Settings tab, make sure that the Tooling settings folder is set.
By default, this is set to C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\Tooling. You can use the existing folder or point to a different one, just be
sure that the tool library file can be found in this Tooling folder (and not in any subfolders or other folders).

Drill Process Parameters spreadsheet

This file contains all of the machine parameters specific to drilling and other spindle operations, such as spindle speed and vertical
feedrate. It is a separate file from the Process Parameters spreadsheet used for the cut process.

 1. Open Settings.

 2. Under Machine at the top of the left pane, click the Drilling process.

 3. Select a Process Parameters spreadsheet to use for drill tools.

The list of available spreadsheets reflects what is found in the Process Parameters folder in preferences (as discussed above). See Drill Pro-
cess Parameters for more information.

Configure the turret

Next, you will need to model the tool stations of your drill machine's automatic tool changer. In ProNest, this is referred to as the "turret".

 1. Open Settings.

 2. On the left, double-click the Tooling page, then click Turret.
 3. Enter the number of stations and other details related to your machine. See Turret settings for more information.
This is the default turret configuration. It is used as the basis for creating Turret Layouts as you nest in ProNest. It is important that the
number of stations in ProNest matches the capabilities of your physical machine.

Setting up the tool library

In ProNest, the tool library represents the entire collection of all tools in your operation that can be used by the current machine. The Drill
Tools tab in the Tool Library shows all physical spindle-based tools, such as drills and taps, in the library.
 
For help starting a new tool library, see Creating a tool library.

- 851 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
Once you have a tool library in place, you can add tools as described in Tool Library: Drill Tools and Compound tools.

Costing
If you are using ProNest costing, drilling can be accounted for using a process-specific Costing spreadsheet for drilling.

- 852 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Drawing basic drilled parts in CAD

There are a few basic rules to follow when drawing parts that contain drill holes in a CAD program.

Shape
ProNest assumes that drill hole geometry in the CAD file will be circular. Make sure that any holes that are meant to be drilled are drawn
as circle entities.

Note: Shape is not used for identifying tooling when using Blocks.

Unique layer for drilling

ProNest identifies drilled holes in a CAD drawing based on layer name. In the CAD file, all geometry that will be drilled should be drawn
on a unique CAD layer. That layer name would need to be mapped to the Drilling process on the Importing Parts settings page in
ProNest.
 
Example:
 
In this CAD file, the exterior profile of the part is drawn on a "CUT" layer that is mapped to the cut process. The two selected drill
holes are drawn on a different layer called "DRILL".

In order for ProNest to recognize these as drill holes, you would need to enter "DRILL" as a layer name for the Drilling process in
Importing Parts settings.
 

Drilling DRILL

Note: If you have round holes that are on a layer assigned to a Cut process in ProNest (e.g. plasma or gas), you can turn on the Use
tooling on cut layers when possible setting (on the Tooling settings page) to attempt to match those profiles to a tool in the
library.

Hole size
In order for tool assignment to work during part import, round holes must be drawn in CAD so that they match the Diameter of the drill
tool listed in the tool library. On the Tooling page in settings, you can enter a Tool recognition tolerance, which is both an upper and
lower tolerance that ProNest uses for matching holes in a CAD file to drill tools in the library.

Note: Hole size is not used for identifying tooling when using Blocks.

Pilot holes
If a drill hole requires a pilot hole, this can be drawn in one of three ways:

- 853 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Method 1: Draw a single hole that represents both the pilot hole and the finish drill hole

In the tool library, the Pilot Drill column can be used to specify a pre-drill for any individual drill tool. If you're using this feature, you
only need to draw a single hole in the CAD drawing.

The diameter of the hole in CAD should match the diameter of the larger drill tool. With this method, pilot hole size is not explicity spe-
cified in the CAD drawing. Instead, it relies on the larger drill tool to have an associated Pilot drill defined in the tool library.
 
With this method, you will also need to adjust ProNest settings as follows:
 1. Open the Tooling settings page (Settings > Tooling ).
 2. Set Pilot drill options to either Enable pilot drills, sequence them together or Enable pilot drills, sequence them separately .

Method 2: Draw two holes, one for the pilot hole and another for the finish drill hole

If you're not using the Pilot Drill column in the tool library, you would need to draw two holes, one for the pilot hole and the other for
the larger finish drill hole.

Each hole is then matched to an individual tool during import.

 
With this method, you will also need to adjust ProNest settings as follows:
 1. Open the Tooling settings page (Settings > Tooling ).
 2. Set Pilot drill options to Disable pilot drills.

Method 3: Use a compound tool

You can also use a compound tool to handle holes that require multiple tool hits. Drawing holes in CAD that are intended to match com-
pound tools during import is most commonly done using AutoCAD® Blocks.

Advanced drawing techniques

 l Drawing drilled parts with Blocks
 l Tapping
 l Compound tools

- 854 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Drawing drilled parts with Blocks

Blocks (an AutoCAD® feature) can be used to match a hole to a specific tool in the tool library, whether it is a single physical tool or a
compound tool.
 
Once the tooling block file has been created, blocks can easily be added to any drawing. The advantage of using blocks to represent your
tools is that you can control exactly which tool is assigned to a drilled hole during import.

Note: These directions are written for AutoCAD 2016. They may not be the exact steps needed for your version of AutoCAD. Please
refer to AutoCAD documentation for detailed instructions on blocks.

Create and insert a tooling Block in an AutoCAD drawing

 1. Start with an empty drawing.

 2. Add layers in the drawing, including a layer dedicated for drill holes. Make sure this layer name maps to the ProNest drilling pro-
cess, as described below.
 3. On the drilling layer, draw a circle that matches the diameter of the tool. Note that hole diameter in CAD is not used by ProNest
when matching a block name to a tool. This is just a suggestion to keep geometry in the drawing accurate.
 4. On the Insert tab, in the Block Definition group, click Create Block.
 5. In the Block Definition dialog, enter a Name for the block. This name should match exactly with the corresponding tool name in
ProNest. Limit the name to 15 characters or less.

 6. In the Base point section, make sure Specify On-screen is selected.

- 855 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 7. In the Objects section, click the Select Objects button ( ), then click the circle object that you created in the drawing area.
 8. Press ENTER.
You will return to the Block Definition dialog. A small preview of the circle you selected will be visible at the top (next to the
Name box).
 9. Make sure Convert to block is selected.
 10. Enter a description if needed and be sure to set Block Units to the appropriate value.
 11. Click OK.
You will return to the drawing area, where you will need to specify an insertion point.
 12. When clicking to place the Block Insertion Point, set it at the geometric center of the circle you created.

 13. The block reference is now created. At this point, save the drawing.
 14. With the block created and saved in the drawing, you can start placing the block in other areas of the drawing, anywhere that
hole is needed.
 15. On the Insert tab, in the Block group, click Insert, then select the block you just created ("TP0500CS" in the example above).
 16. Confirm that all blocks are assigned to the drilling layer.
 17. Make sure any other geometry needed is added to the drawing on the correct layer. This may include cut profiles, marking, dimen-
sion or other display only information.
 18. Save the drawing.
These steps describe the basics of using blocks in a single drawing. However, blocks are very flexible - they can be saved to a unique
drawing and reused in different drawings later on when needed. Please consult AutoCAD documentation for more details.

Importing a drawing with a tooling Block into ProNest

When the CAD drawing is imported into ProNest, the tool that matches the block name will be assigned and centered at the block inser-
tion point. This could be a physical drill tool or a compound tool.
 
Prior to importing a CAD file with a tooling Block:
 l In the Tool Library editor, make sure tool names match the corresponding block names you've used in AutoCAD.
 l Make sure the layer name containing drill holes is mapped to the Drilling process on the Importing Parts settings page in ProNest.
 
You can confirm the location of the block insertion points in ProNest prior to import as follows:
 1. Select the drawing containing blocks in the Part Sources pane of the Edit Part List window.

 2. In the Preview, click CAD Cleanup - Simple.

 3. On the View menu, select Punch Points.
A plus sign (+) will appear on each block insertion point in the drawing.

- 856 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Important: Once you have a block defined in a drawing, don't attempt to edit the drawing in 2D CAD or any other CAD editor that
doesn't support blocks.

- 857 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Tapping
For machines that support tapping operations (cutting an internal threaded hole in a part), ProNest can bring in tapping information
from a CAD drawing and include tapping instructions in output code.
Tapped holes can be either coarse or fine in ProNest. This is necessary to resolve situations where there are two tap tools of the same dia-
meter (e.g. M6x0.5 and M6x1) and you need ProNest to recognize the hole as requiring one tool over the other.

Tapping information in CAD drawings

Shape
ProNest assumes that drill hole geometry in the CAD file will be circular. Make sure that any holes that are meant to be drilled are drawn
as single circle entities.

Layer
Tapped holes should be drawn on the CAD layer designated for drilling. That layer name would need to be mapped to the Drilling pro-
cess on the Importing Parts settings page in ProNest. This tells ProNest that the hole should be drilled.

Color
ProNest can use CAD color numbers to identify tapped holes (required for methods 1 and 2 only, see below for details).
 l Tapped holes must also have a CAD color that is different from other non-tap holes on that CAD layer. This enables ProNest to
recognize them as tapped holes. There is one CAD color used for coarse tapping and another for fine tapping.
 l In ProNest, on the Tooling settings page, you must specify the CAD color numbers used for coarse and fine taps. When the part is
imported, ProNest will recognize that those holes require coarse or fine tapping based on their color.

Hole size
In order for tool assignment to work during part import, taps must be drawn in CAD so that they match the diameter of the tapping tool
listed in the tool library.
 

Figure 1 Side view of a part with a tapped hole extend- Top view of the same part drawn in
ing all the way through. The diameter of the tap pre- CAD. The diameter of the hole (1)
drill (2) and tap (1) are shown. would match the tap tool.

Note: Hole size is not used for identifying tooling when using Blocks.

Method 1: Draw one hole for each tapped hole

You can set up ProNest so that tapped holes only require one hole to be drawn. The tap hole needs to have the same color number as the
Tap coarse color or Tap fine color from ProNest settings.

- 858 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The diameter of the hole in CAD should match the diameter of the tap tool. With this method, tap pre-drill size is not explicity specified in
the CAD drawing. Instead, it relies on the tap tool in the tool library to have an associated Pilot Drill defined.
 
You will need to adjust ProNest settings as follows:
 1. Open the Tooling settings page (Settings > Tooling ).
 2. Set Pilot drill options to either Enable pilot drills, sequence them together or Enable pilot drills, sequence them separately .

Method 2: Draw two holes for each tapped hole

With this method, you would need to draw two holes, one for the pre-drill tap hole and the other for the tap hole. Only the tap hole
needs to have the same color number as the Tap coarse color or Tap fine color from ProNest settings. Both holes should be on a layer
mapped to the Drilling process.

Figure 2 CAD drawing with a tapped 8 mm hole. Both the 6.8 mm tap pre-drill hole and the 8 mm tap hole are drawn on the
same DRILL layer. Only the tap hole is assigned to a color that matches the Tap coarse color or Tap fine color in ProNest set-
tings.
 
With this method, you will also need to adjust ProNest settings as follows:
 1. Open the Tooling settings page (Settings > Tooling ).
 2. Set Pilot drill options to Disable pilot holes.
 
In the Tool Library, you'd need to have a separate tool for tapping with no pilot drill specified. The tap pre-drill tool would be listed sep-
arately.

Method 3: Specifying tap as a compound tool

You can always use a compound tool in the library for tapping. Compound tools must be used for blind tap cuts that do not extend all
the way through the part. Also, if there are more than two operations on a tapped hole (for instance, pre-drilling, tapping, and coun-
tersinking), you will need to use a compound tool.

Figure 3 Side view of a part with a blind tapped hole. This hole would be drawn so that it matches a specific compound tool
 

- 859 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

With compound tools, the individual tap tools must still be entered in the tool library with a TC or TF prefix. However, ProNest doesn't
rely on color in the CAD drawing to identify it as a tap hole. Instead, block name (or hole size) is used to match the hole to the compound
tool.
 
To learn more about drawing CAD files for compound tools, see Compound tools and Drawing drilled parts with Blocks.

Tool library

Tool name
In the tool library, the name for a tap tool must begin with TC or TF. TC is used for coarse taps, TF is used for fine taps.

Pilot Drill (only needed for method 1)

Tap tools listed on the Drill Tools tab in the tool library should have a tap pre-drill tool defined in the Pilot Drill column.
 
Example
A tap tool called M8x0.5 requires a 7.5 mm tap pre-drill. This could be entered in the Tool Library: Drill Tools tab as follows:
 

Name Description Diameter Station Type Pilot Drill

7.5MM Round 7.5 mm 7.5 mm D  
TCM8x0.5 M8x0.5 Coarse Tap 8.0 mm D 7.5MM

 
When TCM8x0.5 is assigned to a tap hole, the 7.5 mm tap pre-drill will automatically be assigned along with it.

ProNest settings
The following areas of ProNest settings should be configured so that tapped holes can be brought in.

Drill process layer mapping (required for all methods)

On the Settings > Importing Parts page, on the CAD Import tab, in the box next to the Drilling process, type the layer name(s) that
you are using for drilling in your CAD drawings.
 
Example
If your ProNest machine supported a tooling process called "Drilling" and you wanted to assign "Drill" and "Tool" CAD layers to
that process, you would enter:
 

Drilling Drill;Tool

When a CAD file is imported, all geometry on the "Drill" and "Tool" layers would be brought in as drilled holes.

Use CAD Colors (only needed for methods 1 and 2)

On the Settings > Importing Parts page, on the CAD Import tab, set Quality to Use CAD Colors.

- 860 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Tap colors (only needed for methods 1 and 2)

On the Settings > Tooling page, set Coarse tap color and Fine tap color to match the color index numbers that you are using to indic-
ate tapping in your CAD drawings.

Color aliases (optional for methods 1 and 2)

If you want, you can use ProNest quality color aliases to easily identify coarse or fine taps on a nest.
 1. In the Color Legend, click Options and then click the Quality tab.
 2. Enter aliases for the two quality colors used for tapping (for example, "Tap Coarse" or "Tap Fine").
 3. Click OK.
 4. In the Color Legend, select the Outline: Quality scheme.
When tapped parts are nested, you can hover over the quality colors to highlight tapped holes on the nest. Note that this method will
only show whether a hole is tapped or not, it will not visually differentiate between tapped holes with differing sizes.

Tip: If you can't see the Color Legend on the main window, go to the View tab and select Color Legend.

- 861 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Blind drill holes

By default, all drilled holes in ProNest are through-cut unless otherwise specified. Drill tools in ProNest can be set up to support blind
(non-through) holes.
 
In ProNest, hole depth is a property of a tool. This means that you must match a blind hole in your drawing to the correct tool to get the
required depth for that hole. This tool may be an individual drill tool with Depth specified in the Drill Parameters XLS or a compound tool
containing an individual tool with the right depth specified.

Depth in a compound tool

Any individual tool in a compound tool can have a non-through depth specified. Refer to Compound tools for details on creating a com-
pound tool and to read more about tool depth.

Note: Any Depth entered for a compound tool (including Full Depth) will always override any depth value in a Drill Parameters
spreadsheet for that tool.

Single hit compound tool

If you need a single blind hit on a hole, you could create a compound tool that contains a single individual tool and assign a partial
depth to that tool.
 
Example
Suppose a 20 mm thick part requires a 10 mm diameter hole that is 6 mm deep.

There might be an existing 10 mm individual drill tool in the tool library, but in most cases when this tool is used it is a full depth
hole.
 
You could create a new compound tool and add only that individual 10 mm drill to it. In Tool Library: Compound Tools tab, in the
Tools for section, set the Depth for the 10 mm diameter tool to 6 mm. Save the compound tool with a unique name. This compound
tool would then be used only when the 10 mm drill tool is needed at a depth of 6 mm.
 
Compound Tool A
 1. RN10 mm, Depth = 6 mm

When you draw a CAD file with the blind hole, you would need to call out that compound tool either using Blocks or some other
means (as detailed in Compound tools).

Multiple hit compound tool

If you need multiple hits on a hole and some or all of them are blind holes, you could create a compound tool that contains a several indi-
vidual tools and assign a partial depth to any of the tools, as needed.
 
Example

- 862 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

For instance, a single hole might require the following:

 1. Spot drill

 2. Pre-drill the hole for tapping
 3. Thread the hole with a tap tool
 4. Countersink the hole
 

A compound tool could be added that has these four operations in the correct order.
 
Compound Tool B
 1. SpotDrill, Depth = 1.5 mm
 2. TapDrill, Depth = full depth
 3. Tap0500, Depth = full depth
 4. CS82, Depth = 8 mm

When that compound tool is assigned to a hole, each tool operation is automatically assigned sequentially.

Depth for a tool using the Drill Parameters spreadsheet

Use this method when a tool always uses a non-through depth or you want to specify different depths for a tool based on material.
 
For example, if you have a spot drill that has a fixed depth, you could specify the Drill Depth in the Drill Process Parameters spreadsheet
for that tool. When that individual tool is assigned to a hole, the depth value would come from the Drill Parameters spreadsheet. Note
that if this tool is used as part of a compound tool, the depth in the compound tool will always be used.

Important: Not all drill-enabled setups can support depth using the Drill Process Parameters spreadsheet. Please contact Hyper-
therm if you need more information on this feature.

- 863 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Countersinking
For machines that support countersink drilling (enlarging a hole at an angle to accommodate the conical head of a bolt or screw),
ProNest can bring in countersinking information from a CAD drawing and include countersink instructions in output code.

In this article...
Countersinking information in CAD drawings
Tool library
ProNest settings
Countersink depth
Countersinking in 3D part files

Countersinking information in CAD drawings

Shape
ProNest assumes that drill hole geometry in the CAD file will be circular. Make sure that any holes that are meant to be drilled are drawn
as single circle entities.

Layer
Countersunk holes must be drawn on the CAD layer designated for drilling. That layer name would need to be mapped to the Drilling pro-
cess on the Importing Parts settings page in ProNest. This tells ProNest that the hole should be drilled.

Color
ProNest can use CAD color numbers to identify countersunk holes (required for methods 1 and 2 only, see below for details).
 l Countersunk holes must also have a CAD color that is different from other non-countersink holes on that CAD layer. This enables
ProNest to recognize them as countersink holes.
 l In ProNest, on the Tooling settings page, you must specify the CAD color number used for countersinking. When the part is
imported, ProNest will recognize that those holes require countersinking based on their color.

Hole size
In order for tool assignment to work during part import, the top diameter of a countersunk hole must be drawn in CAD so that it matches
the diameter of a countersink tool listed in the tool library.

Note: Hole size is not used for identifying tooling when using Blocks.

Method 1: Draw one hole for each countersink hole

This method can be used for holes that require only two hits, for instance a through-hole and a countersink. You wouldn't want to use
this method if you're countersinking a tapped hole, which would typically involve three or more hits.
 
You can set up ProNest so that countersink holes only require one hole to be drawn. The countersink hole needs to have the same color
number as the Countersink color from ProNest settings.
 

- 864 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Side view of a part with countersinking on a through- Top view of the same part drawn in
hole. The diameter of the through-drill (1) and top dia- CAD using method 1. Only the coun-
meter of the countersink (2) are shown. tersink hole (2) is drawn.

 
The diameter of the hole in CAD should match the diameter of the countersink tool. With this method, through-hole drill size is not expli-
city specified in the CAD drawing. Instead, it relies on the countersink tool in the tool library to have an associated Pilot Drill defined.
 
You will need to adjust ProNest settings as follows:
 1. Open the Tooling settings page (Settings > Tooling ).
 2. Set Pilot drill options to either Enable pilot drills, sequence them together or Enable pilot drills, sequence them separately .

Method 2: Draw two holes for each countersunk hole

Like method 1, this method can be used for holes that require only two hits. You wouldn't want to use this method on countersunk holes
with three or more hits.
 
With this method, you would need to draw two holes, one for the through-hole and the other for the countersink hole. Only the coun-
tersink hole needs to have the same color number as the Countersink color from ProNest settings. Both holes should be on a layer
mapped to the Drilling process.
 

Side view of a part with countersinking on a Top view of the same part drawn in
through-hole. The diameter of the through-drill (1) CAD using method 2. Both the through
and top diameter of the countersink (2) are shown. hole (1) and the countersink hole (2)
are drawn on the same DRILL layer.
Only the countersink hole is assigned a
color that matches the Countersink
color in ProNest settings.

 
With this method, you will also need to adjust ProNest settings as follows:

- 865 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Open the Tooling settings page (Settings > Tooling ).

 2. Set Pilot drill options to Disable pilot holes.
 
In the Tool Library, you'd need to have a separate tool for countersinking with no pilot drill specified. The pilot tool would be listed sep-
arately.

Method 3: Specifying countersink as a compound tool

You can always use a compound tool in the library for countersinking. If there are more than two operations on a hole (for instance,
drilling, tapping, and countersinking), you will need to use a compound tool.

Side view of a part with a tapped and countersunk hole. This hole would be drawn in CAD so that it matches a specific com-
pound tool.
 
With compound tools, the individual countersink tools must still be entered in the tool library with a CS prefix. However, ProNest doesn't
rely on color in the CAD drawing to identify it as a countersunk hole. Instead, block name (or hole size) is used to match the hole to the
compound tool.
 
To learn more about drawing CAD files for compound tools, see Compound tools and Drawing drilled parts with Blocks.

Tool library

Tool name
In the tool library, the name for a countersink tool must begin with CS.

Pilot Drill (only needed for method 1)

Countersink tools listed on the Drill Tools tab in the tool library should have a through-hole tool defined in the Pilot Drill column.
 
Example
A countersink tool called CS16 requires a 10.5 mm through-hole. This could be entered in the Tool Library: Drill Tools tab as follows:
 

Name Description Diameter Station Type Pilot Drill

M10.5 Round 10.5 MM 10.5 mm D  
CS16 CS 90 deg M10 Max 16 mm D M10.5

 
When CS16 is assigned to a countersunk hole, the 10.5 mm through-drill will automatically be assigned along with it and sequenced
first.

- 866 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

ProNest settings
The following areas of ProNest settings should be configured so that countersunk holes can be brought in.

Drill process layer mapping (required for all methods)

On the Settings > Importing Parts page, on the CAD Import tab, in the box next to the Drilling process, type the layer name(s) that
you are using for drilling in your CAD drawings.
 
Example
If your ProNest machine supported a tooling process called "Drilling" and you wanted to assign "Drill" and "Tool" CAD layers to
that process, you would enter:
 

Drilling Drill;Tool

When a CAD file is imported, all geometry on the "Drill" and "Tool" layers would be brought in as drilled holes.

Use CAD Colors (only needed for methods 1 and 2)

On the Settings > Importing Parts page, on the CAD Import tab, set Quality to Use CAD Colors.

Countersink color (only needed for methods 1 and 2)

On the Settings > Tooling page, set Countersink color to match the color index number that you are using to indicate countersinking
in your CAD drawings.

Color alias (optional for methods 1 and 2)

If you want, you can use ProNest quality color aliases to easily identify countersinking on a nest.
 1. In the Color Legend, click Options and then click the Quality tab.
 2. Enter an alias for the quality color used for countersinking (for example, "Countersink").
 3. Click OK.
 4. In the Color Legend, select the Outline: Quality scheme.
When parts are nested, you can hover over that quality color to highlight countersunk holes on the nest. Note that this method will
only show whether a hole is countersunk or not, it will not visually differentiate between countersunk holes with differing sizes.

Tip: If you can't see the Color Legend on the main window, go to the View tab and select Color Legend.

- 867 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Countersink depth
In ProNest, hole depth is a property of a tool. This means that you must match a blind hole in your drawing to the correct tool to get
the required depth for that hole. This tool may be an individual drill tool with Depth specified in the Drill Parameters XLS or a com-
pound tool containing an individual tool with the right depth specified.
 
In either case, you'd need to first determine the required depths for the countersink tool hits you will use.

Side view of countersunk hole, with countersink depth (d) shown.

 
Next, enter your set of countersink tools on the Drill Tools tab in the tool library, making sure to use the CS prefix in the tool name.
Once countersink tools have been created, countersink depth can be set in one of two ways:

In a compound tool
Create a compound tool, add a countersink tool, then set the depth for that tool hit. With this method, you'd create a separate com-
pound tool for each depth that is required.
 
Example
Suppose you have a 90 degree countersink bit that can be used to make countersunk holes at depths of 5 mm, 8 mm, and 10 mm.
 

 
On the Drill Tools tab in the tool library, you could enter the countersink tool as CS90_0500. Then on the Compound Tools tab,
you could create the following compound tools:
 
Compound Tool M5
 1. RN6mm, Depth = full depth
 2. CS90_0500, Depth = 5 mm

Compound Tool M8
 1. RN9mm, Depth = full depth
 2. CS90_0500, Depth = 8 mm

Compound Tool M10

 1. RN11mm, Depth = full depth
 2. CS90_0500, Depth = 10 mm

These compound tools could then be matched to holes during import, as described in Compound tools.

In a Drill Parameters spreadsheet

- 868 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Enter countersink drill tools in the Drill Parameters spreadsheet and specify a depth for each tool. With this approach, every time the
individual countersink tool is used, that hole will use the depth from the XLS (except when applied as a compound tool).
 
Refer to Blind drill holes for more information.

Countersinking in 3D part files

When importing 3D parts, by default ProNest chooses the face with the largest surface area. On parts with countersunk holes, the face
containing countersinking may have a smaller surface area than the opposite side of the part, due to the larger diameter of the coun-
tersunk holes. Nevertheless, the face with countersinking still must be selected when the part is imported.
 
You can use the Top view coordinate system name option in 3D CAD Files preferences to ensure that the face with countersinking
geometry is imported so that the correct tools are assigned.
 
Example
The following part has four countersunk holes:

 
Consider the following top and bottom 2D views of the part:
 

Top face with countersink holes Bottom face with smaller through-holes
   
The surface area of this face is smaller than the bottom Due to the smaller holes, the surface area is larger than
face, yet needs to be selected during import. the top face.

 
You could add a user coordinate system that intersects the top face. This coordinate system name would then be entered in
ProNest 3D CAD Files preferences.
 

- 869 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

When the part is imported, ProNest would bring in the top face.
 
Refer to Importing SOLIDWORKS drill holes for more information.

- 870 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

About the tool library

In ProNest, the tool library represents the entire collection of all tools that might be used by the current machine. This is an exhaustive list
of all tools in your operation that the machine can use.
 
For information on how to set up the tool library, see Creating a tool library and Setting up the Drill Interface.

Open the current tool library

 1. Open Settings, click Tooling, and then click Edit Tool Library.
 2. Click the Drill Tools tab.
-or-

 l In the Turret pane (View tab > Turret ), click the Tool library link.
The tool library is organized into several tabs: one for individual drill tools, one for compound tools, and one for missing tools. To learn
more, see:
 l Tool Library: Drill Tools
 l Compound tools
 l Missing tools

- 871 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Tool Library: Drill Tools

In ProNest, the Tool Library represents the entire collection of all physical tools in your operation that can be used by the current
machine. The Drill Tools tab in the Tool Library shows all physical spindle-based tools, such as drills and taps, in the library.
 
You can add, edit, or delete drill tools on the Drill Tools tab in the Tool Library:
 1. Open Settings, click Tooling, and then click Edit Tool Library.
 2. Click the Drill Tools tab.

Drill tool properties

Name
A unique name for the tool. Character limit is 15 characters. Prefixes can be used to designate tools used for tapping or countersinking.
Please follow these naming conventions:
 

Tool Type Prefix Example

Round no prefix needed for standard round drill bits HSS0500
(don't begin round drill tool names with TC, TF or CS) RN0.250
RN1-4INCH
10MM
Tap Coarse TC TC0500
Tap Fine TF TF0375
Countersink CS CS82

- 872 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: For tool names defined via block names in the AutoCAD®, the tool's name in ProNest should match exactly with the CAD
block definition name. AutoCAD blocks cannot contain the following characters:

These characters should not be used in your tool names if you want to match tools to blocks.

Description
You can enter a longer more descriptive name for the tool.

Diameter
Diameter of the drill tool. This value (along with Tool recognition tolerance) is used when matching tools to required holes in CAD
files.
 
Entering diameter
You can enter values in either inches or mm, just be sure to specify the units after typing in a number. If you do not type in the units,
the value will be interpreted according to the Display Units set in your Regional preferences. For example, with Display Units set to
inches (IPS), if you type 1 into the Diameter box, ProNest will interpret that as 1 inch by default. However, you can enter 25 mm and
ProNest will recognize and store that as a metric value.
 
Diameter can also be entered as a fractional value, which is useful for certain sizes of tools. If you have a 3/8 inch drill bit, simply enter
3/8 in the box and ProNest will automatically convert that to 0.375 in.
 
How is diameter displayed?
When tool diameter is displayed in ProNest, it is shown with the units that it was originally created with. For instance, with Display
Units set to inches (IPS), if 10 mm is entered as the diameter for a new tool, that tool's diameter will be displayed as 10 mm (0.349 in.)
throughout ProNest.

Station Type
Not all stations can accept any tool. Station type can be used to tell ProNest which tools are compatible with a given station. If a tool in
the Drill Tools list has the same Station Type as a station listed in the Turret page in settings, it will be considered eligible to be loaded
on that station. ProNest will not load a tool on a station if they have different Station Types.

Pilot Drill
Any individual tool in the tool library can have an associated pilot drill tool. Whenever that individual tool is assigned during import,
the pilot tool is also automatically assigned along with it.
 
For tap tools, you could select a tap pre-drill as a pilot tool.

Important: To have pilot tools assigned during import, be sure that on the Tooling settings page, Pilot drill options is set to
either Enable pilot drill option.

Adding a new drill tool to the library

 1. Click the Add button.

 2. In the new row, enter a unique name, description and diameter for the tool.

Tip: Each time you add a new drill tool to the tool library, a good practice is to also add that tool to the Drill Parameters settings

- 873 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

spreadsheet and Costing spreadsheet for drilling (if in use).

Editing tools

Any existing tool can be edited from the Drill Tools tab in the Tool Library editor. Simply click any row to begin making changes. When
editing tools:

 l If a tool is in use in the current job, Name and Diameter cannot be changed. Tools in use are indicated with a turret icon.

 l Tools that have unsaved edits are marked with an edited icon.

Delete a tool

 1. On the Drill Tools tab, click the row for the tool you want to delete.

 2. Click the Remove button.

Saving your changes

The drill tools list is stored in a separate XML file in the Tooling folder specified on the Settings page in Preferences.
To permanently save your changes to the current tool library:
 l Click Save in the Tool Library editor.
 
To save the current library as a separate library:
 1. Click Save As in the Tool Library editor.
 2. Enter a new name.
The new tool library will be saved in the same location as the original library.

Associated warnings

This tool cannot be deleted because it is in use

If a tool is currently in use by a part in the part list, you will not be able to delete it from the tool library.

This tool cannot be deleted because it is in use by a compound tool

If a tool is currently in use by a compound tool, you will not be able to delete it from the tool library. Try removing that tool from all the
compound tools before you try to delete it.
How do I get here in ProNest?
 l Settings > click the Tooling page > click Edit Tool Library

- 874 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Compound tools
In ProNest, a compound or multi-op tool is a flexible way of grouping one or more tools together as a single virtual tool.

In this article...
Why are compound tools used?
Viewing compound tools in the Tool Library editor
Adding compound tools
Compound tool properties
Properties for an individual tool in a compound tool
How are compound tools matched to holes during import?
Sequencing tool operations in a compound tool
Associated warnings

Why are compound tools used?

There are several different reasons for using compound tools:

Holes requiring multiple tool hits

Compound tools let you assign any combination of physical tools to a profile as if it were a single tool. Though this is not the only way
of getting multiple tool operations on a single hole, it is the most flexible method. A compound tool must be used for any hole that
requires more than two tool operations.
 
For instance, a single hole might require the following:

 1. Spot drill

 2. Pre-drill the hole for tapping
 3. Thread the hole with a tap tool
 4. Countersink the hole
 
A compound tool could be added that has these four operations in the correct order.
 
Compound Tool A
 1. SpotDrill
 2. TapDrill
 3. Tap0500
 4. CS

When that compound tool is assigned to a hole, each tool operation is automatically assigned sequentially.

- 875 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Blind holes
Any tool operation that doesn't extend all the way through the plate is typically assigned using compound tools. This is because each
physical tool in a compound tool can have a non-through depth specified.

Viewing compound tools in the Tool Library editor

Compound tools are stored in the tool library in ProNest.

 
To view compound tools:

 1. Open Settings ( ) and then click the Tooling page.

 2. Make sure a valid Tool Library XML file is selected.
 3. Click Edit Tool Library.
 4. Click the Compound Tools tab.

Adding compound tools

 1. First, make sure that all the individual tools you need for the compound tool have been added on the Drill Tools tab. See Tool
Library: Drill Tools to learn how to add drill tools.
 2. Open the Compound Tools tab in the Tool Library editor, as described above.

 3. In the upper left, click the Add button.

 4. Type in a Name and Description for the new compound tool (see "Compound tool properties" below for details).

 5. In the Tools for pane on the right, click the Add button.
 6. Click the arrow and select an existing individual drill tool from the list.

 7. If the tool hit will not be a through hole, enter a depth.
 8. Repeat steps 5-7 for each tool you want to add.
 9. When a compound tool is applied to a hole, the tool hits will follow the order listed here. For instance, the tool listed in the #1 slot

will be done first. You can use the arrows ( ) to re-order tools within the compound tool to get the order you want.
 10. Click Save in the Tool Library editor to permanently store your changes.

Note: If a physical tool with a pilot drill is added to a compound tool, only the main tool is brought in; the pilot drill is not included
in the compound tool.

Compound tool properties

- 876 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Name
A unique name for the compound tool. Character limit is 15 characters.
 
For compound tools that are called out using block names in AutoCAD drawings, the compound tool's name in ProNest should match
exactly with the CAD block definition name (however, matching isn't case sensitive).

Note: Due to naming restrictions for blocks in AutoCAD, it is recommended that you don't use the following characters in the
compound tool name:

Description
You can enter a description for the compound tool.

Diameter
Diameter of the compound tool. This value (along with Tool recognition tolerance) is used when matching tools to required holes in
CAD files.
 
By default, this diameter matches the diameter of the largest tool in the compound tool.
 
Overriding the default diameter
Sometimes, in order to match a tool to a specific hole, an intentionally incorrect diameter is entered for a compound tool. You can
enter a value that is different from the default diameter by typing directly in the Diameter box. The value that you enter will appear in
highlighted in yellow, indicating that it is overriding the default value.
 

- 877 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Tip:
You can click and select Clear override to revert to the default value.

Properties for individual tools in a compound tool

Depth
Any individual tool in a compound tool can have a unique depth specified. This is used for blind (non-through) holes.
 
Range: 0 to 100 in. (0 to 2,540 mm)
Default value: 0 (full depth)

The depth specified for an individual tool in a compound tool (including full depth) serves as an override for any depth that may be
specified for that tool in the Drill Parameters spreadsheet. Whatever depth is specified in the compound tool will be used in output.

Note: Tip Dimension should be included when entering a depth for a tool.

How is depth measured?

Some applications require hole depth to be measured from the top of the plate down.

Other applications require hole depth to be specified from the bottom of the plate up. The depth from the top down is subtracted from
the material thickness to get this value.

- 878 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The way that a compound tool's depth value is interpreted is determined by your machine setup and post processor. Please contact
Hypertherm if you need more information on this feature.
 
Refer to Blind drill holes for more information on setting up partial depth compound tools.

How are compound tools matched to holes?

First, holes must be on the CAD layer that is mapped to the Drilling process in ProNest.

Method 1: Block Name in AutoCAD

If an AutoCAD file contains a Block name that matches a compound tool name, that tool will be matched during part import. Block
names don't have to be case sensitive to match, but note that white spaces are considered.
 
Hole geometry in the CAD file is not used by ProNest for tool matching when Block name is used. ProNest uses the Block Reference
insertion point and centers the matching ProNest tool at that point. See Drawing drilled parts with Blocks for more information.

Method 2: Diameter match

If a hole matches a compound tool's diameter, that compound tool is a candidate to be assigned to that hole during import. If the com-
pound tool is the closest size tool in the tool library, it will be matched to the hole. However, if there is another tool with the same
exact diameter, the compound tool may not be matched.
 
Using a diameter override on a compound tool (see above), you can force a compound tool to match a particular hole in a
CAD drawing. This method usually requires using an unusually tight Tool recognition tolerance value on the Tooling settings page or
drawing unrealistically large holes.

Sequencing tool operations in a compound tool

By default, the individual tools in a compound tool are cut based on their diameter, from smallest to largest. You can change the order of

individual tool hits in a compound tool using the arrows ( ). Whatever tool order is listed for a compound tool in the Tools for
pane of the Compound Tools tab will be used in output.

Important: If you are using compound tools, be sure to set Tool Sort Option to Sequence number, turret order, then compound
tool sequence on the Tooling settings page.

Associated warnings

Warning: Tools may be out of sequence

ProNest assumes that tools in a compound tool should be sequenced based on their diameter, from smallest to largest. If tools in a com-
pound tool are ordered so that a larger diameter tool comes before a smaller diameter tool, this warning will appear. The warning is for
informational purposes only and can be ignored if the compound tool sequence is intentional.

Warning: There are no tools currently assigned

The compound tool has no individual tools.

- 879 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Missing tools
If you try to import a part with a drill hole size not found in the tool library, ProNest will treat it as a missing tool.

View missing tools in the job

 1. Open Settings, click Tooling, and then click Edit Tool Library.
 2. Click the Missing Tools tab.
-or-

 l In the Turret pane, click the This nest contains missing tools warning message.
All missing tools in the current job will be listed on the Missing Tools tab in the tool library.

Resolving missing tools

Missing tools may occur for several different reasons:

Tools need to be added to the tool library

The tool library doesn't have the required tool. You can quickly add a missing tool right from the Missing Tools tab in the Tool Library
editor:
 1. Open Settings, click Tooling, and then click Edit Tool Library.
 2. Click the Missing Tools tab.
 3. Click Add Missing Tools to Library to add all tools listed to the Drill Tools tab of the tool library.
You can also add missing tools one-by-one by clicking Add to Library in a given row.

- 880 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note:  l Once the missing tools have been added the library, if you are using a non-blank Station Type in the rest of
ProNest, you will need to set the Station Type for the newly-added tools.
 l Missing tools are always added as individual tools, not compound tools.
 l If a required hole is identified as tapped, the missing tool for that hole will be added as a tap tool (with a TF or TC
prefix) in the tool library.

Tolerance is too small

Try adjusting the Tool recognition tolerance in Tooling settings and then reloading the part in the part list.

File units not set correctly

Make sure the File units selected in ProNest (inch / millimeter) match the units of the CAD file. When file units are incorrect, holes are
brought in with the wrong size, causing a missing tool warning. In this case, you will need to delete and re-add the parts to the part list,
using the correct file units (in the Edit Part List window, in the Properties: CAD Import tab on the lower left, set the File units either to
Inch or Millimeter to match the drawing.

Populating a tool library using missing tools

One alternate way of adding tools to the current tool library is to intentionally import parts that require tools that aren't in the library. The
required tools will become missing tools, which can then be added to the tool library as described above.
 
With this approach, new tools are added to the library as they're needed by the parts in a given job.

Associated warnings

Contains missing tools

This appears in the part list to indicate that a nested part has holes mapped to the drill process that were not found in the tool library.

This nest contains missing tools

This appears in the Turret pane to indicate that a part has holes mapped to the drill process that were not found in the tool library. Click
this warning to open the Missing Tools tab in the tool library.

Part requires tools that are missing from the tool library -140
This error indicates that a part has holes mapped to the drill process that were not found in the tool library.

- 881 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Creating a tool library

If you don't already have a tool library, there are several ways to create one.

Start a new tool library from scratch

 1. Open Tooling settings (Settings > Tooling ).

 2. In the Tool library list, select (New).
 3. Click Edit Tool Library.
 4. Begin populating the library with tools. See About the tool library for more information.

Create a new tool library from an existing XML library

 1. Make sure the existing tool library is in the folder specified in the Tooling folder in preferences (File tab > Preferences > Settings
tab).

 2. Open Tooling settings (Settings > Tooling ).

 3. In the Tool library list, select the existing tool library.
 4. Click Edit Tool Library.
 5. In the Tool Library editor, click Save As.
 6. Enter a same for the new file then click OK. This will become the current tool library in settings.

Importing a library from an XLS file

You can import a tool library using an XLS or XLSX file. This may be a pre-existing library from a previous version of ProNest or a new
spreadsheet.
 
To start a new tool library from an imported spreadsheet:

 1. Open Tooling settings (Settings > Tooling ).

 2. In the Tool library list, select <Import from file...>.
 3. Browse to a tool library spreadsheet.
 4. Click Open. A tool library will be created matching the name of the source file. It will become the current tool library in settings.
 5. Click Edit Tool Library to open the new tool library. Confirm that all tools are correct.
The source Tool Library XLS/XLSX file must use a specific format. An example source spreadsheet is as follows:
 

  A B C D E F G H I
1 inch 2              
2 Tool Description Diameter TipDim Type PreDrillTool OpSequence MultiOpTool MultiOpSequence
3 RN0125 HSS 1/8" 0.125 0 D   1 No  
4 RN0250 HSS 1/4" 0.250 0 D   1 No  
5 RN0375 HSS 3/8" 0.375 0 D   1 No  

- 882 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

6 RN0500 HSS 1/2" 0.5 0 D RN0125 1 No  

7 TAP07500- 3/4-10 0.625 0 D   1 Yes RN0125,0.10,RN0313,,TC07500
10

 
Cell A1 should be set to inch or mm. This sets the units for the entire spreadsheet. Cell B2 indicates the row that contains column headers.
 

Column headers:
Tool
Corresponds to Name in the ProNest 2019 tool library. This is either the name of an individual drill tool or a compound tool. Limit this
to 15 characters or less. Also, the following characters should not be used in your tool names if you want to match them to AutoCAD®
blocks:

Tip Dim
Set to 0 or leave blank.

Type
Station type.

OpSequence
Set to 1 or leave blank.

PreDrillTool
Corresponds to Pilot Drill in ProNest 2019.

MultiOpTool
Indicates whether the tool is a compound tool or not. Set to Yes or No.

MultiOpSequence
The individual tool hits and depths (if applicable) for the compound tool. Syntax is as follows:
 
ToolName1,Depth,ToolName2,Depth,ToolName3

For full-depth hits, put two commas between tool names (ToolName1,,ToolName2,,ToolName3)

Populating a tool library using missing tools

One alternate way of adding tools to the current tool library is to import parts with holes that require tools that aren't yet in the library.
When you add these parts, the required tools will become missing tools, which can then be added to the tool library all at once or one-
by-one. See Missing tools for more information.

- 883 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The Turret task pane

The Turret pane is designed to represent the tool storage device (turret, carousel, magazine, etc.) of your automatic tool changer. The Tur-
ret pane always shows tools that are required for the current nest. In the Turret pane, you can:
 l See what tools must be loaded in each station of your tool changer in order to cut a given nest
 l Change tool-to-station assignments by dragging
 l View hit count for each tool for the current nest
 l Set a pre-pierce tool for the current nest

Show the Turret pane in the main nesting window

 l On the View tab, make sure Turret is selected.

The Turret pane, showing a four station turret with a tool loaded in each station.

The Turret pane

The column on the left shows each station in your turret, along with any type restriction for that station. When you add parts to the nest,
the tools required to cut the parts on that nest are automatically loaded into these turret stations.
 
You can change the station assignment for any tool listed, as long as the tool type and the station type are compatible. See Modifying tur-
ret layouts for a nest for more information.

Pre-pierce tool
Tool designated for pre-piercing (drilling the start points of cut profiles) on the current nest. See Pre-piercing with drill tools for more
information.

Layouts
A turret layout represents a single configuration of tools in the turret. Basically, this is one time you have to load/reload the turret.
 

- 884 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

If you have the Allow multiple turret layouts for a nest setting disabled in Tooling: Turret settings, only one turret layout will ever be
shown in the Turret pane. If this setting is enabled and the current nest requires more tools than there are compatible stations in the tur-
ret, multiple turret layouts will be created and filled with required tools.

Hits
The number of times the tool is used on the current nest.

Note: If a tool is used for pre-piercing and a cut sequence is not yet established for a nest, the Hits for that tool will be marked
with an asterisk (*), indicating that the hit count is incomplete.

Hide empty turret stations

Any turret stations that do not have a tool loaded in them will be hidden from view.

Sort tools smallest to largest

Tools will be automatically sorted in the turret based on their diameter. The smallest tool will be loaded in the first compatible station,
the next smallest tool will be loaded in the next station, and so on. As parts are nested, required tools will be re-ordered in the turret as
needed, so that the order is always from smallest to largest.
 
Automatic sorting is used to control the sequencing of drills on the nest. In ProNest, drills are sequenced according to the order in
which they are loaded in the turret. Select this setting to sequence tool hits on a nest by tool diameter, beginning with the smallest
tool.

Note:  l Tools and stations can not be rearranged in the turret when this option is selected.
 l This option can be set independently by nest.

Tool library
Open the current tool library.

Icon legend
Tool is a drill.

Tool is designated as the pre-pierce tool for the current nest. See Pre-piercing with drill tools for more information.

Tool is a pilot drill for another tool used on the nest. See Tool Library: Drill Tools for more information.

Tool is locked in the station. See Modifying turret layouts for a nest and Turret settings for more information.

Associated warnings

This nest contains missing tools

Click this warning to open the Missing Tools tab in the tool library.

This nest requires a pre-pierce tool

If CNC Output: Pre-Pierces settings are set to Pre-Pierce as Drill and dictate that a pre-pierce is required for the current nest, a pre-pierce
tool must be selected for the nest. Trying to create output for a nest in this state will fail with an "E145: Pre-pierce tool is not defined for
the nest. (-145)" error.
Related articles
 n Modifying turret layouts for a nest
 n Turret settings

- 885 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Modifying turret layouts for a nest

The Turret pane can be used to change tool-to-station assignments and tool sequence for a nest. The Turret pane (View tab > Turret)
always shows tools that are required for the current nest.

In this article...
Why modify turret layouts?
Move a tool to a different station
Working with locked tools
Reordering stations within a layout
Where is this information stored?

Why modify turret layouts?

Control which tool is in a specific station

If ProNest doesn't automatically load a tool in the station that you want when parts are nested, you can move the tool into that station
manually.

Adjust the drill sequence

In ProNest, the sequence in which holes on the nest are drilled is partially determined by the turret order. In a turret layout, stations are
typically sequenced from top to bottom.
 

Tool hits in the top position are done first, followed by tools in the station directly below it, and so on. There are some exceptions to this
rule - sequencing of pilot holes, compound tools, and pre-pierces may not follow turret order. However, rearranging a turret layout can
be used to get the sequence you want for drilled holes on a nest.

Move a tool to a different station

A tool can be moved to any other compatible station in any layout.

- 886 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Click and drag the box on the right to move a tool to a different station.

 
The tool will be moved to the station you select.
 

 
If the selected station is already occupied by another tool, you will be prompted to either Insert or Swap tool positions. Insert shifts the
remaining tools to the next available stations, maintaining their relative order. Swap exchanges the positions of the source and target
tools, leaving all other tools in their existing stations.

Rules for moving tools

 l You can move a tool from one turret layout to different layout for a given nest.
 l Tools can't be moved into stations if the station types don't match.
 l Locked default tools ( ) can't be moved to different stations
 l Tools can't be moved into a station that is currently occupied by a locked default tool ( )
 l When Sort tools from smallest to largest is enabled, tools can't be moved.

Working with locked tools

If a station is occupied by a default tool (as specified in the Tooling: Turret settings page), a lock icon ( ) will appear on that tool/sta-
tion.
 

 
The tool is locked in that station and can't be moved to a different station.
 
To clear a locked tool from a station:
 l Right-click a locked tool and select Clear Station For This Nest.

- 887 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: A locked default tool ( ) can't be cleared from a station if its Hits count is greater than zero.

To reset all default tools to their default stations:

 l Right-click any station on the turret and select Use Default Turret Layout.
All default tools will be restored to their default stations, locked in place. All other tools that have been moved will be returned to the
default positions in the turret.

Reorder stations within a layout

If there are locked tools that can't be moved to other stations, you can rearrange the stations in a turret layout in order to get the drill
sequence you want.
 l Click and drag the box on the left to move an entire station to a different position in the turret layout.

The station and the tool will be moved to the position you select.
 

Note that the tool-to-station assignment will not change. Moving a station only affects the order in which the station and tool is
sequenced for the current nest.

Rules for reordering stations

 l When Sort tools from smallest to largest is enabled, stations can't be moved.

Where is this information stored?

The turret layout for each nest is saved in the ProNest job (.nif).

- 888 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Viewing the drill profile sequence

You can use cut simulation at any time to view the sequence in which drilling and cutting will be done.

Viewing drilling sequence with cut simulation

Cut Simulation mode gives you the best way of viewing the sequence in which each profile and tool hit will be completed on the nest.

Drilled parts in cut simulation, with holes being drilled from left to right
 
Holes that require multiple tool hits are shown as concentric circles. Each circle represents a separate tool hit. In the cut simulation, the
order in which tool hits are processed is the order that they will follow in output code.

A compound hole with each successive tool hit cut from smallest to largest, as shown in Cut Simulation
 
To view the cut simulation for a nest:

 l On the Home tab, click Cut Simulation.

 
To view the cut simulation for an individual part:

- 889 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit.

 2. On the Part menu, select Cut Simulation.

Viewing drilling in Cut Sequence mode

Cut Sequence mode displays the order in which parts will drop from the nest - it is the sequence of exterior profiles. You can't view the
profile sequence or any individual tool hits from Cut Sequence mode.

- 890 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Verifying tool assignments for holes

Once a part with drilling is imported, tool hits on the part can be viewed from Advanced Edit. This is limited in that only a single hit is
shown for a selected hole. If a compound tool is assigned to a hole, only the compound tool name is shown. If a drill with a pilot drill is
assigned, only the larger finish drill will be displayed.

View tool hits on a part

 1. Bring the drill part into Advanced Edit (right-click in the part list and select Advanced Edit).

 2. On the Edit menu, select Select Profiles.

 3. Click the crosshairs (+) at the center of the drill hole. This will cause the drill profile to become selected.
 4. Make sure that the Properties pane is visible (View > Properties Toolbar).
 5. In the Properties pane, you can see the Tool Name, Description, and Diameter for the drill tool that is assigned to that hole.
 l = Single drill tool, no pilot drill
 l = Drill tool with a pilot drill
 l = Compound tool
 l = Missing tool

View individual tools on a multi-hit hole

- 891 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

If you have a hole with multiple tool hits that share a center point, you can view them using Single Profile mode:
 1. Bring the drill part into Advanced Edit (right-click in the part list and select Advanced Edit).

 2. On the Edit menu, select Select Profiles.

 3. On the View menu, select View Single Profile.

 4. In the toolbar, use the arrows ( ) to advance through profiles on the part. When View Single Profile is
enabled, the active profile is displayed on the part and all other profiles are hidden.
 5. Click the crosshairs (+) at the center of the drill hole. This will cause the active drill profile to become selected.
 6. Make sure that the Properties pane is visible (View > Properties Toolbar).
 7. In the Properties pane, you can see the Tool Name, Description, and Diameter for the drill tool that is assigned to that hole.
At this point, you can change the tool assigned to any profile, as needed.

- 892 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Changing tool assignments for holes

Drill tools are automatically assigned to holes when parts are added to the part list, as described in Drawing basic drilled parts in CAD.
Once parts have been imported, you can switch the drill tool assigned to a hole or change the process used to cut the hole in Advanced
Edit.

In this article...
Change the drill tool assigned to a hole
Change a cut hole to a drilled hole
Change a drilled hole to a cut hole
Considerations

Change the drill tool assigned to a hole

If a hole wasn't assigned the correct tool during import, you can change the tool for the hole as follows:
 1. Bring the drill part into Advanced Edit (right-click in the part list and select Advanced Edit).

 2. On the Edit menu, select Select Profiles.

Tip: To select individual hits on a single hole, on the View menu, select View Single Profile, then use the toolbar arrows (

) to advance through profiles on the part.

 3. Click the crosshairs (+) at the center of the drill hole. This will cause the drill profile to become selected.
 l You can hold CTRL while clicking to select multiple holes.
 4. Make sure that the Properties pane is visible (View > Properties Toolbar). The Properties pane shows the drill tool that is assigned
to that hole.

- 893 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 5. In the Tool Name box, select a different tool for the hole.
 l = Single drill tool, no pilot drill
 l = Drill tool with a pilot drill
 l = Compound tool
 l = Missing tool
 6. Click Apply.
Be sure to save your changes when exiting Advanced Edit.

Note: Any changes to tool assignments you make in Advanced Edit can be discarded by doing any one of the following:
 l On the Edit menu, select Undo to undo the last action.
 l On the File menu, select Reload to discard all changes.
 l Exit Advanced Edit without saving your changes.

Change a cut hole to a drilled hole

An interior profile that is assigned to the cut process (for example, plasma) can be converted to a drilled hole. The cut profile must be cir-
cular in order to do this.
 1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit (right-click in the part list and select Advanced Edit).

 2. On the Edit menu, select Select Profiles.

- 894 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 3. Click the hole to select it.

 4. Make sure that the Properties pane is visible (View > Properties Toolbar).
 5. In the Process box, select Drilling.
 6. Click Apply.
ProNest will automatically assign a drill tool based on hole size and your Tooling settings.

If needed, you can choose a different tool for the hole, as described previously.

Note: Scribe/mark and punch geometry can also be converted to the drilling process, however the profile must be round - it can-
not be a point.

Change a drilled hole to a cut hole

Any drilled hole can be changed to a cut profile:

 1. Bring the drill part into Advanced Edit (right-click in the part list and select Advanced Edit).

 2. On the Edit menu, select Select Profiles.

 3. Click the drill hole to select it.

 4. Make sure that the Properties pane is visible (View > Properties Toolbar).
 5. In the Process box, select a cut process (for example, plasma).
 6. Click Apply.
ProNest will convert the drill hole to the cut process, automatically applying leads and other cutting parameters.

- 895 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: Drilled holes can also be converted to scribe/mark or punch geometry.

Considerations
 l Only circular interior profiles can be converted to drill holes.
 l If you want to attempt to convert cut geometry to the drill process when parts are imported, try enabling the Use tooling on cut
layers when possible setting on the Tooling settings page.
 l When you assign a missing tool to a hole, you will still need to resolve the missing tool's status prior to creating output.

- 896 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Pre-piercing with drill tools

On any nest, drill tools can be used for pre-piercing. This involves drilling out the start points of cut profiles prior to cutting.
 

Two parts with the start of the exterior lead-ins pre-pierced with a drill
 
Using this feature requires the following:
 l A valid drill setup with the drills you want to use for pre-piercing added in the tool library
 l On the CNC Output - Pre-Pierces settings page, Pre-pierce as Drill is selected

Setting a pre-pierce drill tool for a nest

At the top of the Turret pane, you can set a Pre-Pierce Tool for the current nest.

This can be any drill tool in the tool library, even if it is not needed by any parts on the nest or in the job. When the Pre-Pierce Tool is set
for a nest, that tool will be added or moved to the first available station in the turret. The tool station will be labeled "Pierce Drill" ( ).
 
Note that pre-pierce drills must be set separately for each nest in the job.
 
You can also quickly set any tool that is in use as the pre-pierce tool:
 l In the Turret pane, right-click a tool and select Make Pre-Pierce Tool.

That tool will be moved to the first available station and will be labeled "Pierce Drill" ( ).

- 897 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Note:  l If you are using a Pre-Pierces settings spreadsheet, only nests that have a material that requires pre-piercing will have
a Pre-Pierce Tool option in the Turret pane.
 l If a tool is used for pre-piercing and a cut sequence is not yet established for a nest, the Hits for that tool will be
marked with an asterisk (*), indicating that the hit count is incomplete.

Viewing drill pre-pierces on the nest

Cut Simulation mode can be used to view drilled pre-pierces on a nest.

To view the cut simulation for a nest:

 l On the Home tab, click Cut Simulation.

- 898 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Accounting for tooling in costing

To account for tooling in ProNest costing figures, use the Punch or Drilling tab on the Costing settings page.
 

 
This tab enables you to enter activation time and cost per activation specific to the punch or drilling process.

Default settings
Default activation time
For drilling and punching, this is the average time from the point where the traverse motion stops until an individual tool hit is com-
pleted. If you enter a value here and don't use a Costing spreadsheet, this same activation time is used for all tool hits.

Default cost per activation

For drilling or punching, this is average cost per hit. If you enter a value here and don't use a Costing spreadsheet, this same cost per
hit is used for all tools.

Costing spreadsheets

- 899 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

To get the most accurate punching or drilling costs, it is best to use a dedicated Costing settings table for that tooling process. This lets
you enter costing values that vary by tool and material. See Costing spreadsheets for the general required spreadsheet format for costing.
 
An example Costing spreadsheet for drilling and explanation follows:
 

  A B C D E F
1 inch 2        
2 Tool Material Thickness Class Activation Cost per
Name Time Activation
3 HSS10MM MS 0.2500 * 0.04 0.03
4 HSS10MM MS 0.5000 * 0.06 0.04
5 HSS12MM MS 0.2500 * 0.05 0.03
6 HSS12MM MS 0.5000 * 0.07 0.05

 
Cell A1 should be set to inch or mm. This sets the units for the entire spreadsheet. Cell B2 indicates the row that contains column headers.
 

Column header keys used for record matching:

Tool Name
This is the name of an individual drill tool listed on the Drill Tools tab of the tool library. Do not enter compound tool names here. If
you want to enter settings values for a particular drill tool, be sure to enter the tool name exactly as it appears in the tool library.
 
If you do not need tool-specific settings, you can use a wildcard (*) or omit this column entirely.

Tip: You can quickly get a complete list of drill tools in the tool library as follows:
 1. On the Drill Tools tab, press CTRL + A to select all rows.
 2. Press CTRL + C to copy the entire grid.
 3. Open Microsoft Excel and paste in the entire grid into a new sheet.
 4. Copy the contents of the Name column into your settings spreadsheet.

Material
You can limit record matching by material type.

Thickness
You can limit record matching by thickness.

Class
Because class doesn't generally contain any drill information, it is best to either use a wildcard (*) for all rows in this column or omit the
column entirely.
 

Column header settings:

Activation Time
For drilling, this is the time elapsed from the point where the traverse motion stops until an individual tool hit is completed.
 

- 900 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

For drill setups, it is recommended that Activation Time be entered in the drill Costing spreadsheet and not in other areas. This will
ensure that activation times used in costing calculations are specific to drilling. See How is production time calculated? for more
information.

Cost per Activation

Cost per hit. If you have individual drill tools listed in the Tool Name column, you can enter a cost that should be added each time the
tool is used. Perhaps a tool has a greater total number of lifetime hits when cutting softer or thinner material. You can take these
factors into account when arriving at a cost per hit number for a given tool and material.

Costing calculations
Drill or punch process costs are ultimately included in the Production Costs detailed in Viewing final costs. Unlike cutting, tooling costs
do not include Process Production Time or Operating Cost per Minute. The total process cost for drilling or punching is calculated as:
 
Process Cost = Number of Activations × Cost per Activation

See How are costs calculated? for more information.

 n Costing settings
 n Costing spreadsheets
 n How is production time calculated?
 n How are costs calculated?
 n About drilling

- 901 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Tips for getting the drill sequence you want

There are several settings and options which affect the sequencing of drilled holes on a nest.

Tooling sequence settings

 
To open the Tooling settings page:
 l Settings > click Tooling

General Method
The General method that you select in Tooling settings is very important in determining the sequence that ProNest will apply for drilling.
 
The following three methods will complete all drilled holes on the nest before any cutting. They will also typically complete all hits for a
given tool before moving on to the next tool, minimizing the number of turret changes:
 l Left to right
 l Bottom to top
 l Right to left
 
These methods will process parts one at a time; all tooling and cutting is completed on a single part before the sequence moves on to the
next part:
 l By part, then left to right
 l By part, then bottom to top
 
These methods will process all drilling and cutting in a given zone before moving on to the next zone:
 l X zone, then left to right
 l X zone, then bottom to top
 l X zone, left to right, then cut nest order
 l X zone, bottom to top, then cut nest order
 l X zone, right to left, then cut nest order

Tip: It may be useful to experiment with different methods on a trial nest in order to get the results you want.

Grid Resolution
Try setting the X grid size and Y grid size in Tooling settings to something small - like 0.1 inches (2.54 mm). Having small enough grid
cells can help sort drill profiles that are close together.

Turret order
In ProNest, the sequence in which holes on the nest are drilled is partially determined by the turret order. In a turret layout, stations are
typically sequenced from top to bottom.
 

- 902 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Tool hits in the top position are done first, followed by tools in the station directly below it, and so on.

Sequence according to tool size

If you want to sequence tool hits on the nest according to tool diameter, starting with the smallest tool:
 l On the Turret settings page, select the Sort tools in turret layouts from smallest to largest.
ProNest will automatically sort tools and stations according to tool diameter. This will generally cause smaller drill holes to be done
before larger holes.

Manually change the turret order

The Turret pane in the main ProNest window can be used to manually change tool-to-station assignments and station order, to get the
sequence you want for drilled holes on a nest. See Modifying turret layouts for a nest for more details.

Drill/Punch/Scribe First
On the CNC Output settings page, on the Options tab, Drill/Punch/Scribe First can be used to force all drilling to be done prior to any
cutting on a nest. Do not select this option with any of the By Part options for General Method.

Cut Sequence Rules

You can use Cut Sequence Rules (Settings > Cut Sequence > Cut Sequence Rules) to customize the order in which different processes are
completed for a nest. For instance, if you want to complete all drill profiles before pre-piercing on the nest, you could set that up in a
rule.
 
Note that Cut Sequence Rules will be overridden with some of the General Method options on the Tooling settings page. See Tooling set-
tings for more details.

- 903 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

35. FLY CUT

About fly cutting
Designed for laser cutting on thin materials, fly cutting is a method of cutting the aligned edges of different interior profiles together in a
straight line. Pierces are made without slowing down or stopping the cutting head. This technique provides faster cutting with fewer slow-
downs required by changes of direction. Mechanical stress on the machine is reduced as the head is not making numerous changes in
cut direction (compared with cutting interiors one by one).

Fly cutting a grid of square interior profiles. The aligned edges of the profiles are cut in lines.

Note:  l Number of pierces is increased with this method, compared to cutting interior profiles one by one.
 l This technique requires a machine that can pierce "on-the-fly".

How it works
When fly cutting is enabled for a part, ProNest detects interior grids containing aligned (collinear) edges.

The interior sequence of the part is then changed so that the entities are cut one after the other in a line.

After edges are completed in one direction, the sequence then moves on to the next direction, until all cutouts are finished.

- 904 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

For grids of aligned circles or slots, a similar fast cutting technique is used. Unlike fly cutting on linear interiors, circular interiors are cut
one by one. Pierces are made without slowing down or stopping the cutting head.
 
The start points on the profiles are moved so that they align.

The profiles are then sequenced so that they're cut in rows or columns.

What happens to leads?

Pre-existing leads are removed from fly cut interiors. For linear edges, leads are typically not needed. For circles and slots, a small over-
travel is used on the profile to keep the cutting head moving smoothly to the next hole.

Which cutout shapes are supported?

ProNest supports fly cutting for grids of various shapes.

Square and rectangular Triangular

- 905 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 
 
Octagonal Mixed

Hexagonal Circular

Slots (obrounds)  

 
For best results, all sides of a cutout should be aligned with the sides of other profiles. This ensures that all aligned sides are cut in a line,
without leaving single entities that need to be cut.

- 906 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using fly cutting

Fly cutting is applied at the part level. Normally, you would enable fly cutting for an individual part based on the geometry of the part's
interiors.

Apply fly cutting to a part

Fly cutting is applied as a part property, which can be set in either the Edit Part List window or the Properties pane of the main window.
 1. Select the part in the part list.
 2. In the Properties pane, select the Allow fly cutting property.

 
Fly cutting will be applied to the interior profiles of the part based on your Fly Cut settings. If a group of profiles don't qualify for fly cut-
ting (for instance, they are spaced too far apart), fly cutting will not be applied.

Remove fly cutting from a part

 1. In the part list, click a part to select it.

 2. In the Properties pane, clear the Allow fly cutting property.
Fly cutting will not be done on the part. For parts that are already nested, you must select and then un-select the part on the nest in order
for fly cutting to be removed.

Viewing fly cutting on a nest

You can use cut simulation at any time to view the sequence in which fly cutting will be done.

- 907 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

To view the cut simulation for a part on a nest:

 l On the Home tab, click Cut Simulation.
 
To view the cut simulation for an individual part:
 1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit.
 2. On the Part menu, select Cut Simulation.

Note: Because Fly Cutting is applied during output:

 l Cut sequence numbers for interior profiles shown in Advanced Edit do not reflect the actual drop order of the
cutouts.
 l Pierces (View tab > Nest Image Objects > Pierces) drawn on fly cut parts do not reflect the actual pierce locations.
Please use cut simulation to view accurate pierces and cut sequence for fly cutting.

To view fly cutting on a nest:

 l Hover the cursor over Fly Cut in the Technology panel.
Fly Cut profiles will be drawn in bold on the nest.
 

- 908 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

36. VIEWS
How to use grids
Grids exist in several different places in ProNest, including the Part List (in the Edit Part List window), the Plate List (in the Edit Plate List
window), and the Database editors. These grids can be customized in several different ways. Note that any changes made to the layout of
a grid has no effect on the actual data itself - it just affects how that data is displayed.

In this article...
Sort in ascending or descending order
Field chooser
Group by box

Sort in ascending or descending order

To sort in ascending order (smallest to largest):

 l Click the column header until the triangular icon indicates smallest to largest ( ).
 
To sort in descending order (largest to smallest):

 l Click the column header until the triangular icon indicates largest to smallest ( ).

Notes:  l Holding CTRL + clicking a column header will disable sorting for that column.
 l You can hold SHIFT + click multiple column headers to sort by more than one column header.

Field chooser

Using the field chooser, you can control which fields (columns) are visible on the column header row of a grid.
 
To add a field to the column header row:
 1. Right-click the column header row.
 2. Select Field Chooser.
A list of available fields will be displayed.
 3. From the Field Chooser list, drag the field that you want to add onto the column header row.

The arrows ( ) indicate where the column will be positioned.

 
To remove a field from the column header row:
 1. Right-click the column header row.
 2. Select Field Chooser.
 3. Drag a field from the column header row onto the Field Chooser list.

- 909 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Group by box

Group by box enables you to organize data in the grid by category (column header). For instance, grouping by "Priority" would organize
the grid so that records that have the same priority are listed together.

 
To use Group By Box:
 1. Right-click the column header row and select Group By Box.
 2. Drag a column header box onto the gray banner at the top of the grid. (If you want, you can drag additional column boxes onto
the banner, creating a compound grouping structure.)
All items in the grid will be sorted according to the category that you selected.

Tip: After group by box has been applied, you can show or hide the gray banner at the top of the grid by right-clicking the column
header row and removing the Group By Box selection.

To remove grouping:

 1. Right-click the column header row and make sure Group By Box is selected.

 2. In the gray banner, right-click a box and select Don't Group By This Field.
or
Drag the box back onto the column header row.

- 910 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using grid filters

Grid filters let you choose which items to show in a grid based on the criteria that you specify. When you apply a filter to a grid, the items
that meet the conditions specified will remain visible, while all other items will be hidden. This can make it easier to find specific records
or organize items in the grid.

In this article...
Filter by values in a column
Create a custom column filter
Modify a filter
Delete a filter

Filter by values in a column

This enables you to filter by existing values in a given column. Only rows that match the selected values in the filter will be shown.
 1. If you are applying a filter in the Edit Part List or Edit Plate List window, right-click inside the Part List or Plate List grid and select
Filter. If applying a filter in a database editor, you can skip this step.
 2. On the column header that you want to use for filtering, click the down arrow ( ).
A drop down box will appear.

Each value found in that column will be listed with its own checkbox.
 3. Select the checkboxes for the values that you want to show. Values that are not selected will be hidden in the grid.

Create a custom column filter

Custom column filters work like normal column filters, but they allow you to specify more complex operators (such as greater than, less
than, not equal to, etc.) in the filter for a given category.
 1. If you are applying a filter in the Edit Part List or Edit Plate List window, right-click inside the Part List or Plate List grid and select
Filter. If applying a filter in a database editor, you can skip this step.
 2. On the column header that you want to use for filtering, click the down arrow ( ).
 3. From the drop down list, select (Custom...).
The Custom Filter dialog will open.

- 911 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 4. Enter conditions for the selected category.

 5. Click OK.

Note: You can apply a column filter to as many different columns as you want. ProNest will then filter the entire grid based on the
column filters that are applied.

Modify a filter

 1. On the column header that is being used for filtering, click the down arrow ( ).
 2. If you are using checkboxes for filtering, you can check or remove the selection from values in the list.
 3. If you want to modify the Custom Filter, select (Custom...) from the list and adjust the Custom Filter as needed.

Delete a filter

 l Click the Close button ( ) on the gray band at the bottom of the grid.
or
 l Right-click inside the grid and remove the Filter selection.
 

Example:
 
Suppose you only want to show parts in the Part List grid that have a priority between 1 and 5.
 1. In the Edit Part List window, right-click in the Part List grid and select Filter.
 2. Click the down arrow ( ) on the Priority column header.
 3. From the drop down list, select Custom.
The Custom Filter dialog will open.

- 912 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 4. In the first row, select "is less than" and then enter 5.
 5. Make sure that the AND button is selected. This will ensure that both conditions are used together.
 6. In the second row, select "is greater than" and then enter 1.
 7. Click OK.
As a result, only parts with a priority between 1 and 5 will be shown in the Part List grid.

- 913 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Color Legend
In the Color Legend, you can view and edit the colors used for parts and other features on the nest and elsewhere in ProNest. Coloring
provides a way to make important part information readily visible.
 
Changes made in the legend affect parts on the nest, in the part list, in the Preview pane of the Edit Part List window, and Advanced Edit.

Show the Color Legend pane in the main nesting window

 l On the View tab, make sure Color Legend is selected.

 

The Color Legend pane

 
In the color legend, outline colors and fill colors can be set separately from one another.

Outline
This section defines how interior and exterior edges of ProNest parts are colored.
 

Change the outline color of a process or quality value

 1. In the Outline section, click the color swatch ( ) next to the item that you want to change.
 2. Select a new color from the palette.

Change the outline color scheme

 1. Click the Outline link.

 2. Select either Process or Quality.

Process
Parts will be colored according to machine process (cut, scribe/mark, punch, etc.). Each machine process can have a color assigned to
it. Only processes that are currently in use in the job will appear in this list.

Note: When Fill is set to Standard or Highlight part, changing the fill color will also change the cut process color.

Quality

- 914 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Parts will be colored according to the quality value assigned to each entity. Only quality values that are used in the job are shown in
the Quality column. See Viewing quality values on a nest for more.
 

Fill
This section defines the fill colors of ProNest parts.

Change a fill color

 1. In the Fill section, click the color swatch ( ) next to the item that you want to change.
 2. Select a new color from the palette.

Change the fill color scheme

 1. Click the Fill link.

 2. Select Standard, No fill, Highlight part, or select a Part property from the list.

Standard
All ProNest parts will be filled with the same color. If the Outline: Process color scheme is in use, parts will be color-filled with a lighter
shade of the Cut color.

If the Outline: Quality color scheme is in use, parts will be color-filled independently from the outline color.

No fill
Parts will not be color-filled in ProNest.

Highlight part
This can be used to highlight every instance of a specific part on the nest, in order to quicky locate it. When a part is highlighted in the
Part List pane, it will also be highlighted on the nest (using the Highlight fill color). All other parts will be colored normally.

- 915 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Normal
The fill color of parts that are not highlighted in the Part List pane. If the Outline: Process color scheme is in use, non-highlighted
parts will be color-filled with a lighter shade of the Cut color.

Highlight
The fill color of highlighted parts on the nest.

Fill by a Part Property

Parts can be color-filled according to a particular part property. Parts with different values for that property will be filled with different
colors. This provides an easy way to visually differentiate parts on the nest based on name, priority, work order number, due date, and
so on.
 
By default, colors are assigned based on the order set on the Filling tab in Color Legend Options.
 
Example 1
Selecting Part name will draw each part in the part list with a different fill color.

 
Example 2
If you use the Due Date part property, selecting Due Date for color-filling can help you quickly see parts that are due sooner than
others.

- 916 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Options
To access additional Color Legend options and preferences, click the Options link. Refer to Color Legend Options for more information.

How are Color Legend properties saved?

Custom changes made in the Color Legend are stored in a separate preferences file.

Tip: For the Quality outline scheme, as well as the Highlight Part and By Part Propery fill schemes, you can hover the cursor over an
item ( ) in the color legend and it will be drawn in bold on the nest.

- 917 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Color Legend Options

Show Color Legend Options

 1. On the View tab, make sure Color Legend is selected.

 2. In the Color Legend pane, click Options.

General tab
Set colors for common objects on the nest. Simply click a row in the grid to select a different color for any item. The preview shows how
your changes will look in ProNest.

Note: Uncut refers to profiles that are not yet cut during cut simulation.
Traverse refers to index motions that are visible during cut simulation and for collision avoidance.

Show plate shadow

Draws a shadow under the plate.
 
Draw background gradient
Background on the main nesting window has a gradient applied.
 

Filling tab
When Fill by a Part Property is in use, you can set the order in which fill colors are automatically assigned. The color in row 1 will be
applied first, followed by the color in row 2, and so on.

Change the color of a given row

- 918 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Click the color swatch ( ) next to the number that you want to change.
 2. Select a new color from the palette.
 3. When you've finished making changes, click OK.

Reorder existing colors in the list

 l Click and drag a color swatch to a different row.

-or-

 1. Click a row to select it.

 2. Use the arrow buttons ( ) to move it to the position you want.
The color will be inserted in that row.

Quality tab
Each quality number can have a color and alternate name (such as "Coarse", "Fine", etc.) assigned to it. You can set up default color and
name assignments for quality numbers on this tab.

Quality
All quality numbers (0 - 255) are listed here, whether they are used in parts or not. You can also set the color for profiles that do not
have a quality value in the No Quality row.

Color
In this column, you can change the color assigned to a quality number. By default, colors are indexed to default CAD color numbers.
 
To change the color assigned to a quality number:
 1. Click the color swatch ( ) for the number that you want to change.
 2. Select a new color.
 3. Click OK.
All entities with that quality number will be displayed in ProNest in the color that you selected. This applies to parts on the nest, in the
Preview pane of the Edit Part List window, and Advanced Edit.

Note: In the Color Legend (View tab > Color Legend), Outline: Quality must be selected in order to see different quality colors on
your parts.

Name
In this column, you can add a name for any quality number. A quality name typically contains identifying characteristics for that qual-
ity. For instance, you might add a cut quality (such as "Coarse" or "Fine") or cut speed (80%, 60%, etc.) as a name.
 
The assigned name will appear wherever that quality is listed in ProNest. For instance, "Quality = 1 - Separation Cut". Quality names are
saved with your machine (.cfg).

Bevel tab

In ProNest, bevel angles are displayed with color. Gradual bevels are displayed as a dashed line that alternates between the color of the
start angle and the color of the end angle. Each bevel color covers a range of bevel angles.

- 919 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:
 
The top two Angle boxes specify a range that is assigned to the top-most color on the left-hand side. By default, this range covers
bevel angles from 50° to 40°. The color assigned to this range will be used for any angle that is larger than 40° and is less than or
equal to 50°. Notice that bevel angles of exactly 40° are not covered by this range.
 
If the following colors and angle ranges are specified...
 
Red = Color for (50° .. 40°)
Blue = Color for (40° .. 30°)
Green = Color for (30° .. 20°)
 
...then the following colors would be displayed:
 
45° = Red
40° = Blue
31° = Blue
29° = Green

- 920 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Using variables
For several different areas in ProNest, variables can be used in naming formulas. In fields that support it, you can click the browse button

( ) to open the Edit Field dialog, where you can customize a naming formula.
 

The Edit Field dialog

ProNest variables
The following ProNest variables can be used in naming formulas. Variables must be surrounded by percent signs (%) in order to be recog-
nized by ProNest.*
 
%ID%
This will name new jobs in ascending numerical order. If you start new session (close and re-open ProNest), the ID number
count will be reset to 1.

%JobID%
This will name new jobs in numerical order, giving a unique number to each job that is started. Starting a new session
(close and re-open ProNest) will not cause the ID number will be reset to 1.

%TodaysJobID%
Similar to %JobID%, except this variable will reset the count to 1 after each day. This is used in combination with %Date%
to give a unique name to each job within a given day.

%Date%
Today's date will be inserted into the name, in the date format specified in preferences.

%Job Name%
The name of the current job without the file path or extension.

%Job Path%
The file path of the current job (*.nif). If the job hasn't been saved, this will contain the default job folder from settings.

- 921 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

%Nest Index%
A number that indicates the position of a nest within the job. For example: "Nest 4 of 8" has a %NestIndex% of 4.

%Nest Name%
The name of the plate (custom or inventory) used by a nest in the job.

%ReportName%
The name of the report or batch (for instance, "Nest Plot").

Environment variables
Selecting Show all variables will display available system variables, which you can use for naming formulas.

Insert a variable into a formula

 l Simply double-click it in the list.

-or-
 l Click and drag
-or-
 l Type the variable (be sure to surround it with percent signs [%] on either side, for instance %ID%)

*Note: For scribe text variables, you must use dollar signs ($) instead of percent signs (%). To learn more, see Variables in scribe text.

- 922 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Shortcuts and key tips

Shortcuts
Main ProNest window

ProNest Command Keyboard Shortcut

New CTRL + N
Open CTRL + O
Save CTRL + S
SHIFT + F12
Save As F12
Settings (to open from the main window) CTRL + F11
Reports Manager CTRL + F7
Print (nest report) CTRL + P
CTRL + SHIFT + F12
Help F1
AutoNest F2
Array (with parts selected) F3
Pattern Array (with parts selected) F4
Refresh database view F5
Smart Drag bumping and rotating (turn on or F6
off)
Output NC F7
AutoCrop F8
Modify Leads mode F9
Show/Hide keytips F10
ALT
Edit Part List (to open from the main window) F11
Edit Plate List (to open from the main win- SHIFT + F11
dow)
Delete selected DELETE
Select all parts on the nest CTRL + A
Places the selected part in part list on the nest ENTER
Back up chain (when in Chain mode) BACKSPACE
Undo move CTRL + Z
Redo move CTRL + Y
Zoom In PAGE UP

- 923 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

ProNest Command Keyboard Shortcut

Zoom Out PAGE DOWN
Zoom Extents SHIFT + Z
Zoom Window CTRL + W
New Nest CTRL + SHIFT + N
SHIFT + F2
Clear Nest SHIFT + CTRL + DELETE
Delete Nest CTRL + DELETE
Delete All Nests SHIFT + DELETE
Delete Crop CTRL + F8
Cut Number of Times (nests) CTRL + SHIFT + #
Check for Conflicts CTRL + SHIFT + F7
Common Line Cut (with parts selected) SHIFT + F4
CLC Array (with parts selected) CTRL + F4
Duplicate (with parts selected) D
Rotate 90° (with parts selected) Q
Rotate Long Side (with parts selected) S
Rotate Left (with parts selected) W
Rotate Right (with parts selected) E
Mirror F
Change Increment Rotation angle (with parts 1
selected) 2
3
4
5
Bump UP ARROW
DOWN ARROW
LEFT ARROW
RIGHT ARROW
CTRL bump (zero separation) CTRL + UP ARROW
CTRL + DOWN ARROW
CTRL + LEFT ARROW
CTRL + RIGHT ARROW
SHIFT bump (nudge) SHIFT + UP ARROW
SHIFT + DOWN ARROW
SHIFT + LEFT ARROW
SHIFT + RIGHT ARROW
Next nest (navigation) CTRL + PAGE UP
Previous nest (navigation) CTRL + PAGE DOWN

- 924 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

ProNest Command Keyboard Shortcut

First nest (navigation) CTRL + HOME
Last nest (navigation) CTRL + END
Run OneClick CTRL + F2
Cut Sequence mode SHIFT + F9
Crop mode SHIFT + F8
Cut Simulation mode CTRL + SHIFT + F9
Measure mode CTRL + F9
Save to Inventory (for remnants and skel- CTRL + I
etons)
Maximize the window CTRL + F10
Restore Down the window CTRL + SHIFT + F10
Minimize/Restore ribbon CTRL + F1
Display Move/Minimize/Close menu ALT + SPACEBAR
Navigate to other ribbon tab F10 + LEFT ARROW
F10 + RIGHT ARROW
Leave ribbon or submenu ESC
Leave File tab
Exit active mode
Close program ALT + F4

 
Advanced Edit

ProNest Command Keyboard Shortcut

Help F1
Output Part F7
Zoom In PAGE UP
Zoom Out PAGE DOWN
Print CTRL + P
Select All CTRL + A
Undo CTRL + Z
Redo CTRL + Y
Close the dialog ALT + F4

 
Edit Part List and Edit Plate List

- 925 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

ProNest Command Keyboard Shortcut

Help F1
Remove Part/Plate (with added part/plate CTRL + DELETE
selected)
Add Part/Plate (with part/plate source selec- ENTER
ted)
Select All (Edit Part List only) CTRL + A
Close the dialog ALT + A4

 
Database editors

ProNest Command Keyboard Shortcut

New record CTRL + New
Properties for a selected record CTRL + ENTER
Delete selected record CTRL + DELETE
Print CTRL + P
Select all records CTRL + A
Copy (Materials and Customers editors only) CTRL + C
Paste (Materials and Customers editors only) CTRL + V
Close the dialog ALT + A4

Key tips
ProNest also contains key tips that enable you to access any control on the ribbon using the keyboard.

View key tips

 1. Press the ALT key. Letters or numbers will appear for each ribbon element.
 2. Press the letters for the corresponding tab, group and control that you want to access.
 
 

- 926 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Menu and toolbar legacy reference

This article provides a cross reference of the ProNest 2012 menus and toolbars to the ProNest 2015 ribbon interface.
 
Note that in ProNest 2015, the Parts tab only appears on the ribbon when one or more parts are selected on the nest.

File Menu

ProNest 2012 ProNest 2015

Function Menu Path Toolbar Button Ribbon Image
New Job File > New File tab> New > Blank Job  

Open Job File > Open File tab > Open

Open Recent File > Open Recent   File tab > Recent  
Save Job File > Save File tab > Save

Save As File > Save As   File tab > Save As

Import FabTrol Inquiry File > Import FabTrol Inquiry   File tab > New > New from Inquiry  
Export FabTrol Solution File > Export FabTrol Solution   Home tab > Output > Export FabTrol Solution  
Import Part List File > Import Part List   Home tab > Edit Part List > Import Part List

Export Part List File > Export Part List   Home tab > Edit Part List > Export Part List

Output CNC File > Output CNC Home tab > Output > Output NC

Reports File > Report Manager Home tab > Reports

Print File > Print   Nest tab > Print Current View
(Nest Zoom View Report)

Preferences File > Preferences   File tab > Preferences

Exit ProNest File > Exit ProNest   File tab > Exit  

Edit Menu

ProNest 2012 ProNest 2015

Function Menu Path Toolbar Button Ribbon Image
Undo Edit > Undo Parts tab > Undo  
   

- 927 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Redo Edit > Redo Parts tab > Redo  

Select All Edit >Select All   Home tab > Select All

Unselect All Edit > Unselect All   n/a  

Delete Edit > Delete   press Delete key  
(not in ribbon)
Select Mode Edit > Select Mode Home tab > Select Parts

Measure Mode Edit > Measure Mode Home tab > Measure Parts

Modify Leads Part > Move Leads Nest tab > Leads

View Menu

ProNest 2012 ProNest 2015

Function Menu Toolbar But- Ribbon Image
ton
Toolbars View > Toolbars      
Part List View > Part List   View tab > Part List  
Color Legend View > Color Legend   View tab > Color Legend  
Separations View > Separations   View tab > Separations  
Rulers View > Rulers   View tab > Part List  
      View tab > Properties  
(new in 2015)
      View tab > Scrollbars  
(new in 2015)
Zoom Window View > Zoom > Zoom Window View tab > Zoom Window

Zoom Real Time View > Zoom > Zoom Real View tab > Zoom Real Time
Time

Zoom Selection View > Zoom > Zoom Selec- View tab > Zoom Extents> Zoom Selection
tion

Zoom In View > Zoom > Zoom In View tab > Zoom In

- 928 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Zoom Out View > Zoom > Zoom Out View tab > Zoom Out

Zoom Extents View > Zoom > Zoom Extents View tab > Zoom Extents

Zoom Work Zone View > Zoom > Zoom Work   View tab > Zoom Extents> Zoom Work Zone  
Zone
Pan View > Pan View tab > Pan

Cut Direction View > Cut Direction   View tab > Nest Image Objects > Cut Direction  
Pierces View > Pierces   View tab > Nest Image Objects > Pierces  
Open Profiles View > Open Profiles   View tab > Nest Image Objects > Open Profiles  
Display Only View > Display Only   View tab > Nest Image Objects > Display Only  
Skeleton Lines View > Skeleton Lines   View tab > Nest Image Objects > Skeleton Lines  
Bevel Extents Geo- View > Bevel Extents Geometry   View tab > Nest Image Objects > Bevel Extents Geo-  
metry metry
Bevel Original Geo- View > Bevel Original Geo-   View tab > Nest Image Objects > Bevel Original Geo-  
metry metry metry
Locked Leads View > Locked Leads   View tab > Nest Image Objects > Locked Leads  

Job Menu

ProNest 2012 ProNest 2015

Function Menu Toolbar Button Ribbon Image
Edit Part List Job > Edit Part List Home tab > Parts > Edit Part List

Edit Plate List Job > Edit Plate List Home tab > Parts > Edit Part List

OneClick Job > OneClick View tab > OneClick Pane

Settings Job > Settings File tab > Info > Machine > Settings

Change Machine Job > Change Machine   File tab > Info > Machine > Change Machine

Change Material Job > Change Material   File tab > Info > Change Materials

Remnants and Skeletons Job > Remnants and Skeletons   Nest tab > Save to Inventory

Production Status Job > Production Status   n/a  

Job Information Job > Job Information   File tab > Info  

- 929 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Nest Menu

ProNest 2012 ProNest 2015

Function Menu Path Toolbar Button Ribbon Image
New Nest Nest > New Nest Home tab > New Nest

Delete Nest Nest > Delete Nest Home tab > Delete Nest

Delete All Nests Nest > Delete All Nests Home tab > Delete All Nests

Cut Sequence Nest > Cut Sequence Nest tab > Cut Sequence

Collision Avoidance Nest > Collision Avoidance Nest tab > Collision Avoidance

Skeleton Cut-Up Nest > Skeleton Cut-Up Nest tab > Skeleton Cut-Up

Cut Simulation Nest > Cut Simulation Home tab > Cut Simulation

Interior Remnants Nest > Interior Remnants Nest tab > Interior Remnants

Crop Nest > Crop Nest tab > Crop

AutoCrop Nest > AutoCrop Nest tab > AutoCrop

Delete Crop Nest > Delete Crop Nest tab > Delete Crop

AutoNest (setup) Nest > Start AutoNest Home tab > AutoNest > Setup Then Start

AutoNest Nest > Start AutoNest Home tab > AutoNest

Nesting System Optimization Nest > Nesting System Optimization Home tab > Nesting System Optimization

Array Nest >Array Parts tab > Array

Pattern Array Nest > Pattern Array Parts tab > Pattern Array

- 930 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Chain Array Nest > Chain Array Parts tab > Chain Array

CLC Array Nest > CLC Array Parts tab > CLC Array

Cut Number of Times Nest > Cut Number of Times   In status bar, click "Cut: n times"  
(not in ribbon)
Nest Properties Nest > Nest Properties   In the status bar, click "Nest n of n"  
(not in ribbon)
Stop AutoNest In the status bar, click "Stop" In the status bar, click "Stop"
(not in menu) (not in ribbon)

Part Menu

ProNest 2012 ProNest 2015

Function Menu Path Toolbar But- Ribbon Image
ton
Cluster Part > Cluster Parts tab > Cluster

Uncluster Part > UnCluster Parts tab > Uncluster

Select entire working CLC Part > Select entire working CLC   double-click working CLC cluster on  
cluster cluster nest
(not in ribbon)
Common Line Cut Part > Common Line Cut Parts tab > Common Line Cut

Common Line Cut (Quad) Part > Common Line Cut (Quad) Parts tab > Quad

Chain Part > Chain Nest tab > Chain

Bridge Part > Bridge Nest tab > Bridge

Break Part > Break Parts tab > Break

Mirror Part > Mirror Parts tab > Mirror

Duplicate Part > Duplicate Parts tab > Duplicate

- 931 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Reverse Cut Direction Part > Reverse Cut Direction Parts tab > Reverse Cut Direction

Auto Move Leads Part > Automatic Move Leads Nest > Move All Leads

Edge Pierce Part > Edge Pierce Parts tab > Edge Pierce

Remove Edge Pierces Part > Remove Edge Pierces Parts tab > Remove Edge Pierces

AutoTab Part > AutoTab Parts tab > AutoTab

Remove AutoTabs Part > Remove AutoTabs Parts tab > Remove Tabs

Rotate to Next 90° Part > Rotate to Next 90° Parts tab > Rotate to Next 90°

Rotate Long Side Part > Rotate Long Side Parts tab > Rotate Long Side

Increment Angle Part > Increment Angle Parts tab > Rotate Left

Decrement Angle Part > Decrement Angle Parts tab > Rotate Right

Bump Up Part > Bump Up   use keyboard arrow  

(not in ribbon)
Bump Down Part > Bump Down   use keyboard arrow  
(not in ribbon)
Bump Left Part > Bump Left   use keyboard arrow  
(not in ribbon)
Bump Right Part > Bump Right   use keyboard arrow  
(not in ribbon)

Database Menu

ProNest 2012 ProNest 2015

Function Menu Path   Ribbon Image
Material Database > Materials Data tab > Materials

Customer Database > Customers Data tab > Customers

- 932 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Part Library Database > Part Library Data tab > Part Library

Assembly Database > Assembly Data tab > Assemblies

Plate Inventory Database > Plate Inventory Data tab > Plate Inventory

Work Orders Database > Work Orders Data tab > Work Orders

Refresh Database > Refresh   Data tab > Refresh

Help Menu

ProNest 2012 ProNest 2015

Function Menu Path Ribbon Image
Help Help > Materials File tab > Help > ProNest Help

Tip of the Day Help > Tip of the Day File tab > Help > Getting Started  
Check for Updates Help > Check for Updates File tab > Help > Check for Updates  
Configuration Archives Help > Configuration Archives Data tab > Configuration Archives

Machine Manager n/a Data tab > Machines

(new in 2015)

License Information Help > License Information File tab > Help  
About ProNest Help > About ProNest File tab > Help  

Navigation Toolbar

ProNest 2012 ProNest 2015

First Nest Replaced by nest tabs

Previous Nest Replaced by nest tabs

Next Nest Replaced by nest tabs

Last Nest Replaced by nest tabs

- 933 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

37. CONFIGURATION ARCHIVES

What is a configuration archive?
Your current configuration is comprised of a multitude of files (machine files, post processors, settings spreadsheets, macros, pref-
erences, configuration files, etc.) that determine how ProNest will function. A ProNest configuration archive (also called a setup) enables
you to create a copy of all of the ProNest files that affect your current configuration and store them in a single bundled file. Con-
figuration archive files are saved with a .pn extension.
 
Configuration archives have several different purposes:
 
Initial setup
Once ProNest has been installed, you should confirm that the proper machine setup files (contained in the PN) are also installed on your
computer. This will ensure that ProNest can create correct NC code for your specific cutting machine. Installing a configuration archive
(.pn) is a key component of initial ProNest setup.
 
Backup
Often times, you will want to create a backup copy of your ProNest files to protect you in the event of a hardware crash or other type of
malfunction. Using the archive, you can safely store as many different configurations of ProNest as you want. You can also choose which
specific files should be included in the archive.
 
Multiple users
If you are setting up ProNest on multiple computers and want to use a single configuration for all of the computers, you can use the con-
figuration archive to do this quickly and easily. Instead of manually configuring ProNest on each computer, which would be time-con-
suming, you can create an archive of the configuration you want on one computer and then transfer that configuration to your other
computers.
 
Technical Support
If you are experiencing problems with ProNest, you can send a configuration archive to our Technical Support team, which will allow
them to view your current setup first hand and quickly diagnose your problem. If a file needs to be repaired or otherwise modified, the
Technical Support team can do this via your configuration archive, which can then be easily restored onto your computer.

- 934 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

The Configuration Archives dialog

From the ProNest Configuration Archive dialog, you can create a new archive, restore or delete an existing archive, or send an archive to
the Hypertherm Technical Support team.

Open the ProNest Configuration Archives dialog

 l On the Data tab, click Configuration Archives, then click Configuration Archives.
Your existing archives will be displayed in the Archives grid.

Where are my archives stored?

This shows where archives will be stored after they are created. If you want to change this folder, use the browser to specify a new loc-
ation for configuration archive (*.pn) files.

Tip: If you are creating an archive for backup purposes, it is best to store the (*.pn) file on a network drive, to protect you in the event
of a hardware crash.

Click here to undo your last archive restore

If you have restored an archive, this will revert back to the previous configuration (the one that existed before the restoration).

Send an archive to technical support

Clicking this link will take you to a wizard where you can create and send a configuration archive of your current job to Technical Sup-
port.
 

- 935 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Creating a new archive

Create a new configuration archive

 1. On the Data tab, click Configuration Archives, then click Configuration Archives.
The Configuration Archives dialog will appear.
 2. Click the Create a new archive button.
 3. In the Archive name field, enter a name for your archive.
 4. Select the ProNest file types that you want to include in the configuration archive file. You can choose specific files by clicking
Customize your archive.
 5. Click Next. You will be prompted to confirm the contents of the archive.
 6. Click Create.
Your newly created archive will be stored in your designated archive folder, with a .pn extension.

Note: It is recommended that you create a new archive each time you make major changes to your current ProNest setup. This will
ensure that your files are backed up sufficiently.

You can also quickly create an archive of an installed ProNest machine that is not currently loaded.
 1. On the File tab, click Info.
 2. Click Machine, then Change Machine and then click Machines.
 3. In the list on the left, select the machine that you want to create an archive of.
 4. Click Create Archive.
 5. Click Save.
When the archive is created, all associated files will be included (there is no option in include or exclude certain files as there is when
using the Configuration Archives dialog method described above).

- 936 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Restoring an archive
You can restore an existing configuration archive (setup) in ProNest at any time. When an archive is restored, the files contained in that
PN file are restored to the correct folders on your PC. Any current files that have the same file name as archival files will be overwritten. If
your archive contains new files, they will be added in the appropriate folders.

Restore a configuration archive

 1. Double-click the PN file to open it.

 2. If necessary, select the version of nesting software that you want to use the archive with.
 3. Click OK. You will be prompted to confirm the contents that will be restored. If you do not want to restore a given file, clear the
box next to that file.
 4. Click Restore.
The files contained in the configuration archive will be restored to their designated locations. The machine contained in the archive will
now be available in ProNest.

You can also restore an archive from within ProNest (on the Data tab, click Configuration Archives). This is useful for restoring
archives that were previously created in ProNest, such as backups.

Restore a configuration archive in ProNest

This is an alternate method which ensures that the archive is installed on the correct version of ProNest.

 1. In ProNest, on the Data tab, click Configuration Archives > Configuration Archives.
 2. The Configuration Archives dialog will open, showing all the available archives that can be restored. If the archive you need isn't
in this list, click the Where are my archives stored? link and copy your PN archive into that folder.

By default, archives are stored in the following folder:

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Configuration Archives

 3. In the Archives list, select the archive you want to restore.
 4. Click Restore.
 5. You will be prompted to confirm the contents that will be restored. If you do not want to restore a given file, clear the box next to
that file.
 6. Click Restore.

Set a primary machine

Once a PN archive is restored, it is a good idea to set the primary machine in ProNest. This is the default machine that ProNest will use
when a new job is started.
 1. In ProNest, on the File tab, click Preferences.
 2. In the left pane, select Settings.
 3. Select a Primary machine from the list of available machines.
 4. Click OK.
After restoring a configuration archive and setting a primary machine, you will need to restart ProNest for your changes to take effect.

- 937 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Sending an archive to Technical Support

Using configuration archives, you can easily transmit your entire ProNest setup to Technical Support for assistance.

Send the current job and setup to Technical Support

If you have not yet created an archive of your current job and need to send your current configuration to Technical Support, you can eas-
ily create and send a configuration archive.
 1. On the File tab, click Help.
 2. Click Contact Us, then click Send Job to Tech Support.
 3. If the job is not yet saved, click the link to do so.
 4. Enter an archive name, your name, phone number, company name, and a description of your issue.
 5. Click Next. You will be prompted to confirm the contents of your archive.
 6. Click Send.
Your default email program will open. The job and configuration archive file will be attached to a new email message, which con-
tains contact and case information. If you have been working with a specific Hypertherm CAD/CAM Software technical staff mem-
ber, please include their name in your email message.

Send a different setup to Technical Support

You can also send an archive that is not the current machine setup to Hypertherm.
 1. On the Data tab, click Configuration Archives, then click Configuration Archives.
 2. Select the archive you want to send.
 3. Click Send.
 4. Enter your name, phone number, company name, and a description of your issue.
 5. Click Next. You will be prompted to confirm the contents of your archive.
 6. Click Send.
Your default email program will open. The configuration archive file will be attached to a new email message, which contains con-
tact and case information. If you have been working with a specific Hypertherm CAD/CAM Software technical staff member,
please include their name in your email message.

- 938 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

38. USERS AND PERMISSIONS

User account basics
Sign in to ProNest

When ProNest is started, you will be prompted to log on with your user name and password.
 1. From the User list, select a user name.
 2. Enter your password.

Tip: If you have forgotten your password, contact an administrator to get a new one. You can click the I forgot my password link to
see a list of administrators.

Sign out of ProNest

 l When you exit ProNest, you will be logged off automatically.

Change your password

If you want to reset your password, you can quickly do this from within ProNest:
 1. On the right side of the status bar (in the lower right corner of the main ProNest window), click the current user name.

 2. Select Change Password.

 3. Enter your current password.
 4. Enter a new password (must be between 6 and 20 characters long).

Switch users

You can quickly switch to a different user account while using ProNest.
 1. On the right side of the status bar, click the current user name.

- 939 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

 2. Select Switch User.

 3. Enter a user name and password to sign in as the new user.
When you sign in as a new user, the previous user will be automatically logged off.

Sign in as guest

You can always log on as a guest in ProNest. While this gives you the lowest level of access, it is always available.
 l In the sign in dialog, click the Sign in as guest link.

- 940 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Managing Users and Permissions

The Users and Permissions feature lets you create defined roles for users, enabling you to control which areas of ProNest that users can
access and change. This is especially useful in scenarios where multiple people access the same computer. When activated, each person
logs on to ProNest with their own user name and password.

Account types
There are four different types of accounts, each giving the user a different level of control in ProNest:
 
 l System Administrator
The system administrator manages all other user accounts, including all other administrators. There can be only one system admin-
istrator account. This account has full capabilities and permissions in ProNest. The system administrator is listed as "Admin-
istrator" in the log in screen.

 l Administrator
The administrator can add new users, deactivate existing users, change permissions for users, reset user passwords, etc. This
account has full permissions in ProNest.

 l Normal
The normal account is for users who perform common tasks in ProNest. This account can be configured to have permissions set
for access to various database editors and preferences.

 l Guest
The guest account is primarily for people who need temporary access to ProNest. This account type does not require a user name
or password and it gives you the lowest level of access.

Administrative tasks
Administrators can manage users and permissions using ProNest preferences:
 1. On the File tab, click Preferences.
 2. In the left pane, select Users and Permissions.
A list of ProNest users will be displayed. You can edit user accounts and permissions from this page. Modifying users and permissions
requires administrative privileges.

Turn on or off Users and Permissions in ProNest

 l On the Users and Permissions preferences page, simply click ON or OFF.

Note that turning off the Users and Permissions feature will not delete any existing user accounts. It will merely disable the feature so that
users are not required to log on when ProNest is started. With the feature turned off, user access to ProNest will not be restricted.

Note: When turning on Users and Permissions for the first time, you will be prompted to sign in as the system administrator. Ini-
tially, the Administrator password is set to "hypertherm". After signing in as Administrator and turning on Users and Per-
missions, it is recommended that you reset the Administrator password, as described in User account basics.

- 941 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Add new user

 1. Click the +Add new user button.

 2. Enter account details for the user. Typically, the full name should match their Windows user name. The email address is used for
informational purposes.
 3. Select a user account type. "Administrator" will give the user full administrative rights, "Normal" will add an account with con-
figurable permissions.
 4. For Permissions, clear a box to restrict access to that database editor.
 5. Click OK.

Change permissions for normal users

For each Normal user account, you can turn on or off the ability to make changes in the Material, Customer, Plate Inventory, Part Library,
Assembly, or Work Orders database editors.
 1. Select a user account (on the Users and Permissions preferences page, click the user name).
 2. For Permissions, clear the checkboxes next to the database editors to restrict access to them.
When a permissions checkbox is cleared, the user will have read-only access in that database editor. They will not be able to make
changes (such as adding, editing, or deleting records) within that database editor. Note that database changes that happen during the
normal course of using ProNest will not be prohibited for any user.

Reset user passwords

If a user forgets their password, you can reset the password as follows:
 1. Select a user account (on the Users and Permissions preferences page, click the user name).
 2. Select Reset password.
 3. Click OK.
The password will be reset to the default value shown on screen.

Deactivate user

 1. Select a user account (on the Users and Permissions preferences page, click the user name).
 2. Set the Status to Inactive.
 3. Click OK.
Inactive users can be hidden in the Users list by clearing the Show inactive users box.

Allow users to have their password remembered

You can configure ProNest so that the "Remember my password" setting appears on the user log in page at startup.
 l On the Users and Permissions page in preferences, select Allow "Remember my password".
You may want to disable this feature for enhanced privacy and security.

- 942 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

User options
User options for each ProNest user can be managed by an administrator.
 
To open the user options dialog:
 1. On the File tab, click Preferences.
 2. In the left pane, select Users and Permissions.
 3. Click a user name.

User options for...

Full name
This is the user name for the account. Typically, the ProNest user name should match the Windows user name.
 
Email address
Email address is used for informational purposes.
 
Type
Normal
The normal account is for the common ProNest user. This account can be configured to have permissions set to restrict access to various
database editors and preferences. Normal users do not have the ability to turn on or off Users and Permissions, and cannot add or edit
other user accounts.
 
Administrator
The administrator can add new users, deactivate existing users, change permissions for users, reset user passwords, etc. This account has
full permissions in ProNest.
 
Status
Status can be used to deactivate or reactivate an existing user account. Inactive users are not listed in the Sign in dialog that appears
when ProNest is started.
 
Choices: Active, Inactive

Permissions
An administrator can edit permissions for a Normal user account. Permissions restrict the ability to make changes in the database editors
and in certain preferences.
 
When a permissions checkbox is cleared, the user will have read-only access in that database editor. This means they will not be able to
make changes, such as adding, editing, or deleting records, within that database editor. Note that database changes that happen during
the normal course of using ProNest will not be prohibited for any user.
 
Password
This is useful if a user has forgotten their password. To reset a user's password, select this setting and click OK. The password will be reset
to the name shown on the screen. Once it has been reset, the password can be changed by the user.
 

- 943 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

39. CONTACT US
Locations

CAD/CAM Software
Americas Asia Pacific
United States China
22 West Main Street 301, South Building
Lockport, NY 14094 USA 495 ShangZhong Road
+1 (716) 434-3755 Tel Shanghai 200231, PR China
+1 (716) 434-3711 Fax +86 21 8023 1122 Tel
[email protected] +86 21 8023 1120 Fax
  [email protected]
Mexico  
Av. Toluca No. 444, Anexo 1 Singapore
Col. Olivar de los Padres 82 Genting Lane
Del. Álvaro Obregón Media Centre Annexe Block #A01-01
D.F. C.P. 01780, Mexico Singapore 349567
+52 55 5681 8109 Tel +65 6841 2489 Tel
+52 55 5683 2127 Fax +65 6841 2490 Fax
[email protected] [email protected]
   
Brazil Japan
Rua Brás Cubas 801 Samty Will Building
231 - Jardim Maia 2-40 MNiyahara 1-Chrom
CEP 07115-030 Yodogawa-ku
Guarulhos, SP - Brasil Osaka, 532-0003, Japan
+55 11 2409 2636 Tel +81 (6) 6170-2020 Tel
+55 11 2408 0462 Fax +81 (6) 6170-2015 Fax
[email protected] [email protected]
   
  Korea
Europe, Middle East, Africa #3904 Centum Leaders Mark B/D
1514 Woo-Dong
Netherlands Haeundae –Gu
Vaartveld 9 Busan, Korea 612-889
4704 SE +82-51-747-0358 Tel
Roosendaal [email protected]
The Netherlands  
+31 (0) 165 596907 Tel India
+31 (0) 165 596921 Fax A-18 / B-1 Extension
[email protected] Mohan Co-Operative Industrial
  Mathura Road, New Delhi 110044
+91 (11) 40521201/ 2/ 3 Tel

- 944 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

+91 (11) 40521204 Fax

[email protected]
 
Oceania
+61 (3) 93751455 Tel
+61 (3) 93751499 Fax
 
 

 
 
Visit us online at www.hyperthermCAM.com

- 945 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Technical Support
Hypertherm CAM software is committed to providing you with the best overall product experience. This includes intuitive technical
products and flexible options to fit your support needs. Our products are designed with superior quality and ease of use in mind, but we
understand that issues do arise from time to time that need the backing of our support resources.
 
For details about all support offerings, please visit our website:
 
www.hyperthermCAM.com
 
For technical support, contact your nearest Hypertherm CAM support representative.

- 946 -
 ProNest 2019 Manual

Sales
Contact your account representative for information about the latest Hypertherm CAM products, the Subscription Services program,
upgrade options and prices, and more. For a list of our US and worldwide offices, please refer to Locations. If you have a technical ques-
tion or problem, please contact Technical Support.

- 947 -
 Index: 2D CAD – Batches

INDEX Allow negative stock quantities  252

Allow nested subroutines  180
Allow nesting outside the crop  102
2 Allow one crop for each work zone  100
Allow pattern array  70
2D CAD  311
Allow subroutined nests  180
Cleanup  359
Allow subroutines that contain only collision avoidance
3 motions  180
Anchor part to cursor  464, 471, 529
3D CAD  369, 837 Angle  38, 474
A Angle value from point  423
Append Unsequenced Parts to End  543
Actions  128 Apply only to straight lines  56
Activation time  592 Approved  636
Active Rule  125 Arc radius tolerance  72
Add leads and loops  77 Area-select  509
Add loops to non-beveled corners  77 Area increase  276
Add Missing Tools to Library  880 Array  47, 523, 529
Add or Remove Processes  27, 29 Chain  537
Reuse Existing Settings  31 Common Line Cut  47, 112, 535, 789
Select a Post Processor (CFF)  30 how to  526
Add safety cuts at all intersections  50 Pattern  533
Add safety cuts to the beginning of profiles  50 stopping  541
Add safety cuts to the end of profiles  50 Assemblies  694
Add tabs  71, 325 Auto height control  174
Add to Library  880 AutoBevel  76, 837-838
Add to Work Orders  841 AutoCAD blocks  855
Added margin  277 Autocluster  324, 480
Adding parts  313 AutoCrop  150, 546
Adding parts to the nest  464 settings  150
Adding Tee  720 Autodesk Inventor  270, 331, 376-377
Additional machine output  163, 579 AutoLoop threshold  77
Adjust leads to pierce in the center of holes  37 Automatic move leads  486
Advanced Common Line Cutting (Advanced CLC)  43, 112, 784, Automatic nesting  503
795-796, 803 Automatically anchor part to cursor  298
Advanced Edit  411, 425, 893 Automatically move exterior leads for avoidance  132
bevel side view  439 Automatically move interior leads for avoidance  132
bringing parts into  411 Automatically move leads  104
output  578 Automatically open the Edit Part List dialog after starting a
AHC  174 new Job  250
Aliases  661-662, 666 AutoNest  104, 503
Align  790 setting up  70, 504
Alignment edge  60 stopping  507
Allocated costing  600 AutoNest Strategies  109
area  601 renaming  109
formulas  607 saving and discarding changes  109
scrap area  602 AutoTab  28, 56, 71, 222, 482
Allocated Part Detail report  549, 607 leads  218
Allocated scrap area  277, 602 Avoidance paths  132
Allow CLC array  70 Avoidance ratio  134
Allow common lines with the plate edge  46
Allow cut to cross kerf  52 B
Allow dynamic align  70, 302, 325 Background image  501
Allow forward and backward repositions  99 Backup  934
Allow leads to move  70 Batches  555
Allow multiple turret layouts on a nest  95

- 948 -
 Index: Bevel – Conflicts

Bevel  75, 269, 675, 828, 836-837 Change Material  288

Advanced settings  77 Check for Conflict  491-492
AutoBevel  76 Check for updates  258
blind  834 CIF files  72, 335
gradual  426, 439 Circle pierce  319
how to apply  831 Class  63, 300, 322, 669, 678, 687, 690
types  829 setting a default  63, 323
Bevel angle - prefix  75 CLC  790
Bevel Colors  919 CLC Array  43, 783
Bevel consumables  682 Clear Nest  463
Bevel Side View  439 Clear Station For This Nest  887
Bevel spreadsheets  225 Cluster  70, 324, 480
Bill of Materials  346 automatic  324, 480
Blind  862 Cluster building technique  107
Blind bevel  231 Cluster resolution (% of nest resolution)  107
Blocks  855 CNC decoder  335
BMP  350 CNC file extension  161, 574
BOM  66, 340, 346 CNC file naming  574
Boring  32 CNC Output  72, 159, 251, 570
Bottom edge  145 DXF Output  184
Breaking CLC parts  793 file naming  574
Bridge Cutting  769, 773-774, 777 Microjoint  182
Bridge macro  233 Output Axis  178
Bridge radius  54 output dialog  571
Bridge width  54, 773 Plate Handler  182
Bridging  54, 769, 771, 773-774, 777 Pre-Pierces  170
adding  771 progress  577
breaking  771 Step and Repeat  176
negative  773 Subroutines  180
Buge text marking  349 CNC Output dialog  571
Build horizontal stacks  110 Coarse tap color  92
Build vertical stacks  110 Collision Avoidance  132, 810
Bump handles  470, 797 mode  810
Bumping parts  251, 464, 470 modifying avoidance paths  812
geometric bump  797 viewing production time of a path  813
Normal  470 collisions  132
Nudge  470 Color Legend  914, 918
Zero separation  470 Color scheme  253, 554
Columns
C adding to grid  909
CAD Cleanup Combinations  110
2D CAD  359 Common Line Cutting (CLC)  43, 70, 783, 786, 790
CAD Cleanup (Simple)  356 Advanced  795-796, 801
CAD Editor  311 multipart CLC  801
CAD files  72, 331 working CLC cluster  796, 801
BOM layer  346 Array  47, 112, 535
importing  72, 335, 700 breaking  793
layer mapping  356 how to  786
CAD font  265 pairs and quads  43, 783
CFF  19, 30, 159, 169, 257 Plate Edge  46, 803
CFG  19, 281 Safety Cuts  50
Chain Array  53, 537 Compound tools  862, 875
using  537 Configuration Archive  934-937
Chain parts in reverse order  52 restoring an archive  937
Chaining  52, 780-781 sending  938
Change Machine  287 Conflicts  491-492

- 949 -
 Index: Contact us – Do not show me this again

Contact us  944, 946-947 Cutting Techniques  28, 42, 199-200, 202, 209, 214
Sales  947 Corner Radius  207
Technical Support  946
Contains missing tools  881 D
Contains multiple parts  64 DAT  162
Coordinate specification  423 Data file location  159
Copy  485 Data files  162
Corner Radius  207 Database
Corner rounding  207 Assemblies  694
Corner snap distance  253 Customer  848
Correct allocation  847 Material  656
Cost factors for remnants  115 Part Library  692-693
Cost per hour  591 Plate Inventory  695, 698
Costing  28, 154, 156, 584, 591, 593, 595 Decimal places  255
allocated  600-601, 607 Default activation cost  154
part costs  328 Default activation time  154
spreadsheets  220 Default class  63
Countersinking  93, 864 Default cost per minute  154
Crop  102, 546 Default export folder  158
automatic  546 Default installation folders  14
deleting  547 Default output folder  162
manual  547 Default pattern array strategy  104
settings  150 Default Plate  80
Crop mode  547 Default tools have been removed from the turret  97
Crop utilization  609 Define a custom remnant  405
Crossing  47 Delete All Empty Nests  462
CSV list of plates  702 Delete Nest  462
CSV report destinations  567 Delete overlapped entities  67
CSV reports  550 Deleting entities  415
Custom Filter  911 Deleting part geometry  415
Custom Remnants  405, 461, 504 Deleting profiles  415
Customer Database  849 Density  658
Customers  626, 848-849 Depth  862, 868
Cut-off utilization  115 Description  289
Cut-outs Destinations  561
saving as remnants  715 CSV  567
Cut - [Cut Process]  64, 429 HTML  569
Cut all layers with [Cut Process]  64 PDF  565
Cut all True Hole first  123 Printer  563
Cut Direction  46, 483 XLS  568
reversing  483 DGN files  331
Cut each nest the maximum number of times  104 Direction  176
Cut number of times  487 Disable auto height control  42, 52, 174
Cut quality  673 Disable automatic bumping of parts  251
Cut rectangular parts by column  48 Disable drawing of trials  252
Cut Sequence  118, 542, 544 Disable pilot drills  91
interior profiles  123 Discount  631
sub-sequence  542 Discounts  621
Cut sequence home  119 Display Only  66
Cut sequence order  148 Display Units  255
Cut Sequence Rules  125 Distance  138
editing  128 Distance between tabs  56
Cut Simulation  514, 889 Distance from corner  56
playing  514 Distance from point  423
Cutoff nest utilization  110 Do not consider lines smaller than <value> in.  56
Cutoff time  110 Do not show me this again  274

- 950 -
 Index: Do not try with lines that have tabs – History data

Do not try with lines that have tabs  43 F

Drafting  636
Drag array  529 FabTrol  362
Drag Rotation  465, 471 Feedrate  34
Draw with parts filled  554, 559 Field Chooser  909
Drawing scale  64, 335 File extension
Drill Machine Interface  850, 872 output  161
Drill Tools  872 File storage  14
Drilling  32, 171, 369, 850, 862, 872, 886, 889, 893 File units  64
DSTV  837 File/Controller Associations  72
DSTV files  331, 361 Files of type  331
Duplicate  485 Fill color  915
DWG files  331 Fill unused regions with new pattern  107
DXF export  310, 490 Fill using CLC Array  112
DXF files  184, 331 Fill using Pattern Array  112
DXF Output  184 Filler Parts  69, 116, 300, 323
Dynamic align  48, 60, 70, 302, 325, 774, 777, 790 Filling  918
Dynamic pierce  319 Filter  911
apply custom  911
E by CAD file name  332
Fine Feature  681
Edge Pierce viewing on nest  675
settings  138 Fine tap color  92
using  481 Fit Evaluation  112
Edge Pierce Only  685 Fit ratio  70, 324
Edit Cut Paths  455, 457, 806, 808 Fly Cut  142, 246, 676, 904, 907
Edit cut sequence rule  128 Folder locations  14
Edit Field dialog  921 Font  265
Edit Part List window  64, 311 Forgot password  939
Preview  329 Free space  294
Edit Plate List window  400-401 Full columns only  47
Edit Strategies  107, 109 Full Plates: Use a cost factor of <value>%  115
Enable automatic CNC torch spacing  159 Full raise/lower time  132
Enable pilot drills  91
Enable skeleton cut-up  144, 147 G
Enclosed area  276, 593
End point snap distance  43, 54 Gauge  658
Entity  412, 414 Generate data files during output  159
properties  426 Generate token files during output  159
splitting  423 GIF  350
EPS files  331 Grade  658, 704
Equal split of selected entity  423 Gradual bevel  836, 919
Error Grain restraint  69, 301, 323
conflicts  492 Green Start AutoNest button  503
Examples  14 Grids
Expiration  631 adding columns  909
Explode multiple parts  64 filter  911
Export DXF  158, 310, 490, 705 Group by box  910
Export folder  158 Guest user  940
Export polylines  158 H
Exporting reports  550
Extend past the plate edge  138 HDi  682
Extension  38, 46, 150, 317 Heads  82, 299
Exterior cut order  148 multiple  477
Exterior Leads  28, 37 Heat Dissipation  118, 123
Hide empty turret stations  885
History data  252, 292

- 951 -
 Index: History Database – Length used

History Database  251 J
nest image folder  254
Hits  885 Job
Horizontal grid spacing  147 send to tech support  938
Horizontal lines  144 Job Color Legend report  549
Horizontal reposition distance  98 Job description  289
Hotkeys  923 Job Information  283
HTML report destinations  569 Job Naming  263, 282
HVAC Label report  549 Job Storage settings  185
Job Summary report  548
I Jobs  281-282, 286
automatic naming  263
Icon legend  927 changing machine  287
IGES files  331 changing materials  288
Ignore for output  159 default folder  285
Ignore leads during nesting  101 description  289
Ignore part lead-in / lead-out  144 information  289
Ignore tabbed profiles  132 new  282
Ignore XLS row  195 opening  283
Images  252, 350 Preferences  250
Immediately after start point  56 saving  285
Immediately before end point  56 JPEG  350
Importing Parts  64 JPG  350
Importing Parts (Advanced)  72
Include machine parameters in output  159 K
Include material costs  115, 632
Include production costs  115 Kerf crossing lead-outs  47
Include scrap in the part area  276 Kerf direction
Increment angle  471 changing for profile  429
Init point  27 Kerf width  34, 43, 166
Initial rotation  68, 301, 323 Key tips  926
Initialization point  27 Keyboard shortcuts  923
Insert Nest  488 Keys  190
Insert part name as comment  159 Profile Type  191
Insert stop codes  47 L
Insert Unsequenced Parts Before  543
Installation folders  14 Labor cost per hour  154
Installing ProNest  13 Labor cost per weight  154
Integrate skeleton lines with parts  126, 148 Labor rate  154
IntelliChoice  105 Language  255
Interior Cut-Up  244, 815, 817 Laser
Interior Leads  28, 37 Selecting class  687
slots  41 Layout  98, 884, 886
Interior Remnants  715 Lead-in extension  52
settings  153 Lead-out percentage  47
Intersection point  413 Leads
Inventor  270, 376-377, 837 automatic move  486
Inventory locking  431
exporting plates to DXF  705 modifying  515
Plate  695, 698, 701 properties  315
plates  406 spreadsheets  217-218
Inventory folder  254 Leads origin  67
Inventory Plate Detail report  549 Left edge  145
Inventory Plate Summary report  549 Leftover material width  32
Length of safety cuts  50
Length used  611

- 952 -
 Index: Library – Multi-Op

Library Maximum area increase  43

Part  692-693 Maximum columns  47
parts  390 Maximum combination utilization  110
Line items  638 Maximum combinations  110
Line number increment  159 Maximum controller arc radius  73
Line numbers in CNC  161 Maximum corner angle  54, 56
Lines at the plate edge  144 Maximum diameter  37
Locations  944 Maximum height  47
Locking leads on a part  315, 431, 515, 518 Maximum length  138
overtravel  316, 431 Maximum number of units  47
Locking tool in a station  887 Maximum number to avoid  132
Logo  278, 628 Maximum part orientations to try  112
Look ahead  110 Maximum parts per combination  110
Loops  446-448 Maximum profile size to avoid  132
Maximum repositions  99
M Maximum rows  47
Machine  19, 22, 27, 30 Maximum torch down distance to avoid  132
Change  287 Maximum width  47
configuration  27, 29 Measure mode  513
copy  25 Measurement lines  513
creating new  22, 24 Menus  927
delete  25 Microjoint  182
editing  23 Minimize torch changes  84
Properties  62 Minimum cut length  144
rename  25 Minimum distance  118, 123
saving  24 Minimum profile length  50
Machine folder  257 Minimum remnant area  150
Machine home  27, 118, 178 Minimum shared length  43
Machines dialog  25 Minimum side length  153
Macro folder  75 Minimum skeleton area  144
Maintain highest quality on common lines  43 Minimum spacing  56
Make Pre-Pierce Tool  897 Minimum torch spacing  83, 299, 505
Manage Minimum usable web width  150
assembly  262, 942 Minimum width - along plate edge  150
customers  262, 942 Mirror  69, 301, 323, 484
machines  25 Missing tools  880
materials  262, 942 Mode  159, 180
part library  262, 942 Modes of operation  508
plate inventory  262, 942 Collision Avoidance  810
work orders  262, 942 Cut Sequence  542
Manual crop  547 Cut Simulation  514
Manual nesting  464 Measure  513
Map to CAD color numbers  66, 340 Modify Leads  515
Markups  623 Pan  512
Master torch number  82 Select  509
Material aliases  661-662, 666 Zoom  511
Material Costs  116 Modify Leads  515
Material Database  656 Move All Leads  486
Material thickness multiplier  37 Move interior leads  106
Material unit costs  632 Move leads (if necessary)  138
Materials  659 Moving parts  470
adding to database  656 Moving Pierce  683
deleting from database  657 MRP Material Map  842
editing in database  656 Multi-Head Nest Detail report  548
properties  658 Multi-Op  875
Maximum alignment rotation  43

- 953 -
 Index: Multiple cut processes – Part Nest List

Multiple cut processes Optimization  115, 825, 827

changing assigned process  429 disable drawing of trials  252
Multiple torches  477 plate selection criteria  825
Must nest all parts  115 settings  115, 825
Must nest all priority 1 parts on first nest  115 strategies  825
Optimization report  549
N Options  918
Naming  263 Order cuts by process  159
Naming formulas  921 Order punches by process  159
NC Comments  195 Order scribes by process  159
Negative bridging  773 Orientation  83
Nest Outline color  914
export to DXF  490 Output  570-571, 579, 583
thumbnail  488 Progress  577
Nest Background Image  501 single parts  578
Nest image  252 single post  578
Nest Image  254 Output Axis  178
Nest interlock  114 Output DLL  159
Nest Plot report  548 Output file extension  161
Nest properties  493 Output folder  162
Nest resolution  101 Output leads  184
Nest tabs  488 Output original layer names whenever possible  184
Nesting  464 Output parts  578
properties  322 Output polylines  184
settings  101 Output Progress  577
Nesting direction  112 status  577
Nesting home  101 Output safe zones  184
Nesting strategies to use  115 Output sheets  184
Nesting System Optimization  825, 827 Over-allocated  847
Nests Overburn  38, 317
creating new  460 Overtravel  38, 317
cut number of times  487 locking  316, 431
deleting  462 P
inserting  488
managing  488 Pair CLC  44
printing  550 Pan mode  512
New process  31 Parent ID  697
NIF  281, 285 Part-chain separation  52
Not Crossing  47 Part - part separation  34, 499
Nudge  470 Part - pierce separation  34, 499
Nudge distance  103 Part - plate edge separation  34, 499
Number of torches  82, 505 Part area  275
Number per profile  56 Part Cut-Up  451, 453
Part Detail report  548
O Part file token  344
Offset  176 Part fit ratio  110
Offset for process-off  50 Part interlock  113
Offset for process-on  50 Part Label report  549
OneClick  819 Part Library  390, 692
options  821 adding parts to the database  693
Open a copy  286 Part List  296-297, 311
Open Job  283 Export  304
Open profile tolerance  64 Import  304
Open profiles options  298
closing  424 Part List by Customer report  549
Part Nest List  303

- 954 -
 Index: Part requires tools that are missing from the tool library – Process

Part requires tools that are missing from the tool library  881 Plate Inventory  695
Part Sources  311 adding inventory plates to the plate list  406
Filter  332 adding plates to the database  698
Part Summary report  549 exporting plates to DXF  705
Part tolerance  144 Importing CAD files into  700
Part violates its mirror property  484 importing CSV plate list  702
Partial raise/lower time  132 modifying plates  701
Parts  509 plates per page  695
clustering  480, 509 saving remnants and skeletons  706
creating output for  578 viewing plate information  696
exporting to DXF  310 Plate List  250, 399
moving  470, 509 Plate loading cost  154
rotating  470, 509 Plate processor machines  48
selecting  509 Plate Record View dialog  696, 698
unselecting  510 Plate reservations  407
Parts nested inside of other parts Plate selection criteria  115, 825
prohibiting  69 Plate usage  112
Pass profile strategy  77 Plate used utilization  610
Password Plates
Change  939 user defined  403
forgot  939 Plates per page  695
Pattern Array  112, 529, 533 PN  934
Pattern Array Strategies  107 PNCA  934
Pattern Array strategy  112 PNG  350
Pattern rotation increment  107 PNL  303-305
PDF format  305
saving quote as  634 polylines  158, 184
PDF report destinations  565 Post Processor  19, 27, 30, 166, 169
Peddinghaus  48 Post processor folder  257
Pending Approval  636 Pre-drawn leads  520
Permissions  262, 942 Pre-drill  91
Physical location  27 Pre-kerf  166
Pierce - pierce separation  35 Pre-pierce as Drill  171, 897
Pierce - plate edge separation  35 Pre-pierce by part  127, 171
Pierce Drill  897 Pre-Pierce Tool  897
Pierce Radius  195 Pre-pierce tool is not defined for the nest  885
Pilot drill  91, 859, 865, 873, 876, 885 Pre-Pierces  127, 170, 242, 897
Pipe  717 Precision  159, 255
adding  389 Preferences  248, 275
adding tee  720 color scheme  253
assigning cut process  722 Preferences dialog  248
Fittings  727-731, 733, 735, 737, 739, 741-743, 746 Prefix  860, 866
opening  721 Prekerf  166
preview  719 Preview  329
saving  721 Primary machine  257
settings  723 Print Current View  551
Shape Reference  718 Printer report destinations  563
Tees  748, 750, 752, 754, 756, 758 Printing  550
Place leads on corners whenever possible  132 quotes  634
Plasma  681 reports  550
selecting class  678 Priority  64, 69, 300, 323
Plate Edge  46, 796, 803 Priority 99  69, 116, 300, 323
Plate Edge Threshold  138 Pro/Engineer files  331
Plate edge tolerance  144 Process  171
Plate Handler  182 drilling  32
editing settings  28

- 955 -
 Index: Process Parameters – Scheme

Process Parameters  28, 32, 34, 194 Reload  345

spreadsheets  197-198 part files when opening a job  250, 345
Processes  27, 30-31 parts in the part list  345
adding or removing  30 Remnants  152, 706
Production Manager  293 defining a custom remnant  405
Production time  591 interior  715
Profile  412, 414 naming convention  263
splitting  422 nesting on  710
Profile Type  191 saving  707
Program number  161, 572 Remove existing leads  77
Prohibit filling  69, 301, 307, 324, 347 Remove existing loops  77
Prompt for machine at startup  257 Replace every lead-out with a microjoint  182
ProNest Reports  548, 550, 554, 557
installing  13 Allocated Part Detail report  607
ProNest file locations  14 batches  555
ProNest Machine  18 destinations  561, 563, 565, 567-569
Properties exporting  550
CAD import  335 formatting  557
leads  315 options  557
machine  62 printing  550
nesting  322 saving  550
plate  401 viewing  550
Punch - [Punch Process]  66 Required  68, 300, 322
Punch Points  358 Reserving a plate  407
Punch/Scribe first  127, 163 Restore settings from Job  18, 283
Retain all existing leads  64, 71, 520
Q Return to initialization point  159
Quad CLC  43, 786 Reuse Existing Settings  31
Quality  342, 392-395, 397, 426, 673, 919 Reverse cut direction  429, 483
assigning during import  68 Reverse direction and kerf  64
assigning to entities  426 Ribbon  927
leads  40 Right edge  145
use CAD colors  68 Root ID  697
Quantity  64 Rotate handles  470
Quantity discounts  621 Rotate Increment  471
Quoting  275, 616-617, 619, 621, 623, 626, 628-629, 631, 634, Rotate to minimize part area  112
636, 638, 640, 643, 652 Rotating parts  465, 470-471
Create PDF  634 Free  470
Send in email  634 Incremental  470
Long Side  471
R To Next 90  471
Rotation angle  474
Radius  171
Rough cut large drill holes  32
Radius corners  207
Rounding corners  207
Rampdowns  202
Rampups  202 S
Raster  350
Record matching  190 Safe zone file  254
Rectangular area  328, 593, 613 Safe Zone Schemes  81, 408
Rectangular Optimization  109-110, 112 Safe zone tolerance  144
Rectangular Part Detail Report  549 Safety Cuts  50
Rectangular utilization  611 Same as current machine  580
Rectangular weight  328, 613 Save Advanced Edit tokens  72
Redo Move  475 Save As  285
Rejected  636 Save part file tokens  73, 344
Release unnested quantities  847 Save the part list (*.pnl) and plate list (*.snl) with the Job  250
Scheme  80

- 956 -
 Index: Scrap method – SureCut

Scrap method  276 Smooth tolerance  64

Scrap value  658 Snap tolerance  56, 132
Scribe - [Scribe Process]  64 SNL  303
Scribe text  265, 440 Solid Edge files  331
using variables with  442 SOLIDWORKS  837
Secondary Operations Library  652 SOLIDWORKS files  68, 266, 331, 342, 363, 367, 369
Select  476, 509 Sort point  119
Select a Post Processor (CFF)  30 Speed  672
Select Profile  414 Split entity  423
Selecting parts  476, 509 Split profile  422
Selection tolerance  253 Spreadsheets
Send in Email  634 Bevel  225
Separations Spreadsheets (settings tables)  19, 28, 42, 75, 156, 182, 186, 194
editor  499 autotab  222
part-chain  52 bevel  75
process parameters settings  34 costing  156, 220
task pane  499 cutting techniques  42, 199-200, 202, 209, 214
Sequence all True Hole cuts first  123 default records  190
Sequence cuts by part  126 folders  257
Sequence order for pass levels  77 format  188
Sequence pre-pierces by part  127 interior cut-up  244, 246
Sequence punches and scribes by part  126 leads styles  217-218
Sequence the interior profiles for an optimal path  132 microjoint  182
Settings  17-20, 22-24, 32, 185 process parameters  197-198
open Settings dialog  23 record matching  190
Pipe  723 units conversion  193
restoring  20 wildcards  190
saving  20 Stack cutoff utilization  110
using the settings dialog  20 Stack Label report  549
Setup  934, 937 Stack quantity  404
send to tech support  938 Standard pierce  319
SFZ files  408 Standard Plate Sizes  80
Sheet Nest List  303 Standard reports  548
Shipping  631 Start AutoNest  503
Shortcuts  923 Start point  412
Show performance applications on the nest  677 Station  884, 886
Show separately  631 Stationary pierce  320
Sign in  939 Status  294, 635-636
Single-Head Nest Detail report  548 Step 1: Find the best vertical crop  150
Single-Head Nest Sequence report  548 Step 2: Find the best L-shape crop  150
Single part output  578 Step 3: Find the best profile crop  150
Single post output  578 Step and Repeat  176
Size  38 Steps  128
Skeleton Cut-Up  144, 237, 760, 767 Stop before cutting  163
Cut Sequence  148 Stop before punching  163
Skeleton Grid  147 Stop before scribing  163
Skeletons  144, 706 Stop before the plate edge  138
naming convention  263 Straight edge ratio  104
nesting on  710 Strategy  56, 104
saving  708 Strip stop codes from CNC part files  159
Skin  253 Style  38, 170
Slots  41 Sub-sequence numbers  542
Slow down to <value1>% of feedrate <value2> ...  43 Subroutines  180
Slug Destroy  139, 815, 817 file naming  575
Smart Drag  465, 471 SureCut  674, 681
Smooth entities  64

- 957 -
 Index: Tab auto-recognition size – Users

T True Shape  109, 112

True Shape Nesting  504
Tab auto-recognition size  73 True utilization  609
Tab Lead  218 True weight  328, 613
Tab length  56 Try extra column  107
Tab location  56 Try extra row  107
Tabs Try orientations in groups of <value>  112
AutoTab  482 Turret  66, 94, 340, 884, 886
leads  218 Type  118, 180
manual  449
Tapping  91-92, 858 U
Tasks  128
Tax shipping  632 Under-allocated  847
Technical Support  946 Underburn  317
Technology panel  250, 674 Undertravel  317
Tee  720 Underwater  685
Templates  286 Undo Move  475
Text  440 Undo output  583
THC  174 Unique key  259
Thick Pierce  684 Unit price  658
This nest contains missing tools  881, 885 Units  159
This nest requires a pre-pierce tool  885 Unselecting parts  510
Thumbnail  488 Updates
Tight fit  112 checking for  258
tip-ups  132 Use ‘Not-Crossing’ lead-in/lead-out  52
TOK file  73 Use alternate CLC array crossing torch paths  47
Token file  73, 344 Use AutoBevel  76
adding to the Part Library Database  693 Use automatic microjoints  182
generate during output  162, 168 Use CAD file  344
Tolerance  91 Use default AutoTab settings only  28, 56
Tool library  872, 882 Use default exterior leads only  28, 37
Tool recognition tolerance  91 Use default interior leads only  28, 37
Toolbar  927 Use default process parameters only  28, 34
Tooling  85, 369, 875 Use Default Turret Layout  888
Tooling Layout report  549 Use filler parts when calculating utilization  115
Tools may be out of sequence  879 Use kerf width from process parameters  43
Top angle orientation  75 Use long file names  159
Top edge  145 Use microjoints during AutoTab  182
Torch change factor  82 Use plate handler  182
Torch diameter  132 Use programmed microjoints  182
Torch height  77 Use quality to output CAD colors  184
Torch height control  174 Use rotation angle  180
Torch path style  43, 47 Use safety cuts  50
Torch selection  82, 505 Use separate grids for exterior and interior skeleton cuts  147
Torch spacing  82, 299 Use settings from existing '<process name>' process  31
Torch spacing type  82, 299, 505 Use settings instead of rules  125
Torches  82, 299 Use step and repeat  176
changing for a nested part  477 Use straight crop utilization on last nest  115
multiple  477 Use text marker  72, 349
Translation  255 Use values from Process Parameters (*.xls)  50
Traverse along the plate edge between exterior cuts  148 Use work zones  98
Trim leads if they are placed in conflict  132 User drawn leads  67, 520
True area  327, 593, 612 Users
True Bevel  683 basics  939
True Hole  123, 681 managing  262, 942
viewing on nest  674 options  943

- 958 -
 Index: Users and Permissions – Zooming

Users and Permissions

basics  939
Utilization  608, 614
job  289
nest  493
part  327

Validate plate size  159

Vaporize  688
viewing on nest  676
Variable Multi-Head Cutting  83, 505
Variables  442, 921
Vector  350
Versions
checking for new  258
Vertical grid spacing  147
Vertical lines  144
Vertical reposition distance  98
View Single Profile  414
VSP  382
adding  383, 387
assigning cut processes  388
shape reference  384

Warnings  274
Waterjet  690
pierces  318
Webs  152
What's new  2
Width used  612
Wiggle pierce  320
Work Orders  259, 840-843, 845-846
delete  843
edit  843
Work zone length  98
Work zone width  98
Work Zones  98
Working CLC clusters  796

X grid spacing  118, 123

XLS  19, 186-188, 194
XLS report destinations  568

Y grid spacing  118, 123

Yellow Start AutoNest button  503

Zero separation bump  470

Zooming  511

- 959 -